Cubase Elements 11 Operation Manual en

Operation Manual
Cristina Bachmann, Heiko Bischoff, Lillie Harris, Christina Kaboth, Insa Mingers, Matthias Obrecht, Sabine Pfeifer,
Benjamin Schütte, Marita Sladek
This PDF provides improved access for vision-impaired users. Please note that due to the complexity and number
of images in this document, it is not possible to include text descriptions of images.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on
the part of Steinberg Media Technologies GmbH. The software described by this document is subject to a License
Agreement and may not be copied to other media except as specifically allowed in the License Agreement. No
part of this publication may be copied, reproduced, or otherwise transmitted or recorded, for any purpose,
without prior written permission by Steinberg Media Technologies GmbH. Registered licensees of the product
described herein may print one copy of this document for their personal use.
All product and company names are ™ or ® trademarks of their respective owners. For more information, please
visit www.steinberg.net/trademarks.
© Steinberg Media Technologies GmbH, 2020.
All rights reserved.
Cubase Elements_11.0.0_en-US_2021-01-28
Table of Contents
7 New Features 102 Sampler Tracks

105 MIDI Tracks
9 Introduction 109 Group Channel Tracks
9 Platform-Independent Documentation 112 FX Channel Tracks
9 PDF Documents and Online Documentation 115 Ruler Track
10 Conventions 116 Folder Tracks
10 Key Commands 119 More Tracks
12 Setting up Your System 126 Track Handling
12 Studio Setup Dialog 126 Adding Tracks via the Add Track Dialog
13 Setting up Audio 126 Adding Tracks Using Track Presets
20 Setting up MIDI 127 Adding Tracks by Dragging Files from the
23 Synchronizers MediaBay
24 Audio Connections 127 Exporting MIDI Tracks as Standard MIDI Files
24 Audio Connections Window 129 Removing Selected Tracks
25 Renaming the Hardware Inputs and Outputs 129 Removing Empty Tracks
26 Adding Input and Output Busses 129 Moving Tracks in the Track List
27 Presets for Input and Output Busses 129 Renaming Tracks
28 Monitoring Bus 130 Automatically Assigning Colors to New Tracks/
28 Bus Configurations Channels
130 Showing Track Pictures
30 Project Window
132 Setting the Track Height
31 Showing/Hiding Zones
133 Selecting Tracks
31 Project Zone
134 Deselecting Tracks
43 Left Zone
134 Duplicating Tracks
47 Lower Zone
134 Disabling Tracks
52 Right Zone
134 Organizing Tracks in Folder Tracks
57 Keyboard Focus in the Project Window
135 Handling Overlapping Audio
58 Zooming in the Project Window
135 Events Display on Folder Tracks
61 Snap Function
135 Modifying Event Display on Folder Tracks
64 Cross-Hair Cursor
136 Track Presets
65 Edit History Dialog
66 Color Handling 141 Parts and Events
141 Events
74 Project Handling
145 Parts
74 Creating New Projects
146 Editing Techniques for Parts and Events
74 Hub
76 Project Assistant Dialog 159 Range Editing
77 Project Files 159 Creating a Selection Range
77 Template Files 160 Editing Selection Ranges
80 Project Setup Dialog 164 Playback and Transport
83 Opening Project Files 164 Transport Panel
84 Saving Project Files 168 Transport Menu
85 Reverting to the Last Saved Version 173 Transport Bar
85 Choosing a Project Location 178 Transport Pop-Up Window
86 Self-Contained Projects 179 Time Display Window
88 Tracks 180 Left and Right Locators
88 Track Inspector Settings Dialog 182 Setting the Project Cursor
90 Track Controls Settings Dialog 182 Auto-Scroll Settings Menu
95 Add Track Dialog 183 Time Formats
96 Audio Tracks 184 Pre-Roll and Post-Roll
99 Instrument Tracks 185 Punch In and Punch Out
3
Cubase Elements 11.0.0
Table of Contents
185 Metronome Click 348 Time Stretch Algorithms

190 Chase 348 Standard
191 On-Screen Keyboard 349 Limitations
191 Recording MIDI With the On-Screen Keyboard 350 Audio Functions
192 On-Screen Keyboard Options 350 Detect Silence Dialog
193 Recording 353 Spectrum Analyzer Window
193 Basic Recording Methods 355 Statistics Window
197 Monitoring 357 Sample Editor
199 Audio Recording Specifics 359 Sample Editor Toolbar
203 MIDI Recording Specifics 363 Info Line
211 Remaining Record Time 363 Overview Line
211 Lock Record 364 Sample Editor Inspector
213 Importing Audio and MIDI Files 365 Ruler
213 Audio File Import 365 Waveform Display
220 MIDI File Import 367 Range Editing
369 Regions List
222 Quantizing MIDI and Audio 371 Snap Point
222 Quantize Functions
223 Quantizing MIDI Event Starts 373 Hitpoints
224 Quantizing MIDI Event Lengths 373 Calculating Hitpoints
224 Quantizing MIDI Event Ends 376 Locating to Hitpoints in the Project Window
224 Quantizing Audio Event Starts 377 Slices
225 Quantize Panel 379 Creating a Groove Quantize Map
379 Creating Markers
232 Fades and Crossfades 379 Creating Regions
232 Event-Based Fades 380 Creating Events
236 Creating Clip-Based Fades 380 Creating MIDI Notes
237 Crossfades
240 Auto Fades and Crossfades 382 Tempo Matching Audio
382 Algorithm Presets
243 Arranger Track 382 Stretching Audio Events to the Project Tempo
243 Adding Arranger Events on the Arranger Track 383 Musical Mode
244 Arranger Editor
247 Setting up an Arranger Chain and Adding 384 Audio Part Editor
Events 385 Audio Part Editor Toolbar
249 Jump Mode 389 Info Line
250 Arranging Music to Video 389 Ruler
390 Lanes
252 Markers 390 Operations
252 Position Markers
252 Cycle Markers 393 Sampler Tracks
253 Markers Window 393 Loading Audio Samples into Sampler Control
257 Marker Track 394 Loading MIDI Parts into Sampler Control
258 Importing and Exporting Markers 394 Creating Sampler Tracks
395 Sampler Control
260 MixConsole 409 Sample Editing and Playback Functions
260 MixConsole in Lower Zone 413 Transferring Samples from Sampler Control to
261 MixConsole Window VST Instruments
309 Audio Effects 415 Pool
309 Insert Effects and Send Effects 415 Pool Window
311 Insert Effects 420 Working with the Pool
316 VST Effect Selector
317 Send Effects 433 MediaBay and Media Rack
321 Side-Chaining 433 Media Rack in Right Zone
326 Dither Effects 444 MediaBay Window
326 Effect Control Panel 462 Working with Volume Databases
330 Effect Presets 464 MediaBay Settings
335 System Component Information Window 466 Automation
337 Direct Offline Processing 466 Recording your Actions
338 Direct Offline Processing Workflow 466 Automation Curves
338 Direct Offline Processing Window 467 Static Value Line
342 Built-In Audio Processes 467 Write/Read Automation
347 Key Commands for Direct Offline Processing 467 Writing Automation Data
470 Editing Automation Events
474 Automation Tracks
4
Table of Contents
476 VST Instruments 541 Extracting MIDI Automation

476 Adding VST Instruments 542 Reversing the Playback Order of MIDI Events
477 VST Instrument Control Panel 542 Inverting the Order of Selected MIDI Events
479 VST Instrument Selector 543 MIDI Editors
479 Creating Instrument Tracks 543 Common MIDI Editor Functions
479 VST Instruments in the Right Zone 550 Controller Display
480 VST Instruments Window 570 Key Editor
480 VST Instruments Window Toolbar 586 Key Editor Operations
481 VST Instrument Controls 599 Score Editor
483 Presets for Instruments 605 Score Editor Operations
485 Playing Back VST Instruments 612 Drum Editor
487 Latency 624 Drum Editor Operations
488 Import and Export Options 627 Drum Maps
489 VST Quick Controls 632 Chord Functions
491 Side-Chaining for VST Instruments 632 Chord Track
493 Installing and Managing VST Plug-ins 633 Chord Events
493 Plug-ins and Collections 638 Scale Events
496 Adding New Plug-in Collections 640 Voicings
497 Hiding Plug-ins 643 Converting Chord Events to MIDI
498 Reactivating Plug-ins from the Blocklist 644 Controlling MIDI Playback Using the Chord
499 Track Quick Controls Track
500 Parameter Assignment 648 Assigning Voices to Notes
503 Controlling Automatable Parameters 648 Extracting Chord Events from MIDI
504 Connecting Track Quick Controls with Remote 649 Recording Chord Events with a MIDI Keyboard
Controllers 650 Chord Pads
506 Remote Controlling Cubase 650 Chord Pads Zone
506 Connecting Remote Devices 653 Functions Menu
506 Removing the Remote Input from All MIDI 653 Chord Assistant
Inputs 655 Chord Assignment
507 Setting up Remote Devices 657 Swapping Chord Assignments
509 Remote Devices and Automation 657 Copying Chord Assignments
510 Assigning Commands to Remote Devices 658 Playing Back and Recording Chords
511 Generic Remote Page 661 Player Setup
515 Remote Control Editor 665 Chord Pads Setup Dialog
520 VST Quick Controls 669 Chord Pads Presets
670 Creating Chord Events from Chord Pads
521 MIDI Realtime Parameters 670 Creating MIDI Parts from Chord Pads
521 MIDI Track Parameters
521 MIDI Modifiers 671 Editing Tempo and Time Signature
526 Transpose and Velocity on the Info Line 671 Project Tempo Modes
671 Tempo Track Editor
527 Using MIDI Devices 674 Tempo Changes for Projects
527 Program Change Messages and Bank Select 675 Setting up a Fixed Project Tempo
Messages 677 Beat Calculator
528 Patch Banks 678 Set Definition from Tempo Dialog
528 MIDI Device Manager 679 Time Signature Events
533 MIDI Functions 680 Export Audio Mixdown
533 Transpose Setup Dialog 680 Export Audio Mixdown Dialog
534 Merging MIDI Events into a New Part 687 Mixing Down to Audio Files
535 Dissolve Part Dialog 687 File Formats
537 Repeating MIDI Events of Independent Track
Loops 693 Synchronization
537 Extending MIDI Notes 693 Master and Slave
538 Fixing MIDI Note Lengths 694 Timecode Formats
538 Fixing MIDI Note Velocities 695 Clock Sources
539 Rendering Sustain Pedal Data to Note Lengths 696 Project Synchronization Setup Dialog
539 Deleting Overlaps 701 External Synchronization
539 Editing Velocity 702 VST System Link
540 Deleting Double Notes 702 Setting up VST System Link
540 Deleting Controller Data 707 Activating VST System Link
541 Deleting Continuous Controller Data 709 Application Examples
541 Restricting Polyphonic Voices
541 Thinning Out Controller Data
5
Table of Contents
713 Video
713 Video File Compatibility
714 Frame Rates
714 Video Output Devices
715 Preparations for Creating Video Projects
717 Preparations for Video Playback
719 Editing Video
720 Export Video
723 Extracting Audio from Video
724 ReWire
724 Enabling ReWire Applications
725 Launching and quitting
726 Activating ReWire channels
726 Using the transport and tempo controls
727 How the ReWire channels are handled
727 Routing MIDI via ReWire
728 Considerations and limitations
729 Key Commands
729 Key Commands Dialog
731 Assigning Key Commands
731 Searching for Key Commands
732 Removing Key Commands
732 Saving Key Commands Presets
732 Loading Key Command Presets
732 Resetting Key Commands
733 Default Key Commands
743 Setting up Tool Modifier Keys
745 Customizing
745 Setup Options
747 Windows Dialog
748 Where are the Settings Stored?
748 Safe Mode Dialog
751 Optimizing Audio Performance
751 Performance Aspects
752 Settings That Affect Performance
752 Audio Performance Window
753 ASIO-Guard
755 Preferences
755 Preferences Dialog
757 Editing
761 Editors
762 Event Display
765 General
766 MIDI
769 MediaBay
770 Metering
770 Record
772 Transport
773 User Interface
775 VST
776 Video
778 Index
6
New Features
Cubase comes with many new features. The following list informs you about the most important
improvements and provides links to the corresponding descriptions.
New Features in Version 11.0.0

Highlights
Squasher
● This dynamic plug-in combines up and down compression for up to three bands. Use it to
help your lead sounds cut through the mix, tame aggressive bass lines, or enhance subtle,
spacey reverberation. The plug-in is described in the separate document Plug-in
Reference. See Squasher.
Easy Side-Chaining
● Quickly and easily set up side-chaining to make space in mixes or create distinctive effects.
See Side-Chaining.
Sampler Track Improvements

● The sampler track comes with a number of great new features. The new slicing mode chops
up your loops so they’re ready-to-play with just a click. There are now two global LFOs
available to add motion and interesting effects. You can go for a vintage feel or the highest
fidelity with the sample engine’s new quality modes. And the new mono legato glide is
perfect for typical 808 basslines and more. See Sampler Tracks.
Pitchbend and Controller Editing Improvements

● You can select whether you want ramps or steps as the default type for new controller
events. See Controller Lane Setup Menu.
● You can copy all of your CC edits to another track. See Controller Lane Context Menu.
● You can set your pitchbend steps to semitones to always be perfectly in tune. See
Pitchbend Controller Lanes.
● You can create ramps and curves in the CC and pitchbend lanes, just like you are used to
with automation. See Creating Smooth Transitions between Continuous Controller Events.
● You can delete MIDI notes with a simple, fast double-click. See Deleting Note Events.
Scale Assistant in the Key Editor

● The Scale Assistant is a superb addition to your songwriting toolkit. You can set your
song’s scale in the Key Editor and follow its lead, quantize a solo to scale or play live in
perfect tune. You can change the view to only see the notes of the set scale. You can even
let the Scale Assistant analyze your MIDI recording and suggest the right scale. Now there
are no more excuses for wrong notes. See Scale Assistant in the Key Editor.
Variable DPI on Windows 10

● Cubase now supports more scaling settings for Windows 10, such as 125 %, 150 %, and
250 %. Even plug-ins that do not support HiDPI can now be scaled based on the scaling
factor of Windows. See General.
7
New Features
More New Features

Marker Lines
● Vertical marker lines are shown on all tracks to indicate marker positions on all tracks
throughout the entire project. See Markers.
Last but Not Least

Keyboard Focus Indication for Divided Track Lists
● When working with the Divide Track List feature, it is now clearly indicated which of the
track lists has the keyboard focus. See Keyboard Focus in the Project Window.
Details View for Maximizer Channel Strip Module

● The Maximizer channel strip module now offers a details view in the Channel Settings
window. See Maximizer – Details View.
Support of Multiple Side-Chain Inputs

● For plug-ins that support multiple side-chain inputs, for example, Squasher, you can now
set up an individual side-chain routing for any of these inputs. This allows you to control
each plug-in side-chain input with a different side-chain source. See Side-Chain Routing.
Poly Pressure Lane Handling Improvements

● Selecting and editing poly pressure events on the controller lane is much more intuitive
now. See Adding Poly Pressure Events.
Define the Visible Pitches in the Key Editor

● You can define which pitches are visible in the event display and the piano keyboard display
of the Key Editor. See Showing Specific Pitches in the Key Editor.
8
Introduction
This is the Operation Manual for Steinberg’s Cubase. Here you will find detailed information
about all the features and functions in the program.
Platform-Independent Documentation
The documentation applies to the operating systems Windows and macOS.
Features and settings that are specific to one of these platforms are clearly indicated. In all other
cases, the descriptions and procedures in the documentation are valid for Windows and macOS.
Some points to consider:
● The screenshots are taken from Windows.

● Some functions that are available on the File menu on Windows can be found in the
program name menu on macOS.
PDF Documents and Online Documentation

The documentation consists of several documents. You can read them online or download them
from steinberg.help.
You can reach steinberg.help from the program by selecting Help > Cubase Help.
Operation Manual
The main Cubase reference documentation, with detailed descriptions of operations,
parameters, functions, and techniques.
Plug-in Reference
Describes the features and parameters of the included VST plug-ins and VST
instruments.
Remote Control Devices

Lists the supported MIDI remote control devices.
Groove Agent SE
Describes the features and parameters of the included VST instrument Groove Agent
SE.
HALion Sonic SE
Describes the features and parameters of the included VST instrument HALion Sonic
SE.
Steinberg Library Manager

Describes how you can register and manage your VST Sound libraries.
9
Introduction
Conventions
Conventions
In our documentation, we use typographical and markup elements to structure information.
Typographical Elements
The following typographical elements mark the following purposes.
Prerequisite
Requires you to complete an action or to fulfill a condition before starting a
procedure.
Procedure
Lists the steps that you must take to achieve a specific result.
Important
Informs you about issues that might affect the system, the connected hardware, or
that might bring a risk of data loss.
Note
Informs you about issues that you should consider.
Tip
Adds further information or useful suggestions.
Example
Provides you with an example.
Result
Shows the result of the procedure.
After Completing This Task

Informs you about actions or tasks that you can perform after completing the
procedure.
Related Links
Lists related topics that you can find in this documentation.
Markup
Bold text indicates the name of a menu, option, function, dialog, window, etc.
EXAMPLE
To open the Functions menu, click Functions Menu in the top right corner of the MixConsole.
If bold text is separated by a greater-than symbol, this indicates a sequence of different menus
to open.
EXAMPLE
Select Project > Add Track.
Key Commands
Many of the default key commands, also known as keyboard shortcuts, use modifier keys, some
of which are different depending on the operating system.
When key commands with modifier keys are described in this manual, they are indicated with the
Windows modifier key first, followed by the macOS modifier key and the key.
10
Introduction
Key Commands
EXAMPLE
Ctrl/Cmd-Z means: press Ctrl on Windows or Cmd on macOS, then press Z.
11
Setting up Your System
To use Cubase, you must set up your audio, and if required, your MIDI system.
Studio Setup Dialog

The Studio Setup dialog allows you to set up your connected audio, MIDI, and remote control
devices.
● To open the Studio Setup dialog, select Studio > Studio Setup.
The following options are available:
Add Device
Allows you to manually add devices such as a Note Expression Input Device, an
additional Time Display device, or specific remote control devices.
Remove
Allows you to remove manually added devices.
Reset
Resets all remote control devices in the Devices list.
Devices list
Select a device in the Devices list to show its settings in the right section.
12
Setting up Audio
Setting up Audio
You must set up your audio equipment before you can use it in Cubase.
IMPORTANT
Make sure that all equipment is turned off before making any connections.
Simple Stereo Input and Output Setup

If you only use a stereo input and output from Cubase, you can connect your audio hardware, for
example, the inputs of your audio card or your audio interface, directly to the input source and
the outputs to a power amplifier and speaker.
Audio Connections
Your system setup depends on many different factors, for example, on the kind of project that
you want to create, on the external equipment that you want to use, or on the computer
hardware that is available to you. Therefore, the following sections can only serve as examples.
How to connect your equipment, that is, whether to use digital or analog connections also
depends on your setup.
Recording Levels and Inputs

When you connect your equipment, make sure that the impedance and levels of the audio
sources and inputs are matched. Using the correct type of input is important to avoid distortion
or noisy recordings. For example, different inputs can be used, such as consumer line level (-10
dBV) or professional line level (+4 dBu).
Sometimes, you can adjust input characteristics on the audio interface or on its control panel. For
details, refer to the documentation that came with the audio hardware.
IMPORTANT
Cubase does not provide any input level adjustments for the signals that are coming into your
audio hardware, since these are handled differently for each card. Adjusting input levels is either
done in a special application that is included with the hardware or its control panel.
13
Setting up Audio
Word Clock Connections

If you are using a digital audio connection, you may also need a word clock connection between
the audio hardware and external devices. For details, refer to the documentation that came with
the audio hardware.
IMPORTANT
Set up word clock synchronization correctly, or you may experience clicks and crackles in your
recordings.
Selecting an Audio Driver

By selecting an audio driver, you allow Cubase to communicate with the audio hardware.
Normally, when you start Cubase, a dialog opens that prompts you to select a driver, but you can
also select your audio hardware driver as described below.
NOTE
On Windows operating systems, we recommend that you access your hardware via an ASIO
driver developed specifically for the hardware. If no ASIO driver is installed, contact the
manufacturer of your audio hardware for information on available ASIO drivers. If no specific
ASIO driver is available, you can use the Generic Low Latency ASIO driver.
PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > Studio Setup.
2. In the Devices list, select Audio System.
3. Open the ASIO Driver pop-up menu and select your audio hardware driver.
4. Click OK.
Setting up Audio Hardware

You must select and set up your audio hardware in the Studio Setup dialog before you can use
it.
PREREQUISITE
You have selected a driver for your audio hardware.
PROCEDURE
2. In the Devices list, select your audio hardware driver.
3. Do one of the following to open the control panel for your audio hardware:
● On Windows, click Control Panel.
● On macOS, click Open Config App.
This button is available only for some hardware products. If it is not available in your
setup, refer to the documentation of your audio hardware.
NOTE
The control panel is provided by the manufacturer of your audio hardware and is different
for each audio interface brand and model. However, control panels for the Generic Low
Latency ASIO Driver (Windows only) are provided by Steinberg.
14
Setting up Audio
4. Set up your audio hardware as recommended by the manufacturer.
Audio System Page

On the Audio System page you can select an ASIO driver for your audio hardware.
● To open the Audio System page, select Studio > Studio Setup and select Audio System in
the Devices list.
ASIO Driver
Allows you to select a driver.
Release Driver when Application is in Background

Releases the driver and allows other applications to play back via your audio
hardware even though Cubase is running.
Input Latency
Shows the input latency of the audio hardware.
Output Latency
Shows the output latency of the audio hardware.
ASIO-Guard Latency
Shows the ASIO-Guard latency.
HW Sample Rate
Shows the sample rate of your audio hardware.
HW Pull Up/Down
Shows the pull up/down status of the audio hardware.
In the Advanced Options section, the following options are available:
Set to Defaults
Allows you to restore the default settings.
15
Setting up Audio
Processing Precision
Allows you to set the audio processing precision to 32 bit float or 64 bit float.
Depending on this setting, all channels are processed and mixed in 32-bit floating-
point or 64-bit floating-point format.
NOTE
A processing precision of 64 bit float can increase CPU load and memory
consumption.
To show all plug-ins that support 64-bit float processing, open the VST Plug-in
Manager and activate Show Plug-ins That Support 64-Bit Float Processing in the
Display Options pop-up menu.
NOTE
VST 2 plug-ins and instruments are always processed with 32-bit precision.
Activate Multi Processing

Allows you to distribute the processing load evenly to all available CPUs. This way,
Cubase can make full use of the combined power of multiple processors.
Activate ASIO-Guard
Activates the ASIO-Guard. This is only available if Activate Multi Processing is
activated.
ASIO-Guard Level
Allows you to set the ASIO-Guard level. The higher the level, the higher the
processing stability and audio processing performance. However, higher levels also
lead to an increased ASIO-Guard latency and memory usage.
Audio Priority (Windows only)

This setting should be set to Normal if you work with audio and MIDI. If you do not
use MIDI at all, you can set this to Boost.
Activate Steinberg Audio Power Scheme

If this option is activated, all power safe modes that have an impact on real time
processing are deactivated. Note that this is only effective for very low latencies, and
that it increases the power consumption.
Disk Preload
Allows you to specify how many seconds of audio are preloaded into RAM prior to
starting playback. This allows for smooth playback.
Adjust for Record Latency

If this is activated, the plug-in latencies are taken into account during recording.
Record Shift
Allows you to shift the recordings by the specified value.
In the general section, the following options are available:
Reset
Resets the selected remote device.
Apply
Applies the settings.
16
Setting up Audio
RELATED LINKS
VST Plug-in Manager Window on page 494
ASIO Driver Setup Page

This page allows you to set up your ASIO driver.
● To open the page where you can set up the ASIO driver, select Studio > Studio Setup and
select the audio driver in the Devices list.
Control Panel
Opens the control panel for the audio hardware.
Input Latency
Shows the input latency of the audio driver.
Output Latency
Shows the output latency of the audio driver.
Clock Source
Allows you to select a clock source.
Externally Clocked
Activate this option if you use an external clock source.
Direct Monitoring
Activate this option to monitor via your audio hardware and to control it from
Cubase.
In the Ports section, the following options are available:
Reset
Allows you to reset all port names and visibilities.
17
Setting up Audio
I/O
The port input/output status.
Port System Name

The system name of the port.
Show As
Allows you to rename the port. This name is used in the Input Routing and Output
Routing pop-up menus.
Visible
Allows you to activate/deactivate audio ports.
State
The state of the audio port.
Reset
Apply
Using External Clock Sources

If you are using an external clock source, Cubase must be notified that it receives external clock
signals and derives its speed from that source.
PROCEDURE
3. Activate Externally Clocked.
RESULT
Cubase now derives its speed from the external source.
NOTE
For proper audio playback and recording, you must set the sample rate of the project to the
sample rate of the incoming clock signals.
When a sample rate mismatch occurs, the Record Format field on the Project window status line
is highlighted in a different color. Cubase accepts a sample rate mismatch, and playback is
therefore faster or slower.
Using Several Audio Applications Simultaneously

You can allow other applications to play back via your audio hardware even though Cubase is
running.
PREREQUISITE
Other audio applications accessing the audio hardware are set to release the audio driver.
PROCEDURE
18
Setting up Audio
3. Activate Release Driver when Application is in Background.
RESULT
The application that has the focus gets access to the audio hardware.
Audio Hardware Configuration

Most audio cards provide one or more small applications that allow you to customize your
hardware.
The settings are normally gathered on a control panel that can be opened from within Cubase or
separately, when Cubase is not running. For details, refer to the audio hardware documentation.
Settings include:
● Selecting which inputs/outputs are active.

● Setting up word clock synchronization.
● Turning on/off monitoring via the hardware.
● Setting levels for each input.
● Setting levels for the outputs so that they match the equipment that you use for
monitoring.
● Selecting digital input and output formats.
● Making settings for the audio buffers.
Setting up Input and Output Ports

Once you have selected the driver for your audio hardware and have set it up, you must specify
which inputs and outputs to use.
PREREQUISITE
You have selected a driver for your audio hardware.
PROCEDURE
3. Make your changes.
4. Click OK.
RELATED LINKS
ASIO Driver Setup Page on page 17
Audio Bus Setup

Cubase uses a system of input and output busses to transfer audio between the program and
the audio hardware.
● Input busses let you route audio from the inputs of your audio hardware into Cubase. This
means that audio is always recorded through one or several input busses.
● Output busses let you route audio from Cubase to the outputs of your audio hardware.
This means that audio is always played back through one or several output busses.
19
Setting up MIDI
Once you have set up the internal input and output busses, you can connect your audio source,
for example, a microphone, to your audio interface and start recording, playing back, and
mixing.
RELATED LINKS
Audio Connections on page 24
Monitoring
In Cubase, monitoring means listening to the input signal while recording.
The following ways of monitoring are available:
● Externally by listening to the signal before it reaches Cubase.

● Via Cubase.
● By using ASIO Direct Monitoring.
This is a combination of the other methods.
RELATED LINKS
External Monitoring on page 197
Monitoring via Cubase on page 197
ASIO Direct Monitoring on page 198
Setting up MIDI
You must set up your MIDI equipment before you can use it in Cubase.
IMPORTANT
Turn off all equipment before making any connections.
PROCEDURE
1. Connect your MIDI equipment (keyboard, MIDI interface, etc.) to your computer.
2. Install the drivers for your MIDI equipment.
RESULT
You can use your MIDI equipment in Cubase.
MIDI Connections
To play back and record MIDI data from your MIDI device, for example, a MIDI keyboard, you
need to connect the MIDI ports.
Connect the MIDI output port of your MIDI device to the MIDI input port of your audio hardware.
This way, the MIDI device sends MIDI data to be played back or recorded inside your computer.
Connect the MIDI input port of your MIDI device to the MIDI output port of your audio hardware.
This way, you can send MIDI data from Cubase to the MIDI device. For example, you can record
your own playing, edit the MIDI data in Cubase, and then play it back on the keyboard and record
the audio that is coming out of the keyboard for a better edited performance.
20
Setting up MIDI
Showing or Hiding MIDI Ports

You can show the MIDI ports that you want to use and hide those that you do not use on the
MIDI pop-up menus in the program.
PROCEDURE
2. In the Devices list, select MIDI Port Setup.
3. To hide a MIDI port, deactivate its Visible column.
4. Click OK.
Setting up All MIDI Inputs

When you record MIDI, you can specify which MIDI input each recording MIDI track should use.
However, you can also record any MIDI data from any MIDI input. You can specify which inputs
are included when you select All MIDI Inputs for a MIDI track.
PROCEDURE
3. Activate In ‘All MIDI Inputs’ for a port.
NOTE
If you have a MIDI remote control unit connected, make sure to deactivate the In ‘All MIDI
Inputs’ option for that MIDI input. This avoids accidental recording of data from the
remote control when All MIDI Inputs is selected as input for a MIDI track.
4. Click OK.
RESULT
When you select All MIDI Inputs on the Input Routing pop-up menu of a MIDI track in the
Inspector, the MIDI track uses all MIDI inputs that you specified in the MIDI Port Setup.
MIDI Port Setup Page

The MIDI Port Setup page in the Studio Setup dialog displays the connected MIDI devices and
allows you to set up their ports.
● To open the MIDI Port Setup page, select Studio > Studio Setup and activate MIDI Port
Setup in the Devices list.
21
Setting up MIDI
The following columns are displayed:
Device
The connected MIDI devices.
I/O
The port input/output status.
Port System Name

The system name of the port.
Show As
Allows you to rename the port. This name is used in the Input Routing and Output
Routing pop-up menus.
Visible
Allows you to activate/deactivate MIDI ports.
State
The state of the MIDI port.
In 'All MIDI Inputs'

Allows you to record MIDI data from all MIDI inputs.
NOTE
Deactivate this option if you use remote control devices.
Use System Timestamp for 'Windows MIDI' Inputs

Activate this option if you have persistent timing problems such as shifted notes. If
this is activated, the system timestamp is used as a time reference.
Use Device 'DirectMusic'

If you do not use a device with a DirectMusic device driver, you can leave this option
deactivated. This enhances the system performance.
22
Synchronizers
Use System Timestamp for 'DirectMusic' Inputs

Activate this option if you have persistent timing problems such as shifted notes. If
this is activated, the system timestamp is used as a time reference.
Reset
Apply
Plug and Play Support for USB MIDI Devices

Cubase supports plug and play of USB MIDI devices. These devices can be plugged in and
switched on while the application is running.
Synchronizers
When using Cubase with external tape transports, you most likely must add a synchronizer to
your system.
IMPORTANT
Make sure that all equipment is turned off before making any connections.
For information on how to connect and set up your synchronizer, refer to the documentation of
your synchronizer.
RELATED LINKS
Synchronization on page 693
23
Audio Connections
To play back and record in Cubase, you must set up input and output busses in the Audio
Connections window.
The bus types that you need depend on your audio hardware, on your general audio setup, and
on the projects that you use.
Audio Connections Window

The Audio Connections window allows you to set up input and output busses.
● To open the Audio Connections window, select Studio > Audio Connections.
Inputs/Outputs Tab
The Inputs and Outputs tabs allow you to set up and configure input and output busses.
The following options are available above the bus list:
Add Bus
Opens the Add Input Bus dialog, where you can create a new bus configuration.
Presets
Opens the Presets pop-up menu, where you can select bus configuration presets.
Store allows you to save a bus configuration as preset. Delete deletes the selected
preset.
Expand All/Collapse
Expands/Collapses all busses in the bus list.
The following columns are available for the bus list:
Bus Name
Lists the busses. Click the name of a bus to select or rename it.
Speakers
Indicates the speaker configuration (mono, stereo) of each bus.
Audio Device
Shows the selected ASIO driver.
24
Audio Connections
Renaming the Hardware Inputs and Outputs
Device Port
Shows which physical inputs/outputs on your audio hardware are used by the bus.
Expand the bus entry to show all speaker channels. If the bus entry is collapsed, only
the first port that is used by this bus is visible.
The Device Port pop-up menu displays how many busses are connected to a given
port. The busses are shown in square brackets next to the port name.
Up to 3 bus assignments can be displayed in this way. If more connections have been
made, this is indicated by a number at the end of the port name.
For example, “Adat 1 [Stereo1] [Stereo2] [Stereo3] (+2)” means that the Adat1 port is
already assigned to 3 stereo busses plus 2 additional busses.
Renaming the Hardware Inputs and Outputs

Before you set up busses, you should rename the default inputs and outputs of your audio
hardware. This allows transferring projects between different computers and setups.
For example, if you move your project to another studio, the audio hardware may be of a
different model. But if you and the other studio owner have agreed on identical names for your
inputs and outputs, Cubase corrects inputs and outputs for your busses.
NOTE
If you open a project that was created on another computer and the port names do not match or
the port configuration is not the same, the Missing Ports dialog appears. This allows you to
manually re-route ports that are used in the project to ports that are available on your computer.
PROCEDURE
3. Open the ASIO Driver pop-up menu and select your audio hardware driver.
5. In the Show As column, click on a port name and enter a new name.
6. Repeat the previous step until you have renamed all required ports.
7. Click OK.
RELATED LINKS
Re-Routing Missing Ports on page 84
Hiding Ports
You can hide ports that you are not using. Hidden ports are not displayed in the Audio
Connections window.
PROCEDURE
3. In the Visible column, deactivate the ports that you want to hide.
4. Click OK.
25
Audio Connections
Adding Input and Output Busses
Activating and Deactivating Ports (macOS only)

On macOS you can specify which input and output ports are active. This allows you to use the
microphone input instead of the line input or to deactivate the audio card input or output.
NOTE
This function is only available for built-in audio, standard USB audio devices, and a certain
number of other audio cards.
PROCEDURE
3. Click Control Panel.
4. Activate/Deactivate ports.
5. Click OK.
Adding Input and Output Busses

You must add input and output busses to establish the connection between your audio hardware
and Cubase.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Audio Connections dialog, click the Inputs or Outputs tab.
2. Click Add Bus.
3. In the Add Input Bus dialog, configure the bus.
4. Optional: Enter a name for the bus.
If you do not specify a name, the bus is named according to the channel configuration.
5. Click Add Bus.
The new bus is added to the bus list.
6. For each of the speaker channels in the bus, click in the Device Port column and select a
port of your audio hardware.
Setting the Default Output Bus (Main Mix)

The Main Mix is the default output bus to which each new audio, group, or FX channel is
automatically routed. If only one bus is available, this bus is automatically used as the default
output bus.
PREREQUISITE
Add an output bus.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Audio Connections dialog, right-click the output bus that you want to use as default
output bus.
2. Select Set <bus name> as Main Mix.
26
Audio Connections
Presets for Input and Output Busses
RESULT
The selected bus is used as default bus. The Main Mix is indicated by a speaker icon next to its
name.
RELATED LINKS
Inputs/Outputs Tab on page 24
Presets for Input and Output Busses

For input and output bus configurations, you can use different kinds of presets.
● A number of standard bus configurations.

● Automatically created presets tailored to your specific hardware configuration.
On startup, Cubase analyzes the physical inputs and outputs that are provided by your
audio hardware and creates a number of hardware-dependent presets.
● Your own presets.
NOTE
You can create default presets for input and output bus configurations. If you create a new
empty project, these default presets are applied. To create default presets, save your preferred
input and output bus configurations under the name Default. If you have not defined default
presets, the last used input and output bus configuration is applied when creating a new empty
project.
Saving a Bus Configuration Preset

You can save your own input and output bus configuration as presets.
PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > Audio Connections.
2. Click the Inputs or Outputs tab, and set up your bus configuration.
3. Click Store.
4. In the Type in Preset Name dialog, enter a name.
5. Click OK.
RESULT
The preset is available in the Presets menu.
Deleting a Bus Configuration Preset

You can delete bus configuration presets that you no longer need.
PROCEDURE
2. Click the Inputs or Outputs tab, and from the Presets menu, select the preset that you
want to delete.
3. Click Delete.
RESULT
The preset is deleted.
27
Audio Connections
Monitoring Bus
Monitoring Bus
The default output bus (Main Mix) is used for monitoring. You can adjust the monitoring level in
the MixConsole.
RELATED LINKS
Setting the Default Output Bus (Main Mix) on page 26
MixConsole on page 260
Bus Configurations
After you have set up all the required busses for a project you can edit the names and change
port assignments. The bus configuration is saved with the project.
Removing Busses
You can remove busses that you no longer need.
PROCEDURE
● In the Audio Connections window, do one of the following:
● To remove a single bus, right-click the bus in the list and select Remove Bus.
Alternatively, you can select the bus and press Backspace.
● To remove multiple input or output busses at the same time, use Shift or Ctrl/Cmd
to select them in the list, right-click them, and select Remove Selected Busses.
Changing Port Assignments

You can change the port assignment of busses.
PROCEDURE
2. Do one of the following:
● To change the assignment of a single bus, open the Device Port pop-up menu, and
select a new port.
● To assign subsequent busses to several selected busses, open the Device Port pop-
up menu for the first selected entry, press Shift, and select a device port.
● To assign the same port to several selected busses, open the Device Port pop-up
menu for the first selected entry, press Shift-Alt/Opt, and select a device port.
Renaming Multiple Busses

You can rename all the selected busses at once using incrementing numbers or letters.
PROCEDURE
2. Select the busses that you want to rename.
● Enter a new name for one of the busses, followed by a number.
● Enter a new name for one of the busses, followed by a space and a capital letter.
28
Audio Connections
Bus Configurations
4. Press Return.
RESULT
The busses are renamed automatically using either incrementing numbers or letters.
NOTE
The renaming starts from the bus where you edit the name until the bottom, and then continues
from the top until all selected busses have been renamed.
Exclusive Port Assignments

For certain channel types, the port assignment is exclusive.
Once a port has been assigned to such a bus or channel, it must not be assigned to another bus,
otherwise the connection to the first bus will be broken.
The corresponding ports are marked in the Audio Connections window on the Device Port pop-
up menu.
29
Project Window
The Project window provides an overview of the project, and allows you to navigate and perform
large scale editing.
Each project has one Project window. The Project window is displayed whenever you open or
create a new project.
● To open a project, select File > Open.

● To create a new project, select File > New Project.
The Project window is divided into several zones:
1 Left Zone
The left zone shows the Inspector that features two tabs:
● The Track tab shows the settings for the track that is selected in the track list.
NOTE
In this documentation we use Inspector to refer to the Track tab of the Inspector.
● The Editor tab shows the settings for the editor that is open in the lower zone.
30
Project Window
Showing/Hiding Zones
●
2 Project Zone
The project zone shows the toolbar, the track list with the tracks, the event display with the
parts and events of the project, and the Project window ruler.
On the toolbar, you can activate/deactivate the status line, the info line, the overview line,
and the Transport Bar.
3 Lower Zone
The lower zone shows the Chord Pads, the Editor, the Sampler Control, and the
MixConsole.
4 Right Zone
The right zone shows the VSTi rack, and the Media rack.
RELATED LINKS
Project Zone on page 31
Left Zone on page 43
Lower Zone on page 47
Right Zone on page 52
Project Window Toolbar on page 32
Showing/Hiding Zones
You can show/hide the zones in the Project window according to your needs.
PROCEDURE
● Do one of the following:
● To show/hide the left zone, click Show/Hide Left Zone on the Project window
toolbar.
● To show/hide the lower zone, click Show/Hide Lower Zone on the Project window
toolbar.
● To show/hide the right zone, click Show/Hide Right Zone on the Project window
toolbar.
NOTE
The project zone is always shown.
RELATED LINKS
Project Zone
The project zone is the heart of the Project window and cannot be hidden.
The project zone features the track list and the event display with the ruler. Furthermore, you can
activate/deactivate the status line, the info line, the overview line, and the Transport Bar for the
project zone.
31
Project Window
Project Zone
RELATED LINKS
Track List on page 38
Event Display on page 39
Global Track Controls on page 39
Ruler on page 40
Status Line on page 41
Info Line on page 42
Overview Line on page 42
Transport Bar on page 42
Project Window Toolbar

The toolbar contains tools and shortcuts for opening other windows and various project settings
and functions.
● To show/hide tools, open the toolbar context menu by right-clicking in an empty area of
the toolbar and activate the tools that you want to display. To show all tools, select Show
All.
NOTE
The number of elements that are shown also depends on the size of the Project window
and the screen resolution.
Activate Project
NOTE
Only available if more than one project is open.
Activates a project.
Project History
Undo/Redo
Undoes/Redoes actions in the Project window.
32
Project Window
Project Zone
Constrain Delay Compensation

Minimizes the latency effects of the delay compensation.
Left Divider
Left Divider
Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are always shown.
Media & MixConsole Windows

Open MediaBay
Opens/Closes the MediaBay.
Open Pool Window
Opens/Closes the Pool window.
Open MixConsole
Opens/Closes the MixConsole.
State Buttons
Deactivate All Mute States
Deactivates all mute states.
Deactivate All Solo States
Deactivates all solo states.
Activate/Deactivate Read for All Tracks
Activates/Deactivates read automation for all tracks.
Activate/Deactivate Write for All Tracks
Activates/Deactivates write automation for all tracks.
Auto-Scroll
Auto-Scroll
Keeps the project cursor visible during playback.
Select Auto-Scroll Settings
Allows you to activate Page Scroll or Stationary Cursor and to activate Suspend
Auto-Scroll When Editing.
33
Project Window
Project Zone
Locators
Go to Left Locator Position
Allows you to go to the left locator position.
Left Locator Position
Shows the left locator position.
Go to Right Locator Position
Allows you to go to the right locator position.
Right Locator Position
Shows the right locator position.
Transport Controls
Go to Previous Marker/Zero
Moves the project cursor to the previous marker/zero position on the timeline.
Go to Next Marker/Project End
Moves the project cursor to the next marker/project end.
Rewind
Moves backward.
Forward
Moves forward.
Activate Cycle
Activates/Deactivates cycle mode.
Stop
Stops playback.
Start
Starts playback.
Transport Record
Activates/Deactivates record mode.
34
Project Window
Project Zone
Tool Buttons
Object Selection
Selects events and parts.
Range Selection
Selects ranges.
Draw
Draws events.
Erase
Erases events.
Split
Splits events.
Glue
Glues events together.
Mute
Mutes events.
Zoom
Zooms in. Hold Alt/Opt and click to zoom out.
Line
Creates a series of contiguous events.
Play
Allows you to play back events.
Color
Allows you to colorize events.
Color Menu
Select Color for Selected Tracks or Events
Opens the Colorize pane that allows you to colorize the selected tracks or events.
35
Project Window
Project Zone
Nudge Palette
Trim Start Left
Increases the length of the selected event by moving its start to the left.
Trim Start Right
Decreases the length of the selected event by moving its start to the right.
Move Left
Moves the selected event to the left.
Move Right
Moves the selected event to the right.
Trim End Left
Decreases the length of the selected event by moving its end to the left.
Trim End Right
Increases the length of the selected event by moving its end to the right.
Snap
Snap to Zero Crossing
Restricts editing to zero crossings, that is, positions where the amplitude is zero.
Snap On/Off
Restricts horizontal movement and positioning to the positions specified by the Snap
Type.
Snap Type
Allows you to specify to what positions you want events to snap.
Grid Type
Grid Type
Allows you to specify a grid type for the Snap function. This setting only has effect if
Snap Type is set to one of the grid options.
Quantize
Apply Quantize
Applies the quantize settings.
36
Project Window
Project Zone
Quantize Presets
Allows you to select a quantize preset.
Soft Quantize On/Off
Activates/Deactivates soft quantize.
Open Quantize Panel
Opens the Quantize Panel.
System Performance Meter

Shows the meters for average audio processing load and the disk cache load.
Right Divider
Right Divider
Tools that are placed to the right of the divider are always shown.
Window Zone Controls

Show/Hide Left Zone
Shows/Hides the left zone of the window.
Show/Hide Lower Zone
Shows/Hides the lower zone of the window.
Show/Hide Right Zone
Shows/Hides the right zone of the window.
Set up Window Layout
Allows you to set up the window layout.
Set up Toolbar
Set up Toolbar
Opens a pop-up menu where you can set up which toolbar elements are visible.
RELATED LINKS
Left/Right Toolbar Divider on page 38
Snap Types Menu on page 62
Markers on page 252
Automation on page 466
Synchronization on page 693
37
Project Window
Project Zone
Left/Right Toolbar Divider

The left and right toolbar dividers allow you to lock the position of specific tools at the left or at
the right side of the toolbar, so that they are always shown.
All other items are shown in the center of the toolbar. When you reduce the width of the Project
window, these toolbar items are hidden successively. When you increase the width, they are
shown again.
Toolbox
The toolbox makes the editing tools from the toolbar available at the mouse pointer position. It
can be opened instead of the standard context menus in the event display and editors.
● To activate the toolbox function, activate Show Toolbox on Right-Click in the Preferences
dialog (Editing—Tools page).
● To open the toolbox, right-click in the event display or editor.
If Show Toolbox on Right-Click is deactivated, the context menu opens.
● To open the context menu instead of the toolbox, press any modifier key and right-click in
the event display or editor.
If Show Toolbox on Right-Click is deactivated, press any modifier key to open the toolbox
instead of the context menu.
Track List
The track list shows the tracks that are used in the project. When a track is added and selected, it
contains name fields and settings for this track.
● To decide which controls are visible for each track type, right-click the track list and open
the Track Controls Settings dialog.
RELATED LINKS
Track Controls Settings Dialog on page 90
Dividing the Track List

You can divide the track list into an upper track list and a lower track list. These track lists can
have independent zoom and scroll controls. Dividing the track list is useful if you are working
with a video track and multi-track audio, for example. It allows you to place the video track in the
upper track list and to scroll the audio tracks separately in the lower track list, so that they can be
arranged with the video.
PROCEDURE
● Select Project > Divide Track List.
● Click Divide Track List in the top right corner of the Project window below the
ruler.
38
Project Window
Project Zone
RESULT
The track list is divided and video, marker, or arranger tracks are automatically moved to the
upper track list. All other track types are moved to the lower track list.
NOTE
The area of the project zone that has the focus, is indicated by a highlighted and solid focus
frame,whereas the non-active area is shown with a dashed frame.
AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK

● To move any type of track from the lower track list to the upper and vice versa, right-click it
in the track list and select Toggle Track List from the context menu.
● To resize the upper part of the track list, click and drag the divider between the track list
sections.
● To revert to a single track list, click Divide Track List again.
RELATED LINKS
Keyboard Focus in the Project Window on page 57
Event Display
The event display shows the parts and events that are used in the project. They are positioned
along the timeline.
Global Track Controls

The global track controls allow you to manage the tracks in the track list.
● The global track controls are shown above the track list.
39
Project Window
Project Zone
1 Add Track
Opens the Add Track dialog.
2 Use Track Preset
Allows you to add a track using a track preset.
Ruler
The ruler shows the timeline and the display format of the project.
Initially, the Project window ruler uses the display format that is specified in the Project Setup
dialog.
● To select an independent display format for the ruler, click the arrow button to the right of
the ruler and select an option from the pop-up menu.
● To set the display format globally for all windows, use Select Primary Time Format pop-
up menu on the Transport panel, or hold down Ctrl/Cmd and select a format in any ruler.
RELATED LINKS
Project Setup Dialog on page 80
Ruler Display Format Menu

You can select a display format for the ruler.
● To show the ruler display formats, click the arrow button to the right of the ruler.
The selection that you make affects the time display formats in the following areas:
● Ruler
● Info line
● Tooltip position values
Bars+Beats
Sets the ruler to display bars, beats, sixteenth notes, and ticks. By default, there are
120 ticks per sixteenth note. To change this, adjust the MIDI Display Resolution
setting in the Preferences dialog (MIDI page).
40
Project Window
Project Zone
Seconds
Sets the ruler to display hours, minutes, seconds, and milliseconds.
Timecode
Sets the ruler to display hours, minutes, seconds, and frames. The number of frames
per second (fps) is set in the Project Setup dialog with the Project Frame Rate pop-
up menu. To display subframes, activate Show Timecode Subframes in the
Preferences dialog (Transport page).
Samples
Sets the ruler to display samples.
Time Linear
Sets the ruler linear to time.
Bars+Beats Linear
Sets the ruler linear to bars and beats.
Status Line
The status line shows the most important project settings.
● To activate the status line, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar and activate Status
Line.
The following information is shown on the status line:
Audio Inputs/Audio Outputs

These fields are shown if the audio device ports are not connected. Click to open the
Audio Connections dialog and connect the ports.
Max. Record Time

Displays the remaining time for recording, depending on your project settings and
the available hard disk space. Click in this field to display the remaining record time
in a separate window.
Record Format
Displays the sample rate and the bit depth used for recording. Click in this field to
open the Project Setup dialog.
Project Frame Rate

Displays the frame rate used in the project. Click in this field to open the Project
Setup dialog.
Project Pan Law

Displays the current pan law setting. Click in this field to open the Project Setup
dialog.
RELATED LINKS
41
Project Window
Project Zone
Info Line
The info line shows information about the event or part that you selected in the project zone.
To activate the info line, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar and activate Info Line.
RELATED LINKS
Value Editing Rules on the Info Line

You can edit almost all event or part data on the info line using regular value editing.
If you select several events or parts, the info line is shown in another color and only the
information about the first item in the selection is displayed. The following rules apply:
● Value changes are applied to all selected elements, relative to the current values.
For example, you have selected two audio events. The first event has a length of 1 bar, the
second of 2 bars. If you change the info line value to 3, the first event is resized to 3 bars
and the second event to 4 bars.
● Value changes are applied absolutely to the current values if you press Ctrl/Cmd while
modifying the value on the info line.
In the example above, both events are resized to 3 bars.
NOTE
To change the modifier, select a new modifier in the Info Line category of the Preferences
dialog (Editing—Tool Modifiers page).
Overview Line
The overview line allows you to zoom and navigate to other sections in the project.
To activate the overview line, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar and activate Overview.
In the overview line, events and parts are displayed as boxes. A rectangle indicates the section of
the project that is displayed in the event display.
● To zoom the event display in or out horizontally, resize the rectangle by dragging the
edges.
● To navigate to another section of the event display, drag the rectangle to the left or right,
or click in the upper part of the overview.
RELATED LINKS
Transport Bar
The Transport Bar allows displaying the transport functions in an integrated and fixed zone of
the Project window.
● To activate the Transport Bar, click Set up Window Layout on the Project window toolbar
and activate Transport Bar.
42
Project Window
Left Zone
● To show/hide tools, open the Transport Bar context menu by right-clicking in an empty
area of the Transport Bar and activate the tools that you want to display. To show all tools,
select Show All.
RELATED LINKS
Common Record Modes Menu on page 196
Audio Record Modes on page 201
MIDI Record Modes on page 207
Left/Right Toolbar Divider on page 38
Left Zone
The left zone of the Project window allows you to display the Inspector.
To show/hide the left zone, click Show/Hide Left Zone on the Project window toolbar.
● Inspector
RELATED LINKS
Inspector on page 43
Inspector
The Inspector allows you to show controls and parameters for either the selected track in the
track list or the event or part that is shown in the editor in the lower zone.
● To show/hide the Inspector, click Show/Hide Left Zone in the Project window toolbar.
43
Project Window
Left Zone
The following tabs are available:
Track
Opens the Track Inspector for the selected track.
Editor
Opens the Editor Inspector for the event or part that is shown in the editor in the
lower zone.
RELATED LINKS
Opening the Track Inspector on page 44
Opening the Editor Inspector on page 45
Opening the Editor in the Lower Zone on page 50
Opening the Track Inspector

The Track Inspector shows controls and parameters for the selected track in the track list.
PROCEDURE
1. Click Show/Hide Left Zone on the Project window toolbar to activate the Left Zone.
2. At the bottom of the left zone, click the Track tab.
44
Project Window
Left Zone
RESULT
The Track Inspector for the selected track opens. If more than one track is selected in the track
list, the controls and parameters for the topmost selected track are shown.
NOTE
In this documentation we use Inspector to refer to the Track tab of the Inspector.
Opening the Editor Inspector

The Editor Inspector shows controls and parameters for the event or part that is shown in the
editor in the lower zone.
PREREQUISITE
The Sample Editor, the Audio Part Editor, the Key Editor, the Drum Editor, or the Score Editor
is shown in the lower zone.
PROCEDURE
1. Click Show/Hide Left Zone on the Project window toolbar to activate the Left Zone.
2. At the bottom of the left zone, click the Editor tab.
45
Project Window
Left Zone
RESULT
The Editor Inspector for the event or part opens.
NOTE
The Editor Inspector only contains information if the lower zone shows an editor. Otherwise, it is
empty.
RELATED LINKS
Inspector Sections
The Track tab and the Editor tab of the Inspector are divided into a number of sections that
each contain different controls for the track, event or part.
Not all Inspector sections are shown by default. The available sections depend on the type of the
selected track, event, or part, and on the settings in the setup dialog for the Track tab and the
Editor tab of the Inspector.
● To open/close sections, click their names.

Opening one section closes the other sections.
● To open a section without closing the other sections, Ctrl/Cmd-click the section name.
RELATED LINKS
Track Inspector Settings Dialog on page 88
Inspector Sections on page 89
Audio Track Inspector on page 98
Instrument Track Inspector on page 101
MIDI Track Inspector on page 107
Sampler Track Inspector on page 104
46
Project Window
Lower Zone
Arranger Track Inspector on page 120

Marker Track Inspector on page 123
Video Track Inspector on page 124
Key Editor Inspector on page 579
Drum Editor Inspector on page 621
Sample Editor Inspector on page 364
Lower Zone
The lower zone of the Project window allows you to display specific windows and editors in an
integrated and fixed zone of the Project window. This is useful if you work on single screen
systems and notebooks, for example.
To show/hide the lower zone, click Show/Hide Lower Zone on the Project window toolbar.
The lower zone features the following tabs: Chord Pads, MixConsole, Sampler Control, and
Editor.
To close the lower zone, click Close Lower Zone to the left of the tabs.
RELATED LINKS
Opening Chord Pads on page 48
Opening the MixConsole in the Lower Zone on page 49
Opening Sampler Control on page 49
Setting up the Lower Zone

In the lower zone, the MixConsole, Editor, Sampler Control, and Chord Pads tabs are shown.
You can change their order, and you can hide tabs that you do not need.
PROCEDURE
1. Click Set up Lower Zone in the bottom right of the lower zone.
47
Project Window
Lower Zone

● Activate/Deactivate the options in the pop-up menu to show/hide tabs in the lower
zone.
● Select Setup to open a dialog where you can activate/deactivate the tabs and
change their position.
NOTE
In the Presets section of this dialog you can also save a preset of your
configuration.
RESULT
The tabs in the lower zone are shown according to your configuration.
RELATED LINKS
Setup Dialog on page 746
Opening Chord Pads

Chord Pads allow you to play with chords, and to change their voicings and tensions.
PROCEDURE
1. Click Show/Hide Lower Zone on the Project window toolbar to activate the lower zone.
2. At the bottom of the lower zone, click the Chord Pads tab.
RESULT
The Chord Pads are opened.
48
Project Window
Lower Zone
RELATED LINKS
Chord Pads on page 650
Setting up the Lower Zone on page 47
Opening the MixConsole in the Lower Zone

The MixConsole in the lower zone allows you to perform all basic mixing procedures from within
the lower zone of the Project window, and at the same time to see the context of your tracks and
events.
PROCEDURE
2. At the bottom of the lower zone, click the MixConsole tab.
RESULT
The MixConsole is opened in the lower zone.
RELATED LINKS
MixConsole in Lower Zone on page 260
Opening Sampler Control

Sampler Control allows you to display and edit the waveform of an audio sample on a sampler
track.
PROCEDURE
2. At the bottom of the lower zone, click the Sampler Control tab.
49
Project Window
Lower Zone
RESULT
Sampler Control is opened.
RELATED LINKS
Sampler Tracks on page 393
Opening the Editor in the Lower Zone

The Editor in the lower zone allows you to perform event editing procedures from within the
lower zone of the Project window, and at the same time to see the context of your tracks and
events.
NOTE
By default, double-clicking an audio event/part or a MIDI part in the event display or selecting it
and pressing Return opens the corresponding editor in the lower zone of the Project window.
Using a menu command opens a separate editor window. You can change this in the
Preferences dialog (Editors page).
PROCEDURE
2. At the bottom of the lower zone, click the Editor tab.
3. In the event display, do one of the following:
● Select a MIDI part.
● Select an audio event.
● Select an audio part.
50
Project Window
Lower Zone
RESULT
Depending on your event or part selection, the lower zone shows either the Audio Part Editor,
the Sample Editor, or one of the MIDI editors.
NOTE
To change the default MIDI editor, select MIDI > Set up Editor Preferences, and select an option
from the Default MIDI Editor pop-up menu.
NOTE
If you open the editor and no event or part is selected, the editor in the lower zone is empty.
RELATED LINKS
Selecting a different MIDI Editor on page 51
Selecting a different MIDI Editor

You can display the MIDI part that is opened in the editor in the lower zone in a different MIDI
editor. You can do this without changing the default MIDI editor.
PROCEDURE
1. On the Editor tab in the editor in the lower zone, click Select MIDI Editor.
2. Select an editor from the pop-up menu.
51
Project Window
Right Zone
RESULT
The MIDI part is displayed in the selected editor.
NOTE
This selection is temporary. Next time you open the MIDI part, the default MIDI editor is used.
Right Zone
The right zone of the Project window allows you to display the VSTi rack and the Media rack.
To show/hide the right zone, click Show/Hide Right Zone on the Project window toolbar.
The top of the right zone features the following tabs: VSTi and Media.
52
Project Window
Right Zone
NOTE
You can show/hide specific tabs in the right zone by right-clicking a tab and activating/
deactivating the options in the context menu.
RELATED LINKS
VSTi Rack in the Right Zone on page 53
Media Rack in the Right Zone on page 56
Opening the VSTi Rack in the Right Zone

You can show the VSTi rack in the right zone of the Project window. This allows you to add and
edit VST instruments, and at the same time to see the context of your tracks and events.
PROCEDURE
1. Click Show/Hide Right Zone on the Project window toolbar to activate the Right Zone.
2. At the top of the right zone, click the VSTi tab.
RESULT
The VSTi rack is opened in the right zone of the Project window.
RELATED LINKS
VSTi Rack in the Right Zone on page 53
VST Instruments on page 476
VSTi Rack in the Right Zone

The VSTi rack in the right zone of the Project window allows you to add and edit VST instruments
in the context of the Project window.
The following sections are available:
53
Project Window
Right Zone
● Track
Shows the associated VST instrument for an instrument track.
● Rack
Shows a VST instrument.
The following controls are available:
Add Track Instrument
Opens the Add Track dialog that allows you to select an instrument and add an
instrument track that is associated to this instrument.
Find Instruments
Opens a selector that allows you to find a loaded instrument.
Set Remote-Control Focus for VST Quick Controls to Previous Instrument
Allows you to set the remote-control focus to the previous instrument.
Set Remote-Control Focus for VST Quick Controls to Next Instrument
Allows you to set the remote-control focus to the next instrument.
Show/Hide all VST Quick Controls
Shows/Hides the default quick controls for all loaded instruments.
Settings
Opens the Settings pop-up menu where you can activate/deactivate the following
modes:
● Show VST Quick Controls for One Slot Only shows the VST Quick Controls
exclusively for the selected instrument.
● MIDI Channel follows track selection ensures that the Channel selector
follows the MIDI track selection in the Project window. Use this mode if you
work with multitimbral instruments.
● Remote-Control Focus for VST Quick Controls follows track selection
ensures that the VST Quick Controls remote-control focus follows the track
selection.
RELATED LINKS
VST Instruments Window on page 480
Opening the Media Rack in the Right Zone

You can show the Media rack in the right zone of the Project window. This allows you to see the
context of your tracks and events when you drag audio events, MIDI parts, presets, or
instruments into the Project window.
PROCEDURE
1. Click Show/Hide Right Zone on the Project window toolbar to activate the Right Zone.
2. At the top of the right zone, click the Media tab.
54
Project Window
Right Zone
RESULT
The Media rack is opened in the right zone of the Project window.
RELATED LINKS
Media Rack in the Right Zone on page 56
MediaBay and Media Rack on page 433
55
Project Window
Right Zone
Media Rack in the Right Zone

The Media rack in the right zone of the Project window allows you to drag audio events, MIDI
parts, or instrument presets into the event display. It lists Steinberg factory content and any
installed Steinberg content sets.
The Media rack Home tab shows the following tiles:
VST Instruments
Shows all included VST instruments.
VST Effects
Shows all included VST effects.
Loops & Samples

Shows audio loops, MIDI loops, or instrument sounds ordered by content set.
Presets
Shows the track presets, strip presets, FX chain presets, and VST FX presets.
User Presets
Shows track presets, strip presets, pattern banks, FX chain presets, VST FX presets,
and instrument presets that are listed in the User folder.
Favorites
Shows your favorite folders and allows you to add new favorites. The folder content
is automatically added to the MediaBay database.
File Browser
Shows your file system and the pre-defined folders Favorites, This Computer, VST
Sound, Factory Content, and User Content where you can search for media files
and access them immediately.
56
Project Window
Keyboard Focus in the Project Window
RELATED LINKS
Media Rack in Right Zone on page 433
Keyboard Focus in the Project Window

The different zones in the Project window can be controlled by using key commands. To make
sure that a key command has effect on a specific zone, you must make sure that this zone has
the keyboard focus.
The following Project window zones can have the keyboard focus:
● Project zone
NOTE
If you activate Divide Track List, the area of the project zone that has the focus is
indicated by a highlighted and solid focus frame, whereas the non-active area is shown
with a dashed frame.
● Left zone
● Lower zone
● Right zone
If a zone has the keyboard focus, the border that surrounds it is highlighted in a specific color.
NOTE
You can change the focus color in the Preferences dialog (User Interface—Color Schemes
page).
RELATED LINKS
Project Zone on page 31
Left Zone on page 43
Lower Zone on page 47
Right Zone on page 52
Project Window on page 30
Dividing the Track List on page 38
Activating Keyboard Focus for a Zone

You can activate the keyboard focus for a zone by clicking with the mouse and by using key
commands.
PROCEDURE
● To activate any zone, click in it.
57
Project Window
Zooming in the Project Window
● To activate the next zone, press Tab. This allows you to cycle forward through the
zones.
● To activate the previous zone, press Shift-Tab.
NOTE
The editor in the lower zone automatically gets the keyboard focus if you double-click an
event or part in the event display, if you select an event or part and press Return, or if you
use key commands to open the zone.
RESULT
The keyboard focus is activated for this zone and the border of the zone is highlighted.
NOTE
The project zone and the lower zone have separate toolbars and info lines. If you use the toolbar
or the info line for one of these zones, the corresponding zone automatically gets the focus.
RELATED LINKS

You can zoom in the Project window according to the standard zoom techniques.
NOTE
If screen redraws are slow on your system, consider activating Quick Zoom in the Preferences
dialog (Editing page).
Zooming Horizontally
● Select the Zoom tool and click in the event display to zoom in. To zoom out, hold down
Alt/Opt and click.
● Use the horizontal zoom sliders to zoom in and out.
● Click the lower half of the ruler and drag down to zoom in horizontally. Click the lower half
of the ruler and drag up to zoom out horizontally.
● Click H to zoom in horizontally. Click G to zoom out horizontally.
NOTE
If the Grid Type in the Project window toolbar is set to Adapt to Zoom, the horizontal zoom
level affects the grid and snap resolution in the event display.
Zooming Vertically
● Select the Zoom tool, click in the event display, and drag a selection rectangle to zoom in
vertically and horizontally.
NOTE
For this to work, you must deactivate the Zoom Tool Standard Mode: Horizontal
Zooming Only option in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Tools page).
● Use the vertical zoom sliders to zoom in and out. If you have made any individual track
height adjustments, the relative height differences are maintained.
58
Project Window
● Click Shift-H to zoom in vertically. Click Shift-G to zoom out vertically.
RELATED LINKS
Zoom Submenu on page 59
Zoom Presets on page 60
Zooming in on Cycle Markers on page 61
Zoom History on page 61
Grid Type Menu on page 63
Zooming in on Audio Contents

You can zoom in vertically on the contents of audio parts and events. This is useful when viewing
quiet audio passages.
PROCEDURE
● Click the waveform zoom slider in the top right corner of the event display and drag up.
RESULT
The contents of audio parts and events in your project are zoomed in vertically.
To get an approximate reading on the level of the audio events by viewing the waveforms, zoom
out by dragging the slider all the way down again. Otherwise, zoomed waveforms may be
mistaken for clipped audio.
Zoom Submenu
The Zoom submenu contains options for zooming in the Project window.
● To open the Zoom submenu, select Edit > Zoom.
Zoom In/Zoom Out

Zooms in/out one step, centering on the project cursor.
Zoom Full
Zooms out so that the whole project is visible. The whole project means the timeline
from the project start to the length set in the Project Setup dialog.
Zoom to Selection
Zooms in horizontally and vertically so that the current selection fills the screen.
Zoom to Selection (Horiz.)

Zooms in horizontally so that the current selection fills the screen.
Zoom to Event
Zooms in to show the currently selected event. This option is available in the Sample
Editor and in some MIDI editors.
Zoom In Vertically/Zoom Out Vertically

Zooms in/out one step vertically.
59
Project Window
Zoom In Tracks/Zoom Out Tracks

Zooms the selected tracks in/out one step vertically.
Zoom Selected Tracks

Zooms in vertically on the selected tracks and minimizes the height of all other
tracks.
Undo Zoom/Redo Zoom

These options allow you to undo/redo the last zoom operation.
RELATED LINKS
Zoom Submenu on page 366
Zoom Presets
You can create zoom presets that allow you to set up different zoom settings. For example, one
where the whole project is displayed in the Project window and another with a high zoom factor
for detailed editing. The Zoom Presets pop-up menu allows you to select, create, and organize
zoom presets.
● To open the Zoom Presets pop-up menu, click the button to the left of the horizontal
zoom control.
The upper part of the menu lists the zoom presets.
● To save the current zoom setting as a preset, open the Zoom Presets pop-up menu and
select Add. In the Type in Preset Name dialog that opens, type in a name for the preset
and click OK.
● To select and apply a preset, select it from the Zoom Presets pop-up menu.
● To zoom out so that the whole project is visible, open the Zoom Presets pop-up menu and
select Zoom Full.
This displays the project from the Project Start Time to the Project Length that is set in
the Project Setup dialog.
● To delete a preset, open the Zoom Presets pop-up menu and select Organize. In the
dialog that opens, select the preset in the list and click Delete.
● To rename a preset, open the Zoom Presets pop-up menu and select Organize. In the
dialog that opens, select a preset in the list and click Rename. In the dialog that opens,
type in a new name for the preset. Click OK to close the dialogs.
60
Project Window
Snap Function
IMPORTANT
Zoom presets are global for all projects. They are available in all projects that you open or create.
Zooming in on Cycle Markers

You can zoom in on the area between cycle markers in the project.
PREREQUISITE
You have created at least one cycle marker for the project.
PROCEDURE
● Click the button to the left of the horizontal zoom control to open the Zoom Presets pop-
up menu, and select a cycle marker.
The middle part of the pop-up menu lists any cycle markers that you have added to the
project.
RESULT
The event display is zoomed in to encompass the marker area.
RELATED LINKS
Markers Window on page 253
Zoom History
You can undo and redo zoom operations. This way, you can zoom in several steps and then easily
go back to the zoom stage at which you started.
You can undo and redo zoom operations in the following ways:
● To undo zoom, select Edit > Zoom > Undo Zoom or double-click with the zoom tool.
● To redo zoom, select Edit > Zoom > Redo Zoom or press Alt/Opt and double-click with the
zoom tool.
Snap Function
The Snap function helps you to find exact positions when editing in the Project window. It does
this by restricting horizontal movement and positioning to certain positions. Operations affected
by Snap include moving, copying, drawing, sizing, splitting, range selection, etc.
● To activate/deactivate Snap, activate/deactivate Snap on the toolbar.
61
Project Window
Snap Function
Setting the Snap Point

You can set the snap point at any position of the audio event.
PROCEDURE
1. Select an event.
2. Place the project cursor at a position within the selected audio event.
3. Select Audio > Snap Point to Cursor.
RESULT
The snap point is set at the cursor position. The snap point for an event is displayed as a vertical
line in the Project window.
NOTE
You can also set the snap point in the Sample Editor.
RELATED LINKS
Adjusting the Snap Point on page 372

When splitting and sizing audio events, sudden amplitude changes can cause pops and clicks. To
avoid this, you can activate Snap to Zero Crossing to snap to points where the amplitude is zero.
● To activate Snap to Zero Crossing, activate Snap to Zero Crossing on the toolbar.
Snap Types Menu

You can select between different snap types to determine the snap point.
● To open the Snap Type pop-up menu, click Snap Type on the toolbar.
The following snap types are available:
Grid
If this option is activated, the snap points are set with the Grid Type pop-up menu.
The options depend on the display format that is selected for the ruler.
If you select Seconds as ruler format, time-based grid options are available.
If you select Bars+Beats as ruler format, musical grid options are available.
Grid Relative
If this option is activated, events and parts are not magnetic to the grid. Rather, the
grid determines the step size for moving the events. This means that a moved event
keeps its original position relative to the grid.
For example, if an event starts at the position 3.04.01, Snap is set to Grid Relative,
and Grid Type is set to Bar, you can move the event in steps of one bar to the
positions 4.04.01, 5.04.01, and so on.
NOTE
This only applies when dragging existing events or parts. When you create new
events or parts, this Snap Type works like Grid.
62
Project Window
Snap Function
Events
If this option is activated, the start and end positions of other events and parts
become magnetic. This means that if you drag an event to a position near the start
or end of another event, it is automatically aligned with the start or end of the other
event.
For audio events, the position of the snap point is also magnetic. This includes
marker events on the marker track.
Shuffle
Shuffle is useful when you want to change the order of adjacent events. If you have
two adjacent events and drag the first one to the right, past the second event, the
two events change places.
The same principle works when changing the order of more than two events.
Cursor
This grid type lets the project cursor become magnetic. Dragging an event near the
cursor causes the event to be aligned with the cursor position.
Grid + Cursor
This is a combination of Grid and Cursor.
Events + Cursor
This is a combination of Events and Cursor.
Events + Grid + Cursor

This is a combination of Events, Grid, and Cursor.
Grid Type Menu

Allows you to specify a grid type that determines the grid and snap resolution in the event
display.
NOTE
This setting only has an effect if Snap Type is set to one of the grid options.
● To open the Grid Type pop-up menu, click Grid Type on the toolbar.
If you select Bars+Beats as ruler format, the following grid types are available:
Bar
Sets the grid and snap resolution to bars.
Beat
Sets the grid and snap resolution to beats.
Use Quantize
Sets the grid and snap resolution to the value that is activated in the Quantize
Presets pop-up menu.
63
Project Window
Cross-Hair Cursor
Adapt to Zoom
Sets the grid and snap resolution to the horizontal zoom level. The more you zoom in
on the event display, the finer the resolution. High zoom levels allow you to snap to
64th notes, low zoom levels allow you to snap to bars.
NOTE
Adapt to Zoom is only available if Bars+Beats is set as ruler display format.
NOTE
You can assign key commands to the grid types in the Key Commands dialog in the Edit
category.
If you activate Time Linear in the ruler context menu, the distances between the grid lines are
still constant but based on musical values such as bars and beats.
If you select Seconds as ruler format, the following grid types are available:
1–ms
Sets the grid and snap resolution to 1–ms.
10–ms
100–ms
1000–ms
RELATED LINKS
Zooming in the Project Window on page 58
Ruler Display Format Menu on page 40
Cross-Hair Cursor
The cross-hair cursor is displayed when working in the Project window and in the editors,
facilitating navigation and editing, especially when arranging large projects.
● You can set up the cross-hair cursor in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Tools page).
You can set up the colors for the line and the mask of the cross-hair cursor, and define its
width.
The cross-hair cursor works as follows:
● When the Object Selection tool or one of its subtools is selected, the cross-hair cursor
appears when you start moving/copying a part/event, or when using the event trim
handles.
Cross-hair cursor when moving an event.
64
Project Window
Edit History Dialog
● When the Object Selection tool, the Split tool, or any other tool that makes use of this
function is selected, the cross-hair cursor appears as soon as you move the mouse over
the event display.
● The cross-hair cursor is only available for tools where such a function is of any use. The
Mute tool, for example, does not use a cross-hair cursor, as you have to click directly on an
event to mute it.
Edit History Dialog

The Edit History dialog contains a list of all your edits. This allows you to undo all actions in the
Project window as well as in the editors.
● To open the Edit History dialog, select Edit > History.
Action
Shows the name of the action.
Time
Shows the time when this action was performed.
State
Shows the state of the action.
Details
Shows further details, and allows you to enter new text.
Separator
Move the separator upwards to undo your actions. To redo an action again, move the
separator down.
NOTE
● You can also undo applied audio processes. However, we recommend to modify or delete
these using the Direct Offline Processing window.
RELATED LINKS
Direct Offline Processing on page 337
Setting the Number of Maximum Undo Steps

You can limit the number of maximum undo steps. This is useful if you run out of memory, for
example.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Preferences dialog, select General.
65
Project Window
Color Handling
2. Set the number in the Maximum Undo Steps field.
Color Handling
You can colorize events and tracks in Cubase. This allows for an easier overview in the Project
window.
RELATED LINKS
Color Picker on page 72
Project Colors Setup Dialog on page 69
Event Colors Menu on page 544
Setting Event Colors to Track Colors on page 69
Colorizing Events on the Fly on page 68
Colorizing Selected Events or Parts on page 67
Resetting the Track Color on page 67
Colorizing Single Tracks on page 67
Colorizing Selected Tracks on page 66
Color Handling on page 66
User Interface - Track & MixConsole Channel Colors on page 774
Automatically Assigning Colors to New Tracks/Channels on page 130
Colorizing Selected Tracks

You can colorize selected tracks.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Project window, deselect all events or parts.
2. Select the tracks that you want to colorize.
3. On the Project window toolbar, select Select Color for Selected Tracks or Events.
The Colorize pane opens.
NOTE
If you want to select colors by names instead, activate the Select Colors by Name option
in the Project Colors Setup dialog (Options page).
4. Select a color.
RESULT
The selected tracks are colorized, and the events and parts get the track color.
NOTE
If you assign a different color to individual events or parts with the Color tool, events or parts no
longer follow color changes of the track.
RELATED LINKS
Options Tab on page 71
66
Project Window
Color Handling
Colorizing Single Tracks

You can colorize single tracks via the Inspector or the track list. This is useful if you want to
ensure that no other tracks, events, or parts are colorized accidentally.
PROCEDURE
● Select the track that you want to colorize, and in the Inspector, click Colorize
Selected Track.
● Ctrl/Cmd-click the left area of the track list.

NOTE
If you want to select colors by names instead, activate the Select Colors by Name option
in the Project Colors Setup dialog (Options page).
2. Select a color.
RESULT
The track is colorized, and any events or parts on that track get the same color.
NOTE
If you assign a different color to individual events or parts with the Color tool, they no longer
follow color changes of the track.
RELATED LINKS
Resetting the Track Color

You can reset the color of a track to the default color.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Project window, select the track that you want to reset to the default color, and
deselect all events or parts.
3. In the Colorize pane, click Set Track Color to Default.
RESULT
The default color is assigned to the selected track.
Colorizing Selected Events or Parts

You can colorize selected events or parts with Select Color for Selected Tracks or Events. By
default, events or parts follow the color of the corresponding track. However, you can overwrite
67
Project Window
Color Handling
this setting and, for example, select the same color for events or parts that reside on different
tracks.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Project window, select all events or parts that you want to colorize.
NOTE
If you want to select colors by names, activate the Select Colors by Name option in the
Project Colors Setup dialog (Options page).
3. Select a color.
RESULT
The selected events are colorized and no longer follow the color changes of the track.
RELATED LINKS
Colorizing Events on the Fly

You can colorize events or parts with the Color tool. By default, events or parts follow the color of
the corresponding track. However, you can overwrite this setting and, for example, select the
same color for events or parts that reside on different tracks.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Project window toolbar, select the Color tool.
2. Do one of the following to select a tool color:
● Alt/Opt-click an event or part to copy its color.
● Move the mouse pointer over the Color tool, and use the mouse wheel to step
through the colors of the current color set.
3. Optional: Select the events or parts that you want to colorize with the Object Selection
tool.
This is only necessary if you want to colorize multiple events or parts.
4. On the Project window toolbar, select the Color tool.
5. Click the events or parts that you want to colorize.
RESULT
The events or parts are colorized and no longer follow color changes of the track.
NOTE
You can also Ctrl/Cmd-click an event or part with the Color tool to open the Colorize pane or to
select colors by names.
RELATED LINKS
Colorizing Selected Events or Parts on page 67
68
Project Window
Color Handling
Setting Event Colors to Track Colors

You can set the color of events or parts to the track color. This is useful if you colorized events or
parts with the Color tool and you want them to follow the track color again.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Project window, select the event or part that you want to set to the track color.
2. On the Project window toolbar, click Select Color for Selected Tracks or Events.
3. In the Colorize pane, click Set Event Color to Track.
RESULT
The track color is assigned to the selected event or part.
RELATED LINKS
Project Colors Setup Dialog

The Project Colors Setup dialog allows you to set up colors for your project.
● To open the Project Colors Setup dialog, select Project > Project Colors Setup.
RELATED LINKS
Color Set Tab on page 70
Presets Tab on page 71
69
Project Window
Color Handling
Color Set Tab

The Color Set tab allows you to change the color set that is used in the project.
Color fields
Click a field to open the Color Picker that allows you to specify a new color.
Name
Shows the name of the color. Double-click to change it.
Set up
Allows you to add or remove color fields.
● Insert Color
Adds a new color field.
● Duplicate Color
Duplicates the selected color field.
● Remove Color
Removes the selected color field.
● Reset Color
Resets the selected color field to the factory settings.
Apply
Applies your changes and closes the dialog.
RELATED LINKS
70
Project Window
Color Handling
Presets Tab
The Presets tab allows you to expand the color set to 24 or even 32 colors or reduce it to 8
colors. You can add tints, and you can sort colors according to their color tint or their basic color.
In the New Color Set Settings section, the following options are available:
Number of Basic Colors

You can set up 8, 16, 24, or 32 basic colors.
Number of Color Tints

You can set up 1, 2, or 4 color tints.
Sort Colors by
Allows you to sort the colors of the color set by their basic color or by their color tint.
The New Color Set section displays the current colors of the new color set.
The Missing Current Project Colors section shows which missing colors will be replaced. Move
the mouse pointer over the color field of a color that is missing to highlight the color that is used
to replace it in the New Color Set section.
Apply
Options Tab
The Options tab allows you to access the color set options.
71
Project Window
Color Handling
In the Color Set Options section, the following options are available:
Store Color Set as Default

Saves the current set of colors as default.
Reset Color Set to Default

Applies the default set of colors.
Reset Color Set to Factory Settings

Returns to the standard color palette.
Select Colors by Name

Allows you to select the colors by name.
Apply
Color Picker
The Color Picker allows you to define new custom colors.
To open the Color Picker, do one of the following:
● Select Project > Project Colors Setup, and in the Project Colors Setup dialog on the Color
Set tab, click a color field.
This allows you to define custom project colors.
● Select Edit > Preferences, select one of the User Interface entries, and click a color field.
This allows you to define custom user interface colors.
Color selectors
Allow you to select a color shade and the nuance of the shade.
Context menu
Allows you to copy, paste, or reset colors.
72
Project Window
Color Handling
Current Color/New Color

Shows the current color and the new color.
Hue/Saturation/Value
Allow you to edit the colors numerically.
Red/Green/Blue
Allow you to edit the colors numerically.
OK
Confirms the color changes.
NOTE
You must restart the application for some changes to take effect.
73
Project Handling
In Cubase, projects are the central documents. You must create and set up a project to work with
the program.
Creating New Projects

You can create empty projects or projects that are based on a template.
PROCEDURE
1. Select File > New Project.
Depending on your settings, either the Hub or the Project Assistant dialog opens.
2. In the location options section, select where to store the new project.
● To use the default location, select Use default location.
● To choose another location, select Prompt for project location.
● To create an empty new project, click Create Empty.
● To create a new project from a template, select a template and click Create.
RESULT
A new, untitled project is created. If you selected a template, the new project is based on this
template and includes the corresponding tracks, events, and settings.
NOTE
If you create an empty project, your default presets for the input and output bus configurations
are applied. If you have not defined default presets, the last used configurations are applied.
RELATED LINKS
Presets for Input and Output Busses on page 27
Hub
Hub keeps you up to date with the latest information and assists you with organizing your
projects.
To open the Hub, do one of the following:
● Select Hub > Open Hub.

● Select File > New Project.
74
Project Handling
Hub
News and Tutorials Section

The News and Tutorials section displays Steinberg news, tutorial videos as well as links to the
user forum, downloads, and the Help Center.
NOTE
Ensure that you have an active Internet connection to access this material.
Projects Section
The Projects section lets you create new projects, which can either be empty or based on a
template. It lets you specify where to save the projects. It also allows you to access recently
opened projects or projects that are stored in other locations. This section offers the same
functionality as the Project Assistant dialog.
Category bar
In this section, the available factory templates are sorted into the predefined
categories Recording, Scoring, Production, and Mastering.
The Recent category contains a list of the recently opened projects.
The More category contains the default project template and all templates that are
not assigned to any of the other categories.
Template list
When you click on one of the category items, the list below the category bar shows
the available templates for this category. Any new templates that you create are
added at the top of the corresponding list.
Location options
This section allows you to specify where the project is stored.
Open Other
This button allows you to open any project file on your system. This is identical to
using the Open command on the File menu.
RELATED LINKS
Project Assistant Dialog on page 76
75
Project Handling
Project Assistant Dialog
Deactivating the Hub

To start Cubase or to create new projects without the Hub, you can deactivate it.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Preferences dialog, select General.
2. Deactivate Use Hub.
RESULT
Cubase starts without opening a project and opens the Project Assistant dialog when you create
a new project using the File menu. However, you can still open the Hub through the Hub menu.
Project Assistant Dialog

The Project Assistant dialog assists you with organizing your projects.
● To open the Project Assistant dialog, deactivate Use Hub in the Preferences dialog
(General page), and select File > New Project.
Category bar
In this section, the available factory templates are sorted into the predefined
categories Recording, Production, Scoring, and Mastering.
The Recent category contains a list of the recently opened projects.
The More category contains the default project template and all templates that are
not assigned to any of the other categories.
76
Project Handling
Project Files
Template list
When you click on one of the category items, the list below the category bar shows
the available factory templates for this category. Any new templates that you create
are added at the top of the corresponding list.
Location options
This section allows you to specify where the project is stored.
Open Other
This button allows you to open any project file on your system. This is identical to
using the Open command from the File menu.
Project Files
A project file (extension *.cpr) is the central document in Cubase. A project file contains
references to media data that can be saved in the project folder.
NOTE
We recommend to save files only in the project folder, even though you can save them in any
other location to which you have access.
The project folder contains the project file and the following folders that Cubase automatically
creates when necessary:
● Audio
● Edits
● Images
● Track Pictures
Template Files
Templates can be a good starting point for new projects. Templates are projects where you can
save all settings that you regularly use, such as bus configurations, sample rates, record formats,
basic track layouts, VSTi setups, drum map setups, etc.
The following template types are available from within the Hub:
● Factory templates for specific scenarios. These are listed in the Recording, Scoring,
Production, or Mastering categories.
● The default template. This is listed in the More category.
● Any new user templates that you create and save. These are listed in the More category.
Template projects are not saved in project folders and therefore contain no subfolders and no
media files.
● To open the location of a specific template, right-click a template in the template list and
select Show in Explorer (Windows only) or Reveal in Finder (macOS only).
Save As Template Dialog

The Save As Template dialog allows you to save projects as templates.
● To open the Save As Template dialog, select File > Save As Template.
77
Project Handling
Template Files
The following options are available in the Current Presets section:
New Folder
Allows you to add and name a folder to the template list.
Template list
Lists the templates and the folders.
The following options are available in the Attribute Inspector section:
Value
Click this field to enter a description for the Content Summary attribute, or to select
a template category for Template Category attribute.
The following options are available in the New Preset section:
New Preset
Allows you to enter a name for the new project template.
Show Attribute Inspector

Allows you to show/hide the Attribute Inspector.
78
Project Handling
Template Files
Saving a Project Template File

You can save the current project as a template. When you create a new project, you can select
this template as a starting point for your new project.
PREREQUISITE
You have removed all clips from the Pool. This ensures that references to media data from the
original project folder are deleted.
PROCEDURE
1. Set up a project.
2. Select File > Save as Template.
3. In the New Preset section of the Save as Template dialog, enter a name for the new
project template.
4. In the Attribute Inspector section, double-click the Value field of the Content Summary
attribute to enter a description for the template.
5. Click the Value field of the Template Category attribute and select a template category
from the pop-up menu.
If you do not select a category, the new template will be listed in the Hub in the More
category.
6. Click OK to save the template.
Renaming Templates
You can rename template files from within the Hub or the Project Assistant.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Hub or the Project Assistant, right-click a template and select Rename.
2. In the Rename dialog, enter a new name and click OK.
79
Project Handling
Project Setup Dialog

The Project Setup dialog allows you to make general settings for your project.
● To open the Project Setup dialog, select Project > Project Setup.
● To open the Project Setup dialog automatically when you create a new project, activate
the Run Setup on Create New Project option in the Preferences dialog (General page).
IMPORTANT
While most Project Setup settings can be changed at any time, you must set the sample rate
directly after creating a new project. If you change the sample rate at a later stage, you must
convert all audio files in the project to the new sample rate to make them play back properly.
In the Project Duration section, the following options are available:
Project Start Time

Allows you to specify the start time of the project in timecode format. This also
determines the sync start position when synchronizing to external devices.
Project Length
Allows you to specify the length of the project.
Project Frame Rate

In the Project Frame Rate section, the following options are available:
Project Frame Rate

Allows you to specify the timecode standard and frame rate for the project. When
synchronizing to an external device, this setting must correspond to the frame rate
of any incoming timecode.
Get Frame Rate From Video

Allows you to set the project frame rate to the frame rate of an imported video file.
80
Project Handling
Project Time Displays

In the Project Time Displays section, the following options are available:
Display Format
Allows you to specify the global display format that is used for all rulers and position
displays in the program, except the ruler tracks. However, you can make
independent display format selections for the individual rulers and displays.
Display Time Offset

Allows you to specify an offset for the time positions that are displayed in the rulers
and position displays to compensate for the Project Start Time setting.
Display Bar Offset

This setting is only used if you select the Bars+Beats display format. Allows you to
specify an offset for the time positions that are displayed in the rulers and position
displays to compensate for the Project Start Time setting.
Record File Format

In the Record File Format section, the following options are available:
Sample Rate
Allows you to specify the sample rate at which Cubase records and plays back audio.
● If your audio hardware generates the sample rate internally and you select a
non-supported sample rate, this is indicated by a different color. In this case,
you must set a different sample rate to make your audio files play back
properly.
● If you select a sample rate that your audio hardware supports, but that differs
from its current sample rate setting, it is automatically changed to the project
sample rate.
● If your audio hardware is externally clocked and receives external clock
signals, sample rate mismatches are accepted.
Bit Depth
Allows you to specify the bit depth of the audio files that you record in Cubase. Select
the record format according to the bit depth that is delivered by your audio
hardware. The available options are 16 bit, 24 bit, 32 bit, 32 bit float, and 64 bit float.
NOTE
● If your audio interface supports a bit depth of 32 bit, and you want to maintain
this precision in your recordings, you must select a Processing Precision of
64 bit float in the Studio Setup dialog.
● When you record with effects, consider setting the bit depth to 32 bit float or
64 bit float. This prevents clipping (digital distortion) in the recorded files and
keeps the audio quality very high. Effect processing and level or EQ changes in
the input channel are done in 32-bit float or 64-bit float format, depending on
the Processing Precision setting in the Studio Setup dialog. If you record at
16 bit or 24 bit, the audio will be converted to this lower bit depth when it is
written to a file. As a result, the signal may degrade. This is independent of the
actual bit depth of your audio hardware. Even if the signal from the audio
hardware has a bit depth of 16 bit, the signal will be 32 bit float or 64 bit float
after the effects are added to the input channel.
● The higher the bit depth value, the larger the files and the more strain is put
on the disk system. If this is an issue, you can lower the record format setting.
81
Project Handling
Record File Type

Allows you to specify the file type of the audio files that you record in Cubase.
NOTE
● For wave file recordings larger than 4 GB, the EBU RIFF standard is used. If a
FAT 32 disk is used (not recommended), audio files are split automatically. In
the Preferences dialog, you can specify what happens if your recorded Wave
file is larger than 4 GB.
● You can set up embedded strings in the Preferences dialog.
Project Ownership
In the Project Ownership section, the following options are available:
Author
Allows you to specify a project author that is written into the file, when you export
audio files and activate the Insert iXML chunk option. You can specify a default
author in the Default Author Name field in the Preferences dialog (General—
Personalization page).
Company
Allows you to specify a company name that is written into the file, when you export
audio files and activate the Insert iXML chunk option. You can specify a default
company in the Default Company Name field in the Preferences dialog (General—
Personalization page).
Other Project Settings

In the Other Project Settings section, the following options are available:
Stereo Pan Law

If you pan a channel left or right, the sum of the left and right side is higher (louder),
than if this channel is panned center. These modes allow you to attenuate signals
panned center. 0 dB turns off constant-power panning. Equal Power means that the
power of the signal remains the same regardless of the pan setting.
Volume Max
Allows you to specify the maximum fader level. By default, this is set to +12 dB. If you
load projects that were created with Cubase versions older than 5.5, this value is set
to the old default value of +6 dB.
Hermode Tuning
In the Hermode Tuning section, the following options are available:
HMT Type (MIDI only)

Allows you to specify a mode for Hermode tuning of MIDI notes.
HMT Depth (MIDI only)

Allows you to specify the overall degree of retuning.
Project Location
In the Project Location section, the following options are available:
Project Location information

Displays the project location.
Show in Explorer/Reveal in Finder

Opens a file dialog that shows the location of the project file.
82
Project Handling
Opening Project Files
RELATED LINKS
Audio System Page on page 15
Record - Audio on page 771
Opening Project Files

You can open one or several saved project files at the same time.
IMPORTANT
If you open a project saved with a different program version that contains data for functions that
are not available in your version, this data may be lost when you save the project with your
version.
NOTE
● If you open an external project, the last used view that was saved on your computer is
used.
● External projects are automatically connected to the input and output busses. If you open
a project that was created on a computer with an ASIO port configuration different from
the configuration of your computer, this can result in unwanted audio connections. You
can deactivate the automatic connection of input and output busses in the Preferences
dialog (VST page).
PROCEDURE
1. Select File > Open.
2. In the file dialog that opens, select the project that you want to open and click Open.
3. If there already is an open project, you are asked if you want to activate the new project.
Do one of the following:
● To activate the project, click Activate.
● To open the project without activating it, click No.
This reduces load times for projects.
RELATED LINKS
Do Not Connect Input/Output Busses When Loading External Projects on page 775
Activating Projects on page 83
Activating Projects
If you have several projects opened at the same time in Cubase, only one project can be active.
The active project is indicated by the lit Activate Project button in the upper left corner of the
Project window. If you want to work on another project, you have to activate the other project.
PROCEDURE
● To activate a project, click Activate Project .
NOTE
If you close the active project, you must activate another open project manually as Cubase
can not automatically activate one of the other open projects.
83
Project Handling
Saving Project Files
Opening Recent Projects

You can open recent projects directly from the recent projects list.
PROCEDURE
● In the category bar of the Hub or the Project Assistant dialog, click Recent, select a
project from the projects list, and click Open.
● Select File > Recent Projects and select a recently opened project.
Re-Routing Missing Ports

If you open a Cubase project that was created on a different system with other audio hardware,
Cubase tries to find matching audio inputs and outputs for the input/output busses. If Cubase
cannot resolve all audio/MIDI inputs and outputs that are used in the project, the Missing Ports
dialog opens.
This allows you to manually re-route any ports specified in the project to ports that are available
in your system.
NOTE
To improve the search for matching audio inputs and outputs for the input/output busses, you
should use descriptive, generic names for your input and output ports.
RELATED LINKS
Renaming the Hardware Inputs and Outputs on page 25
Saving Project Files

You can save the active project as a project file. To keep your projects as manageable as possible,
make sure that you save project files and all related files in the respective project folders.
● To save the project and specify a file name and location, open the File menu and select
Save As.
● To save the project with its current name and location, open the File menu and select
Save.
Auto Save
Cubase can automatically save backup copies of all open project files with unsaved changes.
NOTE
Only the project files are backed up. If you want to include the files from the Pool and save your
project in a different location, you must use the Back up Project function.
Cubase can automatically save backup copies of all open projects with unsaved changes. To set
this up, activate the Auto Save option in the Preferences dialog (General page). The backup
copies are named “<project name>-xx.bak” where xx is an incremental number. Unsaved projects
are backed up in a similar way as “UntitledX-xx.bak”, with X being the incremental number for
unsaved projects. All backup files are saved in the project folder.
● To specify the time intervals in which a backup copy is created, use the Auto Save Interval
setting.
84
Project Handling
Reverting to the Last Saved Version
● To specify how many backup files are created with the Auto Save function, use the
Maximum Backup Files option. When the maximum number of backup files is reached,
the existing files are overwritten, starting with the oldest file.
Saving Project Files As a New Version

You can create and activate a new version of an active project file. This is useful if you are
experimenting with edits and arrangements and want to be able to go back to a previous version
at any time.
PROCEDURE
● Select File > Save New Version.
● Press Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-S.
RESULT
The new file is saved with the same name as the original project and an attached incremental
number. For example, if your project is called “My Project”, new versions are called “My
Project-01”, “My Project-02”, and so on.
Reverting to the Last Saved Version

You can return to the last saved version and discard all changes that have been introduced.
PROCEDURE
1. Select File > Revert.
2. In the warning message, click Revert.
If you have recorded or created new audio files since the last version was saved, you are
prompted to delete or keep the files.
Choosing a Project Location

You can specify a project location for saving projects in the Hub and in the Project Assistant.
PROCEDURE
● Select Use default location to create a project in the default project location, and in
the Project folder field, specify a name for the project folder. If you do not specify a
project folder here, the project is saved in a folder named Untitled.
● Click in the path field to change the default project location, and specify the new
default location in the file dialog that opens.
● Activate Prompt for project location to open a file dialog where you can specify the
project folder location.
● Click Create Empty to create a new empty project.
85
Project Handling
Self-Contained Projects
● Select one of the template projects and click Create to create a project based on a
template.
RESULT
The project is created and saved in the specified location.
If you want to share your work or transfer it to another computer, your project must be self-
contained.
The following functions facilitate this task:
● Select Media > Prepare Archive to verify that every clip that is referenced in the project is
located in the project folder, and to take actions if that is not the case.
● Select File > Back up Project to create a new project folder where you can save the project
file and the necessary work data. The original project remains unchanged.
RELATED LINKS
Preparing Archives on page 86
Backing up Projects on page 86
Preparing Archives
The Prepare Archive function allows you to gather all files that are referenced by your project to
ensure that these are in the project folder. This is useful if you want to move or archive your
project.
PROCEDURE
1. Select Media > Prepare Archive.
If your project references external files, you are prompted if you want to copy them to
your working directory. If any processing has been applied, you must decide if you want to
flatten edits.
2. Click Proceed.
RESULT
Your project is ready to be archived. You can move or copy the project folder to another location.
You must copy audio files that reside within the project folder to the Audio folder or save them
separately. You must also move your video clips manually, as videos are only referenced and not
saved in the project folder.
Backing up Projects
You can create a backup copy of your project. Backups only contain the necessary work data. All
media files except the files from VST Sound archives are included as a copy.
PROCEDURE
1. Select File > Back up Project.
2. Select an empty folder or create a new one.
3. Make your changes in the Back up Project Options dialog and click OK.
86
Project Handling
RESULT
A copy of the project is saved in the new folder. The original project remains unaffected.
NOTE
VST Sound content provided by Steinberg is copy-protected and is not included in the backup
project. If you want to use a backup copy that uses VST Sound content on a different computer,
make sure that the corresponding content is also available on that computer.
Back up Project Options Dialog

The Back up Project Options dialog allows you to create a backup copy of your project.
● To open the Back up Project Options dialog, select File > Back up Project.
Project Name
Allows you to change the name of the backed up project.
Keep Current Project Active

Allows you to keep the current project active after clicking OK.
Minimize Audio Files

Allows you to include only the audio file portions that are actually used in the project.
This can significantly reduce the size of the project folder if you are using small
sections of large files. It also means that you cannot use other parts of the audio files
if you continue working with the project in its new folder.
Make Direct Offline Processing Permanent

Allows you to flatten all edits and make all processing and applied effects permanent
to each clip in the Pool.
Remove Unused Files

Allows you to remove unused files and to back up only the files that are actually
used.
Do Not Back up Video

Allows you to exclude video clips on the video track or in the Pool of the current
project.
Do Not Back up Mixdown Folder

Allows you to exclude the Mixdown folder of your project from the backup.
RELATED LINKS
Export Audio Mixdown Dialog on page 680
87
Tracks
Tracks are the building blocks of your project. They allow you to import, add, record, and edit
parts and events. Tracks are listed from top to bottom in the track list and extend horizontally
across the Project window. Each track is assigned to a particular channel strip in the
MixConsole.
If you select a track in the Project window, the controls, settings, and parameters displayed in
the Inspector and the track list allow you to control the track.
Track Inspector Settings Dialog

The Track Inspector Settings dialog allows you to configure for each track type which Inspector
sections are shown. You can also specify the order of the sections.
● To open the Track Inspector Settings dialog, click Set up Inspector, and select Setup
88
Tracks
Track Inspector Settings Dialog
Hidden Items
Displays sections that are hidden in the Inspector.
Visible Items
Displays sections that are visible in the Inspector.
Pin
Activate Pin by clicking the column for a section to exclude this section from being
closed automatically.
Add
Allows you to move an item selected in the hidden sections list to the list of visible
sections.
Remove
Allows you to move an item selected in the visible sections list to the list of hidden
sections.
Move Up/Move Down

Allows you to change the position of an item in the list of visible sections.
Presets
Allows you to save Inspector settings as presets.
Reset All
Allows you to restore the default Inspector settings.
Inspector Sections
Each track type has its basic track settings that are always shown. Apart from these, you can set
up other track-specific Inspector sections in the Track Inspector Settings dialog.
Depending on the track type, you can set up the following Inspector sections:
Chords
Allows you to specify how the track follows the chord track.
Inserts
Allows you to add audio insert effects to the track.
89
Tracks
Track Controls Settings Dialog
Equalizers
Allows you to adjust the EQs for the track. You can have up to four bands of EQs for
each track.
Sends
Allows you to route the track to one or several FX channels.
Fader
Shows a duplicate of the corresponding MixConsole channel.
Notepad
Allows you to enter notes about the track.
Quick Controls
Allows you to configure quick controls to use remote devices, for example.
MIDI Modifiers
Allows you to transpose or adjust the velocity of the MIDI track events in real time
during playback.
Instrument
Shows the audio-related controls for the sampler track.
MIDI Fader
Shows a duplicate of the corresponding MixConsole channel.
RELATED LINKS
Track Inspector Settings Dialog on page 88
Insert Effects on page 311
Send Effects on page 317
Equalizers (EQ) on page 284
Chords Section for MIDI Tracks on page 644
Track Quick Controls on page 499
MIDI Modifiers Section on page 522

The Track Controls Settings dialog allows you to configure which track controls are shown in
the track list. You can also specify the order of controls and group controls so that they are
always shown adjacent to each other.
NOTE
The Track Controls Settings dialog is available for the main track types. Track types that can
only be added once have their fixed set of track-specific controls. In the global Add Track dialog,
these tracks are shown in the More Tracks section. An exception to this are the chord track and
the video track.
● To open the Track Controls Settings dialog, right-click a track in the track list and select
Track Controls Settings from the context menu, or click Open Track Controls Settings
Dialog in the bottom right corner of the track list.
90
Tracks
Track type
Allows you to select the track type to which your settings are applied.
Hidden Controls
Displays controls that are hidden in the track list.
Visible Controls
Displays controls that are visible in the track list.
Width
If you click in this column, you can set the maximum length for the track name.
Group
Displays the group number.
Add
Allows you to move an item selected in the hidden controls list to the list of visible
controls.
Remove
Allows you to move an item selected in the visible controls list to the list of hidden
controls. All controls can be removed except Mute and Solo.
Move Up/Move Down

Allows you to change the order of an item in the list of visible controls.
Group
Allows you to group two or more controls selected in the visible controls list that are
adjacent to each other. This ensures that they are always positioned side by side in
the track list.
91
Tracks
Ungroup
Allows you to ungroup grouped controls in the visible controls list. To remove an
entire group, select the first (topmost) element belonging to this group and click
Ungroup.
Reset
Allows you to restore all default track controls settings for the selected track type.
Controls Area Preview

Shows a preview of the customized track controls.
Presets
Allows you to save track controls settings as presets. To recall a preset, click Switch
Presets in the bottom right corner of the track list. The name of the selected preset
is shown in the left corner.
Controls Area Width

Allows you to determine the width of the track controls area for the selected track
type. In the Controls Area Preview, this area is shown with a frame.
Track Name Width (global)

Allows you to determine the global name width for all track types.
Apply
Applies your settings.
Reset All
Allows you to restore all default track controls settings for all track types.
RELATED LINKS
More Tracks on page 119
Track Controls
You can configure which track controls are shown in the track list.
NOTE
You can only configure track controls for the main track types. Track types that can only be added
once have their fixed set of track-specific controls. In the global Add Track dialog, these tracks
are shown in the More Tracks section. An exception to this are the chord track and the video
track.
The following track controls are always shown:
Mute
Mutes the track.
Solo
Solos the track.
The track name control is available for all track types:
Name
Shows the name of the track. Double-click to rename the track.
92
Tracks
Audio-Related Tracks
The following track controls are specific to audio-related tracks, that is, audio tracks, instrument
tracks, sampler tracks, group channel tracks, FX channel tracks:
Bypass Inserts
Bypasses the inserts for the track.
Bypass EQs
Bypasses the equalizers for the track.
Bypass Sends
Bypasses the sends for the track.
Freeze Channel
Opens a dialog that allows you to set the Tail Size time in seconds.
Channel Configuration
Shows the channel configuration of the track.
MIDI-Related Tracks
The following controls are specific to MIDI-related tracks, that is, MIDI tracks, sampler tracks, and
instrument tracks:
ASIO Latency Compensation
Moves all recorded events on the track by the current latency.
Programs
Allows you to select a program.
Drum Map
Allows you to select a drum map for the track.
Audio- and MIDI-Related Tracks

The following track controls are specific to audio- and MIDI-related tracks:
Record Enable
Activates the track for recording.
Monitor
For audio-related tracks, this routes incoming signals to the selected output.
For MIDI and instrument-related tracks, this allows you to route incoming MIDI
signals to the selected MIDI output. For this to work, activate MIDI Thru Active in
the Preferences dialog (MIDI page).
Edit Channel Settings
93
Tracks
Opens the Channel Settings window for the track.
Read Automation
Allows you to read track automation.
Write Automation
Allows you to write track automation.
Instrument Tracks
The following controls are specific to instrument tracks:
Edit Instrument
Allows you to open the instrument panel.
Instrument
Allows you to select an instrument.
Sampler Tracks
The following controls are specific to sampler tracks:
Open/Close Sampler
Opens/Closes the Sampler Control in the lower zone.
MIDI Tracks
The following controls are specific to MIDI tracks:
Channel
Allows you to specify the MIDI channel.
Output
Allows you to specify the output for the track.
Group/FX/VCA Tracks
The following track controls are specific to group/FX/VCA tracks:
Mute Automation
Deactivates the automation read function for the selected parameter.
Automation parameter
Allows you to select a parameter for automation.
Parameter
Allows you to select a parameter value for automation.
Marker Tracks
The following controls are specific to marker tracks:
94
Tracks
Add Track Dialog
Add Marker
Allows you to add a position marker at the project cursor position. This track control
is always shown.
Add Cycle Marker
Allows you to add a cycle marker at the project cursor position. This track control is
always shown.
Locate
Allows you to move the project cursor to the selected marker position.
Cycle
Allows you to select a cycle marker.
Zoom
Allows you to zoom in a cycle marker.
Add Track Dialog

The Add Track dialog allows you to set up and add tracks.
To open the Add Track dialog, click Add Track in the global track controls area of the track list.
The More Tracks section shows track types that can only be added once.
RELATED LINKS
Add Track Dialog – Audio on page 96
Add Track Dialog – Instrument on page 99
Add Track Dialog – Sampler on page 103
Add Track Dialog – MIDI on page 105
Add Track Dialog – Group Channel on page 109
95
Tracks
Audio Tracks
Add Track Dialog – Effect on page 112

Add Track Dialog – Ruler on page 115
Add Track Dialog – Folder on page 117
More Tracks on page 119
Arranger Track on page 119
Chord Track on page 121
Video Track on page 124
Marker Track on page 123
Audio Tracks
You can use audio tracks for recording and playing back audio events and audio parts. Each
audio track has a corresponding audio channel in the MixConsole. An audio track can have any
number of automation tracks for automating channel parameters, effect settings, etc.
You can add audio tracks via the Add Track dialog.
RELATED LINKS
Add Track Dialog – Audio

The Audio page of the Add Track dialog allows you to set up and add audio tracks.
To open the Audio page of the Add Track dialog, do one of the following:
● Click Add Track in the global track controls area of the track list, and click Audio.
This opens the global Add Track dialog on the Audio page.
● Select Project > Add Track > Audio or right-click in an empty area of the track list, and
select Add Audio Track.
This opens only the Audio page of the Add Track dialog.
96
Tracks
Audio Tracks
The following settings are available:
Audio Inputs
Opens a window where you can select an input of your connected audio hardware.
If you have added an input bus in the Audio Connections window, you can connect
to that input bus.
The Open Audio Connections button opens the Audio Connections window.
Configuration
Allows you to set the channel configuration. Audio-related tracks can be configured
as mono or stereo tracks.
Audio Outputs
Allows you to set the output routing.
Name
Allows you to specify a track name.
Count
Allows you to enter the number of tracks that you want to add.
Keep Dialog Open

Activate this to keep the dialog open after clicking Add Track. This allows you to click
the page of another track type to set up and add more tracks.
NOTE
This is only available if you open the Add Track dialog from the global track controls.
Add Track
Adds one or more tracks, according to the track type and settings of the active page,
and closes the dialog.
RELATED LINKS
Audio Connections Window on page 24
97
Tracks
Audio Tracks
Audio Track Inspector

The Inspector for audio tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit your
audio track.
The top section of the audio track Inspector contains the following basic track settings:
Track name
Click once to show/hide the basic track settings section. Double-click to rename the
track.
Colorize Selected Track
Allows you to colorize the selected track.
Mute
Mutes the track.
Solo
Solos the track.
Read Automation
Write Automation
Auto Fades Settings
Opens a dialog where you can make separate fade settings for the track.
Record Enable
Monitor
Routes incoming signals to the selected output.
98
Tracks
Instrument Tracks
Freeze Audio Channel
Allows you to freeze the audio channel.
Volume
Allows you to adjust the level of the track.
Pan
Allows you to adjust the panning of the track.
Delay
Allows you to adjust the playback timing of the track.
Load/Save/Reload Track Preset
Loads or saves a track preset or reverts the default presets.
Input Routing
Allows you to specify the input bus for the track.
Output Routing
Allows you to specify the output bus for the track.
RELATED LINKS
Instrument Tracks
You can use instrument tracks for dedicated VST instruments. Each instrument track has a
corresponding instrument channel in the MixConsole. An instrument track can have any number
of automation tracks.
You can add instrument tracks via the Add Track dialog.
RELATED LINKS
Add Track Dialog – Instrument

The Instrument page of the Add Track dialog allows you to set up and add instrument tracks.
To open the Instrument page of the Add Track dialog, do one of the following:
● Click Add Track in the global track controls area of the track list, and click Instrument.
This opens the global Add Track dialog on the Instrument page.
99
Tracks
Instrument Tracks
● Select Project > Add Track > Instrument or right-click in an empty area of the track list,
and select Add Instrument Track.
This opens only the Instrument page of the Add Track dialog.
Instrument
Allows you to select an instrument.
Audio Outputs
Count
Keep Dialog Open

NOTE
Add Track
100
Tracks
Instrument Tracks
Instrument Track Inspector

The Inspector for instrument tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to control
your instrument track. It shows some of the sections from VST instrument channels and MIDI
tracks.
The top section of the instrument track Inspector contains the following basic track settings:
Track name
track.
Mute
Mutes the track.
Solo
Solos the track.
Read Automation
Write Automation
Record Enable
Monitor
Routes incoming MIDI to the selected MIDI output. For this to work, activate MIDI
Thru Active in the Preferences dialog (MIDI page).
101
Tracks
Sampler Tracks
Freeze Instrument Channel
Allows you to freeze the instrument.
Volume
Pan
Delay
Input Routing
Activate Outputs
This control is only available if the instrument provides more than one output. It
allows you to activate one or more outputs for the instrument.
Edit Instrument
Programs
Drum Maps
RELATED LINKS
Sampler Tracks
You can use sampler tracks for controlling the playback of audio samples via MIDI. Each sampler
track has a corresponding channel in the MixConsole. A sampler track can have any number of
automation tracks.
You can add sampler tracks via the Add Track dialog.
RELATED LINKS
Creating Sampler Tracks on page 394
Sampler Control on page 395
102
Tracks
Sampler Tracks
Add Track Dialog – Sampler

The Sampler page of the Add Track dialog allows you to set up and add sampler tracks.
To open the Sampler page of the Add Track dialog, do one of the following:
● Click Add Track in the global track controls area of the track list, and click Sampler.
This opens the global Add Track dialog on the Sampler page.
● Select Project > Add Track > Sampler or right-click in an empty area of the track list, and
select Add Sampler Track.
This opens only the Sampler page of the Add Track dialog.
Name
Count
Keep Dialog Open

NOTE
103
Tracks
Sampler Tracks
Add Track
Sampler Track Inspector

The Inspector for sampler tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit your
sampler track.
The top section of the sampler track Inspector contains the following basic track settings:
Track name
track.
Mute
Mutes the track.
Solo
Solos the track.
Read Automation
Write Automation
Record Enable
Monitor
104
Tracks
MIDI Tracks
Freeze Sampler Channel
Allows you to freeze the sampler track.
Volume
Pan
Delay
Input Routing
RELATED LINKS
MIDI Tracks
You can use MIDI tracks for recording and playing back MIDI parts. Each MIDI track has a
corresponding MIDI channel in the MixConsole. A MIDI track can have any number of
automation tracks.
You can add MIDI tracks via the Add Track dialog.
RELATED LINKS
Add Track Dialog – MIDI

The MIDI page of the Add Track dialog allows you to set up and add MIDI tracks.
To open the MIDI page of the Add Track dialog, do one of the following:
● Click Add Track in the global track controls area of the track list, and click MIDI.
This opens the global Add Track dialog on the MIDI page.
105
Tracks
MIDI Tracks
● Select Project > Add Track > MIDI or right-click in an empty area of the track list, and
select Add MIDI Track.
This opens only the MIDI page of the Add Track dialog.
Name
Count
Keep Dialog Open

NOTE
Add Track
106
Tracks
MIDI Tracks
MIDI Track Inspector

The Inspector for MIDI tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to control your
MIDI track. These affect MIDI events in real time, on playback, for example.
The top section of the MIDI track Inspector contains the following basic track settings:
Track name
track.
Mute
Mutes the track.
Solo
Solos the track.
Read Automation
Write Automation
Record Enable
Monitor
107
Tracks
MIDI Tracks
Volume
MIDI Pan
Allows you to adjust the MIDI panning of the track.
Delay
Input Routing
Output Routing
Channel
Allows you to specify the MIDI channel.
Edit Instrument
Bank Selector
Allows you to set a bank select message that is sent to your MIDI device.
Programs
Program Selector
Allows you to set a program change message that is sent to your MIDI device.
Drum Maps
RELATED LINKS
108
Tracks
Group Channel Tracks

You can use group channel tracks to create a submix of several audio channels and apply the
same effects to them. A group channel track contains no events as such, but displays settings
and automation for the corresponding group channel.
All group channel tracks are automatically placed in a special group track folder in the track list
for easy management. Each group channel track has a corresponding channel in the
MixConsole. A group channel track can have any number of automation tracks.
You can add group channel tracks via the Add Track dialog.
RELATED LINKS
Add Track Dialog – Group Channel

The Group page of the Add Track dialog allows you to set up and add group channel tracks.
To open the Group page of the Add Track dialog, do one of the following:
● Click Add Track in the global track controls area of the track list, and click Group.
This opens the global Add Track dialog on the Group page.
● Select Project > Add Track > Group.

This opens only the Group page of the Add Track dialog.
109
Tracks
Configuration
Audio Outputs
Folder Setup
Allows you to select whether you want to create the effect inside or outside a
dedicated folder.
Name
Count
Keep Dialog Open

NOTE
Add Track
Group Channel Track Inspector

The Inspector for group channel tracks shows the settings for the group channel.
Track name
110
Tracks
track.
Mute
Mutes the track.
Solo
Solos the track.
Read Automation
Write Automation
Volume
Pan
Output Routing
NOTE
When you select the group folder track instead, the Inspector shows the folder and the group
channels it contains. You can click one of the group channels shown in the folder to have the
Inspector show the settings for that group channel.
RELATED LINKS
111
Tracks
FX Channel Tracks
FX Channel Tracks
You can use FX channel tracks for adding send effects. Each FX channel can contain up to eight
effect processors. By routing sends from an audio channel to an FX channel, you send audio from
the audio channel to the effects on the FX channel. You can place FX channel tracks in a special FX
channel folder, or in the track list, outside an FX channel folder. Each FX channel has a
corresponding channel in the MixConsole. An FX channel track can have any number of
automation tracks.
You can add FX channel tracks via the Add Track dialog.
RELATED LINKS
Add Track Dialog – Effect

The Effect page of the Add Track dialog allows you to set up and add FX channel tracks.
To open the Effect page of the Add Track dialog, do one of the following:
● Click Add Track in the global track controls area of the track list, and click Effect.
This opens the global Add Track dialog on the Effect page.
● Select Project > Add Track > Effect.

This opens only the Effect page of the Add Track dialog.
112
Tracks
FX Channel Tracks
Effect
Allows you to select an effect.
Configuration
Audio Outputs
Folder Setup
Allows you to select whether you want to create the effect inside or outside a
dedicated folder.
Name
Count
Keep Dialog Open

NOTE
Add Track
RELATED LINKS
Adding FX Channel Tracks on page 318
Adding FX Channels to Selected Channels on page 318
FX Channel Track Inspector

The Inspector for FX channel tracks shows the settings for the FX channel. When you select the
folder track instead, the Inspector shows the folder and the FX channels it contains. You can click
113
Tracks
FX Channel Tracks
one of the FX channels shown in the folder to have the Inspector show the settings for that FX
channel.
Track name
track.
Mute
Mutes the track.
Solo
Solos the track.
Read Automation
Write Automation
Volume
Pan
Output Routing
RELATED LINKS
114
Tracks
Ruler Track
Ruler Track
You can use ruler tracks to show several rulers with different display formats for the timeline.
This is completely independent from the main ruler, as well as rulers and position displays in
other windows.
You can add ruler tracks via the Add Track dialog.
RELATED LINKS
Add Track Dialog – Ruler

The Ruler page of the Add Track dialog allows you to set up and add ruler tracks.
To open the Ruler page of the Add Track dialog, do one of the following:
● Click Add Track in the global track controls area of the track list, and click Ruler.
This opens the global Add Track dialog on the Ruler page.
● Select Project > Add Track > Ruler.

This opens only the Ruler page of the Add Track dialog.
Count
115
Tracks
Folder Tracks
Keep Dialog Open

NOTE
Add Track
Ruler Track Controls

In the track list for ruler tracks, you can change the display format for the ruler.
Click the display format to open a pop-up menu.
The following display formats are available:
Bars+Beats
Activates a display format of bars, beats, sixteenth notes, and ticks. By default there
are 120 ticks per sixteenth note. To adjust this, change the MIDI Display Resolution
in the Preferences dialog (MIDI page).
Seconds
Activates a display format of hours, minutes, seconds, and milliseconds.
Timecode
Activates a display format of hours, minutes, seconds, and frames. The number of
frames per second (fps) is set in the Project Setup dialog with the Project Frame
Rate pop-up menu. To display subframes, activate Show Timecode Subframes in
the Preferences dialog (Transport page).
Samples
Activates a display format of samples.
NOTE
Ruler tracks are not affected by the display format setting in the Project Setup dialog.
Folder Tracks
Folder tracks function as containers for other tracks, making it easier to organize and manage
the track structure. They also allow you to edit several tracks at the same time.
You can add folder tracks via the Add Track dialog.
RELATED LINKS
116
Tracks
Folder Tracks
Add Track Dialog – Folder

The Folder page of the Add Track dialog allows you to set up and add folder tracks.
To open the Folder page of the Add Track dialog, do one of the following:
● Click Add Track in the global track controls area of the track list, and click Folder.
This opens the global Add Track dialog on the Folder page.
● Select Project > Add Track > Folder.

This opens only the Folder page of the Add Track dialog.
Name
Count
Keep Dialog Open

NOTE
117
Tracks
Folder Tracks
Add Track
Folder Track Inspector

The Inspector for folder tracks shows the folder and its underlying track, much like a folder
structure in the File Explorer/macOS Finder. When you select one of the tracks shown under the
folder, the Inspector shows the settings for that track.
Track name
Double-click to rename the track.
Mute
Mutes the track.
Solo
Solos the track.
Record Enable
Monitor
RELATED LINKS
Folder Track Controls

The track list for folder tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit all tracks in
the folder.
118
Tracks
More Tracks
Expand/Collapse Folder
Shows/Hides the tracks in the folder. Hidden tracks are played back as usual.
Track name
Mute
Mutes the track.
Solo
Solos the track.
Record Enable
Monitor
More Tracks
Some track types can only be added once.
● Arranger track
● Chord track
● Video track
● Marker track
Arranger Track
You can use the arranger track for arranging your project by marking out sections and
determining in which order they are to be played back.
● To add the arranger track to your project, select Project > Add Track > Arranger.
119
Tracks
More Tracks
Arranger Track Inspector

The arranger track Inspector displays the lists of available arranger chains and arranger events.
The arranger track Inspector contains the following settings:
Track name
Open Arranger Editor
Opens the Arranger Editor.
Select Active Arranger Chain + Functions
Allows you to select the active arranger chain, to rename it, to create a new one, to
duplicate, or to flatten it.
Current Arranger Chain
Shows the active arranger chain.
120
Tracks
More Tracks
Arranger Events
Lists all arranger events in your project. Click the arrow of an arranger event to play
it back and start the live mode.
Stop
Allows you to stop the live mode.
Jump Mode
Allows you to define how long the active arranger event is played before jumping to
the next one.
Arranger Track Controls

The track list for the arranger track contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit the
arranger track.
Select Active Arranger Chain
Allows you to select the active arranger chain.
Current Item/Current Repeat
Displays which arranger event and which repeat is active.
Activate Arranger Mode
Allows you to activate and deactivate the arranger mode.
Open Arranger Editor
Opens the Arranger Editor for the track.
Chord Track
You can use the chord track for adding chord and scale events to your project. These can
transform the pitches of other events.
● To add the chord track to your project, select Project > Add Track > Chord.
Chord Track Inspector

The chord track Inspector contains settings for the chord events.
The top section of the chord track Inspector contains the following settings:
121
Tracks
More Tracks
Track name
Click to show/hide the basic track settings section.
Mute Chord Track
Mutes the track.
Record Enable
Acoustic Feedback
Allows you to audition the events on the chord track. For this to work, you need to
select a track for auditioning in the track list.
Voicing library
Allows you to set up a voicing library for the track.
Voicing library subset
Allows you to select a library subset.
Set up Voicing
Allows you to configure your own voicing parameters for a specific voicing scheme.
Adaptive Voicings
If this option is activated, the voicings are set automatically.
Automatic Scales
If this option is activated, the program creates scale events automatically.
Shift Chords
Allows you to specify an offset value to make sure that chord events also affect the
MIDI notes that have been triggered too early (enter a negative value) or too late
(enter a positive value).
RELATED LINKS
Chord Track Controls

The track list for the chord track contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit the
chord track.
122
Tracks
More Tracks
The track list for the chord track contains the following controls:
Name
Record Enable
Mute Chord Track
Mutes the track.
Select Track for Auditioning
Allows you to select a track for auditioning the chord events.
Resolve Display Conflicts
Allows you to show all chord events on the track properly, even at low horizontal
zoom levels.
Show Scales
Allows you to show the scale lane in the lower part of the chord track.
Marker Track
You can use the marker track to add and edit markers that help you to locate certain positions
quickly.
● To add the marker track to your project, select Project > Add Track > Marker.
Marker Track Inspector

The marker track Inspector displays the marker list.
Track name
Open Marker Window
Opens the Markers window.
123
Tracks
More Tracks
Marker attributes
Shows the markers, their IDs, and their time positions. Click in the leftmost column
for a marker to move the project cursor to the marker position.
RELATED LINKS
Marker Track Controls

The track list for the marker track contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit the
marker track.
Track name
Locate
Allows you to move the project cursor to the selected marker position.
Cycle
Allows you to select a cycle marker.
Zoom
Allows you to zoom in a cycle marker.
Add Marker
Allows you to add a position marker at the project cursor position.
Add Cycle Marker
Allows you to add a cycle marker at the project cursor position.
Video Track
You can use the video track to play back video events. Video files are displayed as events/clips on
the video track, with thumbnails representing the frames in the film.
● To add a video track, select Project > Add Track > Video.
Video Track Inspector

The video track Inspector contains parameters to control the video track.
124
Tracks
More Tracks
Reveal Video Window
Opens the Video Player window.
Mute Video Track
Mutes the track.
RELATED LINKS
Video Track Controls

The track list for the video track contains parameters to control the video track.
Mute Video Track
Mutes the track.
Name
125
Track Handling
Tracks are the building blocks of your project. In Cubase, events and parts are placed on tracks.
Adding Tracks via the Add Track Dialog

You can add tracks via the Add Track dialog.
PROCEDURE
1. In the global track controls area of the track list, click Add Track .
● Click the track type and set up the options according to your needs.
● To add track types that can only be added once, open the More Tracks section and
click the track type.
3. Click Add Track.
RESULT
The new track is added to the project below the selected track.
RELATED LINKS
Video Track on page 124
Adding Tracks Using Track Presets

You can add tracks based on track presets. Track presets contain sound and channel settings.
PROCEDURE
1. In the global track controls area of the track list, click Use Track Preset .
2. Select Using Track Preset.
3. In the Choose Track Preset dialog, select a track preset.
The number and type of the added tracks depend on the selected track preset.
126
Track Handling
Adding Tracks by Dragging Files from the MediaBay
4. Click OK.
RESULT
The new tracks are added to the project below the selected track.
RELATED LINKS
Track Presets on page 136
Adding Tracks by Dragging Files from the MediaBay

You can add tracks by dragging files from the MediaBay.
PREREQUISITE
One of the following prerequisites must apply:
● The MediaBay is open. To open the MediaBay, press F5.
● The Media rack in the right zone of the Project window is open. Click Show/Hide Right
Zone and click the Media tab to open it.
PROCEDURE
1. In the MediaBay, select the files for which you want to add tracks.
2. Drag the files into the track list.
● The indicator highlights the position at which the new tracks will be added.
● If you drag multiple audio files into the track list, choose if you want to place all files
on one track or on different tracks.
● If you drag multiple audio files into the track list, the Import Options dialog opens
that allows you to edit the import options.
RESULT
The new tracks are added at the position that was highlighted by the indicator in the track list.
The audio files are inserted at the cursor position.
RELATED LINKS
Import Options Dialog for Audio Files on page 214
Exporting MIDI Tracks as Standard MIDI Files

You can export MIDI tracks as standard MIDI files. This allows you to transfer MIDI material to
virtually any MIDI application on any platform.
PROCEDURE
1. Select File > Export > MIDI File.
2. In the file dialog that opens, specify a location and name for the file.
3. Click Save.
4. In the Export Options dialog, activate the options for the settings that you want to export,
and click OK.
127
Track Handling
Exporting MIDI Tracks as Standard MIDI Files
RESULT
The MIDI file is exported. It includes the tempo and time signature events of the Tempo Track
Editor or, if the tempo track is deactivated on the Transport panel, the current tempo and time
signature.
NOTE
If you want to include other Inspector settings than those specified in the Export Options, use
Merge MIDI in Loop to convert these settings to real MIDI events.
RELATED LINKS
Export Options Dialog for MIDI Files on page 128
Merging MIDI Events into a New Part on page 534
Export Options Dialog for MIDI Files

The Export Options for MIDI files allow you to specify what data is included in the exported MIDI
files.
● To open the Export Options for MIDI files, select File > Export > MIDI File.
Export Inspector Patch

Includes MIDI patch settings in the Inspector as MIDI bank select and program
change events in the MIDI file.
Export Inspector Volume/Pan

Includes volume and pan settings in the Inspector as MIDI volume and pan events
in the MIDI file.
Export Automation
Includes automation as MIDI controller events in the MIDI file.
Export Inserts
Includes MIDI modifiers and MIDI inserts in the MIDI file.
Includes MIDI modifiers in the MIDI file.
Export Markers
Includes markers as standard MIDI file marker events in the MIDI file.
Export as Type 0
Exports a type 0 MIDI file with all data on a single track, but on different MIDI
channels. If you deactivate this option, a type 1 MIDI file with data on separate tracks
is exported.
Export Resolution
Allows you to set a MIDI resolution between 24 and 960 for the MIDI file. The
resolution is the number of pulses, or ticks, per quarter note (PPQ) and determines
the precision with which you will be able to view and edit the MIDI data. The higher
128
Track Handling
Removing Selected Tracks
the resolution, the higher the precision. The resolution should be chosen depending
on the application or sequencer with which the MIDI file will be used, because
certain applications and sequencers may not be able to handle certain resolutions.
Export Locator Range

Exports only the range between the left and right locator.
Export includes Delay

Includes delay settings you have made in the Inspector in the MIDI file.
RELATED LINKS
Markers on page 252
MIDI Track Parameters on page 521
Export Options on page 767
Removing Selected Tracks

You can remove selected tracks from the track list.
PROCEDURE
● Select Project > Remove Selected Tracks.
If you delete tracks that are not empty, a warning message is displayed.
NOTE
You can deactivate this message. To reactivate the message, activate Display Warning
before Deleting Non-Empty Tracks in the Preferences dialog (Editing page).
Removing Empty Tracks

You can remove empty tracks from the track list.
PROCEDURE
● Select Project > Remove Empty Tracks.
Moving Tracks in the Track List

You can move tracks up or down in the track list.
PROCEDURE
● Select a track and drag it up or down in the track list.
Renaming Tracks
You can rename tracks.
PROCEDURE
1. Double-click the track name and type in a new name for the track.
2. Press Return.
129
Track Handling
Automatically Assigning Colors to New Tracks/Channels
If you want all events on the track to get the same name, hold down any modifier key and
press Return.

If the Parts Get Track Names option is activated in the Preferences dialog (Editing page), and
you move an event from one track to another, the moved event will automatically be named
according to its new track.
Automatically Assigning Colors to New Tracks/Channels

You can automatically assign colors to newly added tracks or channels.
PROCEDURE
1. Select Edit > Preferences.
2. Open the User Interface page, and select Track & MixConsole Channel Colors.
3. Open the Auto Track/Channel Color Mode pop-up menu and select an option.
4. Click OK.
RESULT
Any tracks/channels that you added by using Add Track, or by dragging files from the Media
rack to the event display are automatically colorized according to your settings.
RELATED LINKS
Showing Track Pictures

You can add pictures to tracks to recognize your tracks easily. Track pictures are available for
audio, instrument, MIDI, FX channel and group channel tracks.
PREREQUISITE
Adjust the track height to at least 2 rows.
PROCEDURE
1. Right-click any track in the track list.
2. From the track list context menu, select Show Track Pictures.
If you move the mouse to the left on a track, a highlighted rectangle appears.

Double-click the rectangle to open the Track Pictures Browser and set up a track picture.
RELATED LINKS
Track Pictures Browser on page 131
130
Track Handling
Showing Track Pictures
Track Pictures Browser

The Track Pictures Browser allows you to set up and select pictures that can be shown in the
track list and in the MixConsole. Track pictures are useful to recognize tracks and channels
easily. You can select pictures from the factory content or add new ones to the user library.
● To open the Track Pictures Browser for a track, double-click in the lower left side of the
track list.
Factory
Shows the factory content in the pictures browser.
Pictures browser
Shows the pictures that you can assign to the selected track/channel.
User
Shows your user content in the pictures browser.
Import
Opens a file dialog that allows you to select pictures in bmp, jpeg, or png format and
add them to the user library.
Remove Selected Pictures from User Library

Removes the selected pictures from the user library.
Reset Current Picture

Removes the picture from the selected track/channel.
Show Preview/Hide Preview

Opens/Closes a section with further color and zoom settings.
Track Picture Preview

Shows the current track picture. When you zoom in the picture, you can drag it with
the mouse to change its visible part.
Track Color
Opens the Color Picker that allows you to select a track color.
Intensity
Allows you to apply the track color to the track picture and set the color intensity.
131
Track Handling
Setting the Track Height
Zoom
Allows you to change the size of the track picture.
Rotate
Allows you to rotate the track picture.
Setting the Track Height

You can enlarge the track height to show the events on the track in detail, or you can decrease
the height of several tracks to get a better overview of your project.
● To change the height of an individual track, click its lower border in the track list and drag
up or down.
● To change the height of all tracks simultaneously, hold down Ctrl/Cmd, click the lower
border of one track, and drag up or down.
● To set the number of tracks to view in the Project window, use the track zoom menu.
● To set the track height automatically when you select a track, click Edit > Enlarge Selected
Track.
RELATED LINKS
Track Zoom Menu on page 132
Track Controls Settings Dialog on page 90
Track Zoom Menu

The track zoom pop-up menu allows you to set the number of tracks and the track height in the
Project window.
● To open the track zoom pop-up menu in the lower right of the Project window, click the
arrow button above the vertical zoom control.
Zoom Tracks x Rows

Zooms all track heights to show the specified number of rows.
Zoom Tracks Full

Zooms all tracks to fit in the active Project window.
Zoom Tracks N Rows

Allows you to set the number of rows to fit in the active Project window.
132
Track Handling
Selecting Tracks
Zoom x Tracks
Zooms the specified number of tracks to fit in the active Project window.
Zoom N Tracks
Allows you to set the number of tracks to fit in the active Project window.
Zoom Tracks Minimal

Zooms all track heights to the minimum size.
Snap Track Heights

Changes the track height in fixed increments when you resize it.
Selecting Tracks
You can select one or multiple tracks in the track list.
● To select a track, click on it in the track list.

● To select several tracks, Ctrl/Cmd-click several tracks.
● To select a continuous range of tracks, Shift-click the first and last track in a continuous
range of tracks.
Selected tracks are highlighted in the track list.
RELATED LINKS
Track Selection Follows Event Selection on page 757
Scroll to Selected Track on page 760
Select Channel/Track on Solo on page 760
Select Channel/Track on Edit Settings on page 760
Selecting Tracks with Arrow Keys

You can select tracks and events with the Up Arrow key or the Down Arrow key on the computer
keyboard. However, you can make the Up Arrow key and the Down Arrow key exclusively
available for selecting tracks.
● To make the Up Arrow key and the Down Arrow key exclusively available for selecting
tracks, activate Use Up/Down Navigation Commands for Selecting Tracks Only in the
Preferences dialog (Editing page).
The following applies:
● If this option is deactivated and no event/part is selected in the Project window, the
Up Arrow key and the Down Arrow key are used to step through the tracks in the track
list.
● If this option is deactivated and an event/part is selected in the Project window, the
Up Arrow key and the Down Arrow key still step through the tracks in the track list – but
on the selected track, the first event/part will automatically be selected as well.
● If this option is activated, the Up Arrow key and the Down Arrow key are only used to
change the track selection – the current event/part selection in the Project window is not
altered.
133
Track Handling
Deselecting Tracks
Deselecting Tracks
You can deselect tracks that are selected in the track list.
PROCEDURE
● Shift-click a selected track.
RESULT
The track is deselected.
Duplicating Tracks
You can duplicate a track with all contents and channel settings.
PROCEDURE
● Select Project > Duplicate Tracks.
RESULT
The duplicated track appears below the original track.
Disabling Tracks
You can disable audio, instrument, MIDI, and sampler tracks that you do not want to play back or
process at the moment. Disabling a track zeroes its output volume and shuts down all disk
activity and processing for the track.
PROCEDURE
● Right-click in the track list and select Disable Track from the context menu.
RESULT
The track color changes and the corresponding channel in the MixConsole is hidden.
To enable a disabled track and restore all channel settings, right-click in the track list and select
Enable Track.
Organizing Tracks in Folder Tracks

You can organize your tracks in folders by moving tracks into folder tracks. This allows you to
perform editing on several tracks as one entity. Folder tracks can contain any type of track
including other folder tracks.
● To add a folder track, click Add Track in the global track controls area of the track list, and
click Folder.
● To move tracks into a folder, select them and drag them into the folder track.
● To remove tracks from a folder, select them and drag them out of the folder.
● To hide/show tracks in a folder, click the Expand/Collapse Folder button of the folder
track.
● To hide/show data on a folder track, open the context menu for the folder track and select
an option from the Show Data on Folder Tracks submenu.
● To mute/solo all tracks in a folder track, click the Mute or Solo button for the folder track.
134
Track Handling
Handling Overlapping Audio
NOTE
Hidden tracks are played back as usual.
Handling Overlapping Audio

The basic rule for audio tracks is that each track can only play back a single audio event at a time.
If two or more events overlap, only the one that is in front is played back. You can, however,
select the event/region that you want to play back.
PROCEDURE
● Right-click the audio event in the event display and select the desired event or
region from the To Front or Set to Region submenu.
NOTE
The available options depend on whether you performed a linear or a cycle

recording and the record mode you used. When recording audio in cycle mode, the
recorded event is divided in regions, one for each take.
● Click the middle handle on the lower border of a stacked event and select an entry
● In the track list, activate Show Lanes and select the desired take.
Events Display on Folder Tracks

Closed folder tracks can display data of the contained audio, MIDI, and instrument tracks as data
blocks or as events.
When you close folder tracks, the contents of the contained tracks are displayed as data blocks or
events. Depending on the folder track height, the display of the events can be more or less
detailed.
Modifying Event Display on Folder Tracks

You can modify the event display on folder tracks.
PROCEDURE
1. Right-click the folder track.
2. On the context menu, select Show Data on Folder Tracks.
You have the following options:
● Always Show Data
Displays data blocks or event details always.
● Never Show Data
Displays nothing.
● Hide Data When Expanded
Hides the display of events when you open folder tracks.
● Show Event Details
Displays event details instead of data blocks.
135
Track Handling
Track Presets
NOTE
You can change these settings in the Preferences dialog (Event Display—Folders page).
RELATED LINKS
Event Display - Folders on page 764
Track Presets
Track presets are templates that can be applied to newly created or existing tracks of the same
type.
You can create them from virtually all track types (audio, MIDI, instrument, sampler, group, FX,
VST instrument return, input, and output channels). They contain sound and channel settings,
and allow you to quickly browse, preview, select, and change sounds, or reuse channel settings
across projects.
Track presets are organized in the MediaBay.
When you apply a track preset, all the settings that are saved in the preset are applied.
Track presets can only be applied to tracks of their own type. The only exception are instrument
tracks: for these, VST presets are also available.
NOTE
● Once a track preset is applied, you cannot undo the changes. It is not possible to remove
an applied preset from a track and return to the previous state. If you are not satisfied with
the track settings, you have to either edit the settings manually or apply another preset.
● Applying VST presets to instrument tracks leads to removal of modifiers, inserts, or EQs.
These settings are not stored in VST presets.
Audio Track Presets

Track presets for audio tracks, group tracks, FX tracks, VST instrument channels, input channels,
and output channels include all settings that define the sound.
You can use the factory presets as a starting point for your own editing and save the audio
settings that you optimized for an artist that you often work with as a preset for future
recordings.
The following data is saved in audio track presets:
● Insert effects settings (including VST effect presets)

● EQ settings
● Volume and pan
● Input gain and phase
NOTE
To access the track presets functions for input and output channels, activate the Write buttons
for input and output channels in the MixConsole. This creates input and output channel tracks in
the track list.
MIDI Track Presets

You can use MIDI track presets for multitimbral VST instruments.
136
Track Handling
Track Presets
When creating MIDI track presets, you can either include the channel or the patch.
The following data is saved in MIDI track presets:
● MIDI modifiers (Transpose, etc.)

● Output and Channel or Program Change
● Volume and pan
● Staff settings
● Color settings
● Drum map settings
Creating a Track Preset

You can create a track preset from a single track or from a combination of tracks.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Project window, select one or more tracks.
2. In the track list, right-click one of the selected tracks and select Save Track Preset.
3. In the New Preset section, enter a name for the new preset.
NOTE
You can also define attributes for the preset.
4. Click OK to save the preset and exit the dialog.
RESULT
Track presets are saved within the application folder in the track presets folder. They are saved in
default subfolders named according to their track type: audio, MIDI, instrument, and multi.
Loading Presets for Tracks

You can choose from a variety of track presets.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Inspector, click the Preset Management icon on the right of the Inserts section.
2. Select From Track Preset.
3. In the Results browser, double-click a track preset to apply it.
RELATED LINKS
Loading Presets for VST Instruments

When working with VST instruments, you can choose from a variety of presets via the Results
browser.
PROCEDURE
1. In the track list, right-click the instrument track and select Load Track Preset.
2. In the Results browser, double-click a preset to apply it.
137
Track Handling
Track Presets
Instrument Track Presets

Instrument track presets offer both MIDI and audio features and are the best choice when
handling sounds of simple, mono-timbral VST instruments.
Use instrument track presets for auditioning your tracks or saving your preferred sound settings,
for example. You can also extract sounds from instrument track presets for use in instrument
tracks.
The following data is saved in instrument track presets:
● Audio insert effects

● Audio EQ
● Audio volume and pan
● MIDI insert effects
● MIDI track parameters
● The VST instrument used for the track
● Staff settings
● Color settings
● Drum map settings
VST Presets
VST instrument presets behave like instrument track presets. You can extract sounds from VST
presets for use in instrument tracks.
The following data is saved in VST instrument presets:
● VST instrument
● VST instrument settings
NOTE
Modifiers, inserts, and EQ settings are not saved.
VST effect plug-ins are available in VST 3 and VST 2 format.
NOTE
In this manual, VST presets stands for VST 3 instrument presets, unless stated otherwise.
Extracting the Sound from an Instrument Track or VST Preset

For instrument tracks, you can extract the sound of an instrument track preset or VST preset.
PROCEDURE
1. Select the instrument track to which you want to apply a sound.
2. In the Inspector, click Extract Sound from Track Preset.
3. In the preset browser, select an instrument track preset or VST preset.
4. Double-click the preset to load the settings.
RESULT
The VST instrument and its settings (but no inserts, EQs, or modifiers) on the existing track are
overwritten with the data of the track preset. The previous VST instrument for this instrument
track is removed and the new VST instrument with its settings is set up for the instrument track.
138
Track Handling
Track Presets
Multi-Track Presets
You can use multi-track presets, for example, when recording setups that require several
microphones (a drum set or a choir, where you always record under the same conditions), and
you have to edit the resulting tracks in a similar way. Furthermore, they can be used when
working with layered tracks, where you use several tracks to generate a certain sound instead of
manipulating only one track.
If you select more than one track when creating a track preset, the settings of all selected tracks
are saved as one multi-track preset. Multi-track presets can only be applied if the target tracks
are of the same type, number, and sequence as the tracks in the track preset, therefore, they
should be used in recurring situations with similar tracks and settings.
Loading Multi-Track Presets

You can apply multi-track presets to several selected tracks.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Project window, select several tracks.
NOTE
Multi-track presets can only be applied if track type, number, and sequence are identical
for the selected tracks and the track preset.
2. In the track list, right-click a track and select Load Track Preset.
3. In the preset browser, select a multi-track preset.
4. Double-click the preset to load it.
RESULT
The preset is applied.
Sampler Track Presets

You can use sampler track presets to reuse created sounds in later projects or newly created
sampler tracks.
The following data is saved in sampler track presets:
● Audio insert effects

● Audio EQ
● Audio volume and pan
● Color settings
RELATED LINKS
Creating a Sampler Track Preset

You can create a sampler track preset from a sampler track or you can use the Sampler Control
toolbar.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Sampler Control toolbar, click Preset Management .
139
Track Handling
Track Presets
2. Click Save Track Preset.

3. In the Save Track Preset dialog, type in a name for the new preset.
RESULT
The new sampler track preset is saved. It is displayed in the Preset Name field on the info line.
Sampler track presets are saved within the application folder in the sampler track presets folder.
RELATED LINKS
Creating a Track Preset on page 137
Loading Track or VST Presets

You can apply track or VST presets to selected tracks.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Project window, select a track.
● In the Inspector, click Load Track Preset.
● In the track list, right-click the track and select Load Track Preset.
● In the Sampler Control toolbar, click the Preset Management button next to the
Preset Name field and select Load Track Preset.
3. In the preset browser, select a track, VST, or sampler track preset.
4. Double-click the preset to load it.
RESULT
The preset is applied.
NOTE
You can also drag and drop track presets from the MediaBay or the File Explorer/macOS Finder
onto a track of the same type.
RELATED LINKS
Filters Section on page 457
140
Parts and Events
Parts and events are the basic building blocks in Cubase.
Events
In Cubase, most event types can be viewed and edited on their specific tracks in the Project
window.
Events can be added by importing or recording.
RELATED LINKS
Audio Regions on page 143
MIDI Events on page 144
Audio Events
Audio events are created automatically when you record or import audio in the Project window.
You can view and edit audio events in the Project window and in the Sample Editor.
An audio event triggers the playback of the corresponding audio clip. By adjusting the Offset
and the Length values of the event, you can determine which section of the audio clip is played
back. The audio clip itself remains unchanged.
RELATED LINKS
Sample Editor on page 357
Audio Files and Audio Clips on page 142
Basic Recording Methods on page 193
Creating Audio Events

You can create audio events by recording or importing audio into the Project window.
PROCEDURE
● Record some audio.
● Select File > Import > Audio File to import an audio file from your hard disk or any
external storage device.
● Select File > Import > Audio CD to import an audio file from an audio CD.
● Select File > Import > Audio from Video File to import the audio from a video file
on your hard disk or any external storage device.
● Drag an audio file from the MediaBay, the Audio Part Editor, or the Sample Editor,
and drop it in the event display.
141
Parts and Events
Events
● Copy an event from a different Cubase project and paste it in the event display.
RELATED LINKS
Audio File Import on page 213
Importing Audio CD Tracks on page 216
Importing Audio from Video Files on page 218
Audio Part Editor on page 384
Creating New Files From Events

An audio event plays a section of an audio clip, which in turn refers to one or more audio files on
the hard disk. However, you can create a new file that consists only of the section that is played
by the event.
PROCEDURE
1. Select one or several audio events.
2. Set up fade in, fade out, and event volume.
These settings will be applied to the new file.
3. Select Audio > Bounce Selection.
You are asked whether you want to replace the selected event or not.
● To create a new file that only contains the audio in the original event, click Replace.
● To create a new file and add a clip for the new file to the Pool, click No.
RESULT
If you clicked Replace, a clip for the new file is added to the Pool, and the original event is
replaced by a new event playing the new clip.
If you clicked No, the original event is not replaced.
NOTE
You can also apply the Bounce Selection function to audio parts. In that case, the audio from all
events in the part is combined to a single audio file. If you select Replace when asked, the part is
replaced with a single audio event playing a clip of the new file.
RELATED LINKS
Event-Based Fades on page 232
Audio Files and Audio Clips

In Cubase, audio editing and processing are non-destructive.
When you edit or process audio in the Project window, the audio file on the hard disk remains
untouched. Instead, your changes are saved to an audio clip that is automatically created on
import or during recording, and that refers to the audio file. This allows you to undo changes or
revert to the original version.
If you apply processing to a specific section of an audio clip, a new audio file that contains only
this section is created. The processing is applied to the new audio file only and the audio clip is
automatically adjusted, so that it refers both to the original file and to the new, processed file.
During playback, the program will switch between the original file and the processed file at the
142
Parts and Events
Events
correct positions. You will hear this as a single recording, with processing applied to one section
only.
This allows you to undo processing at a later stage, and to apply different processing to different
audio clips that refer to the same original file.
You can view and edit audio clips in the Pool.
RELATED LINKS
Pool on page 415
Audio Regions on page 143
Replacing Clips in Events on page 143
Replacing Clips in Events

You can replace the clips in audio events.
PROCEDURE
● Hold down Shift, drag an audio file from the File Explorer/macOS Finder, and drop it
on the event.
● Click a clip in the Pool, hold down Shift, and drop it on the event.
RESULT
The clip in the event is replaced. However, the event edits remain unchanged. If the new clip is
shorter than the replaced clip, the length of the event is adapted. If the new clip is longer than
the replaced clip, the length of the event stays the same.
RELATED LINKS
Inserting Clips into a Project via Drag and Drop on page 421
Audio Regions
Cubase allows you to create audio regions within audio clips to mark important sections in the
audio.
You can view audio regions in the Pool. You can create and edit them in the Sample Editor.
NOTE
If you want to use one audio file in different contexts, or if you want to create several loops from
one audio file, convert the corresponding regions of the audio clip to events and bounce them
into separate audio files. This is necessary because different events that refer to the same clip
access the same clip information.
RELATED LINKS
Pool on page 415
Regions List on page 369
Creating Regions
You can create regions from several selected audio events or from selection ranges.
PROCEDURE
1. Select several audio events or selection ranges.
2. Select Audio > Advanced > Event or Range as Region.
143
Parts and Events
Events
3. In the Create Regions dialog, enter a name for the regions, and click OK.
RESULT
A region is created in the corresponding clip, with the start and end position of the region
determined by the start and end position of the event or selection range within the clip.
RELATED LINKS
Creating Regions on page 369
Creating Events from Regions

You can create events from regions. These replace the original event.
PROCEDURE
1. Select an audio event whose clip contains regions within the boundaries of the event.
2. Select Audio > Advanced > Events from Regions.
RESULT
The original event is removed and replaced by events positioned and sized according to the
regions.
MIDI Events
MIDI events are created automatically when you record or import MIDI in the Project window.
You can view and edit MIDI events in the Key Editor, the Drum Editor, or the Score Editor.
RELATED LINKS
Key Editor on page 570
Drum Editor on page 612
Score Editor on page 599
Creating MIDI Events

You can create MIDI events by recording or importing MIDI into the Project window.
PROCEDURE
● Record MIDI.
● Select File > Import > MIDI File to import a MIDI file from your hard disk.
● Drag a MIDI file from the File Explorer/macOS Finder, from one of the MIDI editors,
or from the MediaBay, and drop it in the event display.
● Copy an event from a different Cubase project and paste it in the event display.
RELATED LINKS
Importing MIDI Files on page 221
MIDI Editors on page 543
144
Parts and Events
Parts
Parts
Parts are containers for MIDI or audio events, and for tracks.
RELATED LINKS
Audio Parts on page 145
MIDI Parts on page 145
Folder Parts on page 145
Audio Parts
Audio parts are containers for audio events. If you want to treat several audio events as one unit
in the Project window, you can convert them to a part.
You can create audio parts in the following ways:
● Select the Draw tool and draw on the audio track.

● Press Alt/Opt, select the Object Selection tool, and draw on the audio track.
● Select the Object Selection tool and double-click on the audio track, between the left and
right locator.
● Select several audio events on an audio track and select Audio > Events to Part.
NOTE
To make the events appear as independent objects on the track again, select the part and select
Audio > Dissolve Part.
RELATED LINKS
MIDI Parts
A MIDI part is automatically created when you record. It contains the recorded events.
However, you can also create empty MIDI parts in the following ways:
● Select the Draw tool and draw on the MIDI track.

● Press Alt/Opt, select the Object Selection tool and draw on the MIDI track.
● Select the Object Selection tool and double-click on the MIDI track, between the left and
right locator.
Folder Parts
A folder part is a graphic representation of events and parts on the tracks in the folder.
Folder parts indicate the time position as well as the vertical track position. If part colors are
used, these are also shown in the folder part.
Any editing that you perform to a folder part affects all the events and parts it contains. Tracks
inside a folder can be edited as one entity.
145
Parts and Events
Editing Techniques for Parts and Events
NOTE
If you want to edit the individual tracks within the folder, you can double-click the folder part.
This opens the editors for the events and parts that are present on the tracks.
RELATED LINKS

This section describes techniques for editing in the Project window. If not explicitly stated, all
descriptions apply to both events and parts, even though we use the term event for convenience.
In the Project window, you can edit events using the following techniques:
● By selecting and using one of the tools in the Project window toolbar.
NOTE
Some editing tools feature additional functions if you press modifier keys. You can
customize the default modifier keys in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Tool Modifiers
page).
● By opening the Edit menu and selecting one of the functions.

● By editing on the info line.
● By using a key command.
NOTE
Snap is taken into account.
RELATED LINKS
Editing - Tool Modifiers on page 761
Auditioning Audio Parts and Events

You can audition audio parts and events in the Project window by using the Audition tool.
PROCEDURE
1. Click Play and select Play.
2. Click where you want playback to start, and keep the mouse button pressed.
3. Optional: Select Media > MediaBay, and in the Previewer section, adjust the Preview
Level.
RESULT
The track on which you click is played back, starting at the click position. Playback is stopped
when you release the mouse button.
NOTE
When auditioning, the Main Mix bus is always used for monitoring.
RELATED LINKS
Previewer Section on page 453
146
Parts and Events
Scrubbing
The Scrub tool allows you to locate positions in events by playing back, forwards or backwards.
PROCEDURE
1. Click Play.
2. Click again to open a pop-up menu.
3. Select Scrub.
4. Click the event and keep the mouse button pressed.
5. Drag to the left or right.
RESULT
The project cursor moves correspondingly and the event is played back. The speed and the pitch
of the playback depend on how fast you move the mouse.
NOTE
Insert effects are bypassed when scrubbing with the mouse.
RELATED LINKS
Scrub Tool
Scrubbing can be quite a burden on your system. If playback problems occur, open the
Preferences dialog (Transport—Scrub page), and deactivate Use High Quality Scrub Mode.
This lowers the resampling quality, but makes scrubbing less demanding on the processor,
especially in large projects.
In the Preferences dialog (Transport—Scrub page), you can also adjust the Scrub volume.
Selecting with the Object Selection Tool

PROCEDURE
1. Click Object Selection.
2. In the event display, click the events that you want to select.
NOTE
You can also use the Up Arrow, Down Arrow, Left Arrow or Right Arrow keys on the
computer keyboard to select the event on the upper or lower track or the previous or next
event on the same track.
RELATED LINKS
Select Submenu
If the Object Selection tool is selected, the Select submenu features specific options for
selecting events in the Project window.
● To open the Select submenu, select Edit > Select.
147
Parts and Events
All
Selects all events in the Project window.
None
Deselects all events in the Project window.
Invert
Inverts the selection. All selected events are deselected and all events that were not
selected are selected instead.
In Loop
Selects all events that are partly or wholly between the left and right locator.
From Start to Cursor

Selects all events that end to the left of the project cursor.
From Cursor to End

Selects all events that start to the right of the project cursor.
Equal Pitch all Octaves/Equal Pitch same Octave

These functions are available in the MIDI editors and the Sample Editor.
Select Controllers in Note Range

This function is available in the MIDI editors.
All on Selected Tracks

Selects all events on the selected track.
Events under Cursor

Automatically selects all events on the selected tracks that are touched by the project
cursor.
Select Event
This function is available in the Sample Editor.
Left Selection Side to Cursor/Right Selection Side to Cursor

These functions are only used for range selection editing.
NOTE
When the Range Selection tool is selected, the Select submenu features different functions.
RELATED LINKS
Select Menu for Selection Ranges on page 159
Range Editing on page 367
Removing Events
You can remove events from the Project window.
PROCEDURE
● To remove an event from the Project window, do one of the following:
● On the Project window toolbar, activate Erase and click the event.
● In the event display, select the events and select Edit > Delete.
● In the event display, select the events and press Backspace.
148
Parts and Events
RELATED LINKS
Event Movement Options

Cubase provides several methods to move events in the Project window.
You can move events using any of the following methods:
● Use the Object Selection tool.

● Use the Nudge tool.
● Select Edit > Move to and select one of the options.
● Select the event and edit the start position on the info line.
RELATED LINKS
Moving Events with the Object Selection Tool on page 149
Moving Events with the Nudge Buttons on page 149
Move to Submenu on page 150
Moving Events via the Info Line on page 150
Moving Events with the Object Selection Tool

You can select one or several events with the Object Selection tool and drag them to a new
position.
PROCEDURE
1. Select Object Selection .
2. Click the events that you want to move and drag them to a new position.
NOTE
You can only drag events to tracks of the same type. If you hold down Ctrl/Cmd while
dragging, you can restrict the movement either horizontally or vertically.
RESULT
The events are moved. If you moved several events, their relative positions are kept.
NOTE
To avoid accidentally moving events when you click them in the Project window, the response
when you move an event by dragging is slightly delayed. You can adjust this delay with the Drag
Delay setting in the Preferences dialog (Editing page).
Moving Events with the Nudge Buttons

You can move one or several selected events by using the nudge buttons on the Project window
toolbar.
PROCEDURE
1. Right-click the Project window toolbar and activate Nudge Palette.
The nudge buttons become available on the toolbar.
2. Select the events that you want to move, and click Move Left or Move Right.
149
Parts and Events
The selected events or parts are moved.
RELATED LINKS
Move to Submenu
If the Object Selection tool is selected, the Move to submenu features options for moving
events to specific positions in the Project window.
● To open the Move to submenu, select Edit > Move to.
Cursor
Moves the selected event to the project cursor position. If you selected several
events on the same track, the following events keep their relative position.
Origin
Moves the selected events to the positions at which they were originally recorded.
Selected Track
Moves the selected events to separate tracks, starting on the selected track. The
events are placed at their current positions.
Front/Back
Moves the selected events to the front or back, respectively. This is useful if you have
overlapping audio events and you want to play back another event.
Moving Events via the Info Line

You can move a selected event by changing its start value on the info line.
PROCEDURE
1. Select the event that you want to move.
2. On the info line, double-click the Start field and enter a new value for the event start.
RESULT
The event is moved by the set value.
Renaming Events
PROCEDURE
● Select the events and type in a new name in the File field on the info line.
● Change the track name, hold down a modifier key, and press Return to rename all
events according to the track.
150
Parts and Events
Event Resize Options

You can resize events by moving their start or end positions individually.
To resize events, you can use the Object Selection, the Scrub tool or the Trim tools on the
Nudge palette.
Resizing also works, if the Combine Selection Tools mode is active.
IMPORTANT
When resizing events, automation data is not taken into account.
RELATED LINKS
Resizing Events with the Object Selection Tool - Normal Sizing on page 151
Resizing Events with the Object Selection Tool - Sizing Moves Contents on page 151
Resizing Events with the Object Selection Tool - Sizing Applies Time Stretch on page 152
Resizing Events with the Trim Tools on page 152
Resizing Events with the Scrub Tool on page 153
Snap Function on page 61
Resizing Events with the Object Selection Tool - Normal Sizing

You can move the start or end point of the event.
PROCEDURE
1. Select Object Selection.
2. Click the Object Selection tool again, and select Normal Sizing from the pop-up menu.
3. Click and drag the lower left or right corner of the event.
RESULT
The event is resized and according to where you dragged, more or less of the content is revealed.
If several events are selected, they are all resized in the same way.
RELATED LINKS
Resizing Events with the Object Selection Tool - Sizing Moves Contents
You can move the start or end point of the event and move the content.
PROCEDURE
2. Click the Object Selection tool again, and select Sizing Moves Contents from the pop-up
menu.
151
Parts and Events
RESULT
The event is resized and the content follows. If several events are selected, they are all resized in
the same way.
RELATED LINKS
Resizing Events with the Object Selection Tool - Sizing Applies Time Stretch
You can move the start or end point of the event and time stretch the content to fit the new
event length.
PROCEDURE
2. Click the Object Selection tool again, and select Sizing Applies Time Stretch from the
pop-up menu.
RESULT
The part is stretched or compressed to fit the new length.
● If you resize MIDI parts, the note events are stretched (moved and resized).
Controller data are stretched, too.
● If you resize audio parts, the events are moved, and the referenced audio files are time
stretched to fit the new length.
If several events are selected, they are all resized in the same way.
RELATED LINKS
Time Stretch on page 345
Resizing Events with the Trim Tools

You can move the start or end point of the event by the amount set on the Grid Type pop-up
menu.
PREREQUISITE
The Object Selection tool is set to Normal Sizing or to Sizing Moves Contents.
PROCEDURE
1. Right-click the Project window toolbar and activate Nudge Palette.
The nudge buttons become available on the toolbar.
2. Select the event.

● Click Trim Start Left.
152
Parts and Events
● Click Trim Start Right.

● Click Trim End Left.
● Click Trim End Right.
RESULT
The start or end position of the selected events are moved by the amount set on the Grid Type
pop-up menu.
RELATED LINKS
Resizing Events with the Scrub Tool

You can scrub the event when moving the start or end point of the event.
PROCEDURE
1. Click Play.
2. Click Play again to open a pop-up menu.
3. Select Scrub.
RESULT
The event is resized and you get an acoustic feedback while dragging.
RELATED LINKS
Splitting Events
PROCEDURE
● Select Split and click the event that you want to split.
● Select Object Selection, hold down Alt/Opt and click the event.
● Move the project cursor to the position where you want to split the events, and
select Edit > Functions > Split at Cursor.
NOTE
This splits all events on all tracks that are intersected by the project cursor. If you
select specific events, only these events are split.
● Set up the left and right locators at the position where you want to split the events,
and select Edit > Functions > Split Loop.
NOTE
This splits all events on all tracks that are intersected by the locators. If you select
specific events, only these events are split.
RESULT
The events are split.
153
Parts and Events
NOTE
If you split a MIDI part so that the split position intersects one or several MIDI notes and Split
MIDI Events is activated in the Preferences dialog (Editing—MIDI page), the intersected notes
are split and new notes are created at the beginning of the second part. If it is deactivated, the
notes remain in the first part, but stick out after the end of the part.
RELATED LINKS
Splitting Events Repeatedly

You can split events repeatedly into multiple events of equal size.
PROCEDURE
● Select Split , hold down Alt/Opt and click the event where you want to make the first
split.
RESULT
The event is automatically split into as many equal events as the length of the original event
allows.
Gluing Events
In the Project window, you can glue two or more events on the same track.
PROCEDURE
● Select the events that you want to glue, and select Edit > Glue.
● Select Glue and click the event that you want to glue to the next event.
● Select Glue, hold down Alt/Opt, and click the event that you want to glue to all
following events.
RESULT
The events are glued together.
NOTE
If you first split an audio event and then glue the parts together again, an event is created. In any
other case, a part is created.
RELATED LINKS
Pasting Events
You can paste events from the clipboard.
PROCEDURE
● Select the events and select Edit > Functions > Paste at Origin to paste the event at
the same position from which you cut or copied it.
154
Parts and Events
● Select the events, select the track where you want to paste them, and select Edit >
Functions > Paste Relative to Cursor to paste the event while keeping its relative
position to the project cursor.
RESULT
If you paste an audio event, it is inserted on the selected track, positioned so that its snap point is
aligned with the cursor position.
If the selected track is of the wrong type, the event is inserted on its original track.
Pasting Events to Matching Track Names

You can copy events in one project and paste them at the first track that matches the exact track
name in another project.
PROCEDURE
1. Copy the events in one project.
2. Activate the project where you want to paste the events.
3. Select Edit > Functions > Paste to Matching Track Name.
RESULT
The events are inserted on the track with the name that exactly matches the original track name.
For all events that have no matching track name, new tracks are created.
Duplicating Events
In the Project window, you can duplicate selected events.
PROCEDURE
● Select the event and do one of the following:
● Select Edit > Functions > Duplicate.
● Hold down Alt/Opt and drag the event to a new position.
NOTE
If you hold down Ctrl/Cmd as well, movement direction is restricted to either

horizontal or vertical.
RESULT
A copy of the selected event is created and placed after the original. If several events are
selected, all of these are copied as one unit, maintaining the relative distance between the
events.
NOTE
If you duplicate audio events, the copies always refer to the same audio clip.
Repeating Events
PROCEDURE
155
Parts and Events
● Select the events and select Edit > Functions > Repeat to open the Repeat Events
dialog, that allows you to create a number of real or shared copies of the selected
events.
● Select the events, hold down Alt/Opt, click the handle in the lower right corner of
the last selected event, and drag to the right to create a real copy.
● Move the mouse pointer over the middle of the right event border so that it
becomes a pointing hand symbol, click and drag to the right to create a real copy.
● Select the events, hold down Alt/Opt-Shift, and drag to the right to create a shared
copy.
NOTE
This applies to MIDI events only.
● Move the mouse pointer over the middle of the right event border so that it
becomes a pointing hand symbol, hold down Shift, click and drag to the right to
create a shared copy.
NOTE
Repeating by dragging only works if the track has a height of at least 2 rows.
RELATED LINKS
Shared Copies on page 156
Repeat Events Dialog on page 156
Setting the Track Height on page 132
Repeat Events Dialog

The Repeat Events dialog allows you to create a number of real or shared copies of the selected
events.
● To open the Repeat Events dialog, select Edit > Functions > Repeat.
Count
Allows you to specify how many times you want the event to be repeated.
Shared Copies
Activate this to create a shared copy.
RELATED LINKS
Shared Copies
Shared copies are useful if you want to create copies that are automatically edited in the same
way as the original event.
You can create shared copies by using the Repeat Events dialog.
156
Parts and Events
You can convert a shared copy to a real copy by selecting Edit > Functions > Convert to Real
Copy. This creates a new version of the clip that you can edit independently. The new clip is
automatically added to the Pool.
RELATED LINKS
Repeating Events on page 155
Repeat Events Dialog on page 156
Fill Loop
You can create a number of copies between the right and left locators.
● Select Edit > Functions > Fill Loop to create a number of copies starting at the left locator
and ending at the right locator.
The last copy is automatically shortened to end at the right locator position.
Sliding the Contents of Events

You can move the contents of an event without changing its position in the Project window.
PROCEDURE
● Hold down Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt, click the event, and drag to the left or right.
RESULT
The content of the event is moved.
NOTE
You cannot slide an audio event past the start or end of the actual audio clip. If the event plays
the whole clip, you cannot slide the audio at all.
Inverting the Phase of Audio Events

You can invert the phase of audio events in the Project window.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Project window, select one or multiple audio events.
2. On the info line, click the Invert Phase field.
RESULT
The phase of the events is inverted. This is reflected on the info line.
RELATED LINKS
157
Parts and Events
Muting Events
You can mute events in the Project window. Muted events can be edited as usual with the
exception of adjusting fades, but are not played back.
PROCEDURE
● Select the Mute tool and click the events or drag a selection rectangle around them.
● Select the events and select Edit > Mute.
RESULT
The events are muted and grayed out.
You can unmute events by selecting them and selecting Edit > Unmute.
RELATED LINKS
158
Range Editing
Editing in the Project window is not restricted to handling whole events and parts. You can also
work with selection ranges, which are independent from the event/part and track boundaries.
Creating a Selection Range

PROCEDURE
1. On the Project window toolbar, select Range Selection.
● Draw a selection rectangle around the range that you want to select.
● Select Edit > Select, and select one of the menu functions.
● Double-click an event to create a selection range that encompasses it.
NOTE
If you hold down Shift and double-click several events in a row, you can create a
selection range that encompasses several events.
RELATED LINKS
Select Menu for Selection Ranges

If the Range Selection tool is selected, the Select submenu features specific options for
selecting ranges in the Project window.
● To open the range selection options menu, select the Range Selection tool and select
Edit > Select.
All
Makes a selection that covers all tracks, from the start of the project to the end. You
can define the track length with the Project Length setting in the Project Setup
dialog.
None
Removes the current selection range.
Invert
Inverts the selection. All selected events are deselected, and all events that were not
selected are selected. Only used for event selection.
In Loop
Makes a selection between the left and right locator on all tracks.
159
Range Editing
Editing Selection Ranges

Makes a selection on all tracks, from the start of the project to the project cursor.
From Cursor to End

Makes a selection on all tracks, from the project cursor to the end of the project.
Equal Pitch - all Octaves

This function requires that a single note is selected. It selects all notes of this part
that have the same pitch in any octave as the selected note.
Equal Pitch - same Octave

This function requires that a single note is selected. It selects all notes of this part
that have the same pitch and the same octave as the selected note.

Selects the controllers within the note range.
All on Selected Tracks

Selects all events on the selected track. Only used for event selection.
Events under Cursor

Selects all events on the selected tracks that are touched by the project cursor.
Select Event
This is available in the Sample Editor.
Left Selection Side to Cursor

Moves the left side of the current selection range to the project cursor position.
Right Selection Side to Cursor

Moves the right side of the current selection range to the project cursor position.
RELATED LINKS
Selecting with the Object Selection Tool on page 147
Select Submenu on page 147
Selecting Ranges for Several Tracks

You can create selection ranges that cover several tracks. It is also possible to exclude tracks
from a selection range.
PROCEDURE
1. Create a selection range from the first to the last track.
2. Press Ctrl/CmdAlt/Opt and click in the selection range on the tracks that you want to
exclude from the selection.

You can edit selection ranges, that is, adjust their size, move or duplicate them, split them, etc.
Adjusting the Size of Selection Ranges

You can adjust the size of a selection range in the following ways:
● By dragging its edges.
160
Range Editing
The pointer takes the shape of a double arrow when you move it over an edge of the
selection range.
● By holding down Shift and clicking.
The closest selection range edge is moved to the position at which you clicked.
● By adjusting the selection range length, or the start or end position on the info line.
● By using the trim buttons on the toolbar.
The left trim buttons move the start of the selection range and the right buttons move the
end. The edges are moved by the amount specified on the Grid pop-up menu.
NOTE
The trim buttons are located on the Nudge Palette, which is not visible on the toolbar by
default.
● By using Move Left and Move Right on the toolbar.

These move the whole selection range to the left or the right. The amount of movement
depends on the selected display format and the value specified on the Grid pop-up menu.
IMPORTANT
The contents of the selection are not moved. Using Move Left/Move Right is the same as
adjusting the start and end of the selection range at the same time by the same amount.
NOTE
The move buttons are located on the Nudge Palette, which is not visible on the toolbar by
default.
● To crop all events or parts that are partially within the selection range, select Edit >
Range > Crop.
Events that are fully inside or outside the selection range are not affected.
RELATED LINKS
Setup Context Menus on page 745
Moving Selection Ranges

PREREQUISITE
You have created a selection range.
PROCEDURE
● Click the selection range and drag it to a new position.
RESULT
The contents of the selection range are moved to the new position. If the range intersected
events or parts, these are split before moving, so that only the sections within the selection
range are affected.
RELATED LINKS
Creating a Selection Range on page 159
Duplicating Events on page 155
161
Range Editing
Duplicating Selection Ranges

PREREQUISITE
You have created a selection range.
PROCEDURE
● Click the selection range, hold down Alt/Opt, and drag.
RELATED LINKS
Creating a Selection Range on page 159
Cut, Copy, and Paste of Selection Ranges

You can cut or copy and paste selection ranges, using the functions on the Edit menu. You can
also use the Cut Time and Paste Time options.
Cut
Cuts the data in the selection range and moves it to the clipboard. The selection
range is replaced by empty track space in the Project window, meaning that events
to the right of the range keep their positions.
Copy
Copies the data in the selection range to the clipboard.
Paste
Pastes the clipboard data to the start position and track of the current selection.
Existing events on the tracks remain at their original position.
Paste at Origin
Pastes the clipboard data back at its original position. Existing events on the tracks
remain at their original position.
This option is available in Edit > Functions.
Cut Time
Cuts the selection range and moves it to the clipboard. Events to the right of the
removed range are moved to the left to fill the gap.
This option is available in Edit > Range.
Paste Time
Pastes the selection range from the clipboard to the start position and track of the
current selection. Existing events are moved to make room for the pasted data.
Paste Time at Origin

Pastes the selection range from the clipboard to its original position. Existing events
are moved to make room for the pasted data.
Global Copy
Copies everything between the left and right locator.
162
Range Editing
Deleting Data in Selection Ranges

● To replace data within the deleted selection range with empty track space, select Edit >
Delete or press Backspace.
Events to the right of the range keep their position.
● To remove the selection range and make the events to the right move to the left to fill the
gap, select Edit > Range > Delete Time.
Splitting Selection Ranges

You can split events or parts at the selection range edges, that is, at the start and end of a
selection range.
PROCEDURE
1. On the Project window toolbar, activate the Range Selection tool.
● Select Edit > Range > Split.
● Press Shift-X.
RESULT
The events or parts are split at the selection range edges.
Inserting Silence
You can insert empty track space from the start of the selection range. The length of the silence
equals the length of the selection range.
● To insert silence, select Edit > Range > Insert Silence.

Events to the right of the selection range start are moved to the right to make room.
Events that are intersected by the selection range start are split, and the right section is
moved to the right.
163
Playback and Transport
Cubase offers multiple methods and functions to control playback and transport.
Transport Panel
The Transport panel contains the main transport functions as well as many other options related
to playback and recording.
● To show the Transport panel, select Transport > Transport Panel or press F2.
Transport Panel Sections

The Transport panel has different sections that you can show or hide by activating the
corresponding options on the Transport panel context menu.
● To show all Transport panel sections, right-click anywhere on the Transport panel and
select Show All.
The following sections are available:

Common Record Modes

Common Record Modes
Allow you to determine what happens if you click Record during an audio or MIDI
recording, and where the recording should start.
Audio Record Modes

Audio Record Modes
Allow you to select what happens when you record over existing audio events.
MIDI Record Modes

MIDI Record Modes
Allow you to select what happens when you record over existing MIDI parts.
164
Transport Panel
MIDI Auto Quantize

Automatic MIDI Record Quantize
Activates automatic quantizing during a MIDI recording.
Locators
Locator Range Duration

Locators to Selection
Allows you to set the locators to the selection.
Shows the duration of the locator range.
Punch Points
Punch In
Activates Punch In.
Punch Out
Activates Punch Out.
Transport Controls
165
Transport Panel
Rewind
Moves backward.
Forward
Moves forward.
Cycle
Stop
Stops playback.
Start
Starts playback.
Transport Record
Time Display
Select Primary Time Format
Allows you to select a time format for the primary time display.
Primary Time Display
Shows the position of the project cursor in the selected time format.
Markers
Jump to Marker
Allows you to set and locate marker positions.
Open Markers Window
Pre-roll & Post-roll

Activate Pre-roll
Activates pre-roll.
Pre-roll Amount
Allows you to set the pre-roll position. To show/hide this, click the points on the
divider.
166
Transport Panel
Activate Post-roll
Activates post-roll.
Post-roll Amount
Allows you to set the post-roll position. To show/hide this, click the points on the
divider.
Tempo & Time Signature

Activate Tempo Track
Allows you to activate/deactivate the tempo track.
Tempo
Allows you to set the tempo value.
Time Signature
Allows you to set the first time signature value. To show/hide this, click the points on
the divider.
Activate External Sync

Activates external synchronization.
Open Synchronization Setup
Allows you to open the Project Synchronization Setup dialog.
Click & Count-In & Click Pattern

Activate Metronome Click
Activates the metronome click.
Activate Count-in
Activates the metronome click in count-in.
Open Metronome Setup
Opens the Metronome Setup dialog. To show/hide this, click the points on the
divider.
Input/Output Activity
MIDI In Activity
Displays the MIDI input signals.
167
Transport Menu
MIDI Out Activity
Displays the MIDI output signals.
Audio Activity
Displays the audio input/output signals.
Audio Clipping
Displays audio clipping.
Level Display
Displays the output level.
Level Control
Allows you to control the output level.
Set up Transport
Set up Transport
Opens a pop-up menu where you can set up which elements are visible.
RELATED LINKS
Transport on page 772
Transport - Scrub on page 773
Transport Menu
The Transport menu contains several transport functions as well as many other options related
to playback and recording.
Transport Panel
Opens the Transport panel.
Transport Commands
Start
Starts playback.
Stop
Stops playback.
Start/Stop
Starts/Stops playback.
Cycle
Record
168
Transport Menu
Rewind
Moves backward.
Forward
Moves forward.
Fast Rewind
Moves backward at a faster speed.
Fast Forward
Moves forward at a faster speed.
Nudge Cursor Left

Moves the project cursor position to the left.
Nudge Cursor Right

Moves the project cursor position to the right.
Enter Project Cursor Position

Allows you to enter the project cursor position manually.
Enter Tempo
Allows you to enter the tempo manually.
Enter Time Signature

Allows you to enter the time signature manually.
Go to Project Start
Moves the project cursor position to the start of the project.
Go to Project End
Moves the project cursor position to the end of the project.
Exchange Time Formats

Switches the primary and the secondary time display.
Locators
Moves the project cursor position to the left locator.

Moves the project cursor position to the right locator.
Set Left Locator to Project Cursor Position

Sets the left locator to the project cursor position.
Set Right Locator to Project Cursor Position

Sets the right locator to the project cursor position.
Enter Left Locator Position

Allows you to enter the position of the left locator manually.
Enter Right Locator Position

Allows you to enter the position of the right locator manually.
Enter Locator Range Duration

Allows you to enter the duration of the locator range manually.
Set Locators to Selection Range

Sets the locators to encompass the selection.
169
Transport Menu
Exchange Left & Right Locator Positions

Switches the positions of the left and right locator.
Loop Selection Range

Activates playback from the start of the current selection and keeps starting over
again when reaching the selection end.
Punch Points
Activate Punch In
Activates/Deactivates punch in.
Activate Punch Out

Activates/Deactivates punch out.
Go to Punch In Position (Left Locator)

Moves the project cursor position to the punch in position.
Go to Punch Out Position (Right Locator)

Moves the project cursor position to the punch out position.
Set Project Cursor Position

Locate Selection Start
Moves the project cursor to the beginning of the selection.
Locate Selection End

Moves the project cursor to the end of the selection.
Locate Next Marker

Moves the project cursor to the next marker.
Locate Previous Marker

Moves the project cursor to the previous marker.
Locate Next Hitpoint

Moves the project cursor to the next hitpoint on the selected track.
Locate Previous Hitpoint

Moves the project cursor to the previous hitpoint on the selected track.
Locate Next Event

Moves the project cursor to the next event on the selected track.
Locate Previous Event

Moves the project cursor to the previous event on the selected track.
Play Project Range

Play from Selection Start
Activates playback from the start of the current selection.
Play from Selection End

Activates playback from the end of the current selection.
Play until Selection Start

Activates playback two seconds before the start of the current selection and stops at
the selection start.
170
Transport Menu
Play until Selection End

Activates playback two seconds before the end of the current selection and stops at
the selection end.
Play until Next Marker

Activates playback from the project cursor and stops at the next marker.
Play Selection Range

Activates playback from the start of the current selection and stops at the selection
end.

Use Pre-roll
Activates/Deactivates the pre-roll.
Use Post-roll
Activates/Deactivates the post-roll.
Post-roll from Selection Start

Starts playback from the beginning of the selected range and stops after the time set
in the post-roll field on the Transport panel.
Post-roll from Selection End

Starts playback from the end of the selected range and stops after the time set in the
post-roll field on the Transport panel.
Pre-roll to Selection Start

Stops playback at the selection start. The playback start position is set in the pre-roll
field on the Transport panel.
Pre-roll to Selection End

Stops playback at the selection end. The playback start position is set in the pre-roll
field on the Transport panel.
Use Tempo Track

Activates/Deactivates the tempo track.
Common Record Modes

Punch In/Out
Activates/Deactivates punch in/out.
Re-Record
Activates/Deactivates the re-record mode.
Start Recording at Project Cursor Position

Activates/Deactivates the start of the recording at the project cursor position.
Start Recording at Left Locator/Punch In Position

Activates/Deactivates the start of the recording at the left locator.
Audio Record Mode

These options allow you to select what happens when you record over existing events.
Keep History
Keeps existing events or portions of events.
171
Transport Menu
Cycle History + Replace

Replaces existing events or portions of events by the new recording. In cycle mode,
all takes from the current cycle recording are kept.
Replace
Replaces existing events or portions of events by the last take.
MIDI Record Mode

These options allow you to select what happens when you record over existing parts.
New Parts
Keeps existing parts and saves the new recording as a new part.
Merge
Keeps existing events in parts and adds the newly recorded events.
Replace
Replaces existing events in parts by the new recording.
Auto Quantize in Record

Activates automatic quantizing during recording.
MIDI Cycle Record Mode

Mix
Adds everything you record to what was previously recorded.
Overwrite
Overwrites all MIDI that you have recorded on previous laps as soon as you play a
MIDI note or send any MIDI message.
Keep Last
Replaces previously recorded laps only if the new lap is completed.
Auto Quantize in Record

Activates automatic quantizing during recording.
MIDI Retrospective Recording

Allows you to recover MIDI data that you play in Stop mode or during playback. The following
options are available:
Insert from All MIDI Inputs

Inserts MIDI data that was sent to all track inputs as a linear MIDI part on the
selected track.
Insert from Track Input as Linear Recording

Inserts MIDI data that was sent to the track input as a linear MIDI part on the
selected track.
Insert from Track Input as Cycle Recording

Inserts MIDI data that was sent to the track input as stacked MIDI parts on the
selected track.
Empty All Buffers

Empties the retrospective record buffer for the selected track.
Metronome Setup
Opens the Metronome Setup dialog.
172
Transport Bar
Activate Metronome
Activates/Deactivates the metronome click.
Project Synchronization Setup

Opens the Project Synchronization Setup dialog.

Sets Cubase to be synchronized externally.
RELATED LINKS
Left and Right Locators on page 180
Punch In and Punch Out on page 185
Pre-Roll and Post-Roll on page 184
Audio Record Modes on page 201
Recovery of MIDI Recordings on page 208
Metronome Click on page 185
Transport Bar
The Transport Bar contains all transport functions in an integrated and fixed zone of the Project
window.
● To display all transport elements, right-click in an empty area of the Transport Bar and
select Show All.
● To show all controls of a section, click the points to the right of the section and drag all the
way to the right. To hide the controls again, drag to the left.
RELATED LINKS
Transport Bar Sections

The Transport Bar has different sections that you can show or hide by activating the
corresponding options on the context menu.
● To show/hide tools, open the Transport Bar context menu by right-clicking in an empty
area of the Transport Bar and activate the tools that you want to display. To show all tools,
select Show All.

Minimizes the latency effects of the delay compensation.
173
Transport Bar
Common Record Modes

Common Record Modes
Allow you to determine what happens if you click Record during an audio or MIDI
recording, and where the recording should start.
Audio Record Modes

Audio Record Modes
Allow you to select what happens when you record over existing audio events.
MIDI Record Modes

MIDI Record Modes
Allow you to select what happens when you record over existing MIDI parts.
MIDI Auto Quantize

Activates automatic quantizing during a MIDI recording.
Left Divider
Left Divider

Locators
174
Transport Bar

Punch Points
Punch In
Activates Punch In.
Punch Out
Activates Punch Out.
Transport Controls
Rewind
Moves backward.
Forward
Moves forward.
Cycle
Stop
Stops playback.
Start
Starts playback.
Transport Record
175
Transport Bar
Retrospective Record
Insert Retrospective Recording from All MIDI Inputs on Selected Track
Allows you to recover MIDI notes that you played in stop mode or during playback.
Time Displays
Markers
Jump to Marker
Open Markers Window

Activate Pre-roll
Activates pre-roll.
Pre-roll Amount
Allows you to set the pre-roll position. To show/hide this, click the points on the
divider.
Activate Post-roll
Activates post-roll.
Post-roll Amount
Allows you to set the post-roll position. To show/hide this, click the points on the
divider.
Tempo & Time Signature

Allows you to activate/deactivate the tempo track.
Tempo
Allows you to set the tempo value.
176
Transport Bar
Time Signature
Allows you to set the first time signature value. To show/hide this, click the points on
the divider.
Right Divider
Right Divider

Activates external synchronization.
Open Synchronization Setup
Allows you to open the Project Synchronization Setup dialog.
Click & Count-in

Activates the metronome click.
Activate Count-in
Activates the metronome click in count-in.
Open Metronome Setup
Opens the Metronome Setup dialog. To show/hide this, click the points on the
divider.
Input/Output Activity
MIDI In Activity
Displays the MIDI input signals.
MIDI Out Activity
Displays the MIDI output signals.
Audio Activity
Displays the audio input/output signals.
Audio Clipping
Displays audio clipping.
Level Display
177
Transport Pop-Up Window
Displays the output level.
Level Control
Allows you to control the output level.
Set up Transport Bar

Set up Transport
Opens a pop-up menu where you can set up which elements are visible.
Transport Pop-Up Window

The Transport pop-up window allows you to access specific transport commands if the
Transport panel, the Transport Bar, and theTransport Controls in the Project window toolbar
are closed or hidden.
The following default key commands open the Transport Bar pop-up window:
Enter Left Locator

Shift-L
Enter Right Locator

Shift-R
Enter Project Cursor Position

Shift-P
Enter Tempo
Shift-T
Enter Time Signature

Shift-C
Enter Punch In Position

Shift-I
Enter Punch Out Position

Shift-O
Go to Left Locator
Num 1
Go to Right Locator
Num 2
Using a specific key command opens the corresponding section of the Transport pop-up
window:
Transport pop-up window for entering the left Locator position.
NOTE
To close the Transport pop-up window, press Esc.
178
Time Display Window
Time Display Window

The Time Display window allows you to view the current time position in a separate window. You
can adjust its size and specify the time format that you want to display.
● To open the Time Display window, select Studio > More Options > Time Display.
Right-click the window to access the following options:
Bars+Beats
Displays the time in bars and beats.
Seconds
Displays the time in seconds.
fps
Displays the time in frames per second.
Samples
Displays the time in samples.
Show Beat Count Only

Shows the beat counts only. This is useful if you want to use the Time Display
window as a visual metronome.
Increase Window Size

Increases the size of the window and the displayed values.
Decrease Window Size

Decreases the size of the window and the displayed values.
NOTE
You can set up the Window Transparency in the Studio Setup dialog (Time Display page).
RELATED LINKS
Time Signature Events on page 679
179
Left and Right Locators

The left and right locators are a pair of markers that you can use as reference positions in the
Project window and in the editors.
Locators help you, for example, to do the following:
● Positioning the project cursor.

● Defining start and stop positions for recording.
● Defining start positions for importing or exporting events.
● Setting up a cycle range.
● Selecting, copying, creating or splitting events.
Locators are indicated by the flags in the ruler.
The area between the left and the right locator is the locator range. The locator range is
highlighted in the ruler and the event display.
NOTE
In the event display of the MIDI editors, the locator range is only highlighted if Show Part
Borders is deactivated.
● To activate/deactivate cycle mode, click the locator range in the upper part of the ruler, or
activate Activate Cycle in the transport controls.
● NOTE
If you activate cycle mode, and the right locator is positioned before the left locator, the
locator range is skipped during playback.
RELATED LINKS
Setting the Project Cursor on page 182
Activating Recording Manually on page 194
Activating Recording Automatically on page 194
Cycle Recording on page 195
Import Options for MIDI Files on page 220
Export Options Dialog for MIDI Files on page 128
Export Audio Mixdown on page 680
Setting the Locators Using Cycle Markers on page 253
Select Submenu on page 147
Cut, Copy, and Paste of Selection Ranges on page 162
Audio Parts on page 145
MIDI Parts on page 145
180
Fill Loop on page 157

Splitting Events on page 153
Setting the Left Locator

Setting the left locator can be useful if you want to add a reference position in the Project
window and in the editors.
PROCEDURE
● Press Ctrl/Cmd and click in the upper part of the ruler to set the left locator to that
position.
● Adjust the Left Locator Position value.
This is available in the Locators section of the Project window toolbar, the editor
toolbars, the Transport panel, and the Transport Bar.
● Drag the left locator handle in the upper part of the ruler.
● Press Ctrl/Cmd, and on the numeric keypad press 1 to set the left locator to the
project cursor position.
● Press Alt/Opt and click Go to Left Locator Position on the Transport panel.
Setting the Right Locator

Setting the right locator can be useful if you want to add a reference position in the Project
window and in the editors.
PROCEDURE
● Press Alt/Opt and click in the upper part of the ruler to set the right locator to that
position.
● Adjust the Right Locator Position value.
This is available in the Locators section of the Project window toolbar, the editor
toolbars, the Transport panel, and the Transport Bar.
● Drag the right locator handle in the upper part of the ruler.
● Press Ctrl/Cmd, and on the numeric keypad press 2 to set the right locator to the
project cursor position.
● Press Alt/Opt and click Go to Right Locator Position on the Transport panel.
Setting up Locator Ranges

You can set up the locator range, that is, the area between the left and the right locator.
PROCEDURE
● Click and drag in the upper part of the ruler.
● Select a range or an event and press P to set the locators to the selection.
● Double-click a cycle marker.
181
Setting the Project Cursor
● Press Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt and click at a position in the upper part of the ruler to set
both locators to the nearest snap position.
RESULT
The locator range is set up and highlighted in the ruler and the event display.
Moving Locator Ranges

In the ruler, you can move the locator range.
PREREQUISITE
You have set up a locator range.
PROCEDURE
1. Move the mouse pointer to the upper part of the ruler inside a locator range.
A hand symbol is shown.
2. Click and drag to the left or to the right to move the locator range.
Setting the Project Cursor

You can set the project cursor to the position where you click, or to markers or other predefined
positions.
PROCEDURE
● Hold down Shift-Alt/Opt and click in the Project window event display.
● Click Go to Previous Marker/Zero or Go to Next Marker/Project End.
These are available in the Transport Controls section of the Project window
toolbar, the editor toolbars, the Transport panel, and the Transport Bar.
● Click in the lower part of the ruler.
● Select Transport > Set Project Cursor Position, and select an entry in the submenu.
RELATED LINKS
Transport Panel Sections on page 164
Ruler on page 40
Transport Menu on page 168
Key Commands on page 729
Auto-Scroll Settings Menu

Auto-Scroll allows you to keep the project cursor visible in the window during playback.
If you activate Auto-Scroll on the toolbar of the Project window or one of the editors, the
following modes are available in the Select Auto-Scroll Settings pop-up menu:
182
Time Formats
Page Scroll
The project cursor moves from the left side to the right side of the window. When the
project cursor reaches the right side of the window, the ruler and the project cursor
jump to the left side of the window and start over again. This behavior can be
compared to turning a page of a book.
Stationary Cursor
The project cursor is kept in the middle of the window and the ruler scrolls
continuously to the left.
RELATED LINKS
Suspend Auto-Scroll When Editing

If you do not want the Project window display to change when editing during playback, activate
Suspend Auto-Scroll when Editing.
Suspend Auto-Scroll when Editing is available as an option in the Select Auto-Scroll Settings
pop-up menu to the right of the Auto-Scroll button.
If this option is activated, auto-scrolling is suspended as soon as you click anywhere in the event
display during playback until playback stops or you click Auto-Scroll again.
As a visual feedback, the Auto-Scroll button changes its color.
Time Formats
You can set up different time formats.
Selecting the Primary Time Format

On the Transport panel, you can select the primary time format. This is the global display format
that is used for all rulers and position displays in the program, except the ruler tracks.
PROCEDURE
1. In the main transport section on the Transport panel, click Select Primary Time Format.
2. Select a time format from the pop-up menu.
You can also select Project > Project Setup > Display Format to select the primary time
format.
RESULT
The time format on the Transport panel and all rulers and position displays is updated.
183
Pre-Roll and Post-Roll
Independent Time Displays

You can show time displays that are independent from the global display format.
To select an independent time display, do one of the following:
● In the ruler of the Project window or any editor, click the arrow button to the right of the
ruler.
● Select Project > Add Track > Ruler to add a ruler track, and right-click the ruler.
● In the Main Transport section of the Transport panel, click Select Secondary Time
Format.
RELATED LINKS
Ruler on page 40
Ruler Track on page 115
Pre-Roll and Post-Roll

You can activate pre-roll and post-roll with the corresponding buttons in the Pre-roll & Post-roll
section on the Transport panel or by selecting Transport > Pre-roll & Post-roll > Use Pre-
roll/Use Post-roll.
NOTE
To show the Pre-roll & Post-roll section, right-click anywhere in the Transport panel or in the
Transport Bar and activate Pre-roll & Post-roll.
● By setting a pre-roll value, you instruct Cubase to roll back a short section whenever
playback is activated.
● By setting a post-roll value, you instruct Cubase to play back a short section after
automatic punch out before stopping.
NOTE
This only works if Punch Out is activated on the Transport panel, and if Stop after
Automatic Punch Out is activated in the Preferences dialog (Record page).
Using Pre-Roll and Post-Roll

You can set up a pre-roll and a post-roll value for recording.
PREREQUISITE
PROCEDURE
1. Set the locators to where you want to start and end recording.
2. On the Transport panel or in the Transport Bar, activate Punch In and Punch Out.
3. In the Preferences dialog, select Record.
4. Activate Stop after Automatic Punch Out.
5. Right-click anywhere on the Transport panel or in the Transport Bar and activate Pre-roll
& Post-roll.
6. In the Pre-roll & Post-roll section, activate Pre-roll and Post-roll .
184
Punch In and Punch Out
7. In the Pre-roll Amount and Post-roll Amount fields, enter the pre-roll and post-roll
values.
8. Activate Record.
RESULT
The project cursor rolls back by the specified pre-roll value and playback starts. When the cursor
reaches the left locator, recording is automatically activated. When the cursor reaches the right
locator, recording is deactivated, but playback continues for the specified post-roll value before
stopping.
Punch In and Punch Out

The punch in and the punch out points are a pair of markers that you can use for punch in and
punch out of recordings. The punch in position determines the record start position and the
punch out position determines the record stop position.
You can activate punch in and punch out by activating the corresponding buttons on the
Transport panel.
The punch in position is locked to the left locator position and the punch out position to the right
locator position.
RELATED LINKS
Activating Recording Automatically on page 194
Stopping Recording Automatically with Punch Out on page 195
Metronome Click
You can use the metronome click as a timing reference for playing along and recording. The two
parameters that govern the timing of the metronome are project tempo and the time signature
that you can set up on the Transport panel.
● To activate the metronome click, activate Activate Metronome Click on the Transport
panel.
You can also select Transport > Activate Metronome or use the corresponding key
command.
● To define if the metronome click is played during playback, recording or count-in, select
Transport > Metronome Setup and make your changes on the General tab.
● To set up the sounds for the metronome click, select Transport > Metronome Setup and
make your changes on the Click Sounds tab.
RELATED LINKS
Project Tempo Modes on page 671
Metronome Setup Dialog

The Metronome Setup dialog allows you to make settings for the metronome.
To open the Metronome Setup dialog, do one of the following:
● Select Transport > Metronome Setup.

● In the Transport Bar, open the Click & Count-In section, and click Open Metronome
Setup.
185
Metronome Click
RELATED LINKS
General Tab on page 187
Click Sounds Tab on page 188
Transport Bar Sections on page 173
186
Metronome Click
General Tab
The General tab allows you to make basic metronome settings.
In the topmost section, the following options are available:

Activates/Deactivates the metronome click.
In the Click Destinations section, the following options are available:
Use MIDI Click

Activates a MIDI click for the metronome.
Use Audio Click

Activates an audio click for the metronome that is output via the audio hardware.
In the Click Options section, the following options are available:
Click while Recording

Activates the metronome click during recording.
Click while Playing

Activates the metronome click during playback.
Click during Count-In

Activates a musical count-in that is played when you start recording from stop mode.
In the Count-In section, the following options are available:
● Number of Bars in Count-In

Allows you to set the number of bars that the metronome counts in before
recording starts.
● Time Signature at Record Start Position
187
Metronome Click
Activate this to let the count-in automatically use the time signature and
tempo set at the position where recording starts.
● Time Signature at Project Position
Activate this to let the count-in use the time signature at the project position.
● Use Custom Time Signature
Allows you to set a time signature for the count-in. In this mode, signature
changes in the project do not affect the count-in.
Click Sounds Tab

The Click Sounds tab allows you to set up and audition the MIDI click and the audio click. You
can use the default audio or MIDI click, choose from a list of factory preset sounds, or assign
your own custom sounds.
The MIDI Click Settings section allows you to set up the MIDI click that sounds if you activate
Use MIDI Click in the Click Destinations section on the General tab.
MIDI Output Port

Allows you to select a MIDI output port for the MIDI click. You can also select a VST
instrument previously set up in the VST Instruments window.
MIDI Output Channel

Allows you to select a MIDI output channel for the MIDI click.
Note
Allows you to set the MIDI note number, that is, the pitch from C-2 to G8. Set the
note number for the first beat in a bar in the top row, and the note numbers for the
other beats in the rows below.
188
Metronome Click
Velocity
Allows you to set the velocity of the MIDI click sound. Set the velocity for the first
beat in a bar in the top row, and the velocities for the other beats in the rows below.
The Audio Click Settings section allows you to set up the audio click that sounds if you activate
Use Audio Click in the Click Destinations section on the General tab.
Use Steinberg Click Sound

Activates the default sounds for the metronome click.
Pitch
Allows you to set the pitch for the default sounds. Set the pitch for the first beat in a
bar in the top row, and the pitches for the other beats in the rows below.
Level
Allows you to set the level for the default sounds. Set the level for the first beat in a
bar in the top row, and the levels for the other beats in the rows below.
Use Custom Sounds

Activates custom sounds for the metronome click. For this to work, you must select
an audio file for the custom sounds by clicking in the Sound column.
Sound
Allows you to select an audio file for the custom sounds. Select an audio file for the
first beat in a bar in the top row, and the audio files for the other beats in the rows
below.
Level
Allows you to set the level for the custom sounds. Set the level for the first beat in a
bar in the top row, and the levels for the other beats in the rows below.
Audio Click Level

Allows you to adjust the level of the audio click.
Click Sound Presets

Allows you to load one of the click sound presets that supports up to 4 accents.
Amongst other click sounds that are suited for a broad range of applications, you can
also select Steinberg Click Sound, the default click sound of Cubase.
You can also create your own presets and save them.
Audition Click Sounds

Click Play to audition the activated click sounds.
Setting up a Custom Audio Click Sound

If you do not want to use the default click sound, you can set up your own custom sound.
PREREQUISITE
In the Metronome Setup dialog on the General tab, Activate Metronome Click is activated. In
the Click Destinations section, Use Audio Click is activated.
PROCEDURE
1. Open the Click Sounds tab, and in the Audio Click Settings section, activate Use Custom
Sounds.
2. In the Sound column, click the top row.
3. In the file dialog, navigate to the audio file that you want to use as a custom sound for the
first beat and select it.
4. Click Open.
189
Chase
5. Click the other rows to select audio files for the other beats.
6. Set the level of the sounds by clicking the respective rows in the Level column and
adjusting the value.
7. Optional: Click Play to audition the custom sounds.
RESULT
The metronome uses the defined custom sounds for the audio click.
Open the Click Sound Presets pop-up menu and save your custom sounds as a preset.
Chase
Chase is a function that makes sure your MIDI instruments sound as they should when you
locate to a new position and start playback. This is accomplished by the program transmitting a
number of MIDI messages to your instruments each time that you move to a new position in the
project, making sure all MIDI devices are set up correctly with regard to program change,
controller messages (such as MIDI volume), etc.
EXAMPLE
You have a MIDI track with a program change event inserted at the beginning. This event makes
a synth switch to a piano sound.
At the beginning of the first chorus, you have another program change event which makes the
same synth switch to a string sound.
You now play back the song. It begins with the piano sound and then switches to the string
sound. In the middle of the chorus you stop and rewind to some point between the beginning
and the second program change. The synth now still plays the string sound although in this
section it really should be a piano.
The Chase function takes care of that. If program change events are set to be chased, Cubase
tracks the music back to the beginning, finds the first program change, and transmits it to your
synth, setting it to the correct sound.
The same can apply to other event types as well. In the Preferences dialog (MIDI page), the
Chase Events settings determine which event types are chased when you locate to a new
position and start playback.
RELATED LINKS
Chase Events on page 767
190
On-Screen Keyboard
The On-Screen Keyboard allows you to play and record MIDI notes by using your computer
keyboard or mouse. This is useful if you have no external MIDI instrument at hand and you do
not want to draw in notes with the Draw tool.
When the On-Screen Keyboard is displayed, the usual key commands are blocked because they
are reserved for the On-Screen Keyboard. The only exceptions are:
● Save: Ctrl/Cmd-S
● Start/Stop Record: Num *
● Start/Stop Playback: Space
● Jump to Left Locator: Num 1
● Delete: Delete or Backspace
● Cycle on/off: Num /
● Show/Hide Transport panel: F2
● Show/Hide On-Screen Keyboard: Alt/Opt-K
Recording MIDI With the On-Screen Keyboard

You can use the On-Screen Keyboard to record MIDI in Cubase.
PREREQUISITE
You have selected a MIDI or instrument track and activated Record Enable.
PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > On-Screen Keyboard.
2. Activate Record.
3. Perform one of the following actions to enter some notes:
● Click on the keys of the On-Screen Keyboard.
● Press the corresponding key on your computer keyboard.
NOTE
Press several keys simultaneously to enter polyphonic parts. The maximum number of
notes that can be played at one time varies between the different operating systems and
hardware configurations.

Close the On-Screen Keyboard to make all key commands available again.
191
On-Screen Keyboard
On-Screen Keyboard Options
On-Screen Keyboard Options

The On-Screen Keyboard offers different display modes as well as other options.
● To open the On-Screen Keyboard, select Studio > On-Screen Keyboard.
1 Note Velocity Level

This slider allows you to adjust the volume of the On-Screen Keyboard. You can also use
Up Arrow or Down Arrow for this.
2 Change On-Screen Keyboard Type
This button allows you to switch between computer keyboard and piano keyboard display
mode.
In computer keyboard mode, you can use the two rows of keys that are displayed on the
On-Screen Keyboard to enter notes.
The piano keyboard has a wider range of keys. It allows you to enter more than one voice
simultaneously. You can also use Tab for this.
3 Octave Offset
These buttons allow you to switch the keyboard range to a lower or higher octave. You
have seven full octaves at your disposal. You can also use Left Arrow or Right Arrow for
this.
4 Pitchbend/Modulation Sliders
These sliders are only available in piano keyboard mode. The left slider displays pitchbend,
the right slider shows modulation changes. To introduce modulation, click on a key and
drag upwards or downwards. To introduce pitchbend, drag left or right.
192
Recording
In Cubase, you can record audio and MIDI.
Make the following initial preparations:
● Set up, connect, and calibrate your audio hardware.

● Open a project and set up the parameters in the Project Setup dialog according to your
specifications.
The parameters in the Project Setup dialog determine the record file format, sample rate,
project length, etc. that affect the audio recordings that you make during the course of the
project.
● If you plan to record MIDI, set up and connect your MIDI equipment.
RELATED LINKS
Setting up Audio on page 13
Setting up MIDI on page 20
Basic Recording Methods

The basic recording methods apply to audio and MIDI recordings.
Record Enabling Tracks

To be able to record, you must record-enable the tracks on which you want to record.
PROCEDURE
● Activate Record Enable in the track list.
● Activate Record Enable in the MixConsole.
● Select the track that you want to record-enable, and activate Record Enable in the
Inspector.
RESULT
The tracks are record-enabled.
NOTE
If you set up a key command for Activate Record Enable for all Audio Tracks in the Mixer
category of the Key Commands dialog, you can record-enable all audio tracks simultaneously.
The exact number of audio tracks that you can record simultaneously depends on your computer
CPU and hard disk performance. Activate the Warn on Processing Overloads option in the
Preferences dialog (VST page) to show a warning message as soon as the CPU overload
indicator lights up during recording.
193
Recording
RELATED LINKS
Editing - Project & MixConsole on page 760
VST on page 775
Record Enabling Tracks on Selection

You can set up a preference so that tracks are record-enabled when you select them.
PROCEDURE
2. Open the Editing—Project & MixConsole page and activate Enable Record on Selected
Audio Track or Enable Record on Selected MIDI Track.
RESULT
The tracks are record-enabled when you select them.
Activating Recording Manually

You can activate recording manually.
PROCEDURE
● Click Record on the Transport panel, on the toolbar, or in the Transport Bar.
● Press Num *.
RESULT
Recording starts from the current cursor position.
NOTE
When you start recording in stop mode, you can start recording from the left locator. For this to
work, you must select Transport > Common Record Modes and activate Start Record at Left
Locator/Punch In Position. The metronome count-in will be applied.
Activating Recording Automatically

Cubase can automatically switch from playback to recording at a given position. This is useful if
you must replace a section of a recording and want to listen to what is already recorded up to the
recording start position.
PROCEDURE
1. Set the left locator to the position where you want to start recording.
2. Activate Punch In on the Transport panel.
3. Activate playback from any position before the left locator.
RESULT
When the project cursor reaches the left locator, recording is automatically activated.
RELATED LINKS
194
Recording
Stopping Recording
You can stop recording manually.
PROCEDURE
● Click Stop on the Transport panel.
● Press Num *.
RESULT
Recording stops while playback continues.
Stopping Recording Automatically with Punch Out

Activating Punch Out allows you to stop recording automatically at the defined punch out
position.
PROCEDURE
● Activate Punch Out on the Transport panel.
RESULT
Recording stops automatically when the project cursor reaches the punch out position. Playback
continues.
RELATED LINKS
Stopping Recording and Playback

You can stop recording and playback manually.
PROCEDURE
● Click Stop on the Transport panel.
● Press Num 0.
RESULT
Recording and playback stops.
Cycle Recording
You can record in a cycle, that is, you can record a selected section repeatedly and seamlessly.
PREREQUISITE
A cycle is set up with the left and right locators.
PROCEDURE
1. Click Activate Cycle on the Transport panel to activate cycle mode.
2. Activate recording from the left locator, before or within the cycle.
195
Recording
As soon as the project cursor reaches the right locator, it jumps back to the left locator and
continues recording a new lap.
RESULT
The results of cycle recording depend on the selected record mode. They also differ for audio and
MIDI.
RELATED LINKS
MIDI Recording on page 205
Audio Recording on page 201
Common Record Modes Menu

The Common Record Modes determine what happens if you click Record during an audio or
MIDI recording.
● To access the record modes, select Transport > Common Record Modes.
You can also access the Common Record Modes by clicking the upper part of the Record
Modes section on the Transport panel.
Punch In/Out
In this mode, the recording is stopped.
Re-Record
In this mode, the recording is reinitiated, the events are removed, and recording is
restarted from the exact same position.
Start Recording at Project Cursor Position

In this mode, recording starts from the cursor position.
Start Recording at Left Locator/Punch In Position

In this mode, recording starts from the left locator.
RELATED LINKS
Re-Recording
If you activate the Re-Record mode, you can reinitiate your recording by hitting the Record
button again. Recording will restart from the initial position.
PROCEDURE
1. Select Transport > Common Record Modes, and activate Re-Record.
2. Activate recording.
3. Click Record again to restart recording.
RESULT
The project cursor jumps back to the record start position and recording is reinitiated.
NOTE
The previous recordings are removed from the project and cannot be retrieved using Undo.
However, they remain in the Pool.
196
Recording
Monitoring
Monitoring
In Cubase, monitoring means listening to the input signal while preparing to record or while
recording.
The following ways of monitoring are available.
● Via Cubase.
● Externally by listening to the signal before it reaches Cubase.
● By using ASIO Direct Monitoring.
This is a combination of both other methods.
Monitoring via Cubase

If you use monitoring via Cubase, the input signal is mixed with the audio playback. This requires
an audio hardware configuration with a low latency value.
PROCEDURE
1. In the track list, activate Monitor.
2. In the MixConsole, adjust the monitoring level and the panning.

You can add effects and EQ to the monitor signal using the track’s channel. If you are using
plug-in effects with large inherent delays, the automatic delay compensation function in
Cubase will increase the latency. If this is a problem, you can use the Constrain Delay
Compensation function while recording.
3. In the Preferences dialog, select VST.
4. Open the Auto Monitoring pop-up menu and select a monitoring mode.
RESULT
The monitored signal will be delayed according to the latency value which depends on your
audio hardware and drivers. You can check the latency of your hardware in the Studio Setup
dialog (Audio System page).
RELATED LINKS
VST on page 775
External Monitoring
External monitoring means listening to the input signal before it is sent into Cubase. It requires
an external mixer for mixing the audio playback with the input signal. The latency value of the
audio hardware configuration does not affect the monitor signal. When using external
monitoring, you cannot control the level of the monitor signal from within Cubase or add VST
effects or EQ to the monitor signal.
PROCEDURE
2. Open the Auto Monitoring pop-up menu and select Manual.
3. Deactivate Monitor in Cubase.
4. On your mixing desk or mixer application for your audio hardware, activate the Thru or
Direct Thru mode to send the input audio back out again.
197
Recording
Monitoring
ASIO Direct Monitoring

If your audio hardware is ASIO 2.0 compatible, it may support ASIO Direct Monitoring. This
feature may also be available for audio hardware with macOS drivers. In ASIO Direct Monitoring
mode, the monitoring is done in the audio hardware, and monitoring is controlled from Cubase.
The latency value of the audio hardware configuration does not affect the monitor signal when
using ASIO Direct Monitoring.
PROCEDURE

3. In the Devices list, select your audio hardware driver, and activate Direct Monitoring.
If the checkbox is grayed out, your audio hardware (or its driver) does not support ASIO
Direct Monitoring. Consult the audio hardware manufacturer for details.
5. Open the Auto Monitoring pop-up menu and select a monitoring mode.
6. In the MixConsole, adjust the monitoring level and panning.
Depending on the audio hardware, this might not be possible.

You can monitor the input levels of audio tracks, that is, you can map the input bus metering to
monitor-enabled audio tracks and watch the input levels of your audio tracks when working in
the Project window.
● Activate Map Input Bus Metering to Audio Track (in Direct Monitoring) in the
Preferences dialog (Metering page).
As the tracks are mirroring the input bus signal you will see the same signal in both places.
When using mapped metering, any functions that you apply to the audio track are not
reflected in its meters.
RELATED LINKS
VST on page 775
Monitoring MIDI Tracks

You can monitor everything you play and record through the MIDI output and channel that are
selected for the MIDI track.
PREREQUISITE
Local Off is activated on your MIDI instrument.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Preferences dialog, select MIDI.
2. Make sure MIDI Thru Active is activated.
198
Recording
Audio Recording Specifics
RESULT
Incoming MIDI is echoed back out again.
RELATED LINKS
MIDI on page 766

Specific preparations and settings are required for audio recording.
Audio Recording Preparations

Before you can record audio, you must make some preparations.
Selecting a Record File Format

You can set up the record file format, that is, the sample rate, bit depth, and record file type for
new audio files.
PROCEDURE
1. Select Project > Project Setup.
2. Set up the settings for Sample Rate, Bit Depth, and Record File Type.
IMPORTANT
The bit depth and file type can be changed at any time while the sample rate of a project
cannot be changed at a later stage.
RELATED LINKS
Creating New Projects on page 74
Setting the Audio Record Folder

Each Cubase project has a project folder containing an Audio folder. By default, this is where
recorded audio files are stored. However, you can select record folders independently for each
audio track if needed.
PROCEDURE
1. In the track list, select all tracks to which you want to assign the same record folder.
2. Right-click one of the tracks to open the context menu.
3. Select Set Record Folder.
4. In the file dialog, navigate to the folder that you want to use as record folder or create a
new folder by clicking New Folder.
If you want to have separate folders for different types of material (speech, ambient
sounds, music, etc.), you can create subfolders within the project Audio folder and assign
different tracks to different subfolders. This way, all audio files still reside within the
project folder, which makes managing the project easier.
199
Recording
Getting the Track Ready for Recording

Before you can record audio, you must add a track and set it up.
Adding a Track and Setting the Channel Configuration

To record audio, you must add an audio track and set up its channel configuration. The channel
configuration of the track determines the channel configuration of the recorded audio file.
PROCEDURE
2. Click Audio.
3. In the Count value field, select the number of tracks that you want to add.
4. Open the Configuration pop-up menu and select a channel configuration.
5. Optional: In the Name field, enter a track name.
6. Click Add Track.
RELATED LINKS
RAM Requirements for Recording

Each track on which you record requires a certain amount of RAM, and the memory usage
increases the longer the recording lasts. For each audio channel, 2.4 MB of RAM are required for
MixConsole settings, etc. The memory usage increases with the length of the recording, the
sample rate, and the number of tracks you record. Consider the RAM limitation of your operating
system when setting up your project for recording.
Selecting an Input Bus for the Track

Before you can record on your track, you must add and set up the required input busses and
specify from which input bus the track will record.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Inspector for the audio track, open the Input Routing pop-up menu.
2. Select an input bus.
RELATED LINKS
Setting up Input and Output Ports on page 19
Audio Bus Setup on page 19
Audio Track Inspector on page 98
200
Recording
Audio Recording
You can record audio using any of the basic recording methods.
When you finish recording, an audio file is created in the Audio folder within the project folder.
In the Pool, an audio clip is created for the audio file, and an audio event that plays the whole clip
appears on the recording track. Finally, a waveform image is calculated for the audio event. If the
recording was very long, this may take a while.
NOTE
The waveform image is calculated and displayed during the actual recording process. This real-
time calculation uses some processing power. If your processor is slow or if you are working on a
CPU-intensive project, deactivate Create Audio Images during Record in the Preferences
dialog (Record—Audio page).
RELATED LINKS
Cycle Recording on page 195
Audio Record Modes

By selecting an Audio Record Mode, you decide what happens to your recording and to any
existing events on the track where you are recording. This is necessary because you will not
always record on an empty track. There may be situations where you record over existing events,
especially in cycle mode.
● To access the record modes, select Transport > Audio Record Mode.
You can also access the Audio Record Modes by clicking to the right of the audio symbol
in the Record Modes section on the Transport panel.
Keep History
Existing events or portions of events that are overlapped by a new recording are
kept.
Cycle History + Replace

replaced by the new recording. However, if you record in cycle mode, all takes from
the current cycle recording are kept.
Replace
replaced by the last recorded take.
RELATED LINKS
Recording and Effects

Cubase allows you to add effects and/or EQ directly while recording. This is done by adding insert
effects and/or making EQ settings for the input channel in the MixConsole.
IMPORTANT
If you record with effects, the effects become part of the audio file itself. You cannot change the
effect settings after recording.
201
Recording
When you are recording with effects, consider using 32-bit float or 64-bit float format. This way,
the bit depth will not be reduced, which means there is no risk of clipping at this stage. Also, this
preserves the signal quality perfectly. If you record in 16-bit or 24-bit format, the available
headroom is lower, which means clipping can occur if the signal is too loud.
Undoing Recordings
You can undo a recording immediately after recording it.
PROCEDURE
● Select Edit > Undo.
RESULT
● The events that you just recorded are deleted from the Project window.
● The audio clips in the Pool are moved to the trash folder.
To remove the recorded audio files from the hard disk, select Media > Open Pool Window, right-
click the Trash icon and select Empty Trash.
RELATED LINKS
Pool Window on page 415
Recovery of Audio Recordings

Cubase allows you to recover audio recordings.
You can recover audio recordings in two situations:
● You hit Record too late.

For this to work, you must specify an audio pre-record time.
● The system failed during recording.
Specifying an Audio Pre-Record Time

You can capture up to 1 minute of any incoming audio that you play in stop mode or during
playback. This is possible because Cubase can capture audio input in buffer memory, even when
not recording.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Preferences dialog, select Record > Audio.
2. Specify a time (up to 60 seconds) in the Audio Pre-Record Seconds field.
This activates the buffering of audio input, making pre-record possible.
3. Make sure that an audio track is record-enabled and receives audio from the signal source.
4. When you have played some audio material that you want to capture (either in stop mode
or during playback), click Record.
5. Stop the recording after a few seconds.
This creates an audio event that starts where the cursor position was when you activated
recording. If you were in stop mode, and the cursor was at the beginning of the project,
you may have to move the event to the right in the next step. If you were playing along to
a project, you leave the event where it is.
6. Select the Object Selection tool and place the cursor on the bottom left edge of the event
so that a double arrow appears. Then click and drag to the left.
202
Recording
MIDI Recording Specifics
RESULT
The event is now extended, and the audio that you played before activating the recording is
inserted. This means that if you played along during playback, the captured notes end up exactly
where you played them in relation to the project.
RELATED LINKS
Record - Audio on page 771
Recovery of Audio Recordings after System Failure

Cubase allows you to recover audio recordings after a system failure, because of a power cut or
other mishap, for example.
When you experience a computer crash during a recording, relaunch the system and check the
project record folder. By default, this is the Audio subfolder inside the project folder. It should
contain the audio file that you recorded, from the moment when you started recording to the
time when your computer crashed.
NOTE
● This feature does not constitute an overall guarantee by Steinberg. While the program
itself was improved in such a way that audio recordings can be recovered after a system
failure, it is always possible that a computer crash, power cut, etc. might have damaged
another component of the computer, making it impossible to save or recover any of the
data.
● Do not try to actively bring about this kind of situation to test this feature. Although the
internal program processes have been improved to cope with such situations, Steinberg
cannot guarantee that other parts of the computer are not damaged as a consequence.

Specific preparations and settings are required for MIDI recordings.
RELATED LINKS
MIDI Recording Specifics on page 203
Recording in MIDI Editors on page 205
MIDI Recording Preparations

The preparations described in the following sections mainly focus on external MIDI devices.
MIDI Instruments and Channels

Most MIDI synthesizers can play several sounds at the same time, each on a different MIDI
channel. This allows you to play back several sounds (bass, piano, etc.) from the same
instrument.
Some devices, such as General MIDI compatible sound modules, always receive on all 16 MIDI
channels. If you have such an instrument, there is no specific setting to make in the instrument.
On other instruments, you must use the front panel controls to set up a number of parts,
timbres, or similar so that they all receive on one MIDI channel.
For more information, refer to the manual that came with your instrument.
203
Recording
Naming MIDI Ports

MIDI inputs and outputs are often displayed with long and complicated names. In Cubase, you
can rename your MIDI ports to more descriptive names.
PROCEDURE
The available MIDI inputs and outputs are listed. On Windows, the device to choose
depends on your system.
3. Click in the Show As column and type in a new name.
4. Click OK.
RESULT
The new port names appear on the Input Routing and Output Routing pop-up menus.
Setting the MIDI Input

In the Inspector, you set the MIDI input for the track.
PROCEDURE
1. In the track list, select the track to which you want to assign a MIDI input.
2. In the topmost Inspector section, open the Input Routing pop-up menu and select an
input.
The available inputs depend on the type of MIDI interface that you are using. If you hold
down Shift-Alt/Opt, the selected MIDI input is used for all selected MIDI tracks.
NOTE
If you select All MIDI Inputs, the track will receive MIDI data from all available MIDI
inputs.
Setting the MIDI Channel and Output

The MIDI channel and output settings determine where the recorded MIDI is routed during
playback. They are also relevant for monitoring MIDI in Cubase. You can select the channel and
output in the track list or in the Inspector.
PROCEDURE
1. In the track list, select the track to which you want to assign a MIDI channel and output.
2. In the topmost Inspector section, open the Output Routing pop-up menu and select an
output.
The available outputs depend on the type of MIDI interface that you are using. If you hold
down Shift-Alt/Opt, the selected MIDI output is used for all selected MIDI tracks.
3. Open the Channel pop-up menu and select a MIDI channel.
NOTE
If you select the Any MIDI channel, the MIDI material is routed to the channels that are
used by your MIDI instrument.
204
Recording
Selecting a Sound
You can select sounds from within Cubase by instructing the program to send Program Change
and Bank Select messages to your MIDI device.
PROCEDURE
1. In the track list, select the track to which you want to assign a sound.
2. In the track list or the Inspector, open the Program Selector pop-up menu and select a
program.
Program Change messages give access to 128 different program locations.
3. If your MIDI instruments have more than 128 programs, you can open the Bank Selector
pop-up menu and select different banks, each containing 128 programs.
NOTE
Bank Select messages are recognized differently by different MIDI instruments. The
structure and numbering of banks and programs may also vary. Refer to the
documentation of your MIDI instruments for details.
RELATED LINKS
Recording in MIDI Editors

You can record MIDI data into the MIDI part that is opened in a MIDI editor.
PREREQUISITE
You have selected Merge or Replace as MIDI Record Mode.
PROCEDURE
1. Click in the MIDI editor so that it gets the focus.
2. In the MIDI editor toolbar, activate Record in Editor.
3. Do one of the following to activate recording:
● Click Record on the Transport panel.
● Click Record on the toolbar.
RESULT
The MIDI data is recorded into the MIDI part that is opened in the MIDI editor. If you record
outside the part borders, the part is automatically enlarged.
RELATED LINKS
Key Editor Toolbar on page 572
MIDI Recording
You can record MIDI using any of the basic recording methods.
When you finish recording, a part that contains MIDI events is created in the Project window.
NOTE
If you perform a live recording on a VST instrument, you usually compensate the latency of the
audio card by playing earlier. In consequence, the timestamps are recorded too early. If you
205
Recording
activate ASIO Latency Compensation on the track list, all recorded events are moved by the
current latency setting.
The following preferences affect MIDI recording:
● Length Adjustment
● Snap MIDI Parts to Bars
● MIDI Record Catch Range in ms
● ASIO Latency Compensation Active by Default
You can find them in the Preferences dialog on the MIDI and on the Record—MIDI page.
RELATED LINKS
MIDI on page 766
Record - MIDI on page 771
Types of MIDI Messages

You can record different types of MIDI messages.
● To specify which event types are recorded, deactivate the options for the type of MIDI
message that you want to record in the Preferences dialog (MIDI—MIDI Filter page).
RELATED LINKS
MIDI - MIDI Filter on page 769
Note Messages
Cubase records note on, note off, and MIDI channel messages.
If you press and release a key on your synthesizer or on another MIDI keyboard, the following
messages are recorded:
● Note On (key down)

● Note Off (key up)
● MIDI channel
NOTE
Normally, the MIDI channel information is overridden by the MIDI channel setting for the track.
However, if you set the track to the Any MIDI channel, the notes will be played back on their
original channels.
Continuous Messages
Pitchbend, aftertouch, and controllers, such as modulation wheel, sustain pedal, volume, etc. are
considered MIDI continuous events, as opposed to the momentary key down and key up
messages.
You can record continuous messages together or independently from the notes, that is,
afterwards or before.
You can record continuous messages on their own tracks, separately from the notes to which
they belong. As long as you set the two tracks to the same output and MIDI channel, it will
appear to the MIDI instrument as if you made the two recordings at the same time.
206
Recording
Program Change Messages

When you switch from one program to another on your synthesizer or on another MIDI
keyboard, a number corresponding to that program is sent out via MIDI as a Program Change
Message.
You can record Program Change Messages together or independently from the notes, that is,
afterwards or before.
You can record Program Change Messages on their own tracks, separately from the notes to
which they belong. As long as you set the two tracks to the same output and MIDI channel, it will
appear to the MIDI instrument as if you made the two recordings at the same time.
System Exclusive Messages

System Exclusive (SysEx) messages are special types of MIDI messages that are used to send
data that only makes sense to a unit of a certain make and type.
SysEx can be used to transmit a list of the numbers that make up the settings of one or more
sounds in a synth.
Reset Function
The Reset function sends out note-off messages and resets controllers on all MIDI channels. This
is sometimes necessary if you experience hanging notes, constant vibrato, etc. when punching in
and out on MIDI recordings with pitchbend or controller data.
● To perform a MIDI reset manually, select MIDI > Reset.

● If you want Cubase to perform a MIDI reset on stop, activate Reset on Stop in the
Preferences dialog (MIDI page).
● If you want Cubase to insert a reset event at the end of a recorded part, activate Insert
Reset Events after Record in the Preferences dialog (MIDI page).
This resets controller data such as sustain, aftertouch, pitchbend, modulation, and breath
control. This is useful if a MIDI part is recorded and the sustain pedal is still held after
stopping recording. Usually, this would cause all following parts to be played with sustain,
as the pedal off command was not recorded.
RELATED LINKS
MIDI on page 766
MIDI Record Modes

By selecting a MIDI Record Mode you decide what happens to any existing parts on the track
where you are recording. MIDI tracks can play back all events in overlapping parts. If you record
several parts in the same locations or move parts so that they overlap, you will hear the events in
all parts.
NOTE
If you activate Record in Editor to record MIDI data in the editor, all new recordings are merged
into the active part, and the MIDI Record Modes do not apply.
● To access the record modes, select Transport > MIDI Record Mode.
You can also access the MIDI Record Modes by clicking to the right of the MIDI symbol in
the MIDI Recording Modes section on the Transport panel.
207
Recording
MIDI Record Mode

New Parts
Existing parts that are overlapped by a new recording are kept. The new recording is
saved as a new part.
Merge
Existing events in parts that are overlapped by a new recording are kept. The newly
recorded events are added to the existing part.
Replace
Existing events in parts that are overlapped by a new recording are replaced.
MIDI Cycle Record Mode

When you record MIDI in cycle mode, the result not only depends on the MIDI record mode, but
also on the cycle record mode that is selected in the Cycled MIDI Recording Only section.
Mix
For each completed lap, everything you record is added to what was previously
recorded. This is useful for building up rhythm patterns. Record a hi-hat part on the
first lap, the bass drum part on the second lap, etc.
Overwrite
As soon as you play a MIDI note or send any MIDI message, all MIDI that you have
recorded on previous laps is overwritten from that point. Make sure that you stop
playing before the next lap begins. Otherwise, you will overwrite the entire take.
Keep Last
Each completed lap replaces the previously recorded lap. If you deactivate recording
or press Stop before the cursor reaches the right locator, the previous take will be
kept. If you do not play or input any MIDI during a lap, nothing happens, and the
previous take will be kept.
RELATED LINKS
MIDI Recording Specifics on page 203
Recording in MIDI Editors on page 205

Cubase can automatically quantize MIDI notes on recording.
● Automatic MIDI Record Quantize is available in the MIDI Auto Quantize section of
the Transport Bar.
If you activate Auto Quantize, the notes that you record are automatically quantized according
to the quantize settings.
RELATED LINKS
Quantizing MIDI and Audio on page 222
Quantize Panel on page 225
Recovery of MIDI Recordings

Cubase allows you to recover MIDI data, including controller data, that was captured in Stop
mode or during playback.
208
Recording
The MIDI data is stored in the retrospective record buffer, and you can insert it as a MIDI part on
the selected MIDI track.
The buffer captures up to 10000 MIDI events. This can correspond to a MIDI recording of around
2 minutes and 30 seconds. However, if you use a keyboard that produces a large amount of MIDI
controller events, such as the ROLI Seaboard, this only corresponds to a recording of around 20
seconds.
NOTE
In the Preferences dialog (Record—MIDI page), you can specify a Retrospective Record Buffer
Size.
If the buffer is full, the MIDI events that were captured first are replaced by the new events. MIDI
events in the buffer are also replaced in the following situations:
● When you have inserted the retrospective recording on a track and you play new events in
Stop mode or during playback.
● When you play MIDI notes in Stop mode and you do not play for more than 30 seconds,
before playing more MIDI events in Stop mode.
NOTE
You can also empty the buffer manually.
RELATED LINKS
Record - MIDI on page 771
Emptying the Retrospective Record Buffer on page 211
Inserting a Retrospective Recording from All MIDI Inputs on the Selected Track
You can insert a retrospective recording, that is, MIDI data that was sent to All MIDI Inputs in
Stop mode or during playback, on the selected track.
PREREQUISITE
You have played some MIDI notes in Stop mode or during playback, and you want to recover
them.
PROCEDURE
1. Select the MIDI track on which you want to insert the captured MIDI data.
2. Select Transport > MIDI Retrospective Recording > Insert from All MIDI Inputs.
RESULT
The MIDI data that was captured at All MIDI Inputs is inserted on the selected track as one,
linear MIDI part.
NOTE
If you insert buffer data from multiple selected tracks, the timing offsets between the data
played on the different tracks are retained.
209
Recording
Inserting a Retrospective Track Recording

You can insert a retrospective track recording, that is, MIDI data that was sent to the track input
in Stop mode or during playback, on the selected track.
PREREQUISITE
them.
PROCEDURE
1. Select the MIDI track on which you want to insert the captured MIDI data.
2. In the top section of the MIDI track Inspector, click Retrospective Recording.
3. From the pop-up menu, select one of the following:

● To insert the MIDI data as one, continuous MIDI part, select Insert as Linear
Recording.
● To insert the MIDI data as stacked MIDI parts, select Insert as Cycle Recording.
NOTE
This is only available if your MIDI data was captured during playback, and cycle
mode was active.
RESULT
The MIDI data that was captured at the track input is inserted on the track.
NOTE
If the data was captured during playback, it is inserted at the position where you played it. If the
data was captured in Stop mode, it is inserted at the project cursor position.
Inserting a Retrospective Track Recording into an Editor

You can insert a retrospective track recording, that is, MIDI data that was sent to the track input
in Stop mode or during playback, into the MIDI part that is opened in a MIDI editor.
PREREQUISITE
them.
210
Recording
Remaining Record Time
PROCEDURE
1. Double-click the MIDI part where you want to insert the captured MIDI data to open it in a
MIDI editor.
2. On the MIDI editor toolbar, click Insert MIDI Retrospective Recording in Editor.
RESULT
The MIDI data that was captured on the track input is inserted into the MIDI part.
● If the data was captured during playback, it is inserted into the MIDI part along the
timeline.
● If the data was captured in Stop mode, it is inserted at the project cursor position.
Emptying the Retrospective Record Buffer

You can empty the retrospective record buffer manually.
PROCEDURE
● In the top section of the MIDI track Inspector, open the Retrospective Recording
pop-up menu, and select Empty Retrospective Record Buffer.
● Select a track, and select Transport > MIDI Retrospective Recording > Empty All
Buffers.
Remaining Record Time

The Max. Record Time display lets you see how much time you have left for recording.
The available time depends on the current setup, for example, on the amount of tracks that are
record-enabled, the sample rate for your project, and the available hard disk space.
● To open the display, select Studio > More Options > Max. Record Time.
NOTE
The remaining record time is also shown in the status line above the track list.
If you use individual record folders to store your tracks on different drives, the time display refers
to the medium with the least storage space available.
Lock Record
The Lock Record function prevents you from accidentally deactivating record mode.
● Select Edit > Key Commands and in the Transport category, assign key commands to the
Lock Record and Unlock Record commands.
If Lock Record is activated and you want to enter stop mode, a dialog opens in which you need
to confirm that you want to stop recording. You can also use the Unlock Record key command
first and then enter stop mode as usual.
211
Recording
Lock Record
NOTE
An automatic punch out at the right locator position will be ignored in Lock Record mode.
212
Importing Audio and MIDI
Files
You can add audio and MIDI files to your project by importing them.
Audio File Import

You can import compressed and uncompressed audio files in a variety of different formats. You
can also import audio from audio CDs or extract the audio of video files.
RELATED LINKS
Importing Audio Files on page 215
Importing Audio from Video Files on page 218
Importing ReCycle Files on page 219
Importing Media on page 427
Setting up Audio File Import Options

You can specify how audio files should be handled on import.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Preferences dialog, select Editing > Audio.
2. Select an option from the On Import Audio Files pop-up menu.
3. Click OK.
RESULT
The import settings are saved and will take effect when you import audio. If you selected Open
Options Dialog, the Import Options dialog opens on every import and allows you to make your
changes. If you selected Use Settings, the settings specified in the On Import Audio Files
section of the Preferences dialog are used.
RELATED LINKS
Import Options Dialog for Audio Files on page 214
On Import Audio Files Settings on page 215
213
Importing Audio and MIDI Files
Audio File Import
Import Options Dialog for Audio Files

The Import Options dialog allows you to make specific settings for the audio import.
● When you import audio files and Open Options Dialog is activated in the On Import
Audio Files section of the Preferences dialog (Editing—Audio page), the Import Options
dialog opens.
Import Options dialog for single file import
Import Options dialog for multiple file import
Copy File to Project Folder/Copy All Files to Project Folder

Copies the audio file to the Audio folder of the project, and has the clip refer to the
copy.
Deactivate this option to have the clip refer to the original file in the original location.
In this case, it is marked as “external” in the Pool.
Convert to Project Settings/Convert to Project Settings and Copy to Project Folder If

Needed
Converts the imported file if the sample rate or the bit depth differ from the settings
in the Project Setup dialog. For single file import, you can choose which properties
are converted.
Do not ask again

Always imports files according to the settings without opening the dialog again. You
can reset this option in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Audio page).
RELATED LINKS
Setting up Audio File Import Options on page 213
214
Audio File Import
On Import Audio Files Settings

You can set up standard settings that are performed automatically each time you import audio
files.
● When you import audio files and Use Settings is activated in the On Import Audio Files
section of the Preferences dialog (Editing—Audio page), the settings are used for
importing audio.

copy.

Needed
are converted.
Importing Audio Files

You can import uncompressed audio and compressed audio in several formats.
PROCEDURE
1. Select File > Import > Audio File.
2. In the file dialog that opens, locate and select the audio file and click Open.
3. Make your changes in the Import Options dialog.
NOTE
If Use Settings is activated in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Audio page), the

corresponding import settings are used instead.
RESULT
In the Project window, an event referencing the audio file is inserted on the selected track at the
project cursor position. If no track was selected, a new track is created.
A new audio clip is created and added to the Pool.
If you chose a compressed audio file other than FLAC, Cubase copies the original compressed file
and converts it to wave format (Windows) or AIFF format (macOS).
NOTE
The resulting Wave/AIFF file is significantly larger than the original compressed file.
The imported file is placed in the Audio folder of the project.
RELATED LINKS
Setting up Audio File Import Options on page 213
215
Audio File Import
Supported Compressed Audio File Formats

In Cubase, you can import compressed audio files.
The following compressed audio file formats are supported:
FLAC file
This is an open source format that reduces the size of audio files by 50 % to 60 %
compared to regular Wave files. The files have the extension .flac.
MPEG 1 Layer 3 file

This is a family of standards used for encoding audio-visual information such as
movies, video, and music in a digital compressed format. Cubase can read MPEG
Layer 2 and MPEG Layer 3. MP3 files are highly compressed files that still provide
good audio quality. The files have the extension .mp3.
Ogg Vorbis file

This is an open source, patent-free audio encoding and streaming technology. The
Ogg Vorbis encoder uses variable bit rate encoding. It offers compressed audio files
of small size, but with comparatively high audio quality. The files have the
extension .ogg.
Windows Media Audio file (Windows only)

This is an audio file format defined by Microsoft Inc. WMA files can be decreased in
size with no loss of audio quality. The files have the extension .wma.
Importing Audio CD Tracks

You can import audio from audio CDs into Cubase projects.
PROCEDURE
1. Select File > Import > Audio CD to import the CD tracks into the Project window.
2. Activate every audio file that you want to import in the Copy column.
3. Optional: Set a Default Name and a Destination Folder for the imported audio files.
4. Click the Copy button to create a local copy of the audio files or sections.
5. Click OK.
RESULT
The copied audio files are imported into the Project window and inserted on new tracks at the
project cursor position. By default, imported audio CD tracks are saved as wave files (Windows)
or AIFF files (macOS) in the Audio folder of the current project.
New audio clips are created and added to the Pool.
NOTE
You can also import audio files to the Pool only without importing them into the Project window.
RELATED LINKS
Importing Media on page 427
Import From Audio CD Dialog

The Import from Audio CD dialog allows you to specify how the CD tracks are imported.
● To open the Import from Audio CD dialog, select File > Import > Audio CD.
216
Audio File Import
Drive
Opens a pop-up menu that allows you to select the correct CD drive.
Speed (Windows only)

Allows you to select the data transfer speed.
NOTE
While you normally want to use the fastest possible speed, you may have to select a
slower speed for flawless audio extraction.
Eject CD
Opens the CD drive.
Secure Mode (Windows only)

Activates error checking and correction when reading the CD.
Columns
The columns in the dialog have the following functions:
Copy
Activate this option for the tracks that you want to copy/import.
#
Shows the track number.
CD Track
The name of the CD track. On import, this is used as file name. It is provided
automatically from CDDB, if available.
To rename a track, click the track name and enter a new name.
Length
The length of the audio CD track in minutes and seconds.
Size
The file size of the audio CD track in MB.
217
Audio File Import
Copy Start
The start of the section that is imported. On the ruler, drag the Left Marker to the
right to adjust this.
Copy End
The end of the section that is imported. On the ruler, drag the Right Marker to the
left to adjust this.
The Ruler
The ruler has the following functions:
1 Play Tracks
Plays back the selected track from the start to the end or from the left marker to the right
marker.
2 Stop Playback
Stops playback.
3 Play from Left Marker
Starts playback at the left marker.
4 Play to Right Marker
Starts playback some moments before the right marker and stops at the right marker.
5 Left Marker
Allows you to set the copy start manually.
6 Right Marker
Allows you to set the copy end manually.
Destination Folder
Allows you to select a folder for the imported files.
Copy
Copies the files.
Copied Files
Lists the files that you copied for import.
Importing Audio from Video Files

You can import the audio from a video file without importing the video itself.
PROCEDURE
1. Select File > Import > Audio from Video File.
2. In the file dialog that opens, locate and select the video file, and click Open.
RESULT
The audio of the selected video file is extracted and converted to a wave file that is saved in the
Audio folder.
218
Audio File Import
A new audio clip is created and added to the Pool. In the Project window, an event referencing
the audio file is inserted on the selected track at the project cursor position. If no track was
selected, a new track is created.
RELATED LINKS
Extracting Audio from Video on page 723
Importing Video Files on page 715
Importing ReCycle Files

You can import REX and REX2 audio files created by ReCycle from Propellerhead Software.
ReCycle slices a loop and creates separate samples of each beat, so that you can tempo match
and edit a loop as if it was built of individual sounds.
PREREQUISITE
REX Shared Library is installed on your system.
PROCEDURE
1. Select an audio track and move the project cursor to where you want the imported file to
start.
2. Select File > Import > Audio File.
3. In the file dialog, open the file type pop-up menu and select REX File or REX 2 File.
4. Select the file you want to import, and click Open.
RESULT
The file is imported and automatically adjusted to the current Cubase tempo.
The imported REX file consists of several events, one for each slice in the loop. The events are
automatically placed in an audio part on the selected track and positioned so that the original
internal timing of the loop is preserved.
Open the part in the Audio Part Editor to edit each slice separately by muting, moving, and
resizing events, adding effects and processing, for example.
You can also adjust the tempo and have the REX file automatically follow, provided that its track
is set to a musical time base.
NOTE
You can achieve similar results by using Cubase’s own loop slicing features.
RELATED LINKS
Slices on page 377
219
MIDI File Import
MIDI File Import

Cubase can import standard MIDI files. This allows you to transfer MIDI material to and from
virtually any MIDI application on any platform.
Import Options for MIDI Files

The Import Options for MIDI files allow you to specify what data is included in imported MIDI
files.
Extract First Patch

Converts the first Program Change and Bank Select events for each track to
Inspector settings for the track.
Extract First Volume/Pan

Converts the first MIDI Volume and Pan events for each track to Inspector settings
for the track.
Import Controller as Automation Tracks

Converts MIDI Controller events in the MIDI file to automation data for the MIDI
tracks.
Import to Left Locator

Aligns the imported MIDI file at the position of the left locator.
Import Markers
Imports any markers that have been added.
Import Dropped File as Single Part

Places the file on one track if you drag a MIDI file into the project.
Ignore Master Track Events on Merge

Ignores tempo track data if you import a MIDI file into the current project. The
imported MIDI file will play according to the current tempo track in the project.
Auto Dissolve Format 0

Automatically dissolves imported MIDI files of type 0. Each embedded MIDI channel
in the file is placed on a separate track in the Project window.
Destination
Allows you to specify what happens when you drag a MIDI file into the project.
● MIDI Tracks creates MIDI tracks for the imported file.
● Instrument Tracks creates instrument tracks for each MIDI channel in the
MIDI file and lets the program automatically load appropriate presets.
● HALion Sonic SE multi-timbral creates several MIDI tracks, each routed to a
separate instance of HALion Sonic SE in the VST Instruments window, and
loads the appropriate presets.
220
MIDI File Import
Import Karaoke Lyrics as Text

Converts karaoke lyrics in the MIDI file to text that can be displayed in the Score
Editor. If this option is deactivated, lyrics are only shown in the List Editor.
Importing MIDI Files

In Cubase, you can import MIDI files.
PROCEDURE
1. Select File > Import > MIDI File.
2. Optional: If a project is open, choose if you want to create a new project.
If you select No, the MIDI file is imported into the current project.
3. In the file dialog that opens, locate and select the MIDI file and click Open.
RESULT
The MIDI file is imported. The result depends on the contents of the MIDI file and the setting you
made in the Import Options section in the Preferences dialog (MIDI—MIDI File page).
RELATED LINKS
Import Options for MIDI Files on page 220
Markers on page 252
Yamaha XF Format
Cubase supports the Yamaha XF format. XF is an extension of the standard MIDI file format that
allows you to save song-specific data with a MIDI file of type 0.
When importing a MIDI file containing XF data, this data is placed in parts on separate tracks
called XF Data, Chord Data, or SysEx Data. You can edit such a part in the List Editor to add or
change lyrics, for example.
IMPORTANT
Do not change the order of events within the XF data or the event data itself, unless you have a
lot of experience with XF data.
Cubase can also export XF data as part of a MIDI file of type 0. If you do not want to export the XF
data together with the MIDI data, mute or delete the tracks containing the XF data.
MIDI Loops
In Cubase, you can import MIDI loops.
To import MIDI loops, use the MediaBay. MIDI loops have the file extension .midiloop.
RELATED LINKS
Importing MIDI Loops on page 488
221
Quantizing MIDI and Audio
Quantizing means moving recorded audio or MIDI and positioning it on the nearest grid position
that is musically relevant. Quantizing is designed to correct errors, but you can also use it in a
creative way.
You can quantize audio and MIDI to a grid or to a groove.
Audio and MIDI can be quantized at the same time. However, what exactly happens during
quantizing differs for audio and MIDI:
● Audio quantizing affects the audio event starts.

● MIDI quantizing can affect the starts of MIDI events in a part, the MIDI event lengths, or
the MIDI event ends.
NOTE
Quantizing is based on the original position of the events. Therefore, you can freely try out
different quantize settings without the risk of destroying anything.
RELATED LINKS
Quantizing Audio Event Starts on page 224
Quantizing MIDI Event Starts on page 223
Quantizing MIDI Event Lengths on page 224
Quantizing MIDI Event Ends on page 224
Quantize Functions
The quantize functions are available in the Edit menu and in the Snap and Quantize sections of
the Project window toolbar.
Quantize Functions on the Edit Menu

Quantize
Quantizes audio or MIDI event starts.
Reset Quantize
Reverts your audio or MIDI to its original, unquantized state, and resets any length
changes that you performed in the Quantize Panel.
Quantize Panel
Advanced Quantize
From this submenu, you can select the following functions:
● Quantize MIDI Event Lengths
Cuts off the ends of selected MIDI events so that the events match the length
quantize value. The start positions are kept.
222
Quantizing MIDI Event Starts
● Quantize MIDI Event Ends

Moves the ends of MIDI events to the nearest grid positions.
● Freeze MIDI Quantize
Makes the start and end positions of MIDI events permanent. This function is
useful in situations where you want to quantize a second time, based on the
current quantized positions rather than the original positions.
● Create Groove Quantize Preset
Creates a groove quantize map based on hitpoints that you have created in
the Sample Editor.
Quantize Functions on the Project Window Toolbar

Apply Quantize
Quantize Presets
Open Quantize Panel
Quantizing MIDI Event Starts

You can quantize the MIDI event start positions.
PREREQUISITE
You have set up a quantize grid on the Quantize Presets pop-up menu on the Project window
toolbar.
PROCEDURE
1. Perform one of the following actions:
● In the Key Editor, select the MIDI events that you want to quantize.
● In the Project window, select a MIDI part.
2. Select Edit > Quantize.
RESULT
The starts of the selected MIDI events or all events of the selected MIDI part are quantized.
Events that do not match exact note positions are moved to the closest grid position. The note
lengths are maintained.
223
Quantizing MIDI Event Lengths
Quantizing MIDI Event Lengths

You can quantize the MIDI event lengths.
PREREQUISITE
You have set up a length quantize value on the Length Quantize pop-up menu on the Key
Editor toolbar.
PROCEDURE
2. Select Edit > Advanced Quantize > Quantize MIDI Event Lengths.
RESULT
The ends of the selected MIDI events are cut off so that the events match the length quantize
value. The start positions are kept.
NOTE
If you have selected Quantize Link in the Length Quantize pop-up menu of the Key Editor
toolbar, the events are resized according to the grid that is set up in the Quantize Presets pop-
up menu. The Swing, Tuplet, and Catch Range settings on the Quantize Panel are taken into
account.
Quantizing MIDI Event Ends

You can quantize the MIDI event end positions.
PREREQUISITE
toolbar.
PROCEDURE
2. Select Edit > Advanced Quantize > Quantize MIDI Event Ends.
RESULT
The ends of the MIDI events are moved to the nearest grid positions.
Quantizing Audio Event Starts

You can quantize the audio event start positions.
PREREQUISITE
toolbar.
224
Quantize Panel
PROCEDURE
1. In the Project window, select an audio event, a sliced loop, or an audio part.
2. Select Edit > Quantize.
RESULT
The event snap point, or, if not available, the start of the audio event, is quantized. Event starts
that do not match exact note positions are moved to the closest grid positions.
NOTE
If you use the Quantize function on an audio part, the starts of the events inside the part are
quantized.
Quantize Panel
The Quantize Panel allows you to define how to quantize audio or MIDI to the grid or to a
groove. Depending on what method you choose, different parameters are shown.
To open the Quantize Panel, perform one of the following actions:
● Click Open Quantize Panel on the toolbar.

● Select Edit > Quantize Panel.
225
Quantize Panel
Quantize Presets
To the top of the Quantize Panel the quantize presets are shown. Here, you can load and save
presets that include all settings for quantizing.
Select Preset
Allows you to select a preset.
Save Preset
Allows you to save the current settings as a preset, so that they become available on
all Quantize Presets pop-up menus.
Remove Preset
Allows you to remove the selected preset.
Rename Preset
Opens a dialog where you can rename the selected preset.
226
Quantize Panel
Restore Factory Presets

Allows you to restore the factory presets.
Creating Groove Quantize Presets

You can create a groove quantize map based on hitpoints that you have created in the Sample
Editor.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Project window, double-click the audio event from which you want to extract the
timing.
The Sample Editor opens.
2. Open the Hitpoints section.
The hitpoints for the audio event are detected and displayed automatically.
3. Click Create Groove.
The groove is extracted.
RESULT
The groove is extracted from the audio event and made available in the Quantize Presets pop-
up menu on the Project window toolbar.
Open the Quantize Panel and save the groove as a preset.
RELATED LINKS
Creating a Groove Quantize Map on page 379
Quantize Presets on page 226
Options For Quantizing to a Musical Grid

You can use the musical grid to quantize your recorded music.
● To access the options for quantizing to a musical grid, select a musical time format from
the Select Preset pop-up menu on the Quantize Panel.
227
Quantize Panel
Grid
Allows you to select the basic value for the quantize grid.
Swing
Offsets every second position in the grid, creating a swing or shuffle feel.
NOTE
Swing is only available if Grid is set to a straight value and Tuplet is deactivated.
Catch Range
Allows you to set a value that determines that quantizing affects only audio or MIDI
within the set distance from the grid lines. This is reflected in the grid display.
228
Quantize Panel
Safe Range
Creates a safe zone before and after the quantize positions. If you specify a distance
in ticks (120 ticks = one 16th note), events that lie within this zone are not quantized.
This way, slight variations are kept.
Grid Display
Shows the quantize grid. Quantized audio or MIDI is moved to the positions
indicated by the vertical grid lines.
Tuplet
Creates rhythmically more complex grids by dividing the grid into smaller steps, and
thereby creating n-tuplets.
Rough
Allows you to set a distance in ticks, so that your audio or MIDI is quantized to
random positions within the specified distance from the quantize grid. This allows for
slight variations and, at the same time, prevents your audio or MIDI from ending up
too far away from the grid.
Soft Quantize Mode

Applies a loose quantization so that your audio or MIDI moves only part of the way
to the closest quantize grid position. The Quantize Strength value to the right
determines how close your audio or MIDI moves towards the grid.
NOTE
Soft quantizing is based on the current, quantized positions and not on the original
event positions. You can repeatedly use the soft quantize mode to gradually move
your audio or MIDI closer to the quantize grid until you have found the right timing.
MIDI CC
Moves controllers related to MIDI notes (pitchbend, etc.) automatically with the notes
when these are quantized.
Reset Quantize
Resets your audio or MIDI to its original, unquantized state.
IMPORTANT
This function has no effect on an event that was moved manually.
Auto
Applies any changes immediately to the selected parts or events. A way of using this
feature is to set up a playback loop and adjust the settings until you are satisfied with
the result.
Quantize
Options for Quantizing to a Groove

You can generate a timing grid from a MIDI part or an audio loop, and use this groove to
quantize your recorded music. This way, you can recreate the rhythmic feel of this specific event
or part.
To access the options for quantizing to a groove, select a MIDI part from an audio loop, an audio
event with hitpoints, or sliced audio, and perform one of the following actions:
● Drag the part or event to the grid display in the middle of the Quantize Panel.
229
Quantize Panel
● Select Edit > Advanced Quantize > Create Groove Quantize Preset.
The following options become available:
Position
Determines how much the timing of the groove affects the music.
Velocity (MIDI Only)

Determines how much the velocity values within the groove affect the music.
NOTE
Not all grooves contain velocity information.
Length (MIDI Only)

Allows you to specify how much the lengths of the notes are affected by the groove.
NOTE
For drums, the Length setting is ignored.
Safe Range
Allows you to create a safe zone before and after the quantize positions. If you
specify a distance in ticks (120 ticks = one 16th note), events that lie within this zone
are not quantized. This way, slight variations are kept.
Grid display
Shows the quantize grid. Quantized audio or MIDI is moved to the positions
indicated by the vertical grid lines.
Pre-Q
Allows you to select a musical grid to which you can quantize your audio or MIDI
first. This gets the notes closer to their groove destination.
230
Quantize Panel
NOTE
If you apply a shuffle groove to a 16th-note pattern, for example, set up a pre-
quantize value of 16 to straighten up the timing before applying the groove
quantizing.
Max. Move
Allows you to select a note value to specify a maximum distance that the audio or
MIDI can be moved.
Orig. Position
Sets the original starting position of the quantized material as starting point of the
quantizing. This allows you to synchronize material that does not start from bar 1 of
the project.
Rough Quantize
Allows you to set a distance in ticks so that your audio or MIDI is quantized to
random positions within the specified distance from the quantize grid. This allows for
slight variations and, at the same time, prevents your audio or MIDI from ending up
too far away from the grid.
Soft Quantize Mode

Applies a loose quantization so that your audio or MIDI moves only part of the way
to the closest quantize grid position. The Quantize Strength value to the right
determines how close your audio or MIDI moves towards the grid.
NOTE
Soft quantizing is based on the current, quantized positions and not on the original
event positions. You can repeatedly use the soft quantize mode to gradually move
your audio or MIDI closer to the quantize grid until you have found the right timing.
MIDI CC
Moves controllers related to MIDI notes (pitchbend, etc.) automatically with the notes
when these are quantized.
Reset Quantize
Resets your audio or MIDI to its original, unquantized state.
IMPORTANT
This function has no effect on an event that was moved manually.
Auto
Applies any changes immediately to the selected parts or events. A way of using this
feature is to set up a playback loop and adjust the settings until you are satisfied with
the result.
Quantize
RELATED LINKS
Creating Groove Quantize Presets on page 227
231
Fades and Crossfades
Fades allow you to gradually increase or decrease the volume at the start or end of audio events
or audio clips, and to create smooth transitions.
You can create the following fades:
● Fade ins/fade outs

Fade ins and fade outs allow you to gradually increase or decrease the volume of audio
events or audio clips. Fade ins and fade outs can be either event-based or clip-based.
Event-based fades are calculated in real time when you play back audio events. You can
create different fade curves for several events, even if they refer to the same audio clip.
NOTE
The more event-based fades you apply, the more processing power is used.
Clip-based fades are applied to the audio clip. Events that refer to the same clip will have
the same fades.
● Crossfades
Crossfades allow you to create smooth transitions for consecutive audio events on the
same track. Crossfades are always event-based.
● Auto fades
Auto fades allow you to automatically apply short fade ins and fade outs to the events on
specific audio tracks. You can also apply them globally on all audio tracks. This creates
smooth transitions between events.
RELATED LINKS
Event-Based Fades on page 232
Creating Clip-Based Fades on page 236
Crossfades on page 237
Auto Fades and Crossfades on page 240
Event-Based Fades
You can create event-based fade ins and fade outs. These are calculated in real time when you
play back audio events. You can create different fade curves for several events, even if they refer
to the same audio clip.
There are several ways to create event-based fades:
● By using the event handles

● By using range selections
You can edit event-based fades in the Fade dialogs.
232
Event-Based Fades
RELATED LINKS
Creating and Editing Fades with the Handles on page 233
Creating and Editing Fades with the Range Selection Tool on page 234
Fade Dialog for Event-Based Fades on page 235
Creating and Editing Fades with the Handles

You can create and edit event-based fade ins and fade outs using the event handles. This gives
you a visual feedback and allows you to apply the same fade type to several selected events.
PROCEDURE
1. Select the audio events for which you want to create fades and point at one of them with
the mouse.
Triangular fade handles become visible in the upper left and right corners.

● Drag the left fade handle to the right to create a fade in.
● Drag the right fade handle to the left to create a fade out.
RESULT
The fade is applied and shown in the event waveform. If you select multiple events, the same
fade is applied to all selected events.
NOTE
You can change the length of the fades at any time by dragging the handles.
Event Handles
Audio events have a fade-in and a fade-out handle, as well as a volume handle. These handles
provide a quick way to change the fade length or the volume of events in the Project window.
Event handles become visible if you point the mouse at an event or if you select events.
NOTE
To show event handles and fade curves always and not only when you point at events, activate
Show Event Volume Curves Always in the Preferences dialog (Event Display—Audio page).
In the upper left and right corners, you find triangular fade handles that allow you to change the
fade-in or fade-out length. In the top middle, you find a square handle that allows you to change
the volume.
● To change the fade-in length, drag the fade handle in the upper left to the right or to the
left.
233
Event-Based Fades
● To change the fade-out length, drag the fade handle in the upper right to the left or to the
right.
● To change the volume, drag the volume handle in the top middle up or down.
Fade and volume changes are reflected in the event waveform and on the info line.
NOTE
To change the event volume and the fades with the mouse wheel, activate Use Mouse Wheel for
Event Volume and Fades in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Audio page). When you press
Shift while moving the mouse wheel, and position the mouse pointer somewhere in the left half
of the event, the fade in end point is moved. When the mouse pointer is in the right half of the
event, the fade out start point is moved.
Creating and Editing Fades with the Range Selection Tool

You can create and edit event-based fades with the Range Selection tool. This allows you to
apply a fade in and a fade out at the same time. Using the Range Selection tool is also useful if
you want to create fades for multiple audio events on separate tracks.
PROCEDURE
1. On the Project window toolbar, select the Range Selection tool.
● To create a fade in that starts at the event start, select a range that starts at the
event start.
● To create a fade out that ends at the event end, select a range that ends at the event
end.
● To create a fade in and a fade out, select a range in the middle of the event.
● To create fades on multiple tracks, select a range that spans multiple audio events
on multiple audio tracks.
3. Select Audio > Adjust Fades to Range.
Removing Event-Based Fades

You can remove event-based fades for a whole event or for a range.
PROCEDURE
● To remove the fades for an event, select the event with the Object Selection tool.
● To remove the fades for a range, select the fade area with the Range Selection tool.
2. Select Audio > Remove Fades.
234
Event-Based Fades
Fade Dialog for Event-Based Fades

The fade dialog for event-based fades allows you to set up the selected event-based fades.
● To open the dialog for event-based fades, create a fade for one or more audio events,
select the events and select Audio > Open Fade Editor(s).
NOTE
If you select several events, you can adjust the fade curves for all selected events at the
same time. This is useful if you want to apply the same type of fade in to more than one
event, for example.
1 Presets pop-up menu

Allows you to set up presets for fade-in or fade-out curves.
● To apply a saved preset, select it from the pop-up menu.
● To remove a saved preset, select it from the pop-up menu and click Remove.
2 Curve Type buttons
Apply a spline interpolation, a damped spline interpolation, or a linear interpolation to the
curve.
3 Restore
Click this button to cancel any changes you have made since opening the dialog.
4 Fade display
Shows the shape of the fade curve. The resulting waveform shape is shown darker, the
current waveform shape is shown lighter.
● To add points, click the curve.
● To change the curve shape, click and drag existing points.
● To remove a point from the curve, drag it outside the display.
5 Curve Shape buttons
Give you quick access to some common curve shapes.
6 Length field
235
Creating Clip-Based Fades
Allows you to enter fade lengths numerically. The format of values displayed here is
determined by the time display on the Transport panel.
● If you activate Apply Length, the value entered in the Fade Length value field is
used when clicking Apply or OK.
● If you set the current fade as the default fade, the length value is included as part of
the default settings.
7 As Default
Saves the current settings as default fade.
8 Apply
Applies the current fade settings to the selected events.
Creating Clip-Based Fades

You can create and edit clip-based fade ins and fade outs using Direct Offline Processing. These
fades are applied to the audio clip. Events that refer to the same clip get the same fades.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Project window, select one or more audio events or a range for which you want to
create a fade.
The length of your selection determines the length of the fade area.
● To create a fade in, select Audio > Processes > Fade In.
● To create a fade out, select Audio > Processes > Fade Out.
3. In the Direct Offline Processing window, click the Curve Type buttons to specify a fade
curve, or click and drag with the mouse in the curve display to draw in a curve.
4. Optional: Activate Audition to hear the effect of the specified fade on the selected audio
event.
RESULT
The fade is applied to the audio.
RELATED LINKS
Fade In/Fade Out on page 342
On Processing Shared Clips on page 236
On Processing Shared Clips

If several events refer to the same audio clip, this clip is a shared clip. If you edit one of the
events that refer to a shared clip, you can decide if you want to apply the processing to all events
referring to this clip.
Continue
Click Continue to apply the processing to all events that refer to the audio clip.
236
Crossfades
New Version
Click New Version to create a separate, new version of the audio clip for the selected
event.
Crossfades
Crossfades allow you to create smooth transitions for consecutive audio events on the same
track. Crossfades are always event-based.
You can only create crossfades if the consecutive events or their respective clips overlap.
● If the audio events overlap, a crossfade of the default shape (linear, symmetric) is applied
in the overlapping area.
NOTE
You can edit the default crossfade length and shape in the Crossfade editor.
● If the respective audio clips overlap, the two events are resized so that they overlap, and a
crossfade of the default length and shape is applied in the overlapping area.
● If neither the audio events nor the clips overlap, a crossfade cannot be created.
RELATED LINKS
Crossfade Editor on page 238
Creating Crossfades
You can create crossfades between two consecutive audio events.
PROCEDURE
● To create a crossfade between two events, select the Object Selection tool, and
select two consecutive audio events.
● To create a crossfade to a selected range between two events, select the Range
Selection tool, and select a range covering the area where you want to apply a
crossfade.
2. Select Audio > Crossfade or use the key command X.
RESULT
The crossfade is applied.
Changing the Crossfade Length

You can change the length of a crossfade.
PROCEDURE
1. Select the Range Selection tool.
237
Crossfades
2. Select a range between two events that covers the length of the crossfade you want to
apply.
3. Select Audio > Adjust Fades to Range.
RESULT
The crossfade length is adjusted to the selected range.
Crossfade Editor
The Crossfade editor allows you to edit crossfades. It contains fade-in and fade-out curve
settings, and common settings.
● To open the Crossfade editor, select one or both crossfaded events, and select Audio >
Crossfade, or double-click the crossfade zone.
Curve Type buttons

Determine whether the corresponding fade curve uses Spline Interpolation ,
Damped Spline Interpolation , or Linear Interpolation .
Curve Shape buttons

Give you quick access to some common curve shapes.
Fade Curve displays

Show the shape of the fade-out and fade-in curve, respectively.
● To add points, click a curve.
● To change the fade shape, click and drag existing points.
● To remove a point, drag a point outside the display.
Presets
Click Save Preset on the Presets pop-up menu to store the crossfade settings so
that you can apply them to other events.
● To remove a preset, select it on the pop-up menu and click Remove Preset.
238
Crossfades
Default buttons
Click As Default to store the current settings as default. Default settings are used
whenever you create new crossfades.
Click Recall Default to apply the curves and settings of the default crossfade.
Length
Specifies the length of the crossfade area. Cubase tries to center the crossfade, that
is, the length change is applied equally to both sides. To be able to resize a crossfade,
it must be possible to resize the corresponding event. For example, if the fade-out
event already plays its audio clip to the end, its end point cannot be moved any
further to the right.
Equal Gain
Adjusts the fade curves so that the summed fade-in and fade-out amplitudes are the
same all along the crossfade region. This is often suitable for short crossfades.
Equal Power
Adjusts the fade curves so that the energy (power) of the crossfade is constant all
along the crossfade region.
Equal Power curves have only one editable curve point. You cannot change the
curve shape if this mode is selected.
Volume
Allows you to set the audition level.
Pre-roll and Post-roll

● To start playback before the fade area, activate Use Pre-roll.
● To stop playback after the fade area, activate Use Post-roll.
● To adjust the pre-roll time, use the Pre-roll Amount value field.
● To adjust the post-roll time, use the Post-roll Amount value field.
Audition buttons
● To audition the fade-out part of the crossfade, click Play Fade Out.
● To audition the whole crossfade, click Play Crossfade.
● To audition the fade-in part of the crossfade, click Play Fade In.
You can set up key commands for this in the Key Commands dialog.
RELATED LINKS
Event Handles on page 233
Auto-Scroll Settings Menu on page 182
Removing Crossfades
You can remove crossfades.
PROCEDURE
● Select the Object Selection tool and select one of the crossfaded events.
● Select the Range Selection tool and select the crossfades you want to remove.
2. Select Audio > Remove Fades.
239
Auto Fades and Crossfades
RESULT
The selected crossfades are removed.
NOTE
You can also remove a crossfade by clicking and dragging it outside the track.

Cubase features an Auto Fade function that can be set both globally and separately for each
audio track. Auto fades allow you to create smoother transitions between events by applying
fade ins and fade outs with a length between 1 and 500 ms.
IMPORTANT
As event-based fades are calculated in real time during playback, applying auto fades to a higher
number of audio events results in a higher demand on the processor.
NOTE
Auto fades are not indicated by fade lines.
Auto Fades Dialog

The Auto Fades dialog allows you to set up auto fades and crossfades for the whole project, or
separately for each audio track.
● To open the global Auto Fades dialog, select Project > Auto Fades Settings.
● To open the Auto Fades dialog for a track, right-click in the track list and select Auto
Fades Settings.
240
1 Auto Fade In
Activates auto fade ins.
2 Auto Fade Out
Activates auto fade outs.
3 Auto Crossfades
Activates auto crossfades.
4 Use Project Settings
This is only available if you opened the Auto Fades dialog for individual tracks. Deactivate
this to set up and apply the settings to individual tracks only. If you want a track with
individual auto fade settings to use the global settings again, activate Use Project
Settings.
5 Length
Specifies the length of the auto fades or crossfades.
6 As Default
Saves the current settings as default.
7 Fades section
Provides the settings for auto fades.
The Curve Type buttons allow you to determine whether the corresponding fade curve
uses Spline Interpolation , Damped Spline Interpolation or Linear Interpolation .
The Curve Shape buttons give you quick access to common curve shapes.
8 Crossfades section
241
Provides the settings for auto crossfades.

Equal Gain allows you to adjust the fade curves so that the summed fade-in and fade-out
amplitudes are the same all along the crossfade region.
Equal Power allows you to adjust the fade curves so that the energy (power) of the
crossfade is constant all along the crossfade region.
Making Global Auto Fade Settings

You can set up auto fades and crossfades for the whole project.
PROCEDURE
1. Select Project > Auto Fades Settings.
This opens the Auto Fades dialog for the project.
2. Set up the fades as desired.
3. Click OK.
RELATED LINKS
Fade Dialog for Event-Based Fades on page 235
Crossfade Editor on page 238
Making Auto Fade Settings for Individual Tracks

As auto fades use computing power, you might consider to turn auto fades off globally and
activate them only for individual tracks.
PROCEDURE
● Right-click the track in the track list, and from the context menu, select Auto Fades
Settings.
● Select the track, and in the Inspector, click Auto Fades Settings.
The Auto Fades dialog for the track opens.
2. Deactivate Use Project Settings.
Any settings you now make are applied to the track only.
3. Set up the auto fades.
4. Click OK.
242
Arranger Track
The arranger functions in Cubase allow you to work in a non-linear fashion. Using an arranger
track allows you to specify how and when specific sections are played back, even in live
performances. This way, you do not need to move, copy, and paste events in the Project window.
NOTE
There can be only one arranger track in a project.
To use the arranger functions, you must add an arranger track and define arranger events.
Arranger events can be of any length. They can overlap and are not bound to the start or end of
existing events and parts. You can order them in a list, and add repeats as desired.
You can edit arranger events using the standard techniques. Copies from arranger events are
independent from the original event.
You can create several arranger chains that allow you to save different versions of a song within
the project.
You can flatten arranger chains to convert them into a linear project.
RELATED LINKS
Adding Arranger Events on the Arranger Track on page 243
Setting up an Arranger Chain and Adding Events on page 247
Flattening the Arranger Chain on page 248
Adding Arranger Events on the Arranger Track

On the arranger track, you can add arranger events that define specific sections of the project.
PREREQUISITE
Snap is activated, and Snap Type is set to Events.
PROCEDURE
1. Select Project > Add Track > Arranger.
The arranger track is added.
2. Select the Draw tool and draw an arranger event on the arranger track.
An arranger event is added.
3. Draw as many events as you need.
RESULT
The arranger events are added to your project.
243
Arranger Track
Arranger Editor

Use the functions of the Arranger Editor to arrange the events.
RELATED LINKS
Setting up an Arranger Chain and Adding Events on page 247
Snap Function on page 61
Renaming Arranger Events

When you add arranger events, they are automatically named in alphabetical order. You can
change the names so that they reflect the structure of your project, such as Intro, Chorus, Bridge,
for example.
PROCEDURE
1. Select the arranger event that you want to rename.
● Select the event name on the info line.
● Hold down Alt/Opt and double-click the name in the arranger chain.
3. Enter a new name.
Arranger Editor
The Arranger Editor allows you to set up arranger chains.
● To open the Arranger Editor, select an arranger track, and click Open Arranger Editor in
the track list.
Arranger toolbar
Shows the transport buttons, the arranger transport buttons, and the arranger tools.
Current Arranger Chain

Shows the order in which the events are played back, from top to bottom, and how
many times they are repeated.
NOTE
Initially, the arranger chain is empty. To fill it up, you must add events from the
Arranger Events list.
244
Arranger Track
Arranger Editor
Arranger Events
Lists the available arranger events in the order they appear on the timeline.
Arranger Editor Toolbar

The Arranger Editor contains tools and shortcuts for setting the flatten options.
● To open the Arranger Editor, select an arranger track, and click Open Arranger Editor
in the track list.
Activate Arranger Mode
Activates playback in arranger mode.
Previous Chain Step
Navigates to the previous entry in the current arranger chain list.
Next Chain Step
Navigates to the next entry in the current arranger chain list.
First Repeat of Current Chain Step
Navigates to the first repeat of the current entry in the current arranger chain list.
Last Repeat of Current Chain Step
Navigates to the last repeat of the current entry in the current arranger chain list.
Select Active Chain
Allows you to select and activate an arranger chain.
Rename Current Chain
Allows you to rename the current arranger chain.
Create New Chain
Creates a new, empty arranger chain.
Duplicate Current Chain
Creates a duplicate of the current arranger chain, containing the same events.
Remove Current Chain
Removes the selected arranger chain. This is only available if you have created more
than one arranger chain.
Flatten Chain
Converts the current arranger chain into a linear project.
Flatten (with Options & Preferences)
Allows you to set up the flatten options.
245
Arranger Track
Arranger Editor
Arranger Chain Repeat Modes

The Arranger Editor features a function that allows you to repeat and loop your arranger events.
This way, you can create a sketch of a song structure.
● To open the Arranger Editor, select an arranger track, and click Open Arranger Editor in
the track list.
To select one of the repeat modes, click the Mode column in the Current Arranger Chain list.
1 Normal
Plays back the arranger chain exactly the way you set it up.
2 Repeat Forever
Repeats the current arranger event in a loop until you click another event in the Arranger
Editor or until you click Play once again.
3 Pause After Repeats
Pauses playback after all repeats of the current arranger event have been played back.
NOTE
During playback, the Counter column indicates which repetition of the event is playing.
Flatten Options & Preferences

The flatten options allow you to define what happens when you flatten the arranger track.
● To show the flatten options, open the Arranger Editor, and click Flatten (with Options &
Preferences).
In the Source section, you can specify which arranger chains are flattened.
Current Chain
Flattens the current chain only.
Checked Chains
Opens a list of the available arranger chains where you can activate the arranger
tracks that you want to flatten.
All Chains
Flattens all arranger chains of the current project.
The Destination section allows you to choose where the result of the flattening is saved.
Current Project
This is only available if Source is set to Current Chain. Activate this option if you
want to save the flattened chain in the current project.
246
Arranger Track
Setting up an Arranger Chain and Adding Events
New Project
Allows you to flatten one or more chains in a new project with the following naming
options:
● Append Chain Name
Appends the chain names to the project name.
● Use Chain Name
Names the new projects after the current arranger chains.
● Add Number
Names the new projects after the old ones and adds a number.
The Options section contains further settings.
Keep Arranger Track

Keeps the arranger track after flattening. Activate Rename Arranger Events to
append numbers to the events.
Make Real Event Copies

Allows you to create real copies of the arranger track instead of shared copies.
Don‘t Split Events

Excludes MIDI notes that start before or are longer than the arranger event. Only
MIDI notes that begin and end inside the arranger event are taken into account.
Open New Projects

Creates a new project for every flattened arranger chain. If you activate Cascade
New Projects, the opened projects are cascaded.
RELATED LINKS
Flattening the Arranger Chain on page 248

In the Arranger Editor you can set up arranger chains and add events to them.
PROCEDURE
1. Click e to open the Arranger Editor.
2. Activate Activate Arranger Mode.
3. Perform one of the following actions to add arranger events to the arranger chain:
● Double-click an event in the Arranger Events list.
● Select one or more events in the Arranger Events list, right-click, and select Append
Selected In Arranger Chain.
● Drag an arranger event from the Arranger Events list and drop it in the Current
Arranger Chain list.
● Drag an arranger event from the Project window and drop it in the Current
Arranger Chain list.
4. Click Play.
RESULT
The arranger events are played back in the order that you specified in the arranger chain.
247
Arranger Track
RELATED LINKS
Arranger Chain Repeat Modes on page 246
Adding a New Arranger Chain

You can create several arranger chains in order to set up alternative versions for playback.
PREREQUISITE
Arranger Mode is activated.
PROCEDURE
1. Open the Arranger Editor.
2. Click Create New Chain.
RESULT
A new, empty arranger chain is activated. This is reflected by a new name in the Select Active
Chain pop-up menu and a new, empty Current Arranger Chain list.
Editing Arranger Events in the Arranger Chain

In the Current Arranger Chain list, you can edit your arranger events.
You can perform the following actions:
● To select multiple events, Ctrl/Cmd-click or Shift-click them.

● To move events in the list, drag them up or down.
● To copy events, select them, hold Alt/Opt and drag.
● To repeat events, click in the Repeats column and enter the number of repeats.
● To specify how the event is repeated, click in the Mode column and select a Repeat Mode
● To move the playback position to the start of an event, click the arrow to the left of the
event.
● To remove an event from the list, right-click on it, and from the context menu, select
Remove Touched.
● To remove several events, select them, right-click, and from the context menu, select
Remove Selected.
RELATED LINKS
Arranger Chain Repeat Modes on page 246
Flattening the Arranger Chain

When you have set up an arranger chain that you like, and you are sure that you do not want to
edit it any more, you can convert it to a linear project.
PREREQUISITE
You have saved a copy of the project before flattening the arranger chain.
NOTE
Flattening the arranger chain may remove events and parts from the project. Only use Flatten
when you know you do not want to edit the arranger track/chain any more. If in doubt, save a
copy of the project before flattening the arranger chain.
248
Arranger Track
Jump Mode
PROCEDURE
1. Select the arranger chain that you want to convert into a linear project.
2. Optional: Click Flatten (with Options & Preferences)
3. Optional: Activate the desired flattening options.
NOTE
If you realize that you want to do further adjustments, click Go Back. The activated flatten
options are kept.
4. Click Flatten.
RESULT
The events and parts in the project are reordered, repeated, resized, moved and/or deleted, so
that they correspond exactly to the arranger chain.
Jump Mode
If you have set up an arranger track and play it back, you have live access to the playback order.
This way, you can loop your arranger events with more flexibility regarding the length of the
playback.
PREREQUISITE
An arranger chain is set up and the arranger mode is activated.
PROCEDURE
1. Play back your project.
2. In the lower part of the Inspector, open the Jump Mode pop-up menu, and select an
option from the pop-up menu.
This determines how long the active arranger event is played, before jumping to the next
one.
3. In the Arranger Events list of the Inspector, click the arrow to the left of the arranger
event that you want to trigger.
RESULT
The arranger event is looped according to your settings, until you click another arranger event.
NOTE
You can assign key commands to trigger arranger events in the Arranger category of the Key
Commands dialog.

● To stop Jump Mode, click Stop.
● To continue playback from a specific arranger event, click the arranger event in the
Current Arranger Chain list.
249
Arranger Track
Arranging Music to Video
RELATED LINKS
Jump Mode Options on page 250
Jump Mode Options

The Jump Mode pop-up menu allows you to define how long the active arranger event is played
before jumping to the next one.
● To show the Inspector for the arranger track, select the arranger track in the track list.
None
Jumps to the next section immediately.
4 Bars, 2 Bars
Jumps to the next arranger event after 2 or 4 bars. If the current arranger event is
shorter than 2 or 4 bars, playback jumps to the next arranger event at the event end.
1 Bar
Jumps to the next section at the next barline.
1 Beat
Jumps to the next section at the next beat.
End
Plays the current section to the end, then jumps to the next section.

When you compose music for video, you can use arranger events to fill a specific video section
with music. The following is an example on how you could do that.
PREREQUISITE
You have connected and set up an external sync master device to your computer. You have
created a new, empty project and added a MIDI track.
250
Arranger Track
PROCEDURE
1. Create a MIDI part that starts at position 00:00:00:00 and ends at position 00:01:00:00.
4. On the Transport panel, activate Sync.
5. Select Project > Add Track > Arranger.
The arranger track is added.
6. On the arranger track, add arranger events at the positions of the MIDI parts.
7. Set up the arranger chain A-A-B-B-C-C.
8. Activate Arranger mode and start playback.
9. On your external sync master device, start external timecode at position 00:00:10:00.
In your project, the position 00:00:10:00 is located, and arranger part A is played back.
10. Start your external sync master device at a position that does not match the project start
time, for example, 00:01:10:00.
In your project, the position 00:01:10:00 is located, and arranger part A is played back.
RESULT
If you position the external sync master device to a position that does not match the project start
time, Cubase automatically jumps to the right position in the arranger track.
NOTE
The reference for the external timecode can be MIDI or any other timecode that can be
interpreted by Cubase.
RELATED LINKS
251
Markers
Markers are used to locate certain positions quickly. There are two types of markers: position
markers and cycle markers.
If you often find yourself jumping to a specific position within a project, you should insert a
marker at this position. You can also use markers to make range selections or for zooming.
Markers are located on the marker track. You can add 1 marker track.
Vertical marker lines are shown in the Project window to indicate marker positions on all tracks
throughout the entire project.
NOTE
Marker lines are shown behind other events on other tracks. If you need a more pronounced
indication of the lines, consider lowering the Event Opacity in the Preferences dialog (Event
Display page).
RELATED LINKS
Position Markers on page 252
Cycle Markers on page 252
Event Opacity on page 762
Position Markers
Position markers allow you to save a specific position.
Position markers on the marker track are shown as marker events: vertical lines with the marker
description (if assigned) and number beside it. If you select a marker track, all its markers are
shown in the Inspector.
Cycle Markers
By creating cycle markers you can save any number of left and right locator positions as start
and end positions of a range and recall them by double-clicking on the corresponding marker.
Cycle markers are shown on a marker track as two markers bridged by a horizontal line. Cycle
markers are ideal for saving sections of a project.
By defining cycle markers for the intro, verse, and chorus of a song, for example, you can quickly
navigate to the song sections and repeat the section by activating Activate Cycle on the
Transport panel.
252
Markers
Markers Window
Setting the Locators Using Cycle Markers

Cycle markers represent ranges in your project. You can use them for moving the left and right
locators.
PROCEDURE
● To set the left locator to the cycle marker start and the right locator to the cycle marker
end, perform one of the following actions:
● Double-click on a cycle marker.
● From the Cycle pop-up menu in the track list, select a cycle marker.
RESULT
The left and right locators are moved to encompass the cycle marker.
Now you can move the project cursor position to the start or the end of the cycle marker by
moving it to the corresponding locator or use cycle markers to export specific ranges of your
project with the Export Audio Mixdown dialog.
Editing Cycle Markers

When editing cycle markers on a marker track, snap is taken into account.
● To add a cycle marker, press Ctrl/Cmd, click and drag on the marker track.
● To change the start/end position of a cycle marker, drag the start/end handle.
● To move a cycle marker to another position, drag the upper border.
● To delete a cycle marker, click with the Erase tool.
If you hold down Alt/Opt when you click, all consecutive markers are deleted.
● To cut a range in a cycle marker, select a range in the cycle marker and press Ctrl/Cmd-X.
● To set the marker start/end of the selected cycle marker to the cursor position, select
Project > Markers to open the Markers window, and select Functions > Set Marker
Start/End to Cursor.
● To set the left and right locators, double-click a cycle marker.
● To zoom in on a cycle marker, press Alt/Opt and double-click the cycle marker.
Markers Window
In the Markers window, you can view and edit markers. The markers on the marker track are
displayed in the marker list in the order in which they occur in the project.
To open the Markers window, you have the following possibilities:
● Select Project > Markers.

● On the Transport panel in the marker section, click Show.
● Use a key command (by default Ctrl/Cmd-M).
253
Markers
Markers Window
Functions menu
Lists all functions available in the Marker window.
Filter Markers
Allows you to specify which marker type is shown in the marker list.
Auto-Scroll with Project Cursor

Allows you to keep track of the locate arrow, even if your project contains a large
number of markers. If this option is activated, the Marker window is automatically
scrolled to keep the locate arrow visible.
Markers list
Shows the markers in the order in which they occur in the project.
Marker Settings
Shows the marker settings.
Editing in the Markers Window

In the Markers window, you can select, edit, add, move, and remove markers.
● To select or edit a marker, click on it.

Select multiple markers by Shift- or Ctrl/Cmd-clicking them.
● To add a position marker at the cursor position, select Functions > Insert Marker.
A position marker is added at the current project cursor position on the marker track.
● To add a cycle marker at the cursor position, select Functions > Insert Cycle Marker.
This adds a cycle marker between the left and right locators on the marker track.
● To move a marker to the cursor position, select the marker and select Functions > Move
Markers to Cursor.
You can also enter the new position numerically in the Position column. If a cycle marker
is selected, the move operation affects the cycle marker start position.
● To remove a marker, select it and select Functions > Remove Marker.
Navigating in the Marker List

You can navigate in the marker list using your computer keyboard and select entries by pressing
Return. This is a quick and easy way to jump to markers during playback or recording.
● To move to the previous/next marker in the list, press the Up Arrow/Down Arrow keys.
● To jump to the first/last marker, press the Page Up/Page Down keys.
254
Markers
Markers Window
Sorting and Reordering the Marker List

You can customize the display of the marker attributes in the marker list by sorting or reordering
the columns.
● To sort the marker list by a specific attribute, click on the corresponding column header.
● To reorder the marker attributes, drag and drop the corresponding column headers.
● To adjust the width of a column, place the mouse pointer between two column headers
and drag left or right.
NOTE
No matter by which attribute you sort, the second sort criterion will always be the position
attribute.
Marker Settings
You can make general marker settings for your project.
● To open the marker settings, select Project > Markers, and click Marker Settings .
Cycle follows when locating to Markers

This sets the left and right locators automatically to a position or cycle marker, when
locating to this marker. This is useful if you need to set the locators on the fly during
recording for Punch In/Punch Out, for example.
Show marker IDs on marker track

If this option is activated, the marker IDs are shown on the marker track.
Sync Selection
If this option is activated, the Markers window selection is linked to the selection in
the Project window.
Marker Attributes
Marker attributes are shown in the marker list of the Markers window.
● To open the Markers window, select Project > Markers.
The following attributes are available:
Locate
An arrow indicates which marker is at the project cursor position (or closest to the
project cursor). If you click in this column, the project cursor is moved to the
corresponding marker position. This column cannot be hidden.
ID
This column shows the marker ID numbers.
Position
In this column, you can view and edit the markers’ time positions (or start positions
for cycle markers). This column cannot be hidden.
End
In this column, you can view and edit the end positions of cycle markers.
Length
In this column, you can view and edit the length of cycle markers.
255
Markers
Markers Window
Description
Here you can enter names or descriptions for markers.
RELATED LINKS
Marker IDs on page 256
Cycle Markers on page 252
Editing Attributes
● To edit a marker attribute, select the corresponding marker, click in the desired attribute
column, and make your changes.
● To change the attributes of several markers, select the markers and activate the checkbox
for the attribute.
All selected markers change their attributes accordingly. Note that this does not work
when clicking on a timecode value or a text field.
NOTE
To navigate in the list of marker attributes, you can also use the Tab key and the Up Arrow,
Down Arrow, Left Arrow, and Right Arrow keys.
Sorting and Reordering Columns

You can customize the display of the marker attributes in the marker list by sorting or reordering
the columns.
● To sort the marker list by a specific attribute, click on the corresponding column header.
NOTE
No matter by which attribute you sort, the second sort criterion will always be the position
attribute.
● To reorder the marker attributes, drag and drop the corresponding column headers.
● To adjust the width of a column, place the mouse pointer between two column headers
and drag left or right.
Marker IDs
Each time you add a marker, it is automatically and sequentially assigned an ID number, starting
from 1.
IDs for cycle markers are shown in brackets and start from 1. ID numbers can be changed at any
time – this allows you to assign specific markers to key commands.
Reassigning Marker IDs

Sometimes, especially when setting markers on the fly, you may forget or miss to set a marker.
When added later, this marker’s ID will not correspond to its position on the marker track.
Therefore, it is possible to reassign the IDs for all markers on a track.
PROCEDURE
1. Open the Markers window.
2. Open the Functions pop-up menu and select either Reassign Position Marker IDs or
Reassign Cycle Marker IDs.
256
Markers
Marker Track
RESULT
The marker IDs of the selected type are reassigned to match the order of markers on the marker
track.
Marker Track
A marker track is used for adding and editing markers.
1 Add Marker
Adds a position marker at the cursor position.
2 Add Cycle Marker
Adds a cycle marker at the cursor position.
3 Locate pop-up menu
If you select a position or a cycle marker in this pop-up menu, the corresponding marker in
the event display or in the Markers window is selected.
4 Cycle pop-up menu
If you select a cycle marker in this pop-up menu, the left and right locators are set to the
corresponding cycle marker.
5 Zoom pop-up menu
If you select a cycle marker in this pop-up menu, the view zooms to the corresponding
cycle marker.
6 Marker event (inactive)
Shows an inactive marker event.
7 Marker event (active)
Shows an active marker event.
8 Cycle marker event (inactive)
Shows an inactive cycle marker event.
9 Cycle marker event (active)
Shows an active cycle marker event.
Adding, Moving, and Removing the Marker Track

You can add, move, and remove the marker track.
● To add a marker track to the project, select Project > Add Track > Marker.
● To move a marker track to another position in the track list, click and drag it up or down.
● To remove the marker track, right-click it in the track list and select Remove Selected
Tracks.
● To remove an empty marker track, select Project > Remove Empty Tracks.
This also removes any other tracks that are empty.
Editing Markers on the Marker Track

You can edit markers on the marker track.
● To add a position marker, click Add Marker or use the Draw tool.
257
Markers
Importing and Exporting Markers
● To add a cycle marker, click Add Cycle Marker or use the Draw tool.
● To select a marker, use the standard techniques.
● To resize a cycle marker, select it and drag the handles. You can also do this numerically on
the info line.
● To move a marker, select it and drag it. You can also edit marker positions on the info line.
● To remove a marker, select it and press Delete or use the Erase tool.
RELATED LINKS
Using Markers to Select Ranges

Markers can be used in conjunction with the Range Selection tool to make range selections in
the Project window. This is useful if you quickly want to make a selection that spans all tracks in
the project.
PROCEDURE
1. Set markers at the start and end of the section that you want to move or copy.
2. Select the Range Selection tool and double-click on the marker track between the
markers.
Everything in the project within the marker boundaries is selected. Any functions or
processing you perform now affect the selection only.
3. Click on the marker track in the selected range and drag the range to a new position.
If you hold down Alt/Opt while you drag the range, the selection in the Project window is
copied instead.

Markers and marker tracks can be imported and exported.
The following files can contain markers:
● MIDI files
Importing Markers via MIDI

You can import position markers by importing MIDI files containing markers. This is useful if you
want to use your marker tracks in other projects or if you want to share them with other Cubase
users. Any markers you have added are included in the MIDI file as standard MIDI file marker
events.
● Activate Import Markers in the Preferences dialog (MIDI—MIDI File page).
The following settings are imported:
● The start position of position markers and cycle markers
RELATED LINKS
Importing MIDI Files on page 221
258
Markers
Exporting Markers via MIDI

You can export your markers as part of a MIDI file.
● To include any markers in the MIDI file, activate Export Markers in the Export Options
dialog.
The following settings are exported:
● The start position of position markers and cycle markers
NOTE
To be able to export markers via MIDI export, your project must contain a marker track.
RELATED LINKS
Exporting MIDI Tracks as Standard MIDI Files on page 127
259
MixConsole
The MixConsole provides a common environment for producing mixes in stereo. It allows you to
control level, pan, solo/mute status, etc. for audio and MIDI channels. Furthermore, you can set
up the input and output routing for multiple tracks or channels at the same time.
You can open the MixConsole in a separate window or in the lower zone of the Project window.
While the MixConsole in the lower zone of the Project window features the key functions for
mixing, the separate MixConsole window gives you access to additional functions and settings.
RELATED LINKS
MixConsole in Lower Zone on page 260
MixConsole Window on page 261
MixConsole in Lower Zone

You can show a MixConsole in the lower zone of the Project window. This is useful if you want to
access the most important MixConsole functions from within a fixed zone of the Project
window. The MixConsole in the lower zone of the Project window is a separate MixConsole that
does not follow any visibility changes you perform in the MixConsole window.
To open a MixConsole in the lower zone of the Project window, do one of the following:
● Press Alt/Opt-F3.
● Select Studio > MixConsole in Project Window.
The MixConsole in the lower zone of the Project window is divided into the following sections:
260
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
1 Page selector
Allows you to select what page is displayed in the fader section: the channel faders, the
insert effects for a channel, or the send effects. The top button allows you to show/hide
the toolbar.
2 Toolbar
The toolbar shows tools and shortcuts for settings and functions in the MixConsole.
3 Fader section
The fader section is always visible and shows all channels in the same order as in the track
list.
RELATED LINKS
Fader Section on page 273
Inserts on page 283
Sends on page 293
Filtering Channel Types on page 269
Linking Channels on page 271
Functions Menu on page 272
MixConsole Window
You can open the MixConsole in a separate window.
To open the MixConsole, do one of the following:
● Press F3.
● Select Studio > MixConsole.
● On the Project window toolbar, click Open MixConsole.
NOTE
This is only visible on the toolbar if the Media & MixConsole Windows section is activated.
261
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
The MixConsole is divided into the following sections:
1 Toolbar
The toolbar shows tools and shortcuts for settings and functions in the MixConsole.
2 Left Zone
Allows you to set up the visibility of channels in the fader section.
3 Fader section
The fader section is always visible and shows all channels in the same order as in the track
list.
262
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
Apart from the main sections, you can also access the following sections from within the
MixConsole window:
1 Meter bridge
Allows you to monitor the levels of your channels.
2 Equalizer curves
Allows you to draw an EQ curve. Click in the curve display to open a larger view where you
can edit the curve points.
3 Channel racks
Allows you to show additional channel controls as needed.
4 Pictures
Allows you to add a picture to the selected channel. Pictures can help you identify your
MixConsole channels quickly.
5 Notepads
Allows you to enter notes and comments about a channel. Each channel has its own
notepad.
6 Channel Latencies
Allows you to show the latencies caused by insert effects or channel strip modules.
263
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
RELATED LINKS
MixConsole Left Zone on page 264
MixConsole Toolbar on page 265
Channel Racks Selector on page 270
Track Pictures Browser on page 131
Adding Notes to a MixConsole Channel on page 294
Channel Latency Overview on page 295
Channel Strips on page 287
MixConsole Left Zone

The left zone of the MixConsole shows a list of the MixConsole channels that allows you to
show/hide specific channels.
● To show/hide the left zone of the MixConsole, click Show/Hide Left Zone in the
MixConsole window toolbar.
Visibility
Lists all channels contained in your project, and allows you to show/hide specific
channels.
RELATED LINKS
MixConsole Visibility
The Visibility tab in the MixConsole lists all channels contained in your project, and allows you
to show/hide specific channels.
● To show/hide channels, check/uncheck them by clicking to the left of the channel name.
● To collapse/expand groups and folders, click the group or folder name.
264
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
NOTE
The MixConsole in the lower zone of the Project window does not follow any visibility changes
that you perform in the MixConsole window and vice versa.
MixConsole Toolbar
The toolbar contains tools and shortcuts for settings and functions in the MixConsole.
NOTE
The MixConsole toolbar in the lower zone of the Project window contains a limited set of tools.
Left Divider
Left Divider
Allows you to use the left divider. Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are
always shown.
Channel Visibility Configuration

Channel Visibility Configurations
Allows you to create configurations that are useful for switching quickly between
different visibility setups.
Set Channel Type Filter
Opens the channel filter that allows you to show/hide all channels of a certain
channel type.
Racks
Select Rack Types
Opens the rack selector that allows you to show/hide specific racks.
Rack Settings
Opens a pop-up menu with settings for the racks.
Locators
265
MixConsole
MixConsole Window

Transport Buttons
Rewind
Moves backward.
Forward
Moves forward.
Activate Cycle
Stop
Stops playback.
Start
Starts playback.
Transport Record
Time Displays
266
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
Secondary Time Display
Select Secondary Time Format
Allows you to select a time format for the secondary time display.
Markers
Jump to Marker
Open Markers Window
State Buttons
Deactivate All Mute States
Deactivates all mute states.
Deactivate All Solo States
Deactivates all solo states.
Activate/Deactivate Read for All Tracks
Activates/Deactivates read automation for all tracks.
Activate/Deactivate Write for All Tracks
Activates/Deactivates write automation for all tracks.
Bypass Inserts
Bypasses all inserts.
Bypass EQs
Bypasses all EQs.
Bypass Channel Strip
Bypasses all channel strip modules.
Bypass Sends
267
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
Bypasses all sends.
Link Group
Temporary Link Mode
Synchronizes all touched parameters of selected channels.
Zoom Palette
Reduce Channel Width
Allows you to reduce the channel width.
Set Number of Channels
Displays the set number of channels.
Increase Channel Width
Allows you to increase the channel width.
Reduce Rack Height
Allows you to reduce the rack height.
Increase Rack Height
Allows you to increase the rack height.

Right Divider
Right Divider
Mixer Functions Menu

Functions Menu
Opens a pop-up menu where you can select a MixConsole function.

Show/Hide Left Zone
268
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
Set up Toolbar
Set up Toolbar
Filtering Channel Types

The channel types filter on the MixConsole toolbar allows you to determine which channel types
are shown.
PROCEDURE
1. Click Set Channel Type Filter.
This opens the channel types filter.
2. Click to the left of a channel type to uncheck it and hide all channels of that type.
RESULT
Channels of the filtered type are removed from the fader section and the color of the Set
Channel Type Filter button changes to indicate that a channel type is hidden.
Channel Visibility Configurations Menu

The Channel Visibility Configurations button on the MixConsole toolbar allows you to create
configurations that are useful for switching quickly between different visibility setups.
The button displays the name of the active configuration. A list of configurations is shown as
soon as you create at least one configuration. To load a configuration, select it from the menu.
Channel visibility configurations are saved with the project.
Add Configuration
Opens the Add Configuration dialog that allows you to save the configuration and
enter a name for it.
Update Configuration
If you change the active configuration, this is indicated by an asterisk after the
configuration name. Use this function to save changes to the active configuration.
Rename Configuration
Opens the Rename Configuration dialog that allows you to rename the active
configuration.
269
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
Delete Configuration
Allows you to delete the active configuration.
Move Configuration to Position

This function becomes available if 2 or more configurations exist. It allows you to
change the position of the active configuration on the menu. This is useful as you can
assign key commands to the first 8 configurations in the Channel & Track Visibility
category of the Key Commands dialog.
Saving Configurations
To quickly switch between different channel setups, you can save configurations. The
configurations contain visibility settings as well as the show/hide status of channel types and
racks.
PROCEDURE
1. Set up the configuration that you want to save.
2. On the toolbar, click Channel Visibility Configurations.
3. From the pop-up menu, select Add Configuration.
4. In the Add Configuration dialog, enter a name for the configuration.
5. Click OK.
RESULT
The configuration is saved and you can return to it at any time.
Rack Selector
The rack selector allows you to activate specific MixConsole functions that are organized in
racks, such as routing, insert, or send handling.
Channel Racks Selector

You can activate and deactivate the different channel racks in the MixConsole.
● To open the rack selector, click Select Rack Types on the MixConsole toolbar.
Depending on the channel type, you can activate/deactivate the following racks:
Hardware
Allows you to control your audio hardware effects. This rack is only available if
supported by your hardware.
Routing
Allows you to set up the input and output routing. For MIDI, you can also select the
MIDI channel.
Pre (Filters/Gain/Phase)
Contains input filter controls along with Phase and Gain controls for audio-related
channels.
Inserts
Allows you to select insert effects for your channel.
Equalizers (audio-related channels only)

Allows you to set the channel EQ.
270
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
Channel Strip (audio-related channels only)

Allows you to integrate channel strip modules, such as Gate, Compressor, EQ,
Transformer, Saturator, and Limiter that allow you to enhance your sound.
Sends
Allows you to select send effects for your channel.
RELATED LINKS
Rack Settings Menu

The Rack Settings pop-up menu allows you to make settings for the racks.
● To open the Rack Settings pop-up menu, click Rack Settings on the MixConsole toolbar.
Exclusive Expanded Rack

Shows the selected rack exclusively and collapses the other racks.
Fixed Number of Slots

Shows all available slots for the Inserts, Sends, Cues, and Quick Controls racks.
Link Racks to Configurations

If this option is activated, the rack status is taken into account when you save and
load a configuration.
Show Pre/Filters as <Combined Label & Setting>

Select Combined Label & Setting if you want to show the label and the setting in
one line.
Select Separate Label & Setting if you want to show the label and the setting in
separate lines.
Show Inserts as <Plug-in Names & Insert Controls>

Select Plug-in Names if you want to show the plug-in names only.
Select Plug-in Names & Insert Controls if you want to show the plug-in names and
the insert controls.
Show All Channel Strip Controls

Shows all available controls on the Channel Strip rack.
Show One Channel Strip Type

Shows only one channel strip type at a time.
Show Sends as <Send Destination & Gain>

Select Send Destination & Gain if you want to show the destination and the gain in
one line.
Select Send Destination, Gain & Send Controls if you want to show the destination,
the gain and the send controls.
RELATED LINKS
Linking Channels
You can link selected channels in the MixConsole temporarily. Any change that is applied to one
channel is mirrored by all linked channels.
271
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
Using Quick Link

You can activate the Temporary Link Mode to synchronize all touched parameters of selected
channels.
PROCEDURE
1. Select the channels that you want to link.
2. On the MixConsole toolbar, activate Q-Link.
NOTE
You can also press Shift-Alt/Opt to temporarily link channels. In that case, the link is only
active as long as you press the keys.
3. Change the parameters for one of the selected channels.
RESULT
The changes are applied to all selected channels until you deactivate Q-Link.
Functions Menu
The Functions Menu contains tools and shortcuts for settings and functions in the MixConsole.
● To open the Functions Menu, click Functions Menu on the MixConsole toolbar.
Scroll to Selected Channel

If this option is activated and you select a channel on the Visibility tab, the selected
channel is automatically displayed in the fader section.
Copy First Selected Channel’s Settings

Copies the settings of the first selected channel.
Paste Settings to Selected Channels

Pastes the settings to the selected channels.
Zoom
Opens a submenu where you can increase or reduce the channel width and the rack
height.
Open Audio Connections

Opens the Audio Connections window.

Allows you to activate/deactivate the Constrain Delay Compensation that keeps all
channels in perfect sync and automatically compensates any delay inherent in VST
plug-ins during playback.
EQ/Filter Transition
Allows you to change the EQ/Filter Transition mode from Soft to Quick.
Save Selected Channels

Saves the settings for the selected channels.
Load Selected Channels

Loads the settings for the selected channels.
Global Meter Settings

Opens a submenu where you can set up the global meter settings.
272
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
Reset MixConsole Channels

Allows you to reset EQ, insert, and send effect settings for all or selected channels.
Solo and mute buttons are deactivated, the volume fader is set to 0 dB, and pan is set
to the center position.
RELATED LINKS
Saving MixConsole Settings

You can save MixConsole settings for selected audio-related channels and load them into any
project.
PROCEDURE
1. Select the channels with the settings that you want to save.
2. Select Functions Menu > Save Selected Channels.
3. In the file dialog, specify the file name and location.
4. Click Save.
RESULT
The settings for the selected channels are saved with the file extension .vmx. The input/output
routing is not saved.
Loading MixConsole Settings

You can load MixConsole settings that have been saved for selected channels.
PROCEDURE
1. Select the same number of channels that you selected when you saved your MixConsole
settings.
The loaded MixConsole settings are applied in the same order as originally saved. For
example, if you have saved the settings for channels 4, 6, and 8, and apply these settings
to channels 1, 2, and 3, the settings saved for channel 4 are applied to channel 1, the
settings saved for channel 6 to channel 2, and so on.
2. Select Functions Menu > Load Selected Channels.
3. In the Load Selected Channels dialog, select the .vmx file and click Open.
RESULT
The channel settings are applied to the selected channels.
NOTE
When you apply loaded MixConsole settings to fewer channels, some of the saved settings are
not applied. Since the saved settings are applied from left to right as shown in the MixConsole,
the settings for the channels furthest to the right are not applied to any channels.
Fader Section
The fader section is the heart of the MixConsole. It shows input and output channels together
with audio, instrument, MIDI, group, FX, and ReWire channels.
273
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
NOTE
If a channel is deactivated on the Visibility tab or if its channel type is deactivated, it is not shown
in the fader section. The MixConsole in the lower zone of the Project window does not follow
any visibility changes you perform in the MixConsole window and vice versa. It is linked to the
track visibility of the Project window.
The fader section allows you to do the following:
● Set panorama
● Activate mute and solo
● Open channel settings
● Set volume
● Enable automation
● Set input levels
NOTE
All fader section functions and settings are also available in the MixConsole in the lower zone of
the Project window.
RELATED LINKS
Channel Settings on page 295
Write/Read Automation on page 467
Pan Control
For each audio-related channel with at least a stereo output configuration, you can find a pan
control at the top of the fader section. For MIDI channels, the pan control sends out MIDI pan
messages. The result depends on how your MIDI instrument is set to respond to pan.
The pan control allows you to position a channel in the stereo spectrum.
274
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
● To make fine adjustments, hold down Shift when you move the pan control.
● To select the default center pan position, hold down Ctrl/Cmd, and click the pan control.
● To edit the value numerically, double-click the pan control.
RELATED LINKS
Creating New Projects on page 74
Stereo Balance Panner

The stereo balance panner allows you to control the balance between the left and right channels.
It is activated by default.
Pan Bypass
You can bypass the panning for all audio-related channels.
● To activate panning bypass, click the button to the left or press Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Shift
and click the pan control.
● To deactivate panning bypass, press Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Shift and click again.
When panning is bypassed for a channel, the following happens:
● Mono channels are panned center.

● Stereo channels are panned hard left and right.
Using Solo and Mute

You can silence one or several channels using Solo and Mute.
● To silence a channel, click Mute.

Click again to deactivate the mute state for the channel.
● To mute all other channels, click Solo for a channel.
Click again to deactivate the solo state.
● To deactivate the mute or solo states for all channels simultaneously, click Deactivate All
Mute States or Deactivate All Solo States on the toolbar.
● To activate exclusive solo mode, hold down Ctrl/Cmd and click Solo for the channel.
The Solo buttons of all other channels are deactivated.
● To activate solo defeat for a channel, Alt/Opt-click Solo.
You can also click and hold Solo to activate solo defeat. In this mode, the channel is not
muted when you solo another channel. Alt/Opt-click again to deactivate solo defeat.
Volume
Each channel in the fader section of the MixConsole has a volume fader. The fader levels are
displayed below the fader, in dB for audio-related channels and as MIDI volume (0 to 127) for
MIDI channels.
● To change the volume, move the fader up or down.

● To make fine volume adjustments, press Shift while moving the faders.
● To reset the volume to its default value, press Ctrl/Cmd and click a fader.
275
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
For audio channels, the volume fader controls the volume of the channel before it is routed to an
output bus, directly or via a group channel. For output channels, the volume fader controls the
master output level of all audio channels that are routed to an output bus. For MIDI channels,
the volume fader controls the volume changes in the MixConsole by sending out MIDI volume
messages to the connected instruments that are set to respond to MIDI messages.
Global Meter Settings Menu

You can change the meter characteristics for audio channels using the context menu of the
channel meter.
Right-click the channel meter and select one of the following options from the Global Meter
Settings menu:
Meter Peak Options - Hold Peaks

The highest registered levels are held and shown as static horizontal lines in the
meter.
Meter Peak Options - Hold Forever

If this option is activated, the peak levels are shown until you reset the meters. If this
option is deactivated, you can use the Meters’ Peak Hold Time parameter in the
Preferences dialog (Metering page) to specify for how long the peak levels are held.
The peak hold time can be between 500 and 30000 ms.
Meter Position - Input

If this option is activated, the meters show input levels for all audio channels and
input/output channels. The input meters are post input gain.
Meter Position - Post-Fader

If this option is activated, the meters show post-fader levels.
Meter Position - Post-Panner

If this option is activated, the meters show post-fader levels and also reflect pan
settings.
Reset Meters
Resets the meters.
Setting up Meter Colors

Setting up meter colors can help you to keep an overview of what levels are being reached.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Preferences dialog, select Metering > Appearance.
276
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
2. Do one of the following to set the level position for a color change:
● Double-click a level position to the right of the meter scale and enter the level (dB)
value. To enter dB values smaller than zero, add a minus sign before the entered
number.
● Click a level position and drag it to a specific level, and press Shift for more accurate
positioning.
● Click a level position and nudge it up or down with the Up Arrow/Down Arrow keys,
and press Shift for faster positioning.
3. Click the upper or lower part of a color handle so that a frame is shown, and in the color
picker, select a color.
Selecting the same color for the upper and lower part of the handle results in a meter that
changes its colors gradually. Different colors indicate level changes even more precisely.
NOTE
● To add more color handles, click Add, or Alt-click at a level position to the right of
the meter scale. Each new handle is automatically associated with a default color.
● To remove a handle, select the handle and click Remove, or Ctrl/Cmd-click the
handle.
4. Click OK.
RELATED LINKS
Metering - Appearance on page 770
Level Meters
The channel meters show the level when you play back audio or MIDI. The Meter Peak Level
indicator shows the highest registered level.
● To reset the peak level, Alt/Opt-click the Meter Peak Level value.
NOTE
Input and output channels have clipping indicators. When they light up, lower the gain or the
levels until the indicator is no longer lit.
277
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
Input Levels
When recording digital sound, it is important to set the input levels high enough to ensure low
noise and high audio quality. At the same time, you must avoid clipping (digital distortion).
Setting Input Levels

In the MixConsole, you can set the input level. Make sure that the signal is loud enough but does
not exceed 0 dB.
PROCEDURE
1. Select Functions Menu > Global Meter Settings > Meter Position and activate Input.
In this mode, the input channel level meters show the level of the signal at the input of the
bus, before any adjustments, such as input gain, EQ, effects, level, or pan are made. This
allows you to check the level of the unprocessed signal coming into the audio hardware.
2. Play back the audio and check the level meter for the input channel.
The signal should be as loud as possible without exceeding 0 dB, that is, the clipping
indicator for the input bus should not light up.
3. If necessary, adjust the input level in one of the following ways:
● Adjust the output level of the sound source or the external mixer.
● If possible, use the audio hardware’s own application program to set the input
levels. Refer to the documentation for the audio hardware.
● If your audio hardware supports the ASIO control panel function, it may be possible
to make input level settings. To open the ASIO control panel, select Studio > Studio
Setup and in the Devices list, select your audio card. When this is selected, you can
open the control panel by clicking Control Panel in the settings section to the right.
4. Optional: Select Functions Menu > Global Meter Settings > Meter Position and activate
Post-Fader.
NOTE
This allows you to check the level of the audio being written to a file on your hard disk,
which is only necessary if you make any adjustments to the input channel.
5. Optional: In the Channel Racks section, in the Inserts rack, click a slot and select an
effect, or in the Equalizers rack, make your EQ settings.
For some effects you may want to adjust the level of the signal going into the effect. Use
the input gain function for this. Press Shift or Alt/Opt to adjust the input gain.
6. Play back the audio and check the level meter of the input channel.
The signal should be reasonably loud without exceeding 0 dB, that is, the clipping indicator
for the input bus should not light up.
7. If necessary, use the input channel fader to adjust the signal level.
278
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
Clipping
Clipping typically occurs in the audio hardware when an analog signal is too loud and therefore
converted to digital in the hardware’s A/D converters.
Channel Racks
The Channel Racks section contains specific MixConsole functions, such as routing, insert, or
send handling. These are organized in racks.
NOTE
The MixConsole in the lower zone of the Project window features the Inserts and the Sends
rack only.
RELATED LINKS
Routing on page 280
Pre (Filters/Gain/Phase) on page 281
Inserts on page 283
Equalizers (EQ) on page 284
Channel Strips on page 287
Sends on page 293
Copying and Moving Rack and Channel Settings

You can use drag and drop to copy or move rack and channel settings.
NOTE
This function is only available in the MixConsole window.
Drag and drop works between different channels or different rack slots on the same channel.
When you drag, a visual feedback indicates the sections where you can drop your settings.
The following applies:
● To move the rack settings from one rack to another, drag the rack and drop it on the rack
to which you want to move the settings.
● To copy the rack settings from one rack to another, press Alt/Opt, drag the rack, and drop
it on the rack to which you want to copy the settings.
● To copy the channel settings from one channel to another, drag the channel and drop it on
the channel to which you want to copy the settings.
● To copy the channel settings from one channel to another, including the output routing
settings, press Alt/Opt, drag the channel, and drop it on the channel to which you want to
copy the settings.
279
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
You can copy rack and channel settings between different types of channels, provided that the
target channels have corresponding settings.
● For example, copying from input/output channels leaves the sends settings in the target
channel unaffected.
Routing
The Routing rack allows you to configure input and output routing, that is, setting up input and
output busses.
NOTE
This channel rack is only available in the MixConsole window.
Input busses are used when you record on an audio track. In this case, you must select from
which input bus the audio is received.
NOTE
The settings that you make for the input channel will be a permanent part of the recorded audio
file.
Output busses are used when you play back an audio, group, or FX channel. In this case, you
must route the channel to an output bus.
Setting up Routing
You can set up the input and output busses in Routing rack of the MixConsole.
PREREQUISITE
Set up busses and group channels in the Audio Connections window.
PROCEDURE
1. On the MixConsole toolbar, click Racks and activate Routing to show the Routing rack
above the fader section.
2. Click one of the slots of the Routing rack to open the input or the output routing pop-up
menu for a channel.
3. In the routing selector, select an entry.
● To set up the routing for multiple selected channels simultaneously, press Shift-
Alt/Opt and select a bus.
● To set several selected channels to incrementing busses (the second selected
channel to the second bus, the third to the third bus, etc.), press Shift and select a
bus.
● To disconnect input or output bus assignments, select No Bus.
Input Busses
The input routing selector only lists busses that correspond to the channel configuration.
Input Routing Configurations for Mono Channels
For mono channels, the following input routing configurations are available.
● Mono input busses.

● Mono output busses, or mono group output busses.
These should not lead to feedback.
280
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
RELATED LINKS
Routing on page 280
Input Routing Configurations for Stereo Channels
For stereo channels, the following input routing configurations are available.
● Mono or stereo input busses.

● Mono or stereo output busses, and mono or stereo group output busses.
These should not lead to feedback.
RELATED LINKS
Routing on page 280
Output Busses
For output busses any assignment is possible.
You can route the output of audio, instrument, group, FX and rewire channels to output, group,
FX channels, or use it as effect side-chain source.
Routing the outputs from multiple audio channels to a group allows you to control the channel
levels using one fader, and to apply the same effects and equalization to all the channels.
Using Group Channels

You can route the outputs from multiple audio channels to a group. This enables you to control
the channel levels using one fader, apply the same effects and EQ to all channels, etc. You can
also select a group channel as input for an audio track, to record a downmix of separate tracks,
for example.
PREREQUISITE
You have created and set up a group channel track in stereo.
PROCEDURE
1. Route the group channel track to an output bus.
2. Add effects to the group channel as insert effects.
3. Route the mono audio track to the group channel.
RESULT
The signal from the mono audio track is sent directly to the group, where it passes through the
insert effect in stereo.
Pre (Filters/Gain/Phase)
The Pre rack for audio-related channels features a high-cut and a low-cut filter as well as gain
and phase settings.
NOTE
NOTE
You cannot edit the Pre rack settings in the EQ curve display.
281
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
RELATED LINKS
Equalizer Settings on page 285
Making Filter Settings

Each audio-related channel has separate high-cut and low-cut filters that allow you to attenuate
signals with frequencies that are higher or lower than the cutoff frequency.
PROCEDURE
1. On the MixConsole toolbar, click Racks and activate Pre (Filters/Gain/Phase) to show the
Pre rack above the fader section.
2. Click to the left of the high-cut filter to activate the high-cut filter. You have the following
options:
● Drag the slider to adjust the cutoff frequency.
The available range spans from 20 kHz to 50 Hz.
● Click Select Filter Slope on the right of the high-cut filter to select a filter slope.
You can choose between 6, 12, 24, 36, and 48 dB. The default value is 12 dB.
3. Click to the left of the low-cut filter to activate the low-cut filter. You have the following
options:
● Drag the slider to adjust the cutoff frequency.
The available range spans from 20 Hz to 20 kHz.
● Click Select Filter Slope on the right of the low-cut filter to select a filter slope.
You can choose between 6, 12, 24, 36, and 48 dB. The default value is 12 dB.
RESULT
The changed settings are visible in the curve display. If you deactivate the high-cut and low-cut
filters, the filter curves are removed from the display. Bypassed high-cut and low-cut filters are
displayed in a different color.
Making Input Gain Settings

The Pre-Gain slider allows you to change the level of a signal before it reaches the EQ and the
effects section. This is useful as the level going into certain effects can change the way the signal
is affected. A compressor, for example, can be driven harder by raising the input gain. Gain can
also be used to boost the level of poorly recorded signals.
PROCEDURE
2. Drag the Gain slider to the left or to the right to cut or boost the gain.
Making Phase Settings

Each audio-related channel and input/output channel has a Phase button that allows you to
correct the phase for balanced lines and microphones that are wired backwards or that are out
of phase due to their positioning.
PROCEDURE
2. Activate Phase to invert the phase polarity for the signal.
282
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
Inserts
The Inserts rack for audio-related channels features insert effect slots that allow you to load
insert effects for a channel. For MIDI channels you can load MIDI inserts.
For further information, see the separate document Plug-in Reference.
RELATED LINKS
Audio Effects on page 309
Adding Insert Effects

You can add insert effects to MixConsole channels.
PROCEDURE
1. On the MixConsole toolbar, click Racks and activate Inserts to show the Inserts rack
above the fader section.
2. Click one of the insert slots to open the insert selector.
3. Click an insert effect to select it.
RESULT
The selected insert effect is loaded and automatically activated. Its plug-in panel opens.
Bypassing Insert Effects

You can bypass all insert effects.
● To bypass all inserts, click Bypass at the top of the Inserts rack.
● To bypass a single insert, click the button on the left of the inserts slot.
● To deactivate bypass, click the button again.
Activating Side-Chaining for Inserts

Some of the inserts feature side-chain functionality.
PROCEDURE
1. Right-click an insert effect.
2. From the context menu, select Activate/Deactivate Side-Chaining.
Saving/Loading FX Chain Presets

You can save and load all insert rack settings using FX chain presets. FX chain presets have the
file name extension .fxchainpreset.
PROCEDURE
● In the top right corner of the Inserts rack, open the Presets pop-up menu and perform
one of the following actions:
● To save the current settings as a preset, select Save FX Chain Preset and name your
preset.
● To load a preset, select Load FX Chain Preset and select a preset.
283
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
NOTE
You can also apply inserts together with EQ and channel strip settings from track presets.
You can load, tag, and save FX chain presets in the MediaBay.
Equalizers (EQ)
The Equalizers (EQ) rack is only available for audio-related channels. It features a built-in
parametric equalizer with up to 4 bands for each audio channel.
NOTE
Activating Equalizer Bands

On the EQ rack, you can activate up to 4 EQ bands for each audio channel.
PROCEDURE
1. On the MixConsole toolbar, click Racks and activate Equalizers to show the EQ rack above
the fader section.
2. Click Activate/Deactivate Band to activate an EQ band.
284
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
Equalizer Settings
You can make equalizer settings for the 4 bands. These have different default frequency values
and different Q names. However, they all have the same frequency range (20 Hz to 20 kHz). You
can specify different filter types for each individual module.
1 Bypass EQ
Click to bypass all EQ bands.
2 Curve display
Click on the display in a channel to show a larger version. The display is also available in
the Equalizers section of the track Inspector in the Project window and in the Channel
Settings window.
Clicking the curve display enlarges the view and shows a cross-hair cursor. The current
mouse position shows the frequency, note value, offset, and level at the top or bottom of
the display.
● Click to add a curve point and activate the corresponding EQ band.
● Double-click the curve point to deactivate it.
● Drag the curve point up or down to adjust the gain.
● Press Ctrl/Cmd to edit only the gain.
● Drag left or right to adjust the frequency.
● Press Alt/Opt to edit only the frequency.
● Press Shift while dragging to set the Q-factor.
● To invert the EQ curve, open the context menu and select Invert EQ Settings.
The final curve shows the EQ settings as well as active high-cut and low-cut filters of the
Pre rack settings. Bypassed filter settings are shown in a different color than the active
settings. Disabled filter settings are hidden from the display.
NOTE
You cannot edit the high-cut and low-cut filters in the curve display. To edit the filters, open
the Pre rack.
3 Select Preset
Opens a pop-up menu where you can load/save a preset.
285
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
4 Activate/Deactivate Band
Click to activate/deactivate an EQ band.
Band Settings
Activates/Deactivates the equalizer band.
2 Gain
Sets the amount of cut or boost. The range is ±24 dB.
3 Frequency
Sets the center frequency of the frequency range to be cut or boosted. You can set the
frequency either in Hz or as a note value. If you enter a note value, the frequency is
automatically displayed in Hz. For example, a note value of A3 sets the frequency to 440
Hz. When you enter a note value, you can also enter a cent offset. For example, enter A5
-23 or C4 +49.
NOTE
Ensure that you enter a space between the note and the cent offset. Only in this case, the
cent offsets are taken into account.
4 Q-Factor
Determines the width of the affected frequency range. Higher values give narrower
frequency ranges.
5 Select EQ Band Type
Opens a pop-up menu where you can select an EQ type for the band. Bands 1 and 4 can
act as parametric, shelving, or high/low-cut filters. EQ bands 2 and 3 are always parametric
filters.
RELATED LINKS
Making Filter Settings on page 282
Saving/Loading EQ Presets
You can save and load EQ presets.
PROCEDURE
● In the top right corner of the EQ rack, open the presets pop-up menu and perform one of
the following actions:
● To save the current settings as a preset, select Save Preset and name your preset.
● To load a preset, select Load Preset and select a preset.
NOTE
You can also apply EQ together with insert and channel strip settings from track presets.
You can load, tag, and save EQ presets in the MediaBay.
286
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
Channel Strips
The Channel Strip rack is only available for audio-related channels. It allows you to load built-in
processing modules for separate channels. You can change the position of specific modules in
the signal flow via drag and drop.
NOTE
The Channel Strip rack is only available in the MixConsole window.
Noise Gate
Allows you to silence audio signals below a set threshold level. As soon as the signal
level exceeds the set threshold, the gate opens to let the signal through.
Compressor
Allows you to create smooth compression effects. Drag the compressor up or down
to change its position in the signal flow.
EQ
Allows you to make EQ settings.
Tools
Provides various tools.
Sat
Allows you to add warmth to the sound.
Limit
Allows you to avoid clipping even at high levels.
Noise Gate
Noise gating silences audio signals below a set threshold. As soon as the signal level exceeds the
threshold, the gate opens to let the signal through.
Threshold
Determines the level at which Gate is activated. Signal levels above the set threshold
trigger the gate to open, and signal levels below the set threshold close the gate.
Range
Adjusts the attenuation of the gate when it is shut. The higher the value, the higher
the level of the signal that passes through the shut gate.
Attack
Sets the time after which the gate opens when it is triggered.
Release
Sets the time after which the gate closes.
Listen Filter
Allows you to monitor the filtered signal.
Activate Filter
Activates/Deactivates the internal side-chain and allows you to set up a filter to
modify the signal detection.
Auto Release
Automatically finds the best release setting for the audio material.
287
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
Filter Frequency
If the internal side-chain is activated, this parameter sets the filter frequency for the
signal detection.
Q-Factor
If the internal side-chain is activated, this parameter sets the resonance of the filter
for the signal detection.
State LED
Indicates whether the gate is open (LED lights up in green), closed (LED lights up in
red), or in an intermediate state (LED lights up in yellow).
Compressor
This channel strip module reduces the dynamic range of the audio, making softer sounds louder
or louder sounds softer, or both.
Open the pop-up menu to select between Standard Compressor, Tube Compressor, and
VintageCompressor.
Standard Compressor
The Standard Compressor allows you to create smooth compression effects. Drag the
compressor up or down to change its position in the signal flow.
Threshold
Determines the level where the compressor kicks in. Only signal levels above the set
threshold are processed.
Ratio
Sets the amount of gain reduction that is applied to signals above the set threshold.
A ratio of 3:1 means that for every 3 dB the input level increases, the output level
increases by 1 dB.
Attack
Determines how fast the compressor responds to signals above the set threshold. If
the attack time is long, more of the early part of the signal passes through
unprocessed.
Release
Sets the time after which the gain returns to the original level when the signal drops
below the threshold.
Auto Make-Up
Automatically adjusts the output for gain loss.
Auto Release
Automatically finds the best Release setting for the audio material.
Make-Up Gain
Compensates for output gain loss that is caused by compression.
Gain Reduction LED

Indicates the amount of compression of the signal.
RELATED LINKS
Standard Compressor – Details View on page 300
288
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
Tube Compressor
The Tube Compressor with integrated tube-simulation allows you to achieve smooth and warm
compression effects. The VU meter shows the amount of gain reduction. This compressor
features an internal side-chain section that lets you filter the trigger signal.
Input Gain
Determines the compression amount. The higher the input gain, the more
compression is applied.
Output Gain
Sets the output gain.
Gain Reduction LED

Attack
Determines how fast the compressor responds. If the attack time is long, more of the
initial part of the signal passes through unprocessed.
Release
Sets the time after which the gain returns to the original level.
Auto Release
Drive
Controls the amount of tube saturation.
Mix
Sets the level balance between the dry signal and the wet signal.
RELATED LINKS
Tube Compressor – Details View on page 301
VintageCompressor
The VintageCompressor is modeled after vintage type compressors.
Input Gain
In combination with the Output Gain setting, this parameter determines the
compression amount. The higher the input gain setting and the lower the output
gain setting, the more compression is applied.
Output Gain
Attack
Determines how fast the compressor responds. If the attack time is long, more of the
early part of the signal passes through unprocessed.
Release
Sets the time after which the gain returns to its original level.
Attack Mode (Punch)

If this option is activated, the early attack phase of the signal is preserved, retaining
the original punch in the audio material, even with short Attack settings.
Auto Release
289
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
Gain Reduction LED

RELATED LINKS
VintageCompressor - Details View on page 302
EQ
You can make equalizer settings for the 4 bands. These have different default frequency values
and different Q names. However, they all have the same frequency range (20 Hz to 20 kHz). You
can specify different filter types for each individual module.
Activates/Deactivates the equalizer band.
2 Select EQ Band Type
Opens a pop-up menu where you can select an EQ type for the band. Bands 1 and 4 can
act as parametric, shelf, or high/low-cut filters. EQ bands 2 and 3 are always parametric
filters.
3 Gain
Sets the amount of cut or boost. The range is ±24 dB.
4 Q-Factor
Determines the width of the affected frequency range. Higher values give narrower
frequency ranges.
5 Frequency
Sets the center frequency of the frequency range to be cut or boosted.
Tools
Provides a tool to attenuate or boost the gain of the attack and release phase of your audio.
EnvelopeShaper
This channel strip module can be used to attenuate or boost the gain of the attack and release
phase of audio material. You can use the knobs to change parameter values. Be careful with
levels when boosting the gain and if needed reduce the output level to avoid clipping.
Attack
Changes the gain of the attack phase of the signal.
Release
Changes the gain of the release phase of the signal.
Attack Length
Determines the length of the attack phase.
Output Gain
Sets the output level.
290
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
Sat
Allows you to add warmth to the sound. Open the pop-up menu to select between Tape
Saturation, and Tube Saturation.
Tape Saturation
This channel strip module simulates the saturation and compression of recording on analog tape
machines.
Drive
Controls the amount of tape saturation.
Low-Frequency
This is a low shelving filter with fixed frequency.
High-Frequency
This is a high-cut filter. Use the frequency fader to reduce harshness of the output
signal.
Dual
Simulates the use of two tape machines.
Auto Gain
Adjusts the gain automatically.
Output
Drive Amount LED

Indicates the amount of drive of the signal.
Tube Saturation
This channel strip module simulates the saturation and compression of recording of analogue
tube compressors.
Drive
Controls the amount of tube saturation.
Low-Frequency
This is a low shelving filter with fixed frequency.
High-Frequency
This is a high-cut filter. Use the frequency fader to reduce harshness.
Output Gain
Drive Amount LED

Indicates the amount of drive of the signal.
291
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
Limit
Allows you to avoid clipping even at high levels. Open the pop-up menu to select between
Brickwall Limiter, Maximizer, and Standard Limiter.
Brickwall Limiter
Brickwall Limiter ensures that the output level never exceeds a set limit. Due to its fast attack
time, Brickwall Limiter can reduce even short audio level peaks without creating audible
artifacts. However, this channel strip module creates a latency of 1 ms.
Threshold
Determines the level where the limiter kicks in. Only signal levels above the set
threshold are processed.
Release
Sets the time after which the gain returns to the original level when the signal drops
below the threshold.
Auto Release
Gain Reduction LED

Displays the amount of gain reduction.
Maximizer
This channel strip module raises the loudness of audio material without the risk of clipping.
Optimize
Determines the loudness of the signal.
Mix Amount
Sets the level balance between the dry signal and the wet signal.
Output
Determines the maximum output level. Set this to 0 dB to avoid clipping.
Gain Reduction LED

Standard Limiter
This channel strip module is designed to ensure that the output level does not exceed a set
output level, to avoid clipping in following devices. Standard Limiter can adjust and optimize the
Release parameter automatically according to the audio material, or it can be set manually.
Input
Adjusts the input gain.
Release
Sets the amount of time it takes for the gain to return to its original level. If Auto
Release is activated, Standard Limiter automatically finds the best release setting
for the audio material.
Output
Determines the maximum output level.
Gain Reduction LED

292
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
Saving/Loading Strip Presets

You can save and load strip presets. Strip presets have the file name extension .strippreset.
PROCEDURE
● In the top right corner of the Channel Strip rack, open the Presets pop-up menu and
perform one of the following actions:
● To save the current settings as a preset, select Save Strip Preset and name your
preset.
● To load a preset, select Load Strip Preset and select a preset.
NOTE
You can also apply channel strip settings together with insert and EQ settings from track
presets. You can load, tag, and save strip presets in the MediaBay.
RELATED LINKS
Loading Strip Presets on page 462
Sends
The Sends rack for audio-related channels features send effect slots that allow you to load send
effects and value sliders that for determining the send level for a channel. For MIDI channels, the
Sends rack features send effect slots that allow you to load send effects.
You can use sends to route audio, instrument, group, FX and rewire channels to output, group,
FX channels, or use them as effect side-chain sources.
Adding Send Effects

On the Sends rack, you can add send effects.
PROCEDURE
1. On the MixConsole toolbar, click Racks and activate Sends to show the rack above the
fader section.
2. Click one of the send slots to open the send selector.
3. Click a send effect to select it.
The selected send effect is loaded.
4. Click on the left of the slot to activate the send.
Bypassing Send Effects

You can bypass all send effects.
● To bypass all sends, click the bypass button at the top of the Sends rack.
● To deactivate bypass, click the button again.
Adding FX Channels to a Send

You can add an FX channel track that is routed to a send from within the MixConsole.
PROCEDURE
1. Right-click on the send slot to open the context menu.
2. Select Add FX Channel to <send name>.
293
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
3. In the Add FX Channel Track window, select the effect and configuration.
4. Click OK.
RESULT
The FX channel track is added in the Project window, and the send is automatically routed to it.
Adding Notes to a MixConsole Channel

You can add annotations to MixConsole channels.
PROCEDURE
1. On the MixConsole toolbar, click Set up Window Layout, and activate Notepads.
The Notepads section is shown above the fader section.
2. Select the channel for which you want to add notes, click in the notepad section and enter
your notes.
3. To close the notepad, press Esc, or click in another section of the MixConsole.
Applying Channel Colors to Channel Controls

You can apply channel colors to the channel controls as well. This is useful if you have many
channels in the MixConsole and you want to discern them by their color.
PREREQUISITE
You have manually or automatically assigned track/channel colors.
PROCEDURE
2. Open the User Interface page, and select Track & MixConsole Channel Colors.
3. In the Colorize Tracks and MixConsole Channels section, activate MixConsole Channels.
4. Optional: To adjust the brightness of a selected channel, adjust the Selected Channel
Brightness slider.
NOTE
By default, the selected channel is shown in gray. If you want to display the selected
channel in color, activate Show Color for Selected Channel. You can then discern it from
the other channels by its pronounced color strength.
5. Click OK.
RESULT
The channel colors are applied to the channel controls.
RELATED LINKS
Automatically Assigning Colors to New Tracks/Channels on page 130
Colorizing Single Tracks on page 67
Colorizing Selected Tracks on page 66
User Interface on page 773
294
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
Channel Latency Overview

The Channel Latencies display the latencies caused by insert effects or channel strip modules
for audio-related channels in the MixConsole.
● To show the channel latency display in the fader section of the MixConsole, click Set up
Window Layout on the toolbar and activate Channel Latencies.
● To open an overview of the latencies for a specific channel, click Open Channel Latency
Overview.
The Channel Latency Overview shows the following information:
Name
The name of the effect that causes the latency.
Type
Indicates if the latency is caused by an insert effect, a channel strip module or a
panner.
Latency (ms)
Shows the latency in milliseconds.
Latency (Samples)
Shows the latency in samples.
Total Channel Latency

Shows the total latency for that channel in milliseconds and in samples.
NOTE
If you want any plug-in delay to be compensated during playback, make sure that Constrain
Delay Compensation is deactivated.
RELATED LINKS
Plug-In Delay Compensation on page 311
Functions Menu on page 272
Constrain Delay Compensation on page 487
Channel Settings
You can open each MixConsole channel in a separate Channel Settings window. This allows for
better overview and editing of individual channels and their settings.
The channel selection in the Channel Settings window is synchronized with the channel
selection in the MixConsole, and the track selection in the Project window.
295
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
NOTE
To separate the channel selection in the Channel Settings window from the channel selection in
the MixConsole, open the Functions Menu on the toolbar of the Channel Settings window, and
deactivate Follow ‘e’ buttons or selection changes.
To open the channel settings for an audio-related channel, do one of the following:
● In the fader section of the MixConsole, select the channel, and click Edit Channel
Settings.
● In the track list, select the track, and in the top section of the Inspector, click Edit Channel
Settings.
● In the track list, select the track, and on the track click Edit Channel Settings.
The Channel Settings window is divided into several sections:
1 Toolbar
The toolbar shows tools and shortcuts for settings and functions in the Channel Settings
window.
2 Inserts/Strip
The Inserts section features insert effect slots that allow you to load insert effects for a
channel. The Strip section allows you to load built-in processing modules for separate
channels.
3 Channel Strip/Equalizer
The Channel Strip section allows you to load built-in processing modules for separate
channels. The Equalizer section features a built-in parametric equalizer with up to 4 bands
for each audio channel.
4 Destinations
The Destinations section features send effect slots that allow you to load send effects.
5 Fader
The fader section shows the current channel.
The sections are arranged in zones at the left and right of the Channel Settings window.
296
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
RELATED LINKS
Channel Settings – Channel Inserts on page 299
Channel Settings – Channel Strip on page 299
Channel Settings – Equalizer on page 305
Channel Settings – Destinations on page 306
Channel Settings – Channel Faders on page 307
Equalizer Settings on page 285
Channel Settings Toolbar

The toolbar in the Channel Settings window contains tools and shortcuts for settings and
functions in the Channel Settings window.
Channel Navigation
Go to Last Edited Channel
Shows the channel that you last edited in the Channel Settings window. This is only
available if you have edited at least 2 channels.
Go to Next Edited Channel
Shows the next channel in the Channel Settings window. This is only available if you
have edited at least 2 channels.
Go to Previous MixConsole Channel
Shows the previous MixConsole channel in the Channel Settings window.
Go to Next MixConsole Channel
Shows the next MixConsole channel in the Channel Settings window.
Left Divider
Left Divider
Channel Sources
Input
Opens the name of the input channel.
Go to Input/Select an Input
Shows the input channel in the Channel Settings window.
Channel Name
Channel Name
Shows the name of the channel that is shown in the Channel Settings window.
297
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
Channel Destinations
Go to Output/Select an Output
Opens the output channel in the Channel Settings window.
Output
Shows the name of the output channel.
Edit Instrument
Edit VST Instrument
Allows you to open the VST instrument control panel. This is only available for MIDI
and instrument channels.
Output Chain
Show Output Chain
Shows the output chain. This allows you to keep track of more complicated output
routings.
Track Templates
Load/Save Track Preset
Allows you to load/save track presets.
Reload Track Preset
Allows you to reload track presets.
Channel Functions
Functions Menu
Opens a pop-up menu where you can select a Channel Settings function.

Set up Toolbar
298
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
Channel Settings – Channel Inserts

The Channel Inserts section is shown in the Channel Settings window.
Bypass Inserts
Bypasses the insert effects for the channel.
Inserts
Allows you to add insert effects for the channel.
Preset Management
Allows you to load or save FX Chain presets.
Move Channel Strip to Pre/Post-Inserts Position

Allows you to move the channel strip to pre-fader position or to post-fader position
in the signal flow.
Strip
Allows you to activate and set up channel strip modules for the channel.
RELATED LINKS
Channel Settings – Channel Strip

The Channel Strip/Equalizer section is shown in the Channel Settings window.
299
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
Bypass Channel Strip

Bypasses the channel strip modules for the channel.
NOTE
You can reset the channel strip modules for the channel by Alt/Opt-clicking this
button.
Channel Strip
Allows you to activate and set up channel strip modules for the channel.
Preset Management
Allows you to load or save strip presets.
Channel Strip Modules

The following channel strip modules are shown:
● Noise Gate
● Compressor
● EQ
● Tools
● Sat
● Limit
You can change the position of channel strip modules in the signal chain by dragging.
RELATED LINKS
Noise Gate on page 287
Compressor on page 288
EQ on page 290
Tools on page 290
Sat on page 291
Limit on page 292
Standard Compressor – Details View

The Standard Compressor features a details view with more controls and value readouts for the
meters.
● To open the details view, click Edit Module .
300
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
In the details view, the following additional parameters are available:
● Soft Knee/High Ratio

● Hold
● Analysis
● Dry Mix
● Input Gain meter
● Output Gain meter
● Gain Reduction meter
You can close the details view by clicking Close Module .
RELATED LINKS
Standard Compressor on page 288
Tube Compressor – Details View

The Tube Compressor features a details view with more controls and value readouts for the
meters.
301
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
● Character
● Low/High switch for Ratio
● Side-chain section with Frequency, Filter Type, Q-Factor, and Monitor
RELATED LINKS
Tube Compressor on page 289
VintageCompressor - Details View

The VintageCompressor features a details view with more controls and value readouts for the
meters.
302
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
● Mix
● Ratio buttons
● Gain Reduction meter
RELATED LINKS
VintageCompressor on page 289
Maximizer – Details View

The Maximizer features a details view with more controls and value readouts for the meters.
303
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
● Classic
This mode is suited for all styles of music.
● Modern
This mode is particularly suited for contemporary styles of music. Release allows you to
set the overall release time, Recover allows for a faster signal recovering at the beginning
of the release phase.
● Soft Clip
Activate this to start limiting or clipping the signal softly and to generate harmonics that
add a warm, tube-like characteristic to the audio material.
● High resolution input/output meter with gain reduction.
RELATED LINKS
Maximizer on page 292
304
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
Channel Settings – Equalizer

The Channel Strip/Equalizer section is shown in the Channel Settings window.
Bypass Equalizers
Bypasses the equalizer settings for the channel.
NOTE
You can reset the equalizers by Alt/Opt-clicking this button.
Preset Management
Allows you to load or save equalizer presets.
Equalizer Settings
Opens the Equalizer Settings panel.
Equalizer display
Allows you to make equalizer settings for the 4 bands in a large EQ curve display with
several modes.
Equalizer Controls
Allows you to make equalizer settings for the 4 bands in a large EQ curve display with
several modes.
RELATED LINKS
Equalizer Settings Panel

The Equalizer Settings panel allows you to set up the equalizer.
● To open the Equalizer Settings panel, click Equalizer Settings in the Equalizer section of
the Channel Settings window.
305
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
Show Equalizer Controls

Shows/Hides the equalizer controls.
Show FFT Pre EQ Curve

Shows/Hides the FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) input curve for the reference channel.
Hold FFT Post EQ Peak Curve

Holds the peak values of the FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) output curve for the
reference channel.
Transparency for Channel Curve

Allows you to adjust the transparency of the filled area for the spectral curve.
Channel Settings – Destinations

The Channel Sends section is shown in the Channel Settings window.
Bypass Sends
Bypasses the send effects for the channel.
Sends—Destinations
Allows you to set up a destination for the send effects for the channel.
RELATED LINKS
306
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
Channel Settings – Channel Faders

The Channel Faders section is shown in the Channel Settings window.
The controls are the same as in the MixConsole fader section.
RELATED LINKS
Keyboard Focus in the MixConsole

The left zone, the channel rack section, and the fader section can be controlled with the
computer keyboard.
For this to work, the section must have the focus. If a section has the keyboard focus, the border
that surrounds it is highlighted in a specific color.
Activating Keyboard Focus

To be able to control the MixConsole with the keyboard, you must activate the keyboard focus.
PROCEDURE
1. Click in an empty area of the section to activate the keyboard focus.
2. Press Tab to activate the next section. This allows you to cycle forward through the
sections.
3. Press Shift-Tab to activate the previous section.
Navigating in a Section
Once you have activated the focus for a section, you can control it with the computer keyboard.
In the channel racks section and in the fader section, controls that are selected for keyboard
control are indicated by a red border.
● To navigate through the controls, use the Up Arrow, Down Arrow, Left Arrow, or
Right Arrow keys.
307
MixConsole
MixConsole Window
● To activate or deactivate a switch, press Return.

● To expand or collapse an active rack, to open or close a value field in a slot, or to open the
plug-in panel for a loaded plug-in, press Return.
● To access the controls in the left zone, press Ctrl/Cmd-Return.
● To access the controls in the middle zone, press Return.
● To access the controls in the right zone, press Alt/Opt-Return.
● To close a pop-up menu or a plug-in panel, press Esc.
● To enable or disable the loaded plug-in, press Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Return.
308
Audio Effects
Cubase comes with a number of included effect plug-ins that you can use to process audio,
group, instrument, and ReWire channels.
The effects and their parameters are described in the separate document Plug-in Reference.
Insert Effects and Send Effects

You can apply effects to audio channels by using insert effects or send effects.
Insert Effects
Insert effects are inserted in the signal chain of an audio channel. This way, the whole channel
signal passes through the effect.
You can add up to 8 different insert effects per channel.
Use insert effects for effects such as distortion, filters, or other effects that change the tonal or
dynamic characteristics of the sound.
To add and edit insert effects, you can use the following inserts sections:
● The Inserts rack in the MixConsole.
● The Inserts section in the Channel Settings window.
● The Inserts section in the Inspector.
Send Effects
Send effects can be added to FX channel tracks, and the audio data to be processed can be
routed to the effect. This way, the send effects remain outside the audio channel’s signal path.
Each audio channel has 8 sends, each of which can be freely routed to an effect (or to a chain of
effects).
Use send effects in the following cases:
309
Audio Effects
Insert Effects and Send Effects
● To control the balance between the dry and wet sound individually for each channel.
● To use the same effect for several different audio channels.
To edit send effects, you can use the following sends sections:
● The Sends rack in the MixConsole.
● The Destinations section in the Channel Settings window.
● The Sends section in the Inspector.
RELATED LINKS
VST Standard
Audio effects can be integrated in Cubase thanks to the VST standard. At the moment, the VST 3
and VST 2 standards are supported.
The VST 3 plug-in standard offers improvements like smart plug-in processing and side-chain
inputs. VST 3 retains full backwards compatibility to VST 2.
Smart Plug-In Processing

Smart plug-in processing is a technology that allows to disengage the processing for plug-ins
when no signal is present. This reduces the CPU load on silent passages and allows you to load
more effects.
To activate smart plug-in processing, activate Suspend VST 3 plug-in processing when no audio
signals are received in the Preferences dialog (VST—Plug-ins page).
NOTE
Check the processor for the passage with the largest number of events playing simultaneously to
make sure that your system offers the required performance at every time position.
Side-Chain Inputs
Several VST 3 effects feature side-chain inputs. These allow you to control the operation of the
effect via external signals that are routed to the side-chain input.
The effect processing is still applied to the main audio signal.
RELATED LINKS
Side-Chaining on page 321
310
Audio Effects
Insert Effects
Plug-In Delay Compensation

Some audio effects, especially dynamics processors that feature a look-ahead functionality, may
take a brief time to process the audio fed into them. As a result, the output audio is slightly
delayed. To compensate for this, Cubase provides plug-in delay compensation.
Plug-in delay compensation is featured throughout the entire audio path maintaining the sync
and timing of all audio channels.
VST 3 dynamics plug-ins with look-ahead functionality feature a Live button that allows you to
disengage the look-ahead. This minimizes latency during real-time recording. For details, see the
separate document Plug-in Reference.
To avoid latency during real-time recording or real-time playback of VST instruments, you can
also use Constrain Delay Compensation.
RELATED LINKS
Constrain Delay Compensation on page 487
Tempo Sync
Plug-ins can receive timing and tempo information from Cubase. This is useful to synchronize
plug-in parameters, such as modulation rates or delay times, to the project tempo.
Timing and tempo information is provided to plug-ins of the standard VST 2.0 or later.
To set up tempo sync, you must specify a base note value. Straight, triplet, or dotted note values
(1/1 to 1/32) are supported.
For details about the included effects, see the separate document Plug-in Reference.
Insert Effects
Insert effects can be inserted in the signal chain of an audio channel. This way, the whole channel
signal passes through the effect.
You can add up to 8 different insert effects independently for each audio-related channel (audio
track, group channel track, FX channel track, instrument channel, or ReWire channel) or output
bus.
The signal passes through the insert effects corresponding to their slot position from top to
bottom.
You can define post-fader insert slots for any channel. Post-fader insert slots are always post-EQ
and post-fader.
NOTE
To show all post-fader slots in the MixConsole, open the Rack Settings and activate Fixed
Number of Slots.
Use post-fader slots for insert effects where you want the level to remain unchanged after the
effect. Dithering and maximizers are typically used as post-fader insert effects for output busses,
for example.
NOTE
If you want to use an effect with identical settings on several channels, set up a group channel
and apply your effect as a single insert for this group.
311
Audio Effects
Insert Effects
RELATED LINKS
Dither Effects on page 326
Adding Insert Effects to Group Channels on page 313
Rack Settings Menu on page 271
Adding Insert Effects

If you add insert effects to audio channels, the audio is routed through the insert effects.
PROCEDURE
1. Select the audio track.
2. In the track list, click Edit Channel Settings.
The Channel Settings window for the audio channel opens.
3. In the Inserts section, click the first insert slot on the Inserts tab, and select an effect from
the selector.
RESULT
The selected insert effect is loaded and activated, and the audio is routed through it. The effect
control panel is opened.
RELATED LINKS
Effect Control Panel on page 326
Adding Insert Effects to Busses

If you add insert effects to input busses, the effects become a permanent part of the recorded
audio file. If you add insert effects to output busses, all audio routed to that bus is affected.
Insert effects that are added to output busses are sometimes referred to as master effects.
PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > MixConsole to open the MixConsole.
2. In the fader section, perform one of the following actions:
● Locate the input channel and click Edit Channel Settings to edit the input bus.
● Locate the output channel and click Edit Channel Settings to edit the output bus.
The Channel Settings window for the selected channel opens.
3. In the Inserts section, click the first insert slot on the Inserts tab, and select an effect from
the selector.
RESULT
The selected insert effect is added to the bus and activated. The effect control panel is opened.
312
Audio Effects
Insert Effects
Adding Insert Effects to Group Channels

If you add insert effects to group channels, you can process several audio tracks through the
same effect.
PROCEDURE
2. Click Group.
3. Open the Audio Outputs pop-up menu, and select the desired output bus.
4. Click Add Track.
The group track is added to the track list.
5. In the Inspector for the group track, open the Inserts section.
6. Click the first effect slot and select an effect from the selector.
7. In the Inspector for the audio tracks, open the Output Routing pop-up menus and select
the group.
RESULT
The signal from the audio track is routed through the group channel and passes through the
insert effect.
RELATED LINKS
Adding Group Channels to Selected Channels

You can add a group channel to several selected channels.
PREREQUISITE
Your project contains some tracks that you want to route to a group channel.
PROCEDURE
1. In the track list, right-click the tracks that you want to route to a group channel, and select
Add Track > Group Channel to Selected Channels.
2. In the Add Track dialog, open the Configuration pop-up menu, and select a channel
configuration for the group channel track.
3. Open the Folder Setup pop-up menu, and select if you want to create group channel
tracks inside or outside a dedicated folder.
4. Click OK.
RESULT
The group channel track is added to the track list. In the Output Routing pop-up menu of the
selected tracks, the group is selected. The tracks are routed to the group channel.
RELATED LINKS
313
Audio Effects
Insert Effects
Copying Insert Effects

You can add insert effects to audio channels by copying them from other audio channels or from
other slots of the same audio channel.
PREREQUISITE
You have added at least one insert effect to an audio channel.
PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > MixConsole.
2. In the Inserts rack, locate the insert effect that you want to copy.
3. Hold down Alt/Opt, and drag the insert effect on an insert slot.
RESULT
The insert effect is copied. If the destination slot already contains an insert effect, the previously
existing effect is moved down one slot.
Rearranging Insert Effects

You can change the position of an insert effect in the signal chain of the audio channel by moving
it to a different slot of the same channel. You can also move an insert effect to another audio
channel.
PREREQUISITE
You have added at least one insert effect to an audio channel.
PROCEDURE
2. In the Inserts rack, locate the insert effect that you want to rearrange.
3. Drag the insert effect to another insert slot.
RESULT
The insert effect is removed from the source slot and placed on the destination slot. If the
destination slot already contains an insert effect, this effect is moved to the next insert slot.
Deactivating Insert Effects

If you want to listen to a track without having it processed by an effect, but do not want to
remove this effect completely from the insert slot, you can deactivate it.
PREREQUISITE
You have added an insert effect to an audio channel.
PROCEDURE
1. In the track list, select the audio track with the insert effect that you want to deactivate.
2. In the Inspector, open the Inserts section, and Alt/Opt-click Bypass Insert.
314
Audio Effects
Insert Effects
RESULT
The effect is deactivated and all processing is terminated, but the effect is still loaded.
Bypassing Insert Effects

If you want to listen to the track without having it processed by a particular effect, but do not
want to remove this effect completely from the insert slot, you can bypass it. A bypassed effect is
still processing in the background. This allows for crackle-free comparison of the original and the
processed signal.
PREREQUISITE
You have added an insert effect to an audio channel.
PROCEDURE
1. In the track list, select the audio track with the insert effect that you want to bypass.
2. In the Inspector, open the Inserts section, and click Bypass Insert.
RESULT
The effect is bypassed, but still processing in the background.
Removing Insert Effects

PROCEDURE
1. In the track list, select the audio track with the insert effect that you want to remove.
2. In the Inspector, open the Inserts section and on the effect that you want to remove, click
Select Insert.
3. In the effect selector, select No Effect.
RESULT
The insert effect is removed from the audio channel.
Freezing Insert Effects

Freezing an audio track and its insert effects allows you to reduce processor power. However,
frozen tracks are locked for editing. You cannot edit, remove, or add insert effects for the frozen
track.
PREREQUISITE
You have made all settings for the track and you are sure that you do not need to edit it
anymore.
315
Audio Effects
VST Effect Selector
PROCEDURE
1. In the Inspector for the audio track that you want to freeze, click Freeze Audio Channel.
2. In the Freeze Channel Options dialog, specify a Tail Size in seconds.

This adds time at the end of the rendered file. This way, reverb and delay tails can fully
fade out.
RESULT
The output of the track including all pre-fader insert effects is rendered to an audio file.
NOTE
Post-fader inserts cannot be frozen.
The frozen audio track is saved in the Freeze folder that can be found in the following location:
● Windows: within the Project folder
● macOS: User/Documents
In the MixConsole, the frozen audio channel is indicated by a snowflake symbol above the
channel name. You can still adjust the level and panning, make EQ settings, and adjust the effect
sends.
To unfreeze a frozen track, click Freeze again.
VST Effect Selector

The VST effect selector allows you to select VST effects of the active collection.
● To open the VST effect selector, open the Inserts section of the audio track Inspector, and
on an insert slot, click Select Insert.
1 Expand Tree/Collapse Tree

Expands/Collapses the tree.
2 Search VST Effect
316
Audio Effects
Send Effects
Allows you to search for VST effects by typing in the name or parts of the name, or the
category.
3 Plug-in Collections and Options
Allows you to select a collection.
If you select the Default collection, the options Sort By Category and Sort by Vendor
become available. These allow you to sort the default collection.
Send Effects
Send effects are outside the signal path of an audio channel. The audio data that is to be
processed must be sent to the effect.
● You can select an FX channel track as routing destination for a send.

● You can route different sends to different FX channels.
● You can control the amount of signals sent to the FX channel by adjusting the effect send
level.
NOTE
In the Preferences dialog (VST page), you can set a default send level. Use Ctrl/Cmd-click
to set the send level to this default value.
To do this, you must create FX channel tracks.
RELATED LINKS
FX Channel Tracks on page 317
VST on page 775
FX Channel Tracks
You can use FX channel tracks as routing destinations for audio sends. The audio is sent to the FX
channel and through any insert effects set up for it.
● You can add several insert effects to an FX channel.

The signal passes through the effects in series, from the top downward.
● You can rename FX channel tracks as any other tracks.
● You can add automation tracks to FX channel tracks.
This allows for automating various effect parameters.
● You can route the effect return to any output bus.
● You can adjust the FX channel in the MixConsole.
This includes adjusting the effect return level, the balance, and the EQ.
When you add an FX channel track, you can select if FX channel tracks are created inside or
outside a dedicated folder. If you select Create Inside Folder, FX channel tracks are shown in a
dedicated folder.
This allows for better overview and editing of the FX channel tracks.
317
Audio Effects
Send Effects
NOTE
By folding FX channel folders, you can save screen space.
RELATED LINKS
Adding FX Channel Tracks

PROCEDURE
2. Click Effect.
3. Open the Effect pop-up menu, and select an effect for the FX channel track.
4. Open the Configuration pop-up menu, and select a channel configuration for the FX
channel track.
5. Open the Folder Setup pop-up menu, and select if you want to create FX channel tracks
inside or outside a dedicated folder.
6. Click Add Track.
RESULT
The FX channel track is added to the track list and the selected effect is loaded into the first
available insert effect slot of the FX channel.
RELATED LINKS
Adding FX Channels to Send Slots

PROCEDURE
1. In the track list, select the tracks to which you want to add an FX channel.
2. In the Inspector, open the Sends section.
3. Right-click the send slot to which you want to add the FX channel, and select Add FX
Channel to Send.
4. Open the Effect pop-up menu, and select an effect for the FX channel track.
channel track.
7. Click Add Track.
RESULT
The FX channel track is added to the track send slot.
Adding FX Channels to Selected Channels

PREREQUISITE
Your project contains some tracks to which you want to add an FX channel.
318
Audio Effects
Send Effects
PROCEDURE
1. In the track list, select all tracks to which you want to add an FX channel.
2. Right-click one of the tracks, and select Add Track > FX Channel to Selected Channels.
3. In the Add Track dialog, open the Effect pop-up menu and select an effect for the FX
channel track.
channel track.
6. Click OK.
RESULT
The FX channel track is added to the track list. The selected effect is loaded into the first available
insert effect slot of the FX channel, and to the first available send effect slot of all channels that
you selected.
RELATED LINKS
Adding Insert Effects to FX Channel Tracks

You can add insert effects to FX channel tracks.
PREREQUISITE
You have added an FX channel track and set up the correct output bus in the Output Routing
pop-up menu.
PROCEDURE
1. In the track list for the FX channel track, click Edit Channel Settings.
The Channel Settings window for the FX channel track opens.
2. In the Inserts section, click an insert slot on the Inserts tab, and select an effect from the
selector.
RESULT
The selected effect is added as an insert effect to the FX channel track.
Routing Audio Channels to FX Channels

If you route an audio channel send to an FX channel, the audio is routed through the insert
effects that you have set up for the FX channel.
PROCEDURE
1. Select the audio track.
2. In the track list, click Edit Channel Settings to open the Channel Settings window.
3. On the Destinations tab, click Select Destination for an effect slot, and select the FX
channel track from the selector.
319
Audio Effects
Send Effects
4. On the send slot, click Activate/Deactivate Send.
RESULT
The audio is routed through the FX channel.
In the Channel Settings window for the audio channel, you can hold down Alt/Opt and double-
click to show the send destination. If you have routed the send to an FX channel, the effect
control panel is opened.
RELATED LINKS
Pre/Post Fader Sends

You can send the signal from the audio channel to the FX channel before or after the audio
channel volume fader.
● Pre-fader sends
The audio channel signal is sent to the FX channel before the audio channel volume fader.
● Post-fader sends
The audio channel signal is sent to the FX channel after the audio channel volume fader.
● To move a send to pre-fader position, open the Channel Settings window for the audio
channel, right-click a send and select Move to Pre-Fader.
The Pre-/Post-Fader button indicates that the send is in pre-fader position.
● To move a send to post-fader position, open the Channel Settings window for the audio
channel, right-click a send and select Move to Post-Fader.
The Pre-/Post-Fader button indicates that the send is in post-fader position.
320
Audio Effects
Side-Chaining
NOTE
If you activate Mute Pre-Send when Mute in the Preferences dialog (VST page), sends in pre-
fader mode are muted if you mute their channels.
Setting the Level for the Sends

PROCEDURE
1. In the track list, select the FX channel track that contains the effect for which you want to
set the level.
2. Open the Inserts section of the Inspector and click the effect slot to open the effect
control panel.
3. In the effect control panel, set the Mix control to 100.
This allows for full control of the effect level when you use the effect sends to control the
signal balance later.
4. In the track list, select the audio track that is routed through the effect for which you want
to set the level.
5. Click Edit Channel Settings to open the Channel Settings window for the audio track.
6. On the Destinations tab, locate the effect slot and drag to the left or right to set the send
level. Ctrl/Cmd-click to set the level to the default send level specified in the Preferences
dialog (VST page).
This determines how much of the signal from the audio channel is routed to the FX
channel.
RESULT
The effect level is adjusted according to your settings.
NOTE
To determine how much of the signal from the FX channel is sent to the output bus, open the
Channel Settings window for the FX channel track and adjust the effect return level.
Side-Chaining
Many VST 3 effects support side-chaining. Side-chaining allows you to use the output of one track
to control the action of an effect on another track.
Effects from the following categories feature side-chaining:
● Modulation
● Delay
● Filter
By activating side-chaining you can do the following:
● Use the side-chain signal as a modulation source.
321
Audio Effects
Side-Chaining
● Apply ducking to the instrument, that is, reduce the volume of the instrument track when a
signal is present on the audio track.
● Compress the signals on one audio track when a second audio track starts.
This is typically used to add compression on a bass sound when the drums are hit.
NOTE
For detailed descriptions of the plug-ins that feature side-chaining, see the separate document
Plug-in Reference.
NOTE
● Certain combinations of tracks and side-chain inputs may lead to feedback loops and
added latency. If this is the case, the side-chain options are not available.
● Side-chain connections are only kept when you move an effect within a channel. When you
drag and drop an effect between channels, or when you copy an effect into another effect
slot, the side-chain connections are lost.
Side-Chain and Modulation

Side-chain signals bypass the built-in LFO modulation and apply modulation according to the
envelope of the side-chain signal. Since each channel is analyzed and modulated separately, this
allows for creating astonishing spatial modulation effects.
RELATED LINKS
Side-Chain Routing on page 324
Triggering a Delay Effect with Side-Chain Signals on page 322
Triggering a Compressor with Side-Chain Signals on page 323
Creating Side-Chain Connections From Multiple Inputs on page 325
Triggering a Delay Effect with Side-Chain Signals

You can use side-chain signals to create a ducking delay effect. This is useful if you want to apply
a delay effect that is audible only when no signal is present on a track.
PROCEDURE
1. Select the audio track that contains the audio you want to delay.
2. Select Project > Duplicate Tracks.
The events on the duplicated track are only used to reduce the volume of the effect that is
added to the original track.
3. Select the original track.
4. In the Inspector, open the Inserts section and select Delay > PingPongDelay, for
example.
5. On the effect control panel, make your effect settings, and click Activate/Deactivate Side-
Chaining.
322
Audio Effects
Side-Chaining
6. Click Set up Side-Chain Routing.

7. Click Add Side-Chain Source, and select the duplicate track from the selector.
8. Optional: Adjust the send level in the Level value field.
9. In the Project window, select the duplicate track.
10. In the Inspector, click Output Routing and select the side-chain node for the
PingPongDelay effect.
RESULT
The signals from the duplicated track are routed to the effect. Every time the audio signals on the
track set in, the delay effect is deactivated.
NOTE
To ensure that audio signals of low or medium volume also silence the delay effect, you can
adjust the volume of the duplicated track.
RELATED LINKS
Triggering a Compressor with Side-Chain Signals

Compression, expansion, or gating can be triggered by side-chain signals exceeding a specified
threshold. This allows you to lower the volume of one audio signal every time another audio
signal sets in.
PREREQUISITE
You have set up a project with a bass guitar and a bass drum track, for example, and you want to
lower the bass guitar volume each time the bass drum hits.
323
Audio Effects
Side-Chaining
PROCEDURE
1. Select the bass guitar track.
2. In the Inspector, open the Inserts section.
3. Click the first effect slot, and from the selector, select Dynamics > Compressor.
4. On the effect control panel, make your effect settings, and click Activate/Deactivate Side-
Chaining.
5. On the effect control panel, click Set up Side-Chain Routing.
6. Click Add Side-Chain Source, and select the bass drum track from the selector.
7. Optional: Adjust the send level in the Level value field.
RESULT
You have connected the bass drum track side-chain to the Compressor on the destination track.
The bass drum signal triggers the Compressor on the bass guitar track. When you now play back
the project, the bass guitar is compressed whenever the signals on the bass drum track exceed
the set threshold.
RELATED LINKS
Side-Chain Routing
The Side-Chain Routing panel allows you to set up the side-chain routing for the selected plug-
in.
● To open the Side-Chain Routing panel, click Set up Side-Chain Routing on the plug-in
control panel.
Select the Plug-in Side-Chain Input

This pop-up menu is only available if your plug-in supports several side-chain inputs.
From the pop-up menu, select the input for which you want to add a side-chain
source. Side-chain plug-in inputs that are routed to side-chain sources are indicated
by a rhombus next to the input name. The number of available side-chain inputs
depends on the plug-in.
Activate/Deactivate Side-Chaining
Activates/Deactivates the side-chain functionality.
324
Audio Effects
Side-Chaining
Activate/Deactivate Side-Chain Source

Enables/Disables the side-chain source.
Name
Shows the name of the side-chain source.
Type
Shows the type of the side-chain source.
Level
Allows you to adjust the send level.
Meter
Shows the volume level of the input track.
Pre-/Post-Fader
Allows you to set the insert to pre-fader position or to post-fader position.

Opens the Channel Settings window for the selected side-chain source.
Remove Side-Chain Source

Removes the side-chain source.
Add Side-Chain Source

Opens a selector that allows you to add a side-chain source.
RELATED LINKS
Creating Side-Chain Connections From Multiple Inputs on page 325
Creating Side-Chain Connections From Multiple Inputs

For plug-ins that support multiple side-chain inputs, you can create side-chain connections
coming from multiple side-chain inputs of that plug-in.
PREREQUISITE
Your effect plug-in supports several side-chain inputs. You can use the Squasher plug-in, for
example, that supports up to 3 side-chain inputs.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Project window, select an audio track.
2. In the track list, click Edit Channel Settings.
The Channel Settings window for the audio channel opens.
3. In the Inserts section, click the first insert slot on the Inserts tab, and from the selector
select the effect plug-in that supports several side-chain inputs.
The selected insert effect is loaded and activated, and the audio is routed through it. The
effect control panel opens.
4. On the effect control panel, click Set up Side-Chain Routing.
5. In the Side-Chain Routing panel, click Select the Plug-in Side-Chain Input, and from the
pop-up menu, select the plug-in input for which you want to add a side-chain source.
The number of available side-chain inputs depends on the plug-in.
6. Click Add Side-Chain Source and select a source from the pop-up menu.
7. Optional: Repeat the steps above to activate more plug-in inputs.
325
Audio Effects
Dither Effects
8. Adjust the effect plug-in as required and do not forget to activate the corresponding side-
chain inputs.
RESULT
The number of possible side-chain inputs determines the number of bands that can be
controlled by side-chain sources.
RELATED LINKS
Dither Effects
Dither effects allow you to control the noise that is produced by quantization errors that can
occur when you mix down to a lower bit depth.
Dithering adds a special kind of noise at an extremely low level to minimize the effect of
quantization errors. This is hardly noticeable and preferable to the distortion that otherwise
occurs.
Applying Dither Effects

PROCEDURE
2. Open the Rack Settings and activate Fixed Number of Slots.
3. Click Edit Channel Settings for the output channel.
4. In the Inserts section, click a post-fader effect slot, and select Mastering > UV22HR.
5. On the plug-in panel, select a bit depth for the mixdown file you want to create.
RELATED LINKS
Export Audio Mixdown on page 680
Rack Settings Menu on page 271
Effect Control Panel

The effect control panel allows you to set up the parameters of the selected effect. The contents,
design, and layout of the control panel depend on the selected effect.
● To open the control panel for a plug-in, click the effect slot.
The following controls are available for all effects:
326
Audio Effects
1 Activate Effect
Activates/Deactivates the effect.
2 Bypass Effect
Allows you to bypass the effect.
3 Read Automation/Write Automation
Allows you to read/write automation for the effect parameter settings.
4 Switch between A/B Settings
Switches to setting B when setting A is active, and to setting A when setting B is active.
5 Apply current settings to A and B
Copies the effect parameters of effect setting A to effect setting B, and vice versa.
6 Activate/Deactivate Side-Chaining
Activates/Deactivates the side-chain functionality.
7 Set up Side-Chain Routing
Allows you to set up the side-chain routing for the selected plug-in.
8 Preset browser
Opens the preset browser where you can select another preset.
9 Load previous Program/Load next Program
Loads the previous/next program in the preset browser.
10 Preset Management
Opens a pop-up menu that allows you to save or load a preset.
11 Add VST Plug-in Picture to Media Rack
Adds a picture of the VST plug-in to the Media rack. This is only available for plug-ins of
other vendors.
12 Functions menu
Opens a pop-up menu with specific functions and settings.
327
Audio Effects
NOTE
For detailed information about the included effects and their parameters, see the separate
document Plug-in Reference.
RELATED LINKS
Hiding/Showing Effect Control Panels on page 329
Effect Control Panel Context Menu

The effect control panel context menu and the Functions menu on the effect control panel show
functions and settings that are specific for the effect.
● Right-click an empty area of the effect control panel.

● Open the Functions pop-up menu on the effect control panel.
The following functions are available:
Copy <VST effect name> Setting/Paste <VST effect name> Setting

Allows you to copy the effect settings and paste them to another effect.
Load Preset/Save Preset

Allows you to load/save a preset.
Default Preset
Allows you to define and save a default preset.
Switch to A Setting/Switch to B Setting

Switches to setting B when setting A is active, and to setting A when setting B is
active.
Apply Current Settings to A/Apply Current Settings to B

Copies the effect parameters of effect setting A to effect setting B, and vice versa.
Activate Outputs
Allows you to activate one or more outputs for the effect.
Activates/Deactivates side-chaining for the effect.
NOTE
This option is only available for VST 3 effect that support side-chaining.
Remote Control Editor

Opens the Remote Control Editor.
Switch to Generic Editor

Opens the generic editor for the effect.
Allow Window to be Resized

Allows the dynamic resizing of third-party plug-in windows in Cubase. This is useful if
you activated Enable HiDPI (Windows only) in the Preferences dialog (General
page), and your plug-in does not support dpi settings.
328
Audio Effects
NOTE
Allow Window to be Resized is a plug-in-specific setting. You must activate/

deactivate it for every plug-in that requires it.
RELATED LINKS
General on page 765
Fine-Tuning Effect Settings

You can take your effect parameter settings as a starting point for further fine-tuning and then
compare the new settings with the original settings.
PREREQUISITE
You have adjusted the parameters for an effect.
PROCEDURE
1. On the control panel for the effect, click Switch between A/B Settings.
This copies the initial parameter setting A to setting B.
2. Fine-tune the effect parameters.
These parameter settings are now saved as setting B.
RESULT
You can now switch between both settings by clicking Switch between A/B Settings. You can
compare them, make further adjustments or just go back to setting A. Settings A and B are saved
with the project.
You can copy the settings between A and B by clicking Copy A to B. You can take these settings
as a starting point for further fine-tuning.
Hiding/Showing Effect Control Panels

When you add an audio effect, the respective plug-in control panel opens automatically. You can
hide the control panels from view. This is useful to get a better overview if you added a number
of plug-ins to your project whose control panels clutter up the screen.
PROCEDURE
● Select Window > Hide Plug-in Windows.
NOTE
This also hides VST instrument control panels.
RESULT
The control panels are hidden and sent to the back of the application. To show them again, select
Show Plug-in Windows.
RELATED LINKS
329
Audio Effects
Effect Presets
Closing All Control Panels

When you add an audio effect, the respective plug-in control panel opens automatically. You can
close all control panels at once.
PROCEDURE
● Select Window > Close All Plug-in Windows.
NOTE
This also closes VST instrument control panels.
RESULT
The control panels are closed.
RELATED LINKS
Effect Presets
Effect presets store the parameter settings of an effect. The included effects come with a number
of presets that you can load, adjust, and save.
The following effect preset types are available:
● VST presets for a plug-in.

These are plug-in parameter settings for a specific effect.
● Insert presets that contain insert effect combinations.
These can contain the whole insert effects rack with settings for each effect.
Effect presets are saved in the following location:
● Windows: \Users\<user name>\My Documents\VST 3 Presets\<company>\<plug-in name>

● macOS: /Users/<user name>/Library/Audio/Presets/<company>/<plug-in name>
RELATED LINKS
Loading Presets for Effects on page 331
Loading Insert Presets on page 334
Preset Browser
The preset browser allows you to select a VST preset for the loaded effect.
● To open the preset browser, click the preset browser field in the effect control panel.
330
Audio Effects
Effect Presets
The Results section of the presets browser lists the available presets for the selected effect.
Loading Presets for Effects

Most VST effect plug-ins come with a number of useful presets that you can instantly select.
PREREQUISITE
You have loaded an effect, either as a channel insert or into an FX channel, and the effect control
panel is open.
PROCEDURE
1. Click the preset browser field at the top of the control panel.
2. In the Results section, select a preset from the list.

3. Double-click to load the preset that you want to apply.
331
Audio Effects
Effect Presets
RESULT
The preset is loaded.
You can return to the preset that was selected when you opened the preset browser by clicking
Revert to Last Setting.
Saving Effect Presets

You can save your effect settings as presets for further use.
PROCEDURE
1. Open the Preset Management pop-up menu.
2. Select Save Preset.

The Save <plug-in name> Preset dialog opens.
4. Optional: Click New Folder to add a subfolder inside the effect preset folder.
5. Optional: Click Show Attribute Inspector in the bottom left corner of the dialog and
define attributes for the preset.
6. Click OK.
RESULT
The effect preset is saved.
Saving Default Effect Presets

You can save your effect parameter settings as default effect preset. This allows you to load your
parameter settings automatically every time you select the effect.
PROCEDURE
1. Open the Preset Management pop-up menu.
332
Audio Effects
Effect Presets
2. Select Save as Default Preset.

You are asked if you want to save the current settings as default preset.
3. Click Yes.
RESULT
The effect settings are saved as default preset. Every time you load the effect, the default preset
is loaded automatically.
Copying and Pasting Presets Between Effects

You can copy and paste effect presets between different instances of the same plug-in.
PROCEDURE
1. Open the control panel for the effect that you want to copy.
2. Right-click the control panel and select Copy <plug-in name> Setting from the context
menu.
3. Open another instance of the same effect.
4. Right-click the control panel and select Paste <plug-in name> Setting from the context
menu.
Saving Insert Presets

You can save the inserts of the inserts effect rack for a channel as an inserts preset, together with
all parameter settings. Insert presets can be applied to audio, instrument, FX channel, or group
tracks.
PREREQUISITE
You have loaded a combination of insert effects and the effect parameters are set up for each
effect.
PROCEDURE
1. Select the track.
3. On the Inserts tab, click Preset Management and select Save FX Chain Preset.
333
Audio Effects
Effect Presets
4. In the Save FX Chain Preset pane, enter a name for the new preset in the New Preset
section.
5. Click OK.
RESULT
The insert effects and their effect parameters are saved as insert preset.
Loading Insert Presets

You can load insert presets to audio, group, instrument, and FX channels.
PREREQUISITE
You have saved a combination of insert effects as insert presets.
PROCEDURE
1. Select the track to which you want to apply the new preset.
3. On the Inserts section, click Preset Management and select Load FX Chain Preset.
4. Select an insert preset.
5. Double-click to apply the preset and close the pane.
RESULT
The effects of the insert effect preset are loaded and any plug-ins that were previously loaded for
the track are removed.
Loading Insert Effect Settings from Track Presets

You can extract the effects that are used in a track preset and load them into your inserts rack.
PROCEDURE
1. Select the track to which you want to apply the new preset.
3. On the Inserts tab, click Preset Management and select From Track Preset.
334
Audio Effects
System Component Information Window
4. In the track preset pane, select the preset that contains the insert effects you want to load.
5. Double-click to load the effects and close the pane.
RESULT
The effects used in the track preset are loaded.
RELATED LINKS

The System Component Information window lists all available audio-codec plug-ins, program
plug-ins, project import-export plug-ins, and the virtual file system plug-ins.
● To open the System Component Information window, select Studio > More Options >
System Component Information.
The following columns are available:
Active
Allows you to activate or deactivate a plug-in.
Instances
The number of plug-in instances that are used in Cubase.
Name
The name of the plug-in.
Vendor
The manufacturer of the plug-in.
File
The name of the plug-in, including its file name extension.
Path
The path in which the plug-in file is located.
Category
The category of each plug-in.
Version
The version of the plug-in.
SDK
The version of the VST protocol with which the plug-in is compatible.
335
Audio Effects
Managing System Components in the System Component

Information Window
● To make a plug-in available for selection, activate the checkbox in the left column.
Only the activated plug-ins appear in the effect selectors.
● To see where a plug-in is used, click in the Instances column.
NOTE
A plug-in may be in use even if it is not activated in the left column. The left column only
determines whether or not the plug-in is visible on the effect selectors.
Exporting System Component Information Files

You can save system component information as an XML file, for example, for archiving purposes
or troubleshooting.
● The system component information file contains information on the installed/available

plug-ins, their version, vendor, etc.
● The XML file can then be opened in any editor application supporting the XML format.
NOTE
The export function is not available for program plug-ins.
PROCEDURE
1. In the System Component Information window, right-click in the middle of the window
and select Export.
2. In the dialog, specify a name and location for the system component information export
file.
3. Click Save to export the file.
336
Direct Offline Processing
Direct Offline Processing allows you to instantly add audio processes to the selected audio
events, clips, or ranges, without destructing the original audio.
Applying offline effects is common practice in dialogue editing and sound design. Offline
processing has several advantages over applying real-time mixer effects:
● The workflow is clip-based. This allows you to apply different effects to events on the same
track.
● The MixConsole can be kept clean from insert effects and parameter changes. This
facilitates later mixing by another person, on a different system.
● Less CPU load is used.
Direct Offline Processing allows you to undo any changes regarding audio processes. You can
always revert to the original version. This is possible because processing does not affect the
actual audio files.
If you process an event, a clip, or a selection range, the following happens:
● A new audio file is created in the Edits folder within your project folder.
This file contains the processed audio, and the processed section of the audio clip refers to
it.
● The original file remains unaffected.
The unprocessed sections still refer to it.
All applied offline processing is saved with the project and can still be modified after reopening
the project. Direct Offline Processing operations on the selected audio are persistent in project
backups.
Processing is always applied to the selection. This can be one or multiple events in the Project
window or in the Audio Part Editor, an audio clip in the Pool, or a selection range on one or
multiple events in the Project window or in the Sample Editor. If a selection is shorter than the
audio file, only the selected range is processed.
If you select an event that is a shared copy, and therefore refers to a clip that is used by other
events in the project, you can decide how to proceed:
● Select Continue to process all shared copies.

● Select New Version to process the selected event only.
NOTE
This only works if Open Options Dialog is selected for the On Processing Shared Clips setting in
the Preferences dialog (Editing—Audio page).
RELATED LINKS
Modifying Processes on page 341
Editing - Audio on page 758
Direct Offline Processing Workflow on page 338
337
Direct Offline Processing Workflow
Direct Offline Processing Window on page 338
Direct Offline Processing Workflow

You can perform offline processing operations in the Direct Offline Processing window. The
window always shows the processing of the selected audio.
When you add or modify offline processing, the following applies:
● If you add a process, its last used parameter settings are loaded. You can reset it to its
default settings by clicking Reset to Default Values.
● All changes are instantly applied to the audio.
● If you modify parameters or remove processing, these changes are instantly applied to the
audio.
● You get a visual feedback while a process is running.
NOTE
You can add, modify, or delete audio processes at any time, even if a process is running. A
new rendering process is instantly started.
● You can undo and redo all Direct Offline Processing operations by using Ctrl/Cmd-Z or
Shift-Ctrl/Cmd-Z.
● You can apply all offline processing permanently to the audio.
● If you load a project with offline processing of audio processes that are not available on
your computer, these processes are shown as Not available in the Direct Offline
Processing window.
RELATED LINKS
Key Commands for Direct Offline Processing on page 347
Direct Offline Processing Window

The Direct Offline Processing window allows you to add, modify, or delete audio processing
instantly for one or multiple events, clips, or selection ranges in one window. Furthermore, you
can undo any audio processing.
To open the Direct Offline Processing window, do one of the following:
● Select Audio > Direct Offline Processing.

● Press F7.
● On the Project window toolbar, click Open Direct Offline Processing Window.
● Select Audio > Processes, and from the submenu, select a process.
NOTE
Processes without adjustable parameter settings, such as Silence, do not open the Direct
Offline Processing window when applied from the menu or using a key command.
338
In the Direct Offline Processing window, the following options and settings are available:
Toolbar
Allows you to add audio processing, to audition the audio with the current edits, and
to make global settings for offline processing.
Process
Shows the last added process and allows you to modify or reset its settings, or to
delete it.
RELATED LINKS
Applying Processing on page 340
Applying Processing to Multiple Events on page 340
Direct Offline Processing Toolbar on page 339
Direct Offline Processing Toolbar

The Direct Offline Processing toolbar allows you to add audio processing, to audition the audio
with the current edits, and to make global settings for offline processing.
On the toolbar, the following options and settings are available:
Add Processes
Add Process
Allows you to add a built-in audio process to the selected event or clip.
Left Divider
Left Divider
Audition
Audition
339
Allows you to audition the selected audio with all processing from the top of the
process list up to the selected process in the list. All processes below are ignored
during playback.
Audition Loop
Loops the playback until you deactivate the Audition button.
Audition Volume
Allows you to adjust the volume.
Extend Process Range

Extend Process Range in ms
Allows you to extend the process range over the left and right of the event borders.
This allows you to enlarge the event at a later stage with all applied processing.
RELATED LINKS
Process Range Extension on page 341
Applying Processing
You can add processing to one or multiple events, clips, or ranges in the Direct Offline
Processing window. This includes audio processes and Sample Editor operations, such as Cut,
Paste, Delete, and using the Draw tool.
PROCEDURE
● Select an event or a range in the Project window.
● Select a clip in the Pool.
● Select a range in the Sample Editor.
● Select an event or a range in the Audio Part Editor.
2. Select Audio > Direct Offline Processing.
3. On the Direct Offline Processing toolbar, click Add Process and select an audio process.
The selected audio process is added to process list in the left zone.
4. Activate Audition and make your changes on the process panel.
You get a visual feedback while a process is running. However, even if the processing is
not finished, you can activate Audition at any time.
RESULT
The audio process is rendered into the audio.
In the Project window, the Pool or the Audio Part Editor, the processed events show a
waveform symbol.
Applying Processing to Multiple Events

Direct Offline Processing allows you to add the built-in audio processes to multiple events at
once. You can also modify or delete processing on multiple events simultaneously.
● To apply audio processes to multiple events at once, select the audio and add, modify, or
delete the processing.
340
NOTE
In the Direct Offline Processing window, you can also edit the audio processing of multiple clips
in the Pool simultaneously.
RELATED LINKS
Built-In Audio Processes on page 342
Process Range Extension

You can extend the process range over the left and right borders of the audio event.
This setting allows you to enlarge the event even after applying the processing.
● To extend the process range, click Extend Process Range in ms on the Direct Offline
Processing toolbar and specify a value in milliseconds.
NOTE
● For this to work, audio must be available outside the event borders.
● This setting works globally for all events.
Modifying Processes
You can delete or modify some or all processing from a clip in the Direct Offline Processing
window. This includes the audio processes on the Processes pop-up menu and Sample Editor
operations, such as Cut, Paste, Delete, and drawing with the Draw tool.
PROCEDURE
● Select the processed event in the Project window or in the Audio Part Editor.
NOTE
In the Project window or in the Audio Part Editor, processed events are indicated
by a waveform symbol in the upper right corner.
● Select the processed clip in the Pool.
NOTE
In the Pool, processed clips are indicated by a waveform symbol in the Status
column.
● Select the processed range in the Sample Editor.

2. Select Audio > Direct Offline Processing.
● Activate Audition and modify the settings of the process.
● Reset the process to its default settings by clicking Reset to Default Values.
● Delete the process by clicking Delete on the process panel.
RELATED LINKS
Pool Window Columns on page 417
341
Built-In Audio Processes

Cubase provides several built-in audio processes that can be used for Direct Offline Processing.
Envelope
Envelope allows you to apply a volume envelope to the selected audio.
Curve Type buttons

Determine whether the corresponding envelope uses Spline Interpolation,
Damped Spline Interpolation, or Linear Interpolation.
Envelope display
Shows the shape of the envelope. The resulting waveform shape is shown in a dark
tone, with the current waveform shape in a light tone.
● To add a curve point, click the curve.
● To move a curve point, click and drag.
● To remove a curve point, click and drag it outside the display.
Presets pop-up menu

Allows you to manage your presets.
● To save a preset, select Save Preset from the pop-up menu, enter a name, and
click OK.
● To apply a preset, select it from the pop-up menu.
● To remove a preset, select it from the pop-up menu, and click Remove Preset.
Fade In/Fade Out

Fade In and Fade Out allow you to apply a fade to the selected audio.
Curve Type buttons

Determine whether the corresponding envelope uses Spline Interpolation,
Damped Spline Interpolation, or Linear Interpolation.
342
Fade display
Shows the shape of the fade curve. The resulting waveform shape is shown in a dark
tone, with the current waveform shape in a light tone.
● To add points, click the curve.
● To change the curve shape, click and drag existing points.
● To remove a point from the curve, drag it outside the display.
Presets pop-up menu

Allows you to manage your presets.
● To save a preset, select Save Preset from the pop-up menu, enter a name, and
click OK.
● To apply a preset, select it from the pop-up menu.
● To remove a preset, select it from the pop-up menu, and click Remove Preset.
Curve Shape buttons

These buttons give you quick access to some common curve shapes.
Gain
Gain allows you to change the gain, that is, the level of the selected audio.
Gain
Allows you to set a gain value between -50 dB and +20 dB.
Clipping Detection text

This text is displayed if you use Audition and the gain setting results in audio levels
above 0 dB.
NOTE
In case of clipping, lower the Gain value and use the Normalize audio process
instead. This allows you to increase the level of the audio as much as possible
without causing clipping.
RELATED LINKS
Normalize on page 344
Invert Phase
Invert Phase allows you to invert the phase of the selected audio.
For stereo audio files, a pop-up menu is available. It allows you to specify which channels are
phase-inverted: the left channel, the right channel, or both.
343
Normalize
Normalize allows you to raise or lower the level of audio that was recorded at an inappropriate
input level.
Maximum Peak Level

Allows you to normalize your audio based on the maximum peak level. Maximum
Peak Level in dBFS sets a maximum peak level for the audio, between -50 dB and
0 dB. From this maximum level, the current maximum level of the selected audio is
subtracted, and the gain is raised or lowered by the resulting amount.
Remove DC Offset Option

Remove DC Offset allows you to remove any DC offset in the audio selection.
If your audio signal contains too large a component of direct current, you may notice that it is
not centered around the zero level axis. This is called DC offset.
● To verify if your audio contains DC offsets, select the audio and select Audio > Statistics.
IMPORTANT
DC offset is normally present throughout the entire recording. Therefore, always apply Remove
DC Offset to complete audio clips.
There are no adjustable parameters for this audio process.
RELATED LINKS
Statistics Window on page 355
Resample
Resample allows you to change the length, tempo, and pitch of an event.
If you resample to a higher sample rate, the event gets longer and the audio plays back at a
slower speed with a lower pitch. If you resample to a lower sample rate, the event gets shorter
and the audio plays back at a faster speed with a higher pitch.
File Sample Rate

Shows the original sample rate of the event.
New Sample Rate

Allows you to resample the event by specifying a sample rate.
Difference
Allows you to resample the event by specifying the difference between the original
sample rate and the new sample rate.
344
Reverse
Reverse allows you to reverse the audio selection so that it sounds as if you play back a tape
backwards. There are no adjustable parameters for this audio process.
Silence
Silence allows you to replace the selection with silence. There are no adjustable parameters for
this audio process.
Stereo Flip
Stereo Flip allows you to manipulate the left and right channels of stereo audio selections.
In the Mode pop-up menu, the available options are:
Flip Left-Right
Swaps the left and right channel.
Left to Stereo
Copies the left channel sound to the right channel.
Right to Stereo
Copies the right channel sound to the left channel.
Merge
Merges both channels on each side for mono sound.
Subtract
Subtracts the left channel information from the right. This function is typically used
for karaoke background as it removes the centered mono material from a stereo
signal.
Time Stretch
Time Stretch allows you to change the length and tempo of the selected audio without affecting
the pitch.
Define Bars
You can set the length of the selected audio and the time signature in this section.
Bars
Allows you to set the length of the selected audio in bars.
345
Beats
Allows you to set the length of the selected audio in beats.
Signature
Allows you to set the time signature.
Original Length
This section contains information and settings regarding the audio that is selected for
processing.
Length in Samples
Shows the length of the selected audio in samples.
Length in Seconds
Shows the length of the selected audio in seconds.
Tempo in BPM
Allows you to enter the actual tempo of the audio in beats per minute. This option
allows you to time-stretch the audio to another tempo, without having to compute
the actual time stretch amount.
Resulting Length
These values change automatically if you adjust the Time Stretch Ratio to stretch the audio so
that it fits within a specific time span or tempo.
Samples
Shows the resulting length in samples.
Seconds
Shows the resulting length in seconds.
BPM
Shows the resulting tempo in beats per minute. For this to work, the Original
Length values must be specified.
Range
These settings allow you to set a range for the time stretch.
Arbitrary Range Start Time

Allows you to set a start position for the range.
Arbitrary Range End Time

Allows you to set an end position for the range.
Use Locators
Allows you to set the Range values to the left and right locator positions,
respectively.
Algorithm
Allows you to select a time stretch algorithm.
Time Stretch Ratio

Allows you to set the amount of time stretch as a percentage of the original length. If you use the
settings in the Resulting Length section to specify the amount of time stretch, this value
changes automatically.
346
Key Commands for Direct Offline Processing
RELATED LINKS
Time Stretch Algorithms on page 348
Key Commands for Direct Offline Processing

You can apply offline processing by using key commands.
If you add audio processes via key commands, the following applies:
● The current settings are used.

● The Direct Offline Processing window opens. This does not apply if the selected process
does not feature any adjustable parameters or if the window is in the background or
minimized.
● You can apply offline processing by using key commands even if Auto Apply is
deactivated.
If the corresponding section in the Direct Offline Processing window has the focus, the
following default key commands apply:
Option Key command
Open/Close Direct Offline Processing window F7
Set focus within Direct Offline Processing Tab

window
Navigate in the process list Up Arrow/Down Arrow
Activate/Deactivate Audition (Playback Toggle Space

triggers Local Preview must be activated in
the Preferences dialog)
Undo Ctrl/Cmd-Z
To define key commands for further Direct Offline Processing operations, and for directly
adding particular audio processes, use the Key Commands dialog.
RELATED LINKS
347
Time Stretch Algorithms
In Cubase, time stretching algorithms are used for operations like the Time Stretch offline
process, or in the Sample Editor.
RELATED LINKS
Time Stretch on page 345
Standard on page 348
Limitations on page 349
Standard
The Standard algorithm is optimized for CPU-efficient realtime processing.
The following presets are available:
Standard – Drums
For percussive sounds. This mode does not change the timing of your audio. If you
use it with certain tuned percussion instruments, you may experience audible
artifacts. In this case, try Mix mode as an alternative.
Standard – Plucked
For audio with transients and a relatively stable spectral sound character like plucked
instruments.
Standard – Pads
For pitched audio with slower rhythm and a stable spectral sound character. This
minimizes sound artifacts, but the rhythmic accuracy is not preserved.
Standard – Vocals
For slower signals with transients and a prominent tonal character like vocals.
Standard – Mix
For pitched material with a less homogenous sound character. This mode preserves
the rhythm and minimizes the artifacts.
Standard – Custom
Allows you to set the time-stretching parameters manually.
Standard – Solo
For monophonic material like solo woodwind/brass instruments or solo vocals,
monophonic synths or string instruments that do not play harmonies. This mode
preserves the timbre of the audio.
Custom Warp Settings

If you select the Standard – Custom mode, a dialog opens where you can manually adjust the
parameters that govern the sound quality of the time stretching:
348
Time Stretch Algorithms
Limitations
Grain Size
Allows you to determine the size of the grains in which the standard time-stretching
algorithm splits the audio. Low grain size values lead to good results for material
that has many transients.
Overlap
This is the percentage of the whole grain that will overlap with other grains. Use
higher values for material with a stable sound character.
Variance
This is a percentage of the whole length of the grains, and sets a variation in
positioning, so that the overlapping area sounds smooth. A variance setting of 0
produces a sound akin to time stretching used in early samplers, whereas higher
settings produce more rhythmic smearing effects but fewer audio artifacts.
Limitations
Applying time stretching to audio material can lead to a degradation in audio quality and to
audible artifacts. The result depends on the source material, the particular stretch operations
applied, and the selected audio algorithm preset.
As a rule of thumb, smaller changes in duration cause less degradation. However, there are
additional issues one should be aware of when working with time stretching algorithms.
NOTE
In rare cases, editing warped audio events may cause discontinuities at the edit points. You can
then try to move the edit point to a different position or bounce the audio event prior to editing.
Reverse Playback and Scrubbing

Most of the algorithms used for time stretching only support forward playback. Reverse playback
or scrubbing of warped audio events can lead to recurring artifacts in playback.
Stretch Factor
Some algorithms may put limitations on the maximum degree of time stretching supported.
349
Audio Functions
Cubase offers particular functions for analyzing the audio in your project.
RELATED LINKS
Detect Silence Dialog on page 350
Spectrum Analyzer Window on page 353
Statistics Window on page 355
Detect Silence Dialog

The Detect Silence dialog allows you to search for silent sections in events. You can split events
and remove the silent parts from the project, or create regions corresponding to the non-silent
sections.
● To open the Detect Silence dialog for a selected audio event, clip, or selection range,
select Audio > Advanced > Detect Silence.
NOTE
If you select multiple events, you can process the selected events successively with
individual settings or apply the same settings to all selected events simultaneously.
350
Audio Functions
Waveform display
Allows you to zoom in on and out of the waveform by using the zoom slider to the
right or by clicking in the waveform and moving the mouse up or down.
You can scroll the waveform by using the scrollbar, or by using the mouse wheel.
You can adjust the Open Threshold and Close Threshold values by moving the
squares at the beginning and at the end of the audio file.
The Detection section features the following options:
Open Threshold
When the audio level exceeds this value, the function opens and lets the sound pass.
Audio material below the set level is detected as silence.
Close Threshold
When the audio level drops below this value, the function closes and detects sounds
below this level as silence. This value cannot be higher than the Open Threshold
value.
Linked
Activate this option to set the same values for Open Threshold and Close
Threshold.
Minimum Time Open

Determines the minimum time that the function remains open after the audio level
has exceeded the Open Threshold value.
351
Audio Functions
NOTE
If your audio contains repeated short sounds, and this results in too many short
open sections, try raising this value.
Minimum Time Closed

Determines the minimum time that the function remains closed after the audio level
has dropped below the Close Threshold value. Set this to a low value to make sure
that you do not remove sounds.
Pre-roll
Causes the function to open slightly before the audio level exceeds the Open
Threshold value. Use this option to avoid removing the attack of sounds.
Post-roll
Causes the function to close slightly after the audio level drops below the Close
Threshold value. Use this option to avoid removing the natural decay of sounds.
The Output section features the following options:
Non-silent Sections
Shows the number of events that are created if you click Process.
Add as Regions
Creates regions of the non-silent sections.
Region Name
Allows you to specify a name for the non-silent sections.
Auto Number Start

Allows you to specify the start number for the numbers that are automatically
appended to the region names.
Strip Silence
Splits the event at the beginning and end of each non-silent section, and removes
the silent sections in between.
Process all selected Events

Applies the same settings to all selected events. This option is only available if you
selected more than one event.
Auto
Activate this option to analyze the audio event and update the display automatically
every time you change the settings.
NOTE
If you are working with very long files, consider deactivating the Auto option as this
may slow down the process.
Compute
Analyzes the audio event and redraws the waveform display to indicate which
sections are considered silent.
Preview
Allows you to listen to the result before it is processed.
Process
Processes the audio according to your settings.
352
Audio Functions
Spectrum Analyzer Window
RELATED LINKS
Removing Silent Sections on page 353
Removing Silent Sections

The Detect Silence dialog allows you to detect and remove silent sections of your audio.
PROCEDURE
1. Select one or multiple audio events with silent sections in the Project window.
2. Select Audio > Advanced > Detect Silence.
3. In the Detect Silence dialog, make your changes.
4. Click Compute to analyze the audio.
The audio is analyzed and the waveform is redrawn to indicate which sections are
considered silent according to your settings. The number of detected regions is displayed.
5. Optional: Click Preview to listen to the result.
The event is played back and the sections are silenced according to your settings.
6. Optional: In the Detection section, readjust the settings until you are satisfied with the
result.
7. Optional: In the Output section, activate Add as Regions.
8. In the Output section, activate Strip Silence.
9. Click Process.
RESULT
The event is split and the silent sections are removed.

If you have selected more than one event and did not activate Process all selected Events, the
Detect Silence dialog opens again after processing, allowing you to make separate settings for
the next event.
RELATED LINKS
Detect Silence Dialog on page 350

The Spectrum Analyzer window displays the audio spectrum of an event, clip, or selection range
as a two-dimensional graph, with frequency range on the x-axis and level distribution on the y-
axis.
● To open the Spectrum Analyzer window for a selected audio event, clip, or selection
range, select Audio > Spectrum Analyzer.
353
Audio Functions
Frequency display
Shows the frequency graphs for the analyzed audio.
If you move the mouse pointer over a certain position, the channel, frequency, note,
and level at that position are shown in the value field at the top of the display.
Channel selector
For multichannel audio, this pop-up menu allows you to select which channels are
shown in the frequency display.
Zoom slider
Allows you to zoom in and out horizontally.
RELATED LINKS
Analyzing the Audio Spectrum on page 354
Analyzing the Audio Spectrum

The Spectrum Analyzer allows you to analyze the audio of a selected event, clip, or selection
range.
PROCEDURE
1. Select an audio event, clip, or a selection range.
2. Select Audio > Spectrum Analyzer.
RESULT
The audio spectrum of the selected event, clip, or selection range is displayed as a two-
dimensional graph in the Spectrum Analyzer window.
You can display the difference in level between two positions on the same or different graphs.
RELATED LINKS
Comparing Level Values on page 355
354
Audio Functions
Statistics Window
Comparing Level Values

You can display the difference in level between two positions on the same or different graphs in
the Spectrum Analyzer window.
PROCEDURE
1. Move the mouse pointer to the first position and right-click to select it.
2. Move the mouse pointer to the second frequency position.
RESULT
The difference in level between the positions is displayed as value D in the value field.

Click the frequency display to reset the selection of the first position.
RELATED LINKS
Spectrum Analyzer Window on page 353
Statistics Window
The Statistics function analyzes the selected audio events, clips, or selection ranges.
● To open the Statistics window for a selected audio event, clip, or selection range, select
Audio > Statistics.
355
Audio Functions
Statistics Window
The Statistics window shows the following information:
Channel
Shows the name of the analyzed channel.
Min. Sample Value

Shows the lowest sample value in dB.
Max. Sample Value

Shows the highest sample value in dB.
Peak Amplitude
Shows the largest amplitude in dB.
True Peak
Shows the maximum absolute level of the audio signal waveform in the continuous
time domain.
DC Offset
Shows the amount of DC offset as a percentage and in dB.
Bit Depth
Shows the current calculated bit depth.
Estimated Pitch
Shows the estimated pitch.
Sample Rate
Shows the sample rate.
Average RMS (AES17)

Shows the average loudness in accordance with the AES17 standard.
Max. RMS
Shows the highest RMS value.
Max. RMS All Channels

Shows the highest RMS value of all channels.
RELATED LINKS
Remove DC Offset Option on page 344
356
Sample Editor
The Sample Editor provides an overview of the selected audio event. It allows you to view and
edit audio by cutting and pasting, removing, or drawing audio data, and by processing audio.
Editing is non-destructive so that you can undo modifications at any time.
You can open the Sample Editor in a separate window or in the lower zone of the Project
window. This is useful if you want to access the Sample Editor functions from within a fixed zone
of the Project window.
To open an audio event in the Sample Editor, do one of the following:
● Double-click an event in the Project window.

● Select an event in the Project window and press Return or Ctrl/Cmd-E.
● Select an event in the Project window and select Audio > Open Sample Editor.
● In the Key Commands dialog in the Editors category, assign a key command for Open
Sample Editor. Select an event in the Project window and use the key command.
NOTE
If you select Audio > Set up Editor Preferences, the Preferences dialog opens on the Editors
page. Make your changes to specify if you want the Sample Editor to open in a separate window
or in the lower zone of the Project window.
The Sample Editor window:
357
Sample Editor
The Sample Editor in the lower zone of the Project window:
The Sample Editor is divided into several sections:
1 Toolbar
Contains tools for selecting, manipulating, and playing back audio.
2 Info Line
Shows information about the audio.
3 Overview
Shows an overview of the whole audio clip and indicates which part of the clip is shown in
the waveform display.
4 Sample Editor Inspector
Contains audio editing tools and functions.
NOTE
The Inspector for the lower zone editor is shown in the left zone of the Project window.
5 Ruler
Shows the timeline and the display format of the project.
6 Waveform display
Shows the waveform image of the edited audio clip.
7 Regions
Allows you to add and edit regions.
NOTE
The info line, the overview line, and the regions can be activated/deactivated by clicking Set up
Window Layout on the toolbar and activating/deactivating the corresponding options.
358
Sample Editor
Sample Editor Toolbar
RELATED LINKS
Sample Editor Toolbar on page 359
Overview Line on page 363
Sample Editor Inspector on page 364
Ruler on page 365
Waveform Display on page 365
Regions List on page 369

The toolbar contains tools for selecting, editing, and playing back audio.
● To show or hide the toolbar elements, right-click the toolbar and activate or deactivate the
elements.
Static Buttons
Solo Editor
Solos the selected audio during playback.
Left Divider
Left Divider
View Options
Show Audio Event
Highlights the section corresponding to the edited event in the waveform display
and the overview line.
NOTE
This button is not available if you opened the audio event from the Pool. You can
adjust the start and end of the event in the clip by dragging the event handles in the
waveform display.
Currently Edited Audio Event
Lists all audio events that are opened in the Sample Editor, and allows you to
activate an audio event for editing.
Auto-Scroll
Auto-Scroll
359
Sample Editor
Preview
Audition
Plays back the selected audio.
Audition Loop
Loops the playback until you deactivate Audition.
Audition Volume
Tool Buttons
Range Selection
Selects ranges.
Zoom
Draw
Draws a volume curve.
Play
Allows you to play back the clip from the position where you click until you release
the mouse button.
Scrub
Allows you to locate positions.
Snap
Snap On/Off
Restricts horizontal movement and positioning to the specific positions.
360
Sample Editor
Musical Information
Musical Mode
Locks audio clips to the project tempo by using realtime time stretching.
Number of Bars Defined in Audio File
Displays the estimated bars of your audio file.
Remaining Number of Beats Defined in Audio File
Displays the remaining number of beats of your audio file.
Defined Tempo of Audio File
Displays the estimated tempo of your audio file.
Defined Time Signature of Audio File
Displays the estimated time signature of your audio file.
Warping Algorithm for Audio Clip
Allows you to select a warp algorithm.
Right Divider
Right Divider

Open in Separate Window
This button is available in the lower zone editor. It opens the editor in a separate
window.
Open in Lower Zone
This button is available in the editor window. It opens the editor in the lower zone of
the Project window.
Show/Hide Left Zone
Allows you to activate/deactivate the left zone.
Show/Hide Regions
Allows you to activate/deactivate the regions.
361
Sample Editor
Set up Toolbar
RELATED LINKS
Suspend Auto-Scroll When Editing on page 183
Locating Positions with the Scrub Tool

The Scrub tool allows you to locate positions in the audio.
PROCEDURE
1. On the toolbar, activate the Scrub tool.
2. Click in the waveform display and keep the mouse button pressed.
The project cursor moves to the position where you clicked.
3. Drag to the left or right.
RESULT
The audio is played back, and you can hear at which position the cursor is located.
NOTE
You can determine the speed and pitch of the playback by dragging faster or slower.
Editing Audio Samples with the Draw Tool

You can edit the audio clip at sample level with the Draw tool. This way, you can remove audio
clicks manually, for example.
PROCEDURE
1. On the audio waveform, locate the sample position that you want to edit and zoom in to
the highest zoom level.
2. Select the Draw tool.
362
Sample Editor
Info Line
3. Click at the beginning of the section that you want to correct and draw in the new curve.
RESULT
A range selection covering the edited section is automatically applied.
Info Line
The info line shows information about the audio clip, such as the audio format and the selection
range.
● To show or hide the info line, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar and activate or
deactivate Info Line.
The on/off status of the info line in the Sample Editor window and in the lower zone editor
are independent of each other.
NOTE
Initially, length and position values are displayed in the format specified in the Project Setup
dialog.
Overview Line
The overview line displays the whole clip, and indicates which part of the clip is shown in the
waveform display.
● To show or hide the overview line, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar and activate
or deactivate the Overview option.
The on/off status of the overview line in the Sample Editor window and in the lower zone
editor are independent of each other.
1 Event Start
Shows the start of the audio event if Show Audio Event is activated on the toolbar.
2 Selection
Shows which section is selected in the waveform display.
3 Event End
Shows the end of the audio event if Show Audio Event is activated on the toolbar.
4 Waveform display
Shows the section of the audio that is displayed in the waveform display.
● You can specify which section of the audio is shown by clicking in the lower half of
this display and dragging to the left or right.
● You can zoom in or out horizontally by dragging the left or right edge of this display.
● You can show a different section of the audio by clicking in the upper half of this
display and dragging a rectangle.
363
Sample Editor
Sample Editor Inspector
5 Snap Point
Shows the start of the audio event if Show Audio Event is activated on the toolbar.
Sample Editor Inspector

The Inspector shows controls and parameters that allow you to edit the audio event that is
opened in the Sample Editor.
● In the Sample Editor window, you can show or hide the Inspector by clicking Set up
Window Layout on the toolbar and activating or deactivating Inspector.
NOTE
In the lower zone editor, the Inspector is always shown in the left zone of the Project
window.
● To open or close the Inspector sections, click their names.
RELATED LINKS
Hitpoints Section
The Hitpoints section allows you to edit hitpoints to slice your audio. Here you can create groove
quantize maps, markers, regions, and events based on hitpoints.
● To open the Hitpoints section, click its tab in the Sample Editor Inspector.
364
Sample Editor
Ruler
Ruler
The ruler shows the timeline and display format of the project, the project tempo grid.
The ruler is located above the waveform display. It is always shown.
Waveform Display
The waveform display shows the waveform image of the edited audio clip.
1 Level Scale menu

Allow you to show the level as a percentage or in dB. Here, you can also activate the
display of the half level axis.
2 Ruler
Shows the project tempo grid.
3 Audio waveform
Shows the waveform image of the selected audio.
4 Half Level Axis
To show the half level axis, open the level scale menu and select Show Half Level Axis.
NOTE
You can set up a wave image style in the Preferences dialog (Event Display—Audio page).
365
Sample Editor
Waveform Display
Zooming Vertically
You can zoom in the waveform vertically. This allows you to see a specific detail of the waveform.
PROCEDURE
● Drag the vertical zoom slider down to zoom in or up to zoom out.
RESULT
The vertical scale changes relative to the height of the Sample Editor.
Zooming Horizontally
You can zoom in the waveform horizontally. This allows you to zoom in or out on the time scale.
PROCEDURE
● Drag the horizontal zoom slider to the right to zoom in or to the left to zoom out.
RESULT
The horizontal zoom setting is shown on the info line as samples per pixel. You can zoom in
horizontally to a scale of less than one sample per pixel. This is required for using the Draw tool.
NOTE
● If you have zoomed in to one sample per pixel or less, the appearance of the samples
depends on the Interpolate Audio Waveforms option in the Preferences dialog (Event
Display—Audio page).
Zoom Submenu
The Zoom submenu of the Edit menu contains options for zooming in the Sample Editor.
● To open the Zoom submenu, select Edit > Zoom.
Zoom In
Zooms in one step, centering on the project cursor.
Zoom Out
Zooms out one step, centering on the project cursor.
Zoom Full
Zooms out so that the whole clip is visible in the waveform display.
Zoom to Selection
Zooms out so that the whole clip is visible in the waveform display.
Zoom to Selection (Horiz.)

Zooms in horizontally so that the current selection fills the waveform display.
366
Sample Editor
Range Editing
Zoom to Event
Zooms in so that the waveform display shows the section of the clip corresponding
to the edited audio event. This is not available if you have opened the Sample Editor
from the Pool.
Zoom In Vertically
Zooms in one step vertically.
Zoom Out Vertically

Zooms out one step vertically.
Undo/Redo Zoom
Allows you to undo/redo the last zoom operation.
Range Editing
In the Sample Editor you can edit selection ranges. This is useful if you want to quickly edit a
specific section in the audio waveform, or if you want to create a new event or clip.
You can only select one range at a time. The selection is indicated in the Selection field on the
info line.
RELATED LINKS
Selecting a Range
PREREQUISITE
Snap to Zero Crossing is activated on the toolbar. This option ensures that the start and the end
of the selection are always at zero crossings.
PROCEDURE
1. On the toolbar, activate the Range Selection tool.
2. Click at the position in the waveform display where you want the range to start and drag to
the position, where you want the range to end.
3. Optional: Perform one of the following actions to resize the selection range:
● Drag the left or the right edge of the selection to a new position.
● Hold down Shift and click at a new position.
RESULT
The selected range is highlighted in the waveform display.
NOTE
You can also use the functions in the Select pop-up menu to select ranges.
RELATED LINKS
Select Menu on page 367
Select Menu
Select Submenu on the Edit Menu
If you select Edit > Select, the following functions are available:
367
Sample Editor
Range Editing
All
Selects the whole clip.
None
Deselects everything.
In Loop
Selects the audio between the left and right locator.

Selects the audio between the clip start and the project cursor.
From Cursor to End

Selects the audio between the project cursor and the clip end. This option is available
if the project cursor is positioned between the clip boundaries.
Select Event
Selects the event.
Left Selection Side to Cursor

Moves the left side of the selection range to the project cursor position. This option is
available if the project cursor is positioned between the clip boundaries.
Right Selection Side to Cursor

Moves the right side of the selection range to the project cursor position or the end
of the clip if the project cursor is positioned to the right of the clip.
Creating Events from Selection Ranges

You can create a new event that contains only the selected range.
PROCEDURE
1. Select a range.
2. Drag the selection range to an audio track in the Project window.
RELATED LINKS
Selecting a Range on page 367
Creating Clips from Selection Ranges

You can create a new clip that contains only the selected range.
PROCEDURE
1. Select a range.
2. Click the selected range and select Audio > Bounce Selection.
● Click Replace if you want to replace the original.
● Click No if you want to keep the original.
RESULT
A new Sample Editor window opens with the new clip. It refers to the same audio file as the
original clip, but it contains the audio corresponding to the selection range only.
368
Sample Editor
Regions List
Regions List
Regions are sections within an audio clip that allow you to mark important sections in the audio.
You can add and edit regions for the selected audio clip in the regions zone.
● To show or hide the Regions, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar and activate or
deactivate Regions.
1 Region Start/Region End

Shows the start and end of the region in the audio waveform.
2 Add Region
Allows you to create a region of the current range selection.
3 Remove Region
Allows you to remove the selected region.
4 Select Region
If you select a region in the list and click this button above, the corresponding section of
the audio clip is selected (as if you had selected it with the Range Selection tool) and
zoomed. This is useful if you want to apply processing to the region only.
5 Play Region
Plays back the selected region.
6 Regions list
Allows you to select and display regions in the audio waveform.
Creating Regions
PREREQUISITE
You have clicked Set up Window Layout on the toolbar and activated Regions.
PROCEDURE
1. On the Sample Editor toolbar, activate the Range Selection tool and in the waveform
display, select the range that you want to convert into a region.
● Above the regions list, click Add Region.
● Select Audio > Advanced > Event or Range as Region.
369
Sample Editor
Regions List
A region is created, corresponding to the selected range.

3. Optional: Double-click the region name in the list and enter a new name.
RESULT
The region is added to the regions list.
Click the region in the regions list to instantly display it in the Sample Editor.
RELATED LINKS
Creating Regions from Hitpoints

You can create regions from hitpoints. This is useful to isolate specific sounds.
PREREQUISITE
The audio event from which you want to create regions is opened in the Sample Editor and the
hitpoints are set at the correct positions.
PROCEDURE
● In the Hitpoints section of the Sample Editor Inspector, click Create Regions.
RESULT
Regions are created between two hitpoint positions and shown in the Sample Editor.
Adjusting Start and End Positions of Regions

PREREQUISITE
You have clicked Set up Window Layout on the toolbar and activated Regions. You have created
regions.
PROCEDURE
● Perform one of the following actions:
● Drag the Region Start or Region End handle to a different position in the waveform
display.
● Double-click the Start or End field in the regions list and enter a new value.
NOTE
The positions are shown in the display format selected for the ruler and info line, but are
relative to the start of the audio clip.
Removing Regions
PREREQUISITE
regions.
PROCEDURE
1. In the regions list, select the region that you want to remove.
370
Sample Editor
Snap Point
2. Above the regions list, click Remove Region.
RESULT
The region is removed from the regions list.
Creating Audio Events from Regions

You can create new audio events from regions using drag and drop.
PREREQUISITE
regions.
PROCEDURE
1. Select the region in the regions list.
2. Drag the region to the desired position in the Project window.
RESULT
An event is created from the region.
Snap Point
The snap point is a marker within an audio event that can be used as a reference position.
● To show the snap point, activate Show Audio Event on the toolbar.
The snap point is set at the audio event start, but you can move it to another relevant position in
the audio.
The snap point is used when Snap is activated and you insert a clip from the Sample Editor in
the event display. It is also used when you move or copy events in the event display.
In the Sample Editor, you can edit the following snap points:
● Event Snap Point

This is shown in the Sample Editor if you open a clip from within the Project window.
371
Sample Editor
Snap Point
● Clip Snap Point

This is shown in the Sample Editor if you open a clip from the Pool.
NOTE
The clip snap point serves as a template for the event snap point. However, it is the event snap
point that is taken into account when snapping.
RELATED LINKS
Sample Editor Toolbar on page 359
Adjusting the Snap Point

PREREQUISITE
The audio event is opened in the Sample Editor and Show Audio Event is activated on the
toolbar.
PROCEDURE
1. Optional: On the Sample Editor toolbar, select the Scrub tool.
This allows you to audition the audio while setting the snap point.
2. Move the mouse pointer over the snap point, and drag it to the desired position in the
audio event.
The mouse pointer becomes a hand symbol and a tooltip indicates that you can set the
snap point.
RESULT
The event snap point is adjusted to the position where you dragged it.
NOTE
You can also adjust the snap point by setting the project cursor at the desired position and
selecting Audio > Snap Point to Cursor.
372
Hitpoints
Hitpoints mark musically relevant positions in audio files. Cubase can detect these positions and
create hitpoints automatically by analyzing onsets and melodic changes of the audio.
NOTE
All hitpoint operations can be performed in the Sample Editor window and in the lower zone
editor.
When you add an audio file to your project by recording or by importing, Cubase automatically
detects hitpoints. In the Project window, hitpoints are shown for the selected event, provided
that the zoom factor is high enough.
The hitpoint functions are available in the Hitpoints section of the Sample Editor.
You can use hitpoints for the following purposes:
● Create slices of the audio

Slices allow you to change tempo and timing of the audio without affecting its pitch and
quality, or to replace or extract individual sounds from loops.
● Quantize audio
● Extract the groove from the audio
The timing is extracted from the audio and a groove map is created. You can use this
groove map to quantize other events.
● Create markers from the audio
● Create regions from the audio
● Create events from the audio
● Create MIDI notes from the audio
NOTE
Hitpoints work best with drums, rhythmic recordings, or loops.
Calculating Hitpoints
When you add an audio file to your project by recording or by importing, Cubase automatically
detects hitpoints.
PROCEDURE
1. Import or record an audio file.
Cubase automatically detects hitpoints.
NOTE
If your audio file is very long, this may take a while.
373
Hitpoints
2. Select the audio event in the Project window and make sure the zoom factor is high
enough.
RESULT
The calculated hitpoints for the selected event are shown in the Project window.
NOTE
You can disable automatic hitpoint detection by deactivating Enable Automatic Hitpoint
Detection in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Audio page).
Hitpoint Filters in the Hitpoint Section

Cubase automatically detects and filters hitpoints. However, if the result does not meet your
expectations you can filter hitpoints manually.
● To filter hitpoints, open the audio event in the Sample Editor and open the Hitpoints
section.
Threshold
Filters hitpoints by their peaks. Drag the slider to the right to discard hitpoints of
quieter crosstalk signals, for example.
Intensity
Filters hitpoints by their intensity. Drag the slider to the right to discard less intense
hitpoints.
Minimum Length
Filters hitpoints by their distance between two hitpoints. This option allows you to
avoid creating slices that are too short.
Beats
Filters hitpoints by their musical position. This option allows you to discard hitpoints
that do not fit within a certain range of a defined beat value.
374
Hitpoints
Editing Hitpoints Manually

It is crucial for any further editing that the hitpoints are set at the correct positions. Therefore, if
the automatic hitpoint detection does not meet your expectations, you can edit hitpoints
manually.
PREREQUISITE
The audio event is opened in the Sample Editor, and in the Hitpoints section, hitpoints are
filtered by their peak and/or intensity, by their distance, or by their musical position.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Hitpoints section in the Sample Editor Inspector, activate the Edit Hitpoints tool.
2. Move the mouse to the waveform display and click between two hitpoints.
The mouse pointer changes to a speaker icon and the tooltip Play back Slice is shown. The
slice is played back from the beginning to the end.
3. To disable a hitpoint that you do not need, press Shift and click on the line that represents
the hitpoint.
The mouse pointer changes to a cross icon and the tooltip Disable Hitpoints is shown.
Disabled hitpoints are not taken into account for further operations.
375
Hitpoints
Locating to Hitpoints in the Project Window
4. Press Tab to navigate to the next slice.

The slice is played back automatically.
5. To insert a hitpoint, press Alt/Opt and click at the position where you want to insert the
hitpoint.
The mouse pointer changes to a draw icon and the tooltip Insert Hitpoint is shown.
6. To move a hitpoint, move the mouse pointer on the vertical line that represents the
hitpoint, and drag to the left or to the right.
The mouse pointer changes to a double arrow and the tooltip Move Hitpoint is shown.
Moved hitpoints are locked by default.
7. To make sure that a hitpoint is not accidentally filtered out, lock it by pointing at it and
clicking.
The tooltip Lock Hitpoint is shown.
RESULT
The hitpoints are edited according to your settings.
NOTE
To reset a hitpoint to its original state, press Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt until the tooltip Enable/Unlock
Hitpoints is shown and click.
RELATED LINKS
Hitpoint Filters in the Hitpoint Section on page 374
Locating to Hitpoints in the Project Window

You can navigate through the hitpoints of an audio event in the Project window.
PREREQUISITE
Enable Automatic Hitpoint Detection is activated in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Audio
page).
PROCEDURE
1. Select the audio track that contains the audio event for which you want to locate hitpoints.
● Press Alt/Opt-N to navigate to the next hitpoint.
● Press Alt/Opt-B to navigate to the previous hitpoint.
RESULT
The project cursor jumps to the respective hitpoint.
376
Hitpoints
Slices
Slices
You can create slices from hitpoints, where each slice ideally represents an individual sound or
beat of the audio.
You can use these slices to change tempo and timing of the audio without affecting its pitch and
quality.
NOTE
Slices are created in the Sample Editor and edited in the Audio Part Editor.
Audio that meets the following characteristics is suitable:
● Individual sounds have a noticeable attack.

● The recording quality is good.
● The recording is free of crosstalk signals.
● The audio is free of smearing effects like delays, for example.
Slicing Audio
Slicing audio is useful if you want to change tempo and timing of the audio without affecting its
pitch and quality.
PREREQUISITE
The audio event is opened in the Sample Editor and the hitpoints are set at the correct positions.
NOTE
When slicing audio, all events referring to the edited clip are also replaced.
PROCEDURE
● In the Hitpoints section in the Sample Editor Inspector, click Create Slices.
● Select Audio > Hitpoints > Create Audio Slices from Hitpoints.
RESULT
The areas between the hitpoints are sliced and become separate events. The original audio event
is replaced by an audio part containing the slices.
On playback, the audio plays back seamlessly at the project tempo.

Change the project tempo. The slices are moved accordingly, keeping their relative positions
within the part.
Double-click the sliced audio part and replace or extract individual slices in the Audio Part
Editor.
RELATED LINKS
Slices and the Project Tempo on page 378
377
Hitpoints
Slices
Slices and the Project Tempo

The project tempo affects how the sliced audio is played back.
RELATED LINKS
Closing Gaps on page 378
Deleting Overlaps on page 378
Musical Mode on page 383
Making Global Auto Fade Settings on page 242
Making Auto Fade Settings for Individual Tracks on page 242
Closing Gaps
If the project tempo is slower than the tempo of the original audio event, there may be audible
gaps between the slice events in the part. You can close these gaps so that the audio plays
without any breaks.
PROCEDURE
● Select Audio > Advanced > Close Gaps (Time Stretch) to apply time stretch to each
slice and close the gaps.
Consider activating auto fades for the corresponding audio track, and setting the
fade-out to 10 ms to eliminate clicks.
● Select Audio > Advanced > Close Gaps (Crossfade) to apply crossfades to the slices
and close the gaps.
NOTE
If you decide to change the tempo again, undo your actions and use the original, unstretched
file.
Deleting Overlaps
If the project tempo is higher than the tempo of the original audio event, the slice events in the
part may overlap. You can delete these overlaps.
PROCEDURE
1. Right-click the track in the track list and from the context menu, select Auto Fades
Settings.
2. In the Auto Fades dialog, activate Auto Crossfades.
3. Click OK.
4. Select the overlapping events in the part and select Audio > Advanced > Delete Overlaps.
RESULT
The sound is smoothed out.
378
Hitpoints
Creating a Groove Quantize Map
Creating a Groove Quantize Map

You can use hitpoints to create a groove quantize map.
PREREQUISITE
The audio event from which you want to extract the timing is opened in the Sample Editor, and
the hitpoints are set at the correct positions.
PROCEDURE
● In the Hitpoints section in the Sample Editor Inspector, click Create Groove.
RESULT
The groove is extracted from the audio event and automatically selected in the Quantize Presets
pop-up menu on the Project window toolbar.
Open the Quantize Panel and save the groove as a preset.
Creating Markers
You can create markers at hitpoint positions. This allows you to snap to hitpoint positions.
PREREQUISITE
The audio event from which you want to create markers is opened in the Sample Editor, and the
PROCEDURE
● In the Hitpoints section in the Sample Editor Inspector, click Create Markers.
RESULT
If your project has no marker track, a marker track is added and activated automatically, and a
marker is created at every hitpoint position.
RELATED LINKS
Markers on page 252
Creating Regions
You can create regions at hitpoint positions. This allows you to isolate recorded sounds.
PREREQUISITE
The audio event from which you want to create regions is opened in the Sample Editor, and the
PROCEDURE
● In the Hitpoints section in the Sample Editor Inspector, click Create Regions.
RESULT
Regions are created between two hitpoint positions and shown in the Sample Editor.
RELATED LINKS
379
Hitpoints
Creating Events
Creating Events
You can create events at hitpoint positions.
PREREQUISITE
The audio event from which you want to create events is opened in the Sample Editor, and the
PROCEDURE
● In the Hitpoints section in the Sample Editor Inspector, click Create Events.
RESULT
Events are created between two hitpoint positions.
Creating MIDI Notes

You can create MIDI notes from hitpoints. This allows you to double, replace, or enrich drum hits
by triggering sounds of a VST instrument.
PREREQUISITE
The audio event from which you want to create MIDI notes is opened in the Sample Editor, and
the hitpoints are set at the correct positions.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Hitpoints section in the Sample Editor Inspector, click Create MIDI Notes.
2. In the Convert Hitpoints to MIDI Notes dialog, set up the parameters.
3. Click OK.
RESULT
A MIDI track is added to your project, and MIDI notes are created at every hitpoint position.
Assign a VST instrument to the MIDI track, and select a sound to enrich the audio.
Convert Hitpoints to MIDI Notes Dialog

The Convert Hitpoints to MIDI Notes dialog allows you to specify how hitpoints should be
converted when you create MIDI notes from hitpoints.
380
Hitpoints
Creating MIDI Notes
Velocity Mode
Allows you to select a velocity mode:
● If you want the velocity values of the created MIDI notes to vary according to
the peak levels of the corresponding hitpoints, select Dynamic Velocity.
● If you want to assign the same velocity value to all created MIDI notes, select
Fixed Velocity.
Velocity
Sets the Fixed Velocity.
Pitch
Sets a note pitch for all created MIDI notes.
Length
Sets a note length for all created MIDI notes.
Destination
Allows you to select a destination:
● To place the MIDI part on the first selected MIDI or instrument track, select
First Selected Track.
NOTE
Any MIDI parts from previous conversions on this track will be deleted.
● To create a new MIDI track for the MIDI part, select New MIDI Track.
● To copy the MIDI part to the clipboard, select Project Clipboard.
381
Tempo Matching Audio
Cubase offers several functions that allow you to match the tempo of audio in your project.
In the Sample Editor window and in the lower zone editor, you can perform the following tempo
matching operations:
● Stretch to Project Tempo

Stretches the selected event to match the project tempo.
● Musical Mode
Applies realtime time stretching to audio clips, so that they match the project tempo.
RELATED LINKS
Stretching Audio Events to the Project Tempo on page 382
Algorithm Presets
You can select an algorithm preset that is applied for realtime playback and time stretching.
The Warping Algorithm for Audio Clip pop-up menu on the Sample Editor toolbar contains
various presets that determine the audio quality of the realtime time stretching.
The algorithm preset affects warp changes in Musical Mode.
RELATED LINKS
Algorithm Presets on page 382
Time Stretch Algorithms on page 348
Stretching Audio Events to the Project Tempo

You can stretch audio loops to the project tempo.
PROCEDURE
1. Select File > Import > Audio File, select the audio loop that you want to import, and click
OK.
2. Select the audio loop in the project.
382
Tempo Matching Audio
Musical Mode
3. Select Audio > Advanced > Stretch to Project Tempo.
RESULT
The audio loop is stretched to match the project tempo.
Musical Mode
The Musical Mode allows you to tempo-match audio loops to the project tempo.
If you activate Musical Mode for an audio clip, realtime time stretching is applied to the clip so
that it matches the project tempo. The audio events adapt to any tempo changes in Cubase, just
like MIDI events.
In the Sample Editor, you can activate Musical Mode on the toolbar.
NOTE
● You can also activate/deactivate Musical Mode from within the Pool by clicking the
corresponding checkbox in the Musical Mode column.
● Cubase supports ACID® loops. These loops are standard audio files but with embedded
tempo/length information. When ACID® files are imported into Cubase, Musical Mode is
automatically activated and the loops will adapt to the project tempo.
383
Audio Part Editor
The Audio Part Editor provides an overview of the selected audio parts. It allows you to view,
audition and edit parts by cutting and pasting, crossfading, drawing level curves, or by
processing parts. Editing is non-destructive so that you can undo modifications at any time.
You can open the Audio Part Editor in a separate window or in the lower zone of the Project
window. Opening the Audio Part Editor in the lower zone of the Project window is useful if you
want to access the Audio Part Editor functions from within a fixed zone of the Project window.
To open an audio part in the Audio Part Editor, do one of the following:
● Double-click an audio part in the Project.

● Select an audio part in the Project window and press Return or Ctrl/Cmd-E.
● Select an audio part in the Project window and select Audio > Open Audio Part Editor.
Audio Part Editor. Select an audio part in the Project window and use the key command.
NOTE
If you select Audio > Set up Editor Preferences, the Preferences dialog opens on the Editors
page. Make your changes to specify if you want the Audio Part Editor to open in a separate
window or in the lower zone of the Project window.
The Audio Part Editor window:
384
Audio Part Editor
Audio Part Editor Toolbar
The Audio Part Editor in the lower zone of the Project window:
1 Toolbar
Contains tools for selecting, editing, and playing back audio parts.
2 Info Line
Displays information on the audio parts.
3 Ruler
Displays the timeline and the display format of the project.
RELATED LINKS
Ruler on page 40
Audio Part Editor Toolbar on page 385

The toolbar contains tools for selecting, editing, and playing back audio parts.
elements.
Info/Solo
Solo Editor
Solos the selected audio during playback.
385
Audio Part Editor
Left Divider
Left Divider
Auto-Scroll
Auto-Scroll
Preview
Audition
Audition Loop
Audition Volume
Tool Buttons
Object Selection
Selects audio parts.
Range Selection
Selects ranges.
Zoom
Erase
Deletes audio parts.
Split
Splits audio parts.
Mute
Mutes audio parts.
386
Audio Part Editor
Draw
Draws a volume curve.
Play
Allows you to play back the clip from the position where you click until you release
the mouse button.
Scrub
Allows you to locate positions.
Multiple Part Controls

Show Part Borders
Shows/Hides part borders for the active audio part, within the left and right locators.
Edit Active Part Only
Restricts editing operations to the active part.
Currently Edited Part
Lists all parts that were selected when you opened the editor, and allows you to
activate a part.
Nudge Palette
Trim Start Left
Increases the length of the selected element by moving its start to the left.
Trim Start Right
Decreases the length of the selected element by moving its start to the right.
Move Left
Moves the selected element to the left.
Move Right
Moves the selected element to the right.
Trim End Left
Decreases the length of the selected element by moving its end to the left.
Trim End Right
Increases the length of the selected element by moving its end to the right.
387
Audio Part Editor
Snap
Snap On/Off
Restricts horizontal movement and positioning to the specific positions.
Snap Type
Grid Type
Grid Type
Allows you to select a grid type. The options depend on the display format that is
selected for the ruler. If you select Seconds as ruler format, time-based grid options
are available. If you select Bars+Beats as ruler format, musical grid options are
available.
Quantize
Quantize Presets
Apply Quantize
Open Quantize Panel
Event Colors
Select Color for Selected Tracks or Events
Allows you to define audio part colors.
Independent Track Loop

Activates/Deactivates the independent track loop for the edited part.
388
Audio Part Editor
Info Line
Right Divider
Right Divider

This button is available in the lower zone editor. It opens the editor in a separate
window.
Open in Lower Zone
This button is available in the editor window. It opens the editor in the lower zone of
the Project window.
Show/Hide Info
Allows you to activate/deactivate the info line.
Set up Toolbar
RELATED LINKS
Suspend Auto-Scroll When Editing on page 183
Info Line
The info line shows information about the audio part, such as the start, end, length, or the time
stretch algorithm.
● To show or hide the info line, activate Show/Hide Info on the toolbar.
The on/off status of the info line in the Audio Part Editor window and in the lower zone
editor are independent of each other.
RELATED LINKS
Ruler
The ruler shows the timeline and the display format of the project.
You can select a separate display format by clicking on the arrow button on the right. Select an
option from the pop-up menu.
389
Audio Part Editor
Lanes
Lanes
Lanes can make it easier to work with several audio events in a part. Moving some of the events
to another lane can make selecting and editing much easier.
If Snap is deactivated and you want to move an event to another lane without accidentally
moving it horizontally, press Ctrl/Cmd while dragging it up or down.
RELATED LINKS
Track Handling on page 126
Operations
All operations can be performed in the Audio Part Editor window and in the lower zone editor.
Zooming, selecting and editing in the Audio Part Editor is done just as in the Project window.
NOTE
If a part is a shared copy, any editing you perform affects all shared copies of this part.
RELATED LINKS
Audition
When auditioning with the Speaker tool or Audition icon, audio will be routed directly to the
main mix (the default output bus).
Auditioning Using the Audition Tool

You can use the Audition tool to directly start a single audition of a selection or loop an audition
using the Audition Loop function.
PROCEDURE
● To play back the section between the first and last selected event, select the events
with the Object Selection tool.
390
Audio Part Editor
Operations
● To play back a range, select a range with the Range Selection tool.
● To start playback from the current cursor position, set the project cursor to that
position.
2. On the toolbar, click Audition.
NOTE
If you activate Audition Loop, playback continues until you deactivate Audition.
RELATED LINKS
Auditioning Using the Play Tool

PROCEDURE
1. Select Play on the toolbar.
2. On an audio part, click and hold at the position from which you want to begin auditioning.
RESULT
You are auditioning the audio part. The audition will stop at the end of the part you clicked on.
RELATED LINKS
Auditioning Using Regular Playback

PROCEDURE
1. Set the project cursor to the position from where you want to start playback.
2. Optional: On the toolbar of the Audio Part Editor, activate Solo Editor.
This way, only the events in the edited part are played back.
3. On the Transport panel, activate Start.
Setting up the Independent Track Loop

The independent track loop is a sort of mini-cycle, affecting only the edited part. When the loop is
activated, the events in the parts that are within the loop will be repeated continuously and
completely independent – other events (on other tracks) are played back as usual. The only
interaction between the loop and the regular playback is that the loop starts every time the cycle
starts over again.
PROCEDURE
1. Activate Independent Track Loop on the toolbar.
If it is not visible, right-click the toolbar and add the Independent Track Loop section.
2. Ctrl/Cmd-click in the ruler to set the start and Alt/Opt-click to set the end of the loop.
NOTE
You can also edit the loop start and end positions numerically in the fields next to the Loop
button.
391
Audio Part Editor
Operations
RESULT
The loop is indicated in blue in the ruler.
NOTE
The events are looped as long as the Loop button is activated and the Audio Part Editor is open.
RELATED LINKS
Setup Options on page 745
Scrub
In the Audio Part Editor, the Scrub tool has a separate icon on the toolbar. Apart from that,
scrubbing works exactly as in the Project window.
RELATED LINKS
Scrubbing on page 147
Handling Several Parts

When you open the Audio Part Editor with several parts selected – all on the same track or on
different tracks – they might not all fit in the editor window, which can make it hard to get an
overview of the different parts when editing.
Therefore, the toolbar features functions to make working with multiple parts easier and more
comprehensive:
● The Currently Edited Part pop-up menu lists all parts that were selected when you
opened the editor, and lets you select which part is active for editing.
When you select a part from the list, it is automatically made active and centered in the
display.
NOTE
You can also activate a part by clicking on it with the Object Selection tool.
● Edit Active Part Only lets you restrict editing operations to the active part only.
If you select Edit > Select > All with this option activated, all events in the active part are
selected, but not the events in other parts.
● You can zoom in on an active part so that it is displayed in its entirety in the window by
selecting Edit > Zoom > Zoom to Event.
● Show Part Borders can be used if you want to see clearly defined borders for the active
part.
If this option is activated, all parts except the active one are grayed out, making the
borders easily discernible. There are also two markers in the ruler with the name of the
active part, marking its beginning and end. These can be moved freely to change the part
borders.
● It is possible to cycle between parts, making them active using key commands. In the Key
Commands dialog, there are two functions in the Edit category: Activate Next Part and
Activate Previous Part. If you assign key commands to these, you can use them to cycle
between parts.
RELATED LINKS
392
Sampler Tracks
The sampler track feature allows you to chromatically play back any audio from your audio
sample library via MIDI. You can create and edit new sounds based on specific samples, and
integrate them into an existing project.
The sampler track feature includes:
● The Sampler Control section in the lower zone of the Project window. Here you can load
and edit audio samples, choose between different playback modes, or transfer samples to
Steinberg VST instruments.
● A sampler track in your project that allows you to control the playback of the sample that is
loaded in Sampler Control via MIDI.
RELATED LINKS
Sampler Control on page 395
Loading Audio Samples into Sampler Control

You can load audio samples into Sampler Control by dragging.
Cubase allows you to load mono or stereo samples in .wav or .aiff file format or REX and REX2
audio files created by ReCycle from Propellerhead Software into Sampler Control.
● To load an audio sample, drag it from the MediaBay, the Project window event display, or
the File Explorer/macOS Finder and drop it in Sampler Control.
IMPORTANT
If Sampler Control already contains an audio sample, this sample and all its settings are
overwritten.
NOTE
● Audio samples that you load into Sampler Control are not copied to the project audio
folder. If you want to archive or share your project including all audio samples that you
have loaded into Sampler Control, you must create a self-contained project.
● In the Pool, all audio samples that you have loaded into Sampler Control are listed in a
dedicated sampler track subfolder in the main audio folder.
● Imported REX and REX2 files are converted to files in .wav format. These files are stored in
a wav folder, created in addition to the original file.
In Sampler Control, playback mode is automatically set to Slice with slice markers set as
defined in the imported REX file.
RELATED LINKS
Self-Contained Projects on page 86
393
Sampler Tracks
Loading MIDI Parts into Sampler Control
Pool on page 415
Loading MIDI Parts into Sampler Control

You can load MIDI parts from instrument tracks or MIDI tracks into Sampler Control by
dragging.
NOTE
For this to work, the instrument track or the MIDI track must be routed to a VST instrument.
● To load a MIDI part, drag it from the MediaBay, the Project window event display, or the
File Explorer/macOS Finder and drop it in Sampler Control.
IMPORTANT
If Sampler Control already contains MIDI, it is overwritten.
Cubase creates an audio file from the MIDI part. This includes the instrument sound and the
channel settings from the VST instrument or the return channel. The audio file is copied to the
project audio folder.
RELATED LINKS
Instrument Track Inspector on page 101
Creating Sampler Tracks

To create a sampler track, do one of the following:
● In the Project window, select an audio event and select Audio > Create Sampler Track.
● In the MediaBay, right-click an audio file and select Create Sampler Track.
● In the Sample Editor Inspector, open the Range section and click Create Sampler Track.
This creates a sampler track from the selected range. If no range is selected, the entire
event is used.
● On the context menu of the track list, select Add Sampler Track.
In this case, Sampler Control is empty and you must load an audio sample by dragging.
394
Sampler Tracks
Sampler Control
Sampler Control
If the sampler track is selected, Sampler Control is available in the lower zone of the Project
window. Sampler Control allows you to view, edit, and play back samples or specific sections of
the samples.
1 Toolbar
Contains tools that allow you to select and edit the audio sample, to organize track
presets, and to transfer the sample with its settings to an instrument.
2 Waveform display/Envelope editor
Shows the waveform image of the sample and allows you to define the playback range for
the sample and to set a loop.
If the envelope editors for the pitch, filter, or amp section are shown, you can adjust their
envelope curve settings here.
3 Playback and Sound Parameter section
Allows you to make settings for different playback modes (Normal, AudioWarp, and
Slice), tuning and pitch modulation (Pitch section), filtering (Filter section), and level and
panorama (Amp section).
4 Keyboard section
Allows you to set the key range of the sample, its root key, and the modulation range of
the pitchbend wheel. These settings are used if you work with an external MIDI device.
RELATED LINKS
Envelope Editors on page 405
Playback and Sound Parameters on page 400
Keyboard Section on page 408
Sampler Control Toolbar

The Sampler Control toolbar contains various settings and functions.
Read Automation
Write Automation
395
Sampler Tracks
Sampler Control
Switch between A/B Settings
Allows you to switch between different parameter settings.
Event Received Indicator
This LED indicates incoming MIDI messages via the selected MIDI input. The LED
lights up on receiving note-on and controller messages. This way, you can check if
Cubase and your MIDI keyboard are connected to the same MIDI device input.
Restricts sample editing to zero crossings, that is, to positions where the amplitude is
zero.
Auto-Scroll
Preset section
Shows the name of the track preset that is loaded for the sampler track. You can also
save and load presets.
Import Audio File
Opens the Import Audio dialog that allows you to load an audio file into Sampler
Control.
NOTE
If Sampler Control already contains an audio file, the original file is replaced by the
new file.
File Name
Shows the file name of the sample.
Tempo
Shows the tempo of the loop, as read from the sample file or calculated from the
sample length. In Slice playback mode, you can adjust this value manually.
Root Key
Shows the root key that determines the pitch of the sample. You can change the root
key by entering a new value in the value field or by dragging the root key handle on
the Sampler Control keyboard.
Fixed Pitch
If a sample is triggered by a MIDI note other than the one defined by the Root Key
setting, the sample is pitched accordingly. If Fixed Pitch is activated, the relation
396
Sampler Tracks
Sampler Control
between played note and root key is disregarded and all keys play the sample just as
it was recorded.
NOTE
This setting is only available in Normal and AudioWarp playback mode.
Loop Mode
Allows you to select a loop mode for playback via MIDI.

● If this is set to No Loop, the sample is played once.
● If this is set to Continuous, the sample is played in a continuous loop.
● If this is set to Alternate, the sample is played back in a loop that alternates
forward and backward.
● If this is set to Once, the sample is looped once.
● If this is set to Until Release, the sample is looped repeatedly until you release
the key on the keyboard.
● If this is set to Alternate Until Release, the loop alternates forward and
backward for as long as you hold the key.
NOTE
Signature
Shows the detected time signature of the sample. You can adjust this value manually.
NOTE
This setting is only available in Slice playback mode.
Bars/Beats
These value fields show the detected length of the sample in bars and beats. You can
adjust these values manually, which affects the grid and the tempo.
NOTE
Grid
Sets the grid.
NOTE
One Shot
397
Sampler Tracks
Sampler Control
The sample is played back once from beginning to end, regardless of any loop
settings.
Normalize Sample
Normalizes the sample by detecting the highest peak level in the sample and
adjusting the gain to reach the set Normalization Level value. Sample Gain allows
you to modify the gain value manually afterwards.
Trim Sample
Trims the sample to a selected range. If no range is selected, the sample is trimmed
to the range that is set with the sample start/end markers. Revert to Full Sample
resets the sample to its original range.
NOTE
Reverse Sample
Reverses the sample. This allows you to play back the sample backwards.
Monophonic Mode
Activates monophonic playback. For solo instruments, this usually results in a more
naturally sounding performance. If monophonic playback is activated, a note that
was stolen by another note is retriggered if you still hold the stolen note when you
release the new one. This way, you can play trills by holding one note and quickly and
repeatedly pressing and releasing another note, for example.
NOTE
If Monophonic Mode is deactivated, you can play up to 128 notes simultaneously.
If Legato Mode is activated as well and you play legato notes, only the pitch of the
sample is set to the new note, but the sample is not retriggered and the envelopes
keep running.
Lock Parameter Settings
If this option is activated, the current Sampler Control parameter settings are kept if
you load another sample into Sampler Control.
NOTE
Parameters that are directly related to the sample, for example, sample start/end,
loop start/end, root key, or tempo are not kept, and instead taken from the new
sample.
MIDI Reset
Stops playback and resets all MIDI controllers to their default values.
This is useful, for example, if you want to stop playback of a long audio sample in
One Shot mode.
398
Sampler Tracks
Sampler Control
Transfer to New Instrument
Allows you to transfer the audio sample with all its Sampler Control settings to an
instrument that is loaded to a new instrument track.
Opens Sampler Control in a separate window.
Open in Lower Zone
Opens Sampler Control in the lower zone.
RELATED LINKS
Setting the Root Key Manually on page 410
Setting up Loops for Audio Samples on page 410
Normalizing Samples on page 412
Transferring Samples from Sampler Control to VST Instruments on page 413
Waveform Display
The waveform display shows the waveform of your audio sample. It allows you to define the start
and end of the audio sample, of the loop, and of the fade-in/-out.
Set Sample Start

Defines the sample start. On playback, all audio before the sample start is ignored.
Set Sample End

Defines the sample stop. On playback, all audio after the sample end is ignored.
Set Sample Start and End Markers Simultaneously

When you move the mouse cursor between the sample start and end marker, a
connecting bar appears at the height of the marker flags. Dragging this bar moves
both markers simultaneously with keeping their relative distance.
Set Sustain Loop Start

Defines where the sustain loop starts.
Set Sustain Loop End

Defines where the sustain loop ends. When this marker is reached, playback jumps
back to the sustain loop start.
Set Sustain Loop Start and End Markers Simultaneously

When you move the mouse cursor between the sustain loop start and end marker, a
connecting bar appears at the height of the marker flags. Dragging this bar moves
both markers simultaneously with keeping their relative distance.
Set Fade In Length

Defines the fade-in length.
399
Sampler Tracks
Sampler Control
Set Fade Out Length

Defines the fade-out length.
Set Sustain Loop Crossfade Length

Loop crossfades allow for smoother loops. This marker defines the length for the
loop crossfade.
Ruler
The ruler shows the timeline in the specified display format.
● To select the format, click the arrow button to the right of the ruler and select an option
You can display bars and beats, seconds, or samples.
Zooming
● To zoom in/out on the time and level axes, use the horizontal and vertical zoom sliders or
the corresponding key commands.
RELATED LINKS
Playback and Sound Parameters

In the sections below the waveform display, you can make settings for different playback modes
(Normal, AudioWarp, and Slice), tuning and pitch modulation (Pitch section), filtering (Filter
section), and level and panorama (Amp section).
RELATED LINKS
Playback Section on page 400
Pitch Section on page 403
Filter Section on page 403
Amp Section on page 404
Playback Section
In the playback section, you can choose between different ways samples are played back.
Normal Playback
In this playback mode, you can choose the quality for sample playback. When samples are played
back with another than their original pitch, you can choose between different algorithms for
transposing them in real time.
● To activate this mode, select Normal in the playback section.
Quality
Sets the playback quality.
● Standard, High, Best, and Extreme provide different algorithms for
transposing samples in real time. The higher the quality setting, the better the
suppression of artifacts, particularly in higher frequencies, and the higher the
400
Sampler Tracks
Sampler Control
processor load. For samples with little high-frequency content, we recommend

to use Standard quality.
● Vintage allows for a deliberate reduction of playback quality by lowering the
bit and sample rate to emulate the artifacts of early samplers. Turntable
emulates a memory-optimized sampling workflow of the past, where
turntables were sampled at a higher speed to record short samples, and then
tuned down again to correct for the change in pitch. A value of 45 rpm leads to
typical vintage artifacts. A value of 78 rpm allows you to increase the effect
even further.
AudioWarp Playback
This playback mode allows you to apply time stretching and formant shifting to your samples.
You can choose between different warp and sync modes.
● To activate this mode, select AudioWarp in the playback section.
AudioWarp Mode
● Music mode offers parameters for time stretching.
This mode is suitable for complex material like drum loops and samples of
mixed music. It uses considerably more CPU time than Solo mode.
NOTE
The more the sample is stretched, the higher the CPU load.
● Solo mode offers parameters for time stretching and formant shifting.
This mode is suitable for loops and samples of solo instruments or vocals.
AudioWarp Sync Mode

Allows you to match the playback speed of the sample to the project tempo.
● If Off is selected, the playback speed is specified manually, in percent.
● If Tempo is selected, the playback speed is calculated using the ratio between
the original tempo of the sample and the tempo of the host.
Legato
If this option is deactivated, each note that is played via MIDI starts playback from
the Sampler Control position cursor.
If this option is activated, the first note starts playback from the position cursor, and
any following notes start from the current playback position for as long as the first
note is held.
Speed
If AudioWarp Sync Mode is set to Off, you can adjust the playback speed of the
sample.
In Music mode, the minimum playback speed adjustment is 12.5 %. Values below
this limit have no effect.
Original BPM
If AudioWarp Sync Mode is set to Tempo, you can enter the original tempo of the
sample in beats per minute. The playback speed of the sample is adjusted to match
the tempo of the host application.
401
Sampler Tracks
Sampler Control
NOTE
This parameter is only available in Solo and in Music mode. In Music mode, the
lower limit of the playback speed adjustment is 12.5 %. Values below this limit have
no further effect.
Formant
Allows you to adjust formant shifting. Formant shifting allows you to avoid so-called
Mickey Mouse effects when pitch-shifting a sample. This is especially useful with
samples of human voices or acoustic instruments.
This parameter is only available in Solo mode.
Slice Playback
In this playback mode, you can slice a sample into several pieces, which are then mapped to the
keyboard, so that every slice can be played individually. Additionally, a corresponding MIDI file is
created, which can be dragged to the project to play the slices either in their original order or
completely rearranged.
Selecting Slice mode automatically slices the sample. You can choose between different slice
detection modes or combine them. You can manually adjust the position of the slice markers by
dragging and add or remove slices using Alt-click.
NOTE
Slice playback uses the quality settings for Normal playback.
● To activate this mode, select Slice in the playback section.
Mode
Sets the slice detection mode.
● Transient mode allows you to specify the Threshold that determines the
minimum peak level that a transient needs to become a slice marker.
● Grid mode sets the slice markers according to the Grid Resolution set on the
Sampler Control toolbar.
● Transient + Grid mode combines the conditions of both Transient and Grid
mode.
● Manual mode allows you to add and remove slices manually by Alt-clicking in
the waveform. In this mode, no automatic slice detection is performed.
Threshold
Determines the minimum level that a transient needs to be detected as the start of a
new slice.
Minimal Length
Sets the minimal length of a slice.
Grid Catch
In Transient + Grid slice detection mode, this parameter specifies how close to the
grid a transient marker must be.
402
Sampler Tracks
Sampler Control
Fade In
Sets the fade-in time for all slices of the loop.
Fade Out
Sets the fade-out time for all slices of the loop.
Drag MIDI Phrase to Project

Click this button and drag it to the event display to create a corresponding MIDI
event in your project.
RELATED LINKS
Slicing Samples on page 413
Pitch Section
In the Pitch section, you can adjust the tuning and pitch of your audio sample. The pitch
envelope allows you to modulate the pitch over time.
Show/Hide Pitch Modulators

Shows/Hides the pitch envelope and the LFO editor in the waveform window.
Octave
Sets the pitch of the sample in octave steps.
Coarse
Sets the pitch of the sample in semitone steps.
Fine
Fine-tunes the pitch of the sample in cents (hundredths of a semitone).
LFO
Allows you to select the LFO and to set the LFO modulation depth.
Glide
Specifies the time that is needed to bend the pitch of the sample from one note to
the following note. If you move this control all the way to the left, Glide is
deactivated.
If Fingered is activated, the pitch only glides between notes that are played legato.
RELATED LINKS
Filter Section
In the Filter section, you can adjust the tone color of the sample sound. The filter envelope
allows you to control the cutoff frequency to shape the harmonic content over time.
403
Sampler Tracks
Sampler Control
Activate/Deactivate Filter
Activates/Deactivates the filtering effect.
Show/Hide Filter Modulators

Shows/Hides the filter envelope and the LFO editor in the waveform window.
Type
Sets the filter type.
Shape
Sets the filter shape.
Cutoff
Controls the cutoff frequency of the filter.
Resonance
Sets the filter resonance.
Drive
Determines the level of the input signal and thus the amount of saturation.
Cutoff Key Follow

Sets the cutoff modulation using the note number. Increase this parameter to raise
the cutoff with higher notes. At 100 %, the cutoff frequency follows the played pitch
exactly.
LFO
Allows you to select the LFO and to set the LFO modulation depth.
RELATED LINKS
Amp Section
In the Amp section, you can set the volume and the pan of the sample. The amplifier envelope
allows you to shape the volume over time.
Show/Hide Amp Modulators

Shows/Hides the amp envelope and the LFO editor in the waveform window.
Volume
Sets the level of the sample.
Volume LFO
Allows you to select the volume LFO and to set the volume LFO modulation depth.
Pan
Sets the position of the sample in the stereo panorama.
Pan LFO
Allows you to select the pan LFO and to set the pan LFO modulation depth.
RELATED LINKS
404
Sampler Tracks
Sampler Control
Envelope Editors
You can adjust the Pitch, Filter, and Amp envelope curves. Each of these envelopes can contain
up to 128 nodes.
● Click Show/Hide Pitch Modulators, Show/Hide Filter Modulators, or Show/Hide Amp

Modulators in the section header to show/hide the corresponding envelope editor and
the LFO section.
Pitch Envelope
Filter Envelope
Amp Envelope
Envelope Amount
Determines how much the selected envelope affects the audio. This parameter
allows for positive and negative values. If the Envelope Amount is set to 0, the
envelope has no effect.
NOTE
This parameter is only available for Pitch and Filter.
Envelope display
Shows the pitch, filter, or amp envelope curve. You can adjust it by adding, moving,
and deleting nodes. The nodes for attack (A), sustain (S), and release (R) are always
shown and cannot be deleted. Next to the release node, the release time of the
envelope is shown.
Mode
Determines how the corresponding envelope is played back when it is triggered.
● Select Sustain to play the envelope from the first node to the sustain node.
The sustain level is held for as long as you play the note. When you release the
405
Sampler Tracks
Sampler Control
note, the envelope continues with the stages following the sustain. This mode
is suited for looped samples.
● Select Loop to play back the envelope from the first node to the loop nodes.
Then, the loop is repeated for as long as the key is held. When you release the
note, the envelope continues playing the stages that follow the sustain. This
mode is suited for adding motion to the sustain of the envelope.
● Select One Shot to play the envelope from the first to the last node, even if
you release the key. The envelope has no sustain stage. This mode is suited for
drum samples.
● Select Sample Loop to preserve the natural attack of the sample. The decay of
the envelope does not start until the sample has reached the sample loop
start.
If you set the second node to the maximum level and use the following nodes
to shape the decay during the loop phase of the sample, the envelope only
affects the loop phase. The attack of the envelope is still executed.
Velocity
Determines how the velocity affects the level of the corresponding envelope.
The level of the envelope depends on the velocity setting and on how hard you hit a
key. Higher values increase the level of the envelope the harder you hit a key.
Time
Sets the time value for the selected node.
Sync
Activates/Deactivates tempo sync for the corresponding envelope. Grid sets the base
note value for tempo-syncing the envelope. Trpl allows you to set triplet base notes.
RELATED LINKS
Selecting Nodes on page 406
Adding and Removing Nodes on page 407
Adjusting the Envelope Curve on page 407
Zoom Functions in the Envelope Editors on page 407
Synchronizing Envelopes to the Project Tempo on page 412
Selecting Nodes
You can select single nodes or multiple nodes. Selected nodes are edited together.
● To select a node, click on it in the graphical editor.

The Time field at the top of the graphical envelope editor shows the parameters of the
selected node.
● To add a node to a selection, Shift-click the node.
● To select multiple nodes, draw a rectangle around them with the mouse.
If multiple nodes are selected, the Time field shows the parameters of the node that is
indicated by a white border.
● To select all envelope nodes, press Ctrl/Cmd-A.
● If the envelope editor has the keyboard focus, you can select the next or the previous node
using Left Arrow and Right Arrow.
RELATED LINKS
406
Sampler Tracks
Sampler Control
Adding and Removing Nodes

You can add up to 128 nodes to an envelope curve.
● To add a node, double-click at the position where you want to add the node.
● To remove a node, double-click it.
● To delete several selected nodes, press Delete or Backspace.
NOTE
● You cannot remove the attack (A), the sustain (S), or the release node (R).
● All nodes added after the sustain node always affect the release phase of the envelope.
Adjusting the Envelope Curve

The envelope editor allows you to adjust the envelope curve by dragging.
● To move a node horizontally or vertically, click and drag it.

● To move the envelope curve vertically between two nodes, click and drag it.
Zoom Functions in the Envelope Editors

The vertical axis of the envelope editor displays the level. The horizontal axis displays the time.
● To zoom in or out, click the + or - buttons to the right of the scrollbar below the envelope
editor or use the corresponding key commands.
● To zoom in or out at the current position, click in the timeline and drag up or down.
● To zoom to a specific region, hold Alt/Opt and click and drag the mouse over the region.
RELATED LINKS
LFO Editor
Sampler Control provides two monophonic LFOs. These LFOs are only calculated once and feed
all voices at the same time.
LFO
Allows you to select LFO 1 or 2 for editing.
Sync
Defines how the speed of the corresponding LFO is set.
● Off allows you to set the LFO speed in Hz.
● Tempo + Retrig allows you to set the LFO speed in note values. The resulting
rate depends on the tempo of your project.
● Tempo + Beat allows you to set the LFO speed in note values. The resulting
rate depends on the tempo of your project. Additionally, the current start
phase is calculated based on the current position.
407
Sampler Tracks
Sampler Control
Retrigger
Defines whether the LFO is restarted with the specified start phase when a new note
is triggered. This parameter is available for the sync modes Off and Tempo + Retrig.
● If Off is selected, the LFO is not restarted.
● First Note restarts the LFO when a note is triggered and no other note is held.
● Each Note restarts the LFO every time that a note is triggered.
MW
Allows you to scale the output level of the LFO using the modulation wheel of your
keyboard. This allows you, for example, to control the vibrato of the sound with the
modulation wheel.
Waveform
Sets the waveform for the selected LFO. You can adjust the selected waveform using
the Shape control to the right.
● Sine produces smooth modulation, suitable for vibrato or tremolo. Shape
adds additional harmonics to the waveform.
● Triangle is similar to Sine. Shape continuously changes the triangle waveform
to a trapezoid.
● Saw produces a ramp cycle. Shape continuously changes the waveform from
ramp down to triangle to ramp up.
● Pulse produces stepped modulation, where the modulation switches abruptly
between two values. Shape continuously changes the ratio between the high
and low state of the waveform. If Shape is set to 50 %, an even square wave is
produced.
● Ramp is similar to the Saw waveform. Shape increasingly puts silence before
the sawtooth ramp up begins.
● Log produces a logarithmic modulation. Shape continuously changes the
logarithmic curvature from negative to positive.
● S & H 1 produces randomly stepped modulation, where each step is different.
Shape puts ramps between the steps and changes the sample and hold signal
into a smooth random signal when fully turned right.
● S & H 2 is similar to S & H 1. The steps alternate between random high and low
values. Shape puts ramps between the steps and changes the sample and
hold signal into a smooth random signal when fully turned right.
Freq
Controls the frequency of the modulation, that is, the speed of the LFO.
If Sync is activated for the corresponding LFO, the speed is specified in fractions of
beats. If Sync is deactivated, you can set the frequency in Hz.
Phase
Sets the initial phase of the waveform when the LFO is retriggered. If RND is
activated, each note starts with a randomized start phase.
Keyboard Section
In the keyboard section of Sampler Control you can set the root key and the key range of the
sample, and the modulation range of the pitchbend wheel on your MIDI keyboard.
408
Sampler Tracks
Sample Editing and Playback Functions
Pitchbend
Determines the maximal modulation that is applied when you move the pitchbend
wheel on your MIDI keyboard. You can set the pitchbend range in semitone steps up
to 24 semitones.
Key range handles
Determine the key range of the sample.
NOTE
The set key range is used in Normal and AudioWarp mode.
Root key handle
Determines the root key of the sample.
RELATED LINKS
Setting the Key Range on page 411

All sample editing in Sampler Control is non-destructive.
Setting Sample Start and End

By setting the sample start and end, you can define what range of the sample is played back
when you press a key on your MIDI keyboard.
PREREQUISITE
You have loaded a sample into Sampler Control.
PROCEDURE
1. In the waveform display, drag the Set Sample Start handle to the right to adjust the
sample start point.
2. Drag the Set Sample End handle to the left to adjust the sample end point.
RESULT
When you trigger the sample, only the defined range between start and end handle is played
back.
● You can move both sample start and end markers simultaneously with keeping their
relative distance by moving the mouse cursor between both markers and dragging the
connecting bar.
NOTE
This only works if no loop mode is selected.
409
Sampler Tracks
● You can trim the sample length to the defined playback range by clicking Trim Sample in
the Sampler Control toolbar.
RELATED LINKS
Sampler Control Toolbar on page 395
Setting up Loops for Audio Samples

You can set up a loop that is played back when the sample is triggered.
PREREQUISITE
PROCEDURE
1. On the toolbar, click Loop Mode and select a loop mode from the pop-up menu.
The Set Sustain Loop Start and Set Sustain Loop End handles and the green loop range
overlay are shown.
2. Drag the Set Sustain Loop Start and Set Sustain Loop End handles to adjust the loop
start and end points.
To create a smooth loop transition, try to match the shape of the green loop range overlay
with the shape of the gray sample waveform.
NOTE
You cannot drag the loop start and end points outside the defined sample range.
RESULT
When you trigger the sample in a loop mode, the defined loop range is used.
● You can move both loop start and end markers simultaneously by dragging the area
between the loop markers.
RELATED LINKS
Setting Sample Start and End on page 409
Setting the Root Key Manually

The Root Key shows the original pitch of the sample. Sometimes, if the sample does not contain
any root key information or if you want the sample to play at a different pitch, you must set the
root key manually. In Slice mode, lowering the root key allows you to increase the number of
slices that can be mapped to your keyboard.
NOTE
If you load a sample that does not contain any root key information, the root key is automatically
set to C3.
PROCEDURE
● In the keyboard section of Sampler Control, click and drag the root key handle.
410
Sampler Tracks
● On the toolbar of Sampler Control, double-click in the Root Key field and enter the
new root key using your computer keyboard, your mouse wheel, or your MIDI
keyboard.
RELATED LINKS
Slicing Samples on page 413
Setting the Key Range

You can determine the key range for the sample. This is useful for samples that only sound good
within a certain key range.
PREREQUISITE
PROCEDURE
● In the keyboard section, adjust the key range by dragging the range handles above the
keyboard display.
RESULT
Only keys within the determined key range play a sound when triggered.
RELATED LINKS
Playing Back Samples

After you have loaded an audio sample into Sampler Control, you can play back the sample
using an external MIDI keyboard or the On-Screen Keyboard.
PREREQUISITE
You have loaded a sample into Sampler Control and made all sample editing and settings. You
have installed and set up your MIDI keyboard.
PROCEDURE
1. In the track list, activate Monitor for the sampler track.
2. Optional: On the Sampler Control toolbar, activate Fixed Pitch.
This allows you to play back the sample in its original pitch and speed.
3. Hit some notes on your keyboard or use the On-Screen Keyboard to play back the sample.
RESULT
If Fixed Pitch is deactivated, the sample is played back and the pitch is defined by the notes you
play. If you hit lower keys, the sample is played back with a low pitch. If you hit higher keys, the
sample is played back with a high pitch.
If Fixed Pitch is activated, the sample is played back in its original pitch.
To use the sound of the edited sample in your project, create or record a MIDI event on the
sampler track.
411
Sampler Tracks
RELATED LINKS
Monitoring via Cubase on page 197
On-Screen Keyboard on page 191
MIDI Events on page 144
Synchronizing Envelopes to the Project Tempo

You can synchronize the Pitch Envelope, Filter Envelope, and Amp Envelope to the tempo of
your project. This allows you to set envelope times that relate to musical time intervals,
regardless of tempo changes.
PREREQUISITE
PROCEDURE
1. In the corresponding envelope section, set Sync to On.
2. Use Grid and Trpl to set a note value. This sets the note resolution to which envelope
nodes snap when coming close enough.
NOTE
● The Time field of an envelope node displays times in fractions of a whole note. The
fraction is always reduced to the smallest possible value, for example, 2/16 is
displayed as 1/8.
● You can also enter note values manually in the Time field. Envelope nodes that do
not exactly match a note value display the closest note value.
Normalizing Samples
You can normalize samples to a target value. An additional gain control allows you to fine-tune
the gain value afterwards.
PREREQUISITE
PROCEDURE
1. On the Sampler Control toolbar, set a Normalization Level as target value.
2. Click Normalize Sample.
The sample is normalized to the target value.
3. Use Sample Gain to fine-tune the normalization result.
RELATED LINKS
412
Sampler Tracks
Transferring Samples from Sampler Control to VST Instruments
Slicing Samples
You can slice samples into several pieces that are mapped to the keyboard, so that you can play
every slice individually.
PREREQUISITE
PROCEDURE
1. In the playback section, click Slice.
2. Optional: Change the Slice Mode, adjust the slicing parameters, and add or delete slicing
markers.
3. Optional: If you want to increase the number of slices that can be mapped to your
keyboard, lower the root key in the keyboard section.
RESULT
The slices are automatically mapped to the keyboard, starting on the set root key. You can play a
slice by pressing the corresponding key on your MIDI keyboard.
You can create a corresponding MIDI phrase in your project by dragging the Drag MIDI Phrase
to Project button to the event display. This allows you to rearrange the order of the slices.
RELATED LINKS
Playback Section on page 400
Transferring Samples from Sampler Control to VST

Instruments
You can transfer audio samples with all settings that you have made in Sampler Control to
specific Steinberg VST instruments.
Transferring audio samples from Sampler Control to a VST instrument creates a new instrument
track in the track list. This new track is added below the sampler track. The audio sample and all
its settings are loaded in the VST instrument.
You can transfer audio samples from Sampler Control to the following Steinberg VST
instruments:
● Groove Agent
● Groove Agent SE
● HALion
● Padshop
● Backbone
Transferring a Sample
PREREQUISITE
You have installed Groove Agent, Groove Agent SE, HALion, Padshop, or Backbone. You have
loaded an audio sample in Sampler Control.
413
Sampler Tracks
Transferring Samples from Sampler Control to VST Instruments
PROCEDURE
1. In the Sampler Control toolbar, click Transfer to New Instrument.
2. In the pop-up menu, select the instrument to which you want to transfer the sample.
RESULT
In the track list, a new instrument track is created below the sampler track. The instrument track
has the same name as the sampler track. The audio sample and its settings are loaded in the
selected VST instrument.
NOTE
If a parameter is not available for the VST instrument that you have chosen as destination, it is
either not transferred or is adapted to a similar parameter in the VST instrument. The following
applies:
● Groove Agent/Groove Agent SE: LFO and filter settings are not used.
● Padshop: Sample trimming is not used. A transfer in AudioWarp playback mode sets the
grain settings to a Number of 2 grains and the Speed value accordingly. A transfer in Slice
playback mode uses the selected slice only.
● Backbone: Sample trimming is not used. A transfer in AudioWarp playback mode activates
Resynth mode and sets the Speed value accordingly. A transfer in Slice playback mode
uses the selected slice only.
RELATED LINKS
Transferring a Sample on page 413
414
Pool
Every time that you record on an audio track, a file is created on your hard disk. A reference to
this file, a clip, is added to the Pool.
The following rules apply to the Pool:
● All audio and video clips that belong to a project are listed in the Pool.
● Every project has a separate Pool.
The way the Pool displays folders and their contents is similar to the way the File Explorer/macOS
Finder displays folders and file lists. In the Pool, you can perform operations that affect files on
disk and operations that only affect clips.
Operations That Affect Files

● Importing clips (audio files can automatically be copied and/or converted)
● Converting file formats
● Renaming clips (this also renames the referenced files on disk) and regions
● Deleting clips
● Preparing file archives for backup
● Minimizing files
Operations That Affect Clips

● Copying clips
● Auditioning clips
● Organizing clips
● Applying audio processing to clips
Pool Window
The Pool window allows you to manage the media files of the active project.
To open the Pool, do one of the following:
● On the Project window toolbar, click Open Pool Window. If this icon is not visible, you
must activate the Media & MixConsole Windows option on the toolbar context menu.
● Select Project > Pool.
● Select Media > Open Pool Window.
415
Pool
Pool Window
The content of the Pool is divided into the following folders:
Audio folder
Contains all audio clips and regions that are in the project.
If the project contains one or more sampler tracks, a dedicated Sampler Track
subfolder is created in the Audio folder. This subfolder contains all clips of samples
that you have loaded into Sampler Control.
Video folder
Contains all video clips that are in the project.
Trash folder
Contains unused clips that have been moved here for later permanent removal from
the hard disk.
NOTE
You cannot rename or delete these folders, but you can add any number of subfolders.
416
Pool
Pool Window
Pool Window Columns

The Pool window columns display information about the clips and regions.
Media
Contains the Audio, Video, and Trash folders. If the folders are opened, the clip or
region names are shown and can be edited.
Used
Displays how many times a clip is used in the project. If there is no entry in this
column, the corresponding clip is not used.
Status
Displays various icons that relate to the current Pool and clip status. The following
symbols can be displayed:
● Record folder
Indicates the Record folder.
● Process
Indicates that a clip has been processed.
● Missing
Indicates that a clip is referenced in the project but missing from the Pool.
● External
Indicates that the file the clip relates to is external, for example, located
outside the current Audio folder for the project.
● Recorded
Indicates that the clip has been recorded in the open version of the project.
This is useful for finding recently recorded clips quickly.
Musical Mode
You can use Musical Mode to tempo-match audio loops to the project tempo. The
checkbox in this column allows you to activate or deactivate musical mode. If the
Tempo column displays “???”, you must enter the correct tempo before you can
activate Musical Mode.
417
Pool
Pool Window
Tempo
Displays the tempo of audio files if available. If no tempo has been specified, the
column displays “???”.
Sign.
Displays the time signature, for example, “4/4”.
Key
Displays the root key if one has been specified for the file.
Algorithm
Displays the algorithm preset that is used if the audio file is processed.
● To change the default preset, click the preset name and select another preset
Info
For audio clips, this column displays the sample rate, bit depth, number of channels,
and length.
For regions, it displays start and end times in frames.
For video clips, it displays the frame rate, resolution, number of frames, and length.
Type
Displays the file format of the clip.
Date
Displays the date when the audio file was last changed.
Origin Time
Displays the original start position where a clip was recorded in the project. As this
value can be used as a basis for the Insert into Project option in the Media or
context menu, you can change it if the Origin Time value is independent (for
example, not for regions).
In the Pool, you can change the value by editing the Origin Time. In the Project
window, you can change the value by moving the event to a new position and
selecting Audio > Update Origin.
Image
Displays waveform images of audio clips or regions.
Path
Displays the path to the location of a clip on the hard disk.
Reel Name
Audio files may include this attribute, which is then shown in this column. It
describes the reel or tape from which the media was originally captured.
NOTE
You can rearrange the order of the columns by clicking a header and dragging left or right.
Pool Window Toolbar

The toolbar contains tools and settings for working in the Pool.
Show Info
Shows/Hides the info line.
418
Pool
Pool Window
Audition
Audition Loop
Audition Volume
View/Attributes
Allows you to activate/deactivate the attributes that are displayed in the Pool
window.
+/- All
Opens/Closes all folders.
Import
Allows you to import media files to the Pool.
Search
Allows you to search the Pool and connected disks for media files.
Project Folder
Displays the path to the folder of the active project.
Pool Record Folder

Displays the path to the Record folder of the active project. By default, this is the
Audio folder. However, you can create a new Audio subfolder and designate this as
your Pool record folder.
Info Line
The info line shows information about the event or part that you selected in the Pool.
● To activate the info line, click Show Info at the left of the toolbar.
The info line shows the following information:
Audio Files
The number of audio files in the Pool.
Used
The number of audio files in use.
Total Size
The total size of all audio files in the Pool.
External Files
The number of files in the Pool that do not reside in the project folder (for example,
video files).
419
Pool
Working with the Pool

NOTE
Most of the Pool-related main menu functions are also available on the Pool context menu.
Renaming Clips or Regions in the Pool

IMPORTANT
Renaming clips or regions in the Pool also renames the referenced files on disk. It is
recommended to rename clips or regions in the Pool. Otherwise, the reference from the clip to
the file may get lost.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Pool window, select a clip or region, and click the existing name.
2. Enter a new name and press Return.
RELATED LINKS
Missing Files on page 425
Duplicating Clips in the Pool

You can create duplicates of clips and apply different processing methods to them.
NOTE
Duplicating a clip does not create a new file on disk, but a new edit version of the clip that refers
to the same audio file.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Pool window, select the clip that you want to duplicate.
2. Select Media > New Version.
RESULT
A new version of the clip appears in the same Pool folder. The duplicated clip has the same name
as the original but with a version number after it. Regions within a clip are also copied, but keep
their name.
Inserting Clips into a Project

To insert a clip into a project, you can either use the insert commands on the Media menu or use
drag and drop.
Inserting Clips into a Project via Menu Commands

PROCEDURE
1. In the Pool window, select the clips that you want to insert into the project.
2. Select Media > Insert into Project and select one of the insert options.
If several clips are selected, choose whether to insert them on one track or each on a
different track.
420
Pool
NOTE
The clips are positioned so that their snap points are aligned with the selected insert
position. If you want to adjust the snap point before inserting a clip, double-click a clip to
open the Sample Editor. Here, you can adjust the snap position and then perform the
insert options.
RESULT
The clip is inserted on the selected track or on a new audio track. If several tracks are selected,
the clip will be inserted on the first selected track.
RELATED LINKS
Inserting Clips into a Project via Drag and Drop

You can drag a clip from the Pool into the Project window.
Snap is taken into account if Snap is activated.
If you drag the clip into the Project window, the cross-hair cursor and a tooltip are shown. The
tooltip indicates the timeline position where the snap point of the clip is aligned.
If you position the clip in an empty area of the track list, that is, where no track exists, a new track
is created for the inserted event.
NOTE
If you press and hold Shift while dragging the clip from the Pool on an event, the clip in this
event is replaced.
RELATED LINKS
Replacing Clips in Events on page 143
Cross-Hair Cursor on page 64
Deleting Clips from the Pool

You can delete clips from the Pool with or without deleting the corresponding file from the hard
disk.
Removing Clips from the Pool

You can remove clips from the Pool without deleting the corresponding files from the hard disk.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Pool window, select the clips that you want to remove, and select Edit > Delete
You can also press Backspace or Delete.
2. Depending on whether the clips are used by an event, you have the following options:
● If the clips are used by an event, click Remove and then click Remove from Pool.
● If the clips are not used by an event, click Remove from Pool.
RESULT
The clips are no longer available in the Pool for this project, but the files still exist on the hard
disk and can be used in other projects, etc. This operation can be undone.
421
Pool
Deleting Files from the Hard Disk

You can delete clips from the Pool by deleting the corresponding file from the hard disk. To
delete a file permanently from the hard disk, you must first move the corresponding clips to the
Trash folder in the Pool.
IMPORTANT
Make sure that the audio files that you want to delete are not used in other projects.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Pool window, select the clips that you want to delete from the hard disk, and select
Edit > Delete.
You can also press Backspace or Delete, or drag the clips into the Trash folder.
NOTE
You can retrieve a clip or region from the Trash folder by dragging it back into an Audio or
Video folder.
2. Depending on whether the clips are used by an event, you have the following options:
● If the clips are used by an event, click Remove and then click Trash.
● If the clips are not used by an event, click Trash.
3. Select Media > Empty Trash.
4. Click Erase.
RESULT
The files are deleted from the hard disk.
Removing Unused Clips from the Pool

You can find all clips in the Pool that are not used in the project. This allows you to quickly
remove all unused clips.
PREREQUISITE
The Pool window is open.
PROCEDURE
1. Select Media > Remove Unused Media.
● To move the clips to the Trash folder, select Trash.
● To remove the clips from the Pool, select Remove from Pool.
Removing Regions from the Pool

PROCEDURE
● In the Pool, select a region and select Edit > Delete.
You can also press Backspace or Delete.
IMPORTANT
You are not warned if the region is still in use.
422
Pool
Locating Events and Clips

You can quickly display to which clips the selected events belong and to which events the
selected clips belong.
Locating Events via Clips in the Pool

You can find out which events in the project refer to a particular clip in the Pool.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Pool window, select one or more clips.
2. Select Media > Select in Project.
RESULT
All events that refer to the selected clips are now selected in the Project window.
Locating Clips via Events in the Project Window

You can find out which clip belongs to a particular event in the Project window.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Project window, select one or more events.
2. Select Audio > Find Selected in Pool.
RESULT
The corresponding clips are located and highlighted in the Pool.
Searching for Audio Files

The search functions help you locate audio files in the Pool, on your hard disk, or on other media.
This works much like the regular file search, but with extra features.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Pool window, click Search on the toolbar.
A search pane appears at the bottom of the window, displaying the search functions.
2. Specify the files that you search for in the Name field.
You can use partial names or wildcards (*).
NOTE
Only audio files of the supported formats will be found.
3. Use the Location pop-up menu to specify where to search.

The pop-up menu lists all your local drives and removable media.
● To limit the search to certain folders, select Select Search Path, and in the dialog
that opens, select the folder in which you want to search.
The search includes the selected folder and all subfolders.
423
Pool
NOTE
Folders that you have recently selected using the Select Search Path function appear on
the pop-up menu, so that you can quickly select them again.
4. Click Search.
The search is started and Search is labeled Stop.
● To cancel the search, click Stop.
When the search is finished, the files that are found are listed on the right.
● To audition a file, select it in the list and use the playback controls to the left (Play,
Stop, Pause, and Loop). If Auto Play is activated, selected files are automatically
played back.
● To import a file into the Pool, double-click the file in the list or select it and click
Import.
5. To close the search pane, click Search on the toolbar again.
Using the Extended Search Functionality

Apart from the search criterion Name, additional search filters are available. The extended
search options allow for a detailed search, helping you to master even the largest sound
database.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Pool window, click Search on the toolbar.
The search pane is displayed in the lower part of the Pool window.
2. Click Name to open the extended search pop-up menu where you can select and define a
search criterion.
The menu also contains the Add Filter and Presets submenus.
The search criteria have the following parameters:
● Name: partial names or wildcards (*)
● Size: less than, more than, equal, between (two values), in seconds, minutes, hours,
and bytes
● Bit Depth: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit, 32 bit, 32 bit float, 64 bit float
● Channels: mono, stereo, and from 3 to 16
● Sample Rate: various values, choose Other for free setting
● Date: various search ranges
3. Select one of the search criteria in the pop-up menu.
The search criterion changes to the selected criterion.
4. Optional: To display more search options, open the extended search pop-up menu, select
the Add Filter submenu, and select an element.
5. Optional: To save your search filter settings as a preset, open the extended search pop-up
menu, select Presets > Save Preset, and enter a name for the preset.
Saved presets are added to the Presets submenu.
6. Optional: To remove a search filter settings preset, open the extended search pop-up
menu, select the preset, and then select Remove Preset.
424
Pool
Missing Files
When you open a project and one or more files are missing, the Resolve Missing Files dialog
opens. If you click Close, the project opens without the missing files.
In the Pool, you can check which files are considered missing. This is indicated by a question
mark in the Status column.
A file is considered missing under one of the following conditions:
● The file has been moved or renamed outside the program since you last worked with the
project, and you ignored the Resolve Missing Files dialog when you opened the project
for the current session.
● You have moved or renamed the file outside the program during the current session.
● You have moved or renamed the folder in which the missing files are located.
Locating Missing Files

PROCEDURE
1. Select Media > Find Missing Files.
2. In the Resolve Missing Files dialog, decide if you want the program to find the file for you
(Search), if you want to find it yourself (Locate), or if you want to specify in which directory
the program searches for the file (Folder).
● If you select Search, a dialog opens to let you specify which folder or disk the
program scans. Click Search Folder, select a directory or a disk, and click Start. If
found, select the file from the list and click Accept. Afterwards, Cubase tries to map
all other missing files automatically.
● If you select Locate, a file dialog opens, allowing you to locate the file manually.
Select the file and click Open.
● If you select Folder, a dialog opens to let you specify the directory in which the
missing file can be found. This might be the preferred method if you have renamed
or moved the folder containing the missing file, but the file still has the same name.
Once you select the correct folder, the program finds the file and you can close the
dialog.
Reconstructing Missing Edit Files

If a missing file cannot be found, this is normally indicated with a question mark in the Status
column in the Pool. However, if the missing file is an edit file (a file that is created when you
process audio and that is stored in the Edits folder within the project folder), it may be possible
for the program to reconstruct it by recreating the editing to the original audio file.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Pool window, locate the clips for which files are missing.
2. Check the Status column. If the status of the files is “Reconstructible”, the files can be
reconstructed by Cubase.
3. Select the reconstructible clips and select Media > Reconstruct.
RESULT
The editing is performed and the edit files are recreated.
425
Pool
Removing Missing Files from the Pool

If the Pool contains audio files that cannot be found or reconstructed, you may want to remove
these.
PROCEDURE
● In the Pool window, select Media > Remove Missing Files.
RESULT
All missing files from the Pool and the corresponding events from the Project window are
removed.
Auditioning Clips in the Pool

You can audition clips in the Pool using key commands, the Audition button, or by clicking in the
waveform image for a clip.
● Use key commands.

If you activate Playback Toggle Triggers Local Preview in the Preferences dialog
(Transport page), you can use Space to audition. This is the same as activating Audition
on the toolbar.
● Select a clip and activate Audition.
The whole clip plays back. To stop playback, click Audition again.
● Click in the waveform image for a clip.
The clip plays back from the selected position in the waveform until the end. To stop
playback, click Audition or anywhere else in the Pool window.
The audio is routed directly to the Main Mix (the default output) bus, bypassing the settings of
the audio channel, effects, and EQs.
NOTE
You can adjust the auditioning level with the miniature level fader on the toolbar. This does not
affect the regular playback level.
If you have activated Audition Loop before you audition, the following happens:
● When you click Audition to audition a clip, the clip is repeated indefinitely until you stop
playback by clicking Audition or Audition Loop again.
● When you click in the waveform image to audition, the section from the selected point to
the end of the clip is repeated indefinitely until you stop playback.
Opening Clips in the Sample Editor

The Sample Editor allows you to perform detailed editing on the clip.
● To open a clip in the Sample Editor, double-click a clip waveform icon or a clip name in the
Media column.
● To open a certain region of a clip in the Sample Editor, double-click a region in the Pool.
You can use this to set a snap point for a clip, for example. When you later insert the clip
from the Pool into the project, the defined snap point allows it to be properly aligned.
RELATED LINKS
426
Pool
Importing Media
The Import Medium dialog lets you import files directly into the Pool.
To open the dialog, select Media > Import Medium, or click Import on the Pool toolbar.
This opens a standard file dialog, where you can navigate to other folders, audition files, etc. The
following audio file formats can be imported:
● Wave (Normal or Broadcast)

● AIFF and AIFC (Compressed AIFF)
● REX or REX 2
● FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec)
● MPEG Layer 2 and Layer 3 (MP2 and MP3 files)
● Ogg Vorbis (OGG files)
● Windows Media Audio (Windows only)
● Wave 64 (W64 files)
The following characteristics are possible:
● Stereo or mono
● Any sample rate
NOTE
Files that have a different sample rate than the project sample rate are played back at the
wrong speed and pitch.
● 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit, 32 bit, 32 bit float, or 64 bit float

● Various video formats
NOTE
You can also use the commands on the Import submenu of the File menu to import audio or
video files into the Pool.
RELATED LINKS
Wave Files on page 688
Importing ReCycle Files on page 219
Supported Compressed Audio File Formats on page 216
Video File Compatibility on page 713
Importing Audio CDs into the Pool

You can import tracks or sections of tracks from an audio CD directly into the Pool. This opens a
dialog in which you can specify which tracks are copied from the CD, converted to audio files, and
added to the Pool.
● To import an audio CD to the Pool, select Media > Import Audio CD.
RELATED LINKS
427
Pool
Import Options Dialog

The Import Options dialog allows you to specify how audio files are imported into the Pool.
● If you select a file in the Import Medium dialog and click Open, the Import Options
dialog opens.
Import Options dialog for single file import
Import Options dialog for multiple file import

copy.

Needed
are converted.
Do not ask again

Always imports files according to the settings without opening the dialog again. You
can reset this option in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Audio page).
RELATED LINKS
Pool Window Columns on page 417
Converting Files on page 431
428
Pool
Exporting Regions as Audio Files

If you have created regions within an audio clip, these can be exported as separate audio files. If
you have two clips that refer to the same audio file, you can create a separate audio file for each
clip.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Pool window, select the region that you want to export.
2. Select Audio > Bounce Selection.
3. Select the folder in which you want the new file to be created and click OK.
4. Optional: If you are using the Bounce Selection option to create a separate audio file for a
clip that refers to the same audio file as another clip, enter a name for the new audio file.
RESULT
A new audio file is created in the specified folder. The file has the name of the region and is
automatically added to the Pool.
RELATED LINKS
Creating Audio Events from Regions on page 371
Changing the Pool Record Folder

All audio clips that you record in the project are saved in the Pool Record folder. The Pool
Record folder is indicated by the text Record in the Status column and by a dot on the folder
itself.
By default, this is the main Audio folder. However, you can create a new Audio subfolder and
designate this as your Pool Record folder.
NOTE
The folders that you create in the Pool are only for organizing your files in the Pool. All files are
recorded to the folder that you specified as the Pool Record folder.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Pool, select the Audio folder or any audio clip.
NOTE
You cannot designate the Video folder or any of its subfolders as the Pool Record folder.
2. Select Media > Create Folder.

3. Rename the new folder.
4. Select the new folder and select Media > Set Pool Record Folder, or click in the Status
column of the new folder.
RESULT
The new folder becomes the Pool Record folder. Any audio recorded in the project is saved in
this folder.
429
Pool
Organizing Clips and Folders

If you accumulate a large number of clips in the Pool, it can be difficult to quickly find specific
items. Organizing clips in new subfolders with names that reflect the content can be a solution.
For example, you could put all sound effects in one folder, all lead vocals in another, etc.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Pool window, select the folder for which you want to create a subfolder.
NOTE
You cannot put audio clips in a video folder and vice versa.
2. Select Media > Create Folder.

3. Rename the folder.
4. Drag the clips to the new folder.
Applying Processing to Clips in the Pool

You can apply audio processing to clips from within the Pool in the same way as to events in the
Project window.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Pool window, select the clips that you want to process.
2. Select Audio > Direct Offline Processing and select a processing method.
RESULT
A waveform symbol indicates that the clips have been processed.
RELATED LINKS
Minimizing Files
You can minimize the audio files according to the size of the audio clips referenced in the project.
The files that are produced using this option only contain the audio file portions that are actually
used in the project.
This can significantly reduce the size of the project if large portions of the audio files are unused.
Therefore, the option is useful for archiving purposes after you have completed a project.
IMPORTANT
This operation permanently changes the selected audio files in the Pool. This cannot be undone.
If you only want to create the minimized audio files as a copy, leaving the original project
untouched, you can use the Back up Project option.
NOTE
Minimizing files clears the entire edit history.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Pool window, select the files that you want to minimize.
2. Select Media > Minimize File.
430
Pool
3. Click Minimize.
After the minimizing is finished, the file references in the stored project become invalid.
● To save the updated project, click Save Now.
● To proceed with the unsaved project, click Later.
RESULT
Only the audio portions that are actually used in the project remain in the corresponding audio
files in the Pool Record folder.
RELATED LINKS
Backing up Projects on page 86
Converting Files
In the Pool, you can convert files to another format.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Pool window, select the files that you want to convert.
2. Select Media > Convert Files.
3. In the Convert Options dialog, make your changes and click OK.
Convert Options Dialog

In this dialog, you can convert audio files in the Pool.
● To open the Convert Options dialog, select a clip in the Pool window, and select Media >
Convert Files.
Sample Rate
Allows you to convert to another sample rate.
Bit Depth
Allows you to convert to 16 bit, 24 bit, 32 bit, 32 bit float, or 64 bit float.
Channels
Allows you to convert to mono or stereo interleaved.
File Format
Allows you to convert to Wave, AIFF, Wave 64, or Broadcast Wave Format.
Options
You can use the Options pop-up menu to set one of the following options:
● New Files
431
Pool
Creates a copy of the file in the audio folder and converts this new file
according to the chosen attributes. The new file is added to the Pool, but all
clip references still point to the original, unconverted file.
● Replace Files
Converts the original file without changing clip references. However, the
references are saved with the next save action.
● New + Replace in Pool
Creates a new copy with the chosen attributes, replaces the original file with
the new one in the Pool and redirects the current clip references from the
original file to the new file. Select this option if you want your audio clips to
refer to the converted file, but want to keep the original file on disk, for
example, if the file is used in other projects.
Extracting Audio from Video File

You can extract audio from video files. This automatically generates a new audio clip that
appears in the Pool Record folder.
NOTE
This function is not available for MPEG-1 video files.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Pool window, select Media > Extract Audio from Video File.
2. Select the video file from which you want to extract audio and click Open.
RESULT
The audio is extracted from the video file. The audio file gets the same file format and sample
rate/width as in the current project, and the same name as the video file.
432
MediaBay and Media Rack
You can manage media files on your computer as well as presets from multiple sources from
within the MediaBay or the Media rack.
The MediaBay window offers advanced functions for working with media files and managing
database items. To show the media files on your computer in the MediaBay, you must scan the
folders or volumes that contain the files so that these are added to the database.
The Media rack in the right zone of the Project window allows you to access some of the most
important MediaBay functions from within a fixed zone of the Project window. For quick access
to specific media files, the Media rack allows you to add specific folders on your computer as
favorites. Media files within the favorite folders that you add in the Media rack are automatically
scanned and added to the database.
RELATED LINKS
MediaBay Window on page 444
Scanning Folders on page 447
Adding Favorites Using the Favorites Page on page 442
Adding Favorites Using the File Browser Page on page 442
Media Rack in Right Zone

The Media rack in the right zone of the Project window allows you to access the MediaBay
functions from within a fixed zone of the Project window.
● To open the Media rack in the right zone, click Show/Hide Right Zone on the Project
window toolbar, and at the top of the right zone, click the Media tab.
The Media rack opens on the Home page that features different tiles. These tiles correspond to
the available media types.
RELATED LINKS
Showing/Hiding Zones on page 31
Home Page on page 433
Home Page
The Home page gives you access to the tiles that correspond to the available media types, to the
Favorites, and to the File Browser.
● To open the Home page, click the Home navigation control on the Media rack.
433
The following tiles are available:
VST Instruments
Shows VST instruments and instrument presets.
VST Effects
Shows VST effects and effect presets.
Loops & Samples

Shows audio loops, MIDI loops, or instrument sounds ordered by content set.
Presets
User Presets
Shows track presets, strip presets, pattern banks, FX chain presets, VST FX presets,
and instrument presets that are listed in the User Content folder.
Favorites
Shows your favorite folders and allows you to add new favorites. The folder content
is automatically added to the MediaBay database.
File Browser
Shows your file system and the pre-defined folders Favorites, This Computer, VST
Sound, Factory Content, and User Content where you can search for media files
and access them immediately.
RELATED LINKS
Loading Instrument Presets on page 460
Loading Loops and Samples on page 459
Loading Track Presets on page 460
Loading Effect Plug-In Presets on page 461
434
Loading FX Chain Presets on page 461

Loading Strip Presets on page 462
Adding Favorites Using the File Browser Page on page 442
Favorites Page
The Favorites page allows you to add your own favorite folders to the Media rack.
1 Add Favorite
Opens a file dialog where you can navigate to the location of a folder and add it as a
favorite folder.
2 Favorite folders
The folders that you added as favorites are shown as tiles on the Favorites page.
● To show the content of a folder, click it.
● To delete a folder from the Favorites page, click its close button.
RELATED LINKS
Results Page
The Results page shows all media files that are found in the defined favorite folder.
● To open the Results page, click the Show All Results navigation control on the Media
rack.
435
1 Media Rack navigation controls

Allow you to navigate to specific folders and filter the Results list.
2 Attribute filter
Allows you to view and edit some of the standard file attributes found in your media files.
3 Results list
Shows all media files that are found in the selected folder and allows you to select a media
file.
4 Previewer
Allows you to preview the selected media file.
RELATED LINKS
Media Rack Navigation Controls on page 440
Setting up the Results List Columns on page 449
Results Section on page 449
File Browser Page

The File Browser page shows all media files that are found in the File Browser.
● To open the File Browser page, go to the Home page of the Media rack, and click File
Browser.
436

2 Add Favorite
Allows you to add the selected folder as a favorite folder.
3 Back/Forward/Up
Up navigates to the parent folder. Back navigates to the previously used folder. Forward
navigates to the most recent folder.
4 File browser
Allows you to browse selected folders.
5 Results list
Shows all supported media files that are found in the selected folder and allows you to
select a media file.
6 Previewer
Allows you to preview the selected media file.
RELATED LINKS
Media Rack Navigation Controls on page 440
File Browser Section on page 447
437
VST Instruments Page

The VST Instruments page shows all VST instruments of the selected collection.
● To open the VST Instruments page, go to the Home page of the Media rack, and click VST
Instruments.

2 Expand All
Expands all results.
3 Collapse All
Collapses all results.
4 Show/Hide VST Plug-in Pictures
Shows/Hides the pictures of the VST instrument control panels.
● Default activates the default collection.
● Sort By Category sorts the collection by category. This is only available for the
Default collection.
● Sort By Vendor sorts the collection by vendor. This is only available for the Default
collection.
● Plug-in Manager opens the Plug-in Manager that allows you to create new plug-in
collections. These will be listed in the Plug-in Collections and Options menu below
the Default collection.
6 Plug-in list
Shows the plug-ins of the selected collection.
RELATED LINKS
Adding Pictures of VST Instruments to the Media Rack on page 443
438
VST Effects Page

The VST Effects page shows all VST effects of the selected collection.
● To open the VST Effects page, go to the Home page of the Media rack, and click VST
Effects.

2 Expand All
Expands all results.
3 Collapse All
Collapses all results.
4 Show/Hide VST Plug-in Pictures
Shows/Hides the pictures of the VST effect control panels.
● Sort By Category sorts the collection by category. This is only available for the
Default collection.
● Sort By Vendor sorts the collection by vendor. This is only available for the Default
collection.
● Plug-in Manager opens the Plug-in Manager that allows you to create new plug-in
collections. These will be listed in the Plug-in Collections and Options menu below
the Default collection.
6 Plug-in list
Shows the plug-ins of the selected collection.
439
RELATED LINKS
Adding Pictures of VST Effects to the Media Rack on page 443
Media Rack Navigation Controls

The navigation controls allow you to navigate to files and folders in the Media rack.
The following controls allow you to perform a text search, and to show all results on the current
page.
1 Search
Allows you to search media files by name or by attribute.
2 Reset Search
Allows you to reset the search.
3 Show All Results
Shows the Results page for a selected tile. If no tile is selected, all media files are shown.
The following controls allow you to navigate from the current page to other pages.
1 Back
Allows you to navigate back to the previous page.
2 Home
Allows you to navigate back to the Home page.
3 Breadcrumb path
Shows the path to the current page and allows you to navigate back to the previous page.
The following controls allow you to set up and modify the Results page.
1 Select Media Types

Allows you to select the media types that are displayed on the Results page.
2 Shuffle Results
Shuffles the Results page.
3 Reset Attribute Filter
Lights up if an attribute filter is set. Click this button to reset the attribute filter.
4 Set up Result Columns
Allows you to specify which attribute columns are displayed on the Results page.
5 Show/Hide Attribute Filters
Shows/Hides the Attribute Filters section.
RELATED LINKS
Home Page on page 433
Results Page on page 435
Media File Attributes on page 457
440
Working with the Media Rack

The Media rack in the right zone of the Project window allows you to search for supported
media files and included VST instruments, and add them to your project.
The controls on the different pages of the Media rack allow you to browse, filter, select, and to
preview your media files.
The Favorites page and the File Browser page allow you to add folders where your media files
are located as Favorites. This helps you to quickly navigate to these media files.
The tiles and controls on the different pages of the Media rack allow you to browse, filter, select,
and preview the content.
Once you have located the media file, the instrument, or the preset that you want to use, and
selected it in the Results list, you can insert it into your project by using drag and drop, by using
the context menu options, or by double-clicking.
RELATED LINKS
Results Page on page 435
Adding VST Instruments to Projects

You can use the Media rack to add VST instruments to your project.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Media rack, click the VST Instruments tile.
2. Drag an instrument on the track list or on the event display.
NOTE
To exchange the VST instrument of an instrument track, drag the instrument from the
Media rack, and drop it on the top section of the instrument track Inspector. Note that
you must update the track name manually if needed.
RELATED LINKS
Loading Instrument Presets on page 460
Adding VST Effects to Projects

You can use the Media rack to add VST effects to your project.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Media rack, click the VST Effects tile.
● Drag an effect on the track list to create an FX channel track.
● To add the effect to an audio-related track, drag the effect from the Media rack, and
drop it in the Inserts or Sends section of the track Inspector.
● To add the effect to an audio-related channel, drag the effect from the Media rack,
and drop it in the Inserts or Sends section of the MixConsole in the lower zone of
the Project window, or the Channel Settings window.
RELATED LINKS
Loading Effect Plug-In Presets on page 461
441
Applying Track Presets

You can use the Media rack to add track presets to your project.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Media rack, click the Presets tile.
2. Click Track Presets.
3. Click Audio, VST Instruments, MIDI, Multi, or Sampler depending on the track type.
● Drag a track preset on the Inspector or in the track list for the corresponding track
type.
● Drag a track preset below the track list to add a new track with the track preset
loaded.
NOTE
To exchange the track preset of a track, drag the preset from the Media rack, and drop it
on the track in the track list. Note that you must update the track name manually if
needed.
RESULT
The track preset is applied.
Adding Favorites Using the Favorites Page

You can add favorite folders to the Favorites page. This allows you to directly access media files
in specific folders.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Media rack, click the Favorites tile.
2. At the top left of the page, click Add Favorite.
3. Select the folder that you want to add as a Favorite.
4. Click OK.
RESULT
● The favorite folder is added to the database.
● On the Favorites page, a new tile with the specified name is added.
● In the File Browser, a new folder with the specified name is added to the Favorites folder.
RELATED LINKS
Favorites Page on page 435
Adding Favorites Using the File Browser Page

You can add favorite folders using the File Browser page. This allows you to directly access
media files in specific folders.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Media rack, click the File Browser tile.
2. In the File Browser, navigate to the folder that you want to add as a favorite and select it.
442
● At the top left of the page, click Add Favorite.

● Right-click the folder, and from the context menu, select Add Favorite.
4. In the Set Name dialog that opens, enter a name for the folder.
5. Click OK.
RESULT
● The favorite folder is added to the database.
● In the File Browser, a new folder with the specified name is added to the Favorites folder.
● On the Favorites page, a new tile with the specified name is added.
RELATED LINKS
File Browser Page on page 436
Adding Pictures of VST Instruments to the Media Rack

Pictures of VST instruments from other vendors are not loaded by default. However, you can add
them to the Media rack manually.
PREREQUISITE
You have added the VST instrument of another vendor as a rack or a track instrument.
PROCEDURE
1. Open the control panel of the VST instrument.
2. On the control panel, click Add VST Plug-in Picture to Media Rack.
RESULT
The picture of the VST instrument is shown in the Media rack.
RELATED LINKS
Adding VST Instruments on page 476
VST Instrument Control Panel on page 477
Adding Pictures of VST Effects to the Media Rack

Pictures of VST effects from other vendors are not loaded by default. However, you can add them
to the Media rack manually.
PREREQUISITE
You have added a VST effect from another vendor.
PROCEDURE
1. Open the control panel of the VST effect.
2. On the control panel, click Add VST Plug-in Picture to Media Rack.
RESULT
The picture of the VST effect is shown in the Media rack.
RELATED LINKS
Adding Insert Effects on page 312
443
MediaBay Window
MediaBay Window
To open the MediaBay in a separate window, do one of the following:
● Select Media > MediaBay.

● Press F5.
The MediaBay is divided into the following sections:
1 File Browser
Allows you to scan specific folders in your file system, and to add favorites.
2 Toolbar
Contains tools and shortcuts for settings and functions in the MediaBay, and allows you to
switch between the previously defined favorite locations. Favorites in the MediaBay
window are not automatically scanned.
3 Filters
Allows you to filter the Results list using a logical or an attribute filter.
4 Results
Displays all supported media files. You can filter the list and perform text searches.
5 Previewer
Allows you to preview the files shown in the Results list.
RELATED LINKS
File Browser Section on page 447
MediaBay Toolbar on page 445
Adding Favorites on page 448
Filters Section on page 457
Setting up the MediaBay on page 447
444
MediaBay Window
MediaBay Toolbar
The toolbar contains tools and shortcuts for settings and functions in the MediaBay.
Navigation
Back
Navigates to the previously used folder.
Forward
Navigates to the most recent folder.
Up
Navigates to the parent folder.
Favorites
Add Favorite
Allows you to add the selected folder as a favorite folder.
Select Defined Favorite
Allows you to select a Favorite to quickly browse to the files you are looking for.
Include Folders and Subfolders
Activate this to show the content of folders and subfolders.
Left Divider
Left Divider
Text Search
Search
Allows you to search media files by name or by attribute.
Media Types Filter

Select Media Types
Allows you to select the media types that are displayed on the Results page.
Rating Filter
Rating Filter
Filters files according to their rating.
445
MediaBay Window
Reset Result Filters

Reset Filters
Allows you to reset the filters.
Results
Update Results
Updates the results.
Shuffle Results
Shuffles the Results page.
Attribute Counter
Attribute Counter
Shows the number of attributes that are being updated.
Right Divider
Right Divider
MediaBay Settings
MediaBay Settings
Opens the MediaBay settings.

Show/Hide Left Zone
Show/Hide Lower Zone
Shows/Hides the lower zone of the window.
Show/Hide Right Zone
Shows/Hides the right zone of the window.
Set up Toolbar
446
MediaBay Window
Setting up the MediaBay

You can show and hide the different sections of the MediaBay. This saves screen space and
allows you to display only the information that you need.
PROCEDURE
1. Click Set up Window Layout.
2. Activate/Deactivate the checkboxes for the sections that you want to show/hide.
3. Click outside the pane to exit the setup mode.
File Browser Section

The File Browser section shows your file system with the pre-defined folders Favorites, This
Computer, VST Sound, Factory Content, and User Content.
● To open the File Browser section in the MediaBay, click Set up Window Layout and
activate File Browser.
To show the supported media files in the Results section of the MediaBay, you must scan all
folders that you want to include in the search.
You can also add favorite folders. All media files contained in a Favorite are automatically
scanned.
RELATED LINKS
Adding Favorites on page 448
Scanning Folders
To include specific folders in the MediaBay search, you must scan them.
PROCEDURE
1. In the File Browser section of the MediaBay, navigate to the folder that you want to
include in the scan.
2. Activate the checkbox for the folder to activate the scan.
RESULT
All files that are found in the scanned folder are shown in the Results list. The scan result is
saved in a database file.
447
MediaBay Window
The color of the checkmark helps you to identify which folders and subfolders are scanned:
● White indicates that all subfolders are included in the scan.
● Orange indicates that at least one subfolder is excluded from the scan.
The color of the folder indicates the state of the scan:
● Red indicates that a folder is currently being scanned.
● White indicates that all subfolders have been scanned.
● Yellow indicates that at least one subfolder is not yet scanned.
NOTE
Please wait until the MediaBay completes the scan to continue your work.
Adding Favorites
You can add favorite folders using the File Browser section.
PROCEDURE
1. In the File Browser section, navigate to the folder that you want to add as a favorite, and
select it.
2. Right-click the folder or the volume, and from the context menu, select Add Favorite.
3. In the Set Name dialog that opens, enter a name for the folder.
4. Click OK.
RESULT
● In the File Browser section, a new folder with the specified name is added to the
Favorites folder.
● In the Favorites section, the added favorite is available in the Select Defined Favorite
pop-up menu.
● In the Media rack in the right zone of the Project window, a new tile with the specified
name is added on the Favorites page.
NOTE
Favorites in the MediaBay window are not automatically scanned.

To remove a Favorite, select it in the Favorites tree of the File Browser section, open the
context menu and select Remove Favorite.
RELATED LINKS
Refresh Views
If you change already scanned folders by adding or removing files when Cubase is closed, you
must rescan the corresponding media folders. This also applies if you modified attributes of your
user content using another program.
If you have made changes to your content and want the changes to be displayed in the
MediaBay, you must refresh the views of the corresponding media folders.
● To refresh a folder, in the File Browser section of the MediaBay, right-click a folder, and
select Refresh Views.
448
MediaBay Window
● To display a new drive, in the File Browser section of the MediaBay, right-click the parent
node, and select Refresh Views. You can then scan the drive for media files.
● To update the scan state of the folders after modifying the volume database with another
program, right-click the volume database, and select Refresh Views.
Results Section
The Results list shows all media files that are found in the selected folder in the File Browser.
● To show media files in the Results section, you must select a scanned folder in the File
Browser section of the MediaBay.
NOTE
You can set the maximum number of files that are displayed in the Results list in the MediaBay
Settings.
Setting up the Results List Columns

For each media type, or for combinations of media types, you can specify the attribute columns
that are displayed in the Results list.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Results section, select the media types for which you want to make settings.
2. Click Set up Result Columns and do one of the following:
● To show specific columns, activate or deactivate the respective options on the
submenus.
● To remove all columns except Name, select Select None.
● To show the default columns, select Use Defaults.
● To show all columns with set attributes, select All Available.
449
MediaBay Window
NOTE
RELATED LINKS
Setting up the MediaBay on page 447
Managing Media Files in the Results List

● To move or copy a file from the Results list to another location, drag it to another folder in
the File Browser section.
● To change the order of the columns in the Results list, click a column header and drag that
header to another position.
● To delete a file, right-click it in the list and select Delete. The file is permanently deleted
from your computer.
IMPORTANT
If you delete a file using the File Explorer/macOS Finder, it is still displayed in the Results list,
although it is no longer available to the program. To remedy this, rescan the corresponding
folder.
Shuffling the Results List

You can display the Results list entries in a random order.
● To shuffle the Results list, click Shuffle Results in the MediaBay toolbar.
Finding the Location of a File

You can show the location of a file on your system in the File Explorer/macOS Finder.
NOTE
This function is not available for files which are part of a VST Sound archive.
PROCEDURE
● In the Results list, right-click a file, and select Show in Explorer/Reveal in Finder.
RESULT
The File Explorer/macOS Finder opens and the corresponding file is highlighted.
Filtering According to Media Type

You can set up the Results list to display only a particular media type or a combination of media
types.
PROCEDURE
1. In the MediaBay toolbar, open the Show Media Types selector.
450
MediaBay Window
2. Activate the media types that you want to be displayed in the Results list.
RESULT
The files are filtered by the selected media type.
Show Media Types Selector

You can activate the media types that you want to be displayed in the Results list.
The following media types are available:
Audio Files
Shows all audio files. The supported formats
are .wav, .w64, .aiff, .aifc, .rex, .rx2, .mp3, .mp2, .ogg, .wma (Windows only).
MIDI Files
Shows all MIDI files (file name extension .mid).
MIDI Loops
Shows all MIDI loops (file name extension .midiloop).
Track Presets
Shows all track presets for audio, MIDI, and instrument tracks (file name
extension .trackpreset). Track presets are a combination of track settings, effects,
and MixConsole settings that can be applied to new tracks of various types.
Plug-in Presets
Shows all VST presets for instrument and effect plug-ins. Furthermore, EQ presets
that you save in the MixConsole are listed. These presets contain all parameter
settings for a particular plug-in. They can be used to apply sounds to instrument
tracks and effects to audio tracks.
451
MediaBay Window
Strip Presets
Shows all strip presets (file name extension .strippreset). These presets contain
channel strip effect chains.
FX Chain Presets
Shows all effect chain presets (file name extension .fxchainpreset). These presets
contain insert effect chains.
Video Files
Shows all video files.
Projects
Shows all project files (.cpr).
RELATED LINKS
Saving/Loading Strip Presets on page 293
Saving/Loading EQ Presets on page 286
Saving/Loading FX Chain Presets on page 283
Filtering According to Rating

With the Rating Filter, you can filter files according to their rating.
NOTE
The Rating Filter is not available in the Media rack in the right zone.
PROCEDURE
● In the Rating Filter section of the MediaBay toolbar, select a value from the Rating Filter
pop-up menu.
Performing a Text Search

You can perform a text search of the Results list. If you enter text in the text search field on the
MediaBay toolbar, only media files whose attributes match the entered text are displayed.
● Click the field and enter the text that you want to find.
For example, if you are looking for all audio loops relating to drum sounds, enter “drum” in
the search field. The search results will contain loops called “Drums 01”, “Drumloop”,
“Snare Drum”, etc. In addition, all media files with the Drum&Percussion category
attribute or any other attribute that contains “drum” are found. You can also add
apostrophes to find exact matches for the entered words and use boolean operators.
● To reset the text search, delete the text, or click Reset Filters.
452
MediaBay Window
Boolean Text Search

You can perform advanced searches, using boolean operators or wildcards.
You can use the following elements:
And [+]
[a and b]
When entering strings separated by “and” (or a plus sign), all files are found that
contain both a and b.
[And] is the default setting when no boolean operator is used, for example, you can
also enter [a b].
Or [,]
[a or b]
When entering strings separated by “or” (or a comma), files are found that contain
either a or b, or both.
Not [-]
[not b]
When entering text preceded by “not” (or a minus sign), all files not containing b are
found.
Parentheses [()]
[(a or b) + c]
Using parentheses, you can group text strings. In this example, files are found that
contain c and either a or b.
Quotation marks [“”]

[“your search text”]
With quotation marks, you can define sequences of several words. Files are found if
they contain the sequence of words that you entered.
IMPORTANT
When you are searching for files whose names contain a hyphen, put the search text in quotation
marks. Otherwise the program treats the hyphen as the boolean operator “not”.
NOTE
These operators can also be used for logical filtering.
Resetting the Results List

You can reset all filter settings and filter results.
● In the MediaBay toolbar, click Reset Filter.
Previewer Section
You can preview individual files in the Previewer section to find out which one to use in your
project.
The elements visible in this section and their functions depend on the media type.
453
MediaBay Window
IMPORTANT
The Previewer section is not available for video files, project files, and audio track presets.
RELATED LINKS
MediaBay Settings on page 464
Audio Files Previewer

The Previewer for audio files allows you to listen to audio files before you use them in your
project.
1 Transport controls
Start, stop, pause, and cycle the preview.
2 Preview Level fader
Specifies the preview level.
3 Auto Play New Results Selection
Automatically plays back the selected file.
4 Align Beats to Project
Plays back the selected file in sync with the project, starting at the project cursor position.
Note that this can apply real-time time stretching to your audio file.
NOTE
If you import an audio file into your project for which Align Beats to Project is activated in
the Previewer, Musical Mode is automatically activated for the corresponding event.
5 Wait for Project Play

Synchronizes the play and stop functions from the Transport panel with the play and stop
buttons in the Previewer section.
To use this option to its full extent, set the left locator at the beginning of a bar, then start
playing back the project using the Transport panel. The loops that you now select in the
Results list start together with the project in perfect sync.
RELATED LINKS
MIDI Files Previewer

The Previewer for MIDI files allows you to listen to MIDI files before you use them in your
project.
● To preview a MIDI file, load a VST instrument, and select it as output device from the
Select MIDI Output pop-up menu.
454
MediaBay Window
Start and stop the preview.
3 Output
Allows you to select the output device.
4 Align Beats to Project
Plays back the selected file in sync with the project, starting at the project cursor position.
Note that this can apply real-time time stretching to your MIDI file.
RELATED LINKS
MIDI Loops Previewer

The Previewer for MIDI loops allows you to listen to MIDI loops before you use them in your
project.
NOTE
MIDI loops are always played back in sync with the project.
4 Link Playback to Chord Track
Transposes the events of the MIDI loop to play back in context with the chord track. Note
that you need a chord track with chord events for this.
If this option is activated, and you insert a MIDI loop into the project, Follow Chord Track
is automatically activated for the track.
RELATED LINKS
Using Follow Chord Track on page 645
455
MediaBay Window
VST Presets and Track Presets Previewer for MIDI and Instrument Tracks
The Previewer for VST presets and track presets allows you to listen to presets before you use
them in your project.
● To preview track presets for MIDI or instrument tracks and VST presets, you must send
some MIDI notes to the track preset via MIDI input, using a MIDI file, the Memo Recorder
mode, or via the computer keyboard.
2 Previewer Sequence Mode
Allows you to load a MIDI file to apply the selected preset to the MIDI file. You can also
select the Memo Recorder mode that continually repeats a given sequence of notes as a
loop.
3 MIDI Activity
Allows you to monitor incoming MIDI messages.
5 Keyboard
You can display the Keyboard in keyboard display mode or in piano display mode.
6 Computer Keyboard Input
Allows you to use your computer keyboard to preview the presets.
RELATED LINKS
Previewing Presets Using the Memo Recorder Mode on page 457
On-Screen Keyboard on page 191
Previewing Presets Via MIDI Input

MIDI input is always active. For example, when a MIDI keyboard is connected to your computer
and set up properly, you can directly start playing the notes to preview the selected preset.
Previewing Presets Using a MIDI File
PROCEDURE
1. On the Previewer Sequence Mode pop-up menu, select Load MIDI File.
2. In the file dialog that opens, select a MIDI file and click Open.
The name of the MIDI file is displayed on the pop-up menu.
3. Click Play to the left of the pop-up menu.
RESULT
The notes received from the MIDI file are played back with the settings of the track preset
applied.
456
MediaBay Window
NOTE
The recently used MIDI files are kept on the menu for quick access. To remove an entry from this
list, select it on the menu and then select Remove MIDI File.
Previewing Presets Using the Memo Recorder Mode

The Memo Recorder mode continually repeats a given sequence of notes as a loop.
NOTE
You cannot use the Memo Recorder mode when previewing presets using a MIDI file.
PROCEDURE
1. On the Previewer Sequence Mode pop-up menu, select Memo Recorder.
2. Activate Play.
3. Play some notes on the MIDI keyboard or on the computer keyboard.
RESULT
The notes are played back with the instrument preset that is selected in the Results section.
When you stop playing notes and wait for 2 seconds, the note sequence that you played until this
moment is played back in a continuous loop.
To use another sequence, start entering notes again.
Previewing Presets Via the Computer Keyboard

NOTE
If you activate Computer Keyboard Input, the computer keyboard is used exclusively for the
Previewer section. However, you can still use the following key commands: Ctrl/Cmd-S (Save),
Num * (Start/Stop Record), Space (Start/Stop Playback), Num 1 (Jump to left locator), Delete or
Backspace, Num / (Cycle on/off), and F2 (Show/Hide Transport panel).
PROCEDURE
1. Activate Computer-Keyboard Input.
2. Play some notes on the computer keyboard.
Filters Section
The MediaBay allows you to refine your file searches.
Media File Attributes

Media file attributes are sets of metadata providing additional information on the file.
The different types of media files have different attributes. For example, .wav audio files have
attributes, such as name, length, size, sample rate, content set, etc., while .mp3 files have
additional attributes, such as artist or genre.
457
MediaBay Window
Attribute Filter
Assigning attribute values to your files facilitates organizing your media files. The Attribute filter
allows you to view and edit some of the standard file attributes that are found in your media files.
The Filters section displays all values that have been specified for the displayed attribute
categories. Selecting one of these values filters the results to display only the files to which this
attribute value is assigned.
1 Attribute column titles

Allow you to select different attribute categories. If the columns are wide enough, the
number of files that match these criteria is displayed to the right of the value.
2 Attribute values
Displays the attribute values and how often a certain attribute value is available among
your media files.
NOTE
● Some attributes are directly linked to each other. For example, for each category value,
there are certain sub-category values available. Changing the value in one of these
attribute columns displays different values in the other column.
● Each attribute column displays only the attribute values that are found.
Applying an Attribute Filter

With the Attribute filter, you can quickly find tagged media files with certain attributes.
● To apply an Attribute filter, select an attribute value.

The Results list is filtered accordingly. Apply more attribute filters to narrow down the
result even more.
● To find files that match either one or the other attribute, Ctrl/Cmd-click different attribute
values in the same column.
● To change the displayed attribute values of a column, click the attribute column title and
select another attribute.
NOTE
Character attributes always form an AND condition.
Performing a Context Menu Search

You can search for other files that have the same attribute as the selected file. This allows you to
find all the files that have a value in common, for example, if you want to view all the files that
were created on the same day.
● In the Results list or the Attribute Inspector, right-click a file and select the attribute
value for which you want to search from the Search for submenu.
458
MediaBay Window
● To reset the filter, click Go Back.
Resetting the Filter

PROCEDURE
● To reset the filter, click Reset Filter at the top of the Filters section.
This also resets the Results list.
Working with the MediaBay

When you work with many music files, the MediaBay helps you to find and organize your
content. After scanning your folders, all found media files of the supported formats are listed in
the Results section.
You can set up Favorites, that is, folders or directories on your system that contain media files.
Usually, files are organized in a specific way on your computer. You might have folders reserved
for audio content, folders for special effects, folders for combinations of sounds making up the
ambience noise that you need for a certain film take, etc. These can all be set as different
Favorites in the MediaBay, allowing you to limit the files available in the Results list according
to context.
By using the search and filter options, you can narrow down the results.
You can insert the files into your project by using drag and drop, by double-clicking, or by using
the context menu options.
Using Media Files

The MediaBay window and the Media rack in the right zone of the Project window offer you
multiple possibilities to search for specific files, loops, samples, presets, and patterns that you
can use in your project.
Once you have found the media files that you were looking for, you can load them into your
project.
Loading Loops and Samples
PROCEDURE
459
MediaBay Window
● In the MediaBay, open the media types selector, click MIDI Files, Audio Files, or
MIDI Loops, and select a media file.
● In the Media rack in the right zone, click the Loops & Samples tile, and click the
following tiles until you can select the media files in the Results list.
● Double-click a media file to create a new instrument or an audio track with the
loaded file.
● Drag the media file to a track in the event display.
RESULT
The media file is inserted on the new track or at the insert position.
RELATED LINKS
Show Media Types Selector on page 451
Loading Track Presets
PROCEDURE
● In the MediaBay, open the media types selector, click Track Presets, and select a
preset.
● In the Media rack in the right zone, click Presets > Track Presets, and click the
following tiles until you can select the preset in the Results list.
● Double-click the track preset to create a new track with the loaded preset.
● Drag the track preset to a track to apply the preset to the track.
RESULT
The preset is applied to the track, and all settings of the preset are loaded.
RELATED LINKS
Loading Instrument Presets
PROCEDURE
● In the MediaBay, open the media types selector, click Plug-in Presets, and select a
preset for an instrument plug-in.
● In the Media rack in the right zone, click the VST Instruments tile, and click the
● Double-click the instrument preset to create a new instrument track with the loaded
instrument preset.
● Drag the instrument preset to the track list to create a new instrument track with
the loaded instrument preset.
● Drag the instrument preset to the event display to create a new instrument track
with the loaded instrument preset.
460
MediaBay Window
● Drag the instrument preset to an instrument track to apply the preset to the track.
RESULT
The instrument is loaded as a track instrument, and the preset is applied to the instrument track.
RELATED LINKS
Adding VST Instruments to Projects on page 441
Loading Effect Plug-In Presets
PROCEDURE
● In the MediaBay, open the media types selector, click Plug-in Presets, and select a
preset.
● In the Media rack in the right zone, click Presets > VST FX Presets, and click the
● Drag the plug-in preset to an audio track or its Inserts section in the Inspector.
● Drag the plug-in preset to an empty area of the track list.
RESULT
If you dragged the plug-in preset to an audio track, the first free insert slots are filled with the
corresponding plug-in. If there are no more free slots available, a warning is shown.
If you dragged the plug-in preset to an empty area of the track list, a new FX channel track is
created and the first insert slots of this new track are filled.
RELATED LINKS
Adding VST Effects to Projects on page 441
Loading FX Chain Presets
PROCEDURE
● In the MediaBay, open the media types selector, click FX Chain Presets, and select
a preset.
● In the Media rack in the right zone, click Presets > FX Chain Presets, and click the
3. Drag the preset from the MediaBay or Media rack and drop it on the open Inserts section
of the Inspector.
RESULT
The FX Chain Preset is applied to the track, and all settings of the preset are loaded. Any inserts
that have previously been loaded are overwritten.
RELATED LINKS
461
Working with Volume Databases
Loading Strip Presets
PROCEDURE
● In the MediaBay, open the media types selector, click Strip Presets, and select a
preset.
● In the Media rack in the right zone, click Presets > Strip Presets, and click the
3. Drag the preset from the MediaBay or Media rack and drop it on the open Strip section of
the Inspector.
RESULT
The strip preset is applied to the track, and all settings of the preset are loaded.
RELATED LINKS
Saving/Loading Strip Presets on page 293

Cubase saves all media file information that is used in the MediaBay, such as paths and
attributes, in a local database file on your computer. However, in some cases, it might be
necessary to browse and manage this kind of metadata on an external volume.
For example, a sound editor might have to work both at home and in a studio, on two different
computers. Therefore, the sound effects are stored on an external storage medium. To be able to
connect the external device and directly browse its contents in the MediaBay without having to
scan the device, you have to create a volume database for the external device.
Volume databases can be created for your computer drives or for external storage media. They
contain the same kind of information about the media files on these drives as the regular
MediaBay database.
NOTE
When you launch Cubase, all available volume databases are automatically mounted. Databases
that are made available while the program is running have to be mounted manually.
Rescanning Volume Databases

If you have modified the data on your external volume on a different system, you must rescan
the MediaBay.
RELATED LINKS
Refresh Views on page 448
Creating Volume Databases

PROCEDURE
● In the File Browser section, right-click the external storage medium, drive, or partition of
your computer system for which you want to create a database, and select Create Volume
Database.
462
IMPORTANT
You must select the topmost directory level for this. You cannot create a database file for a
lower-level folder.
NOTE
If you create a volume database on a network drive, multiple users can access it. However,
this can lead to write conflicts as only one user can write to the database at a time.
RESULT
The file information for this drive is written into a new database file. Volume databases are
indicated by the symbol to the left of the drive name.
NOTE
If the drive contains a large amount of data, this process may take some time.
Volume databases are automatically mounted when Cubase is launched. They are shown in the
File Browser section and their data can be viewed and edited in the Results list.
RELATED LINKS
Locked Volume Databases on Network Drives on page 463
Locked Volume Databases on Network Drives

You can unlock volume databases on network drives. This can be necessary, if the system of
another user who also used the volume database on the network drive crashed or was not
properly disconnected. In this case, Cubase creates a file in a hidden folder that indicates that the
database is still in use.
If this happens, you get a warning message when you launch the program. It shows the name of
the user or system.
● Ask the other user to restart Cubase so that the lock is automatically released.
● If you cannot get hold of the other user, and you do not need to access the database, click
Ignore Database.
● If you cannot get hold of the other user, and you want to use the database, click Force
unlock to remove the lock.
463
MediaBay Settings
Removing Volume Databases

If you have worked on another computer using an external hard disk and return to your own
computer and connect the external device again as part of your system setup, you no longer
need a separate volume database for it. Any data on this drive can be included in the local
database file again, by removing the extra database file.
PROCEDURE
● In the File Browser section, right-click the volume database and select Remove Volume
Database.
RESULT
The metadata is integrated in the local MediaBay database file, and the volume database file is
deleted.
NOTE
If the drive contains a large amount of data, this process may take some time.
Mounting and Unmounting Volume Databases

Volume databases that are made available while Cubase is running must be mounted manually.
● To mount a volume database manually, right-click the external storage medium, drive, or
partition of your computer system that you want to mount and select Mount Volume
Database.
● To unmount a volume database, right-click it and select Unmount Volume Database.
MediaBay Settings
● To open a pane with settings for the MediaBay, click MediaBay Settings.
Hide Folders That Are Not Scanned

Hides all folders that are not scanned for files. This keeps the tree view in the File
Browser less cluttered.
Show Only Selected Folder

Shows only the selected folder and its subfolders.
Scan Folders Only When MediaBay Is Open

Scans folders for media files when the MediaBay window is open.
If this option is deactivated, the folders are scanned in the background even when
the MediaBay window is closed. However, Cubase never scans folders while playing
back or recording.
Maximum Items in Results List

Allows you to specify the maximum number of files that are displayed in the Results
list. This avoids unmanageably long lists of files.
NOTE
The MediaBay does not warn you if the maximum number of files has been reached.
There might be situations where a certain file cannot be found because the
maximum number of files was reached.
464
MediaBay Settings
Show File Extensions in Results List

Shows file name extensions in the Results list.
Scan Unknown File Types

When scanning for media files, the MediaBay ignores files with an unknown file
extension. If this option is activated, the MediaBay tries to open and scan any file in
the search location and ignores those files that cannot be recognized.
465
Automation
In essence, automation means recording the values for a particular MixConsole or effect
parameter. When you create your final mix, Cubase can adjust this particular parameter control.
Recording your Actions

If the settings in your current project are crucial, you may not want to experiment with
automation until you know more about how it all fits together. If so, you can create a new project
for the following example. The project does not have to contain any audio events, just a few
audio tracks.
PROCEDURE
1. On the Project window toolbar, click W to activate write for all tracks.
2. Start playback and adjust some volume faders and/or other parameter settings in the
MixConsole.
Stop playback when you are done, and return to the position where you started playback.
3. Click W to deactivate the write mode and click R to activate read for all tracks.
4. Start playback, and watch the MixConsole.
All your actions that were performed during the previous playback are reproduced exactly.
5. Select Project > Show All Used Automation to view all recorded automation events.
6. To redo anything that was recorded, click W again and start playback from the same
position.
NOTE
You can have W and R activated simultaneously, if you want to watch and listen to your
recorded MixConsole actions while you are recording fader movements for another
channel, etc.
Automation Curves
Within a Cubase project, the changes in a parameter value over time are reflected as curves on
automation tracks.
There are different kinds of automation curves:
1 Ramp curves
Ramp curves are created for any parameter that generates continuous multiple values,
such as fader or encoder movements.
466
Automation
Static Value Line
2 Step curves
Step curves are created for on/off parameters, such as mute.
Static Value Line

When you open an automation track for the first time, it does not contain any automation events.
This is reflected in the event display as a dotted horizontal line, the static value line. This line
represents the current parameter setting.
If you manually added any automation events or used write automation for the corresponding
parameter and then disable the reading of automation data, the automation curve is grayed out
in the event display and the static value line is used instead.
As soon as Read is enabled, the automation curve is used.
Write/Read Automation
You can automation-enable tracks and MixConsole channels by activating their automation write
W and read R buttons.
● If you activate W for a channel, virtually all MixConsole parameters that you adjust during
playback for that specific channel are recorded as automation events.
● If R is activated for a channel, all your recorded MixConsole actions for that channel are
performed during playback.
The R and W buttons for a track in the track list are the same as the R and W buttons in the
MixConsole.
NOTE
R is automatically enabled when you enable W. This allows Cubase to read existing automation
data at any time. You can separately deactivate W if you only want to read existing data.
There are also global read and write indicator buttons Activate/Deactivate Read/Write for All
Tracks on the Project window toolbar and the MixConsole toolbar. These buttons light up as
soon as there is an enabled R or W button on any channel/track within your project.
Furthermore, they can be clicked to activate or deactivate R/W of all tracks simultaneously.
Writing Automation Data

You can create automation curves manually or automatically.
● Manual writing makes it easy to quickly change parameter values at specific points without
having to activate playback.
● Automatic writing lets you work almost as if you were using a real mixer.
With both methods, any applied automation data is reflected in both the MixConsole by a moved
fader, for example, and in the corresponding automation track curve.
RELATED LINKS
Manual Writing of Automation Data on page 468
467
Automation
Automatic Writing of Automation Data

Every action that you perform is automatically recorded on automation tracks which you can
later open for viewing and editing.
PROCEDURE
1. In the track list, click Show/Hide Automation for a track to open its automation track.
2. Click W to enable the writing of automation data on this track.

3. Start playback.
4. Adjust the parameters in the MixConsole, in the Channel Settings window, or on the
effect control panel.
The value settings are recorded and displayed as a curve on the automation tracks. When
automation data is being written, the color of the automation track changes and the delta
indicator in the automation track shows the relative amount by which the new parameter
setting deviates from any previously automated value.
5. Stop playback and return to the position where you started playback.
6. Click W to disable the writing of automation data.
7. Start playback.
RESULT
All actions that you recorded are reproduced exactly. When you drag a plug-in to a different
insert slot on the same channel, any existing automation data moves with the plug-in. When you
drag it to an insert slot on a different channel, any existing automation data is not transferred to
the new channel.
Manual Writing of Automation Data

You can add automation events manually by drawing automation curves on an automation track.
PROCEDURE
1. In the track list, click Show/Hide Automation for a track to open its automation track.
2. Click the automation parameter name and select the parameter from the pop-up menu.
3. Select the Draw tool.
4. Click on the static value line.
An automation event is added, read automation mode is automatically activated, and the
static value line changes to a colored automation curve.
5. Click and hold to draw a curve by adding many automation events.
When you release the mouse button, the number of automation events is reduced.
NOTE
To adjust the thinning out of events, open the Automation Panel, open the Settings
page, and enter a value for Reduction Level.
6. Start playback.
468
Automation
RESULT
The automated parameter changes with the automation curve, and the corresponding fader in
the MixConsole moves accordingly.
Repeat the procedure if you are not happy with the result. If you draw over existing events, a new
curve is created.
Tools for Drawing Automation Data

Apart from the Draw tool, you can use the Object Selection tool and the Line tool to draw
automation events. If you click with any of these tools on the automation track, R is activated
automatically.
● Object Selection
If you click on an automation track with the Object Selection tool, an automation event is
added. If you hold down Alt/Opt, you can draw several automation events.
NOTE
Events that are introduced between existing events and do not deviate from the existing
curve are removed as soon as you release the mouse button.
To activate the Line tool in any other available mode, click the Line tool and click again to open a
pop-up menu where you can select the Line tool mode.
The following Line tool modes are available:
Line
If you click on the automation track and drag with the Line tool in Line mode, you
can create automation events in a line. This is a quick way to create linear fades, etc.
Parabola
If you click and drag on the automation track with the Line tool in Parabola mode,
you can create more natural curves and fades.
NOTE
The result depends on the direction from which you draw the parabolic curve.
Sine/Triangle/Square
If you click and drag on the automation track with the Line tool in Sine, Triangle, or
Square mode and the Snap Type is set to Grid, the period of the curve, that is, the
length of one curve cycle, is determined by the grid setting. If you press Shift and
drag, you can set the period length manually, in multiples of the grid value.
NOTE
The Line tool can only be used for ramp type automation curves.
469
Automation
Editing Automation Events

Automation events can be edited much like other events.
NOTE
If you move an event or part on a track and you want the automation events to follow
automatically, select Edit > Automation Follows Events. Any automation events at the new
position are overwritten.
● You can use the tools on the Project window toolbar to edit automation events.
● You can use the automation event editor to edit selected automation events on ramp
automation curves.
RELATED LINKS
Automation Event Editor on page 471
Creating Smooth Transitions Between Automation Events (Bézier

Automation Curves)
Cubase supports bézier automation curves that allow you to create smooth transitions between
automation events. This way, you can edit linear ramp curves with much more precision,
flexibility, and intuition.
PREREQUISITE
The Object Selection tool is active.
PROCEDURE
1. Move the mouse pointer on the linear ramp curve segment that you want to edit.
A handle is shown on the curve segment.
NOTE
If the automation events are next to each other on an almost horizontal or vertical line, or
if they are too close to each other, the handle is not available.
2. Click and drag with the mouse button pressed to modify the shape of the curve segment.
3. When you are satisfied with the result, release the mouse button.
RESULT
A smooth transition curve according to your edits is created.
If you are not satisfied with the result and want to start over again from the original linear curve
segment, double-click the handle.
For even more precise editing, add new automation events to your bézier curve segment.
470
Automation
This creates new segments that you can smoothen.
Selecting Automation Events

● To select an automation event, click it with the Object Selection tool.
● To select multiple events, drag a selection rectangle with the Object Selection tool or
Shift-click the events.
● To select multiple events, select a range with the Range Selection tool or Shift-click the
events.
● To select all automation events on an automation track, right-click the automation track
and select Select All Events from the context menu.
Selected events are indicated by a dark color.
NOTE
If you select several events of a ramp automation curve, the automation event editor becomes
available.
RELATED LINKS
Automation Event Editor on page 471
Automation Event Editor

The automation event editor allows you to edit selected events on the automation track. The
automation event editor is only available for automation ramp curves.
NOTE
All editing in the automation event editor only affects the automation events that are part of the
selection.
To open the automation event editor, do one of the following:
● Activate the Object Selection tool and drag a selection rectangle on a ramp type
automation track.
● Activate the Range Selection tool and select a range on a ramp type automation track.
NOTE
If you work with the Range Selection tool, the smart control for Stretch is not available.
The automation event editor features the following smart controls for specific editing modes:
471
Automation
1 Tilt Left
If you click in the upper left corner of the editor, you can tilt the left part of the curve. This
allows you to tilt the event values at the start of the curve upwards or downwards.
2 Compress Left
If you Alt/Opt-click in the upper left corner of the editor, you can compress or expand the
left part of the curve. This allows you to compress or expand the event values at the start
of the curve.
3 Scale Vertically
If you click in the middle of the upper border of the editor, you can scale the curve
vertically. This allows you to raise or lower the event values of the curve in percent.
4 Move Vertically
If you click on the upper border of the editor, you can move the entire curve vertically. This
allows you to raise or lower the values of the event values of the curve.
5 Compress Right
If you Alt/Opt-click in the upper right corner of the editor, you can compress or expand
the right part of the curve. This allows you to compress or expand the event values at the
end of the curve.
6 Tilt Right
If you click in the upper right corner of the editor, you can tilt the right part of the curve.
This allows you to tilt the event values at the end of the curve upwards or downwards.
7 Scale Around Relative Center
If you Alt/Opt-click in the middle right border of the editor, you can scale the curve relative
to its center. This allows you to raise or lower the event values horizontally around the
center of the editor.
8 Scale Around Absolute Center
If you click in the middle right corner of the editor, you can scale the curve absolute to its
center. This allows you to raise or lower the event values horizontally around the center of
the editor.
9 Stretch
If you click on the lower border of the editor, you can stretch the curve horizontally. This
allows you to move the event values of the curve to the left or to the right.
NOTE
To edit the automation curves on several tracks simultaneously, select the automation events
using the Object Selection tool or the Range Selection tool on the corresponding automation
tracks, and hold down Ctrl/Cmd while using the smart controls.
NOTE
If you select automation events using the Range Selection tool, additional automation events
are automatically created at the start and the end of the selection. This ensures that the entire
selection is edited.
472
Automation
RELATED LINKS
Automation Curves on page 466
Quick Vertical Scaling of Automation Events

You can scale the curve segment between two automation events vertically without any need to
select the events first.
PROCEDURE
1. Move the mouse pointer to the upper border of the automation track above the linear
ramp curve segment that you want to scale.
A handle is shown.
2. Click and drag up or down with the mouse button pressed.

3. When you are satisfied with the result, release the mouse button.
RESULT
The curve segment between the two automation events is scaled.
Moving Automation Events

Moving Single Automation Events
● To move a selected automation event, click it and drag to the left or to the right.
● To restrict the direction of the movement, press Ctrl/Cmd and drag.
NOTE
Snap is taken into account when you move automation curves horizontally. To turn it off
temporarily, hold down Ctrl/Cmd and any other modifier, and drag.
Moving Multiple Automation Events

● To move a selection of automation events, click inside the selection rectangle and drag to
the left or to the right.
If you made a continuous selection of automation events, events at the destination range
are overwritten. However, if you move the same selection range past already existing
events, they appear again. If a selection range contains automation events that are
deselected, dragging is restricted. You cannot move this selection past existing events.
● To copy a continuous selection of automation events, click inside the selection rectangle,
hold down Alt/Opt, and drag to the left or to the right.
NOTE
If you press Esc while dragging the selection rectangle, the selection jumps back to its original
position.
RELATED LINKS
Selecting Automation Events on page 471
473
Automation
Automation Tracks
Removing Automation Events

● To remove an automation event, click on it with the Erase tool.
● To remove multiple automation events, select them and press Backspace or Delete or
select Edit > Delete.
● To remove all automation events from the automation track and close the automation
track, click the automation parameter name in the track list and select Remove Parameter
NOTE
When removing automation events, the curve is redrawn to connect the remaining events.
Automation Tracks
Most of the tracks in your project have automation tracks, one for each automated parameter.
To show automation tracks, you must open them.
Showing/Hiding Automation Tracks

● Position the mouse pointer over the lower left corner of the track and click the arrow icon
(Show/Hide Automation) that appears.
● Right-click the track in the track list and select Show/Hide Automation from the context
menu.
● To open another automation track, position the mouse pointer over the lower left corner
of an automation track and click + (Append Automation Track).
● To show all used automation tracks in the track list, right-click any track and select Show
All Used Automation from the context menu.
● To open the corresponding automation track on writing automation parameters, activate
Show Automation Track in Project on Writing Parameter in the Preferences dialog
(Editing page).
Removing Automation Tracks

● To remove an automation track together with all automation events, click the parameter
name, and from the pop-up menu, select Remove Parameter.
● To remove all automation tracks from a track that do not contain automation events, select
Remove Unused Parameters from any of its automation parameter name pop-up menus.
Assigning a Parameter to an Automation Track

Parameters are already assigned to automation tracks when you open them, according to their
order in the parameter list.
PROCEDURE
1. Open an automation track and click on the automation parameter name.
A parameter list is shown. The content depends on the track type.
2. From the pop-up menu, select the parameter or select More to open the Add Parameter
dialog that lists all parameters that can be automated, and select the parameter there.
RESULT
The parameter replaces the current parameter in the automation track.
474
Automation
Automation Tracks
NOTE
The replacement of the automation parameter is non-destructive. If the automation track

contains any automation data for the parameter that you just replaced, this data is there,
although it is not visible. By clicking on the automation parameter name in the track list, you can
switch back to the replaced parameter. On the pop-up menu, an asterisk (*) is shown after the
parameter name for hidden automation tracks.
Muting Automation Tracks

By muting an automation track, you turn off automation for a single parameter.
● To mute individual automation tracks, click Mute Automation in the track list.
475
VST Instruments
VST instruments are software synthesizers or other sound sources that are contained within
Cubase. They are played internally via MIDI. You can add effects or EQ to VST instruments.
Cubase allows you to make use of VST instruments in the following ways:
● By adding a VST instrument and assigning one or several MIDI tracks to it.
● By creating an instrument track.
This is a combination of a VST instrument, an instrument channel, and a MIDI track. You
play and record MIDI note data directly for this track.
NOTE
Some VST instruments are included with Cubase. These are described in the separate document
Plug-in Reference.
RELATED LINKS
Instrument Tracks on page 99
Adding VST Instruments

PROCEDURE
1. On the Studio menu, select VST Instruments.
2. Right-click on an empty area of the VST Instruments window.
3. From the context menu, select Add Rack Instrument.
4. From the instrument selector, select an instrument.
5. Click Create.
RESULT
The instrument control panel opens, and the following tracks are added to the track list:
● A MIDI track with the name of the instrument. The output of the MIDI track is routed to
the instrument.
NOTE
In the Preferences dialog (VST—Plug-ins page), you can specify what happens when you
load a VST instrument.
● A folder with the name of the instrument that is added within a VST Instruments folder.
The instrument folder contains two automation tracks: one for the plug-in parameters and
one for the synth channel in the MixConsole.
476
VST Instruments
VST Instrument Control Panel

The VST instrument control panel allows you to set up the parameters of the selected instrument.
The contents, design, and layout of the control panel depend on the selected instrument.
1 Activate Instrument
Activates/Deactivates the instrument.
Allows you to read/write automation for the instrument parameter settings.
3 Switch between A/B Settings
Switches to setting B when setting A is active, and to setting A when setting B is active.
4 Apply current settings to A and B
Copies the instrument parameters of instrument setting A to instrument setting B, and
vice versa.
5 Activate/Deactivate Side-Chaining
Activates the side-chain functionality for VST 3 instruments that support side-chaining.
6 Set up Side-Chain Routing
Allows you to set up the side-chain routing for the selected plug-in.
7 Event Received Indicator
Lights up on receiving note-on and controller messages.
8 Preset browser
Opens the preset browser where you can select another preset.
9 Load previous Program/Load next Program
Loads the previous/next program in the preset browser.
477
VST Instruments
10 Preset Management
Opens a pop-up menu that allows you to save, rename, or remove a preset.
11 Add VST Plug-in Picture to Media Rack
Adds a picture of the VST plug-in to the Media rack. This is only available for plug-ins of
other vendors.
12 VST Instrument context menu
Opens a context menu with specific functions and settings.
RELATED LINKS
Adding Pictures of VST Instruments to the Media Rack on page 443
VST Instrument Context Menu on page 482
Hiding/Showing VST Instrument Control Panels on page 478
Side-Chaining for VST Instruments on page 491
Hiding/Showing VST Instrument Control Panels

When you add a VST instrument, the respective plug-in control panel opens automatically. You
can hide the control panels from view. This is useful to get a better overview if you added a
number of plug-ins to your project whose control panels clutter up the screen.
PROCEDURE
● Select Window > Hide Plug-in Windows.
NOTE
This also hides VST effect control panels.
RESULT
The plug-in windows are hidden and sent to the back of the application. To show them again,
select Show Plug-in Windows.
RELATED LINKS
Closing All Control Panels

When you add a VST instrument, the respective plug-in control panel opens automatically. You
can close all control panels at once.
PROCEDURE
● Select Window > Close All Plug-in Windows.
NOTE
This also closes VST effect control panels.
RESULT
The control panels are closed.
RELATED LINKS
478
VST Instruments
VST Instrument Selector
VST Instrument Selector

The VST instrument selector allows you to select VST instruments of the active collection.
To open the VST instrument selector, do one of the following:
● Select Studio > VST Instruments, and click Add Rack Instrument.
● Select Studio > VST Instruments, click Add Track Instrument, and open the Instrument
pop-up menu.
1 Expand Tree/Collapse Tree

Expands/Collapses the tree.
2 Search VST Instrument
Allows you to search for VST instruments by typing in the name or parts of the name or the
category.
Allows you to select a collection.
If you select the Default collection, the options Sort By Category and Sort by Vendor
become available. These allow you to sort the default collection.
Creating Instrument Tracks

You can create instrument tracks that hold dedicated VST instruments.
PROCEDURE
2. Click Instrument.
3. Open the Instrument pop-up menu and select a VST instrument.
4. Click Add Track.
RESULT
The selected VST instrument is loaded for the instrument track. In the MixConsole, an
instrument channel is added.
VST Instruments in the Right Zone

The VST Instruments in the right zone of the Project window allow you to add VST instruments
for MIDI and instrument tracks.
All instruments that are used in your project are shown. You can access up to 8 quick controls for
each added instrument.
To open the VST Instruments in the right zone, click Show/Hide Right Zone on the Project
window toolbar, and at the top of the right zone, click the VSTi tab.
479
VST Instruments
VST Instruments Window
NOTE
The VST Instruments in the right zone are just another representation of the VST Instruments
window. All features are the same.
RELATED LINKS
Showing/Hiding Zones on page 31
VST Instruments Window

The VST Instruments window allows you to add VST instruments for MIDI and instrument
tracks.
All instruments that are used in your project are shown. You can access up to 8 quick controls for
each added instrument.
To open the VST Instruments window, select Studio > VST Instruments.
RELATED LINKS
Instrument Tracks on page 99
VST Instruments Window Toolbar

The VST Instruments window toolbar contains controls that allow you to add and set up VST
instruments and VST Quick Controls.
Add Track Instrument
Opens the Add Track dialog that allows you to select an instrument and add an
instrument track that is associated to this instrument.
480
VST Instruments
VST Instrument Controls
Find Instruments
Opens a selector that allows you to find a loaded instrument.
Set Remote-Control Focus for VST Quick Controls to Previous Instrument
Allows you to set the remote-control focus to the previous instrument.
Set Remote-Control Focus for VST Quick Controls to Next Instrument
Allows you to set the remote-control focus to the next instrument.
Show/Hide all VST Quick Controls
Shows/Hides the default quick controls for all loaded instruments.
Settings
Opens the Settings pop-up menu where you can activate/deactivate the following
modes:
● Show VST Quick Controls for One Slot Only shows the VST Quick Controls
exclusively for the selected instrument.
● MIDI Channel follows track selection ensures that the Channel selector
follows the MIDI track selection in the Project window. Use this mode if you
work with multitimbral instruments.
● Remote-Control Focus for VST Quick Controls follows track selection
ensures that the VST Quick Controls remote-control focus follows the track
selection.

The VST instrument controls allow you to make settings for a loaded VST instrument.
The following controls are available on each instrument:
1 Activate Instrument
Activates/Deactivates the instrument.
2 Edit Instrument
Opens the instrument panel.
3 Freeze Instrument
Freezes the instrument. This allows you to save CPU power.
4 Instrument selector
Allows you to select another instrument. Double-click to rename the instrument. The name
is shown in the window in the Output Routing pop-up menu for MIDI tracks. This is useful
when you work with several instances of the same instrument.
5 Preset Browser
Allows you to load or save an instrument preset.
481
VST Instruments
6 Input Options
This lights up when MIDI data is received by the instrument. Click this button to open a
pop-up menu that allows you to select, mute/unmute, and solo/unsolo for tracks that send
MIDI to the instrument (inputs).
NOTE
If you resize the VST Instruments window, you can access this option by using an Input/
Output Options pop-up menu.
7 Activate Outputs
This control is only available if the instrument provides more than one output. It allows
you to activate one or more outputs for the instrument.
NOTE
If you resize the VST Instruments window, you can access this option by using an Input/
Output Options pop-up menu.

Allows you to read/write automation for the instrument parameter settings.
9 Select Quick Control Layer
RELATED LINKS
Freezing Instruments on page 486
VST Instrument Context Menu

The VST instrument control panel context menu and the Functions menu on the VST instrument
control panel show functions and settings that are specific for the instrument.
● Right-click an empty area of the VST instrument control panel.

● Open the Functions pop-up menu on the VST instrument control panel.
The following functions are available:
Copy <VST instrument name> Setting/Paste <VST instrument name> Setting

Allows you to copy the instrument settings and paste them to another instrument.
Load Preset/Save Preset

Allows you to load/save a preset.
Default Preset
Allows you to define and save a default preset.
Switch to A Setting/Switch to B Setting

Switches to setting B when setting A is active, and to setting A when setting B is
active.
Apply Current Settings to A/Apply Current Settings to B

Copies the instrument parameters of instrument setting A to instrument setting B,
and vice versa.
Activate Outputs
Allows you to activate one or more outputs for the instrument.
482
VST Instruments
Presets for Instruments
Activates/Deactivates side-chaining for the instrument.
NOTE
This option is only available for VST 3 instruments that support side-chaining.

Opens the Remote Control Editor.
Switch to Generic Editor

Opens the generic editor for the instrument.
Allow Window to be Resized

Allows the dynamic resizing of third-party plug-in windows in Cubase. This is useful if
you activated Enable HiDPI (Windows only) in the Preferences dialog (General
page), and your plug-in does not support dpi settings.
NOTE
Allow Window to be Resized is a plug-in-specific setting. You must activate/

deactivate it for every plug-in that requires it.
RELATED LINKS
General on page 765
Side-Chaining for VST Instruments on page 491

You can load and save presets for instruments. These contain all the settings that are required
for the sound that you want.
The following presets for instruments are available:
● VST Presets
VST presets include the parameter settings of a VST instrument.
These are available from the VST Instruments window, from the instrument control
panels, and from the Programs field in the Inspector.
● Track Presets
Track presets include the instrument track settings and the settings for the corresponding
VST instrument.
These are available from the Inspector or the track list context menu.
Loading VST Presets

You can load VST Presets from the VST Instruments window, from the control panel or from the
Inspector.
PROCEDURE
● Select the track that contains the VST instrument, and in the Inspector, click the
Programs field.
● In the VST Instruments window, click Preset Browser for the instrument, and
select Load Preset.
483
VST Instruments
● In the control panel for the VST instrument, click Preset Browser, and select Load
Preset.
2. In the preset browser, select a preset from the list and double-click it to load it.
RESULT
The preset is applied. To return to the previously loaded preset, open the preset browser again
and click Revert to Last Setting.
Saving VST Presets

You can save your settings on VST instruments as VST presets for further use.
PROCEDURE
● In the VST Instruments window, click Preset Browser for the instrument, and
select Save Preset.
● In the control panel for the VST instrument, click Preset Browser, and select Save
Preset.
2. In the Save <VST instrument name> Preset dialog, enter a name for the preset.
3. Click OK to save the preset and close the dialog.
Loading Track Presets

You can load track presets for instrument tracks from the Inspector.
PROCEDURE
● Select the instrument track, and in the Inspector, click the Load Track Preset field.
● Right-click the instrument track, and from the context menu, select Load Track
Preset.
2. In the preset browser, select a preset from the list and double-click it to load it.
RESULT
The track preset is applied. To return to the previously loaded preset, open the preset browser
again and click Revert to Last Setting.
Instrument Presets Results Browser

The Results browser for instrument track presets allows you to preview VST presets and apply
them to your instrument track.
● To open the Results browser, right-click an instrument track, and select Load Track
Preset.
484
VST Instruments
Playing Back VST Instruments
VST presets for instruments can be divided into the following groups:
Presets
Presets contain the settings of the entire plug-in. For multitimbral instruments, this
includes the settings for all sound slots as well as the global settings.
Programs
Programs contain only the settings for one program. For multitimbral instruments,
this includes only the settings for one sound slot.
Saving Track Presets

You can save your settings on instrument tracks as track presets for further use.
PROCEDURE
1. Right-click the instrument track, and from the context menu, select Save Track Preset.
2. In the Save Track Preset dialog, enter a name for the preset.
3. Click OK to save the preset and close the dialog.

After you have added a VST instrument and selected a sound, you can play back the VST
instrument using the instrument or MIDI track in your project.
PROCEDURE
1. In the track list, activate Monitor for the track that has the VST instrument loaded.
2. Press one or more keys on your MIDI keyboard or use the On-Screen Keyboard.
The corresponding sounds are triggered on your VST instrument.
3. Select Studio > MixConsole to open the MixConsole and adjust the sound, add EQ or
effects, assign another output routing, etc.
485
VST Instruments
VST Instruments and Processor Load

VST instruments can consume a lot of CPU power. The more instruments you add, the more likely
you will run out of processor power during playback.
If the CPU overload indicator in the Audio Performance window lights up or you get crackling
sounds, you have the following options:
● Activate Freeze Instrument Channel.

This renders the instrument into an audio file and unloads it.
● Activate Suspend VST 3 plug-in processing when no audio signals are received for VST
3 instruments.
This ensures that your instruments do not consume CPU power on silent passages.
RELATED LINKS
Freezing Instruments on page 486
Suspend VST 3 plug-in processing when no audio signals are received on page 776
Freezing Instruments
If you are using a moderately powerful computer or a large number of VST instruments, your
computer may not be able to play back all instruments in real time. At this point, you can freeze
instruments.
PROCEDURE
● Select Studio > VST Instruments.
● Select the instrument track and open the top Inspector section.
2. Click Freeze.
3. In the Freeze Instrument Options dialog, make your changes.
4. Click OK.
RESULT
● The instrument is rendered to an audio file, and on playback you hear the same sound as
before freezing.
● Less CPU load is used.
● The Freeze button lights up.
● The MIDI/instrument track controls are grayed out.
● The MIDI parts are locked.
NOTE
To edit the tracks, parameters, or synth channels again, and to delete the rendered file, unfreeze
the instrument by clicking Freeze again.
Freeze Instrument Options Dialog

The Freeze Instrument Options dialog opens when you click Freeze. It allows you to specify
exactly what should happen if you freeze an instrument.
The following controls can be found in the Freeze Instrument Options dialog:
486
VST Instruments
Latency
Freeze Instrument Only

Activate this option if you still want to be able to edit insert effects on the synth
channel after freezing the instrument.
Freeze Instrument and Channels

Activate this option if you do not need to edit the insert effects on your synth
channels.
NOTE
You can still adjust level, pan, sends, and EQ.
Tail Size
Allows you to set a tail size time to let sounds complete their normal release cycle.
Latency
The term latency stands for the time it takes for the instrument to produce a sound when you
press a key on your MIDI controller. It can be an issue when using VST instruments in real time.
Latency depends on your audio hardware and its ASIO driver.
In the Studio Setup dialog (Audio System page), the input and output latency values should
ideally be a few milliseconds.
If the latency is too high to allow comfortable real time VST instrument playback from a
keyboard, you can use another MIDI sound source for live playback and recording, and switch to
the VST instrument for playback.
RELATED LINKS
Selecting an Audio Driver on page 14
Delay Compensation
During playback, Cubase automatically compensates any delay inherent in the VST plug-ins you
use.
You can specify a Delay Compensation Threshold in the Preferences dialog (VST page), so that
only plug-ins with a delay higher than this threshold setting are affected.

To avoid that Cubase adds latency when you play a VST instrument in real time or record live
audio, you can activate Constrain Delay Compensation. This minimizes the latency effects of
the delay compensation, while maintaining the sound of the mix as far as possible.
Constrain Delay Compensation is available on the Project window toolbar and in the Transport
zone. You can also find it as a menu item in the MixConsole on the Functions Menu.
Activating Constrain Delay Compensation turns off VST plug-ins that are activated for VST
instrument channels, audio track channels that are record-enabled, group channels, and output
channels. VST plug-ins that are activated for FX channels are disregarded. After recording or
using a VST instrument, Constrain Delay Compensation should be deactivated again in order to
restore full delay compensation.
RELATED LINKS
487
VST Instruments
Import and Export Options
Import and Export Options

Importing MIDI Loops
You can import MIDI loops (file extension .midiloop) in Cubase. These files contain MIDI part
information (MIDI notes, controllers, etc.) and all the settings that are saved in instrument track
presets. This way, you can reuse instrument patterns in other projects or applications, for
example.
PROCEDURE
1. Select Media > MediaBay.
2. Optional: On the toolbar, open the Select Media Types menu, and activate MIDI Loops
and Plug-in Presets.
3. In the Results list, select a MIDI loop and drag it to an empty section in the Project
window.
RESULT
An instrument track is created and the instrument part is inserted at the position where you
dragged the file. The Inspector reflects all settings that are saved in the MIDI loop, for example,
the VST instrument that was used, applied insert effects, track parameters, etc.
NOTE
You can also drag MIDI loops onto existing instrument or MIDI tracks. However, this only imports
the part information. This means this part only contains the MIDI data (notes, controllers) that is
saved in the MIDI loop, but no Inspector settings or instrument parameters.
RELATED LINKS
Presets for Instruments on page 483
Filtering According to Media Type on page 450
Exporting MIDI Loops

You can export MIDI loops to save a MIDI part together with its instrument and effect settings.
This allows you to reproduce patterns that you created without having to search for the correct
sound, style, or effect. MIDI loops have the file extension .midiloop.
PROCEDURE
1. Select an instrument part.
2. Select File > Export > MIDI Loop.
488
VST Instruments
VST Quick Controls
3. In the Save MIDI Loop dialog, enter a name for the MIDI loop.
4. Optional: To save attributes for the MIDI loop, click the button below the New MIDI Loop
section at the bottom left.
The Attribute Inspector section opens, allowing you to define attributes for your MIDI
loop.
5. Click OK.
RESULT
MIDI loop files are saved in the following folder:
Windows: \Users\<user name>\AppData\Roaming\Steinberg\MIDI Loops
macOS: /Users/<user name>/Library/Application Support/Steinberg/MIDI Loops/
The default folder cannot be changed. However, you can create subfolders within this folder to
organize your MIDI loops. To create a subfolder, click New Folder in the Save MIDI Loop dialog.
Exporting Instrument Tracks as MIDI Files

You can export instrument tracks as standard MIDI files.
PROCEDURE
1. Select an instrument track.
2. Select File > Export > MIDI File.
3. In the Export MIDI File dialog, select a location and enter a name for the MIDI file.
4. Click Save.
5. In the Export Options dialog, make your changes.
If you activate Export Inspector Volume/Pan, volume and pan information of the VST
instrument are converted and written into the MIDI file as controller data.
6. Click OK.
RESULT
The instrument track is exported as standard MIDI file. As there is no MIDI patch information in
an instrument track, this information is missing in the resulting MIDI file.
RELATED LINKS
VST Quick Controls

VST Quick Controls allow you to remote-control a VST instrument from within the VST
Instruments window.
To show the VST Quick Controls on the VST Instruments window, activate Show/Hide all VST
Quick Controls.
The following controls are available on each rack:
489
VST Instruments
VST Quick Controls
1 Show/Hide VST Quick Controls

Allows you to show/hide the VST Quick Controls for the instrument.
2 VST Quick Controls
Allow you to remote-control the parameters of the instrument.
NOTE
The number of VST Quick Controls that are shown depends on the size of the VST
Instruments window.
3 Set Remote-Control Focus for VST Quick Controls

Allows you to activate the VST Quick Controls to remote-control the instrument.
RELATED LINKS
Remote Controlling Cubase on page 506
Connecting VST Quick Controls with Remote Controllers on page 490
Connecting VST Quick Controls with Remote Controllers

VST Quick Controls become powerful if you use them together with a remote controller.
PREREQUISITE
The MIDI output on your remote unit is connected to a MIDI input on your MIDI interface.
PROCEDURE
2. In the Devices list, select VST Quick Controls.
3. Open the MIDI Input pop-up menu, and select a MIDI input.
4. Optional: Open the MIDI Output pop-up menu, and select a MIDI output.
5. Click Apply.
6. Activate Learn.
7. In the Control Name column, select QuickControl 1.
8. On your MIDI device, move the control that you want to connect with the first quick
control.
9. Select the next slot in the Control Name column and repeat the previous steps.
10. Click OK.
RESULT
The VST Quick Controls are now connected with control elements on your MIDI device. If you
move a control element, the value of the parameter that is assigned to the corresponding VST
Quick Controls changes accordingly.
NOTE
The remote controller setup for VST Quick Controls is saved globally, that is, it is independent of
any projects.
RELATED LINKS
Generic Remote Page on page 511
490
VST Instruments
Side-Chaining for VST Instruments

You can send audio into VST 3 instruments that support side-chaining. Side-chaining allows you
to use the output of one track to control the action of an instrument on another track.
Depending on the instrument, activating side-chaining allows you to:
● Use the instrument as an effect plug-in on audio events.

● Use the side-chain signal as a modulation source.
● Apply ducking to the instrument, that is, reduce the volume of the instrument track when a
signal is present on the audio track.
You can route the audio signal to the side-chain input of an instrument in different ways:
● To process the audio signal completely through the instrument, route the output of the
audio track to the side-chain input of an instrument.
● To use both the clean audio signal and the signal processed by the instrument, route a
send to the instrument side-chain.
NOTE
To hear the audio played through the instrument, you must trigger a note, either by playing MIDI
events or by playing notes on your external MIDI keyboard.
RELATED LINKS
Using Instruments as Effects on Audio Tracks on page 491
Using Instruments as Effects on Audio Tracks

You can use instruments that support side-chaining to modify the audio on audio tracks. The
following example shows you how to apply the parameters in Retrologue to a drum loop.
PREREQUISITE
You have a drum loop on an audio track. You have created an instrument track with Retrologue
loaded.
PROCEDURE
1. On the Retrologue control panel, click Activate/Deactivate Side-Chaining.
2. On the control panel, click Set up Side-Chain Routing.
3. Click Add Side-Chain Source, and select the audio track from the selector.
4. In the Project window, select the audio track.
5. In the Inspector for the audio track, open the Output Routing pop-up menu and select
Retrologue as a side-chain input.
6. On the Retrologue panel in the Oscillator Mix section, adjust the Input Level control.
7. Optional: Deactivate oscillators OSC 1, OSC 2, and OSC 3.
● On the instrument track, create a MIDI event, set up a cycle with the left and right
locators, and activate cycle mode.
● Play notes on your MIDI keyboard.
NOTE
For this to work, your MIDI keyboard must be installed and set up.
491
VST Instruments
RESULT
When a note is played, the drum loop is played back through Retrologue.
Use Retrologue to modify the sound of your drum loop. For example, you can do the following:
● Use the filter and distortion settings on the Synth page.
● Modulate the input signal. To do this, select Modulation Matrix > Destination >
Oscillator > Audio Input.
● Set up a rhythmical modulation on the Arp page.
● Use the effects on the FX page, for example the Resonator.
NOTE
For detailed information about Retrologue and its parameters, see the separate document
Retrologue.
492
Installing and Managing VST
Plug-ins
Cubase supports the VST 2 and VST 3 plug-in standards. You can install effects and instruments
that comply with these formats.
NOTE
Cubase only supports 64-bit plug-ins.
A plug-in is a piece of software that adds a specific functionality to Cubase. The audio effects and
instruments that are used in Cubase are VST plug-ins.
VST effect or VST instrument plug-ins normally have their own installation application. Read the
documentation or readme files before installing new plug-ins.
When you scan for newly installed plug-ins or relaunch Cubase, the new plug-ins are shown on
the VST effect or VST instrument selectors, respectively.
Cubase comes with a number of effect plug-ins included. These effects and their parameters are
described in the separate document Plug-in Reference.
Plug-ins and Collections

The VST Plug-in Manager shows the VST effects and VST instruments that are installed on your
computer.
In Cubase, plug-ins are arranged in collections. Only one collection can be active at the same
time. The plug-ins contained in the active collection are shown in the selectors all over the
program.
When you launch Cubase, all plug-ins that are found are automatically placed in the Default
collection. This is the collection of plug-ins that is active by default.
The Default collection is created each time you start Cubase or you initiate a rescan.
You can, however, add your own VST effect or VST instrument collections. This is useful if you
only want to see the specific plug-ins that are used in a specific project, for example. When you
activate this collection, all VST effects and VST instruments of this collection are shown in the
selectors for VST effects or VST instruments.
NOTE
If an installed VST effect or a VST instrument could not be loaded by Cubase, it is not shown on
the VST Effects tab or the VST Instruments tab, and grayed out in any collection. In this case,
verify if that plug-in is copy-protected.
RELATED LINKS
Adding New Plug-in Collections on page 496
493
Installing and Managing VST Plug-ins
VST Plug-in Manager Window

You can manage VST effects and VST instruments in the VST Plug-in Manager window.
● To open the VST Plug-in Manager window, select Studio > VST Plug-in Manager.
The VST Plug-in Manager is divided into the following sections:
VST Effects
Lists all VST effects that are loaded in Cubase. To sort the list by a specific attribute,
click the corresponding column header.
VST Instruments
Lists all VST instruments that are loaded in Cubase. To sort the list by a specific
attribute, click the corresponding column header.
Blocklist
Lists all VST effects and VST instruments that are installed on your system but not
loaded in Cubase, because they might lead to stability problems or even cause the
program to crash.
Toolbar
Shows tools and shortcuts for functions in the VST Plug-in Manager.
Active collection
Shows the active collection. The plug-ins of the active collection are shown in the
selectors for VST effects and VST instruments.
Show VST Plug-in Information

Shows information about the selected plug-in.
VST 2 Plug-in Path Settings

Shows the path of the selected VST 2 plug-in.
Plug-in Report
Opens the File Explorer/macOS Finder that allows you to save a text file that contains
information about your system as well as plug-in information. This is useful for
troubleshooting, for example.
494
RELATED LINKS
Plug-ins and Collections on page 493
Audio System Page on page 15
VST Plug-in Manager Toolbar on page 495
VST 2 Plug-in Path Settings on page 496
Hiding Plug-ins on page 497
Reactivating Plug-ins from the Blocklist on page 498
VST Plug-in Manager Toolbar

Shows tools and shortcuts for functions in the VST Plug-in Manager.
● To open the VST Plug-in Manager window, select Studio > VST Plug-in Manager.
Search field
Allows you to search for specific plug-ins on the VST Effects tab or on the VST
Instruments tab by typing in their name.
Rescan All
Rescans the plug-in list.
Display Options
Allows you to choose which plug-ins are shown:

● Show All Plug-ins shows all loaded plug-ins.
● Hide Plug-ins That Are in Active Collection hides all plug-ins that are part of
the active collection.
● Show Plug-ins That Support 64-Bit Float Processing shows all VST 3 plug-ins
that support 64-bit float processing.
New Folder
Creates a new folder in the current collection.
Delete
Deletes the selected item in the current collection.
New Collection
Creates a new collection.

● Empty creates a new, empty collection.
● Add All Plug-ins creates a new collection that contains all VST effects or VST
instruments respectively.
● Copy Current Collection creates a new collection that contains the current
collection.
Plug-in Collections and Options

● New Collection allows you to create a new collection.
● Remove Unavailable Plug-ins from All Collections removes all plug-ins that
are not available from all user-created collections.
● Sort By Category sorts the collection by category.
495
Adding New Plug-in Collections
NOTE
This option is only available for the Default collection.
● Sort By Vendor sorts the collection by vendor.
NOTE
This option is only available for the Default collection.
VST 2 Plug-in Path Settings

Shows information about the selected VST 2 plug-in path.
● To open the VST 2 Plug-in Path Settings, select Studio > VST Plug-in Manager, and click
VST 2 Plug-in Path Settings.
VST 2 Plug-in path list

Shows all VST 2 plug-in paths.
Add Path
Allows you to add a new VST 2 plug-in path.
Delete Path
Deletes the selected VST 2 plug-in path.
Reset
Resets the list to default.
Adding New Plug-in Collections

You can add new collections of VST effects or VST instruments.
PREREQUISITE
A number of effect plug-ins is installed on your computer, and these plug-ins are listed in the VST
Plug-in Manager on the VST Effects tab and the VST Instruments tab.
PROCEDURE
1. In the VST Plug-in Manager toolbar, click New Collection, and select an option.
2. In the New Collection dialog, enter a name for the new collection and click OK.
3. Optional: Click New Folder.
496
Hiding Plug-ins
You can then move your plug-ins into these folders to organize them by categories, for
example.
4. Enter a name for the new folder and click OK.
5. On the VST Effects tab or the VST Instruments tab, select the plug-ins that you want to
add to the collection, and drag them in the new collection.
If you created folders, you can drag the plug-ins directly into folders.
RESULT
The new collection is saved. If you select it, its plug-ins are shown in the plug-in selectors.
To remove a plug-in from a collection, select it and click Remove.
RELATED LINKS
Plug-ins and Collections on page 493
Hiding Plug-ins
You can hide plug-ins from all collections. This is useful if you have plug-ins installed on your
computer that you do not want to use in Cubase.
PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > VST Plug-in Manager.
2. On the VST Effects tab or on the VST Instruments tab, select the plug-ins that you want to
hide from view.
3. Click Show VST Plug-in Information to show information about the selected plug-in.
4. Activate Hide.
RESULT
The selected plug-in is hidden from view.
RELATED LINKS
ASIO-Guard on page 753
497
Reactivating Plug-ins from the Blocklist
Reactivating Plug-ins from the Blocklist

You can reactivate 64-bit plug-ins that are on the blocklist.
PROCEDURE
1. On the Blocklist tab, select the plug-ins that you want to reactivate.
NOTE
You cannot reactivate 32-bit plug-ins, because they are not supported.
2. Click Reactivate.
RESULT
Cubase rescans the plug-in and removes it from the blocklist.
If you want to move the plug-in back to the blocklist, click Rescan All in the VST 2 Plug-in Path
Settings, and restart Cubase.
RELATED LINKS
498
Track Quick Controls
Cubase allows you to set up 8 different track parameters or settings as Track Quick Controls for
quick access.
Track Quick Controls are available for the following track types:
● Audio
● MIDI
● Instrument
● Sampler
● FX Channel
● Group Channel
For instrument tracks and for MIDI tracks for which you assigned a VST instrument on creation,
that is, that you created by loading a rack instrument, Track Quick Controls are automatically
assigned to the Quick Controls of the VST instrument.
For sampler tracks, Track Quick Controls are automatically assigned to the sound parameters of
Sampler Control.
NOTE
You can change the default assignment by assigning different track parameters or by loading a
preset.
Assigning parameters to Quick Controls is done in the Inspector.
Quick Controls section in the Inspector
Quick Controls assignments are saved with the project.
You can assign Track Quick Controls to an external remote control device. For this to work, you
must connect Track Quick Controls with your remote controller.
You can automate parameter settings in the Quick Controls section using the Read/Write
buttons (R and W).
499
Parameter Assignment
RELATED LINKS
Channel Racks Selector on page 270
You can assign track, effect, and instrument parameters to Quick Controls.
For the parameter assignment, you can use the Inspector. You can assign parameters manually,
use the QC Learn Mode, or load an assignment preset.
RELATED LINKS
Assigning Track Parameters to Quick Controls on page 500
Assigning Effect Parameters to Quick Controls on page 501
Using QC Learn Mode on page 501
Setting Instrument Parameter Assignments to Default on page 501
Removing Parameter Assignments on page 502
Loading Track Quick Control Assignments as Presets on page 502
Assigning Track Parameters to Quick Controls

You can assign track parameters manually.
NOTE
For instrument tracks and MIDI tracks for which you assigned a VST instrument on creation, the
main parameters of the instrument are automatically assigned to the slots in the Quick Controls
section in the Inspector.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Inspector for your track, open the Quick Controls section.
2. In the Quick Controls section, click the first slot to open a selector that lists all parameters
for the track.
3. Select the parameter that you want to assign to the first Quick Control.
The parameter name and its value are displayed in the slot. You can change the value by
dragging the slider.
4. Repeat these steps for all slots for which you want to assign track parameters.
RESULT
You can now control the track parameters via the Quick Controls section in the Inspector.
You can rename a Quick Control by double-clicking on the name and entering a new one. This is
useful if a parameter name is very long, for example.
500
Assigning Effect Parameters to Quick Controls

You can assign effect parameters to Quick Control slots directly from within plug-in panels.
NOTE
This is only available for VST 3 plug-ins that support this function.
PROCEDURE
● In the effect plug-in panel, right-click the parameter.
● Select Add “x” to Quick Controls (where x is the name of the parameter) to assign
the parameter to the next empty slot.
● Select Add “x” to Quick Controls Slot (where x is the name of the parameter), and
select the slot from the submenu to assign the parameter to a specific slot.
RESULT
You can now control the effect parameters via the Quick Controls section in the Inspector.
Using QC Learn Mode

The QC Learn Mode allows you to assign a parameter by moving controls. This applies to all
automatable controls.
PROCEDURE
2. Activate QC Learn Mode.
3. Select the slot to which you want to assign a parameter.
4. Move the control.
RESULT
The track parameter is assigned to the corresponding control.
RELATED LINKS
Controlling Automatable Parameters on page 503
Setting Instrument Parameter Assignments to Default

If you have changed the parameter assignment or if you manually routed a MIDI track to a VST
instrument, you can retrieve the default assignments.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Inspector for the instrument or MIDI track, open the Quick Controls section.
2. Click Get Default QCs from Plug-in.
RESULT
The instrument parameter assignments are set to default.
501
Removing Parameter Assignments

You can remove parameter assignments for individual Quick Controls or for all Quick Controls
at once.
PROCEDURE
● To remove a parameter from a slot, click in the corresponding slot and select No
parameter from the pop-up menu.
NOTE
You can also double-click the parameter name, press Delete or Backspace, and
confirm with Return.
● To remove the Quick Control assignments for all slots, click Remove All QC
Assignments.
Saving Track Quick Control Assignments as Presets

You can save Quick Control assignments as track presets.
PREREQUISITE
You have assigned track parameters to Quick Controls.
PROCEDURE
2. In the Quick Controls section, click Preset Management .
3. Click Save Preset.
4. Enter a name in the Type in Preset Name dialog.
5. Click OK.
RESULT
The Quick Control assignment is saved as a preset.
RELATED LINKS
Assigning Track Parameters to Quick Controls on page 500
Loading Track Quick Control Assignments as Presets

You can load presets for Quick Control assignments.
PROCEDURE
3. Select one of the presets in the upper list of the menu.
502
Controlling Automatable Parameters
RESULT
The preset is loaded and allows you to access the channel parameters.
Controlling Automatable Parameters

You can use Quick Controls to control all automatable parameters. This allows you to control
parameters on other tracks using Quick Controls.
IMPORTANT
Use this function with caution, as you might accidentally modify parameters on other tracks.
PROCEDURE
1. Create a new, empty audio track and open the Quick Controls section.
2. Hold down Ctrl/Cmd and click the first Quick Control slot.
The selector lists all automatable parameters.
3. Open the VST Mixer folder.
The selector lists all channels that are available in the MixConsole of your project.
4. Assign a parameter of one particular channel to Quick Control 1, and another parameter
of another channel to Quick Control 2.
RESULT
The Quick Controls section now allows you to control automatable parameters on different
tracks.
IMPORTANT
You cannot save Quick Control assignments for automatable parameters on different tracks as
track presets.
Showing Automated Quick Control Assignments

You can show all Quick Control assignments that have been automated for one track.
PROCEDURE
1. Click the track for which you want to show automated Quick Control assignments.
4. Select Show Automated QC Assignments.
RESULT
The automation tracks of the automated Quick Control parameters open for the selected track.
503
Connecting Track Quick Controls with Remote Controllers
NOTE
● If Volume is assigned as a Quick Control parameter, it is always shown as automated,
independent of whether it is automated or not.

Track Quick Controls become powerful if you use them together with a remote controller.
PREREQUISITE
The MIDI output on your remote unit is connected to a MIDI input on your MIDI interface.
PROCEDURE
2. In the Devices list, select Track Quick Controls.
3. Open the MIDI Input pop-up menu, and select a MIDI input.
4. Optional: Open the MIDI Output pop-up menu, and select a MIDI output.
5. Click Apply.
6. Activate Learn.
7. In the Control Name column, select QuickControl 1.
8. On your MIDI device, move the control that you want to connect with the first quick
control.
9. Select the next slot in the Control Name column and repeat the previous steps.
10. Click OK.
RESULT
The Track Quick Controls are now connected with control elements on your MIDI device. If you
move a control element, the value of the parameter that is assigned to the corresponding Track
Quick Controls changes accordingly.
NOTE
The remote controller setup for Track Quick Controls is saved globally, that is, it is independent
of any projects.
RELATED LINKS
Activating Pick-up Mode for Hardware Controls

Pick-up Mode allows you to change configured Quick Control parameters without accidentally
modifying the previous values. This is useful if you want the control to pick up the parameter at
the value to which it was last set. If you move a hardware control, the parameter only changes
once the control reaches the previous value.
NOTE
This only applies to hardware controllers whose controls use specific ranges.
PROCEDURE
504
2. In the Devices list, select Track Quick Controls or VST Quick Controls.
3. Activate Pick-up Mode.
4. Click OK.
505
Remote Controlling Cubase
You can control Cubase via MIDI with a connected MIDI device.
The supported devices are described in the separate document Remote Control Devices. You
can also use a generic MIDI controller to remote-control Cubase.
NOTE
Most remote-control devices are able to control both MIDI and audio channels in Cubase, but the
parameter setup may be different. Audio-specific controls such as EQ are disregarded when
controlling MIDI channels.
RELATED LINKS
Connecting Remote Devices

You can connect your remote device via USB or via MIDI.
PROCEDURE
● If your remote device provides a USB MIDI port, use a USB cable to connect it to the
USB port of your computer.
● If your remote device provides a MIDI output, use a MIDI cable to connect it to a
MIDI input on your MIDI interface.
NOTE
If the remote unit features feedback devices such as indicators, motorized faders,
etc., connect a MIDI Out on the interface to a MIDI In on the remote unit.
RELATED LINKS
MIDI Connections on page 20
Removing the Remote Input from All MIDI Inputs

To avoid that you accidentally record data from the remote unit when you record MIDI, you must
remove the remote input from All MIDI Inputs.
PROCEDURE
506
Setting up Remote Devices
3. In the table on the right, deactivate In ‘All MIDI Inputs’ for the MIDI input to which you
have connected the MIDI remote unit.
The State column reads Inactive.
4. Click OK.
RESULT
The remote unit input is removed from the All MIDI Inputs group.
RELATED LINKS
MIDI Port Setup Page on page 21

PROCEDURE
2. Click Add in the top left corner and select a remote device from the pop-up menu to add it
to the Devices list.
NOTE
If your device is not available in the pop-up menu, select Generic Remote.
3. In the Devices list, select the device.

Depending on the selected device, either a list of programmable function commands or a
blank panel is shown in the right half of the dialog window.
4. Open the MIDI Input pop-up menu and select a MIDI input.
5. Optional: Open the MIDI Output pop-up menu and select a MIDI output.
6. Click OK.
RESULT
You can now use the MIDI device to control Cubase functions.
A bright stripe in the Project window and in the MixConsole indicates which channels are linked
to the remote-control device.
507
You can open a panel for the added device by selecting Studio > More Options.
Depending on your external MIDI control device, you might need to configure the parameters.
Resetting Remote Devices

Sometimes you must reset remote devices, because the communication between Cubase and a
remote device was interrupted or the handshaking protocol fails to create a connection.
PROCEDURE
2. In the Devices list, select the remote device.
3. Click Reset in the lower part of the Studio Setup dialog to reset the selected remote
device.
NOTE
To reset all devices in the Devices list, click Reset in the top left of the dialog.
508
Remote Devices and Automation
Global Options for Remote Controllers

On the page for your remote device, global functions may be available.
MIDI Input
Allows you to select a MIDI input.
MIDI Output
Allows you to select a MIDI output.
User Commands
Lists the controls or buttons of your remote device.
Smart Switch Delay

Allows you to specify a delay for the smart switch function. Functions that support
the smart switch behavior are activated for as long as the button is pressed.
Enable Auto Select

On touch-sensitive remote control devices, this automatically selects a channel when
you touch a fader. On devices without touch-sensitive faders, the channel gets
selected as soon as you move the fader.
Remote Devices and Automation

You can write automation using remote devices.
If your remote device does not have touch-sensitive controls and you want to replace existing
automation data in Write mode, consider the following:
● Make sure that you move only the controller that you want to replace.
● Stop playback to deactivate Write mode.
This way, all data for the corresponding parameter is replaced from the position where you
moved the control, up to the position where you stop playback.
509
Assigning Commands to Remote Devices
Assigning Commands to Remote Devices

You can assign any Cubase command to which a key command can be assigned to remote
devices.
PROCEDURE
2. In the Devices list, select your remote device.
In the User Commands section, the controls or buttons of your remote device are listed in
the Button column.
3. Click in the Category column for the control to which you want to assign a Cubase
command, and select the category from the pop-up menu.
The categories correspond to the categories in the Key Commands dialog.
4. Click in the Command column, and select the Cubase command from the pop-up menu.
The available items on the pop-up menu depend on the selected category.
5. Click Apply.
RESULT
The selected function is assigned to the button or control on the remote device.
RELATED LINKS
510
Generic Remote Page
Generic Remote Page

You can use a generic MIDI controller to remote-control almost any function in Cubase. After
setting up the Generic Remote device, you can control the specified parameters from the MIDI
remote device.
● To open the Generic Remote page, select Studio > Studio Setup, and from the Devices
list, select Generic Remote.
MIDI Input
Allows you to select the MIDI input port to which your remote device is connected.
MIDI Output
Allows you to select the MIDI output port to which your remote device is connected.
MIDI Remote Control Configuration

The upper table shows the MIDI remote-control configuration of your remote device.
Cubase Control Assignment

The lower table allows you to assign Cubase controls to your remote device.
RELATED LINKS
MIDI Remote Control Configuration Section on page 511
Cubase Control Assignment Section on page 513
MIDI Remote Control Configuration Section

The MIDI remote-control configuration section is shown in the upper table of the Generic
Remote setup page.
● To open the Generic Remote settings, select Studio > Studio Setup, and from the Devices
511
Generic Remote Page
The following options are available in the upper table:
Control Name
Double-click this field to change the name for the control, and enter the one written
on the console, for example. This name is automatically reflected in the lower table.
MIDI Status
Allows you to specify the type of MIDI message sent by the control.
MIDI Channel
Allows you to select the MIDI channel on which the controller is transmitted.
Address
Allows you to specify the continuous controller number, the pitch of a note, or the
address of an NRPN/RPN continuous controller.
Max. Value
Allows you to specify the maximum value that the control transmits. This value is
used by the program to scale the value range of the MIDI controller to the value
range of the program parameter.
Flags
Allows you to select one of the following flags:
● Receive
Activate this if the MIDI message should be processed on reception.
● Transmit
Activate this if a MIDI message should be transmitted when the corresponding
value in the program changes.
● Relative
Activate this if the control is an endless rotary encoder, which reports the
number of turns instead of an absolute value.
● Pick-up
Activate this if you want the control to pick up the parameter at the value to
which it was last set.
The buttons and options to the right of the table have the following function:
Import
Allows you to import saved remote setup files.
Export
Allows you to export the current setup with the file extension .xml.
Add
Adds controls to the bottom of the table.
512
Generic Remote Page
Delete
Deletes the selected control from the table.
Learn
Allows you to assign MIDI messages by learning.
Cubase Control Assignment Section

You can specify the Cubase control assignment section in the lower table of the Generic Remote
setup page. Each row in the table is assigned to the controller in the corresponding row in the
MIDI remote-control configuration table.
● To open the Generic Remote settings, select Studio > Studio Setup, and from the Devices
Control Name
Reflects the control name selected in the upper table.
Device
Allows you to select the Cubase device that you want to control.
Channel/Category
Allows you to select the channel or the command category that you want to control.
Value/Action
Allows you to select the parameter of the channel that you want to control. If the
Command device is selected, this is where you specify the Action of the category.
Flags
Allows you to select one of the following flags:
● Push Button
Activate this if the parameter should only be changed if the received MIDI
message shows a value unequal to 0.
● Toggle
Activate this if the parameter value should be switched between minimum and
maximum value each time a MIDI message is received.
You can combine Push Button and Toggle for remote controls which do not
latch the state of a button. This is useful if you want to control the mute status
with a device on which pressing the mute button turns it on, and releasing the
mute button turns it off.
● Not Automated
Activate this if the parameter value should not be automated.
The buttons to the right of the table have the following function:
513
Generic Remote Page
Bank pop-up menu

Allows you to switch banks. This is necessary if your MIDI control device has 16
volume faders, and you are using 32 MixConsole channels in Cubase, for example.
Rename
Allows you to rename the selected bank.
Add
Adds banks to the pop-up menu.
Delete
Deletes the selected bank from the pop-up menu.
RELATED LINKS
Assignable Devices and Functions on page 514
Assignable Devices and Functions

The Device column in the Cubase control assignment section lists the Cubase devices that you
can control.
Command
Allows you to assign the Cubase commands to which a key command can be
assigned. If you select Add Track in the Channel/Category column, and Audio in
the Value/Action column, you can add audio tracks using your MIDI device, for
example.
VST Quick Controls Manager

Allows you to assign VST Quick Controls. If you select Device in the Channel/
Category column, and one of the Quick Control options in the Value/Action
column, you can control that VST quick control using your MIDI device.
Mixer
Allows you to control MixConsole functions. If you select one of the available
channels or Selected in the Channel/Category column, and one of the options in
the Value/Action column, you can control that function of that specific channel or of
the selected channel using your MIDI device.
Transport
Allows you to control the transport functions. If you select Device in the Channel/
Category column, and one of the options in the Value/Action column, you can
control that function using your MIDI device.
Metronome
Allows you to control metronome functions. If you select Device in the Channel/
Category column, and one of the options in the Value/Action column, you can
control that function using your MIDI device.
VST Mixer
Allows you to control MixConsole functions. If you select one of the available
channels or Selected in the Channel/Category column, and one of the options in
the Value/Action column, you can control that function of that specific channel or of
the selected channel using your MIDI device.
NOTE
You can also control all VST Instruments that you added in the Project window, and that are
listed in the Device column.
514
Assigning MIDI Messages in Learn Mode

You can assign MIDI messages in Learn mode.
PROCEDURE
2. In the Devices list, select Generic Remote.
3. Activate Learn.
4. Select the control in the upper table, and move the corresponding control on your MIDI
device.
RESULT
The values for MIDI Status, MIDI Channel, and Address are automatically set to those of the
moved control.
NOTE
If you use the Learn function for a control that sends a program change value, Prog. Change
Trigger is automatically selected in the MIDI Status pop-up menu. This allows you to use the
different values of a program change parameter to control different parameters in Cubase.
If this does not give you the result you want, try using the Prog. Change value instead.

The Remote Control Editor allows you to define your own mapping of VST plug-in parameters to
the controls of the supported hardware controllers. This is useful if you think that the automatic
mapping of plug-in parameters to remote control devices is not too intuitive.
● To open the Remote Control Editor, right-click the plug-in panel of the plug-in that you
want to remote-control, and select Remote Control Editor.
515
1 Inspector
Contains the settings and the parameter assignment for the selected cell. The upper
section contains settings for the text label. The lower section contains settings for the knob
and the switches.
2 Layout Selection
Shows the name of the layout. Click to select a different layout.
3 Set up Cell Layout
Opens the Cell Layout Configuration, where you can specify the number of cells per
page, and select the switch layout that you want to use for the pages. To specify the
number of switches for a cell, activate/deactivate them.
4 Add New Hardware Layout
Adds a new layout for a particular hardware type. To remove a hardware layout, click its
Close button.
5 Layout section
Shows layouts that represent the hardware devices that are used to remote-control the
plug-in parameters. Here you can change the parameter assignments, the name in the
text label, the cell setup, and the order of cells and pages.
6 Toolbar
Shows tools for setting up the layout.
7 Status Bar
Shows information on an element when you position the mouse pointer over it in the
editor window.
RELATED LINKS
Remote Control Editor Toolbar on page 517
516
Remote Control Editor Toolbar

Shows tools for setting up the layout.
Remove All Assignments
Removes all parameter assignments.
Get Default Factory Layout/Copy Layout from Other Tab
Reverts to the default settings for the current layout or copies the settings of one
layout page to another.
Activate/Deactivate Learn Mode
Activates/Deactivates Learn mode for the Remote Control Editor.
Activate/Deactivate Assignment Inspection View
Shows the current assignment of all cells in a layout.
Apply Current Layout
Saves the settings. If the hardware supports this function, the changes are
immediately reflected on the hardware controllers.
Control Settings
You can define the control style for switches or knobs to which you have assigned a function. This
includes changing the LED ring or changing its behavior, from continuous value representation
to on/off, for example.
To open the Control Settings panel, right-click the control.
NOTE
Not all hardware devices support all control type settings.
Control Type Settings for Knobs
The following control types are available for knobs:
Standard
A standard knob with undefined LED style.
Toggle Switch
A knob with 2 states.
517
LED Ring
An LED ring around the knob. The setting increases clockwise.
LED Ring (counter-clockwise)

An LED ring around the knob. The setting increases counter-clockwise.
Center Width
An LED ring that starts at the top center position, and when the settings increase, an
LED is shown growing in both directions.
Center Neutral
A dial that starts at the top center position and can be moved left or right, like a pan
control, for example.
Single Dot
An LED ring around the knob. The setting increases clockwise with a dot indicating
the current value.
Control Type Settings for Switches
The following options are available for switches:
Momentary
Activates the assigned function as long as you hold the switch.
Increasing Stepwise
Steps through the available settings until the maximum is reached.
Decreasing Stepwise
Steps through the available settings in reverse order until the minimum is reached.
Increasing Stepwise (cycle)

Steps through the available settings, starting over with the minimum value when the
maximum is reached.
Decreasing Stepwise (cycle)

Steps through the available settings in reverse order, starting over with the
maximum value when the minimum is reached.
Smart Switch
Switches between 2 states every time you press the switch. Enters Momentary mode
if you hold the switch.
Invert Control Value

Inverts the control state/value.
Hide When Inactive

Hides plug-in parameters when they are inactive or disabled.
518
Assigning Parameters to Controls

PROCEDURE
1. On the Remote Control Editor toolbar, click Activate/Deactivate Learn Mode.
2. Select the control that you want to assign to a plug-in parameter.
● Click a parameter on the plug-in panel.
● Double-click on a control in the Remote Control Editor, and select a parameter
from the list of available plug-in parameters.
4. Press Esc to end Learn mode.
RESULT
The parameter is assigned to the control.
NOTE
To remove the parameter assignment for a cell, activate Learn mode, select the cell, and press
Delete or Backspace.
RELATED LINKS
Remote Control Editor Toolbar on page 517
Editing the Layout

In the layout section, you can perform a number of editing operations and arrange the pages to
your liking.
● To navigate from cell to cell, use the cursor keys.

● To step through the controls within the cells in Learn mode, press Shift and use the cursor
keys.
● To step through the different layouts, use Tab and Shift-Tab.
● To copy the settings of one cell to another, select a cell, press Alt and drag it to another
cell.
● To move a cell, drag it to an empty cell.
● To swap the contents of 2 cells, press Ctrl/Cmd and drag one cell to the other.
NOTE
Drag and drop also works between different pages.
● To add a page to a layout, click Add New Page.
● To remove a page, click Remove Current Page.

● To specify the label for a cell, use the top 3 text fields in the Inspector.
The first text field shows the long name, as it is shown in the cell. In the second field, you
can enter a name that can contain up to 8 characters, and up to 4 characters in the third.
519
VST Quick Controls
NOTE
This is useful if your hardware devices have value fields that only display a limited number
of characters, for example.
VST Quick Controls

If you have an external remote control device, you can control up to 8 parameters of a VST
instrument, using the VST Quick Controls feature in Cubase.
RELATED LINKS
VST Quick Controls on page 489
520
MIDI Realtime Parameters
MIDI realtime means that you can change or transform MIDI events on MIDI or instrument
tracks before they are sent to the MIDI outputs. This allows you to change the way MIDI data is
played back.
The actual MIDI events on the track are not affected. Therefore, MIDI realtime changes are not
reflected in any MIDI editor.
The following functions allow you to change MIDI events in real time:

● MIDI modifiers
● Transpose and Velocity on the info line
NOTE
If you want to convert the track settings to real MIDI events, select MIDI > Freeze MIDI
Modifiers or MIDI > Merge MIDI in Loop.
RELATED LINKS
MIDI Track Parameters

The MIDI track parameters are located in the topmost Inspector section for MIDI and
instrument tracks.
These settings either affect the basic functionality for the track (mute, solo, enable record, etc.) or
send out additional MIDI data to the connected devices (program change, volume, etc.).
The following track parameters allow you to change MIDI events in real time:
● MIDI Volume
● MIDI Pan
● Track Delay
RELATED LINKS
MIDI Modifiers
MIDI modifiers allow you to modify MIDI events during playback.
You can use them for the following purposes:
● To modify already existing MIDI events on MIDI or instrument tracks.

● To modify MIDI events that you play live.
521
MIDI Modifiers
NOTE
For live playing, select and record-enable the track, and activate MIDI Thru Active in the
Preferences dialog (MIDI page).
MIDI Modifiers Section

● To open the MIDI Modifiers section, select a MIDI track, and in the Inspector, click MIDI
Modifiers.
NOTE
If you want to compare the result of your modifier settings with the unprocessed MIDI, you can
use the bypass button in the MIDI modifiers section. If this button is activated, the MIDI
modifiers settings are temporarily disabled.
Transpose
Allows you to transpose all notes on the track in semitones. Extreme transpositions
can give rather strange and unwanted results.
Velocity Shift
Allows you to add a velocity value to all notes on the track. Positive values increase
the velocity while negative values lower the velocity.
Length Compression
Allows you to add a multiplier to the length of all notes on the track. The value is set
with a numerator and a denominator.
Velocity Compression
Allows you to add a multiplier to the velocity of all notes on the track. The value is set
with a numerator and a denominator. This parameter also affects the velocity
differences between the notes, thus compressing or expanding the velocity scale.
522
MIDI Modifiers
Values smaller than 1/1 compress the velocity range. Values greater than 1/1
together with negative Velocity Shift values expand the velocity range.
IMPORTANT
The maximum velocity is always 127, no matter how much you try to expand.
NOTE
Combine this setting with the Velocity Shift parameter.
Random 1/Random 2
Allows you to introduce random variations to various properties of MIDI notes.
Range 1/Range 2
Allows you to specify a pitch or velocity range and either force all notes to fit within
this range, or exclude all notes outside this range from playback.
HMT: Apply Tuning

Activate this option to apply Hermode tuning to the notes played on this track.
HMT: Use for Analysis

Activate this option to use the notes you played on this track to calculate retuning.
RELATED LINKS
Musical Scale Setup Dialog on page 638
Setting up Random Variations

You can set up random variations for position, pitch, velocity, and length of MIDI events using
one or two random generators.
PROCEDURE
1. Select a MIDI or instrument track.
2. In the Inspector, open the MIDI Modifiers section.
3. Open one of the Random sections and in the Random Target pop-up menu, select the
note property you want to randomize.
4. Specify the limits of the randomization in the value fields.
The values will vary between the minimum and maximum value. You cannot set the
minimum value higher than the maximum value.
5. Optional: Repeat for other random values.
6. Play back the track to hear the randomized events.
RESULT
The corresponding properties are randomized.
NOTE
Depending on the track content, certain changes might not be immediately noticeable or might
have no effect at all.

Deactivate the random function by opening the Random Target pop-up menu and selecting Off.
523
MIDI Modifiers
Setting up Ranges
You can filter out pitches or velocities that do not match a specified range, or force them to fit a
specified range.
PROCEDURE
3. Open the one of the Range sections, and in the Range Target pop-up menu and select a
mode.
4. Set the minimum and maximum values with the two fields to the right.
NOTE
You can make independent settings for the two Range sections.

To deactivate the function, open the Range Target pop-up menu and select Off.
Range Modes
On the Range Target pop-up menu, you can select different range modes. Values are shown as
numbers, from 0 to 127, for the velocity modes and as note numbers, from C-2 to G8, for the
pitch modes.
Vel. Limit
Allows you to force all velocity values to fit within the range that you specify with the
min and max values. Values below the lower limit are set to the min value, velocity
values above the higher setting are set to the max value.
Vel. Filter
Allows you to filter out notes with velocity values below the min value or above the
max value.
Note Limit
Allows you to transpose all notes below the min value upwards and all notes above
the max value downwards in octave steps.
Note Filter
Allows you to filter out notes that are lower than the min value or higher than the
max value.
Applying Hermode Tuning

Hermode tuning changes the tuning of notes that you play. It creates clear frequencies for every
fifth and third interval, for example. Retuning only affects individual notes and maintains the
pitch relationship between keys and notes. The retuning is a continuous process and takes the
musical context into account.
PROCEDURE
3. Activate HMT: Apply Tuning.
4. Activate HMT: Use for Analysis to use the notes you play to calculate retuning.
524
MIDI Modifiers
NOTE
If you use tracks with acoustic piano, activate HMT: Use for Analysis and deactivate HMT:
Apply Tuning. This excludes the piano from being tuned which would sound unnatural.
5. Select Project > Project Setup to open the Project Setup dialog.
6. Open the HMT Type pop-up menu and select one of the options.
7. Play some notes.
It may take a moment until all notes are recalculated and you hear the results of the
retuning.
NOTE
Notes that are produced by MIDI plug-ins are not taken into account.
RESULT
If you use a VST 3 instrument that supports Micro Tuning and Note Expression, notes are retuned
dynamically while you play them. For VST instruments that support Note Expression, this also
works in MIDI Thru mode.
If you use a track that has a VST 2 instrument loaded, the notes you play are retuned on every
keystroke.
RELATED LINKS
Hermode Tuning on page 525
Hermode Tuning
You can select different Hermode tuning types.
● To select a Hermode tuning type, select Project > Project Setup and select an option from
the HMT Type pop-up menu.
None
No tuning is applied.
Reference (pure 3/5)

Tunes pure thirds and fifths.
Classic (pure 3/5 equalized)

Tunes pure thirds and fifths. In conflict situations, a slight equalization is applied.
This tuning type is suitable for all kinds of music.
Pop Jazz (3/5/7)

Tunes pure thirds and fifths, and natural sevenths. This tuning type should not be
applied to polyphonic music. Try this with pop or jazz.
525
Transpose and Velocity on the Info Line
Baroque (3/5 adaptive)

Tunes pure thirds and fifths. The degree of purity changes according to the sequence
of harmonies. This tuning type is suitable for church organ and polyphonic music.
Freezing MIDI Modifiers

You can apply all filter settings permanently to the selected track. The settings are applied to the
events on the track, and all modifiers are set to zero.
PROCEDURE
1. Select the MIDI track.
2. Select MIDI > Freeze MIDI Modifiers.
RESULT
The following settings are frozen:
● Several settings in the top section of the Inspector, such as Delay, Program Selector, and
Bank Selector.
● The settings in the MIDI Modifiers section, such as Transpose, Vel. Shift, Vel. Comp., and
Len. Comp..
● The info line settings Transpose and Velocity.
RELATED LINKS
Transpose and Velocity on the Info Line

You can edit the transposition and the velocity for selected MIDI parts on the info line. This only
affects the notes in playback.
● Use the Transpose field to transpose the selected parts in semitone steps.
The value is added to the transposition set for the whole track.
● Use the Velocity field to offset the velocity for the selected parts.
The value is added to the velocities of the notes in the parts.
526
Using MIDI Devices
The MIDI Device Manager allows you to work with MIDI devices, that is, representations of
external MIDI hardware.
You can install preset MIDI devices or define new ones. This is useful for global control and patch
selection.
Program Change Messages and Bank Select Messages

To select a patch, that is, a sound in your MIDI device you must send a program change message
to that device.
Program Change Messages

You can record program change messages, or enter them in a MIDI part. You can open the
Inspector for the MIDI track and select a value in the Program Selector field.
Program change messages allow you to select between 128 different patches in your MIDI
device.
Bank Select Messages

Many MIDI instruments, however, contain a larger number of patch locations. To make these
available from within Cubase, you must send bank select messages.
Bank select messages allow you to select between 128 different programs in your MIDI device.
If your device supports MIDI bank select, you can open the Inspector for the MIDI track and
select a value in the Bank Selector field to select a bank, and then use the Program Selector
field to select a program in this bank.
Unfortunately, different instrument manufacturers use different schemes for how bank select
messages are constructed, which can lead to some confusion and make it hard to select the
correct sound. Also, selecting patches by numbers seems unnecessarily cumbersome, when
most instruments use names for their patches nowadays.
The MIDI Device Manager allows you to specify which MIDI devices you are using, and to select
to which device each MIDI track is routed. This allows you to select patches by name in the track
list or Inspector.
RELATED LINKS
MIDI Device Manager on page 528
527
Using MIDI Devices
Patch Banks
Patch Banks
The Patch Banks list can have two or more main banks, depending on the selected device.
This is due to the fact that different types of patches are handled differently in the instruments.
Patches, for example, typically are regular programs that you play one at a time. Performances,
however, may be combinations of programs, which could be split across the keyboard, layered,
or used for multitimbral playback, and so on.
For devices with several banks you can select Bank Assignment to specify which bank a specific
MIDI channel should use.
The Bank Assignment affects which bank is displayed when you select programs by name for
the device in the track list or Inspector.
Many instruments use MIDI channel 10 as an exclusive drum channel, for example. If this is the
case, select the Drums or Rhythm Set or Percussion bank for channel 10 in this list. This allows
you to choose between different drum kits in the track list or Inspector.
MIDI Device Manager

The MIDI Device Manager allows you to install preset MIDI devices or define new ones.
● To open the MIDI Device Manager, select Studio > More Options > MIDI Device
Manager.
Installed Devices list

Lists the connected MIDI devices and the imported device setups.
Install Device
Allows you to install a preset device. These presets are simple patch name scripts
that do not include any device mapping of parameters and controls and no graphic
panels.
For more information about patch name scripts, see the separate document MIDI
Devices.
528
Using MIDI Devices
MIDI Device Manager
Remove Device
Removes the selected device.
Export Setup
Exports the MIDI device setup as XML file.
Import Setup
Allows you to import an XML file of a MIDI device setup. Device setups can include
device mapping, and/or patch information. Device setups are also added to the list of
installed devices when imported.
Output
Allows you to select a MIDI output for the selected device.
Enable Edit
Activate this to enable the editing of the selected device.
Commands
Allows you to edit the selected device. The patch structure for the selected device is
shown to the left.
MIDI Messages
Shows which MIDI messages are sent out to select the patch that is highlighted in
the list to the left.
Commands for Patches

In the MIDI Device Manager, patches can be structured in banks, folders, and presets.
NOTE
Activate Enable Edit to use the commands pop-up menu for the selected device.
The commands pop-up menu contains the following items:
Create Bank
Creates a new bank in the Patch Banks list. You can rename this by clicking on it and
typing a new name.
If you specify more than one bank, a Bank Assignment button is added next to the
Patch Banks button.
New Folder
Creates a new subfolder in the selected bank or folder. This could correspond to a
group of patches in the MIDI device, or just be a way for you to categorize sounds.
529
Using MIDI Devices
MIDI Device Manager
New Preset
Adds a new preset in the selected bank or folder. If you select it, the corresponding
MIDI events are shown to the right. The default program change value for a new
preset is 0, but you can adjust the number in the Value column.
You can move presets between banks and folders via drag and drop.
Add Multiple Presets

Allows you to set up a range of presets and add them to the selected bank or folder.
NOTE
You can remove banks, folders, and presets by selecting them and pressing Backspace.
IMPORTANT
For details on which MIDI events are used for selecting patches in the MIDI device, consult its
documentation.
RELATED LINKS
Add Preset Functions on page 530
Patch Banks on page 528
Add Preset Functions

If you add or select a preset for the selected bank or folder, further functions become available
to the right. If you add multiple presets, the Add Multiple Presets dialog opens with further
functions.
MIDI Message Name

The name of the MIDI message.
● To change an event, click it, and select another option from the pop-up menu.
● To add another event, click below the last event, and select an option from the
pop-up menu.
● To remove an event, select it and press Delete or Backspace.
IMPORTANT
If you insert a Bank Select event, keep in mind that, depending on your device, you
must choose CC: BankSelect MSB, Bank Select 14 Bit, Bank Select 14 Bit MSB-LSB
Swapped or some other option.
Value
The value of the event.
530
Using MIDI Devices
MIDI Device Manager
MIDI Message Bytes

The message bytes of the event.
Valid Range
The valid range of the event.
Default Name
For multiple presets you can specify a default name. The added events will get this
name, followed by a number.
Installing Preset MIDI Devices

You can install preset MIDI devices, that is, patch name scripts that do not include device
mapping.
PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > More Options > MIDI Device Manager.
2. Click Install Device.
3. In the Add MIDI Device dialog, do one of the following:
● Select the script of the device in the list.
● Select GM Device or XG Device if your device is not listed, but compatible with these
standards, and type in the name of your instrument in the next dialog.
4. Click OK.
5. Select the device in the Installed Devices list, and open the Output pop-up menu.
6. Select the MIDI output that the device is connected to.
RESULT
The structure of the patch name script is shown. It usually has one or several layers of banks or
groups with patches.
Selecting Patches for Installed Devices

If you installed a device and you select it from the Output Routing pop-up menu for the MIDI
track, you can select patches by name.
PROCEDURE
1. Select the MIDI track that you want to associate to the installed device, and open the top
section of the Inspector.
2. Open the Output Routing pop-up menu, and select the installed device.
This routes the MIDI track to the MIDI output specified for the device in the MIDI Device
Manager. The Bank Selector and the Program Selector fields are replaced by a single
Program Selector field that reads Off.
531
Using MIDI Devices
MIDI Device Manager
3. Open the Program Selector.

A program list, similar to the one in the MIDI Device Manager, is shown.
4. Select an entry in the list.
RESULT
The corresponding MIDI message is sent to the device.
Renaming Patches in Devices

If you have replaced some of the factory presets with your own patches, you can modify the
device so that the patch name list matches the actual device.
PROCEDURE
2. Select the device in the Installed Devices list.
Make sure that the Patch Banks tab is selected.
3. Activate Enable Edit.
4. In the Patch Banks list, locate the patch you want to rename and click the name.
5. Type in the new name and press Return.
RESULT
The patch is renamed.
To avoid modifying the device by accident, deactivate Enable Edit.
Defining New MIDI Devices

You can define new MIDI devices.
PROCEDURE
2. Click Install Device.
3. In the Add MIDI Device dialog, select Define New.
4. Click OK.
5. In the Create New MIDI Device dialog, enter the name of the device and activate the MIDI
channels that you would like to use.
6. Click OK.
7. Select the device in the Installed Devices list.
8. Activate Enable Edit and use the commands pop-up menu to organize the patch structure
of the new device.
532
MIDI Functions
MIDI functions allow you to permanently edit MIDI events or MIDI parts in the Project window or
from within a MIDI editor.
Which events are affected when you use a MIDI function depends on the function, the active
window, and the current selection:
● In the Project window, the MIDI functions apply to all selected parts, affecting all events of
the relevant types in them.
● In the MIDI editors, MIDI functions apply to all selected events. If no events are selected,
all events in the edited parts are affected.
NOTE
Some MIDI functions only apply to MIDI events of a certain type. For example, Delete
Controllers only applies to MIDI controller events.
RELATED LINKS
MIDI Realtime Parameters on page 521
Transpose Setup Dialog

The Transpose Setup dialog contains settings for transposing the selected events.
● To open the Transpose Setup dialog, select the MIDI notes that you want to transpose,
and select MIDI > Transpose Setup.
Transpose in Semitones
Sets the amount of transposition.
533
MIDI Functions
Merging MIDI Events into a New Part
Scale Correction
Transposes the selected notes to the closest note of a specific scale type. This allows
you to change the key and the tonality.
● Select a root note and a scale type for the current scale in the Current Scale
pop-up menus.
● Select a root note and a scale type for the new scale in the New Scale pop-up
menus.
NOTE
If the new root note differs from the current root note, this leads to an entirely
different key.
Keep Notes in Range

Limits the transposition of notes to the note values that you specify with the Highest
Note and Lowest Note settings.
NOTE
Notes that would be outside the range after transposition are shifted to another
octave, keeping the correct transposed pitch if possible. If the range between the
upper and lower limit is very narrow, the note is transposed as far as possible, that is,
to notes specified with the Highest Note and Lowest Note values. If you set
Highest Note and Lowest Note to the same value, all notes are transposed to this
pitch.
RELATED LINKS
Merging MIDI Events into a New Part

You can merge all MIDI events into a new part, apply MIDI modifiers, and generate a new part.
PROCEDURE
● Mute the tracks or parts that you do not want to include in the merge.
● Solo the track that contains the events that you want to include in the merge.
2. Set up the left and right locators to encompass the area that you want to merge.
NOTE
Only events starting within this area will be included.
3. Optional: Select a track for the new part.

If you do not select a track, a new MIDI track is created. If several MIDI tracks are selected,
the new part is inserted on the first selected track.
4. Select MIDI > Merge MIDI in Loop.
5. In the MIDI Merge Options dialog, make your changes.
6. Click OK.
RESULT
A new part is created between the locators on the destination track, containing the processed
MIDI events.
534
MIDI Functions
Dissolve Part Dialog
RELATED LINKS
MIDI Merge Options Dialog on page 535
Freezing MIDI Modifiers on page 526
MIDI Merge Options Dialog

● To open the MIDI Merge Options dialog, select a MIDI part, and select MIDI > Merge
MIDI in Loop.
Include Inserts
Applies MIDI modifiers.
Erase Destination
Deletes MIDI data between the left and right locators on the destination track.
Include Chase
Includes events placed outside the selected part but relating to it in the processing,
for example, a program change right before the left locator.
Convert VST 3
Converts all VST 3 data within the selected area to MIDI data.
RELATED LINKS
Chase on page 190
Applying Effects to a Single Part

You can apply MIDI modifiers to a single part.
PROCEDURE
1. Set up your MIDI modifiers the way you want them for the part.
2. Set the locators to encompass the part.
3. In the track list, select the track with the part.
4. Select MIDI > Merge MIDI in Loop.
5. In the MIDI Merge Options dialog, activate Erase Destination.
6. Click OK.
RESULT
A new part is created on the same track, containing the processed events. The original part is
deleted.
Turn off or reset all MIDI modifiers, so that the track plays back as before.

You can separate MIDI events in a part according to channels or pitches and dissolve the part to
different tracks or lanes.
● To open the Dissolve Part dialog, select the MIDI part you want to dissolve and select
MIDI > Dissolve Part.
535
MIDI Functions
Separate Channels
Separates MIDI events according to their channel. This is useful for MIDI parts on
MIDI channel Any that contain events on different MIDI channels.
Separate Pitches
Separates MIDI events according to their pitch. This is useful for drum and
percussion tracks, where different pitches usually correspond to separate drum
sounds.
Optimized Display
Automatically removes silent areas of the resulting parts.
NOTE
This option is not available when Dissolve to Lanes is activated.
Dissolve to Lanes
Dissolves the part to lanes.
Dissolving Parts into Separate Channels

You can dissolve MIDI parts that contain events on different MIDI channels, and distribute the
events into new parts on new tracks, one for each MIDI channel found.
PROCEDURE
1. Select the parts that contain MIDI events on different channels.
2. Select MIDI > Dissolve Part.
3. Activate Separate Channels.
4. Click OK.
RESULT
For each MIDI channel used in the selected parts, a new MIDI track is created and set to the
corresponding MIDI channel. Each event is copied into the part on the track with the
corresponding MIDI channel, and the original parts are muted.
MIDI Channel Setting

Setting a track to MIDI channel Any causes each MIDI event to play back on its original MIDI
channel, rather than a channel set for the whole track.
There are two main situations when Any channel tracks are useful:
● When you record several MIDI channels at the same time.

You may for example have a MIDI keyboard with several keyboard zones, where each zone
sends MIDI on a separate channel. Setting the channel to Any allows you to play back the
recording with different sounds for each zone (since the different MIDI notes play back on
separate MIDI channels).
● When you have imported a MIDI file of Type 0.
MIDI files of Type 0 contain only one track, with notes on up to 16 different MIDI channels.
If you were to set this track to a specific MIDI channel, all notes in the MIDI file would be
played back with the same sound. Setting the track to Any causes the imported file to play
back as intended.
536
MIDI Functions
Repeating MIDI Events of Independent Track Loops
Dissolving Parts into Separate Pitches

You can dissolve MIDI parts that contain events of different pitches and distribute the events into
new parts on new tracks, one for each MIDI pitch found. This is useful if the different pitches are
used for separating different sounds such as MIDI drum tracks or sampler sound FX tracks. By
dissolving such parts, you can work with each sound individually, on a separate track.
PROCEDURE
1. Select the parts that contain MIDI events of different pitches.
2. Select MIDI > Dissolve Part.
3. Activate Separate Pitches.
4. Click OK.
RESULT
For each MIDI pitch used in the selected parts, a new MIDI track is created. Each event is copied
into the part on the track for the corresponding pitch, and the original parts are muted.
Repeating MIDI Events of Independent Track Loops

You can repeat the MIDI events inside an independent track loop to fill up a MIDI part. This is
useful if you want to convert the events of an independent track loop to actual MIDI events.
PREREQUISITE
You have set up an independent track loop and the Key Editor is open. The part ends after the
end of the independent track loop.
PROCEDURE
● Select MIDI > Repeat Loop.
RESULT
The events of the independent track loop are repeated to the end of the part. Events that are
located to the right of the independent track loop in the part are replaced.
RELATED LINKS
Setting up the Independent Track Loop on page 391
Extending MIDI Notes

You can extend MIDI notes so that they reach the next notes.
PREREQUISITE
A MIDI part with some note events is open in the Key Editor.
PROCEDURE
1. Select the note events that you want to extend to the next notes.
2. Select MIDI > Functions > Legato.
RESULT
The selected note events are extended to the start of the next notes.
537
MIDI Functions
Fixing MIDI Note Lengths
NOTE
To specify a gap or overlap for this, adjust the Legato Overlap setting in the Preferences dialog
(Editing—MIDI page).
RELATED LINKS
Fixing MIDI Note Lengths

You can set the length of selected MIDI notes to the Length Quantize value.
PREREQUISITE
PROCEDURE
1. On the Key Editor toolbar, open the Length Quantize pop-up menu and select the
desired note length.
2. Select the note events that you want to fix.
3. Select MIDI > Functions > Fixed Lengths.
RESULT
The selected note events are set to the specified Length Quantize value.
RELATED LINKS
Fixing MIDI Note Velocities

You can set the velocity of selected MIDI notes to the Note Insert Velocity value.
PREREQUISITE
PROCEDURE
1. On the Key Editor toolbar, open the Set up Insert Velocities pop-up menu and select a
velocity value.
2. Select the note events that you want to fix.
3. Select MIDI > Functions > Fixed Velocity.
RESULT
The selected note events are set to the specified Note Insert Velocity value.
RELATED LINKS
538
MIDI Functions
Rendering Sustain Pedal Data to Note Lengths
Rendering Sustain Pedal Data to Note Lengths

You can render sustain pedal data to note lengths. This is useful if you recorded MIDI data with a
MIDI keyboard and a sustain pedal, and you want to extend the actual MIDI notes for as long as
you held the pedal, in order to edit the notes later.
PREREQUISITE
You recorded MIDI using a MIDI keyboard and a sustain pedal. The MIDI part is open in the Key
Editor.
PROCEDURE
1. Select the note events.
2. Select MIDI > Functions > Pedals to Note Length.
RESULT
The selected notes are lengthened to match the sustain pedal off position, and the sustain
controller on/off events are removed.
Deleting Overlaps
You can delete overlaps of notes that have the same or different pitches. This is useful if your
MIDI instruments cannot handle overlapping events.
PROCEDURE
● Select MIDI > Functions > Delete Overlaps (mono).
● Select MIDI > Functions > Delete Overlaps (poly).
RESULT
The overlapping MIDI notes are shortened, so that no note begins before another ends.
Editing Velocity
You can manipulate the velocity of notes.
PROCEDURE
2. Select MIDI > Functions > Velocity.
3. Open the Type pop-up menu and select an option.
4. Depending on the Type, enter a Ratio, an Amount or an Upper and Lower value.
5. Click OK.
RESULT
The note velocities are changed according to your settings.
RELATED LINKS
Velocity Dialog on page 540
539
MIDI Functions
Deleting Double Notes
Velocity Dialog
● To open the Velocity dialog, select a MIDI part, and select MIDI > Functions > Velocity.
Add/Subtract
Adds the Amount value to the velocity value. You can enter positive or negative
values.
Compress/Expand
Uses the Ratio setting (0 to 300 %) to compress or expand the dynamic range of
MIDI notes. A factor higher than 1 (over 100 %) expands the differences between
velocity values, while using a factor lower than 1 (under 100 %) compresses them.
● To compress the dynamic range, use ratio values below 100 %.
After compression, you can add a velocity amount to maintain the average
velocity level.
● To expand the dynamic range, use ratio values above 100 %.
Before expansion, you can adjust the velocity to the middle of the range.
Limit
Limits the velocity values so that they stay between the Lower and the Upper values.
Deleting Double Notes

You can delete double notes of the same pitch on the exact same position from selected MIDI
parts. Double notes can occur when recording in cycle mode, after quantizing, for example.
PROCEDURE
1. Select the MIDI part that contains the double notes.
2. Select MIDI > Functions > Delete Doubles.
RESULT
The double notes are automatically deleted.
Deleting Controller Data

You can delete controller data from selected MIDI parts.
PROCEDURE
1. Select the MIDI parts that contain the controller data.
2. Select MIDI > Functions > Delete Controllers.
RESULT
The controller data is automatically deleted.
540
MIDI Functions
Deleting Continuous Controller Data
Deleting Continuous Controller Data

You can delete continuous controller data from selected MIDI parts.
PROCEDURE
1. Select the MIDI parts that contain the controller data.
2. Select MIDI > Functions > Delete Continuous Controllers.
RESULT
The continuous controller data is automatically deleted. However, On/Off events, such as sustain
pedal events, are kept.
Restricting Polyphonic Voices

You can restrict polyphonic voices in selected MIDI notes or parts. This is useful if you have an
instrument with limited polyphony and want to make sure all notes are played.
PROCEDURE
1. Select the MIDI notes or parts that contain the voices.
2. Select MIDI > Functions > Restrict Polyphony.
3. Specify how many voices you want to use.
4. Click OK.
RESULT
The notes are shortened as required, so that they end before the next note starts.
Thinning Out Controller Data

You can thin out controller data in selected MIDI parts. Use this to ease the load on your external
MIDI devices if you have recorded very dense controller curves.
PROCEDURE
1. Select the MIDI parts that contain the controllers that you want to thin out.
2. Select MIDI > Functions > Thin Out Data.
RESULT
The controller data is thinned out.
Extracting MIDI Automation

You can convert continuous controllers of your recorded MIDI parts into MIDI track automation
data, so that you can edit them in the Project window.
PROCEDURE
1. Select the MIDI part that contains the continuous controller data.
2. Select MIDI > Functions > Extract MIDI Automation.
3. Right-click the MIDI or instrument track in the Project window and select Show All Used
Automation (Selected Tracks).
541
MIDI Functions
Reversing the Playback Order of MIDI Events
This shows the MIDI controller data on the automation track.
RESULT
In the Project window, an automation track is created for each of the continuous controllers in
the MIDI part.
In the MIDI editors, the controller data is removed from the controller lane.
NOTE
This only works for continuous controllers. Data such as aftertouch, pitchbend, or SysEx cannot
be converted to MIDI track automation data.
Reversing the Playback Order of MIDI Events

You can invert the order of the selected events or of all events in selected part rhythmically. This
causes the MIDI to play backwards. However, this is different from reversing an audio recording.
The individual MIDI notes still play as usual, but the playback order changes.
PROCEDURE
1. Select the MIDI events or the MIDI part.
2. Select MIDI > Functions > Reverse.
RESULT
The playback order of the events is reversed while the individual notes still play as usual in the
MIDI instrument. Technically, this function reverses the Note On message of a note within a part
or selection.
Inverting the Order of Selected MIDI Events

This function inverts the order of the selected events, or of all events in the selected parts,
graphically. Technically, this function turns a Note On message into a Note Off message and vice
versa, which can lead to rhythmic inaccuracies if the Note Off position of a note has not been
quantized.
PROCEDURE
1. Select the MIDI events or the MIDI part.
2. Select MIDI > Functions > Mirror.
RESULT
The order of the events is inverted while the individual notes still play as usual in the MIDI
instrument. Technically, this function turns a Note On message into a Note Off message and vice
versa which can lead to rhythmic inaccuracies if the Note Off position of a note has not been
quantized.
542
MIDI Editors
There are several ways to edit MIDI in Cubase. You can use the tools and functions in the Project
window for large-scale editing or the functions on the MIDI menu to process MIDI parts in
various ways. To manually edit your MIDI data on a graphical interface, you can use the MIDI
editors.
● The Key Editor presents notes graphically in a piano roll-style grid. The Key Editor also
allows for detailed editing of non-note events such as MIDI controllers.
● The Drum Editor is similar to the Key Editor, but each key corresponds to a separate
drum sound.
You can use the Drum Editor to edit drum or percussion parts.
● The Score Editor shows MIDI notes as a musical score and offers basic score editing and
printing.
RELATED LINKS
Drum Editor on page 612
Score Editor on page 599
Common MIDI Editor Functions

You can use the tools and functions within the MIDI editors to process MIDI parts in various
ways.
Changing the Ruler Display Format

You can change the display format for the ruler. By default, the ruler shows the timeline in the
display format that is selected on the Transport panel.
PROCEDURE
● Click the arrow button to the right of the ruler and select an option from the pop-up menu.
RELATED LINKS
Ruler Display Format Menu on page 40
Zooming in MIDI Editors

The MIDI editors provide several zooming options:
● The zoom sliders.
543
MIDI Editors
● The Zoom tool.

● The Zoom submenu in the Edit menu.
When you use the Zoom tool for zooming, you can determine if you want to zoom horizontal
only or horizontal and vertical at a time.
● To activate/deactivate the corresponding option, activate/deactivate Zoom Tool Standard

Mode: Horizontal Zooming Only in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Tools page).
Using Cut and Paste

You can use the Cut, Copy, and Paste options from the Edit menu to move or copy material
within a part or between different parts.
● To insert note events at the project cursor position without affecting existing notes, select
Edit > Paste.
● To insert note events at the project cursor position, move, and if necessary split the
existing note events to make room for the pasted notes, select Edit > Range > Paste Time.
1 Data on clipboard
2 Cursor position
3 Pasted data at cursor position
Handling Note Events

Event Colors Menu
You can select different color schemes for the note events in the MIDI editor.
● To open the Event Colors pop-up menu, click Event Colors on the toolbar.
Velocity
The note events get different colors depending on their velocity values.
Pitch
The note events get different colors depending on their pitch.
544
MIDI Editors
Channel
The note events get different colors depending on their MIDI channel value.
Part
The note events get the same color as their corresponding part in the Project
window. Use this option if you are working with 2 or more tracks in an editor, to see
which note events belong to which track.
Grid Match
The note events get different colors depending on their time position. For example,
this mode enables you to see if the notes of a chord start at the exact same beat.
Voice
The note events get different colors depending on their voice (soprano, alto, tenor,
etc.).
Scale/Chords
The note events get different colors depending on whether they match the current
chord, scale, or both.
For all of the options except Part and Sound Slot, the pop-up menu also contains a Setup
option. This option opens a dialog in which you can specify the colors that are associated with
velocities, pitches, or channels.
RELATED LINKS
Selecting Note Events on page 546
Event Colors Setup Dialog on page 545
Event Colors Setup Dialog

The event Colors Setup dialog allows you to set up colors for event properties such as velocities,
pitches, channels or chords and scales.
● To open the events Colors Setup dialog for the selected color scheme option, open the
Event Colors pop-up menu in the Key Editor or Drum Editor toolbar, and select Setup.
Pitch Color Setup dialog
545
MIDI Editors
Color fields
Click a field to open the Color Picker that allows you to specify a new color.
Description
Shows further information about the usage of the color.
OK
RELATED LINKS
Selecting Note Events

The selected MIDI editor determines which of the following methods apply.
● Use the Object Selection tool to drag a selection rectangle around the note events that
you want to select. You can also click individual events.
● Select Edit > Select and select one of the options.
● To select the previous or next note event, use the Left Arrow/Right Arrow key.
● To select several notes, press Shift and use the Left Arrow/Right Arrow key.
● To select all notes of a certain pitch, press Ctrl/Cmd and click on a key in the keyboard
display to the left.
● To select all the following note events of the same pitch/staff, press Shift and double-click
a note event.
NOTE
If you select the notes in the event display, the note event is shown in black and only its outline is
shown in color. On the keyboard display, the keys that correspond to the note pitches of the
selected notes are also shown in color.
RELATED LINKS
Select Submenu for Note Events on page 546
Editing on page 757
Select Submenu for Note Events

The Select submenu offers you several options to select note events.
● To open the Select submenu for a note event, select the note event, and select Edit >
Select.
All
Selects all note events in the edited part.
None
Deselects all note events.
Invert
Inverts the selection. All selected note events are deselected and all notes that were
not selected are selected instead.
546
MIDI Editors
In Loop
Selects all note events that are partially or completely inside the boundaries of the
left and right locators (only visible if locators are set).

Selects all note events that begin to the left of the project cursor.
From Cursor to End

Selects all note events that end to the right of the project cursor.
Equal Pitch - all Octaves

Selects all note events of the highlighted part that have the same pitch (in any
octave) as the selected note event.
NOTE
This function requires that a single note event is selected.
Equal Pitch - same Octave

Selects all note events of the highlighted part that have the same pitch (same octave)
as the selected note event.
NOTE
This function requires that a single note event is selected.

Selects the MIDI controller data within the range of the selected note events.
RELATED LINKS
Deleting Note Events on page 547
Muting Note Events

You can mute individual note events in a MIDI editor. Muting individual notes allows you to
exclude note events from playback.
● Click on a note event with the Mute tool.

● Drag a rectangle with the Mute tool, enclosing all note events that you want to mute.
● Select the note events and select Edit > Mute.
● To unmute a note event, click it or enclose it with the Mute tool. You can also select a note
event and select Edit > Unmute.
Muted notes are dimmed in the note display.
Toggle Selections
● To toggle selected elements within a selection rectangle, press Ctrl/Cmd and enclose the
same elements within a new selection rectangle.
Once you release the mouse button, the previous selection is deselected and vice versa.
Deleting Note Events

● To delete note events, click on them with the Erase tool or select them and press
Backspace.
547
MIDI Editors
Delete Notes Dialog

The Delete Notes dialog allows you delete note events that do not match a specific length or
velocity.
● To open the Delete Notes dialog, select a MIDI part in the Project window, and select
MIDI > Functions > Delete Notes.
Minimum Length
Allows you to set a minimum note length in ticks. Notes that are shorter than the set
value are deleted. You can use the value field or the graphical length display. If you
click the field to the right of the graphical length display the scale for the display
changes. You can set it to 1/4 bar, one bar, two bars or four bars.
Minimum Velocity
Allows you to set a minimum note velocity. Notes with a lower velocity than the set
value are deleted.
Remove when under

This option is only available if Minimum Velocity and Minimum Length are both
activated. It allows you to select if both or just one of the criteria must be met for
notes to be deleted.
Trimming Note Events

The Trim tool allows you to cut off the end or the beginning of note events.
PROCEDURE
1. Select the Trim tool on the toolbar.
● To trim the end of a single note event, click on the note event.
● To trim the beginning of a single note event, press Alt and click the note event.
● To trim several note events, click and drag across the note events.
● To set the same start and end time for all edited note events, press Ctrl/Cmd and
vertically drag along the note events.
Editing Note Events on the Info Line

You can move, resize, or change the velocity of note events on the info line using regular value
editing.
● To apply a value change to all selected note events, press Ctrl/Cmd and change a value on
the info line.
● To adjust the pitch or velocity of note events via your MIDI keyboard, click in the Pitch or
Velocity fields on the info line, and play a note on your MIDI keyboard.
548
MIDI Editors
If you have several note events selected and change a value, all selected events are
changed by the set amount.
Duplicating and Repeating Note Events

You can duplicate and repeat note events in the same way as events in the Project window.
● To duplicate the selected note events, hold down Alt/Opt and drag the note events to a
new position.
If Snap is activated, it determines to which positions you can copy notes.
● To copy the selected note events and place them directly behind the original, select Edit >
Functions > Duplicate.
If several note events are selected, all of them are copied as one unit, maintaining the
relative distance between the note events.
● To create a number of copies of the selected note events, select Edit > Functions >
Repeat, specify the number, and click OK.
You can also press Alt/Opt and drag the right edge of the note events to the right to
create copies of the note events.
Finding Exact Positions with Snap

The Snap function restricts horizontal movement and positioning to certain positions. This helps
you find exact positions in the note display when editing note events in a MIDI editor. Affected
operations include moving, duplicating, drawing, sizing, etc.
● To activate/deactivate snap, click Snap.

If you select the Bars+Beats display format, the snap grid is set by the quantize value on
the toolbar. This makes it possible to snap to straight note values and to swing grids that
have been set up in the Quantize Panel.
● If you select any of the other display formats, positioning is restricted to the displayed
grid.
Setting Velocity Values

When you draw note events in the MIDI editor, the note events get the velocity value that is set in
the Note Insert Velocity field on the toolbar. There are different methods to set the velocity.
● Use the Edit Velocity tool modifier. The cursor changes into a speaker, and next to the
note, a field with the Note Velocity slider shows the value. Move the mouse pointer up or
down to change the value.
Value changes are applied to all selected notes.

For this, a tool modifier must be assigned for the Edit Velocity action. You can edit the tool
modifier in the Preferences dialog (Tool Modifiers page).
● Open the Note Insert Velocity pop-up menu and select a velocity value.
On this menu, you can also select Setup and specify custom velocity values for the pop-up
menu.
● Double-click the Note Insert Velocity field on the toolbar and enter a velocity value.
549
MIDI Editors
Controller Display
● Assign key commands to Insert Velocity 1-5 and use them.

This allows you to quickly switch between different velocity values when you enter note
events.
Handling Several MIDI Parts

● To activate a part for editing, open the Currently Edited Part pop-up menu and select a
part.
When you select a part from the list, it is automatically active and centered in the note
display.
● To zoom in on an active part, select Edit > Zoom > Zoom to Event.
● To display defined borders for the active part, activate Show Part Borders.
If this option is activated, all parts, except the active part, are grayed out.
● To restrict editing operations to the active part, activate Edit Active Part Only.
● To change the size of the part, drag the part borders.
The part borders display the name of the active part.
NOTE
If the part that you open for editing is a shared copy, any editing that you perform affects all
shared copies of this part. In the Project window, shared copies are indicated by an equal sign in
the top right corner of the part.
Looping MIDI Parts

The Independent Track Loop function allows you to loop a MIDI part independent of the project
playback.
When you activate the loop, the MIDI events within the loop are repeated continuously while
other events on other tracks are played back as usual. Every time the cycle restarts, the
independent track loop also restarts.
PROCEDURE
1. Activate Independent Track Loop on the toolbar.
If the button is not visible, right-click the toolbar and select Independent Track Loop from
the context menu.
If you have set up a loop range in the Project window, it is hidden from the ruler in the
MIDI editor.
2. Ctrl/Cmd-click in the ruler to specify the start of the independent track loop.
3. Alt/Opt-click in the ruler to specify the end of the independent track loop.
RESULT
The independent loop range is indicated in a different color.
The start and end of the loop range are displayed on the status line.
To repeat the events of the loop range and fill up the active MIDI part, select MIDI > Repeat
Loop.
Controller Display
The area at the bottom of the Key Editor and the Drum Editor is the controller display.
550
MIDI Editors
Controller Display
To show the controller display, do one of the following:
● Open the Controller Lane Setup pop-up menu in the Key Editor, or the Drum Editor, and
select Show/Hide Controller Lanes.
● On the Key Editor or the Drum Editor toolbar, click Set up Window Layout, and activate
Controller Lanes.
1 Note display
Contains a grid in which MIDI notes are displayed as boxes.
2 Controller display
Shows one or multiple controller lanes.
3 Divider
Drag the divider between the note display and the controller display to resize the display
areas.
4 Controller Selection and Functions menu
Allows you to select which controller type is displayed, and contains editing functions for
controller lanes and events.
5 Controller events
The controller display shows the added controller events of the selected controller type
and their current values. Controller events have no length. Their values are valid until the
start of the next event.
551
MIDI Editors
Controller Display
Velocity values are shown as vertical bars, with higher bars corresponding to higher
velocity values. Each velocity bar corresponds to a note in the note display.
All other controller events are shown as steps, with heights corresponding to the values of
the events.
6 Create Controller Lane
Allows you to add controller lanes so that you can view and edit different controllers at the
same time. Each controller lane can show one of the following properties or event types:
● Velocity
● Pitchbend
● Aftertouch
● Poly Pressure
● Program Change
● System Exclusive events
● Continuous Controllers
7 Controller Lane Setup
Contains setup functions for controller lanes, and allows you to add and organize presets.
Controller Lane Setup Menu

The Controller Lane Setup pop-up menu allows you to add lanes and select which event type is
displayed.
● To open the Controller Lane Setup pop-up menu, click Controller Lane Setup at
the bottom left of the controller display.
Add Preset
Opens the Type in Preset Name dialog that allows you to save a preset and enter a
name for it.
Organize Presets
Opens the Organize Presets dialog that allows you to rename and delete presets.
Show Velocity Lane Only

Resets the controller display to show only the velocity lane.
Type of New Controller Events

Allows you to specify whether new controller events should change gradually (Ramp)
or instantly (Step) from the previous curve point to the new one.
NOTE
This only affects new events that you create manually. Recorded MIDI CC events are
always added as steps. This setting is saved with the program.
552
MIDI Editors
Controller Display
Set up Available Controllers

Opens the MIDI Controller Setup dialog that allows you to specify which MIDI
controllers are visible/hidden in the pop-up menu.
Show/Hide Controller Lanes

Shows/Hides the last displayed controller lanes.
Controller Lane Context Menu

● To open the controller lane context menu, right-click in the left area of the controller
display.
Create Controller Lane

Creates a controller lane.
Remove This Lane

Removes the current controller lane.
Select All Events on Lane

Selects all controller events on the current lane.
Cut
Cuts the selected events.
Copy
Copies the selected events to the clipboard.
Paste
Pastes the clipboard data at the cursor position.
Paste at Origin
Pastes the clipboard data back at its original position. Existing events are replaced.
NOTE
You can copy data between different CC lanes.
RELATED LINKS
Controller Display on page 550
Controller Selection and Functions Menu

The Controller Selection and Functions pop-up menu that is shown to the left of a controller
lane allows you to select the displayed controller type. This pop-up menu is only available if at
least one controller lane is shown. It also contains editing functions for controller lanes and
events.
● To open the Controller Selection and Functions pop-up menu, click Controller Selection
and Functions to the left of a controller lane.
553
MIDI Editors
Controller Display
Controller event types

Lists the event types that you can display on the controller lanes. If automation data
already exists for a controller, this is indicated by a rhombus that is displayed to the
left of the controller name.
Select All Events on Lane

Selects all controller events on the current lane.
Remove This Lane

Hides the current controller lane from view.
RELATED LINKS
MIDI Controller Setup Dialog on page 557
Create Controller Lane Menu

The Create Controller Lane pop-up menu allows you to create a new controller lane and select
which controller type is displayed.
● To open the Create Controller Lane pop-up menu, click Create Controller Lane to
the left of the controller display.
554
MIDI Editors
Controller Display
Controller event types

Lists the event types that you can display on the controller lanes. If automation data
already exists for a controller, this is indicated by a rhombus that is displayed to the
left of the controller name.
Select an event type to add the corresponding controller lane to the controller
display.
Show Used Controllers

Opens all controller lanes that have controller events.
Adding Controller Lanes

You can add controller lanes to the controller display. Controller lanes allow you to select a
specific controller type for display, so that you can add and edit controller events of that type.
PROCEDURE
1. Click Create Controller Lane .
2. Select the controller event type from the pop-up menu.
NOTE
If the controller event type that you want to show is not available, open the Controller
Lane Setup pop-up menu and select Set up Available Controllers. You can then set up
the available controller event types in the MIDI Controller Setup dialog.
RESULT
A new controller lane is created.
NOTE
● To hide a controller lane from view, open the Controller Selection and Functions pop-up
menu and select Remove This Lane. This does not affect the events in any way.
● If you hide all lanes, the controller display is hidden. You can bring it back by clicking
Create Controller Lane or by opening the Controller Lane Setup pop-up menu and
selecting Show/Hide Controller Lanes.
RELATED LINKS
Controller Selection and Functions Menu on page 553
Setting up Available Continuous Controllers on page 556
555
MIDI Editors
Controller Display
Displaying a Different Controller Event Type

You can select which event type to display on a controller lane. Each controller lane shows one
event type at a time.
PROCEDURE
● Open the Controller Selection and Functions pop-up menu and select a different event
type.
RELATED LINKS
Setting up Available Continuous Controllers

In the MIDI Controller Setup dialog, you can specify which continuous controllers are available
for selection.
PROCEDURE
1. Select Controller Lane Setup > Set up Available Controllers.
2. In the MIDI Controller Setup dialog, do one of the following:
● In Hidden column, select all controllers that you want to show, and click Add.
● In Visible column, select all controllers that you want to hide and click Remove.
556
MIDI Editors
Controller Display
3. Click OK.
RESULT
The corresponding continuous controllers are now available for selection.
NOTE
The MIDI Controller Setup dialog is available in different areas of the program. The settings are
global, that is, the setup you choose here affects all areas of the program where MIDI controllers
can be selected.
RELATED LINKS
Setting up Available Continuous Controllers on page 556
MIDI Controller Setup Dialog

The MIDI Controller Setup dialog allows you to specify which MIDI controllers are visible/
hidden.
● To open the MIDI Controller Setup dialog, click Controller Lane Setup to the left of the
controller display, and select Set up Available Controllers.
Visible
Lists the MIDI controllers that are visible.
Hidden
Lists the MIDI controllers that are hidden.
Add >>>
Select an item in the Hidden list, and click Add >>> to make it visible.
Remove <<<
Select an item in the Visible list, and click Remove <<< to hide it.
557
MIDI Editors
Controller Display
Saving Controller Lane Presets

You can save a controller lane setup as a controller lane preset. This way, you can have a preset
with one velocity lane and another preset with a combination of several controller lanes, such as
velocity, pitchbend, or modulation.
PREREQUISITE
You have added at least one controller lane and selected a controller event type for display.
PROCEDURE
1. Click Controller Lane Setup.
2. Select Add Preset.
3. In the Type in Preset Name dialog, enter a name for the preset.
4. Click OK.
RESULT
Your controller lane setup is now available as a controller lane preset. The number of lanes and
the displayed event types are saved in the preset.
To load, remove, or rename presets, open the Controller Lane Setup menu, and select Organize
Presets.
RELATED LINKS
Controller Lane Setup Menu on page 552
Editing Velocity Events

Each note event automatically gets a velocity event. You can edit the velocity values of these
events.
PREREQUISITE
You have added a controller lane and set it up to display velocity events. You have added velocity
events for several notes.
PROCEDURE
1. Optional: On the toolbar, activate Acoustic Feedback.
This plays back the notes when you adjust the velocity so that you can audition your
changes.
● On the toolbar, select the Object Selection or the Draw tool and click a velocity bar
in the controller display.
● On the toolbar, select the Object Selection tool, press Alt and click a velocity bar in
the controller display to select it. Change the Velocity value on the info line.
● On the toolbar, select the Line tool and drag in the velocity display to change the
velocity values of several notes.
The velocity value at the project cursor position is displayed below the Controller
Selection and Functions pop-up menu.
558
MIDI Editors
Controller Display
NOTE
If there is more than one note at the same position, their velocity bars overlap. To edit the
velocity of only one of these notes, select the note in the note display. If no note is
selected, all velocity events get the same velocity value.
RESULT
The velocity values change according to your edits.
RELATED LINKS
Adding Velocity Events on page 559
Adding Velocity Events

You can add velocity events by adding note events.
PREREQUISITE
You have added a controller lane.
PROCEDURE
1. Open the Controller Selection and Functions pop-up menu and select Velocity.
2. Select the Draw tool or the Line tool.
3. Click in the note display to add a note event.
This adds a note event and a velocity controller event that you can edit.
RESULT
The velocity values are shown as vertical bars in the controller display. Each velocity bar
corresponds to a note event in the note display. Higher bars correspond to higher velocity
values. The value is valid until the beginning of the next event.
559
MIDI Editors
Controller Display
RELATED LINKS
Adding Controller Lanes on page 555
Line Tool Modes on page 567
Pitchbend Controller Lanes

Pitchbend controller lanes allow you to add and edit pitchbend controller events.
● To add a pitchbend controller lane, open the Controller Selection and Functions menu,
and select Pitchbend.
560
MIDI Editors
Controller Display
1 Value at project cursor

Displays the pitchbend value at the project cursor position. What exactly is shown depends
on the Show Semitones Grid setting in the Grid Settings pane:
● If Show Semitones Grid is activated, this value shows the semitones value at the
project cursor position. The range goes from +96 semitones to -96 semitones. The
value is shown in semitones and cents.
● If Show Semitones Grid is deactivated, this value shows the pitchbend MIDI value
at the project cursor position. The range goes from +8191 steps to -8192 steps.
2 Snap Pitchbend Events
Restricts vertical movement and positioning of controller events to the semitones grid. By
default, activating Snap Pitchbend Events also activates Show Semitones Grid to show
the grid that the events are snapping to.
NOTE
Snap Pitchbend Events is not effective in the controller event editor.
3 Set up Grid
Opens the Grid Settings pane that allows you to set up the semitones grid for the
pitchbend controller lane.
4 Controller value from MIDI device
This value shows up if you input MIDI data for this controller lane from your MIDI device.
5 Semitones grid
The semitones grid shows the semitone values. The amount of grid lines and their width
depends on the settings for Pitchbend Range: Down and Pitchbend Range: Up. By
default, the range is set to +/- 2 semitones, that is, a major second.
561
MIDI Editors
Controller Display
NOTE
You can show the grid even if Snap Pitchbend Events is deactivated.
6 Controller curve
The pitchbend controller curve.
7 Curve Type field
Shows the controller curve type. You can set this to Step or to Ramp/Curve.
RELATED LINKS
Controller Event Editor on page 569
Grid Settings on page 562
Grid Settings
The Grid Settings pane allows you to set up a semitones grid for the pitchbend controller lane.
As grid settings only affect the corresponding track, you can set up different grid settings for
different MIDI or instrument tracks. All grid settings are saved with the project.
● To show the Grid Settings for pitchbend controller lanes, add a pitchbend controller lane,
and click Set up Grid.
Show Semitones Grid

The semitones grid shows the semitone values that the events snap to. The amount
of grid lines and their width depends on the settings for Pitchbend Range: Down
and Pitchbend Range: Up.
NOTE
The grid is a visual help that allows you to find exact semitone positions for
pitchbends easier. Changing the grid does not change the values of pitchbend
events.
Pitchbend Range: Up
Allows you to specify a value between 1 and 96 semitones for the upper grid. By
default, the upper pitchbend range for the grid is set to 2 semitones, allowing you to
specify upward bends from 1 to up to 2 semitones.
Pitchbend Range: Down

Allows you to specify a value between 1 and -96 semitones for the lower grid. By
default, the lower pitchbend range for the grid is set to -2 semitones, allowing you to
specify downward bends from 1 to up to -2 semitones.
562
MIDI Editors
Controller Display
Link
Allows you to link the pitchbend ranges. You can deactivate this if you want to set up
a higher value for the upper range than for the lower range, for example.
NOTE
The actual pitchbend range depends on the settings of the VST or MIDI instrument and the
sound or preset that you are using. To make the most of this feature, make sure to adjust the
pitchbend range settings of your instrument to the settings of the pitchbend controller lane, or
vice versa.
RELATED LINKS
Pitchbend Controller Lanes on page 560
Adding Pitchbend Events

You can add pitchbend events to your note events.
PROCEDURE
1. Open the Create Controller Lane pop-up menu and select Pitchbend.
2. Optional: Click Set up Grid to open the Grid Settings pane, and set up the grid according
to your needs.
3. Optional: Activate Snap Pitchbend Events to snap the pitchbend controller events to the
set grid.
4. Select the Draw tool and click in the controller display to enter as many pitchbend events
as you need.
RESULT
The pitchbend controller events are added.
RELATED LINKS
Create Controller Lane Menu on page 554
Creating Smooth Transitions between Continuous Controller Events on page 566
Editing Pitchbend Events on page 563
Editing Pitchbend Events

PREREQUISITE
You have added a pitchbend controller lane and added pitchbend events.
PROCEDURE
1. On the toolbar, select the Object Selection tool.
2. Optional: Click Set up Grid to open the Grid Settings pane, and set up the grid according
to your needs.
3. In the controller display move the mouse pointer over a pitchbend controller event.
The mouse pointer becomes a pointing hand symbol.
NOTE
You can create smooth transitions between the pitchbend controller events by selecting a
pitchbend controller event and switching the Curve Type on the info line to Ramp/Curve
and editing the curve handles.
563
MIDI Editors
Controller Display
4. Click the pitchbend controller event to select it and drag it to another position.
RELATED LINKS
Adding Pitchbend Events on page 563
Adding Poly Pressure Events

You can add poly pressure events to your note events. Poly pressure events are events that
belong to a specific note number, that is, key. For each poly pressure event, you can edit the note
number and the amount of pressure.
PROCEDURE
1. Click Create Controller Lane .
2. Select Poly Pressure from the menu.
A Poly Pressure controller lane is added. It shows a note number value field to the left of
the controller display.
● Select a note event in the note display to set the note number for the corresponding
pitch. This only works for the topmost of several poly pressure controller lanes.
● If you work with several poly pressure controller lanes, use the pop-up menu in the
note number value field to the left of the controller display to select the note pitch
for that controller lane.
The selected note number is displayed in the upper value field to the left of the controller
display.
4. On the toolbar, select the Draw tool, and add a new poly pressure event.
You can determine the value by moving the mouse up or down in the controller display.

Select a different note number and add poly pressure events for this.
RELATED LINKS
Editing Poly Pressure Events

PREREQUISITE
You have added a controller lane and set it up to display poly pressure events. You have added
poly pressure events for several note numbers.
PROCEDURE
1. Click the arrow button next to the note number to the left of the controller lane.
A pop-up menu with a list of all note numbers for which you inserted poly pressure events
opens.
2. Select a note number from the pop-up menu.
The poly pressure events for the selected note number are shown in the controller lane.
3. On the toolbar, select the Draw tool.
4. Hold down Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt and edit the events in the controller display.
564
MIDI Editors
Controller Display
RELATED LINKS
Adding Poly Pressure Events on page 564
Adding Continuous Controllers

You can add continuous controllers to your note events.
PREREQUISITE
You have added a controller lane.
PROCEDURE
1. Open the Controller Selection and Functions pop-up menu and select a continuous
controller.
2. Select the Draw tool or the Line tool.
● To add a single event, click in the controller display.
● To add a multiple events, click and drag in the controller display.
● To add a Modulation (CC1) event, copy note events from the Key Editor note
display and paste them on a controller lane in the controller display.
When you move the Draw tool on the controller lane, a tooltip shows the position and the
controller value at the mouse position.
RESULT
The added events are added as steps that correspond to the event values. The beginning of an
event is marked by a curve point. Controller events have no length. The value of a controller
event in the display is valid until the beginning of the next controller event.
RELATED LINKS
Adding Controller Lanes on page 555
Editing Continuous Controllers

You can edit the values of the continuous controller events that you added or recorded.
PREREQUISITE
You have added a controller lane and set it up to display controller events. You have added
controller events for several notes.
PROCEDURE
1. On the toolbar, select the Object Selection, the Draw, or the Line tool.
● If you selected the Draw, or the Line tool, drag in the controller display.
● If you selected the Object Selection tool, press Alt and drag in the controller
display.
RESULT
The controller event is edited.
565
MIDI Editors
Controller Display
RELATED LINKS
Creating Smooth Transitions between Continuous Controller Events

By default, when recording or drawing MIDI continuous controller events, these are inserted as
steps. If this is not what you want, you can create smooth transitions between the events.
PREREQUISITE
You have recorded MIDI data with continuous controller events.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Project window, double-click the MIDI part.
2. In the Key Editor, open the Create Controller Lane menu, and select Show Used
Controllers.
The controller lanes for all controller events that you have recorded are shown in the
controller display.
3. Locate the controller lane of the continuous controller that you want to edit, and select a
controller event.
The info line of the Key Editor displays information about the selected controller event,
such as Type, Start position, Value, Channel, and Curve Type.

● On the info line, change the option in the Curve Type field from Step to Ramp/
Curve.
NOTE
You can change the curve type for several controller events by selecting them and
then changing the value in the Curve Type field.
● In the controller display, move the mouse pointer between two controller events
and double-click the handle that appears to change the curve type from Step to
Ramp/Curve.
5. Move the mouse pointer over the ramp, click the handle, and move it upwards or
downwards to change the ramp into a curve shape.
RESULT
The ramp changes into a curve.
When you play back ramps/curves, the data between two MIDI continuous controller events are
interpolated to a suitable MIDI data resolution. You can visualize this by selecting MIDI > Merge
MIDI in Loop or MIDI > Freeze MIDI Modifiers, or by exporting the part as a MIDI file.
NOTE
Ramp/Curve controller curves are more demanding on the performance of the application.

You can use the controller lane context menu to cut, copy, and paste controller events.
566
MIDI Editors
Controller Display
RELATED LINKS
Controller Lane Context Menu on page 553
Continuous Controllers and MIDI Automation

You can not only record or enter MIDI controller data for a MIDI part in the controller lane, but
also or for an automation track in the Project window.
To show and edit MIDI controller data on the automation track, you must extract the MIDI
automation from the MIDI part.
MIDI controller data from the automation track is also displayed on the controller lane. However,
you cannot edit this data on the controller lane.
On the controller lane, you can also see the controller curve that is applied before the part starts.
This tells you which controller value is being used at the starting point of the part so that you can
choose the start value accordingly.
RELATED LINKS
Extracting MIDI Automation on page 541
MIDI Part Data vs. Track Automation

You can enter or record MIDI controller data as automation data on an automation track or as
part data in the MIDI part.
● If Read Automation for a track is enabled, controller data is written as automation data
on an automation track in the Project window.
● If Read Automation is disabled, the controller data is written in the MIDI part and can be
viewed and edited for example in the Key Editor.
Nevertheless, you can end up with both kinds of controller data for a MIDI part if you recorded
controller part data in one pass and automation data during another. In this case, these
conflicting data types are combined during playback as follows:
● Part automation only begins when the first controller event within the part is reached. At
the end of the part, the last controller value is kept until an automation breakpoint is
reached on the automation track.
Line Tool Modes

You can use the different Line tool modes to edit controller events.
● To select a line mode, click the Line tool on the Key Editor or the Drum Editor toolbar,
and click again to open a pop-up menu with the available modes.
The following modes are available:
Line
In this mode you can draw events in a straight line by clicking in the controller
display and dragging the cursor to where you want the ramp to end.
NOTE
If Snap is activated, the Length Quantize value determines the density of created
controller curves. For very smooth curves, use a small Length Quantize value or
567
MIDI Editors
Controller Display
deactivate Snap. Beware that very dense controller curves can cause MIDI playback
to stutter.
Parabola
In this mode you can draw events on a parabola curve. This gives more natural
curves and fades.
You can use modifier keys to determine the shape of the parabola curve.
● To reverse the parabola curve, press Ctrl/Cmd.
● To change the position of the whole curve, press Alt/Opt.
● To increase or decrease the exponent, press Shift.
NOTE
to stutter.
Sine, Triangle, and Square

These modes create different periodic waveform curves.
The quantize value determines the period of the curve that is the length of one curve
cycle. The Length Quantize value determines the density of the events.
NOTE
If you set Length Quantize to Quantize Link and you enter data in Sine, Triangle or
Square mode, the density of the events depends on the zoom factor.
You can use modifier keys to determine the shape of the curve.
● To change the phase of the beginning of the curve, press Ctrl/Cmd.
● To change the position of the whole curve, press Alt/Opt-Ctrl/Cmd.
● To change the maximum position of the triangle curve or the pulse of the
square curve in Triangle and Square mode, press Shift-Ctrl/Cmd. This creates
sawtooth curves.
● You can also set the curve period freely by holding down Shift when you insert
events in Sine, Triangle, or Square mode. Activate Snap, Shift-click and drag
to set the length of one period. The period length will be a multiple of the
quantize value.
Paint
In this mode, you can draw in multiple notes.
NOTE
to stutter.
568
MIDI Editors
Controller Display
Controller Event Editor

The controller event editor allows you to perform additional scaling operations for selection
ranges on existing controller curves.
● To open the controller event editor, activate the Object Selection tool and drag a selection
rectangle on the controller lane.
● To open the controller event editor for velocity lanes, select multiple MIDI notes in the
note display or activate the Object Selection tool, press Alt and drag a selection rectangle
on the controller lane or to get the Object Selection tool.
The controller event editor features the following smart controls for specific editing modes:
1 Tilt Left
If you click in the upper left corner of the editor, you can tilt the left part of the curve. This
allows you to tilt the event values at the start of the curve upwards or downwards.
2 Compress Left
If you Alt/Opt-click in the upper left corner of the editor, you can compress or expand the
left part of the curve. This allows you to compress or expand the event values at the start
of the curve.
3 Scale Vertically
If you click in the middle of the upper border of the editor, you can scale the curve
vertically. This allows you to raise or lower the event values of the curve in percent.
4 Move Vertically
If you click on the upper border of the editor, you can move the entire curve vertically. This
allows you to raise or lower the values of the event values of the curve.
5 Compress Right
If you Alt/Opt-click in the upper right corner of the editor, you can compress or expand
the right part of the curve. This allows you to compress or expand the event values at the
end of the curve.
6 Tilt Right
If you click in the upper right corner of the editor, you can tilt the right part of the curve.
This allows you to tilt the event values at the end of the curve upwards or downwards.
7 Scale Around Relative Center
If you Alt/Opt-click in the middle right border of the editor, you can scale the curve relative
to its center. This allows you to raise or lower the event values horizontally around the
center of the editor.
8 Scale Around Absolute Center
If you click in the middle right corner of the editor, you can scale the curve absolute to its
center. This allows you to raise or lower the event values horizontally around the center of
the editor.
9 Stretch
If you click on the lower border of the editor, you can stretch the curve horizontally. This
allows you to move the event values of the curve to the left or to the right.
569
MIDI Editors
Key Editor
Auto Select Controllers

Auto Select Controllers automatically selects controller data of the selected MIDI notes. This is
useful as selected controllers for notes will be moved when you move the corresponding notes.
● To show Auto Select Controllers, right-click the Key Editor or the Drum Editor toolbar,
and select Auto Select Controllers.
If you activate Auto Select Controllers, controllers that belong to a note event are automatically
selected when you select the note event.
RELATED LINKS
Moving Events in the Controller Display

You can move events of a controller curve in the controller display. This only works for curve type
controller events such as continuous controllers, pitchbend, aftertouch, poly pressure, and
program change.
PROCEDURE
● With the Object Selection tool, drag to create a selection rectangle that
encompasses the events that you want to move.
● On the toolbar, activate Auto Select Controllers. In the note display, select the
notes whose controllers you want to move.
● In the note display, select the notes whose controllers you want to move, and select
Edit > Select > Select Controllers in Note Range to select the controllers within the
range of the selected notes.
2. Move the note/controller events.
RESULT
The controller events are moved to the new position. Snap is taken into account.
RELATED LINKS
Select Controllers in Note Range: Use Extended Note Context on page 759
Key Editor
The Key Editor is the default MIDI editor. It displays notes graphically in a piano roll-style grid.
The Key Editor allows for detailed editing of notes and non-note events, such as MIDI
controllers.
You can open the Key Editor in a separate window or in a tab in the lower zone of the Project
window. Opening the Key Editor in the lower zone of the Project window is useful if you want to
access the Key Editor functions from within a fixed zone of the Project window.
To open a MIDI part in the Key Editor, do one of the following:
● Double-click a MIDI part in the Project window.

● Select a MIDI part in the Project window and press Return or Ctrl/Cmd-E.
● Select a MIDI part in the Project window and select MIDI > Open Key Editor.
570
MIDI Editors
Key Editor
Key Editor. Select a MIDI part in the Project window and use the key command.
NOTE
If you select MIDI > Set up Editor Preferences, the Preferences dialog opens on the Editors
page. Make your changes to specify if you want the editors to open in a separate window or in
the lower zone of the Project window.
The Key Editor window:
The Key Editor is shown in the Editor tab in the lower zone of the Project window:
The Key Editor is divided into several sections:
571
MIDI Editors
Key Editor
1 Toolbar
Contains tools and settings.
2 Status line
Informs about the mouse time position, the mouse value, and the current chord.
3 Info line
Displays note event information about a selected MIDI note.
4 Ruler
Displays the timeline.
5 Key Editor Inspector
Contains tools and functions for working with MIDI data.
6 Note display
Contains a grid in which MIDI notes are displayed as boxes.
7 Piano keyboard display
Helps you to find the right note number.
The area below the note display consists of one or multiple controller lanes.
NOTE
You can activate/deactivate the status line, the info line, and the controller lanes by clicking Set
up Window Layout on the toolbar and activating/deactivating the corresponding options.
RELATED LINKS
Status Line on page 578
Note Display on page 581
Piano Keyboard Display on page 582
Controller Display on page 550
Key Editor Toolbar

The toolbar contains tools and settings for the Key Editor.
elements.
Default Items
Solo Editor
Solos the editor during playback if the editor has the focus.
Record in Editor
Enables the recording of MIDI data in the editor if the editor has the focus.
NOTE
This only works if MIDI Record Mode is set to Merge or Replace.
572
MIDI Editors
Key Editor
Insert MIDI Retrospective Recording in Editor
Left Divider
Left Divider
always shown.
Pitch Visibility
Pitch Visibility On/Off
Deactivate this to show all pitches in the note display. Activate this to reduce the
pitches in the note display according to the selected pitch visibility option.
Select Pitch Visibility Options
Allows you to determine which pitches are displayed in the note display:
● Show Pitches with Events shows only the pitches for which events are
available in the note display.
● Show Pitches from Scale Assistant shows only the pitches that match the
musical scale that is selected in the Scale Assistant section of the Inspector.
Auto-Scroll
Auto-Scroll
Acoustic Feedback
Acoustic Feedback
Automatically plays back events when you move or transpose them, or when you
create them by drawing.
Tool Buttons
Object Selection
Draw
Draws events.
573
MIDI Editors
Key Editor
Erase
Deletes events.
Trim
Trims events.
Split
Splits events.
Glue
Glues together events of the same pitch.
Mute
Mutes events.
Zoom
Line

Automatically selects controller data of the selected MIDI notes.

Activates/Deactivates the independent track loop.
Insert Velocity
Note Insert Velocity
Allows you to specify a velocity value for new notes.
Nudge Palette
Trim Start Left
Trim Start Right
574
MIDI Editors
Key Editor
Move Left
Move Right
Trim End Left
Trim End Right
Transpose Palette
Move Up
Transposes the selected event up by a half note.
Move Down
Transposes the selected event down by a half note.
Move Up More
Transposes the selected event up by an octave.
Move Down More
Transposes the selected event down by an octave.
Snap
Snap On/Off
Activates/Deactivates the Snap function.
Snap Type
Allows you to select one of the following snap types:

● Grid snaps events to the grid that is selected in the Quantize Presets pop-up
menu.
● Grid Relative keeps the relative positions when snapping events to the grid.
● Events snaps events to the start or end of other events.
● Shuffle changes the order of events if you drag one event to the left or right of
other events.
● Cursor snaps events to the cursor position.
575
MIDI Editors
Key Editor
● Grid + Cursor snaps events to the quantize grid that is selected in the
Quantize Presets pop-up menu or to the cursor position.
● Events + Cursor snaps events to the start or end of other events, or to the
cursor position.
● Grid + Events + Cursor snaps events to the quantize grid that is selected in
the Quantize Presets pop-up menu, to the start or end of other events or to
the cursor position.
Grid Type
Allows you to select one of the following grid types:

● Use Quantize activates a grid where events snap to the value that is selected
in the Quantize Presets pop-up menu.
● Adapt to Zoom activates a grid where events snap to the zoom level.
Quantize
Apply Quantize
Quantize Presets
Allows you to select a quantize or a groove preset.
Open Quantize Panel
Length Quantize
Length Quantize
Allows you to set a value for quantizing event lengths.

Show Part Borders
Shows/Hides part borders for the active MIDI part within the left and right locators.
activate a part.
576
MIDI Editors
Key Editor
Step/MIDI Input
Step Input
Activates/Deactivates MIDI step input.
MIDI Input/Note Expression MIDI Input
Activates/Deactivates MIDI input and note expression MIDI input.
Move Insert Mode
Moves all note events to the right of the step input position to the right to make
room for the inserted event when you insert notes.
NOTE
This only works if Step Input is activated.
Record Pitch
Includes the pitch when you insert notes.
Record NoteOn Velocity
Includes the NoteOn velocity when you insert notes.
Record NoteOff Velocity
Includes the NoteOff velocity when you insert notes.
Event Colors
Event Colors
Allows you to select event colors.
Right Divider
Right Divider
Allows you to use the right divider. Tools that are placed to the right of the divider
are always shown.

This button is available in the Editor tab in the lower zone. It opens the editor in a
separate window.
Open in Lower Zone
This button is available in the editor window. It opens the Editor tab in the lower
zone of the Project window.
577
MIDI Editors
Key Editor
Set up Toolbar
RELATED LINKS
Zooming in MIDI Editors on page 543
Status Line
The status line shows information about the mouse time position, the mouse value, and the
current chord.
● To show the status line, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar, and activate Status
Line.
The on/off status of the status line in the Key Editor window and in the Editor tab in the lower
zone of the Project window are independent of each other.
Mouse Time Position

Displays the exact time position of the mouse pointer, depending on the selected
ruler display format. This lets you edit or insert notes at exact positions.
Mouse Value
Displays the exact pitch of the mouse pointer position in the event display. This
facilitates finding the right pitch when entering or transposing notes.
If you move the mouse in the controller display, the controller event value at the
mouse cursor position is displayed.
Current Chord Display

When the project cursor is positioned over notes that form a chord, the chord is
displayed here.
RELATED LINKS
Looping MIDI Parts on page 550
Info Line
The info line shows values and properties of the selected events. If several notes are selected, the
values for the first note are displayed in color.
● To show the info line, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar, and activate Info Line.
Length and position values are displayed in the selected ruler display format.
The on/off status of the info line in the Key Editor window and in the Editor tab in the lower zone
of the Project window are independent of each other.
RELATED LINKS
Editing Note Events on the Info Line on page 548
Changing the Ruler Display Format on page 543
578
MIDI Editors
Key Editor
Key Editor Inspector

In a MIDI editor, the Inspector is located left of the note display. The Key Editor Inspector
contains tools and functions for working with MIDI data.
Chord Editing
Allows you to enter chords instead of single notes.
Quantize
Allows you to access the main quantize parameters. These are identical with the
functions on the Quantize panel.
Transpose
Allows you to access the main parameters for transposing MIDI events.
Length
Contains length-related options, similar to the Functions submenu of the MIDI
menu.
● To change the length of the selected MIDI events or all events of the active
part if no events are selected, use the Scale Length/Scale Legato slider.
At the maximum value the notes reach the beginning of the next note.
● To make the new length settings permanent, click Freeze MIDI Lengths.
● To fine-tune the distance between consecutive notes, use the Overlap slider.
At 0 Ticks, the Scale Length/Scale Legato slider extends each note so that it
reaches the next note exactly. Positive values cause the notes to overlap and
negative values allow you to define a small gap between the notes.
● To use the Legato function or slider to extend a note until the next selected
note, activate Extend to Next Selected.
This is identical with activating the Legato Mode: Between Selected Notes
Only option in the Preferences dialog.
Scale Assistant
Allows you to select a musical scale that highlights all note events whose pitches
belong to this scale.
Set up Inspector
Allows you to open a dialog to edit the Inspector settings for the editor. Click Set up
Inspector, and from the pop-up menu, select Setup.
NOTE
If you open the Key Editor in the lower zone, these sections are shown in the Editor Inspector in
the left zone.
RELATED LINKS
Scale Assistant in the Key Editor on page 580
579
MIDI Editors
Key Editor
Scale Assistant in the Key Editor

The Scale Assistant section of the Key Editor Inspector helps you to match note events to a
musical scale.
Scale Assistant Status Indicator

Shows the on/off status of the Scale Assistant.
Use Editor Scale

Allows you to select a scale for the notes in the Key Editor note display.
● Editor Scale
Allows you to select a scale.
● Scale Suggestions
Shows the number of scale suggestions. Open the pop-up menu to select a
scale suggestion. To get scale suggestions for specific notes, you must select
them. If no note is selected, the scale suggestions are made for all notes.
Use Chord Track

Allows you to select a scale based on the chord track.
● Chord Track Mode
Allows you to select whether you want to use the scale events of the chord
track, the chord events, or both to find a scale.
Show Scale Note Guides

Changes the note event display background according to the selected scale. Pitches
that do not belong to the selected scale are shown with a darker background.
Snap Pitch Editing

Snaps the pitches or the notes to the selected scale when you add, edit, or move
them.
NOTE
Snap Pitch Editing does not apply when you change pitches using the Pitch value
field on the info line or if you record notes via MIDI input.
Snap Live Input

Automatically corrects the pitches of incoming notes according to the selected scale.
NOTE
This only works if Record in Editor is activated.
580
MIDI Editors
Key Editor
Quantize Pitches
Quantizes the pitches of the selected notes to the nearest pitch of the selected scale.
RELATED LINKS
Using Live Input on page 645
Matching Note Events to a Musical Scale on page 586
Using the Chord Track to Match Note Events to a Musical Scale on page 587
Quantizing MIDI Note Pitches to Musical Scales on page 588
Mapping Incoming MIDI Note Pitches to Musical Scales on page 588
Snapping MIDI Note Pitches to Musical Scales While Editing on page 589
Note Display
The note display is the main zone in the Key Editor. It contains a grid in which note events are
shown as boxes.
The width of a box corresponds to the note length. The vertical position of a box corresponds to
the note number (pitch), with higher note events higher up in the grid.
Depending on the zoom factor, the note events show the note names.
NOTE
You can change the naming format and the note names of the pitches in the Pitch Notation
section of the Preferences dialog (Event Display—Chords&Pitches page).
You can activate Pitch Visibility On/Off on the Key Editor toolbar to show only the pitches with
events or the pitches suggested by the Scale Assistant. This hides the keyboard keys whose
pitches are not used and shows note names on the remaining keys.
581
MIDI Editors
Key Editor
RELATED LINKS
Pitch Notation on page 763
Pitch Visibility Options on page 584
Piano Keyboard Display

The piano keyboard display is shown to the left of the note display in the Key Editor.
The piano keyboard gives you a visual orientation over the pitch positions in the note display,
helping you to find specific note pitches.
You can click a key to listen to the pitch and the sound of the connected instrument.
If you move the mouse to the far left of the piano keyboard display, the mouse pointer changes,
allowing you to scroll up and down and to zoom in and out of the keyboard display:
● Drag upwards/downwards to scroll up/down in the piano keyboard display.

● Dag to the right/left to zoom in on/out of the piano keyboard display.
The C keys show the note names of the corresponding pitches.
You can activate Pitch Visibility On/Off on the Key Editor toolbar to show only the pitches with
events or the pitches suggested by the Scale Assistant. This hides the keyboard keys whose
pitches are not used and shows note names on the remaining keys.
NOTE
You can change the naming format and the note names of the pitches in the Pitch Notation
section of the Preferences dialog (Event Display—Chords&Pitches page).
If you select note events in the event display, the corresponding keys on the piano keyboard
display are shown in the same color as the note event.
If you move the mouse pointer in the event display, the corresponding pitch position on the
piano keyboard display is highlighted.
582
MIDI Editors
Key Editor
RELATED LINKS
Pitch Notation on page 763
Showing Specific Pitches in the Key Editor

You can define which pitches are visible in the event display and the piano keyboard display of
the Key Editor. By hiding pitches that you do not need, you can save screen space. This is useful
if you add note events that span more than one octave and you want to display all of them, for
example.
PROCEDURE
1. On the Key Editor toolbar, open the Select Pitch Visibility Options pop-up menu.
● To show only the pitches for which events are available in the note display, select
Show Pitches with Events.
NOTE
If you edit multiple MIDI parts, the pitches of all note events in the different MIDI
parts are taken into account. The visible pitches are updated according to the MIDI
part selection in the Project window.
● To show only the pitches that match the musical scale that is selected in the Scale
Assistant section of the Key Editor Inspector, select Show Pitches from Scale
Assistant.
RESULT
The note display and the piano keyboard display are changed according to your settings.
EXAMPLE
If you selected Show Pitches from Scale Assistant in the Select Pitch Visibility Options pop-up
menu and the Scale Assistant uses a specific scale, but some of the notes in the note display do
not match the scale, this is indicated by the color of the note events, and by the exclamation
mark on the corresponding keys on the keyboard display.
583
MIDI Editors
Key Editor
RELATED LINKS
Pitch Visibility Options

The pitch visibility options allow you to show or hide specific pitches from the Key Editor event
display and the piano keyboard display. Pitch visibility options are saved with the program. If a
setting leads to a situation where no pitches would be shown, all pitches are shown instead.
● To open the pitch visibility options, click Select Pitch Visibility Options on the Key Editor
toolbar.
Show Pitches with Events

Allows you to show only the pitches for which events are available in the note display.
NOTE
If you edit multiple MIDI parts, the pitches of all note events in the different MIDI
parts are taken into account. The visible pitches are updated according to the MIDI
part selection in the Project window.
Show Pitches from Scale Assistant

Allows you to show only the pitches that match the musical scale that is selected in
the Scale Assistant section of the Key Editor Inspector.
● Use Editor Scale
Shows only notes that match the editor scale.
584
MIDI Editors
Key Editor
NOTE
If the note display contains note events on pitches that do not match the
selected scale, the corresponding keys on the keyboard display are shown with
an exclamation mark. If you activate the Scale/Chords option in the Event
Colors pop-up menu on the Key Editor toolbar, the non-matching note events
are shown in a different color.
● Use Chord Track

Shows only notes that match the chord track. The Chord Track Mode that you
selected for the Scale Assistant determines if the pitches of the scale, the
chord, or both are visible.
RELATED LINKS
Showing Specific Pitches in the Key Editor on page 583
Pitch Editing with Reduced Pitch Visibility

If you edit pitches and you reduced the pitch visibility using one of the Select Pitch Visibility
Options, you must consider some general program behavior.
As a general rule, you can only move note events to pitch positions that are visible. This applies
to moving note events upwards/downwards with the mouse, using the corresponding key
command, or using the cursor keys.
Exceptions
If you want to access specific pitch positions that are not displayed, you have the following
possibilities:
● To move note events to pitch positions that are not visible, use the Pitch value field on the
info line.
● To move note events by octaves, select the note event and press Shift-Up Arrow to move
it up an octave or Shift-Down Arrow to move it down an octave.
● To move chord notes, open the Chord Editing section and activate an option in the
Inversions or Drop Notes section.
In all these cases, the note display and the piano keyboard display extend to show the new
pitches.
RELATED LINKS
585
MIDI Editors
Key Editor Operations

This section describes the principal editing operations within the Key Editor.
Matching Note Events to a Musical Scale

You can select a musical scale that is based on all or selected note events in the Key Editor and
match note events to it.
PROCEDURE
1. Open a MIDI part in the Key Editor.
2. Open the Scale Assistant section of the Inspector, and activate Use Editor Scale.
● Select some note events in the note display if you want to get suggestions of
musical scales that match those notes.
● Deselect all note events in the note display if you want to get suggestions of musical
scales that match all notes of the MIDI part.
4. Activate Show Scale Note Guides.
This changes the background of the event display according to the selected scale so that
pitches that do not belong to the scale are shown with a darker background.
5. On the Key Editor toolbar, set Event Colors to Scale/Chords.
This changes the colors of the note events in the event display according to whether or not
the pitches match the selected musical scale.
NOTE
To view the color scheme of the selected color mode, open the Event Colors pop-up menu
and select Setup.
6. Open the Scale Suggestions pop-up menu, and select one of the options.
7. Optional: On the Key Editor toolbar, open the Select Pitch Visibility Options pop-up
menu, and select Show Pitches from Scale Assistant.
This filters the note display and the piano keyboard display so that they show only the
pitches that match the selected musical scale.
RESULT
The coloring of the event display background and the note events gives you a visual guide for
editing note pitches.
If you need more assistance to match note events to the nearest pitches of the selected musical
scale, you can click Quantize Pitches to quantize pitches of already existing MIDI notes, activate
Snap Pitch Editing to snap the note pitches of MIDI notes while editing, or Snap Live Input to
map the note pitches of incoming MIDI.
RELATED LINKS
586
MIDI Editors
Using the Chord Track to Match Note Events to a Musical Scale

You can select a musical scale that is defined by chords or scales on the chord track and match
note events to it.
PREREQUISITE
You have added a chord track with chord events to your project.
PROCEDURE
1. Open a MIDI part in the Key Editor.
2. Open the Scale Assistant section of the Inspector, and activate Use Chord Track.
3. Open the Chord Track Mode pop-up menu and do one of the following:
● Select Scales if you want to match note events to the scale events on the chord
track.
● Select Chords if you want to match note events to the chord events on the chord
track.
● Select Chords & Scales if you want to match note events to both scale and chord
events on the chord track.
This changes the background of the event display according to the selected scale so that
pitches that do not belong to the scale are shown with a darker background.
5. On the Key Editor toolbar, set Event Colors to Scale/Chords.
This changes the colors of the note events in the event display according to whether or not
the pitches match the selected musical scale.
NOTE
To view the color scheme of the selected color mode, open the Event Colors pop-up menu
and select Setup.
6. Optional: On the Key Editor toolbar, open the Select Pitch Visibility Options pop-up
menu, and select Show Pitches from Scale Assistant.
This filters the note display and the piano keyboard display so that they show only the
pitches that match the selected musical scale.
RESULT
The coloring of the event display background and the note events gives you a visual guide for
editing note pitches.
NOTE
As you might have added different scale/chord events at specific time positions, the scale
indications in the event display background and on the note events change along the timeline.

If you need more assistance to match note events to the nearest pitches of the selected musical
scale, you can click Quantize Pitches to quantize pitches of already existing MIDI notes, activate
Snap Pitch Editing to snap the note pitches of MIDI notes while editing, or activate Snap Live
Input to map the note pitches of incoming MIDI.
RELATED LINKS
587
MIDI Editors

Quantizing MIDI Note Pitches to Musical Scales

You can quantize MIDI note pitches to the nearest pitch of the selected scale.
PREREQUISITE
In the Key Editor, you have selected a scale for your MIDI notes or you have selected a Chord
Track Mode.
PROCEDURE
1. Open the Scale Assistant section of the Inspector.
2. Optional: Activate Show Scale Note Guides.
● Select the notes in the note event display whose pitches you want to quantize.
● Deselect all notes in the note event display to quantize all note pitches of the MIDI
part.
4. Click Quantize Pitches.
RESULT
All note pitches that do not match the selected scale are quantized to the nearest pitches in the
scale.
RELATED LINKS
Mapping Incoming MIDI Note Pitches to Musical Scales

When monitoring or recording in the Key Editor, you can map the note pitches of incoming MIDI
to the nearest pitches of the selected scale.
PREREQUISITE
In the Key Editor, you have selected a scale for the MIDI notes or you have selected a Chord
Track Mode.
PROCEDURE
3. On the Key Editor toolbar, activate Record in Editor.
4. Click Start on the Transport panel or in the Transport Bar to start playback.
5. Activate Snap Live Input.
6. Play or record some notes on your MIDI keyboard.
RESULT
The pitches of the played or recorded notes are automatically mapped to the selected scale.
588
MIDI Editors
RELATED LINKS
Snapping MIDI Note Pitches to Musical Scales While Editing

You can snap the note pitches of MIDI notes to the nearest pitches of the selected scale while
editing in the Key Editor.
PREREQUISITE
In the Key Editor, you have selected a scale for your MIDI notes or you have selected a Chord
Track Mode.
PROCEDURE
3. Activate Snap Pitch Editing.
● Insert a note event with the Draw tool, the Object Selection tool, or with the Line
tool.
● Drag a note event upwards or downwards with the mouse.
● Select a note event and use the Up Arrow/Down Arrow keys.
RESULT
The notes snap to pitches of the selected scale. You cannot place notes on pitches outside of the
scale. If you select multiple notes and move them to different pitches, all selected notes snap to
the pitches of the selected scale.
NOTE
Snap Pitch Editing does not apply when you change pitches using the Pitch value field on the
info line or if you record notes via MIDI input.
RELATED LINKS
Drawing Note Events with the Draw Tool on page 590
Inserting Note Events with the Object Selection Tool on page 589
Drawing Note Events with the Line Tool on page 591
Moving and Transposing Note Events on page 592
Modifying Note Values while Inserting Notes on page 591
Inserting Note Events with the Object Selection Tool

You can insert note events with the Object Selection tool.
PREREQUISITE
You have set up the length for the note events quantize value in the Length Quantize pop-up
menu of the toolbar.
589
MIDI Editors
PROCEDURE
● In the note display, double-click with the Object Selection tool at the position where you
want to insert a note.
RESULT
A note is inserted at the position where you double-clicked with the length that you have set up
in the Length Quantize pop-up menu.
Deleting Note Events

PROCEDURE
● Select the Erase tool and click the event.
● Select the Object Selection tool and double-click the event.
RESULT
The note event is deleted.
RELATED LINKS
Drawing Note Events with the Draw Tool

The Draw tool allows you to insert single note events in the note display.
When you move the cursor inside the note display, its position is indicated on the status line. Its
pitch is indicated both on the status line and on the piano keyboard to the left.
● To draw a note, click in the note display.

The note event has the length that is set on the Length Quantize pop-up menu.
● To draw longer note events, click and drag in the note display.
The length of the note event is a multiple of the Length Quantize value. If Length
Quantize is set to Quantize Link, the note value is determined by the quantize grid. The
Snap function is taken into account.
590
MIDI Editors
NOTE
To temporarily switch from the Object Selection tool to the Draw tool, hold down Alt/Opt.
Modifying Note Values while Inserting Notes

When inserting note events, you can modify specific note values on the fly.
● To edit the note velocity, drag upwards or downwards.

● To edit the note pitch, hold down Alt/Opt and drag upwards or downwards.
● To edit the note length, drag to the left or to the right.
● To edit the time position, hold down Shift and drag to the left or to the right.
NOTE
You can activate/deactivate Snap temporarily by holding down Ctrl/Cmd.
Drawing Note Events with the Line Tool

In the note display, the Line tool allows you to draw a series of contiguous note events along
different line shapes.
● To create contiguous note events, click and drag in the note display.
● To restrict movement to horizontal, press Ctrl/Cmd and drag.
The notes have the same pitch.
If Snap is activated, the note events and controller events are positioned and sized according to
the Quantize and Length Quantize values.
RELATED LINKS
Line Tool Modes

The Line tool allows you to create a series of contiguous note events along different line shapes.
You can also edit multiple controller events simultaneously.
● To open the Line tool modes, click Line.
The following line modes are available:
Line
If this option is activated, you can click and drag to insert note events in the note
display along a straight line in any angle. Use this option to edit controller data along
a straight line in the controller display.
Parabola, Sine, Triangle, Square

These modes insert note events along different curve shapes.
591
MIDI Editors
Paint
This mode allows you to insert note events by painting in the note display.
Moving and Transposing Note Events

There are several options to move and transpose note events.
● To move note events in the editor, select the Object Selection tool and drag them to a
new position.
All selected note events are moved, maintaining their relative positions. Snap is taken into
account.
● To allow only horizontal or only vertical movement, hold down Ctrl/Cmd while dragging.
● To move note events via the Nudge Palette buttons on the toolbar, select the note events
and click a Nudge Palette button.
This moves the selected note events by the Snap value in the drum sound list.
● To move note events to the project cursor position, select the note events and select Edit >
Move to > Cursor.
● To move a note event via the info line, select a note event and edit the Position or Pitch on
the info line.
● To transpose note events, select the note events and use the Up Arrow/Down Arrow keys.
● To transpose note events via the Transpose Setup dialog, select the note events and
select MIDI > Transpose Setup.
● To transpose note events in steps of one octave, press Shift and use the Up Arrow/
Down Arrow keys.
NOTE
● When you move selected note events to a different position, any selected controllers for
these note events move accordingly.
● You can also adjust the position of note events by quantizing.
RELATED LINKS
Transpose Setup Dialog on page 533
Resizing Note Events

● To resize the note event, position the Object Selection tool at the start or the end of a
note event and drag the mouse cursor to the left or right.
● To move the start or end positions of the selected notes in steps according to the Length
Quantize value on the toolbar, use the Trim Start/End buttons on the Nudge Palette.
● Select the note and adjust its length on the info line.
● Select Draw and drag left or right within the note display to draw a note.
The resulting note event length is a multiple of the Length Quantize value on the toolbar.
● Select Trim and cut off the end or the beginning of note events.
RELATED LINKS
Value Editing Rules on the Info Line on page 42
Using the Trim Tool on page 593
Resizing Events with the Object Selection Tool - Sizing Applies Time Stretch on page 152
592
MIDI Editors
Using the Trim Tool

The Trim tool allows you to change the length of note events by cutting off the end or the
beginning of notes. Using the Trim tool means moving the note-on or the note-off event for one
or several notes to a position defined with the mouse.
PROCEDURE
1. Select Trim on the toolbar.
The mouse pointer changes to a knife symbol.
2. To edit a single note, click it.
The range between the mouse pointer and the end of the note is removed. Use the mouse
note info on the status line to find the exact position for the trim operation.
3. To edit several notes, click and drag with the mouse across the notes.
By default, the Trim tool cuts off the end of notes. To trim the beginning of notes, press
Alt while dragging. When dragged across several notes, a line is displayed. The notes are
trimmed along this line. If you press Ctrl/Cmd while dragging, you get a vertical trim line,
allowing you to set the same start or end time for all edited notes. You can change the
Trim tool key commands in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Tool Modifiers page).
Splitting Note Events

● To split the note at the position that you point, select Split, and click on a note.
If several notes are selected, they are all split at the same position. The snap setting is
taken into account.
● To split all notes that are intersected by the project cursor position, select Edit >
Functions > Split at Cursor.
● To split all notes that are intersected by the left or right locator at the locator positions,
select Edit > Functions > Split Loop.
Gluing Note Events

You can glue together note events of the same pitch.
● To glue note events, select Glue and click on a note event.

The note event is glued together with the next note event of the same pitch. The result is a
long note event that spans from the start of the first note to the end of the second note.
The properties (velocity, pitch, etc.) of the first note event apply.
Changing the Pitch of Chords

You can use the chord type buttons to change the pitch of chords.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Key Editor Inspector, open the Chord Editing section.
2. In the note display, select the notes that you want to edit.
If the chord is recognized, the root note, chord type, and tensions are indicated in the
Chord Type field. This also works with arpeggiated notes.
593
MIDI Editors
3. In the Chord Editing section, activate one of the 3-Note Chords/Triads buttons or 4-Note
Chords buttons.
The selected notes are transposed so that they fit the selected chord type.
4. Use the Up Arrow/Down Arrow keys to change the pitch of the chord.
Changing the Voicing of Chords

PROCEDURE
2. In the note display, select the notes that you want to edit.
3. In the Chord Editing section, use the Inversions buttons and the Drop Notes buttons to
change the voicing.
RESULT
The selected notes are transposed so that they fit the selected chord type.
594
MIDI Editors
Chord Editing Section

The Chord Editing section in the Key Editor Inspector allows you to insert and edit chords, and
change voicings.
Chord type of selected notes

Shows the chord type of the selected chords.
Add to Chord Track

Adds the chord indicated in the Chord type of selected notes field to the chord
track. The chord event is inserted at the position on the chord track that corresponds
to the position of the MIDI notes. Any existing chord events at this position are
overwritten.
Match with Chord Track

Applies the chord events from the chord track to the selected notes in the MIDI
editor. The chord event that is effective at the position of the first selected note is
applied to the selected notes, which are then transposed. Only the basic chord type
is applied. Tensions are not taken into account.
Only the first effective chord event is applied.
595
MIDI Editors
3-Note Chords/Triads
Allows you to insert triads to the note display. You can also click one of the 3-Note
Chords/Triads buttons to transpose the selected notes so that they fit to the
selected chord type.
4-Note Chords
Allows you to insert 4-note chords to the note display. You can also click one of the 4-
Note Chords buttons to transpose the selected notes so that they fit to the selected
chord type.
Inversions - Move Up
Inverts the lowest note of a chord. The corresponding notes are transposed by as
many octaves as needed.
Inversions - Move Down
Inverts the highest note of a chord. The corresponding notes are transposed by as
many octaves as needed.
Drop Notes - Drop 2
Moves the second highest note of a chord down by one octave.
Drop Notes - Drop 3
Moves the third highest note of a chord down by one octave.
Drop Notes - Drop 2 + 4
Moves the second and fourth highest notes of a chord down by one octave.
Create Chord Symbols

Performs a chord analysis of the selected notes. If nothing is selected, the whole
MIDI part is analyzed.
Inserting Chords
You can use the tools in the Chord Editing section of the Key Editor Inspector to insert and edit
chords.
PROCEDURE
2. Select the Insert tool to the right of the chord type that you want to insert.
3. Click in the note display and drag to the left or right to determine the length of the chord.
Drag up or down to determine its pitch.
To change the chord type while you insert chords, hold Alt and drag up or down.
If Acoustic Feedback is activated, you hear the chord while dragging. A tooltip indicates
the root note and chord type of the inserted chord. Snap and Length Quantize are taken
into account.
596
MIDI Editors
Applying Chord Events to Note Events

You can apply chord events from the chord track to notes in the MIDI editor.
PREREQUISITE
Create a chord track and add chord events.
PROCEDURE
1. Open the MIDI editor.
3. Select Match with Chord Track.
RESULT
The first chord event of the chord track is applied to the selected notes. Only the basic chord type
is applied. Tensions are not taken into account.
Drum Map Handling

When a drum map is assigned to a MIDI or instrument track, the Key Editor displays the drum
sound names as defined by the drum map. This allows you to use the Key Editor for drum
editing, for example, when editing drum note lengths or when editing several parts to identify
drum events.
The name of the drum sound is displayed in the following locations:
● On the info line in the Pitch field.

● On the status line in the Mouse Value field.
● In the note event if the zoom factor is high enough.
● When dragging a note event.
Editing Note Events via MIDI Input

You can directly hear your editing results. Editing the properties of note events via MIDI can be a
quick way to, for example, set the velocity value of a note event.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Key Editor, select the note event that you want to edit.
2. Click MIDI Input on the toolbar.
Editing via MIDI is enabled.
3. Use the note buttons on the toolbar to decide which properties are changed by the MIDI
input.
You can enable editing of pitch, note-on and/or note-off velocity. For example, you can get
the pitch and velocity values of the notes input via MIDI, but the note-off velocities remain
as they are.
4. Play a note on your MIDI instrument.
RESULT
The selected note gets the pitch, note-on velocity and/or note-off velocity of the played note. The
next note in the edited part is automatically selected to allow quick editing of a series of notes.
To try another setting, select the note again and play a note on your MIDI instrument.
597
MIDI Editors
Step Input
Step input, or step recording, allows you to enter note events or chords one at a time without
worrying about the exact timing. This is useful, for example, when you know the part that you
want to record but are not able to play it exactly as you want it.
PROCEDURE
1. On the toolbar, activate Step Input.
2. Use the note buttons to the right to determine which properties are included when you
insert the note events.
For example, you can include the note-on velocity and/or note-off velocity of the played
notes. You can also deactivate the pitch property, in which case all notes get a pitch C3, no
matter what you play.
3. Click anywhere in the note display to set the start position of the first note event or chord.
The step input position is shown as a vertical line in the note display.
4. Specify the note event spacing and length with the Quantize and Length Quantize pop-
up menus.
The note events that you insert are positioned according to the Quantize value and have
the length of the Length Quantize value.
NOTE
If Length Quantize is set to Quantize Link, the note length is also determined by the
Quantize value.
5. Play the first note event or chord on your MIDI instrument.

The note event or chord appears in the editor and the step input position advances by one
quantize value step.
NOTE
If Move Insert Mode is activated, all note events to the right of the step input position are
moved to make room for the inserted note event or chord.
6. Continue in the same way with the rest of the note events or chords.
You can adjust the Quantize or Length Quantize values to change the timing or note
event lengths. You can also move the step input position manually by clicking anywhere in
the note display.
To insert a rest, press the Right Arrow key. This advances the step input position by one
step.
7. When you are done, click Step Input again to deactivate step input.
598
MIDI Editors
Score Editor
Score Editor
The basic Score Editor shows MIDI notes as a musical score. This offers basic score editing and
printing options.
You can open the Score Editor in a separate window or in the lower zone of the Project window.
Opening the Score Editor in the lower zone of the Project window is useful if you want to access
the Score Editor functions from within a fixed zone of the Project window.
To open a MIDI part in the Score Editor, do one of the following:
● Select a MIDI part in the Project window and select MIDI > Scores > Open Score Editor.
● Select a MIDI part in the Project window and press Ctrl/Cmd-R.
NOTE
page. Make your changes to specify if you want editors to open in a separate window or in the
lower zone of the Project window.
The Score Editor window:
The Score Editor in the lower zone of the Project window:
599
MIDI Editors
Score Editor
The Score Editor is divided into several sections:
1 Toolbar
2 Status line
Informs about the mouse time position, the mouse value, and the current chord.
3 Info line
Displays note event information about a selected MIDI note.
4 Extended toolbar
Contains note value buttons and enharmonic shift buttons.
● To open one or several parts in the Score Editor, select one or several tracks or any
number of parts, and select MIDI > Open Score Editor.
If you have selected parts on several tracks, you get one staff for each track. The staves are
tied together by barlines and placed in the order of the tracks in the Project window.
● To rearrange the staves, close the editor and in the Project window, rearrange the tracks.
Then reopen the Score Editor.
NOTE
You can activate/deactivate the status line, the info line, the tools, and the filters by clicking Set
Score Editor Toolbar

The toolbar contains tools and various settings for the Score Editor.
elements.
Edit Solo
Solo Editor
Solos the editor during playback if the editor has the focus.
600
MIDI Editors
Score Editor
Record in Editor
Enables the recording of MIDI data in the editor if the editor has the focus.
NOTE
This only works if MIDI Record Mode is set to Merge or Replace.
Left Divider
Left Divider
Auto-Scroll
Auto-Scroll
Acoustic Feedback
Acoustic Feedback
Tool Buttons
Object Selection
Insert Note
Inserts notes.
Erase
Deletes events.
Split
Splits events.
Glue
Glues together events of the same pitch.
601
MIDI Editors
Score Editor
Insert Text
Inserts text.
Insert Velocity
Snap
Snap Type

menu.
Quantize
Apply Quantize
Quantize Presets
Open Quantize Panel
Length Quantize
Length Quantize
Allows you to set a value for quantizing event lengths.
Step/MIDI Input
Computer Keyboard Input
Activates/Deactivates computer keyboard input.
Step Input
602
MIDI Editors
Score Editor
MIDI Input
Move Insert Mode
NOTE
Record Pitch
Right Divider
Right Divider
are always shown.

separate window.
Open in Lower Zone
Show/Hide Left Zone
Shows/Hides the left zone.
Set up Toolbar
603
MIDI Editors
Score Editor
Status Line
The status line is displayed below the toolbar. It shows important information about the mouse
position and the chord display. Select the notes that form (compose) the chord to make the
status line appear in the Current Chord Display.
● To show or hide the status line, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar, and activate
or deactivate Status Line.
The on/off status of the status line in the Score Editor window and in the Editor tab in the lower
Mouse Time Position

Mouse Value
Current Chord Display

When the project cursor is positioned over notes that form a chord, this chord is
displayed here.
Info Line
The info line shows values and properties of the selected MIDI notes. If several notes are
selected, the values for the first note are displayed in color.
● To show or hide the info line, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar, and activate or
deactivate Info Line.
The on/off status of the info line in the Score Editor window and in the Editor tab in the lower
RELATED LINKS
Changing the Ruler Display Format on page 543
Score Editor Extended Toolbar

The extended toolbar contains note value buttons and enharmonic shift buttons.
● To show the extended toolbar, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar, and activate
Tools.
Note Value Buttons

Allows you to select a note value for input. The and options are for triplet and
dotted note values.
The selected note value is displayed in the Length value field on the info line.
To resize all selected notes to the same note value, press Ctrl/Cmd and click one of
the note value buttons.
604
MIDI Editors
Score Editor Operations
Enharmonic Shift
Allows you to manually select whether a note is displayed with flat or sharp
accidentals. The Off button resets the notes to original display. The other options are
double flats, flats, No (no accidentals shown, regardless of pitch), sharps, and
double sharps.
RELATED LINKS
Enharmonic Shift on page 610
Score Display
The main area of the Score Editor window shows the notes in the edited parts on one or several
staves. Parts on different tracks are shown on different staves.
● If you are editing one or several parts on the same track, as much of them as possible is
shown on several staves, comparable with a score on paper.
● If you are editing parts on several tracks, they are put on a grand staff. A grand staff is
composed of multiple staves that are tied together by barlines.
● The number of bars that are displayed on the screen depends on the size of the window
and the number of notes in each bar.
● The end of the last part is indicated by a double barline.
All MIDI input is directed to one of the tracks, which is called the active staff. The active staff is
indicated by a rectangle to the left of the clef symbol.
● To change the active staff, click on the staff that you want to activate.

This section describes the principal editing operations within the Score Editor.
Improving the Score Display

When you open the Score Editor for a part that was recorded in real time, the score may not look
as legible as you expect. The Score Editor can ignore the minor time variances in performance
605
MIDI Editors
and make a neater score. To achieve this, the Staff Settings dialog provides settings that
determine how the program displays the music.
Staff Settings Dialog

This dialog allows you to change how Cubase displays the music.
IMPORTANT
The settings that you make in this dialog are independent for each staff (track), but common for
a piano staff that you have created with the Split option.
To open the Staff Settings dialog, do one of the following:
● Select a staff and select MIDI > Scores > Staff Settings.
● Double-click in the area to the left of the staff.
NOTE
The time signature follows the time signatures that are set in the Tempo Track editor. These
settings are common to all tracks/staves in the score.
Staff Mode
The Staff Mode determines how the staff is shown.
● In Single mode, all notes in the part are shown in the same staff.
● In Split mode, the part is split on the screen into a bass and treble clef, as in a piano score.
The Split Point value determines where you want the split to occur. Notes above and
including the split note appear on the upper staff, and notes below the split note appear
on the lower staff.
Display Quantize
This section allows you to change the way Cubase displays scores.
IMPORTANT
These display values are only used for the graphical display in the Score Editor. They do not
affect the playback.
Notes
Determines the smallest note value to be displayed and the smallest position to be
recognized and properly displayed. Set this to the smallest significant note position
used in your music.
606
MIDI Editors
For example, if you have notes on odd 16th note positions, set this value to 16. The T
values are for triplet note values. This setting is partly overridden by Auto Quantize.
Rests
This value is used as a recommendation. Cubase does not display rests smaller than
this value, except where necessary. In effect, this setting also determines how the
length of notes is displayed. Set this value according to the smallest note value
(length) that you want to be displayed for a single note, positioned on a beat.
Auto Quantize
Allows you to make your score look as legible as possible. Auto Quantize allows you
to mix straight notes with tuplets (triplets) in a part. However, Auto Quantize also
uses the (display) quantize value. If there is no appropriate note value for a certain
note or group of notes, it uses the set quantize value is used to display it.
Generally, only activate this option if your music contains mixed triplets and straight
notes. If the part is imprecisely played and/or complex, Auto Quantize may have a
problem figuring out exactly what you mean.
Dev.
If this option is activated, triplets/straight notes are detected even if they are not
exactly on the beat. However, if you know that your triplets/straight notes are
perfectly recorded, either through quantizing or entered by hand, deactivate this
option.
This option is only available if Auto Quantize is activated.
Adapt
If this option is activated, the program guesses that when one triplet is found, there
are probably more triplets surrounding it. Activate this option if not all of your
triplets are detected.
This option is only available if Auto Quantize is activated.
Clef/Key
In this section, you can set the correct clef and key.
Clef/Key display
Allows you to select the clef or key via the scrollbar.
Lower Staff
Sets the clef and key to the lower staff.
Auto Clef
If this option is activated, Cubase attempts to guess the correct clef, judging from the
pitch of the music.
Display Transpose
In this section, you can specify a separate display transpose setting for each staff (track). This
transposes the notes in the score without affecting how the notes are played back. This allows
you to record and play back a multi staff arrangement and still score each instrument according
to its own transposition.
Semitones
Allows you to manually set a display transpose value.
Instrument
Allows you to select the instrument for which you are scoring.
607
MIDI Editors
Interpretation Options
In this section, you can make additional settings on how the score is displayed.
Clean Lengths
If this option is activated, notes that are considered to be chords are shown with
identical lengths. Longer notes are displayed shorter than they are. Notes with very
short overlaps are also cut off. This is similar to the No Overlap option, but with a
more subtle effect.
No Overlap
If this option is activated, one note is never shown as overlapping another,
lengthwise. This allows long and short notes that start at the same point to be
displayed without ties. The long notes are cut off in the display. This makes the music
more legible.
A sample measure with No Overlap deactivated:
A sample measure with No Overlap activated:
Syncopation
If this option is activated, syncopated notes are shown in a more legible way.
A dotted quarter note at the end of a bar when Syncopation is deactivated:
A dotted quarter note at the end of a bar when Syncopation is activated:
Shuffle
If this option is activated and you have played a shuffle beat, the beat is displayed as
straight notes, not as triplets. This is very common in jazz notation.
Quantize Value
When you move the mouse pointer over the score, the Mouse Time Position field on the status
line tracks your movement and shows the current position in bars, beats, 16th notes, and ticks.
The quantize value controls the positioning on screen. If you set the value to 1/8, you can only
insert and move notes to 8th note positions, at quarter notes, at half bars, or at bar positions.
It is recommended to set the quantize value to the smallest note value in the piece. This does not
stop you from inputting notes at coarser positions. However, if you set the quantize value to a
too small note value, it is easier to make mistakes.
With the quantize value set to 1/8, you can only input notes at 8th note positions.
You can also use the Quantize Panel to create other quantize values, irregular grids, etc.
Creating Notes
In the score display, the Insert Note tool allows you to create notes.
PREREQUISITE
You have set the note value (length) and spacing.
608
MIDI Editors
PROCEDURE
1. Set the note value in one of the following ways:
● Click the note symbols on the extended toolbar.
● Select an option from the Length Quantize pop-up menu on the toolbar.
2. Select the Insert Note tool.
If you selected the note value via the extended toolbar buttons, the Insert Note tool is
automatically selected.
3. Open the Quantize Presets pop-up menu on the toolbar and select a quantize value.
4. Move the mouse over the staff to find the correct position.
The Mouse Value display on the status line shows the pitch at the pointer position. The
position is displayed on the Mouse Time Position display on the status line.
5. Click in the staff.
When you click and hold down the mouse button, the bars and beats positions are shown.
This allows you to find the correct position.
NOTE
The position snaps to the grid that is defined by the quantize value.
RESULT
The note appears in the score. The notes get the insert velocity value that is set in the Note
Insert Velocity field on the toolbar.
NOTE
If the notes that you enter appear to have the wrong note value, you may have to adjust the
Display Quantize settings. For example, if you entered a 1/32 note that is displayed as a 1/16
note.
RELATED LINKS
Setting Velocity Values on page 549
Display Quantize on page 606
Moving and Transposing Notes

PROCEDURE
2. If you want to hear the pitch of the note while moving, activate Acoustic Feedback on the
toolbar.
3. Select the notes that you want to move.
4. Click one of the selected notes and drag it to a new position and/or pitch.
The horizontal movement of the note snaps to the current quantize value. The position
boxes on the toolbar show the position and pitch for the dragged note.
To restrict moving to one direction, press Ctrl/Cmd while dragging.
609
MIDI Editors
Duplicating Notes
PROCEDURE
2. Select the notes that you want to duplicate.
3. Press Alt/Opt and drag the notes to their new position.
To restrict moving to one direction, press Ctrl/Cmd while dragging.
Changing the Note Length

The displayed note length is not necessarily the actual note length. It also depends on the note
values and rest values for Display Quantize in the Staff Settings dialog. This is important to
remember when you change the length of a note.
You can change the length of a note in the following ways:
● Select the notes that you want to change and Ctrl/Cmd-click on one of the note icons on
the extended toolbar.
All the selected notes are assigned to the length of the clicked note.
● Select the notes that you want to change and edit the length values on the info line.
RELATED LINKS
Improving the Score Display on page 605
Splitting and Gluing Note Events

● To split 2 notes that are strung together by a tie, click on the tied note head with the Split
tool.
● The note is split into 2, with the respective length of the main and the tied note.
● To glue a note to the next note with the same pitch, click on a note with the Glue tool.
Enharmonic Shift
You can perform an enharmonic shift on notes that are not displayed with the accidentals you
wish.
PROCEDURE
1. Select the notes that you want to shift.
2. Click one of the enharmonic shift buttons on the extended toolbar.
RELATED LINKS
Score Editor Extended Toolbar on page 604
Flipping Stems
The direction of the note stems is automatically selected according to the note pitches. However,
you can change this manually.
PROCEDURE
1. Select the notes for which you want to flip the stem direction.
610
MIDI Editors
2. Select MIDI > Scores > Flip Stems.
Working with Text

You can use the Text tool to add comments, articulation, or instrumentation advice and other
text strings anywhere in the score display.
Adding Text
PROCEDURE
1. On the toolbar, select the Text tool.
2. Click anywhere in the score.
A blinking cursor indicates that you can enter text.
3. Enter the text and press Return.
Editing Text
● To edit existing text, double-click it with the Object Selection tool.
This opens the text for editing. Use the Up Arrow, Down Arrow, Left Arrow, and
Right Arrow keys to move the cursor, delete characters with the Delete or Backspace
keys, press Return when you are finished.
● To delete text blocks, select them with the Object Selection tool and press Backspace or
Delete.
● To move text blocks, drag them to a new position.
● To duplicate text blocks, press Alt/Opt and drag them to a new position.
Changing the Text Font, Size, and Style

You can change the font, size, and style of the text that you have added to the score display.
PROCEDURE
● To change the settings for a specific text block, click on the text with the Object
Selection tool.
● To set the default settings for all new text blocks, unselect any selected text block
and change the settings.
2. Select MIDI > Scores > Set Font.
3. In the Font Settings dialog, make your changes.
4. Click Apply.
5. Optional: Select another text block, adjust the settings, and click Apply.
Set Font Dialog

In this dialog, you can change the font, size, and style of the text that you have added to the
score display.
● To open the Set Font dialog, select MIDI > Scores > Set Font.
611
MIDI Editors
Drum Editor
Font
Allows you to specify the font for the text. Which fonts are available on the pop-up
menu depends on the fonts that you have installed on your computer.
IMPORTANT
Do not use the Steinberg fonts. These are special fonts used by the program, for
example, for score symbols, and not suited for common text.
Size
Sets the size of the text.
Frame
Allows you to enclose the text in a rectangular (box) or oval frame.
Font options
Determine whether the text is formatted bold, italic, and/or underlined.
Printing the Score

PROCEDURE
1. Open the parts that you want to print in the Score Editor.
2. Select File > Page Setup and make sure that all your printer settings are correct.
IMPORTANT
If you change your setting for paper size, scale, and margins now, the score may change
its look.
3. Click OK.
4. Select File > Print.
5. In the Print dialog, make your changes.
6. Click Print.
Drum Editor
The Drum Editor is the editor to use when you are editing drum or percussion parts.
You can open the Drum Editor in a separate window or in the lower zone of the Project window.
Opening the Drum Editor in the lower zone of the Project window is useful if you want to access
the Drum Editor functions from within a fixed zone of the Project window.
To open a MIDI part in the Drum Editor, do one of the following:
● Select a MIDI part in the Project window and select MIDI > Open Drum Editor.
612
MIDI Editors
Drum Editor
If the MIDI track has a drum map assigned and Editor Content Follows Event Selection and
Use Drum Editor when Drum Map is assigned are activated in the Preferences dialog (Editors
page), you can do the following to open a MIDI part in the Drum Editor:
● Double-click a MIDI part in the Project window.

● Select a MIDI part in the Project window and press Return or Ctrl/Cmd-E.
● Select a MIDI part in the Project window and select MIDI > Open Drum Editor.
Drum Editor. Select a MIDI part in the Project window and use the key command.
NOTE
page. Make your changes to specify if you want the Drum Editor to open in a separate window
or in the lower zone of the Project window.
The Drum Editor window:
The Drum Editor is shown in the Editor tab in the lower zone of the Project window:
613
MIDI Editors
Drum Editor
The Drum Editor is divided into several sections:
1 Toolbar
2 Status line
Informs about the mouse time position and the mouse value.
3 Info line
Displays information about the selected event.
4 Drum Editor Inspector
Contains tools and functions for working with MIDI data.
5 Drum sound list
Lists all drum sounds.
6 Drum map
Lets you select the drum map for the edited track or a list of drum sound names.
7 Ruler
Displays the time line.
8 Note display
Contains a grid in which notes are displayed.
The area below the note display consists of one or multiple controller lanes.
NOTE
You can activate/deactivate the status line, the info line, and the controller lanes by clicking Set
614
MIDI Editors
Drum Editor
Drum Editor Toolbar

The toolbar contains tools and various settings for the Drum Editor.
elements.
Left Divider
Left Divider
always shown.
Pitch Visibility
Pitch Visibility On/Off
Activates the selected pitch visibility option.
Select Pitch Visibility Options
Deactivate this to show all drum sounds in the note display. Activate this to reduce
the drum sounds in the note display according to the selected pitch visibility option.
● Show Drum Sounds with Events shows only the drum sounds for which
events are available in the note display.
● Show Drum Sounds in Use by Instruments shows the drum sounds for
which a pad, etc. is in use for the instrument. This option is only available if the
instrument can provide this information.
● Reverse Drum Sound List reverses the order of the sounds displayed in the
drum sound list.
Auto-Scroll
Auto-Scroll
Acoustic Feedback
Acoustic Feedback
615
MIDI Editors
Drum Editor
Tool Buttons
Object Selection
Drumstick
Draws drum events.
Erase
Deletes events.
Mute
Mutes events.
Zoom
Line

Automatically selects controller data of the selected MIDI notes.

Activates/Deactivates the independent track loop.
Nudge Palette
Trim Start Left
Trim Start Right
Move Left
Move Right
616
MIDI Editors
Drum Editor
Trim End Left
Trim End Right
Transpose Palette
Move Up
Transposes the selected event up by a half note.
Move Down
Transposes the selected event down by a half note.
Move Up More
Transposes the selected event up by an octave.
Move Down More
Transposes the selected event down by an octave.
Insert Velocity
Notes Length
Insert Length
Allows you to determine a length for newly created notes.
Show Note Length On/Off
Shows drum notes as boxes that display the note length.
Snap
Snap On/Off
Activates/Deactivates the Snap function.
Snap Type
617
MIDI Editors
Drum Editor
menu.
● Events snaps events to the start or end of other events.
● Shuffle changes the order of events if you drag one event to the left or right of
other events.
● Cursor snaps events to the cursor position.
● Grid + Cursor snaps events to the quantize grid that is selected in the
Quantize Presets pop-up menu or to the cursor position.
● Events + Cursor snaps events to the start or end of other events, or to the
cursor position.
● Grid + Events + Cursor snaps events to the quantize grid that is selected in
the Quantize Presets pop-up menu, to the start or end of other events or to
the cursor position.
Grid Type
Allows you to select one of the following grid types:

● Use Quantize activates a grid where events snap to the value that is selected
in the Quantize Presets pop-up menu.
● Adapt to Zoom activates a grid where events snap to the zoom level.
● Use Snap from Drum Map activates a grid where events snap to the Snap
value that is selected in the drum map.
Quantize
Apply Quantize
Quantize Presets
Open Quantize Panel

Show Part Borders
Shows/Hides part borders for the active MIDI part within the left and right locators.
618
MIDI Editors
Drum Editor
activate a part.
Event Colors
Event Colors
Allows you to select event colors.
Step/MIDI Input
Step Input
MIDI Input/Note Expression MIDI Input
Move Insert Mode
NOTE
Record Pitch
Right Divider
Right Divider
are always shown.

separate window.
619
MIDI Editors
Drum Editor
Open in Lower Zone
Show/Hide Left Zone
Shows/Hides the left zone.
Show/Hide Controller Lanes
Shows/Hides the controller lanes.
Set up Toolbar
RELATED LINKS
Status Line
The status line is displayed below the toolbar. It displays important mouse information.
● To show the status line, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar, and activate Status
Line.
The on/off status of the status line in the Drum Editor window and in the Editor tab in the lower
Mouse Time Position

Mouse Value
If you move the mouse in the controller display, the controller event value at the
mouse cursor position is displayed.
Track Loop Start/Track Loop End

If Independent Track Loop is activated on the toolbar and you set up a loop, the
start/end position is displayed.
RELATED LINKS
Drum Editor Toolbar on page 615
620
MIDI Editors
Drum Editor
Info Line
The info line shows values and properties of the selected events. If several notes are selected, the
values for the first note are displayed in color.
● To show the info line, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar, and activate Info Line.
Length and position values are displayed in the selected ruler display format.
The on/off status of the info line in the Drum Editor window and in the Editor tab in the lower
RELATED LINKS
Drum Editor Inspector

The Drum Editor Inspector is located to the left of the note display. It contains tools and
functions for working with MIDI data.
Quantize
Allows you to access the main quantize parameters. These are identical with the
functions on the Quantize Panel.
Length
Contains length-related options, similar to the Functions submenu of the MIDI
menu.
● To change the length of the selected MIDI events or all events of the active
part if no events are selected, use the Scale Length/Scale Legato slider.
At the maximum value the notes reach the beginning of the next note.
● To make the new length settings permanent, click Freeze MIDI Lengths.
● To fine-tune the distance between consecutive notes, use the Overlap slider.
At 0 Ticks, the Scale Length/Scale Legato slider extends each note so that it
reaches the next note exactly. Positive values cause the notes to overlap and
negative values allow you to define a small gap between the notes.
● To use the Legato function or slider to extend a note until the next selected
note, activate Extend to Next Selected.
This is identical with activating the Legato Mode: Between Selected Notes
Only option in the Preferences dialog.
Setup
Allows you to open a dialog to edit the Drum Editor Inspector settings. Click Setup
Inspector, and from the pop-up menu, select Setup.
621
MIDI Editors
Drum Editor
NOTE
If you open the Drum Editor in the lower zone, these sections are shown in the Editor Inspector
in the left zone.
RELATED LINKS
Note Display
The note display of the Drum Editor contains a grid in which note events are shown.
The notes are displayed as diamond symbols. If you activate Show Note Length On/Off on the
toolbar, notes are displayed as boxes and show the note length.
The vertical position of the notes corresponds to the drum sound list to the left, while the
horizontal position corresponds to the note’s position in time.
RELATED LINKS
622
MIDI Editors
Drum Editor
Drum Sound List

The drum sound list lists all drum sounds by name and allows you to adjust and manipulate the
drum sound setup in various ways.
NOTE
The number of columns in the list depends on whether a drum map is selected for the track or
not.
Pitch
Note number of the drum sound.
Instrument
Name of the drum sound.
Snap
This is used when entering and editing notes.
Mute
Allows you to mute drum sounds.
I-Note
Input note for the drum sound. When you play this note, it is mapped to the
corresponding drum sound and automatically transposed according to the Pitch
setting for the sound.
O-Note
The MIDI output note that is sent out every time the drum sound is played back.
Channel
The MIDI channel, on which the drum sound is played back.
Output
MIDI output on which the drum sound is played back.
623
MIDI Editors
Drum Editor Operations
RELATED LINKS
Muting Notes and Drum Sounds on page 627
Drum Maps on page 627
Select Pitch Visibility Options Menu

The Select Pitch Visibility Options pop-up menu on the drum editor toolbar allows you to
determine which drum sounds are shown in the drum sound list.
● Activate Pitch Visibility On/Off, and click Select Pitch Visibility Options on the toolbar.
NOTE
If Pitch Visibility On/Off is deactivated, all drum sounds of the selected drum map are
shown, and you can edit the order of the drum sound list manually.
Show Drum Sounds with Events

Shows only the drum sounds for which events are available in the selected MIDI part.
Show Drum Sounds in use by Instrument

Shows all drum sounds for which a pad, etc. is in use for the instrument. This option
is only available if the instrument can provide this information.
Reverse Drum Sound List

Reverses the order of the sounds displayed in the drum sound list.
Drum Map and Names Menus

Below the drum sound list are pop-up menus that are used for selecting a drum map for the
edited track or, if no drum map is selected, a list of drum sound names.
RELATED LINKS
Drum Maps on page 627

This section describes the general editing operations within the Drum Editor.
Inserting Drum Note Events

You can insert note events with the Object Selection tool or the Drumstick tool.
PREREQUISITE
You have set up the Insert Length on the toolbar to determine the length of the inserted note. If
Insert Length is set to Drum-Map Link, the note gets the length of the Snap value set for the
sound in the drum sound list. You have activated Snap.
NOTE
If you want to snap positions according to the Quantize Presets setting on the toolbar, activate
Use Quantize.
PROCEDURE
624
MIDI Editors
● Select the Object Selection tool and double-click in the event display.
● Select the Drumstick tool and click in the event display.
NOTE
To temporarily switch from the Object Selection tool to the Drumstick tool, hold down
Alt/Opt.
RESULT
A note event is inserted.
Inserting Multiple Drum Note Events

You can insert multiple note events of the same pitch with the Object Selection tool or the
Drumstick tool.
PREREQUISITE
You have set up the Insert Length on the toolbar to determine the length of the inserted note. If
Insert Length is set to Drum-Map Link, the note gets the length of the Snap value set for the
sound in the drum sound list. You have activated Snap.
NOTE
If you want to snap positions according to the Quantize Presets setting on the toolbar, activate
Use Quantize.
PROCEDURE
● On the toolbar, select the Object Selection tool, double-click in the event display
and drag to the right.
● On the toolbar, select the Drumstick tool, click in the event display and drag to the
right.
RESULT
The note events are inserted.
RELATED LINKS
Modifying Note Values While Inserting Notes

When inserting note events, you can modify specific note values on the fly.
● To edit the note velocity, drag upwards or downwards.

● To edit the note pitch, hold down Alt/Opt and drag upwards or downwards.
● To edit the note length, drag to the left or to the right.
NOTE
If you want to edit the note length in the Drum Editor, you must deactivate Snap and
activate Show Note Length On/Off. Otherwise, the note is repeated.
● To edit the time position, hold down Shift and drag to the left or to the right.
625
MIDI Editors
NOTE
You can activate/deactivate Snap temporarily by holding down Ctrl/Cmd.
Changing the Note Length

You can change the note length in the drum editor with the Object Selection tool or with the
Drumstick tool.
PREREQUISITE
You have activated Show Note Length On/Off on the drum editor toolbar.
PROCEDURE
1. Move the mouse pointer to the beginning or the end of the note that you want to edit.
The mouse pointer turns into a double arrow.
2. Drag to the left or to the right to adjust the length.
An info box with the current length value is displayed.
3. Release the mouse button.
RESULT
The note length is changed. Snap is taken into account.
Deleting Drum Note Events

PROCEDURE
● Select the Erase tool and click the event.
● Select the Object Selection tool and double-click the event.
● Select the Drumstick tool and click the event.
RESULT
The note event is deleted.
Deleting Multiple Drum Note Events

You can delete multiple note events of the same pitch with the Object Selection tool or the
Drumstick tool.
PREREQUISITE
To delete multiple note events with the Object Selection tool, Snap must be activated.
PROCEDURE
● On the toolbar, select the Object Selection tool, double-click the first event you
want to delete, and drag to the right.
● On the toolbar, select the Drumstick tool, click the first event you want to delete,
and drag to the right.
626
MIDI Editors
Drum Maps
RESULT
The note events are deleted.
Muting Notes and Drum Sounds

IMPORTANT
The mute state for drum sounds is part of the drum map. All other tracks using this map are
affected.
● To mute individual notes, click or enclose them with the Mute tool, or select Edit > Mute.
● To mute a drum sound in a drum map, click in the Mute column for the drum sound.
● To mute all other drum sounds, click Solo Instrument (Requires Drum Map) on the
toolbar.
RELATED LINKS
Selecting a Drum Map for a Track on page 630
Drum Maps
A drum kit in a MIDI instrument is most often a set of different drum sounds with each sound
placed on a separate key. For example, the different sounds are assigned to different MIDI note
numbers. One key plays a bass drum sound, another a snare, and so on.
Different MIDI instruments often use different key assignments. This can be troublesome if you
have made a drum pattern using one MIDI device and then want to try it on another. When you
switch devices, it is very likely that your snare drum becomes a ride cymbal or your hi-hat
becomes a tom, etc., because the drum sounds are distributed differently in the instruments.
To solve this problem and to simplify several aspects of MIDI drum kits, such as using drum
sounds from different instruments in the same drum kit, Cubase features drum maps. A drum
map is a list of drum sounds with a number of settings for each sound. When you play back a
MIDI track for which you have selected a drum map, the MIDI notes are filtered through the
drum map before they are sent to the MIDI instrument. The map determines which MIDI note
number is sent out for each drum sound and which sound is played on the receiving MIDI device.
When you want to try your drum pattern on another instrument, you simply switch to the
corresponding drum map, and your snare drum sound remains a snare drum sound.
If you want to have the same drum maps included in your projects, you can load these into the
template.
NOTE
Drum maps are saved with the project files. If you have created or modified a drum map, use the
Save function to save it as a separate XML file to make it available for loading into other projects.
RELATED LINKS
Saving a Project Template File on page 79
627
MIDI Editors
Drum Maps
Drum Map Setup Dialog

This dialog allows you to load, create, modify, and save drum maps.
● To open the Drum Map Setup dialog, select Drum Map Setup from the Map pop-up
menu or the MIDI menu.
The list on the left shows the loaded drum maps. The sounds and settings of the selected drum
map are displayed on the right.
NOTE
The settings for the drum sounds are the same as in the Drum Editor.
Output
Allows you to select the output for the drum map sounds.
Drum Sound list

Lists all drum sounds and their settings. To audition a drum sound, click the leftmost
column.
NOTE
If you audition a sound in the Drum Map Setup dialog and the sound is set to MIDI
output Default, the output that is selected on the Output pop-up menu in the lower
left corner is used. When auditioning a default output sound in the Drum Editor, the
MIDI output selected for the track is used.
The Functions pop-up menu contains the following options:
New Map
Adds a new drum map to the project. The drum sounds are named “Sound 1, Sound
2, etc.” and have all parameters set to default values. The map is named “Empty
Map”.
To rename the drum map, click the name in the list and type in a new name.
New Copy
Adds a copy of the selected drum map to create a new drum map. You can then
change the drum sound settings of the copy and rename the drum map in the list.
Remove
Removes the selected drum map from the project.
628
MIDI Editors
Drum Maps
Load
Allows you to load drum maps into your project.
Save
Allows you to save the drum map that is selected in the list on disk. Drum map files
have the extension .drm.
RELATED LINKS
Drum Map Settings on page 629
Channel and Output Settings on page 630
Drum Map Settings

A drum map consists of settings for 128 drum sounds, one for each MIDI note number.
● To get an overview of the drum map settings, open the Drum Editor and use the Map
pop-up menu below the drum sound list to select the GM Map drum map.
The GM map is set up according to the General MIDI standard.
You can change all drum map settings except the pitch directly in the drum sound list or in the
Drum Map Setup dialog. These changes affect all tracks that use the drum map.
RELATED LINKS
Drum Sound List on page 623
Drum Map Setup Dialog on page 628
Importing Drum Maps from Virtual Instruments

You can import your drum map settings to an instrument track that is routed to Groove Agent SE.
PREREQUISITE
To import your drum map settings to an instrument track, the track has to be routed to Groove
Agent SE or another drum instrument that supports drum maps.
PROCEDURE
1. Load a drum kit in Groove Agent SE.
2. In the Inspector for the track, open the Drum Maps pop-up menu and select Create
Drum Map from Instrument.
The drum map is created for the kit that is assigned to the MIDI port and channel selected
in the Inspector.
3. Open the Drum Maps pop-up menu again and select Drum Map Setup.
4. In the list on the left, select the kit that you have loaded in the instrument.
RESULT
The sounds and settings of the instrument are displayed in the Drum Map Setup.
629
MIDI Editors
Drum Maps
NOTE
Instrument and pattern pads are both exported to the drum map. If they share keys, the pattern
pads get priority, that is, their settings are included in the drum map.
Channel and Output Settings

You can set separate MIDI channels and/or MIDI outputs for each sound in a drum map. When a
drum map is selected for a track, the MIDI channel settings in the drum map override the MIDI
channel setting for the track.
You can select different channels and/or outputs for different sounds. This allows you to
construct drum kits with sounds from several different MIDI devices, etc.
● To make a drum sound use the channel of the track, set the channel in the drum map to
Any.
● To make the sound use the MIDI output that is selected for the track, set the MIDI output
for a sound in a drum map to Default.
● To send the sound to a specific MIDI output, select any other option.
● To select the same MIDI channel or MIDI device for all sounds in a drum map, click in the
Channel column, press Ctrl/Cmd, and select a channel or output.
● If you make specific MIDI channel and output settings for all sounds in a drum map, you
can switch between drum maps to send your drum tracks to another MIDI instrument.
Selecting a Drum Map for a Track

● To select a drum map for a MIDI track, open the Map pop-up menu in the Inspector or in
the Drum Editor and select a drum map.
● To deactivate the drum map functionality in the Drum Editor, open the Map pop-up menu
in the Inspector or in the Drum Editor and select No Drum Map.
Even if you do not use a drum map, you can still separate sounds by name using a name
list.
NOTE
Initially, the Map pop-up menu only contains GM Map.
I-Notes, O-Notes, and Pitches

Going through the following theory helps you make the most out of the drum map concept –
especially if you want to create your own drum maps.
A drum map is a kind of filter that transforms notes according to the settings in the map. It does
this transformation twice; once when it receives an incoming note, that is when you play a note
on your MIDI controller, and once when a note is sent from the program to the MIDI sound
device.
The following example shows a modified drum map with a bass drum sound that has different
pitch, I-note, and O-note values.
630
MIDI Editors
Drum Maps
I-Notes (Input Notes)

When you play a note on your MIDI instrument, the program looks for this note number among
the I-notes in the drum map. If you play the note A1, the program finds that this is the I-note of
the bass drum sound.
This is where the first transformation happens: the note gets a new note number according to
the pitch setting for the drum sound. In our case, the note is transformed to a C1 note, because
that is the pitch of the bass drum sound. If you record the note, it is recorded as a C1 note.
For example, you can place drum sounds near each other on the keyboard so that they can be
easily played together, move sounds so that the most important sounds can be played from a
short keyboard, play a sound from a black key instead of a white. If you never play your drum
parts from a MIDI controller but draw them in the editor, you do not need the I-note setting.
O-Notes (Output Notes)

The next step is the output. This is what happens when you play back the recorded note, or when
the note you play is sent back out to a MIDI instrument in real time (MIDI Thru):
The program checks the drum map and finds the drum sound with the pitch of the note. In our
case, this is a C1 note and the drum sound is the bass drum. Before the note is sent to the MIDI
output, the second transformation takes place: the note number is changed to that of the O-note
for the sound. In our example, the note sent to the MIDI instrument is a B0 note.
The O-note settings let you set things up so that the bass drum sound really plays a bass drum. If
you are using a MIDI instrument in which the bass drum sound is on the C2 key, you set the O-
note for the bass drum sound to C2. When you switch to another instrument (in which the bass
drum is on C1) you want the bass drum O-note set to C1. Once you have set up drum maps for all
your MIDI instruments, you can select another drum map when you want to use another MIDI
instrument for drum sounds.
Setting Pitches of Notes According to their O-Note Settings

You can set the pitch of notes according to their O-note settings. This is useful if you want to
convert a track to a regular MIDI track with no drum map and still have the notes play back the
correct drum sound.
It is a typical use case to export your MIDI recording as a standard MIDI file. If you first perform
an O-note conversion, you make sure that your drum tracks play back as intended when they are
exported.
● To perform an O-note conversion, select MIDI > O-Note Conversion.
RELATED LINKS
631
Chord Functions
The chord functions provide you with many possibilities for working with chords.
The chord functions allow you to:
● Build chord progressions by adding chord events to the chord track.

● Convert chord events to MIDI.
● Use the chord track to control MIDI playback.
● Use the chord track voicing to change the pitches of your MIDI.
● Extract chord events from MIDI data to get an overview of the harmonic structure of a
MIDI file.
● Record chord events with a MIDI keyboard.
RELATED LINKS
Chord Editing Section on page 595
Chord Track
The chord track allows you to add chord events and scale events.
RELATED LINKS
Scale Events on page 638
Chord Events on page 633
Adding the Chord Track

PROCEDURE
● Select Project > Add Track > Chord.
RESULT
The chord track is added to your project.
632
Chord Functions
Chord Events
RELATED LINKS
Chord Events
Chord events are representations of chords that control or transpose playback on MIDI and
instrument tracks.
Chord events alter the pitches of MIDI notes if their track is set up to follow the chord track.
Chord events have a specific start position. Their end, however, is determined by the start of the
next chord event. They can have a root note, a type, a tension, and a bass note.
1 Root note
2 Type
3 Tension
4 Bass note
RELATED LINKS
Controlling MIDI Playback Using the Chord Track on page 644
Chord Editor
The Chord Editor allows you to define or change chord events, and to add new chord events.
● To open the Chord Editor, double-click a chord event.
633
Chord Functions
Chord Events
Go to Previous Chord/Go to Next Chord

Allow you to select the previous/next chord on the chord track for editing.
Add Chord
Adds a new undefined chord event on the chord track.
NOTE
This works only if the last chord event on the chord track is selected.
Chord definition buttons

Activate these buttons to define a root note, a chord type, a tension, and a bass note
for your chord event.
NOTE
If you do not select a separate bass note, the setting is linked to the root note, so
that no extra bass note is heard.
Keyboard display
Shows the notes of the chord event, considering the current voicing settings.
Activate MIDI Input

Allows you to define a chord by playing a chord on your MIDI keyboard. If the chord
is recognized, it is reflected by the chord buttons and the keyboard display.
Define Chord by Text Input

Allows you to define a chord using the computer keyboard.
Adding Chord Events

PREREQUISITE
You have added a chord track.
PROCEDURE
1. Select the Draw tool and click in the chord track.
An undefined chord event named X is added.
2. Select the Object Selection tool and double-click the chord event.
3. In the Editor, select a root note.
634
Chord Functions
Chord Events
4. Optional: Select a chord type, tension, and bass note.

● To close the Editor, click anywhere outside the Editor.
● To add a new undefined chord event, click Add Chord.
RELATED LINKS
Adding the Chord Track on page 632
Defining Chords by Text Input

In the chord Editor, you can use the text input field to define a chord with the computer
keyboard.
PROCEDURE
1. Double-click a chord event to open the chord Editor.
2. Click in the text input field at the bottom of the Editor.
3. Enter a chord by performing the following actions:
● Define a root note, for example, C, D, E.
● Define accidentals, for example, # or b.
● Define the chord type, for example maj, min, dim, sus, or aug.
● Define a chord extension, for example, 7, 9, or 13.
NOTE
If you have activated Solfège in the Note Name pop-up menu in the Preferences dialog
(Event Display—Chords&Pitches page), you can also enter chords in this format. You
must capitalize the first letter and write “Re” instead of “re”, for example. Otherwise, the
chord is not recognized.
4. Press Tab to add a new undefined chord and define it.
Chord Assistant
The Chord Assistant allows you to use a chord as a starting point to get suggestions for the next
chord.
● To open the Chord Assistant, in the Chord Editor, click Circle of Fifths.
635
Chord Functions
Chord Events
RELATED LINKS
Chord Assistant – Circle of Fifths on page 636
Chord Assistant – Circle of Fifths

The Circle of Fifths mode of the Chord Assistant shows the chords in an interactive visualization
of the circle of fifths.
The origin chord that defines the current key is shown in the center of the Chord Assistant and
is marked as tonic (I).
The outer circle shows the twelve major chords ordered in intervals of fifths.
The inner circle displays the corresponding parallel minor chords.
The roman numerals mark the chords of the current key with their scale degree. You can use
these chords to create typical chord progressions or you can use the other chords for more
creative results.
● To play a chord and assign it to the selected chord event, click it.
The last 3 chords that you clicked are shown in bold.
● To define a new key, right-click the chord in the Chord Assistant and select Use as Origin,
or use the Rotate Left/Rotate Right controls.
636
Chord Functions
Chord Events
● To select the parallel minor chord and define it as key, click Major/Minor.
Auditioning Chord Events

To hear the chord events on the chord track, you must connect the chord track to the output of
an instrument or a MIDI track.
PREREQUISITE
You have added a chord track and chord events.
PROCEDURE
4. Click Add Track.
The instrument track is added to the track list, and the control panel of the selected VST
instrument is opened.
5. Select a sound.
6. In the chord track Inspector, activate Acoustic Feedback.
7. From the Select Track for Auditioning pop-up menu, select the track that you want to use
for auditioning.
RESULT
The chord events on the chord track now trigger the sound of the assigned instrument on the
MIDI or instrument track.
RELATED LINKS
Changing How Chord Events Are Displayed

You can change how chord events are displayed. This is useful if chord events overlap each other
at low zoom levels or if you do not like the font type.
PROCEDURE
1. On the chord track, activate Resolve Display Conflicts.
2. In the Preferences dialog, select Event Display > Chords&Pitches, and set up the chord
font.
Here you can also determine the note name and naming format.
637
Chord Functions
Scale Events
Scale Events
Scale events inform you which chord events fit in a specific sequence of notes that belong to a
specific root note.
Cubase automatically creates scale events for your chord events.
● To show the scale events, activate Show Scales on the chord track.
● To audition the notes that belong to a scale event, click it.
However, you can also add and edit scale events manually.
Scale events have a specific start position. Their end is determined by the start of the next scale
event.
Editing Scale Events

PREREQUISITE
You have added a chord track and chord events. You have deactivated Automatic Scales in the
chord track Inspector.
PROCEDURE
1. On the chord track, activate Show Scales.
The scale lane with scale events is displayed.
2. Select the chord event.
A scale event is shown on the scale lane.
● Click the first scale event on the chord track, and on the info line, select a Root Key
and Type.
● Double-click the scale event, and in the keyboard that appears, select a Root Key
and Type of the scale.
The keys that correspond to the scale are highlighted.
RELATED LINKS
Musical Scale Setup Dialog

The Musical Scale Setup dialog allows you to set up and manage musical scales.
● To open the Musical Scale Setup dialog, select Project > Chord Track > Set up Musical
Scales.
638
Chord Functions
Scale Events
Add Scale
Adds a new scale to the list. Use the keyboard display to define the scale pitches. All
scales start with C as a root note.
Factory Defaults
Resets all scales.
Use
Activates a scale.
NOTE
Activated musical scales are used in the chord track, in the Scale Assistant section of
the Key Editor Inspector, in the Transpose Setup window, and in the MIDI
Modifiers section of the Inspector.
Name
The name of the scale. Double-click to change it.
Scales
Shows a keyboard that allows you to define the scale pitches. Click a key to activate/
deactivate a pitch for a scale. All scales start with C as a root note.
Preview Scale
Plays back the scale.
NOTE
For playback, the selected MIDI or instrument track must be record enabled and its
output must be routed to an instrument.
639
Chord Functions
Voicings
Information
Informs you if the scale matches another scale or if it has the same name as another
scale.
Remove Scale
Removes the corresponding scale from the scale suggestions.
NOTE
All changes apply to the entire application. This allows you to customize scales once and use
them in all projects. However, if you remove or rename scales that are used in other projects, the
scales cannot be retrieved.
RELATED LINKS
Transpose Setup Dialog on page 533
MIDI Modifiers Section on page 522
Voicings
Voicings determine how chord events are set up. They define the vertical spacing and order of
the pitches in a chord, but also the instrumentation and genre of a musical piece.
For example, a C chord can be spread over a wide range of pitches, and a pianist will choose
different notes than a guitarist. The pianist may also play completely different pitches for
different musical genres.
● You can set up voicing for the entire chord track in the chord track Inspector.
● You can set up voicings for individual chord events on the Voicing pop-up menu on the
info line.
NOTE
If Adaptive Voicings is activated in the chord track Inspector, you can only change the
voicings for the first chord event on the info line.
Inspector Settings for Voicings

To set up voicings for the entire chord track, you can use the chord track Inspector.
640
Chord Functions
Voicings
Voicing library
Allows you to select Guitar, Piano, or Basic as a voicing library.
Voicing library subset
NOTE
This is only available if Guitar or Piano is set as voicing library.
Allows you to select a preset voicing library subset.
Set up Voicing
Opens the Custom Voicing panel that allows you to configure your own voicing
parameters for a specific voicing scheme.
Adaptive Voicings
Activate this to let Cubase set the voicings automatically. This prevents the individual
voices from jumping too much.
Automatic Scales
Activate this to let Cubase set the scales automatically.
Shift Chords
If you enter a negative number of ticks, the chord events will affect the MIDI notes
that have been triggered too early.
RELATED LINKS
Custom Voicing Panel on page 641
Custom Voicing Panel

If you click Set up Voicing in the Chords section of the Inspector, you can configure your own
voicing parameters for a specific voicing scheme.
● To open the Custom Voicing panel, click Set up Voicing in the Chords section of the
Inspector.
641
Chord Functions
Voicings
In the Style section for Piano voicings, you can set up the following parameters:
Triads
Sets a triad. Chords with more than 3 notes are not changed.
Triads with maj9

Sets a triad with a major ninth, but without root note. Chords with more than 3 notes
are not changed.
Triads with maj9 and min9

Sets a triad with a major and a minor ninth, but without root note. Chords with more
than 3 notes are not changed.
4-Note Chords
Sets a 4-note chord without root note. Chords with fewer than 3 notes are not
changed.
4-Note Chords (Open Jazz)

Sets a 4-note chord without root note and without fifth. Chords with fewer than 3
notes are not changed.
5-Note Chords
Sets a 5-note chord with a ninth. Chords with fewer than 4 notes are not changed.
In the Options section for Piano voicings, you can set up the following parameters:
Add Root Note

Adds a root note.
Duplicate Root
Duplicates the root note.
Fatten up
Duplicates the tenor.
642
Chord Functions
Converting Chord Events to MIDI
In the Voicing Range section for Piano voicings, you can set up the following parameters:
Lowest Root Note

Sets the limit for the lowest root note.
Lowest Note
Sets the limit for the lowest note, except the root note.
Highest Note
Sets the limit for the highest note, except the root note.
In the Style section for Guitar voicings, you can set up the following parameters:
Triads
Sets a triad with 4, 5 or 6 voices.
4-Note Chords
Sets a 4-note chord with 4, 5 or 6 voices without tensions.
3-String Triads
Sets a 3-string triad.
Modern Jazz
Sets 4-note, 5-note, and 6-note chords, partly without root note, but with tensions.
For Basic voicings, only Octave Offset from C3 is available. This allows you to determine an
offset value for the octave range.
In the Start Voicing section for Piano, Guitar, and Basic voicings, you can select a start voicing.
NOTE
This is only available for MIDI and instrument tracks, but not for the chord track, and only if you
select Voicings in the Follow Chord Track pop-up menu.
Converting Chord Events to MIDI

You can convert chord events to MIDI for further editing or for printing a lead sheet in the Score
Editor.
PROCEDURE
● Click Instrument to add an instrument track.
● Click MIDI to add a MIDI track.
3. Click Add Track.
● To convert all chord events to MIDI, select Project > Chord Track > Chords to MIDI.
● To convert only selected chords to MIDI, select the chord events and drag them to
the MIDI or instrument track.
RESULT
A new MIDI part is created, containing the chords as MIDI events.
643
Chord Functions
Controlling MIDI Playback Using the Chord Track
RELATED LINKS
Assigning Chord Events to HALion Sonic SE Pads

PREREQUISITE
Create a chord progression on the chord track and add an instrument track with HALion Sonic SE
as VST instrument to your project.
PROCEDURE
1. On the chord track, select the chord events and drag them to the HALion Sonic SE pads.
The first chord event is mapped to the pad where you dropped it and all subsequent chord
events are mapped to the following pads.
2. Click the corresponding pads on the HALion Sonic SE keyboard to trigger the chords.

You can use the chord track to control MIDI playback.
Chords Section for MIDI Tracks

The Chords section in the MIDI track Inspector allows you to determine how the events on the
MIDI track are mapped to the chord track.
● To open the Chords section for a MIDI track, select the track, and in the Inspector, click
the Chords section.
Follow Chord Track

Select an option to determine how the events on your track are mapped to the chord
track.
This Track’s Voicings

Allows you to select a voicing library or to use the voicings from the chord track. This
is only available if you selected Voicings or Single Voice in the Follow Chord Track
pop-up menu.
Live Input
Allows you to transpose the MIDI input live to a chord progression on the chord
track.
644
Chord Functions
RELATED LINKS
Using Follow Chord Track on page 645
Follow Chord Track Modes on page 646
Chord Pads Zone on page 650
Player Setup on page 661
Using Live Input

Live Input allows you to transpose the MIDI input live to a chord progression on the chord track.
This way, you do not have to worry about what key you hit on your MIDI keyboard as the MIDI
input is transposed to match chords or scales on your chord track in real time.
PROCEDURE
1. Create a MIDI or an instrument track and activate Record Enable.
2. In the Inspector, open the Chords section.
3. Open the Live Input pop-up menu and do one of the following:
● To map the MIDI input to chord events, select Chords.
● To map the MIDI input to scale events, select Scales.
4. Hit some keys on your MIDI keyboard or on the On-Screen Keyboard.
RESULT
Any key that you hit is mapped in real time to the chord or scale events on the chord track.
RELATED LINKS
Using Follow Chord Track

This allows you to match an existing recording to a chord progression on the chord track.
PROCEDURE
1. Select the track that you want to match to the chord track.
2. In the Inspector, click Chords.
3. Open the Follow Chord Track pop-up menu and select a mode.
NOTE
If this is the first time that you open this pop-up menu for the track, the Follow Chord
Track dialog opens.
4. In the Follow Chord Track dialog, make your changes.

5. Click OK.
RESULT
The events on your track now match the chord progression on the chord track.
NOTE
If you matched your MIDI track to the chord track, some of the original MIDI notes may be
muted. To hide these notes in the editors, activate Hide Muted Notes in Editors in the
Preferences dialog (Editing—Chords page).
645
Chord Functions
RELATED LINKS
Follow Chord Track Dialog on page 647
Follow Chord Track Modes

This section of the Inspector allows you to determine how your track follows the chord track.
The following options are available on the Follow Chord Track pop-up menu:
Off
Follow Chord Track is deactivated.
Chords & Scales

This maintains the intervals of the original chord or scale as far as possible.
Chords
This transposes MIDI notes to match the key note and maps them to the current
chord.
Scales
This transposes MIDI notes to match the current scale. This allows a bigger variety of
notes and a more natural performance.
Root Notes
This transposes MIDI notes to match the root note of the chord event. The effect
corresponds to using the transpose track. This option is suitable for bass tracks.
Voicings
This transposes MIDI notes to match the voices of the selected voicing library.
Single Voice
Maps MIDI notes to the notes of a single voice (soprano, tenor, bass, etc.) of the
voicing. Use the pop-up menu below to select the desired voice.
NOTE
If you apply this mode to a selection of tracks that contain separate voices, you can
set up one track as master and the others as voicing slaves. This way, you can
change the voicing of the master, and the slaves will follow automatically.
RELATED LINKS
Assigning Voices to Notes on page 648
646
Chord Functions
Follow Chord Track Dialog

This dialog opens the first time that you select an option from the Follow Chord Track pop-up
menu on the Chords section of the Inspector.
Follow Directly
Activate this if your MIDI notes are already in accordance with the chord track. This is
the case if you extracted your chords from the MIDI events on the track by selecting
Project > Chord Track > Create Chord Symbols, for example.
Synchronize Track Data with Chord Track First

Activate Analyze Chords if the track data has nothing in common with the chord
events. This analyzes the MIDI events and matches the found chords to the chord
track. This is only available for MIDI.
Activate Apply a Known Chord if the track data has nothing in common with the
chord events and if there are no chord changes. Specify Root Note and Chord Type
of your events.
Using Map to Chord Track

This allows you to match individual parts or events to a chord progression on the chord track.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Project window, select the events or parts that you want to map to the chord track.
2. Select Project > Chord Track > Map to Chord Track.
3. From the Mapping Mode pop-up menu, select a mapping mode.
NOTE
If you select Voicings and no voices are found, Auto mode is used instead.
4. Click OK.
RESULT
The chords and scales of each event or part are analyzed and used for mapping. If no chords are
found, Cubase assumes that the performance is in “C”. The available mapping modes and
voicings correspond to the Follow Chord Track parameters in the Chords section of the
Inspector.
RELATED LINKS
647
Chord Functions
Assigning Voices to Notes
Assigning Voices to Notes

You can transpose MIDI notes to match the voices of a selected voicing library.
PROCEDURE
● Select Project > Chord Track > Assign Voices to Notes.
RESULT
The note pitches now match the voicing of the chord track and you can still edit the MIDI notes. If
you now select a note in the Key Editor, you see that Voice on the info line is assigned.
Extracting Chord Events from MIDI

You can extract chords from MIDI notes, parts, or tracks. This is useful if you have a MIDI file and
want to show its harmonic structure, and use this file as starting point for further experimenting.
PREREQUISITE
Add the chord track and create MIDI notes that can be interpreted as chords. Drums,
monophonic bass, or lead tracks are not suitable.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Project window, select a part or one or several MIDI tracks.
You can also select the MIDI tracks, parts, or notes that you want to extract in the Key
Editor, Score Editor, or In-Place Editor.
2. Select Project > Chord Track > Create Chord Symbols.
3. Make your changes and click OK.
RESULT
The chord events are added on the chord track.
RELATED LINKS
Create Chord Symbols Dialog on page 649
648
Chord Functions
Recording Chord Events with a MIDI Keyboard
Create Chord Symbols Dialog

This dialog allows you to determine, which MIDI data should be taken into account when
extracting chord events from MIDI.
Include Bass Notes

Activate this if you want your chord events to contain a bass note.
Include Tensions
Activate this if you want your chord events to contain tensions.
Detect Arpeggios
Activate this if you want your chord events to contain arpeggiated chords, that is,
chords whose notes are played one after another instead of all at once.
Interpret Sustain Pedal

Activate this if you want your chord events to contain sustain pedal chords, that is,
notes that are played while the sustain pedal is held.
Ignore Notes Shorter Than

Allows you to determine the minimum length of the MIDI events that are taken into
account.
Recording Chord Events with a MIDI Keyboard

You can use a MIDI keyboard to record chord events on the chord track.
PREREQUISITE
Your project contains an instrument track with Record Enable or Monitor activated.
PROCEDURE
1. On the chord track, activate Record Enable.
2. On the Transport panel, activate Record.
3. Play some chords on your MIDI keyboard.
RESULT
All recognized chords are recorded as chord events on the chord track.
NOTE
The chord track uses its own voicing settings. The recorded chord events may therefore sound
different.
RELATED LINKS
Adding Chord Events on page 634
649
Chord Pads
Chord pads allow you to play with chords, and to change their voicings and tensions. In terms of
harmonies and rhythms, they allow for a more playful and spontaneous approach to
composition than the chord track functions.
You can:
● Perform with chords in real time via a MIDI keyboard.

● Record your performance as MIDI events on a MIDI or instrument track or even on the
chord track.
NOTE
We assume that you have a MIDI keyboard connected and set up.
RELATED LINKS
Voicings on page 640
Chord Pads Zone

The chord pads in the lower zone of the Project window hold all functions that you need to work
with chord pads.
To open the Chord Pads, select Project > Chord Pads > Show/Hide Chord Pads.
The chord pads hold the following controls:
1 Chord Pad Output Mode
650
Chord Pads
Chord Pads Zone
Activate this to send chord data to all tracks that are monitored or record-enabled.
Deactivate this to send chord data exclusively to tracks that are monitored or record-
enabled and where Input Routing is set to Chord Pads.
NOTE
If Record-Enable allows MIDI Thru is deactivated in the Preferences dialog (Record—

MIDI page), you must activate Monitor to use the chord pads.
2 Current Player
Shows the selected player and opens a pop-up menu where you can select another player.
3 Current Mode
Shows the selected player mode and opens a pop-up menu where you can select another
player mode.
4 Chord Pad
Each chord pad can contain a chord symbol. Right-click a chord pad to open a context
menu for that chord pad. To change the chord that is assigned to the chord pad, click
Open Editor on the left edge of the chord pad.
5 Keyboard
Shows which keys are played when you trigger a chord pad. To zoom the keyboard, click a
key and drag up or down. To scroll the keyboard, click and drag to the left or to the right.
6 Pads Remote Range
The keys highlighted in blue on the keyboard correspond to the keys on your MIDI
keyboard that trigger the chord pads. You can define the remote range on the Pad
Remote Control page of the Chord Pads Setup dialog.
7 Remote Range for Voicings/Tensions/Transpose
The keys highlighted in green on the keyboard display correspond to the keys on your
MIDI keyboard that change the voicings, tensions, and transpose settings of the pads. You
can activate and define these remote keys on the Pad Remote Control page of the Chord
Pads Setup dialog.
8 Set up Chord Pads
Opens the Chord Pads Setup dialog.
9 Functions Menu
Opens a pop-up menu with specific functions and settings for the chord pads.
10 Chord Pads Presets
Allows you to save and load presets for chord pads and players.
11 Show/Hide Chord Assistant
Shows/Hides the Chord Assistant window that shows suggestions of chords that match
the chord that you specified as the origin chord.
12 Show/Hide Player Setup
Shows/Hides the player setup options.
RELATED LINKS
Chord Pads Setup Dialog on page 665
Playing Back and Recording Chords on page 658
Players and Voicings on page 662
Opening Chord Pads on page 48
651
Chord Pads
Chord Pads Zone
Chord Pad Controls

The chord pad controls allow you to edit the chord pads.
● To show the chord pad controls, move the mouse over a chord pad.
1 Open Editor
Opens the Chord Editor that allows you to select a chord for the chord pad.
2 Voicing indicators
Shows the voicing used for the chord. Voicing indicators can only be displayed if the
horizontal zoom level for the chord pads is high enough.
3 Adaptive Voicing Reference/Use X as Origin for Chord Assistant
When the active chord pad is set as adaptive voicing reference, its borders are shown in
yellow. All other chord pads follow its voicing and are set in a way that they do not get too
far away from the reference.
If the chord pad is set as origin for the Chord Assistant window, its borders are shown in
blue. This chord pad is used as a basis for the suggestions in the Chord Assistant window.
4 Assigned Chord
Shows the chord symbol that is assigned to the chord pad. Each chord pad can contain one
chord symbol. If the name of the assigned chord is too long to display it on the chord pad,
it is underlined, and the full chord name is shown in a tooltip.
5 AV (Adaptive Voicing)/L (Lock)
All chord pads follow the adaptive voicing. This is indicated by AV. If you change the
voicing for a pad manually, however, adaptive voicing is deactivated.
An L indicates that the chord pad is locked for editing.
6 Voicing
Allows you to set another voicing for the chord pad.
7 Tensions
Allows you to add/remove tensions for the chord.
Chord Pad Context Menu

● To open the chord pad context menu, right-click a chord pad.
Use X as Origin for Chord Assistant

Sets the chord of the current pad as an origin chord for the chord assistant.
Assign Pad from MIDI Input

Allows you to assign a chord by pressing keys on your MIDI keyboard.
Lock
Allows you to lock a chord pad for editing.
Adaptive Voicing
All chord pads follow the adaptive voicing. This is indicated by a check mark. If you
change the voicing for a pad manually, adaptive voicing is deactivated.
652
Chord Pads
Functions Menu
Adaptive Voicings Reference

Sets the current pad as adaptive voicing reference. If set, the automatic voicings for
the following pads are set in a way that they do not get too far away from the
reference voicing. Only one pad can be set as adaptive voicing reference.
Unassign Pad
Removes the chord assignment from the current pad.
Functions Menu
● To open the functions menu, click Functions Menu.
Show Voicing Indicators

Allows you to activate/deactivate the voicing indicators that can be displayed at the
bottom of each chord pad.
Assign Pads from Chord Track

Assigns the chord events from the chord track to the chord pads in the same order
as they appear on the chord track. Chord events that have more than one occurrence
are only assigned once.
Snap Playback to Musical Grid

Allows you to delay the playback of a triggered chord pad to the next defined musical
position. This is useful if you work with an arpeggiator or if you set the Player Modes
to Pattern.
Transpose All Pads

Transposes all chord pads by a defined transpose value.
Lock All Pads

Locks all chord pads for editing.
Unlock All Pads

Unlocks all chord pads.
Unassign All Pads

Removes the chord assignment from all pads.
Chord Assistant
The Chord Assistant allows you to use a chord as a starting point for suggestions for the next
chord. It assists you in finding the right chords for creating a chord progression for your song.
● Click Show/Hide Chord Assistant on the left side of the chord pads area to open the
Chord Assistant.
653
Chord Pads
Chord Assistant
You must define an origin chord as follows:
● Right-click the chord pad with the chord you want to use as origin and select Use X as
Origin for Chord Assistant.
The Chord Assistant window shows suggestions for follow-on chords that you can assign to the
chord pads.
Chord Assistant – Circle of Fifths Mode

The Chord Assistant window shows the chords in an interactive visualization of the circle of
fifths.
The origin chord that defines the current key is shown in the center of the Chord Assistant
window. The tonic (I) of that key is displayed above the center. The outer circle shows the twelve
major chords ordered in intervals of fifths.
The inner circle displays the corresponding parallel minor chords.
The roman numerals mark the chords of the current key with their scale degree. You can use
these chords to create typical chord progressions. However, you can also use the other chords
for more creative results.
654
Chord Pads
Chord Assignment
● To play a chord, click it.

The last 3 chords that you clicked are shown in bold.
● To assign a chord to the next unassigned chord pad, right-click the suggested chord and
select Assign to Pad.
You can also drag the suggested chord and drop it on a chord pad.
● To assign a suggestion to the next unassigned chord pad and use this chord as origin,
right-click the chord and select Assign to Pad and Use as Origin.
NOTE
The Circle of Fifths is also available in the Chord Assistant window for the chord track.
Chord Assignment
Some chords are preassigned to the chord pads. But you can also assign your own chords.
To assign chords to chord pads, you can use:
● The chord Editor window

● The Chord Assistant – Circle of Fifths window
● Your MIDI keyboard
● The chord events from the chord track
Unassigning Chord Pads

You can clear all chord assignments from the chord pads to start from scratch.
PROCEDURE
● To the left of the chord pads, open the Functions Menu and select Unassign All Pads.
Assigning Chords with the Chord Editor

If you know exactly which chord you want to assign to a specific chord pad, you can use the
Chord Editor.
PROCEDURE
1. Move the mouse pointer to the left edge of the chord pad, and click Open Editor.
2. In the Chord Editor window, use the chord definition buttons to define a root note, a
chord type, a tension, and a bass note.
The new chord is triggered automatically to give an acoustic feedback.
Assigning Chords with the Chord Assistant – Circle of Fifths Mode

If you have a chord that you want to use as a starting point for a chord progression, but you do
not know how to create such a progression, you can use the Chord Assistant – Circle of Fifths
window.
PROCEDURE
1. Right-click the chord pad that you want to use as a starting point and activate Use X as
Origin for Chord Assistant.
655
Chord Pads
Chord Assignment
The Chord Assistant window opens, and the borders of the chord pad change their color
to indicate that the assigned chord is now used as origin.
The origin chord is displayed in the center, and the chords that belong to the scale are
shown above it. The numerals indicate the scale degree of the chords. These help you to
create chord progressions.
2. In the Chord Assistant window, click the chord symbols to trigger the corresponding
chords.
3. To assign a chord, drag it from the Chord Assistant window and drop it on the chord pad.
NOTE
If one of the next chord pads is free, you can also right-click the chord in the Chord
Assistant window and select Assign to Pad. This assigns the chord to the next free pad.
Assigning Chords with the MIDI Keyboard

If you know which chord you want to assign to a specific chord pad, you can use a MIDI keyboard
or the On-Screen Keyboard.
PREREQUISITE
You have selected a MIDI track or an instrument track.
PROCEDURE
1. Right-click the chord pad that you want to use for the new chord, and select Assign Pad
from MIDI Input.
The borders of the chord pad change their color to indicate that it is now ready for
recording.
2. On your MIDI keyboard or on the On-Screen Keyboard, press the keys for the chord that
you want to assign.
The chord and its voicing are assigned to the chord pad, and you hear an acoustic
feedback of the chord.
NOTE
The assigned voicing can be changed by the Adaptive Voicing setting. Therefore, if you
want to keep the voicing for that specific pad, right-click the chord pad and select Lock
from the context menu.
656
Chord Pads
Swapping Chord Assignments
RELATED LINKS
Adaptive Voicing on page 662
Assigning Chords from the Chord Track

You can assign the chord events from the chord track to the chord pads.
PREREQUISITE
You have added a chord track with chord events to your project.
PROCEDURE
● To the left of the chord pads, click the Functions Menu button, and select Assign Pads
from Chord Track.
If chords are already assigned to the chord pads, a warning message informs you that all
previous assignments will be overwritten.
RESULT
The chord events are assigned to the chord pads in the same order as they appear on the chord
track.
NOTE
Chord events that have more than one occurrence on the chord track are only assigned once.
RELATED LINKS
Adding the Chord Track on page 632
Adding Chord Events on page 634
Swapping Chord Assignments

You can swap the chord assignments of 2 pads.
PROCEDURE
● Click a chord pad and drag it to another chord pad.
While you drag, the border of the destination chord pad changes its color.
RESULT
When you drop the pad on another, the chord assignments are swapped together with their
settings, except for the Adaptive Voicing Reference.
Copying Chord Assignments

You can copy the chord assignment of one pad and paste it on another pad.
PROCEDURE
● Alt/Opt-click a chord pad and drag it to another chord pad.
While you drag, the border of the destination chord pad changes its color.
RESULT
When you drop the pad on another, the first pad’s assignment is copied to the destination chord
pad together with its settings, except for the Adaptive Voicing Reference.
657
Chord Pads
Playing Back and Recording Chords

You can play back and record chords that are assigned to chord pads using MIDI or instrument
tracks.
There are two different Chord Pad Output Modes that determine if chords that are assigned to
chord pads can be played back and recorded using any or using exclusive MIDI or instrument
tracks:
● Chord Pad Output Mode: On

Allows you to play back and record chord pads using any MIDI or instrument track where
Record Enable or Monitor is activated.
● Chord Pad Output Mode: Off
Allows you to play back and record chord pads using exclusive MIDI or instrument tracks
where Record Enable or Monitor is activated, and where Chord Pads is selected as a MIDI
input in the Input Routing pop-up menu.
NOTE
If Record-Enable allows MIDI Thru is deactivated in the Preferences dialog (Record—MIDI

page), you must activate Monitor to use the chord pads.
RELATED LINKS
Chord Pads Zone on page 650
Recording Chords on the Chord Track on page 660
Recording Chords on Instrument Tracks on page 660
Playing Back Chord Pads Using Any Instrument Track on page 658
Playing Back Chord Pads Using Exclusive Instrument Tracks on page 659
Playing Back Chord Pads Using Any Instrument Track

You can play back chord pads using any MIDI or instrument track where Record Enable or
Monitor is activated.
PREREQUISITE
You have connected and set up a MIDI keyboard.
PROCEDURE
4. Click Add Track.
5. On the instrument track, click Record Enable or Monitor.
NOTE

6. Select Project > Chord Pads > Show/Hide Chord Pads to open the Chord Pads.
7. Activate Chord Pad Output Mode.
658
Chord Pads
8. Press some keys on your MIDI keyboard to trigger the chords that are assigned to the
chord pads.
RELATED LINKS
Changing the Pads Remote Range on page 668
Playing Back Chord Pads Using Exclusive Instrument Tracks

You can play back chord pads using exclusive MIDI or instrument tracks where Record Enable or
Monitor is activated, and where Chord Pads is selected as a MIDI input in the Input Routing
pop-up menu.
PREREQUISITE
You have set up a MIDI keyboard.
PROCEDURE
4. Click Add Track.
NOTE

6. In the Inspector for the instrument track, open the Input Routing pop-up menu, and
select Chord Pads.
8. Deactivate Chord Pad Output Mode.
9. Press some keys on your MIDI keyboard to trigger the chords that are assigned to the
chord pads.
RESULT
The instrument track now receives MIDI data exclusively from the chord pad device. You can use
a connected MIDI keyboard to trigger the chord pads. This still works if you hide the Chord Pads
from view.
NOTE
On the Chord Pads page of the Studio Setup dialog, you can select your connected MIDI
keyboard from the MIDI Input pop-up menu. This is useful if you want to use a specific MIDI
keyboard exclusively for triggering the chord pads.
659
Chord Pads
Recording Chords on Instrument Tracks

You can record chords that are triggered by chord pads on MIDI or instrument tracks.
PREREQUISITE
You have connected and set up a MIDI keyboard, you have opened and set up the chord pads,
and you have added an instrument or a MIDI track for which a VST instrument is loaded.
PROCEDURE
NOTE


3. On your MIDI keyboard, press the keys that trigger the chord pads.
RESULT
The triggered chords are recorded on the track. The note events are automatically assigned to
different MIDI channels according to their pitches. Note events that correspond to the soprano
voice are assigned to MIDI channel 1, alto is assigned to MIDI channel 2, and so on.
Open the Key Editor and fine-tune your recorded MIDI parts using the chord editing functions,
for example. You can also use MIDI > Dissolve Part to dissolve the recorded chords by pitches/
channels.
Recording Chords on the Chord Track

You can record chords that are triggered by chord pads on the chord track. This way, you can
easily create chord events for a lead sheet, for example.
PREREQUISITE
You have connected and set up a MIDI keyboard, you have opened and set up the chord pads,
and you have added an instrument or a MIDI track for which a VST instrument is loaded.
PROCEDURE
NOTE

2. Select Project > Add Track > Chord.

The chord track is added to the track list.
3. In the Inspector for the chord track, click Record Enable.
5. On your MIDI keyboard, press the keys that trigger the chord pads.
RESULT
The chord events are recorded on the chord track.
660
Chord Pads
Player Setup
NOTE
The recorded chord events may sound different from the chord pad playback. This is because the
voicing settings for the chord track differ from the chord pad voicings.
RELATED LINKS
Chord Functions on page 632
Player Setup
The Player Setup allows you to select a player and a voicing setting that is typical for that kind of
player, and determine if the notes of a chord are played as plain chords or as a pattern.
● To open the Player Setup, click Show/Hide Player Setup.
In the Select Player section, the following options are available:
List of Added Players

Shows the added players, and allows you to activate a player and use its voicing style
and play mode for the chord pads.
Player Options
Allows you to add a player and to rename or remove the current player.
In the Selected Player Settings section, the following options are available:
Chord Voicing Style

Allows you to select a chord voicing style for the selected player. This determines
how chords are played back, and what pitches are used.
Player Modes
● Plain Chords triggers all notes of a chord simultaneously.
● Pattern plays an arpeggio that is based on the notes of the pattern.
RELATED LINKS
Players and Voicings on page 662
Player Setup on page 661
661
Chord Pads
Player Setup
Players and Voicings

Different types of instruments and styles have different voicing libraries. These determine how
the chords are played back, and which pitches are played. These voicings are referred to as
players.
RELATED LINKS
Adaptive Voicing
In Cubase, the adaptive voicing setting ensures that pitches in chord progressions do not change
abruptly.
Adaptive voicing is activated and the voicings of the chord pads are determined automatically
according to specific voice leading rules.
If you want to set the voicing of a specific chord pad manually, and do not want it changed
automatically, you can use the voicing control to the right of a chord pad. When you assign your
own voicing, adaptive voicing is deactivated for that chord pad, so that the pad does no longer
follows the voice leading rules of the voicing reference. To activate adaptive voicing again, right-
click the chord pad and activate Adaptive Voicing.
To lock the voicing for a chord pad, you can right-click the pad and activate Lock. This locks this
pad for editing and remote control changes, and deactivates Adaptive Voicing. To unlock the
chord pad again, right-click the pad and deactivate Lock.
Player Modes—Plain Chords

You can control the playback of plain chords.
● Click Show/Hide Player Setup to open the Player Setup, and in the Player Modes pop-up
menu, select Plain Chords.
Overlaps
Allows you to select what happens with the notes of the first chord when you play a
chord without releasing the previous chord.
● Hold First holds the notes of the first chord. No note-off message is sent. If
the chords have common notes, these are not triggered again.
● Legato releases the notes of the first chord, except for the common notes.
These are held and not triggered again.
● Stop First releases the notes of the first chord including the common notes.
Filter Notes
Allows you to select which keys are filtered.
662
Chord Pads
Player Setup
● Off filters nothing.

● From MIDI Thru filters unassigned keys, and keys that are assigned as remote
keys for voicings, tensions, and transpose.
RELATED LINKS
Player Modes—Pattern
If you select Pattern in the Player Modes pop-up menu, this allows you to play the notes that
make up the chord one after another as an arpeggio based on the notes of the pattern.
● Click Show/Hide Player Setup to open the Player Setup, and in the Player Modes pop-up
menu, select Pattern.
In the Selected Player Settings section, the following options are available:
Import MIDI Loop

Allows you to select a MIDI loop that is used as a pattern.
Pattern
Allows you to drop a MIDI part from the event display that is used as a pattern. The
name of the selected loop or part is shown.
Velocity from
● Pattern uses the velocity values from the MIDI loop or the MIDI part that is
selected as a pattern.
● MIDI Keyboard allows you to determine the velocity values by pressing the
keys on your MIDI keyboard harder or softer.
Pattern Presets
Allows you to save pattern presets.
Using the Pattern Player

You can play back the pattern of a MIDI loop or a MIDI part with chord pads. This plays back the
pattern with the notes that make up the chord.
PROCEDURE
1. To the left of the chord pads, activate Show/Hide Player Setup.
2. In the Selected Player Settings section, open the Player Modes pop-up menu, and select
Pattern.
663
Chord Pads
Player Setup

● Click Import MIDI Loop to select a MIDI loop that you want to use as a pattern.
● Drag a MIDI part from the event display and drop it on the Pattern field.
NOTE
The loop or part must have between 3 and 5 voices. In the MediaBay, the number of
voices is indicated in the Voices column of the Result list.
The loop or part is taken as a reference and defines how the chord is played.
4. In the Velocity from field, select a velocity source for the notes.
RELATED LINKS
Assigning Voices to Notes on page 648
Setting up the Results List Columns on page 449
Using Different Players on Multiple Tracks

You can set up different players with different sounds on different tracks. If you record-enable
these tracks and play the chord pads, each track uses a dedicated player.
PROCEDURE
3. In the Count value field, select the number of tracks that you want to add.
5. Click Add Track.
The instrument tracks are added to the track list, and the control panels of the selected
VST instrument are opened.
7. Activate Chord Pad Output Mode.
8. Click Show/Hide Player Setup.
9. Select the first instrument track, select a sound for the VST instrument, and set up a player.
For example, select a piano sound and activate Piano Player.
NOTE
When setting up the player for a track, make sure that Record Enable or Monitor is only
active for this particular track.
10. Select the second instrument track, select a sound for the VST instrument, and set up
another player.
For example, select a guitar sound and activate Guitar Player.
11. Select the next instrument track, and proceed as for the other 2 tracks.
For example, select a string sound, click Player Options, and select Add Basic Player.
12. Select all instrument tracks, and click Record Enable.
RESULT
You can now play the chord pads and use the remote control parameters for tensions and
transpose to change all chord symbols for each player simultaneously. However, if you change
the Voicing, only the selected player is affected.
664
Chord Pads
Chord Pads Setup Dialog
RELATED LINKS

The Chord Pads Setup dialog allows you to change the remote key assignments and the layout
of the chord pads.
● To open the Chord Pads Setup dialog, click Set up Chord Pads.
Pad Remote Control

Allows you to specify a range of remote keys that trigger the chords that are
assigned to the chord pads. Here, you can also set up chord modifiers that allow you
to specify how the chords are played back.
Pad Layout
Allows you to change the layout that is used for the chord pads.
RELATED LINKS
Pad Remote Control Tab on page 666
Pad Layout Tab on page 668
665
Chord Pads
Pad Remote Control Tab

The Pad Remote Control tab in the Chord Pads Setup dialog allows you to specify a range of
remote keys that trigger the chords that are assigned to the chord pads.
● To open the Pad Remote Control tab, click Set up Chord Pads, and in the Chord Pads
Setup dialog, click Pad Remote Control.
In the Chord Pad Triggers section, the following options are available:
Latch Chords
Activate this if you want the chord pad to play back until it is triggered again.
Pads Remote Range Start

Allows you to set the start note for the remote range. By default, this is set to C1.
Pads Remote Range End

Allows you to set the end note for the remote range. By default, this is set to B1.
MIDI Learn
Activates/Deactivates the MIDI Learn function to assign MIDI input to the pads
remote range.
In the Chord Modifiers section, the following options are available:
Activate
Activates/Deactivates the remote key assignment for the parameters voicings,
tensions, and transpose. If this option is deactivated, only the remote key
assignment for the pads remote range is active.
666
Chord Pads
NOTE
If you use the remote keys for voicings, tensions, or transposition after releasing the
remote key for the chord pad, the chord pad that you last played is affected.
In the Voicing Modifiers section, the following options are available:
Next Voicing
Plays back the next voicing of the last played chord.
Previous Voicing
Plays back the previous voicing of the last played chord.
Modify All Pad Voicings

Allows you to set the voicings for all chord pads using one of the following modifiers:
● No Modifier
● Aftertouch
● Pitchbend
● Controller
If you select Controller, you can set the controller number in the Controller
Number field.
MIDI Learn
Activates/Deactivates the MIDI Learn function to assign MIDI input to the
parameters for changing voicings.
In the Tension Modifiers section, the following options are available:
More Tensions
Plays back the last played chord with more tensions.
Fewer Tensions
Plays back the last played chord with fewer tensions.
Modify All Pad Tensions

Allows you to set the tensions for all chord pads using one of the following modifiers:
● No Modifier
● Aftertouch
● Pitchbend
● Controller
Number field.
MIDI Learn
parameters for changing tensions.
In the Transpose Modifiers section, the following options are available:
Transpose Up
Plays back the last played chord and transposes it upwards.
Transpose Down
Plays back the last played chord and transposes it downwards.
Transpose All Pads

Allows you to transpose all chord pads using one of the following modifiers:
667
Chord Pads
● No Modifier
● Aftertouch
● Pitchbend
● Controller
Number field.
MIDI Learn
parameters for changing transpose.
Changing the Pads Remote Range

You can widen the pads remote range to access more chord pads. If you want to use a wider key
range on your MIDI keyboard for regular playing, you can narrow the pads remote range.
PROCEDURE
1. Click Set up Chord Pads.
2. Open the Pad Remote Control tab to open the remote control assignments.
● Click MIDI Learn so that the button lights up, and on your MIDI keyboard, press the
2 keys that you want to assign as range start and range end.
● Enter a new value in the Pads Remote Range Start and Pads Remote Range End
fields.
RESULT
On the keyboard, the indication for pads remote range is changed.
Pad Layout Tab

The Pad Layout tab in the Chord Pads Setup dialog allows you to change the layout that is used
for the chord pads.
NOTE
By default, the keyboard layout is active, but you can change to a grid layout if you prefer. After
changing the pad layout, you may need to adjust the remote setup.
● To open the Pad Layout tab, click Set up Chord Pads, and in the Chord Pads Setup
dialog, click Pad Layout.
Pad Layout Type

Activate Keyboard to show the chord pads in a keyboard layout.
668
Chord Pads
Chord Pads Presets
Activate Grid to show the chord pads in a grid layout.
Number of Octaves/Number of Rows

In Keyboard mode, you can select the number of octaves that you want to display.
In Grid mode, you can select the number of rows that you want to display.
Start Note
In Keyboard mode, you can select the start note for the first chord pad.
Number of Columns
In Grid mode, you can select the number of columns that you want to display.
Chord Pads Presets

Chord Pads Presets are templates that can be applied to newly created or to existing chord
pads.
Chord Pads Presets contain the chords that are assigned to the chord pads, as well as the player
configurations including any pattern data that you have imported via the MediaBay or by using
drag and drop. Chord Pads Presets allow you to quickly load chords, or reuse player settings.
The Chord Pads Presets pop-up menu is located to the left of the chord pads. Chord Pads
Presets are organized in the MediaBay, and you can categorize them with attributes.
● To save/load a chord pads preset, click Chord Pads Presets and select Save Chord Pads
Preset/Load Chord Pads Preset.
You can also load only the assigned chords from a preset, without loading the player
configurations. This is useful if you want to use specific chords that you have saved as a preset,
but do not want to alter your current player setting.
● To load only the chords of Chord Pads Presets, click Chord Pads Presets and select Load
Chords from Preset.
In the same way, you can also load only the player configurations of Chord Pads Presets. This is
useful if you have saved very complex player settings and want to reuse them on other chord
pads without changing the assigned chords.
● To load only the player settings of Chord Pads Presets, click Chord Pads Presets and
select Load Players from Preset.
Saving Chord Pads Presets

If you have set up the chord pads, you can save them as Chord Pads Presets.
PROCEDURE
1. To the left of the chord pads, click Chord Pads Presets and select Save Chord Pads
Preset.
NOTE
You can also define attributes for the preset.
669
Chord Pads
Creating Chord Events from Chord Pads
Creating Chord Events from Chord Pads

You can use the chords assigned to the chord pads to create chord events in the Project window.
PROCEDURE
● Click a chord pad, and drag it on the chord track.
RESULT
A chord event is created.
RELATED LINKS
Recording Chord Events with a MIDI Keyboard on page 649
Creating MIDI Parts from Chord Pads

You can use the chords assigned to the chord pads to create MIDI parts in the Project window.
PROCEDURE
● Click a chord pad, and drag it on a MIDI or instrument track.
RESULT
A MIDI part is created. It contains the MIDI events that build up the chord and has a length of
one bar.
670
Editing Tempo and Time
Signature
You can set up a tempo and time signature for your project. By default, the tempo is set to 120
bpm, and the time signature to 4/4.
Project Tempo Modes

For every project you can set a tempo mode, depending on whether your music has a fixed
tempo or if it changes throughout the project.
On the Transport panel, you can set the following tempo modes:
● Fixed Tempo Mode

If you want to work with one fixed tempo that does not change throughout the project,
deactivate Activate Tempo Track on the Transport panel. You can change the tempo
value to set a fixed rehearsal tempo.
● Tempo Track Mode

If the tempo of your music contains tempo changes, activate Activate Tempo Track on
the Transport panel. You can change the tempo value to change the tempo at the cursor.
If your project does not contain any tempo changes, the tempo is changed at the project
start.
RELATED LINKS
Setting up Projects for Tempo Changes on page 674
Tempo Track Editor

The Tempo Track Editor provides an overview of the project tempo settings. It allows you to add
and edit tempo events.
To open the Tempo Track Editor, do one of the following:
● Select Project > Tempo Track.

● Press Ctrl/Cmd-T.
671
Editing Tempo and Time Signature
Tempo Track Editor
The Tempo Track Editor is divided into several sections:
1 Tempo scale
Shows the tempo scale in BPM.
2 Toolbar
Contains tools for selecting, adding, and changing tempo and time signature events.
3 Info line
Shows information about the selected tempo or time signature event.
4 Ruler
Shows the timeline and the display format of the project.
5 Time signature display
Shows the time signature events in the project.
6 Tempo curve display
If your project is set to a fixed tempo, only one tempo event and a fixed tempo is shown.
If your project is set to tempo track mode, the curve display shows the tempo curve with
the tempo events in the project.
Tempo Track Editor Toolbar

The toolbar contains tools for selecting, adding, and changing tempo and time signature events.
The following tools are available:

Switches the project tempo between fixed tempo mode and tempo track mode.
Left Divider
Left Divider
672
Tempo Track Editor
Auto-Scroll
Auto-Scroll
Tool Buttons
Object Selection
Selects events.
Draw
Draws events.
Erase
Deletes events.
Zoom
Zoom in. Hold Alt/Opt and click to zoom out.
New Tempo Type

Type of New Tempo Points
Allows you to select the type of new tempo points. Select Ramp if you want new
tempo points to change gradually from the previous curve point to the new one.
Select Step if you want new tempo points to change instantly. Select Automatic if
new tempo points should have the same type as the previous curve point.
Current Tempo
Current Tempo
In fixed tempo mode, this allows you to change the current tempo.
Snap
Snap On/Off
Restricts horizontal movement and positioning to the positions specified by the Snap
Type. Time signature events always snap to the beginning of bars.
Snap Type
673
Tempo Changes for Projects
Right Divider
Right Divider
Show Info Line

Show/Hide Info
Opens/Closes the info line.
Set up Toolbar
Set up Toolbar
Tempo Changes for Projects

If the tempo track is activated, you can set up tempo changes for your project.
NOTE
If you work in tempo track mode, make sure that the display format in the Project window ruler
is set to Bars+Beats. Otherwise, you may get confusing results.
If you activate Activate Tempo Track on the Transport panel, the tempo track curve is displayed
in the tempo curve display.
You can adjust the tempo value as follows:
● By adding tempo events in the Tempo Track Editor.
RELATED LINKS
Setting up Projects for Tempo Changes on page 674
Setting up Projects for Tempo Changes

When you create a new project, the project tempo is automatically set to fixed tempo mode. If
your music contains tempo changes, you must set your project to tempo track mode.
PROCEDURE
● To set your project to tempo track mode, do one of the following:
● On the Transport panel, activate Activate Tempo Track.
● Select Project > Tempo Track and activate Activate Tempo Track.
RESULT
The project tempo is now set up to follow the tempo track.
RELATED LINKS
Tempo Track Editor on page 671
674
Setting up a Fixed Project Tempo
Setting up a Tempo Track by Adding Tempo Changes

PROCEDURE
1. Select Project > Add Track > Tempo.
The tempo track is added to the track list.
2. On the tempo track, open the Type of New Tempo Points pop-up menu and select an
option.
● On the toolbar, select the Object Selection tool and click the tempo curve.
● On the toolbar, select the Draw tool, and click and draw in the tempo curve display.
NOTE
If Snap is activated, this determines at which time positions you can insert tempo curve
points.
RESULT
The tempo event is added to the tempo curve.
Editing Tempo Events

In the Tempo Track Editor, you can edit selected tempo events.
Use the following methods:
● With the Object Selection tool, click and drag horizontally and/or vertically.
● On the info line, adjust the tempo value in the Value field.
NOTE
When editing tempo events on tempo curves, make sure that the display format in the Project
window ruler is set to Bars+Beats. Otherwise, you may get confusing results.
Use the following methods to remove tempo events:
● With the Erase tool, click the tempo event.

● Select the tempo event and press Backspace.
NOTE
You cannot remove the first tempo event.
Use the following method to change the tempo curve type:
● On the info line, adjust the tempo curve type in the Type field.

If your music does not contain tempo changes, and the tempo track is deactivated, you can set
up a fixed tempo for your project.
When the tempo track is deactivated, the tempo track curve is grayed out. The fixed tempo is
displayed as a horizontal line in the tempo curve display.
If you know the tempo of your music, you can adjust the tempo value in the following areas:
● Tempo field on the Transport panel
675
● Current Tempo field on the Tempo Track Editor toolbar
If you do not know the tempo of your music, use one of the following tools to calculate and set it:
● Beat Calculator
● Set Project Tempo from Loop
RELATED LINKS
Setting the Project Tempo from a Recording on page 676
Setting the Project Tempo from an Audio Loop on page 677
Setting the Project Tempo from a Recording

You can calculate the tempo of freely recorded audio or MIDI material with the Beat Calculator
and set it as the project tempo.
PREREQUISITE
The Tempo Track is deactivated, that is, the tempo mode is set to Fixed.
PROCEDURE
1. On the Project window toolbar, select the Range Selection tool.
2. In the event display, make a selection that covers an exact number of beats of the
recording.
3. Select Project > Beat Calculator.
4. In the Beats value field, enter the number of beats that the selection encompasses.
The calculated tempo is shown in the BPM field.
5. In the Insert Tempo into Tempo Track section, click At Tempo Track Start.
RESULT
The project tempo is set to the tempo calculated from your recording.
RELATED LINKS
Beat Calculator on page 677
Setting the Project Tempo by Tapping

You can set the tempo of freely recorded audio or MIDI material by tapping.
PREREQUISITE
The tempo track is deactivated, that is, tempo mode is set to Fixed.
PROCEDURE
1. Activate playback.
2. Select Project > Beat Calculator.
3. Click Tap Tempo.
The Tap Tempo window opens.
4. Use Space to tap the tempo of the recording that is played back.
676
Beat Calculator
In the BPM field, the calculated tempo is updated each time you tap.
5. Click OK to close the window.
The tapped tempo is shown in the BPM field of the Beat Calculator.
6. Click one of the buttons in the Insert Tempo into Tempo Track section to insert the
calculated tempo into the tempo track.
RESULT
The project tempo is set to the tapped tempo.
RELATED LINKS
Setting up a Fixed Project Tempo on page 675
Setting the Project Tempo from an Audio Loop

You can set the project tempo from the tempo of an audio loop.
PREREQUISITE
Your project contains an audio loop that is not in Musical Mode.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Project window ruler, set the left locator to the beginning of the audio loop.
2. Set the right locator to the end of the last bar.
This does not need to match the end of the audio loop, but its number of bars.
3. Select the audio loop.
4. Select Audio > Advanced > Set Tempo from Event.
You are asked if you want to set the global project tempo.
● Click Yes to adjust the project tempo globally.
● Click No to adjust the project tempo only in the section of the audio event.
RESULT
The project tempo is set to the tempo calculated for the audio loop.
Beat Calculator
The Beat Calculator is a tool for calculating the tempo of freely recorded audio or MIDI material.
It also allows you to set the tempo by tapping.
● To open the Beat Calculator for an audio or MIDI recording, select Project > Beat
Calculator.
Beats
Allows you to enter the number of beats for the selected section of your recording.
677
Set Definition from Tempo Dialog
BPM
Shows the tempo calculated for the selection.
Tap Tempo
Opens a window where you can specify a tempo by tapping.
At Tempo Track Start

If your project is in tempo track mode, the calculated tempo is set as the first tempo
curve point. If your project is in fixed tempo mode, the calculated tempo is set for the
entire project.
At Selection Start
If your project is in tempo track mode, the calculated tempo is set as a new tempo
event at the start of the selection.
Refresh
Allows you to recalculate the tempo. This is useful if you adjust the selection, for
example.
Set Definition from Tempo Dialog

The Set Definition from Tempo dialog allows you to set up freely recorded audio material to
follow a specific tempo.
● To open the Set Definition from Tempo dialog for an audio recording, select Audio >
Advanced > Set Definition from Tempo.
Save Definition in Project Only

Saves the tempo information in the project file only.
Write Definition to Audio Files

Writes the tempo information to the selected audio files. This is useful if you want to
use them in other projects together with the tempo information.
Adjusting the Audio Tempo to the Project Tempo

You can adjust the tempo of freely recorded audio material to the project tempo.
PROCEDURE
1. Select the audio events that you want to adjust to the project tempo.
2. Select Audio > Advanced > Set Definition from Tempo.
3. Optional: Adjust the settings.
4. Click OK.
678
Time Signature Events
RESULT
The tempo information is copied to the audio and the tracks are set to musical time base. This is
achieved by applying warping to the events. Musical Mode is activated for the audio events. The
audio tracks now follow any tempo changes in the project.
Time Signature Events

You can set up one or more time signatures for a project.
You can set up the first time signature event of your project on the Transport panel. You can add
further time signature events in the Tempo Track Editor.
RELATED LINKS
Adding Time Signature Events in the Tempo Track Editor on page 679
Adding Time Signature Events in the Tempo Track Editor
PROCEDURE
1. Select Project > Tempo Track to open the Tempo Track Editor.
2. Select Draw on the toolbar, and in the time signature display, click at the time position
where you want to insert the time signature event.
3. Edit the numerator and the denominator to change the value of the time signature event.
NOTE
You can also select the time signature event and edit the time signature value on the info
line.
RESULT
The time signature event is added at the specified time position. The timeline and the event
displays for the Project window and the editors reflect the changes.
679
Export Audio Mixdown
The Export Audio Mixdown function allows you to mix down and export all audio that is
contained between the left and right locators of a project.
● To open the Export Audio Mixdown dialog, select File > Export > Audio Mixdown.
Export Audio Mixdown Dialog

The Export Audio Mixdown dialog allows you to set up how audio is mixed down and exported.
● To open the Export Audio Mixdown dialog, select File > Export > Audio Mixdown.
The Export Audio Mixdown dialog is divided into several sections.
680
Export Channel
In the Export Channel pop-up menu, you can select an output channel for export.
File Location
In the File Location section, the following options are available:
Name
Allows you to specify the name of the mixdown file.
Click File Name Options to open a pop-up menu with naming options:
● Set to Project Name inserts the project name into the Name field.
● Auto Update Name adds a number to the file name and increments the
number every time you export a file.
Click Set up Naming Scheme to open a dialog where you can specify a naming
scheme.
Path
Allows you to specify the file path for the mixdown file.
Click Path Options to open a pop-up menu with file path options:
● Choose opens a dialog that allows you to browse for a file location.
● Use Project Audio Folder sets the path to the Audio folder of your project.
● Project Mixdown Folder sets the path to the Mixdown folder of your project.
NOTE
If you activate Project Mixdown Folder, the option Use Project Audio Folder
is automatically disabled.
681
The Mixdown folder is automatically created in your project folder. It is used

by default if no export path information is available, that is, if you create a new
empty project, or if you load or create a project from a template.
● Recent Paths allows you to select recently selected file locations.

The Mixdown folder is not added to the list of Recent Paths.
● Clear Recent Paths allows you to delete all recently selected file locations.
Preview
Shows the file name with the naming scheme applied.
Conflicts
Exporting audio can cause naming conflicts with existing files that have the same
name. You can define how file name conflicts are resolved:
● Always Ask opens a warning that allows you to choose if an existing file
should be overwritten or if a new unique file name should be created by
adding an incremental number.
● Create Unique File Name creates a unique file name by adding an
incremental number.
● Always Overwrite always overwrites the existing file.
File Format
In the File Format section, the following options are available:
File Type
Allows you to select a file type for the mixdown file.
Sample Rate
Sets the sample rate for the mixdown file.
NOTE
● Wave, AIFF files only: If you set the value lower than the project sample rate,
the audio quality degrades and the high-frequency content is reduced. If you
set the value higher than the project sample rate, the file size increases
without increasing the audio quality. For CD burning, select 44.100 kHz,
because this is the sample rate used on audio CDs.
Bit Depth (Wave, AIFF, FLAC)

Allows you to select a bit depth for the mixdown file.
Bit Rate (MPEG 1 Layer 3)

Sets the bit rate for the MP3 file. The higher the bit rate, the better the audio quality
and the larger the file. For stereo audio, 128 kBit/s is considered to be providing
good audio quality results.
Export as
Allows you to select a channel mode for the mixdown file:
● Interleaved
Allows you to export to an interleaved file.
● Split Channels
Allows you to export the 2 channels of a stereo bus as separate mono files.
● Mono Downmix
Allows you to downmix the 2 channels of a stereo bus to a single mono file.
682
Insert Broadcast Wave Chunk (Wave, AIFF)

Activates the embedding of additional file information in Broadcast Wave format.
NOTE
By activating this option, you create a Broadcast Wave file. Some applications may
not be able to handle these files. If you get problems using the file in another
application, deactivate Insert Broadcast Wave Chunk and export the file again.
Set up Broadcast Wave Chunk (Wave, AIFF)

Opens the Broadcast Wave Chunk dialog where you can enter information.
Don’t Use Wave Extensible Format (Wave)

Deactivates the Wave Extensible format that contains additional metadata, such as
the speaker configuration.
Insert iXML Chunk (Wave, AIFF)

Includes additional project-related metadata, such as project name, author, and
project frame rate.
Insert Tempo Definition (Wave, AIFF)

This option is only available if Insert iXML Chunk is activated. It allows you to
include tempo information from the tempo track in the iXML chunk of the exported
files.
High-Quality Mode (MPEG 1 Layer 3)

Sets the encoder to a different resampling mode. This may give better results
depending on your settings. However, it does not allow you to select the Sample
Rate.
Insert ID3 Tag (MPEG 1 Layer 3)

Includes ID3 Tag information in the exported file.
Edit ID3 Tag (MPEG 1 Layer 3)

Opens the Setup ID3 Tag dialog that allows you to enter information about the file.
This information is embedded in the file and can be displayed by most MP3 playback
applications.
Compression Level (FLAC)

Sets the compression level for the FLAC file. Since FLAC is a lossless format, the level
has more influence on the encoding speed than on the file size.
Quality (OggVorbis)
Sets the quality for the variable bit rate encoding. This setting determines between
which limits the bit rate will vary. The higher the value, the higher the sound quality
but also the larger the files.
After Export
● Do Nothing does nothing after export.
● Open in WaveLab opens your mixdown file in a WaveLab version after export.
This requires that a WaveLab version is installed on your computer.
● Create New Project
NOTE
This option is only available for uncompressed file formats, and if Use Project
Audio Folder is deactivated.
683
Creates a new project that contains an audio track for each of the exported
channels, as well as the signature and tempo track of the original project.
The tracks will have the corresponding mixdown file as audio event. The track
names will be identical with the export channel names. The new project will be
the active project.
Activating this option disables the Insert to Pool and Create Audio Track
options.
● Create Audio Track
Creates an audio event that plays the clip on a new audio track, starting at the
left locator. Activating this option also activates the Pool option.
● Insert to Pool
Imports the resulting audio file automatically back into the Pool as a clip.
Deactivating this option also deactivates the Create Audio Track option.
Pool Folder
Allows you to specify a Pool folder for the clip.
General Options
In the bottom section, the following options are available:
Keep Dialog Open

Activate this to keep the dialog open after clicking Export Audio.
Update Display
Updates the meters during the export process. This allows you to check for clipping,
for example.
Export Audio
Allows you to export your audio as specified.
RELATED LINKS
File Formats on page 687
Naming Scheme Dialog

The Naming Scheme dialog allows you to define naming schemes for the file name of the audio
material that you want to export.
The naming attributes that are available in this dialog depend on the channel that you selected
for export.
● To open the Naming Scheme dialog, open the Export Audio Mixdown dialog, and in the
File Location section, to the right of the Name field, click Set up Naming Scheme.
684
Scheme
Allows you to save and delete naming schemes.
Attributes
Holds the following naming scheme attributes:
● Name
Adds the name to the resulting file name.
● Free Text
Allows you to enter free text.
● Channel Number
Adds the channel number to the resulting file name.
● Channel Type
Adds the channel type to the resulting file name.
● Channel Name
Adds the channel name to the resulting file name.
● Project Name
Adds the project name to the resulting file name.
Result
Allows you to drop attributes for the file name and rearrange them by dragging.
Settings
Allows you to select separator and counter settings.
● Separator
Divides attributes from each other.
● Counter
The value from which the counter starts counting.
● Digits
The number of digits of the counter value.
Preview
Displays a preview of your current settings.
685
Defining Naming Schemes

You can define a naming scheme by combining attributes that determine the structure of the file
names for the exported audio files.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Naming Scheme dialog, drag up to 5 attributes into the Result section.
You can also double-click an attribute to add it to the Result section.
2. Optional: In the Settings section, double-click the Separator text field to change the
separator.
The Preview section displays the file name scheme according to your settings.
3. Optional: Click the Name value field in the Scheme section and enter a preset name. Press
Return to save your settings as a preset.
NOTE
The preset is only available for the channels that are selected in the Channel Selection
section.
4. Click OK.
Entering Free Text

You can enter free text that is added to the file name of the exported audio files.
PROCEDURE
1. In the File Location section of the Export Audio Mixdown dialog, click Set up Naming
Scheme.
The Naming Scheme dialog opens.
2. Open the Scheme pop-up menu and select New Scheme.

3. Double-click the Free Text attribute to add it to the Result field.
4. In the Result field, double-click the Free Text label and enter the text that you want to
add.
5. Press Return to confirm your changes.
6. Click OK.
RESULT
The text that you entered is added to the file name scheme and will be applied on export.
686
Mixing Down to Audio Files
Mixing Down to Audio Files

You can mix selected channels down to audio files.
PREREQUISITE
● You have set up the left and right locators so that they encompass the range that you want
to mix down.
● You have set up your tracks so that they play back the way you want.
This includes muting unwanted tracks or parts, making manual MixConsole settings,
and/or activating the R (Read) automation buttons for MixConsole channels.
IMPORTANT
The setting of the Output Routing in the corresponding track Inspector determines the
channel width of the Export Audio Mixdown export. This means if no main output bus is
selected, the exported audio file only contains silence.
PROCEDURE
1. Select File > Export > Audio Mixdown.
2. In the File Location section, set up a valid export path.
3. Set up the file name.
NOTE
You can define a naming scheme in the Naming Scheme dialog.
4. In the File Format section, set up the settings according to your needs.
5. Click Export Audio.
RESULT
The audio is exported.
File Formats
The File Type pop-up menu in the File Format section allows you to select a format and make
additional settings for the mixdown file.
Wave file
This is the most common file format on the PC platform. Wave files have the
extension .wav.
AIFF file
This is an audio file format standard defined by Apple Inc. AIFF files are used on most
computer platforms. The files can contain embedded text strings. AIFF files have the
extension .aif.
MPEG 1 Layer 3 file

This is a family of standards used for encoding audio-visual information such as
movies, video, and music in a digital compressed format. Cubase can read MPEG
Layer 2 and MPEG Layer 3. MP3 files are highly compressed files that still provide
good audio quality. The files have the extension .mp3.
FLAC file
This is an open source format that reduces the size of audio files by 50 % to 60 %
compared to regular Wave files. The files have the extension .flac.
687
File Formats
Ogg Vorbis file

This is an open source, patent-free audio encoding and streaming technology. The
Ogg Vorbis encoder uses variable bit rate encoding. It offers compressed audio files
of small size, but with comparatively high audio quality. The files have the
extension .ogg.
RELATED LINKS
Wave Files on page 688
AIFF Files on page 689
MP3 (MPEG 1 Layer 3) Files on page 690
FLAC Files on page 691
Ogg Vorbis Files on page 691
File Format on page 682
Wave Files
Wave files have the extension .wav and are the most common file format on the PC platform.
● To open the settings for wave files, select Wave in the File Type pop-up menu.
Sample Rate
NOTE
If you set the value lower than the project sample rate, the audio quality degrades
and the high-frequency content is reduced. If you set the value higher than the
project sample rate, the file size increases without increasing the audio quality. For
CD burning, select 44.100 kHz, because this is the sample rate used on audio CDs.
Bit Depth
Allows you to select a bit depth for the mixdown file. You can select 8-bit, 16-bit, 24-
bit, 32-bit, 32-bit (float), or 64-bit (float). If you plan to re-import the mixdown file into
Cubase, select 32-bit (float). This is the resolution used for audio processing in
Cubase. 32-bit (float) files are twice the size of 16-bit files. For CD burning, use the 16-
bit option, as CD audio is always 16 bit. In this case, we recommend dithering.
Activating the UV-22HR dithering plug-in reduces the effects of quantization noise
and artifacts when converting the audio to 16 bit. 8-bit resolution results in limited
audio quality and should only be used if required.
Export as
● Interleaved
● Split Channels
● Mono Downmix
Insert Broadcast Wave Chunk

688
File Formats
NOTE
Set up Broadcast Wave Chunk

Insert iXML Chunk

project frame rate.
Insert Tempo Definition

files.
Don’t Use Wave Extensible Format

Deactivates the Wave Extensible format that contains additional metadata, such as
the speaker configuration.
AIFF Files
AIFF stands for Audio Interchange File Format, a standard defined by Apple Inc. AIFF files have
the extension .aif and are used on most computer platforms.
● To open the settings for AIFF files, select AIFF in the File Type pop-up menu.
Sample Rate
NOTE
Bit Depth
Export as
● Interleaved
● Split Channels
● Mono Downmix
689
File Formats
Insert Broadcast Wave Chunk

NOTE
Set up Broadcast Wave Chunk

Insert iXML Chunk

project frame rate.
Insert Tempo Definition

files.
MP3 (MPEG 1 Layer 3) Files

MP3 files are highly compressed files that still provide good audio quality. They have the
extension .mp3.
● To open the settings for MP3 files, select MPEG 1 Layer 3 in the File Type pop-up menu.
Sample Rate
Bit Rate
Sets the bit rate for the MP3 file. The higher the bit rate, the better the audio quality
and the larger the file. For stereo audio, 128 kBit/s is considered to be providing
good audio quality results.
Export as
● Interleaved
● Split Channels
● Mono Downmix
High-Quality Mode
Sets the encoder to a different resampling mode. This may give better results
depending on your settings. However, it does not allow you to select the Sample
Rate.
Insert ID3 Tag

Includes ID3 Tag information in the exported file.
690
File Formats
Edit ID3 Tag

Opens the Setup ID3 Tag dialog that allows you to enter information about the file.
This information is embedded in the file and can be displayed by most MP3 playback
applications.
FLAC Files
Free Lossless Audio Codec files are audio files that are typically 50 % to 60 % smaller than regular
Wave files.
● To open the settings for FLAC files, select FLAC in the File Type pop-up menu.
Sample Rate
NOTE
Bit Depth
Export as
● Interleaved
● Split Channels
● Mono Downmix
Compression Level
Sets the compression level for the FLAC file. Since FLAC is a lossless format, the level
has more influence on the encoding speed than on the file size.
Ogg Vorbis Files

Ogg Vorbis is an open source, patent-free audio encoding and streaming technology, offering
compressed audio files of small size, but with comparatively high audio quality. Ogg Vorbis files
have the extension .ogg.
● To open the settings for Ogg Vorbis files, select OggVorbis in the File Type pop-up menu.
Quality
Sets the quality for the variable bit rate encoding. This setting determines between
which limits the bit rate will vary. The higher the value, the higher the sound quality
but also the larger the files.
691
File Formats
Export as
● Interleaved
● Split Channels
● Mono Downmix
692
Synchronization
Synchronization is the process of getting 2 or more devices to play back together at the same
speed, position, and phase. These devices can range from audio and video tape machines to
digital audio workstations, MIDI sequencers, synchronization controllers, and digital video
devices.
If you know the position and speed for the master device, you can resolve the speed and position
of the slave device to it, so that the 2 devices play in perfect sync with one another.
Position (Time)
The following clock signals are used to specify time positions:
● Audio word clock

Specifies time positions in samples.
● Timecode
Specifies time positions in video frames.
● MIDI clock
Specifies time positions in musical bars and beats.
Speed (Clock)
The following clock signals measure the speed of a device:
● Audio word clock

Measures the sample rate.
● Timecode
Measures the frame rate.
● MIDI clock
Measures the tempo.
Phase
Phase is the alignment of the position and speed components to each other. Each pulse of the
speed component should be aligned with each measurement of the position for the most
accuracy. Each frame of timecode should be perfectly lined up with the correct sample of audio.
Put simply, phase is the very precise position of a synchronized device relative to the master
(sample accuracy).
Master and Slave

Calling one device the master and another one the slave can lead to confusion. Therefore, the
timecode relationship and the machine control relationship must be differentiated in this regard.
● Timecode Master
The device generating position information or timecode.
693
Synchronization
Timecode Formats
● Timecode Slave
Any device receiving the timecode and synchronizing or locking to it.
Timecode Formats
The position of any device is most often described using timecode. Timecode represents time
using hours, minutes, seconds, and frames to provide a location for each device. Each frame
represents a visual film or video frame.
The following timecode formats are supported:
● LTC
Longitudinal timecode or LTC is an analog signal that can be recorded on tape. It should
be used for positional information primarily. It can also be used for speed and phase
information as a last resort if no other clock source is available.
● VITC
Vertical interval timecode or VITC is contained within a composite video signal. It is
recorded onto video tape and is physically tied to each video frame.
● MTC
MIDI timecode or MTC is identical to LTC except that it is a digital signal transmitted via
MIDI.
Timecode Standards
Timecode has several standards. The subject of the various timecode formats can be very
confusing due to the use and misuse of the shorthand names for specific timecode standards
and frame rates. The timecode format can be divided into 2 variables: frame count and frame
rate.
Frame count (frames per second)

The frame count of timecode defines the standard with which it is labeled. There are 4 timecode
standards:
24 fps Film (F)

This frame count is the traditional count for film. It is also used for HD video formats
and commonly referred to as 24 p. However, with HD video, the actual frame rate or
speed of the video sync reference is slower, 23.976 frames per second, so timecode
does not reflect the actual real time on the clock for 24 p HD video.
25 fps PAL (P)

This is the broadcast video standard frame count for European (and other PAL
countries) television broadcast.
30 fps non-drop SMPTE (N)

This is the frame count of NTSC broadcast video. However, the actual frame rate or
speed of the video format runs at 29.97 fps. This timecode clock does not run in real
time. It is slightly slower by 0.1 %.
30 fps drop-frame SMPTE (D)

The 30 fps drop-frame count is an adaptation that allows a timecode display running
at 29.97 fps to actually show the clock-on-the-wall-time of the timeline by dropping or
skipping specific frame numbers in order to catch the clock up to real time.
NOTE
Remember to keep the timecode standard (or frame count) and frame rate (or speed) separate.
694
Synchronization
Clock Sources
Frame rate (speed)

Regardless of the frame counting system, the actual speed at which frames of video go by in real
time is the true frame rate.
Cubase supports the following frame rates:
24 fps
This is the true speed of standard film cameras.
25 fps
This is the frame rate of PAL video.
29.97 fps/29.97 dfps
This is the frame rate of NTSC video. The count can be either non-drop or drop-
frame.
30 fps/30 dfps
This frame rate is not a video standard anymore but has been commonly used in
music recording. Many years ago, it was the black and white NTSC broadcast
standard. It is equal to NTSC video being pulled up to film speed after a 2-3 telecine
transfer. The count can be either non-drop or drop-frame.
IMPORTANT
Video formats with a variable frame rate (VFR) are not supported.
Frame count vs. frame rate

Part of the confusion in timecode stems from the use of frames per second in both the timecode
standard and the actual frame rate. When used to describe a timecode standard, frames per
second defines how many frames of timecode are counted before one second on the counter
increments. When describing frame rates, frames per second define how many frames are
played back during the span of one second of real time. In other words: Regardless of how many
frames of video there are per second of timecode (frame count), those frames can be moving at
different rates depending on the speed (frame rate) of the video format. For example, NTSC
timecode (SMPTE) has a frame count of 30 fps. However, NTSC video runs at a rate of 29.97 fps.
So the NTSC timecode standard known as SMPTE is a 30 fps standard that runs at 29.97 fps real
time.
Clock Sources
Once the position is established, the next essential factor for synchronization is the playback
speed. Once 2 devices start playing from the same position, they must run at exactly the same
speed in order to remain in sync. Therefore, a single speed reference must be used and all
devices in the system must follow that reference. With digital audio, the speed is determined by
the audio clock rate. With video, the speed is determined by the video sync signal.
Audio clock
Audio clock signals run at the speed of the sample rate used by a digital audio device and are
transmitted in several ways:
Word clock
Word clock is a dedicated signal running at the current sample rate that is fed over
BNC coaxial cables between devices. It is the most reliable form of audio clock and is
relatively easy to connect and use.
695
Synchronization
Project Synchronization Setup Dialog
AES/SPDIF Digital Audio

An audio clock source is embedded within AES and SPDIF digital audio signals. This
clock source can be used as a speed reference. Preferably, the signal itself does not
contain any actual audio (digital black), but any digital audio source can be used if
necessary.
ADAT Lightpipe
ADAT Lightpipe, the 8-channel digital audio protocol developed by Alesis, also
contains audio clock and can be used as a speed reference. It is transmitted via
optical cables between devices.
NOTE
Do not confuse the audio clock embedded in the Lightpipe protocol with ADAT Sync, which has
timecode and machine control running over a proprietary DIN plug connection.
MIDI clock
MIDI clock is a signal that uses position and timing data based on musical bars and beats to
determine location and speed (tempo). It can perform the same function as a positional
reference and a speed reference for other MIDI devices. Cubase supports sending MIDI clock to
external devices but cannot slave to incoming MIDI clock.
IMPORTANT
MIDI clock cannot be used to synchronize digital audio. It is only used for MIDI devices to play in
musical sync with one another. Cubase does not support being a MIDI clock slave.

The Project Synchronization Setup dialog provides a central place to configure a complex
synchronized system. In addition to settings for timecode sources, basic transport controls are
available for testing the system.
To open the Project Synchronization Setup dialog, do one of the following:
● Select Transport > Project Synchronization Setup.

● In the Transport Bar, Ctrl/Cmd-click Sync.
NOTE
If you activate Steinberg SyncStation as the input source, there are several options for how
these commands are routed within the SyncStation itself. For details refer to the documentation
that comes with the SyncStation.
696
Synchronization
RELATED LINKS
Sources Page on page 698
Destinations Page on page 700
697
Synchronization
Sources Page
The Sources page allows you to set up the synchronization inputs, and to determine which
external signals enter the application.
In the topmost section, the following options are available:

Activates/Deactivates the external synchronization.
Timecode Source
The Timecode Source section allows you to determine whether Cubase is acting as timecode
master or slave. The following options are available:
Internal Timecode
Sets Cubase as timecode master that generates all position references for any other
device in the system based on the project timeline and the Project Setup settings.
MIDI Timecode
If Activate External Sync is activated, this sets Cubase as timecode slave to any
incoming MIDI timecode. You can select the MTC Input ports in the MIDI Timecode
Settings section.
ASIO Audio Device (Windows only)

Only available for audio cards that support the ASIO positioning protocol. These
cards have an integrated LTC reader or ADAT sync port and can perform a phase
alignment of timecode and audio clock.
698
Synchronization
VST System Link

Sets VST System Link as timecode source. This allows for all aspects of sample-
accurate synchronization between different computers that are connected via VST
System Link.
NOTE
Discrepancies between the Project Frame Rate and the incoming timecode can cause problems
during postproduction, even if Cubase is able to lock to that timecode.
MIDI Timecode Settings

The MIDI Timecode Settings become available if you activate MIDI Timecode as a Timecode
Source.
MTC Input
Allows you to select the MIDI input ports. To allow Cubase to synchronize to MIDI
timecode from any MIDI connection, select All MIDI Inputs.
Timecode Source Preferences

If you activate MIDI Timecode as a Timecode Source, you can set up Timecode Source
Preferences for working with external timecode. The following options are available:
Lock Frames
Determines how many full frames of timecode it takes for Cubase to lock, that is,
establish synchronization.
NOTE
If you have an external tape transport with a very short start-up time, set Lock
Frames to a low value to make lock-up even faster.
Drop Out Frames

Sets the number of timecode frames that must be missed until Cubase stops. Using
LTC on an analog tape machine can increase the number of drop outs.
Inhibit Restart ms
Some synchronizers still transmit MTC for a short period after an external
tapemachine has been stopped. These extra frames of timecode sometimes cause
Cubase to restart suddenly. Inhibit Restart ms allows you to control the amount of
time in milliseconds that Cubase waits before restart (ignoring incoming MTC) once it
has stopped.
Auto-Detect Frame Rate Changes

Notifies you about frame rate or timecode changes and interrupts playback or
recording. Activate this if you want to diagnose problems with timecode and external
devices.
Transport Start/Stop
Starts/Stops playback in Cubase.
RELATED LINKS
Activating VST System Link on page 707
699
Synchronization
Destinations Page
The Destinations page allows you to set up the synchronization outputs, and to determine
which external signals leave the application.
MIDI Clock Destinations

In the MIDI Clock Destinations section, you can select any MIDI ports that you want to output
MIDI clock. Some MIDI devices, such as drum machines, can match their tempo and location to
incoming MIDI clock.
MIDI Clock Preferences

In the MIDI Clock Preferences section, the following options are available:
MIDI Clock Follows Project Position

Ensures that the MIDI clock follows Cubase.
Always Send Start Message

MIDI clock transport commands include start, stop, and continue. Activate this if a
MIDI device does not recognize the continue command.
Send MIDI Clock in Stop Mode

Activate this if a MIDI device needs MIDI clock to run continuously in order to
operate arpeggiators and loop generators.
MIDI Timecode Destinations

In the MIDI Timecode Destinations section, you can specify the MIDI ports to which MTC is
routed.
NOTE
Some MIDI interfaces send MTC over all ports by default. If this is the case, only select one port
of the interface for the MTC.
700
Synchronization
External Synchronization
MIDI Timecode Preferences

In the MIDI Timecode Preferences section, the following options are available:
MIDI Timecode Follows Project Time

Ensures that the MTC output always follows the time position of Cubase.
External Synchronization
To activate external synchronization, do one of the following:
● Select Transport > Activate External Sync.

● Select Transport > Project Synchronization Setup, and on the Sources page, activate
Activate External Sync.
● Cubase awaits incoming timecode from the chosen timecode source defined in the Project
Synchronization Setup dialog in order to play.
Cubase will detect incoming timecode, locate to its current position, and start playback in
sync with the incoming timecode.
701
VST System Link
VST System Link is a digital audio network system that allows you to link several computers
using digital audio hardware and cables.
Linking up 2 or more computers allows you to split different tasks and different tracks between
different computers. You can run CPU-intensive processes, such as send effect plug-ins or VST
instruments on one computer, and record audio tracks on another one.
VST System Link supplies transport and sync control, as well as up to 16 MIDI ports, with 16
channels each.
With VST System Link the signal is passed from one machine to the next, and eventually returns
to the first machine.
For this to work, you need 2 or more computers that use the same or different operating
systems, and for each computer in the network, the following:
● Audio hardware with digital inputs and outputs and a specific ASIO driver.
The same digital formats and connection types.
● At least one digital audio cable, such as S/PDIF, ADAT, TDIF, or AES.
● A VST System Link host application.
NOTE
You might want to invest in a KVM (Keyboard, Video, Mouse) switchbox. This allows you to use
the same keyboard, monitor, and mouse to control each computer in the system, and to switch
between computers very rapidly.
Setting up VST System Link

To be able to work with VST System Link, you must first set up the network, configure the audio
hardware, and set up the digital audio connections.
VST System Link Section

The VST System Link section allows you to set up VST System Link.
● To open the VST System Link section, select Studio > Studio Setup and select VST System
Link in the Devices list.
702
VST System Link
Active
Activates VST System Link.
Online
Puts the computer online.
ASIO Input
Allows you to define the networking input channel.
ASIO Output
Allows you to define the networking output channel.
Use Selected ASIO Ports for Data only

Activate this if you want to devote more bandwidth to MIDI, and send VST System
Link information on the entire channel. This channel is then no longer available for
audio transfer.
Offset Samples
Allows you to set an offset for the computer, so that it plays slightly ahead or behind
the rest.
Transfer Bits
Allows you to specify whether you want to transfer 24 or 16 bits. This allows you to
use older audio cards which do not support transfer of 24 bits.
MIDI Inputs
Allows you to set the number of MIDI input ports.
MIDI Outputs
Allows you to set the number of MIDI output ports.
703
VST System Link
Self test
Allows you to test the network.
Receiving
Lights up if the computer is active.
Sending
Lights up if the computer is active.
List
Shows the name of each computer.
Setting up a Network
You can set up a network by connecting computers.
PROCEDURE
1. Use a digital audio cable to connect the digital output of computer 1 to the digital input of
computer 2.
If you have more than 2 computers, add the others one by one.
2. Use a cable to connect the digital output of computer 2 to the digital input of computer 1.
VST System Link is a daisy chain system, that means, that the output of computer 1 goes
to the input of computer 2, the output of computer 2 goes to the input of computer 3, and
so on around the chain. The output of the last computer in the chain must always go back
into the input of computer 1, to complete the ring.
NOTE
If a card has more than one set of inputs and outputs, choose whichever one that suits you
– for simplicity usually the first set is best.
Configuring the Audio Clock

To be able to use VST System Link, the clock signals on your ASIO cards must be synchronized
correctly.
PREREQUISITE
For each computer in the network, the following must apply:
● The correct audio driver is selected in the Studio Setup dialog.
● The clock mode or sync mode is set up in the ASIO control panel of the audio hardware.
PROCEDURE
2. In the Devices list, select the your audio hardware.
4. Set one audio hardware to be the clock master and all other cards to be clock slaves.
Consult the documentation if required.
IMPORTANT
If you set up more than one card as clock master, the network cannot function correctly.
However, if you use an external clock from a digital mixing desk or a special word clock
synchronizer, for example, you must leave all your ASIO cards in clock slave or AutoSync
mode and make sure that each of them is listening for the signal coming from the
704
VST System Link
synchronizer. This signal is usually passed through your ADAT cables or word clock
connectors in a daisy chain fashion.
RESULT
Typically, the ASIO control panel for an audio card contains some indication of whether or not the
card receives a proper sync signal, including the sample rate of that signal. This is a good
indication that you have connected the cards and set up clock sync properly. Check the
documentation of your audio hardware for details.
RELATED LINKS
Selecting an Audio Driver on page 14
ASIO Driver Setup Page on page 17
Adjusting the Buffer Size

In a VST System Link network, adjusting the buffer size to minimize latency is extra important.
This is due to the fact that the latency of a VST System Link network is the total latency of all the
ASIO cards in the system added together.
PROCEDURE
2. In the Devices list, select your audio hardware.
4. Lower the size of the buffers.
The lower the buffer size, the lower the latency. It is best to keep to fairly low buffer sizes if
your system can handle it. About 12 ms or less is usually a good idea.
IMPORTANT
Latency does not affect the synchronization, but it can affect the time it takes to send and
receive MIDI and audio signals, or make the system seem sluggish.
Audio Hardware Settings that Affect VST System Link

Specific audio hardware settings might change the digital information in a way that the correct
functioning of VST System Link is affected.
You can find these settings in the control panel or additional application for your audio
hardware. Make sure that the following conditions are met:
● Any additional format settings for digital ports that you use for VST System Link data
must be turned off.
If you use an S/PDIF connection for VST System Link, for example, turn off Professional
format, Emphasis, and Dithering.
● Any mixer application of your audio hardware that allows for level adjustments of digital
inputs and outputs must be disabled.
Alternatively, you can set the levels for the VST System Link channels to ±0 dB.
● Digital signal processing, such as pan or effects, must be turned off for the VST System
Link signal.
● For RME Audio Hammerfall DSP audio hardware, select the default or plain preset for the
Totalmix function.
Otherwise signal loops might occur and VST System Link cannot work.
705
VST System Link
Setting up Sample Rates

All projects on all computer must be set up to the same sample rate.
PROCEDURE
2. In the Project Time Displays section, open the Sample Rate pop-up menu and select a
sample rate.
Setting up Digital Audio Connections

PROCEDURE
2. Click the Inputs tab, and click Add Bus.
3. In the Add Input Bus dialog, configure the bus.
4. Click Add Bus.
5. Click the Outputs tab, and click Add Bus.
6. In the Add Output Bus dialog, configure the bus.
7. Click Add Bus.
8. Repeat these steps for all applications.
Set up the same configuration in all applications. If you have 4 stereo output busses on
computer 1, you want 4 stereo input busses on computer 2, etc.
9. Route the applications to the digital inputs and outputs.
RELATED LINKS
Audio Bus Setup on page 19
Audio Connections Window on page 24
Verifying the Digital Connection

PROCEDURE
1. Connect an audio source to your audio interface.
2. Start recording, playing back, and mixing.
3. On computer 1, play back some audio.
4. Select Studio > MixConsole, and route the channel that contains the audio material to one
of the digital output busses.
5. On computer 2, select Studio > MixConsole, and locate the corresponding digital input
bus.
The audio that is played back should now appear in the application running on computer
2, and the input bus level meters should move.
RESULT
You have now verified that the digital connection works as it should. You can reverse this
procedure so that computer 2 plays back and computer 1 listens.
706
VST System Link
Activating VST System Link

You must activate VST System Link on all network computers to be able to work with VST
System Link.
PROCEDURE
1. Select Transport > Project Synchronization Setup, and on the Sources tab, activate VST
System Link as the timecode source.
3. In the Devices list, select VST System Link.
4. Use the ASIO Input and ASIO Output pop-up menus to define which channel is the
networking channel that carries the VST System Link information.
NOTE
The networking signal is carried on only one bit of one channel. For an ADAT-based system
7 channels of 24-bit audio and 1 channel of 23-bit audio will be used for networking. You
will still have around 138 dB headroom on this channel.
5. Activate Active at the top left of the VST System Link setup.
6. Repeat the steps for each computer in the network.
RESULT
The sending and receiving indicators on each active computer flash, and the name of each
computer appears in the list in the Self test section of the dialog. Each computer is assigned a
random number.
The name will be shown in the VST System Link window of every computer on the network. You
can double-click the name of the computer and enter another name.
707
VST System Link
NOTE
If you do not see the name of each computer, go through the procedure above again and make
sure that all ASIO cards are listening to the digital clock signals correctly, and that each computer
has the correct inputs and outputs assigned to the VST System Link network.
RELATED LINKS
Sources Page on page 698
Putting Network Computers Online

You must put the network computers online so that they can send and receive transport and
timecode signals, and that their sequencer applications can be started and stopped.
PREREQUISITE
All computers have their tempos set to the same value.
PROCEDURE
3. Activate Online.
4. Repeat this for each computer in the network.
RESULT
The computers are online now.
Start playback on one computer to check if the system is working, and if all computers start and
play perfectly in time.
VST System Link sends and understands all transport commands. This allows you to control the
entire network from one computer. However, any computer can control any and all of the others.
This is due to the fact that VST System Link is a peer-to-peer network, and that there is no
absolute master computer.
Activating MIDI Ports for VST System Link

You can activate MIDI input and output ports for VST System Link. This allows you to route MIDI
tracks to VST instruments running on another computer.
PROCEDURE
3. Specify the number of MIDI ports you need using the MIDI Inputs and MIDI Outputs
value fields.
4. Create a MIDI track.
708
VST System Link
Application Examples
RESULT
In the top section of the MIDI track Inspector, the Input Routing and Output Routing pop-up
menu now show the specified VST System Link ports.
This allows you to route MIDI tracks to VST instruments running on another computer.
VST System Link allows you to split different tasks between 2 or more computers. The following
application examples should give you an idea of what is possible.
Configuring a Main Mix Computer

Configuring one computer as a main mix computer that receives the audio from your other
computers allows you to mix internally in the computer.
In the following example, we assume you are using 2 computers: computer 1 as your main mix
computer and computer 2 for 2 additional stereo audio tracks, an FX channel track with a reverb
plug-in and a VST instrument plug-in with stereo outputs.
PROCEDURE
1. On computer 1, use an unused set of outputs, such as an analog stereo output, connected
to your monitoring equipment to listen to the audio playback.
2. On computer 2, route each of the 2 audio tracks to a separate output bus connected to the
digital outputs, bus 1 and 2, for example.
3. Route the FX channel track to another VST System Link bus, bus 3, for example.
4. Route the VST instrument channel to yet another bus, bus 4, for example.
5. On computer 1, check the corresponding 4 VST System Link input busses.
If you start playback on computer 2, the audio should appear on the input busses on
computer 1. However, to mix these audio sources you need actual mixer channels.
6. Add 4 new stereo audio tracks on computer 1 and route these to the output bus you use
for listening, such as the analog stereo outputs.
7. For each of the audio tracks, select one of the 4 input busses.
Now, each computer 2 bus is routed to a separate audio channel on computer 1.
8. Activate monitoring for the 4 tracks.
709
VST System Link
RESULT
If you now start playback, the audio from computer 2 will be sent live to the new tracks on
computer 1, allowing you to hear them together with any tracks you play back on computer 1.
If you notice a processing delay while you listen to signals coming from your other computers
while monitoring, try the following to compensate for latency issues:
● If your audio hardware supports this, activate ASIO Direct Monitoring on the Audio
System device panel for your hardware.
● Alternatively, open the Studio Setup dialog, and on the VST System Link page, change
the Offset Samples value.
Configuring a Computer as Submixer

If you have more audio tracks than you have VST System Link busses, you can use a computer
mixer as a submixer.
PROCEDURE
● Route several audio channels to the same output bus and adjust the output bus level if
needed.
NOTE
If your audio cards have multiple sets of input and output connections, you can link up
multiple ADAT cables and send audio via any of the busses on any of the cables.
Routing MIDI Tracks to VSTis on Other Computers

You can route MIDI tracks from one computer to VST instruments on another computer. This
allows you to use one computer for playback and recording and the other one as a VSTi rack.
PROCEDURE
1. Record a MIDI track into computer 1.
2. Once you have finished recording, route the MIDI output of that track to VST System Link
MIDI port 1.
3. On computer 2, open the VST Instruments window and assign an instrument to the first
slot in the rack.
4. Route the VST instrument channel to the desired output bus.
If you are using computer 1 as your main mixing computer, this would be one of the VST
System Link output busses, connected to computer 1.
5. Create a new MIDI track in the Project window of computer 2 and assign the MIDI output
of the track to the VST instrument you created.
6. Assign the MIDI input of the track to be VST System Link port 1.
Now, the MIDI track on computer 1 is routed to the MIDI track on computer 2, which in
turn is routed to the VST instrument.
7. Now activate monitoring for the MIDI track on computer 2, so that it will listen and
respond to any MIDI commands coming in.
In Cubase, click the Monitor button in the track list or Inspector.
8. Start playback on computer 1.
It will now send the MIDI information on the track to the VST instrument loaded on
computer 2.
710
VST System Link
RESULT
Even with a slow computer you should be able to stack a whole bunch of extra VST instruments
this way, expanding your sound palette considerably. Do not forget that VST System Link MIDI is
also sample-accurate, and thus has much tighter timing than any hardware MIDI interface ever
invented!
Routing Audio Sends to Other Computers

The effect sends for an audio channel in Cubase can either be routed to an FX channel track or to
any activated group or output bus. This allows you to use a separate computer as a virtual effect
rack.
PROCEDURE
1. On computer 2, the machine you will use as effect rack, add a new stereo audio track.
2. Add the desired effect as an insert effect for the track.
3. In the Inspector, select one of the VST System Link busses as input for the audio track.
4. Route the channel to one of the VST System Link output busses connected to computer 1.
5. Activate monitoring for the track.
6. Go back to computer 1 and select a track to which you want to add some reverb.
7. Open the Sends rack for the track in the Inspector or the MixConsole.
8. Open the Send Routing pop-up menu for one of the sends and select the VST System
Link bus assigned to the effect.
9. Use the Send slider to adjust the amount of effect as usual.
RESULT
The signal will be sent to the track on computer 2 and processed through its insert effect,
without using any processor power on computer 1.
You can repeat the steps above to add more effects to the virtual effect rack. The number of
effects available this way is only limited by the number of ports used in the VST System Link
connection, and by the performance of computer 2.
Recording Tracks on Other Computers

You can record tracks on another computer. This is useful if the hard drive on one computer is
not fast enough to run as many audio tracks as you need.
PROCEDURE
● Add tracks on another computer and record on them.
RESULT
This creates a virtual RAID system, with several disks all operating together. All tracks will remain
locked together just as tightly as if they were all running on the same machine.
Playing Back Video on Other Computers

You can play back video on another computer to free up resources for audio and MIDI
processing on your main CPU. This is useful as playback of high-resolution video can be quite
demanding on the CPU.
PROCEDURE
● Move video tracks to another computer.
711
VST System Link
RESULT
Since all transport commands respond on the VST System Link computers, scrubbing video is
possible even when it is coming from another computer.
When scrubbing, the playback on the linked systems may not be perfectly in sync. Also, there are
some further restrictions when scrubbing via VST System Link:
● Always use the system where you started scrubbing to control the scrubbing.
Changing the scrub speed on a remote system will only change the speed on the local
system.
● You can start playback on all systems.
This stops scrubbing and enters playback on all systems in sync.
712
Video
Cubase allows you to work with video content.
You can play back video files in various formats and via different output devices from within
Cubase, extract the audio material from a video file, and edit your music to the video.
The video export function allows you to share your videos with clients or other users.
IMPORTANT
Videos are exported with a resolution of 1920 x 1080 px (Full HD). Video files with a lower or
higher resolution than Full HD are upscaled or downscaled on export.
RELATED LINKS
Preparations for Video Playback on page 717
Export Video on page 720
Video File Compatibility

When working on a project involving a video file, you must make sure that the video file type
works on your Cubase system.
NOTE
If you are not able to play back a specific video file, use an external application to convert the file
into a compatible format.
To find out which video files are supported, refer to the support area at steinberg.net.
RELATED LINKS
Codecs on page 714
Video Container Formats

Video and other multimedia files come in a container format.
This container holds various streams of information including video and audio, but also
metadata such as synchronization information required to play back audio and video together.
Data regarding creation dates, authors, chapter markings, and more can also be held within the
container format.
The following container formats are supported by Cubase:
MOV
This is a QuickTime movie.
713
Video
Frame Rates
MPEG-4
This format can contain various metadata for streaming, editing, local playback, and
interchange of content. Its file extension is .mp4.
AVI
This is a multimedia container format introduced by Microsoft.
Codecs
Codecs are methods of data compression used to make video and audio files smaller and more
manageable for computers.
For further details, refer to the support area at steinberg.net.
Frame Rates
Cubase supports different video and film frame rates.
Frame rate (speed)

Regardless of the frame counting system, the actual speed at which frames of video go by in real
time is the true frame rate.
Cubase supports the following frame rates:
24 fps
This is the true speed of standard film cameras.
25 fps
This is the frame rate of PAL video.
29.97 fps/29.97 dfps
This is the frame rate of NTSC video. The count can be either non-drop or drop-
frame.
30 fps/30 dfps
This frame rate is not a video standard anymore but has been commonly used in
music recording. Many years ago, it was the black and white NTSC broadcast
standard. It is equal to NTSC video being pulled up to film speed after a 2-3 telecine
transfer. The count can be either non-drop or drop-frame.
IMPORTANT
Video formats with a variable frame rate (VFR) are not supported.
Video Output Devices

Cubase supports several video output devices.
Viewing video files onscreen in the Video Player window may work just fine for many
applications, but often it is necessary to display video in a large format for viewing small details
and so others involved in the session can also see the video. Cubase provides the ability to use
several types of video output devices to accomplish this.
Dedicated Video Cards

You can use a dedicated video card. Video is sent directly to the output of this video device.
The following video cards are supported:
714
Video
Preparations for Creating Video Projects
● Blackmagic Design video output devices
IMPORTANT
● You must install the appropriate driver for the video device and set the video card output
to the video file resolution used in your project.
● Video output via FireWire is not supported.
RELATED LINKS
Video Player Page on page 717

Before you can start working with video in Cubase, some basic preparations must be made.
In Cubase, you may work with multiple video files of different formats on the same video track.
NOTE
For proper synchronization of audio and video events, make sure that the project frame rate
matches the frame rate of the video file.
RELATED LINKS
Importing Video Files

If you have a compatible video file, you can import it into your project.
PROCEDURE
1. Select File > Import > Video File.
2. In the Import Video dialog, select the video file that you want to import.
3. Optional: Activate Extract Audio from Video to import any embedded audio streams.
4. Click Open.
RESULT
Cubase creates a video track with a video event. If Extract Audio from Video was activated, an
audio track with an audio event is positioned below the video track. The corresponding audio clip
is saved in the Pool Record folder.
NOTE
You can also import video files by dragging them from the MediaBay, the File Explorer/macOS
Finder and dropping them in your project. If you want Cubase to automatically extract the audio,
activate Extract Audio on Import Video File in the Preferences dialog (Video page).
RELATED LINKS
Pool on page 415
715
Video
Adopting the Project Frame Rate

To ensure that the time display of Cubase corresponds to the actual frames in the video, you
must set the project frame rate to the frame rate of the imported video file.
PREREQUISITE
The frame rate of the imported video file differs from the project frame rate.
PROCEDURE
2. In the Project Setup dialog, click Get Frame Rate from Video.
3. Click OK.
RESULT
● If Cubase supports the frame rate of the video, the project frame rate is adopted to it. If
needed, the project start time is automatically adjusted to reflect the change in frame rate.
For example, if the project frame rate is switched from 30 fps to 29.97 fps, the project start
time is adopted so that all the events in the project remain at the same positions in
relation to real time.
NOTE
If you want the project start time to remain the same, you must manually change it back.
In this case, you must snap the video event to the timeline to ensure proper positioning
and synchronization within the project.
Thumbnail Cache Files

For every imported video file, Cubase automatically creates a thumbnail cache file.
RELATED LINKS
Manually Generating Thumbnail Cache Files on page 716
Manually Generating Thumbnail Cache Files

You can manually generate thumbnail cache files. This is necessary if a thumbnail cache file could
not be generated during import because the folder is write-protected, or because you have
edited the file with an external video editing application.
PROCEDURE
● In the Pool, right-click the video file and select Generate Thumbnail Cache.
● In the Project window, select the video event and select Media > Generate
Thumbnail Cache.
NOTE
You can only refresh already existing thumbnail cache files from within the Pool.
716
Video
Preparations for Video Playback
RESULT
The thumbnail cache file is generated in the background so that you can continue working with
Cubase.

You can play back imported video files from within Cubase by using the transport controls.
For this to work, you must activate and set up a video output device.
IMPORTANT
Your graphics card must support OpenGL 2.0 or higher.
Video Player Page

The Video Player setup page in the Studio Setup dialog allows you to set up your video player,
and to check if your video equipment allows for video playback from within Cubase.
● To open the Video Player page, select Studio > Studio Setup and activate Video Player in
the Devices list.
The following options are displayed:
Device
Lists the video output devices that are available on your system.
Format
Allows you to select an output format.
NOTE
The Onscreen Window device only supports a fixed format.
Offset
If the video image does not match the audio, you can enter an offset value in
milliseconds to specify how much earlier the video should be delivered. This
compensates for the display delay. The offset is only used during playback. It is saved
globally for each output device and is independent of the project.
Active
Allows you to activate the device that you want to use for playing back video.
717
Video
Show Timecode
Allows you to show the timecode.
Position
Allows you to determine the position for the timecode display.
Activating a Video Output Device

PROCEDURE
2. In the Devices list, activate Video Player.
The available video output devices are listed in the Device column.
3. In the Active column, activate the checkbox for the device that you want to use for playing
back video.
NOTE
If you have no external device connected, you can use the Onscreen Window device that
allows you to play back the video file on your computer monitor.
RELATED LINKS
Video Output Devices on page 714
Video Player Window

The Video Player window provides different size options for video playback on your computer
screen. However, the larger the size of the window and the higher the resolution of your video,
the more processor load is needed.
● To open the Video Player window, select Studio > Video Player.
Fullscreen Mode
Sets the window to full screen mode. To exit full screen mode, open the context
menu and select Exit Fullscreen Mode or press Esc.
718
Video
Editing Video
Quarter Size
Reduces the window to a quarter of the actual size.
Half Size
Reduces the window to half the actual size.
Actual Size
Sets the window to the size of the video.
Double Size
Enlarges the window to twice the actual size.
Aspect Ratio
You can also drag the borders of the Video Player window to resize it. However, this
might lead to a distorted image. To prevent this, you can set an option from the
Aspect Ratio pop-up menu.
● If you select None, the aspect ratio of the video is not kept when you resize
the window. The image is enlarged/reduced to occupy the whole Video Player
window.
● Internal allows you to resize the window freely while keeping the aspect ratio
of the video. Borders might be displayed around the video image to fill the
window.
● External allows you to resize the window within some limits so that the video
image always fills the full window and its aspect ratio is kept.
● NOTE
In full screen mode, the aspect ratio of the video is always kept.
Scrubbing Video
You can scrub video events, that is, play them back forwards or backwards.
PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > Video Player.
● Click in the Video Player window and move the mouse to the left or to the right.
● Use a jog wheel on a remote controller.
Editing Video
Video events are created automatically when you import a video file.
When working with video events, the following applies:
● You can view and edit video events in the Project window. A video event triggers the
playback of the corresponding video clip.
● You can copy and trim video events.
● You cannot draw, glue, and mute video events, or apply fades or crossfades.
719
Video
Export Video
Export Video
You can export a video file from your project. This allows you, for example, to share sections of
intermediate results or finished videos with clients or other users.
The Export Video function exports the video and a stereo audio signal that are enclosed
between the left and right locators. This allows you to export a specific range or your whole
project by setting the locators accordingly.
Videos are exported in the following format:
● Container format: MP4

● Video compression codec: H.264 without long group of pictures (Long GOP) sequences
● Resolution: 1920 x 1080 px (Full HD)
IMPORTANT
Video with a lower or higher resolution than Full HD is upscaled or downscaled on export.
● Frame rate: Same as the project frame rate

● Audio compression codec: AAC
● Sample rate: Same as the project sample rate
IMPORTANT
Video export supports sample rates of 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz only.
● Bit depth: 16 bit
You can only add a stereo output channel to the exported video file. We recommend that you
route all mono, stereo, or multi-channel channels that you want to export to a stereo output
channel via send, and select this output channel in the Export Video dialog.
RELATED LINKS
Export Video Dialog on page 720
Exporting Video Files on page 722
Export Video Dialog

The Export Video dialog provides settings for exporting a video file from your project.
● To open the Export Video dialog, select File > Export > Video.
The Export Video dialog is divided into several sections.
720
Video
Export Video
File Location
File Name
Allows you to specify the name of the exported video file.
File Path
Allows you to specify the file path of the exported video file.
Click Path Options to open a pop-up menu with file path options:
● Choose opens the File Explorer/macOS Finder allowing you to browse for a file
location.
● Recent Paths allows you to select a recently selected file locations.
● Clear Recent Paths allows you to delete all recently selected file locations.
Video Settings
Video Format
Shows the format of the exported video file.
Add Timecode
Adds the project timecode to the exported video file.
Audio Settings
Channel Selection
Allows you to select a stereo output channel for export. MixConsole settings and
insert effects are taken into account.
Realtime Export
Allows you to export the audio mixdown in real time. Realtime export takes at least
the same time as regular playback. Activate this if you use external effects or
instruments, or if you use VST plug-ins that require time to update correctly during
the mixdown. For further information, refer to the documentation of the respective
plug-ins.
721
Video
Export Video
NOTE
● If you export external effects or instruments in real time, you must also
activate Monitor for the respective audio channels.
● Realtime Export affects only the audio export. Video is processed as usual.
Export Range
This section provides information about the exported locator range.
File Information
This section provides detailed information about the exported video file.
General Options
In the bottom section, the following options are available:
Keep Dialog Open

Activate this to keep the dialog open after clicking Export Video.
Export Video
Allows you to export your video as specified.
RELATED LINKS
Export Video on page 720
Exporting Video Files

You can export a video including a stereo audio signal of your whole project or of a specific range
as an MP4 video file.
PREREQUISITE
● Your project sample rate is set to 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz.
● If you want to export external audio signals, you have activated Monitor for the
corresponding channel.
PROCEDURE
1. Set up the left and right locators to encompass the section that you want to export.
2. Set up the audio in your project so that it plays back the way you want.
NOTE
You can only add a stereo output channel to the exported video file. We recommend that
you route all mono, stereo, or multi-channel channels that you want to export to a stereo
output channel via send.
3. Select File > Export > Video.

4. In the Export Video dialog, select the stereo output channel that you want to export.
NOTE
Make sure that the selected output channel contains all audio that you want to use for the
exported file. For example, solo the channels that you want to export, or mute the
channels that you do not want to export.
5. Make any further export settings.
722
Video
Extracting Audio from Video
6. Click Export Video.
RESULT
The video file is exported.
RELATED LINKS
Export Video Dialog on page 720
Extracting Audio from Video

You can extract the audio stream of a video file on import.
PROCEDURE
● Select File > Import > Audio from Video File.
This creates an audio clip in the Pool, but does not add any events to the Project
window.
● Select Media > Extract Audio from Video File.
2. In the dialog, select the video file, and click Open.
3. In the Import Options dialog, select the desired import options.
RESULT
The extracted audio stream is added to the project on a new audio track and can be edited like all
other audio material.
RELATED LINKS
Pool on page 415
On Import Audio Files Settings on page 215
723
ReWire
ReWire is a special protocol for streaming audio between two computer applications.
Developed by Propellerhead Software and Steinberg, ReWire provides the following possibilities
and features:
● Realtime streaming of up to 48 separate audio channels, at full bandwidth, from the

synthesizer application into the mixer application.
In this case, the mixer application is of course Cubase. An example of a synthesizer
application is Propellerhead Software’s Reason.
● Automatic, sample-accurate synchronization between the audio in the two programs.
● The possibility to have the two programs share one audio card and take advantage of
multiple outputs on that card.
● Linked transport controls that allow you to play, rewind, etc., either from Cubase or from
the synthesizer application (provided it has some kind of transport functionality).
● Automatic audio mixing functions of separate channels as required.
In the case of Reason, for example, this allows you to have separate channels for the
different devices.
● Additionally, ReWire offers the possibility to route MIDI tracks in Cubase to the other
application for full MIDI control.
For each ReWire-compatible device, a number of extra MIDI outputs is made available in
Cubase. In the case of Reason, this allows you to route different MIDI tracks in Cubase to
different devices in Reason, with Cubase serving as the main MIDI sequencer.
● The overall load on your system is reduced significantly, compared to when using the
programs together in the conventional way.
Enabling ReWire Applications

To use the available ReWire applications on your computer in your project, you must enable
them in the ReWire Setup dialog.
IMPORTANT
● Enabling ReWire applications may have an impact on performance and stability of Cubase,
even if the ReWire connection is not used. We therefore recommend to enable only ReWire
applications that you want to use in your project.
● Disabling a ReWire application removes the corresponding ReWire channels from your
project. All associated automation or parameter settings are lost.
PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > ReWire > ReWire Setup.
2. Activate the ReWire applications that you want to use.
3. Click Apply.
724
ReWire
Launching and quitting
RESULT
The enabled ReWire applications become available in the ReWire submenu.
You can activate ReWire channels in the ReWire panel of the application.
RELATED LINKS
Activating ReWire channels on page 726
Launching and quitting

When using ReWire, the order in which you launch and quit the two programs is very important.
Launching for normal use with ReWire

When you use Cubase with ReWire, the order in which you launch the two programs is very
important.
PROCEDURE
1. First launch Cubase.
2. Enable one or several ReWire channels in the ReWire Device dialog for the other
application.
3. Launch the other application.
It may take slightly longer for the application to start when you are using ReWire.
RELATED LINKS
Activating ReWire channels on page 726
Quitting a ReWire session

When you are finished using ReWire, you must quit the applications in a specific order.
PROCEDURE
1. First quit the synthesizer application.
2. Then quit Cubase.
Launching both programs without using ReWire

It is possible to run Cubase and the synthesizer application simultaneously on the same
computer, without using ReWire, even though use cases for this might be rare.
PROCEDURE
1. First launch the synthesizer application.
2. Then launch Cubase.
NOTE
Please note that the two programs now compete for system resources such as audio
cards, just as when running with other, non-ReWire audio applications.
725
ReWire
Activating ReWire channels
Activating ReWire channels

ReWire supports streaming of up to 48 separate audio channels. The exact number of available
ReWire channels depends on the synthesizer application. The ReWire device panels in Cubase,
allow you to activate the channels that you want to use.
PREREQUISITE
You have enabled the ReWire application that you want to use in the ReWire Setup dialog.
PROCEDURE
1. Select Studio > ReWire, and select the ReWire application that you want to use.
The corresponding ReWire panel appears. This consists of a number of rows, one for each
available ReWire channel.
2. Click the power buttons to the left to activate/deactivate channels.
The buttons light up to indicate activated channels.
3. Optional: Double-click the labels in the right column, and type in another name.
These labels are used in your project to identify the ReWire channels.
RESULT
The activated ReWire channels are added to the project.
NOTE
● The more ReWire channels you activate, the more processing power is required.
● For information about exactly what signal is carried on each channel, refer to the
documentation of the synthesizer application.
IMPORTANT
Deactivating ReWire channels in the ReWire panel removes the channels from your project. All
associated automation or parameter settings are lost.
RELATED LINKS
Enabling ReWire Applications on page 724
Using the transport and tempo controls

IMPORTANT
This is only relevant if the synthesizer application has a built-in sequencer or similar application.
726
ReWire
How the ReWire channels are handled
Basic transport controls

When you run ReWire, the transports in the two programs are completely linked. It does not
matter in which program you play, stop, fast forward or rewind. However, recording (if
applicable) is still completely separate in the two applications.
Loop settings
If there is a loop or cycle facility in the synthesizer application, that loop will be completely linked
to the cycle in Cubase. This means that you can move the start and end point for the loop or turn
the loop on or off in either program, and this will be reflected in the other.
Tempo settings
As far as tempo goes, Cubase is always the master. This means that both programs will run in the
tempo set in Cubase.
However, if you are not using the tempo track in Cubase, you can adjust the tempo in either
program, and this will immediately be reflected in the other.
IMPORTANT
If you are using the tempo track in Cubase and the Activate Tempo Track button is activated on
the Transport panel, you should not adjust the tempo in the synthesizer application, since a
tempo request from ReWire automatically deactivates the tempo track in Cubase.
How the ReWire channels are handled

When you activate ReWire channels in the ReWire device panels, they will become available as
channels in the MixConsole.
The ReWire channels have the following properties:
● ReWire channels may be any combination of mono and stereo, depending on the
synthesizer application.
● ReWire channels have the same functionality as regular audio channels.
This means you can set volume and pan, add EQ, insert effects and sends, and route the
channel outputs to groups or busses. However, ReWire channels have no monitor buttons.
● All channel settings can be automated using the Read/Write buttons.
When you write automation, channel automation tracks will automatically appear in the
Project window. This allows you to view and edit the automation graphically, just as with
VST instrument channels, etc.
● You can mix down the audio from ReWire channels to a file on your hard disk with the
Export Audio Mixdown function.
RELATED LINKS
Mixing Down to Audio Files on page 687
Routing MIDI via ReWire

When using Cubase with a ReWire-compatible application, additional MIDI outputs will
automatically appear on the Output Routing pop-up menus for MIDI tracks. This allows you to
play the synthesizer application via MIDI from Cubase, using it as one or several separate MIDI
sound sources.
727
ReWire
Considerations and limitations
● The number and configuration of MIDI outputs depends on the synthesizer application.
Considerations and limitations

Sample rates
Synthesizer applications may be limited to audio playback in certain sample rates. If Cubase is set
to a sample rate other than those, the synthesizer application will play back at the wrong pitch.
Consult the documentation of the synthesizer application for details.
ASIO drivers
ReWire works well with ASIO drivers. By using the Cubase bus system, you can route sounds
from the synthesizer application to various outputs on an ASIO compatible audio card.
728
Key Commands
Key commands are assigned to most main menus and functions in Cubase. They are stored as
Preferences that are used for all your projects.
You can view and add key commands in the Key Commands dialog. Key command assignments
are also shown in the tooltips.
Tooltips that show an exclamation mark at the end have no key command assigned yet.
You can save key commands settings as a key commands file, which is stored separately and can
be imported into any project. This way you can quickly and easily recall customized settings when
moving projects between different computers, for example. The settings are saved in an XML file
on the hard disk.
RELATED LINKS
Saving Key Commands Presets on page 732
Key Commands Dialog

The Key Commands dialog allows you to view and edit key commands for the main menus and
functions in Cubase.
● To open the Key Commands dialog, select Edit > Key Commands.
729
Key Commands
Key Commands Dialog
+ All
Expands all folders.
- All
Reduces all folders.
Search
Allows you to search for Cubase functions. This is useful if you want to know which
key command is assigned to a specific function.
Reset Current Key Command

Allows you to reset the selected key command back to the default setting.
Commands list
Shows the Cubase functions for that you can assign key commands arranged in
category folders.
Keys
This is where the assigned key command is shown for the function that is selected in
the Commands list.
Delete Selected Key Command

Removes the key command assignment from the function that is selected in the
Commands list.
Assign Key
Assigns the key from the Type in Key value field to the function that is selected in the
Commands list.
Type in Key
This is where you can enter a key that is assigned to a function that is selected in the
Commands list.
Assigned to:
Shows the function that the key in the Type in Key value field is assigned to. Click the
Select button, to select this function in the Commands list.
Select Preset
Opens a menu with the stored key commands presets.
Store
Opens a dialog that allows you to store a key commands preset.
Delete
Deletes the selected key commands preset.
Reset All
Resets all key commands to their default settings.
RELATED LINKS
Assigning Key Commands on page 731
Searching for Key Commands on page 731
Resetting Key Commands on page 732
Removing Key Commands on page 732
Loading Key Command Presets on page 732
Saving Key Commands Presets on page 732
730
Key Commands
Assigning Key Commands
Assigning Key Commands

You can add key commands in the Key Commands dialog.
PROCEDURE
1. Select Edit > Key Commands.
● In the Commands list, click the plus sign to open a category folder, and select the
function to which you want to assign a key command.
● In the search field, enter the name of the function to which you want to assign a key
command.
Assigned key commands are shown in the Keys column as well as in the Keys list to the
right.
3. Click the Type in Key field and press the keys you want to use as a key command.
You can press individual keys or a combination of one or several modifier keys (Ctrl/Cmd,
Alt/Opt, Shift) plus any key.
4. Click Assign.
The key command is shown in the Keys section.
5. Click OK.
NOTE
You can set up several different key commands for the same function. Adding a key
command to a function that already has another key command does not replace the key
command previously defined for the function.
Searching for Key Commands

You can search for Cubase functions in the Key Commands dialog. This is useful if you want to
know which key command is assigned to a specific function.
PROCEDURE
2. In the search field, enter the name of the function for which you want to know the key
command.
3. Click Start/Continue Search.
RESULT
The first matching command is selected and displayed in the Commands list. The Keys column
and the Keys list show the assigned key commands, if any.
731
Key Commands
Removing Key Commands
Removing Key Commands

PROCEDURE
2. In the Commands list, click the plus sign to open a category folder, and select the function
for which you want to remove a key command.
3. Select the key command in the Keys list and click Delete selected key command.
4. Click Remove to remove the selected key command.
5. Click OK.
Saving Key Commands Presets

You can save key commands settings as presets.
PREREQUISITE
You have set up the key commands to your liking.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Presets section, click Save.
2. Enter a name for the preset and click OK.
RESULT
Your key commands settings are now available as a preset on the Presets pop-up menu.
Loading Key Command Presets

You can load key commands presets.
PROCEDURE
● In the Presets section, open the pop-up menu and select the preset.
RESULT
The key command preset replaces the current key command settings and macros.
Resetting Key Commands

PROCEDURE
● In the Commands list, select the key command that you want to restore and click
Reset.
● Click Reset All.
732
Key Commands
Default Key Commands
RESULT
The key commands are reset.
IMPORTANT
Any changes made to the default key commands are lost. If you want to be able to revert to these
settings again, make sure to save them first.

The default key commands are arranged in categories.
NOTE
When the On-Screen Keyboard is displayed, the usual key commands are blocked because they
are reserved for the On-Screen Keyboard. The only exceptions are: Ctrl/Cmd-S (Save), Num *
(Start/Stop Record), Space (Start/Stop Playback), Num 1 (Jump to Left Locator), Delete or
Backspace (Delete), Num / (Cycle on/off), F2 (Show/Hide Transport panel), and Alt/Opt-K (Show/
Hide On-Screen Keyboard).
Add Track Category
Option Key command
Add Track T
Audio Category
Option Key command
Adjust Fades to Range A
Crossfade X
Automation Category
Option Key command
Read Automation for All Tracks On/Off Alt/Opt-R
Write Automation for All Tracks On/Off Alt/Opt-W
733
Key Commands
Chords Category
Option Key command
Show/Hide Chord Pads Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-C
Devices (Studio) Category

Option Key command
Audio Connections F4
Audio Performance F12
MixConsole F3
MixConsole in Project Window Alt/Opt-F3
On-Screen Keyboard Alt/Opt-K
Alt/OptVideo Player Alt/Opt-F3
VST Instruments Alt/Opt-K
Direct Offline Processing Category

Option Key command
Direct Offline Processing F7
Edit Category
Option Key command
Activate/Deactivate Focused Object Alt/Opt-A
Auto-Scroll On/Off F
Copy Ctrl/Cmd-C
Cut Ctrl/Cmd-X
Cut Time Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-X
Delete Delete or Backspace
Delete Time Shift-Backspace
734
Key Commands
Option Key command
Duplicate Ctrl/Cmd-D
Expand/Reduce Alt/Opt-E
Insert Silence Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-E
Invert Alt/Opt-F
Invert Selection Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-I
Left Selection Side to Cursor E
Move to Cursor Ctrl/Cmd-L
Move to Front (Uncover) U
Mute M
Mute Events Shift-M
Mute/Unmute Objects Alt/Opt-M
Open Ctrl/Cmd-E
Paste Ctrl/Cmd-V
Paste at Origin Alt/Opt-V
Paste Relative to Cursor Shift-V
Paste Time Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-V
Primary Parameter: Decrease Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-Down Arrow
Primary Parameter: Increase Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-Up Arrow
Record Enable R
Redo Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-Z
Repeat Ctrl/Cmd-K
Right Selection Side to Cursor D
Secondary Parameter: Decrease Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-Left Arrow
Secondary Parameter: Increase Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-Right Arrow
735
Key Commands
Option Key command
Select All Ctrl/Cmd-A
Select None Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-A
Snap On/Off J
Solo S
Split At Cursor Alt/Opt-X
Split Range Shift-X
Stationary Cursor Alt/Opt-C
Undo Ctrl/Cmd-Z
Unmute Events Shift-U
Write W
Editors Category
Option Key command
Open Score Editor Ctrl/Cmd-R
Open/Close Editor Return
File Category
Option Key command
Close Ctrl/Cmd-W
New Ctrl/Cmd-N
Open Ctrl/Cmd-O
Quit Ctrl/Cmd-Q
Save Ctrl/Cmd-S
Save As Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-S
Save New Version Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-S
736
Key Commands
Media Category
Option Key command
Open MediaBay F5
Open/Close Favorites Ctrl-Alt/Opt-Num 8
Open/Close File Browser Ctrl-Alt/Opt-Num 4
Open/Close Filters Ctrl-Alt/Opt-Num 5
Open/Close Previewer Ctrl-Alt/Opt-Num 2
Preview Cycle On/Off Shift-Num /
Preview Start Shift-Enter
Preview Stop Shift-Num 0
Search MediaBay Shift-F5
MIDI Category
Option Key command
Show/Hide Controller Lanes Alt/Opt-L
Navigate Category
Option Key command
Add Down: Shift-Down Arrow
Expand/Undo selection in the Project window

to the bottom/Move selected event in the Key
Editor down 1 octave
Add Left: Shift-Left Arrow
Expand/Undo selection in the Project

window/Key Editor to the left
Add Right: Shift-Right Arrow
Expand/Undo selection in the Project

window/Key Editor to the right
737
Key Commands
Option Key command
Add Up: Shift-Up Arrow
Expand/Undo selection in the Project window

to the top/Move selected event in the Key
Editor up one octave
Bottom: End
Select bottom track in the track list
Down: Down Arrow
Select next in the Project window/Move

selected event in the Key Editor one semitone
down
Left: Left Arrow
Select previous in the Project window/Key

Editor
Right: Right Arrow
Select next in the Project window/Key Editor
Toggle Selection Ctrl/Cmd-Space
Top: Home
Select top track in the track list
Up: Up Arrow
Select next in the Project window/ Move

selected event in the Key Editor one semitone
up
Nudge Category
Option Key command
End Left Alt/Opt-Shift-Left Arrow
End Right Alt/Opt-Shift-Right Arrow
Left Ctrl/Cmd-Left Arrow
Right Ctrl/Cmd-Right Arrow
Start Left Alt/Opt-Left Arrow
Start Right Alt/Opt-Right Arrow
738
Key Commands
Project Category
Option Key command
Colors Alt/Opt-Shift-S
Open Markers Ctrl/Cmd-M
Open Pool Ctrl/Cmd-P
Open Tempo Track Ctrl/Cmd-T
Remove Selected Tracks Shift-Delete
Set Track/Event Color Alt/Opt-Shift-C
Setup Shift-S
Quantize Category
Option Key command
Quantize Q
Set Insert Length Category

Option Key command
1/1 Alt/Opt-1
1/2 Alt/Opt-2
1/4 Alt/Opt-3
1/8 Alt/Opt-4
1/16 Alt/Opt-5
1/32 Alt/Opt-6
1/64 Alt/Opt-7
1/128 Alt/Opt-8
Toggle Dotted Alt/Opt-.
Toggle Triplet Alt/Opt-,
739
Key Commands
Tool Category
Option Key command
Draw Tool 8
Drumstick Tool 0
Erase Tool 5
Glue Tool 4
Mute Tool 7
Next Tool F10
Object Selection Tool 1
Play Tool 9
Previous Tool F9
Range Selection Tool 2
Split Tool 3
Zoom Tool 6
Transport Category
Option Key command
Activate External Sync Alt/Opt-Shift-T
Activate Metronome C
Activate Punch In I
Activate Punch Out O
Cycle Num /
Enter Left Locator Shift-L
Enter Locator Range Duration Shift-D
Enter Project Cursor Position Shift-P
Enter Right Locator Shift-R
740
Key Commands
Option Key command
Enter Tempo Shift-T
Enter Time Signature Shift-C
Exchange Time Formats .
Fast Forward Shift-Num +
Fast Rewind Shift-Num -
Forward Num +
Go to Left Locator Num 1
Go to Project Start Num . or Num , or Num ;
Go to Right Locator Num 2
Insert Marker (Windows only) Insert
Locate Next Event N
Locate Next Hitpoint Alt/Opt-N
Locate Next Marker Shift-N
Locate Previous Event B
Locate Previous Hitpoint Alt/Opt
-B
Locate Previous Marker Shift-B
Locate Selection Start L
Locators to Selection P
Loop Selection Alt/Opt-P
MIDI Retrospective Record: Insert from All Shift- Num --*

MIDI Inputs
Nudge Cursor Left Ctrl/Cmd- Num -
Nudge Cursor Right Ctrl/Cmd- Num +
Panel (Transport panel) F2
741
Key Commands
Option Key command
Play Selection Range Alt/Opt-Space
Recall Cycle Marker 1 to 9 Shift-Num 1 to Num 9
Record Num *
Rewind Num -
Set Left Locator to Project Cursor Position Ctrl/Cmd-Num 1
Set Marker 1 Ctrl/Cmd-1
Set Marker 2 Ctrl/Cmd-2
Set Marker 3 to 9 Ctrl/Cmd-Num 3 to Num 9 or Ctrl/Cmd-3 to 9
Set Right Locator to Project Cursor Position Ctrl/Cmd-Num 2
Start Enter
Start/Stop Space
Stop Num 0
To Marker 1 Shift-1
To Marker 2 Shift-2
To Marker 3 to 9 Num 3 to Num 9 or Shift-3 to 9
Window Zones Category

Option Key command
Show/Hide Left Zone Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-L; Alt/Opt-I
Show/Hide Right Zone Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-R
Show/Hide Upper Zone Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-U
Show/Hide Lower Zone Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-E or Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-B
Show/Hide Transport Bar Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-T
Show Previous Tab Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Left Arrow
Show Next Tab Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Right Arrow
742
Key Commands
Setting up Tool Modifier Keys
Option Key command
Show Previous Page Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Up Arrow or Page Up
Show Next Page Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Down Arrow or

Page Down
Show/Hide Info Line Ctrl/Cmd-I
Show/Hide Overview Alt/Opt-O
Zoom Category
Option Key command
Zoom Full Shift-F
Zoom In H
Zoom In On Waveform Vertically Alt/Opt-H
Zoom In Tracks Ctrl/Cmd-Down Arrow
Zoom In Vertically Shift-H
Zoom Out G
Zoom Out Of Waveform Vertically Alt/Opt-G
Zoom Out Tracks Ctrl/Cmd-Up Arrow
Zoom Out Vertically Shift-G
Zoom to Event Shift-E
Zoom to Selection Alt/Opt-S
Zoom Tracks Exclusive Z

You can set up tool modifier keys that allow you to get an alternative function when using a tool.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Preferences dialog, select Editing > Tool Modifiers.
743
Key Commands
2. Select an option in the Categories list, and locate the action for which you want to edit the
modifier key.
3. In the Action list, select the action.
4. Hold down the desired modifier keys and click Assign.
NOTE
If the modifier keys you pressed are already assigned to another tool, you will be asked
whether you want to overwrite them. If you do, this leaves the other tool without any
modifier keys assigned.
5. Click OK.
RESULT
The modifier keys for the action are replaced.
744
Customizing
In Cubase you can set up the appearance of specific elements.
RELATED LINKS
Setup Options
You can customize the appearance of the following elements:
● Transport panel
● Status line
● Info line
● Toolbars
● Inspector
Setup Context Menus

Setup context menus are available for the Transport panel, the toolbars, the info lines, or the
Inspector.
● To open the setup context menus, right-click the corresponding element.

● NOTE
You can also click the corresponding setup buttons to open the context menu.
The following general options are available on the setup context menus:
● Show All makes all items visible.

● Reset All resets the interface to the default setting.
● Setup opens the setup dialog.
If presets are available, they can be selected on the lower half of the menu.
745
Customizing
Setup Options
The info line setup context menu
Setup Dialog
The setup dialog allows you to specify which elements are visible/hidden and in what order they
are shown. You can save and recall setup presets.
● To open a setup dialog, right-click the element that you want to set up, and select Setup.
Hidden Items
Lists the elements that are hidden.
Visible Items
Lists the elements that are visible.
Add
Select an item in the list of Hidden Items, and click Add to make it visible.
Remove
Select an item in the list of Visible Items, and click Remove to hide it.
746
Customizing
Windows Dialog
Move Up
Select an item in the list of Visible Items, and click Move Up to reorder the items.
Move Down
Select an item in the list of Visible Items, and click Move Down to reorder the items.
Store
Allows you to name the current configuration and save it as a preset.
Delete
Remove a selected preset.
Reset All
Reverts to the default configuration.
Windows Dialog
The Windows dialog allows you to manage open windows in Cubase.
● To open the Windows dialog, select Window > Windows.
The dialog lists all open dialogs, windows, and editors. The following options are available:
OK
Closes the dialog.
Mode
Allows you to select a mode that affects the function.
● Selected
Affects the selected window only.
● Cascaded
Affects also the associated windows, such as the editors of a project window,
for example.
● All
Affects all windows.
Activate
Activates the selected window.
Minimize
Minimizes the selected or all windows.
747
Customizing
Where are the Settings Stored?
Restore
Restores the selected or all windows.
Close Windows
Closes the selected or all windows.
Reset Layout
Resets the layout of the selected window.
Where are the Settings Stored?

There is a large number of ways in which you can customize Cubase. While some of the settings
you make are stored with each project, others are stored in separate preference files.
If you need to transfer your projects to another computer in another studio, for example, you
can bring all your settings along by copying the desired preference files and installing them on
the other computer.
NOTE
It is a good idea to make a backup copy of your preference files once you have set things up the
way you want! This way, if another Cubase user wants to use his or her personal settings when
working on your computer, you can restore your own preferences afterwards.
● On Windows, preference files are stored in the following location: “\Users\<user name>
\AppData\Roaming\Steinberg\<program name>\”.
On the Start menu, you will find a shortcut to this folder for easy access.
● On macOS, preference files are stored in the following location: “/Library/
Preferences/<program name>/” under your home directory.
The full path is: “/Users/<user name>/Library/Preferences/<program name>/”.
NOTE
The RAMpresets.xml file, which contains various presets settings, is saved when exiting the
program.
NOTE
Program functions, such as crossfade, or configurations, such as panels, not used in the project
will not be stored.
Updating from a Previous Version of Cubase

When you are updating from Cubase 6 or higher, most of the customized settings of your
previous installation are used for the new Cubase version.
When your previous Cubase version is older than Cubase 6, its settings are discarded, and the
default settings of the new version of Cubase are used.
Safe Mode Dialog

The Safe Mode dialog contains troubleshooting options.
● To open the Safe Mode dialog, launch Cubase, and hold down Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-Alt/Opt.
748
Customizing
Safe Mode Dialog
The following options are available in the Plug-Ins section:
Deactivate all third-party plug-ins

Temporarily disables all third-party plug-ins. After startup, only Steinberg plug-ins
are available.
The following options are available in the Preferences section:
Use current program preferences

Opens the program with the current preference settings.
Disable program preferences

Disables the current preferences and opens the program with the factory default
settings instead.
Delete program preferences

Deletes the preferences and opens the program with the factory default settings
instead. This process cannot be undone. This affects all versions of Cubase installed
on your computer.
RELATED LINKS
Disabling Third-Party Plug-ins on page 750
Disabling the Preferences on page 749
Disabling the Preferences

Sometimes you might experience odd program behavior that can be due to inconsistent
preferences settings. In such a case, you should save your project and relaunch Cubase. You can
disable or delete the current preferences settings, and load the factory defaults instead.
PROCEDURE
1. Quit Cubase.
2. Launch Cubase, and hold down Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Shift.
3. In the Preferences section of the Safe Start Mode dialog, activate one of the
troubleshooting options.
● Use current program preferences
Opens the program with the current preference settings.
● Disable program preferences
Disables the current preferences, and opens the program with the factory default
settings instead.
749
Customizing
Safe Mode Dialog
● Delete program preferences

Deletes the preferences and opens the program with the factory default settings
instead. This process cannot be undone. Note that this affects all versions of Cubase
installed on your computer.
4. Click OK.

If the program works fine with disabled preferences, consider deleting and re-initializing the
preferences.
RELATED LINKS
Safe Mode Dialog on page 748
Preferences on page 755
Disabling Third-Party Plug-ins

If Cubase does not start or if a project does not load, chances are, that this is due to a third-party
plug-in. In such a case, you can disable third-party plug-ins on startup to identify, if the plug-in is
the reason.
PROCEDURE
1. Quit Cubase.
2. Launch Cubase, and hold down Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Shift.
3. In the Plug-Ins section of the Safe Start Mode dialog, activate Deactivate all third-party
plug-ins.
4. Click OK.
RESULT
Only Steinberg plug-ins are available after startup, and third-party plug-ins are temporarily
disabled.
RELATED LINKS
Safe Mode Dialog on page 748
750
Optimizing Audio
Performance
To get the most out of your Cubase system, performance-wise, you can optimize specific
settings.
NOTE
For details and current information on system requirements and hardware properties refer to
the Steinberg web site.
Performance Aspects
Tracks and Effects
The faster your computer, the more tracks, effects, and EQs you are able to play. Exactly what
constitutes a fast computer is almost a science in itself, but some hints are given below.
Short Response Times (Latency)

One aspect of performance is response time. The term “latency” refers to the buffering, that is,
the temporary storing of small chunks of audio data during various steps of the recording and
playback process on a computer. The larger those chunks, and the more there are, the higher
the latency.
High latency is most irritating when playing VST instruments and when monitoring through the
computer, that is, when listening to a live audio source via the Cubase MixConsole and effects.
However, very long latency times (several hundred milliseconds) can also affect other processes
like mixing, for example, when the effect of a fader movement is heard only after a noticeable
delay.
While Direct Monitoring and other techniques reduce the problems associated with very long
latency times, a system that responds fast will always be more convenient to work with.
● Depending on your audio hardware, it may be possible to trim your latency times, usually
by lowering the size and the number of buffers.
● For details, refer to the audio hardware documentation.
Audio Hardware and Driver

The hardware and its driver can have some effect on regular performance. A badly written driver
can reduce the performance of your computer. But where the hardware driver design makes the
most difference is with latency.
NOTE
We recommend that you use audio hardware for which there is a specific ASIO driver.
This is especially true when using Cubase for Windows:
751
Optimizing Audio Performance
Settings That Affect Performance
● Under Windows, ASIO drivers written specifically for the hardware are more efficient than
the Generic Low Latency ASIO Driver and produce shorter latency times.
● Under macOS, audio hardware with properly written macOS (Core Audio) drivers can be
very efficient and produce very low latency times.
However, there are additional features only available with ASIO drivers, such as the ASIO
Positioning Protocol.
Settings That Affect Performance
Audio Buffer Settings

Audio buffers affect how audio is sent to and from the audio hardware. The size of the audio
buffers affects both the latency and the audio performance.
Generally, the smaller the buffer size, the lower the latency. On the other hand, working with
small buffers can be demanding for the computer. If the audio buffers are too small, you may
get clicks, pops or other audio playback problems.
Adjusting the Buffer Size

To lower the latency, you can reduce the buffer size.
PROCEDURE
● Windows: Adjust the buffer size in the dialog that opens.
● macOS: Adjust the buffer size in the CoreAudio Device Settings dialog.
Multi Processing
Multi processing distributes the processing load evenly to all available CPUs, allowing Cubase to
make full use of the combined power of the multiple processors.
Multi processing is activated by default. You can find the setting in the Studio Setup dialog
(Audio System page).
Audio Performance Window

This window shows the audio processing load and the hard disk transfer rate. This allows you to
verify that you do not run into performance problems when adding effects or plug-ins, for
example.
● To open the Audio Performance window, select Studio > Audio Performance.
752
ASIO-Guard
Average load
Shows how much of the available CPU power is used for audio processing.
Real-time peak
Shows the processing load in the real time path of the audio engine. The higher this
value, the higher the risk that dropouts occur.
Overload indicator
The overload indicator to the right of the real-time peak indicator and the average
load indicator displays overloads of the average or real-time indicator.
If it lights up, decrease the number of EQ modules, active effects, and audio channels
that play back simultaneously. You can also activate the ASIO-Guard.
Disk
Shows the hard disk transfer load.
Disk overload indicator

The overload indicator to the right of the disk indicator lights up if the hard disk does
not supply data fast enough.
If it lights up, use Disable Track to reduce the number of tracks playing back. If this
does not help, you need a faster hard disk.
NOTE
You can show a simple view of the performance meter on the Transport panel and on the
Project window toolbar. These meters only feature the average and the disk indicator.
ASIO-Guard
The ASIO-Guard allows you to shift as much processing as possible from the ASIO real time path
to the ASIO-Guard processing path. This results in a more stable system.
The ASIO-Guard allows you to preprocess all channels as well as VST instruments that do not
need to be calculated in real time. This leads to fewer dropouts, the ability to process more tracks
or plug-ins, and the ability to use smaller buffer sizes.
ASIO-Guard Latency
High ASIO-Guard levels lead to an increased ASIO-Guard latency. When you adjust a volume
fader, for example, you will hear the parameter changes with a slight delay. The ASIO-Guard
latency, in contrast to the latency of the audio hardware, is independent from live input.
Restrictions
The ASIO-Guard cannot be used for:
● Real time-dependent signals

● External effects and instruments
NOTE
If you select Studio > VST Plug-in Manager and click Show VST Plug-in Information, you can
deactivate the ASIO-Guard option for selected plug-ins.
If you activate the monitoring for an input channel, a MIDI instrument, or a VST instrument
channel, the audio channel and all dependent channels are automatically switched from ASIO-
Guard to real time processing and vice versa. This results in a gentle fade out and fade in of the
audio channel.
753
ASIO-Guard
RELATED LINKS
VST 2 Plug-in Path Settings on page 496
Activating the ASIO-Guard

PROCEDURE
3. Activate the Activate ASIO-Guard option.
NOTE
This option is only available if you activate Activate Multi Processing.
4. Select an ASIO-Guard Level.

The higher the level, the higher the processing stability and audio processing
performance. However, higher levels also lead to an increased ASIO-Guard latency and
memory usage.
754
Preferences
The Preferences dialog provides options and settings that control the global behavior of the
program.
Preferences Dialog
The Preferences dialog is divided into a navigation list and a settings page. Clicking one of the
entries in the navigation list opens a settings page.
● To open the Preferences dialog, select Edit > Preferences.
In addition to the settings, the dialog provides the following options:
Preference Presets
Allows you to select a saved preference preset.
Store
Allows you to save the current preferences as a preset.
Rename
Allows you to rename a preset.
Delete
Allows you to delete a preset.
755
Preferences
Preferences Dialog
Store marked preferences only

Allows you to select which pages are included in the preset.
Defaults
Resets the options on the active page to their default settings.
Apply
Applies any changes that you have made without closing the dialog.
OK
Applies any changes that you have made and closes the dialog.
Cancel
Closes the dialog without saving any changes.
Saving Preference Presets

You can save complete or partial preference settings as presets.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Preferences dialog, make your changes.
2. Click Store in the lower left section of the dialog.
3. Enter a preset name and click OK.
RESULT
Your settings are now available on the Preference Presets pop-up menu.
Saving Partial Preference Settings

You can save partial preference settings. This is useful when you have made settings that only
relate to a certain project or situation, for example. When you apply a saved partial preference
preset, you only change the saved settings. All other preferences are left unchanged.
PROCEDURE
1. In the Preferences dialog, make your changes.
2. Activate Store marked preferences only.
In the preferences list, the Store column is shown.
3. Click in the Store column of the preference pages that you want to save.
4. Click Store in the lower left section of the dialog.
5. Enter a preset name and click OK.
RESULT
Your settings are now available from the Preference Presets pop-up menu.
756
Preferences
Editing
Editing
‘Edit Solo’/’Record in MIDI Editors’ Follow Focus
Suspends Record in Editor and Solo Editor in the MIDI editor if the Project window
gets the focus.
Display Warning before Deleting Non-Empty Tracks

Shows a warning if you delete tracks that are not empty.
Select Track on Background Click

Allows you to select a track by clicking in the event display background.
Auto Select Events under Cursor

Automatically selects all events in the Project window or in an editor that are under
the project cursor.
Cycle Follows Range Selection

Sets the left locator to the range start position and the right locator to the range end
position of a range selection.
Delete Overlaps
Deletes overlapped, that is, hidden, sections of overlapping events. Hold Shift while
moving events to override this setting.
Parts Get Track Names

Automatically changes event names to the name of the track they are moved to.
Quick Zoom
Only redraws the contents of parts and events once you have stopped changing the
zoom. This is useful if screen redraws are slow on your system.
Use Up/Down Navigation Commands for Selecting Tracks only

Uses the Up Arrow/Down Arrow keys for track selection, not for event/part
selection.
Track Selection Follows Event Selection

Automatically selects the corresponding track if you select an event in the Project
window.
Automation Reduction Level

Allows you to remove all superfluous automation events. A reduction level value of
0% removes repeated automation points only. A reduction level value between 1 to
100 % smoothens the automation curve. The default value of 50 % should reduce the
automation data amount significantly without touching the sound result of the
existing automation.
Show Automation Track in Project on Writing Parameter

Reveals the automation track on writing automation parameters. This is useful if you
want to have a visual control of all parameters changed on writing.
Automation Follows Events

Lets automation events automatically follow when you move, duplicate, copy, or
paste an event or part on the track. This facilitates setting up automation that is
related to a specific event or part, instead of a specific position in the project.
Drag Delay
Allows you to set up a delay in ms that is used when you move events. This is useful
to avoid accidentally moving events when you click on them in the Project window.
757
Preferences
Editing
Editing - Audio
Treat Muted Audio Events like Deleted
Allows you to play the hidden event of 2 overlapping audio events when you mute
the top event.
Use Mouse Wheel for Event Volume and Fades

Allows you to use the mouse wheel to move event volume and fades.
● Moving the mouse wheel moves the event volume curve up or down.
● Holding down Shift while moving the mouse wheel moves the fade curves.
● Positioning the mouse in the left half of the event moves the end point of the
fade in.
● Positioning the mouse in the right half of the event moves the start point of
the fade out.
On Import Audio Files

Determines what happens when you import an audio file.
● Open Options Dialog
Opens a dialog where you can select whether you want to copy the file to the
audio folder and/or convert it to the project settings.
● Use Settings
Uses the default settings for importing audio.
Remove Regions/Hitpoints on all Offline Processes

Removes regions/hitpoints of audio ranges when you perform offline processing.
On Processing Shared Clips

Determines what happens when you apply processing to a shared clip that is used by
more than one event in the project.
● Open Options Dialog
Opens the Options dialog that allows you to select whether you want to create
a new version of the clip or apply the processing to the existing clip.
● Create New Version
Creates a new editing version of the clip, and applies the processing to that
version leaving the original clip unaffected.
● Process Existing Clip
Applies the processing to the existing clip. All events playing that clip are
affected.
Enable Automatic Hitpoint Detection

Enables the automatic hitpoint detection for imported or newly recorded audio files.
Default Warping Algorithm

Sets the warp algorithm for new audio clips in the project.
Editing - Chords
‘X’ Chords Mute Notes on Tracks That are in Follow Chord Track Mode
Mutes playback when you play back a track that follows the chord track and the
cursor reaches an undefined chord event (X chord).
Disable ‘Acoustic Feedback’ during Playback

Disables Acoustic Feedback during playback. This ensures that chord events are not
triggered twice.
758
Preferences
Editing
Hide Muted Notes in Editors

Hides notes that get muted due to their MIDI track following the chord track.
Editing - Controls
Value Box/Time Control Mode
Allows you to select your preferred way of controlling value fields.
● Text Input on Left-Click
Clicking opens a value box for editing.
● Increment/Decrement on Left/Right-Click
Clicking decreases the value, right-clicking increases the value. Double-clicking
allows you to enter values manually.
● Increment/Decrement on Left-Click and Drag
Clicking and dragging up or down adjusts the value. Double-clicking allows
you to enter values manually.
Knob Mode
Allows you to select your preferred way of controlling knobs.
● Circular
Clicking and dragging in a circular motion changes the setting. Clicking
anywhere along the encoder’s edge immediately changes the setting.
● Relative Circular
Clicking anywhere on an encoder and dragging changes the current setting.
There is no need to click on the exact current position.
● Linear
Clicking on an encoder and dragging up or down, or left or right changes the
setting.
Slider Mode
Allows you to select your preferred way of controlling value sliders.
● Jump
Clicking anywhere on a slider instantly moves the slider handle to that
position.
● Touch
Clicking and dragging the actual slider handle adjusts the setting.
● Ramp
Clicking and dragging a slider causes the handle to move smoothly to the new
position.
● Relative
Clicking and dragging up or down changes the setting according to how far
you drag, not according to where you click.
Editing - MIDI
Select Controllers in Note Range: Use Extended Note Context
Takes into account the extended note context when you move notes together with
their controllers. This means that controllers between the last selected note and the
following note or the end of the part are also moved.
759
Preferences
Editing
Legato Overlap
Allows you to set an overlap for the Legato function. Legato allows you to extend
MIDI notes so that they reach the next notes.
An overlap setting of 0 ticks causes each selected note to extend so that it reaches
the next note exactly. A positive value causes the notes to overlap by the specified
number of ticks. A negative value causes a slight gap between the notes.
Legato Mode: Between Selected Notes Only

Adjusts the length of selected notes so that they reach the next selected note.
Split MIDI Events

Splits MIDI events when you split a MIDI part in the Project window, and the split
position intersects the MIDI events. This also creates new notes at the beginning of
the second part.
Split MIDI Controllers

Splits MIDI controllers when you split a MIDI part in the Project window, and the
part contains a controller. If the controller value at the split position is not zero, a
new controller event of the same type and value is inserted at the split position at the
start of the second part.
NOTE
If you just split a part and play back the result, it will sound the same regardless of
this setting. However, if you split a part and delete the first half or move the second
half to a different position in the project, you may want to activate Split MIDI
Controllers to make sure all controllers have the correct value at the beginning of
the second part.
Editing - Project & MixConsole

Select Channel/Track on Solo
Selects channels/tracks when you click their Solo button.
Select Channel/Track on Edit Settings

Selects channels/tracks when you click their Edit Channel Settings button.
Scroll to Selected Track

Scrolls the track list when you select a MixConsole channel and the respective track
is out of view.
Enable Record on Selected MIDI Track

Record-enables MIDI tracks when you select them.
Enable Record on Selected Audio Track

Record-enables audio tracks when you select them.
Enable Solo on Selected Track

Solos tracks when you select them.
Enlarge Selected Track

Enlarges a track when you select it. If you select a different track, this track is
enlarged, and the previously selected track is displayed in its original size.
760
Preferences
Editors
Editing - Tool Modifiers

On this page, you can specify which modifier keys are used for additional functionality when
using tools.
PROCEDURE
1. Select an option in the Categories list.
2. Select the action for which you want to edit the modifier keys in the Action list.
3. On your computer keyboard, hold down the modifier keys and click Assign.
RESULT
The current modifier keys for the action are replaced. If this tool already has assigned modifier
keys, you are prompted to replace them.
Editing - Tools
Show Toolbox on Right Click
Opens a toolbox when you right-click in the event display and editors. To open the
context menu instead of the toolbox, press any modifier key when right-clicking.
Cross-Hair Cursor
Allows you to set up the colors for the line and the mask of the cross-hair cursor, as
well as its width.
Zoom Tool Standard Mode: Horizontal Zooming Only

Zooms the window horizontally without changing the track height when you zoom
with the Zoom tool.
Select Tool: Show Extra Info

Displays the current pointer position and the name of the track and event at which
you are pointing when you use the Object Selection tool in the Project window
event display.
Show Notification when Switching Tool Mode with Key Command

Shows a notification when you switch the tool mode by using a key command.
Editors
Use Drum Editor when Drum Map is assigned
Shows drum note symbols in parts on MIDI tracks to which drum maps are assigned.
The parts automatically open in the Drum Editor on double-click. This overwrites the
Default MIDI Editor setting.
Default MIDI Editor

Determines which editor is opened when you double-click a MIDI part or when you
select it and press Ctrl/Cmd-E. This setting is overwritten for tracks with drum maps
if Use Drum Editor when Drum Map is assigned is activated.
Editor Content Follows Event Selection

Open editors show the events that are selected in the Project window.
Double-click opens Editor in a Window/in Lower Zone

Determines where an editor is opened when you double-click an audio event or a
MIDI part, or when you use the key command assigned to Open/Close Editor.
761
Preferences
Event Display
Open Editor Commands open Editors in a Window/in Lower Zone

Determines where an editor is opened when you use an open command from the
Audio or MIDI menu or the corresponding key commands.
Event Display
The Event Display section contains several settings for customizing the display in the Project
window.
Show Event Names

Shows the names on parts and events.
Hide Truncated Event Names

Hides event names if they are too long.
Show Overlaps
Determines how overlapping events are displayed.
Grid Overlay Intensity

Sets the overlay intensity of the displayed grid lines.
Event Handling Opacity

Sets the opacity of overlying events when you move them.
Event Opacity
Sets the opacity of the event background.
NOTE
● If you reduce the event opacity, it might be helpful to increase the Waveform
Brightness for audio events or the Note Brightness for MIDI events.
● Reducing the opacity may result in a less responsive user interface.
Smallest Track Height to Show Data

Determines from which track height the track contents are displayed.
Smallest Track Height to Show Name

Determines from which track height the track names are displayed.
RELATED LINKS
Waveform Brightness on page 763
Note Brightness on page 764
Event Display - Audio

Interpolate Audio Waveforms
Interpolates sample values to form curves when you zoom in to one sample per pixel
or less.
Show Event Volume Curves Always

Shows event volume curves, regardless of whether the event is selected.
Show Waveforms
Shows waveforms for audio events.
Show Hitpoints on Selected Events

Shows hitpoints for selected audio events.
762
Preferences
Event Display
Waveform Brightness
Sets the brightness of the waveform.
Waveform Outline Intensity

Sets the intensity of the waveform outline.
Fade Handle Brightness

Sets the brightness of the fade lines for audio events.
Background Color Modulation

Reflects the waveform dynamics in the background of audio waveforms.
Event Display - Chords & Pitches

Pitch Notation
● Note Name
Allows you to select how chord symbols are displayed. You can choose
English, German, or Solfège.
● Naming Format
Allows you to determine how MIDI note names are displayed in editors, etc.
● Display ‘Bb’ as ‘B’
Displays ‘B’ as a pitch name. This is only available if you selected English in the
Note Name pop-up menu.
● Display ‘B’ as ‘H’
Displays ‘H’ as a pitch name. This is only available if you selected English in the
Note Name pop-up menu.
● Enharmonics from Chord Track
Uses the chord events on the chord track to determine if enharmonically
equivalent notes in the Key Editor and in the List Editor are displayed as
sharp or flat.
Chord Font
Allows you to specify a font for all chord symbols.
Chord Symbols
Allows you to select your preferred display method for major 7th chords, minor
chords, half-diminished chords, diminished chords, and augmented chords.
Custom Chord Symbols

Allows you to modify the default chord symbols that are used on the chord track, for
the chord pads, and in the Score Editor.
● New Custom Chord allows you to add a new custom chord symbol.
763
Preferences
Event Display
● The options to the left allow you to specify the chord for which you want to
change the chord symbol.
● Click the Type and Tension column and enter your custom symbol.
NOTE
You must define custom symbols for each set of tensions.
● The Result column shows how the chord will be displayed.

● The Remove Custom Chord button allows you to remove the custom chord
symbol that is selected in the list.
EXAMPLE
To change the appearance of all minor chords from Xmin to X-, click New Custom Chord,
activate 5 and min3/#9 to define the chord type, and change the symbol in the Type column
from min to -.
Event Display - Folders

Show Event Details
Displays event details instead of data blocks.
This setting depends on the Show Data on Folder Tracks setting.
Show Data on Folder Tracks

Determines in which case data blocks or event details are displayed on folder tracks.
● Always Show Data
Displays data blocks or event details always.
● Never Show Data
Displays nothing.
● Hide Data When Expanded
Hides the display of events when you open folder tracks.
Event Display - MIDI

Part Data Mode
Determines if and how events in MIDI parts are shown. This setting is overwritten for
tracks with drum maps if Use Drum Editor when Drum Map is assigned is
activated.
Show Controllers
Shows non-note events such as controllers, etc. in MIDI parts.
Note Brightness
Sets the brightness of note events.
Controller Brightness
Sets the brightness of controller events.
RELATED LINKS
Use Drum Editor when Drum Map is assigned on page 761
764
Preferences
General
Event Display - Tracks

Default Track Name Width
Sets the default name width for all track types.
General
The General page contains general settings that affect the program user interface. Set these
according to your preferred work methods.
Enable HiDPI (Windows only)

Enables the appropriate resolution to render Cubase GUI elements sharp and precise
on high resolution displays with supported scaling factors of 100 %, 125 %, 150 %,
175 %, and 200 %.
NOTE
Other scaling factors, such as 133 %, are not supported.
NOTE
On macOS, you can disable HiDPI support in the Cubase application folder by
invoking Get Info and checking Open in Low Resolution.
Usage Logger Options

If you activate this option, Cubase gathers usage information and writes it in a log
file that you can find in the following location:
● On Windows: “\Users\<user name>\AppData\Local\Steinberg
\usagelogger”
On macOS: “/Users/<user name>/Library/Logs/Steinberg/
usagelogger”
Activating this option to write such a file, and then sending the file to the Steinberg
support team can be useful if Cubase crashes, and the crash dump files do not reveal
enough information.
By default, Enable Usage Logging is deactivated. We recommend that you
deactivate it when you no longer need it.
Language
Allows you to select which language is used in the program. After switching the
language, you must restart the program for the change to take effect.
Auto Save
Automatically saves backup copies of all open projects with unsaved changes. These
are named Name.bak, where name is the name of the project, and are saved in the
project folder. Backup copies of unsaved projects are named #UntitledX.bak,
where X is an incremental number, to allow multiple backup copies in the same
project folder.
Auto Save Interval

Allows you to specify how often a backup copy is created.
Maximum Backup Files

Allows you to specify how many backup files are created. When the maximum
number of backup files is reached, the existing files is overwritten starting with the
oldest file.
765
Preferences
MIDI
Show Tips
Displays an explanatory tooltip when you position the mouse pointer over an icon or
button in Cubase.
Maximum Undo Steps

Allows you to specify the number of undo steps.
Run Setup on Create New Project

Opens the Project Setup dialog every time you create a new project.
Use Hub
Opens the Hub when you start Cubase or create a new project using the File menu.
RELATED LINKS
VST Instrument Context Menu on page 482
General - Personalization
Default Author Name
Allows you to specify an author name that is used by default for new projects. This is
included as metadata when exporting audio files with an iXML chunk.
Default Company Name

Allows you to specify a company name that is used by default for new projects. This
is included as metadata when exporting audio files with an iXML chunk.
MIDI
This page contains settings that affect MIDI recording and playback.
MIDI Thru Active

Sets all MIDI tracks that are record-enabled or have monitoring activated to echo
incoming MIDI data, sending it back out on their respective MIDI outputs and
channels. This allows you to hear the correct sound from your MIDI instrument
during recording.
NOTE
If you use MIDI Thru, select Local Off mode on your MIDI instrument to prevent
each note from sounding twice.
Reset on Stop
Sets Cubase to send out MIDI reset messages, including note-off and controller
resets, on stop.
Never Reset Chased Controllers

Never resets controllers to 0 when you stop playback or move to a new position in
the project.
Length Adjustment
Allows you to enter a length adjustment value in ticks by which the notes that have
the same pitch and MIDI channel are adjusted. This ensures that there is always a
short time between the end of one note and the start of another. By default, there
are 120 ticks per 1/16 note, but you can adjust this with the MIDI Display Resolution
setting.
766
Preferences
MIDI
Chase Events
Chases event types for which one of the chase options is activated when you locate
to a new position and start playback. This makes your MIDI instruments sound as
they should when you locate to a new position and start playback.
If Chase not limited to Part Boundaries is activated, MIDI controllers are also
chased outside the part boundaries, and the chase is performed on the part under
the cursor as well as on all the parts to the left of it. Deactivate this for very large
projects, as it slows down processes such as positioning and soloing.
MIDI Display Resolution

Allows you to set the display resolution for viewing and editing MIDI data.
Extend Playback Range of Notes that start before the Part

Extends the playback range of MIDI notes that start before the part in ticks. This is
useful if MIDI events start shortly before the start of the MIDI part. If you do not
extend the playback range, these events are not played. This setting is also taken
into account during cycle playback.
Insert Reset Events after Record

Inserts a reset event at the end of each recorded part. This resets controller data,
such as Sustain, Aftertouch, Pitchbend, Modulation, or Breath Control. This is
useful if you stop recording before the note off command is sent, for example.
MIDI Latency Mode

Allows you to specify the latency of the MIDI playback engine.
Low lowers the latency and increases the responsiveness of the MIDI playback
engine. However, this setting might also decrease your computer performance if
your project contains lots of MIDI data.
Normal is the default mode and the recommended setting for most workflows.
High increases the latency and the playback buffer. Use this if you work with
complex VST instrument libraries or with projects that have a very high performance
level.
MIDI Max. Feedback in ms

Allows you to set the maximum length of the notes when using Acoustic Feedback
in MIDI editors.
MIDI - MIDI File

Export Options
These options allow you to specify what data is included in exported MIDI files.
Export Inspector Patch

Includes MIDI patch settings in the Inspector as MIDI bank select and program
change events in the MIDI file.
Export Inspector Volume/Pan

Includes volume and pan settings in the Inspector as MIDI volume and pan events
in the MIDI file.
Export Automation
Includes automation as MIDI controller events in the MIDI file.
Export Inserts
Includes MIDI modifiers and MIDI inserts in the MIDI file.
Includes MIDI modifiers in the MIDI file.
767
Preferences
MIDI
Export Markers
Includes markers as standard MIDI file marker events in the MIDI file.
Export as Type 0
Exports a type 0 MIDI file with all data on a single track, but on different MIDI
channels. If you deactivate this option, a type 1 MIDI file with data on separate tracks
is exported.
Export Resolution
Allows you to set a MIDI resolution between 24 and 960 for the MIDI file. The
resolution is the number of pulses, or ticks, per quarter note (PPQ) and determines
the precision with which you will be able to view and edit the MIDI data. The higher
the resolution, the higher the precision. The resolution should be chosen depending
on the application or sequencer with which the MIDI file will be used, because
certain applications and sequencers may not be able to handle certain resolutions.
Export Locator Range

Exports only the range between the left and right locator.
Export includes Delay

Includes delay settings you have made in the Inspector in the MIDI file.
Import Options
The Import Options for MIDI files allow you to specify what data is included in imported MIDI
files.
Extract First Patch

Converts the first Program Change and Bank Select events for each track to
Inspector settings for the track.
Extract First Volume/Pan

Converts the first MIDI Volume and Pan events for each track to Inspector settings
for the track.
Import Controller as Automation Tracks

Converts MIDI Controller events in the MIDI file to automation data for the MIDI
tracks.
Import to Left Locator

Aligns the imported MIDI file at the position of the left locator.
Import Markers
Imports any markers that have been added.
Import Dropped File as Single Part

Places the file on one track if you drag a MIDI file into the project.
768
Preferences
MediaBay
Ignore Master Track Events on Merge

Ignores tempo track data if you import a MIDI file into the current project. The
imported MIDI file will play according to the current tempo track in the project.
Auto Dissolve Format 0

Automatically dissolves imported MIDI files of type 0. Each embedded MIDI channel
in the file is placed on a separate track in the Project window.
Destination
Allows you to specify what happens when you drag a MIDI file into the project.
● MIDI Tracks creates MIDI tracks for the imported file.
● Instrument Tracks creates instrument tracks for each MIDI channel in the
MIDI file and lets the program automatically load appropriate presets.
● HALion Sonic SE multi-timbral creates several MIDI tracks, each routed to a
separate instance of HALion Sonic SE in the VST Instruments window, and
loads the appropriate presets.
Import Karaoke Lyrics as Text

Converts karaoke lyrics in the MIDI file to text that can be displayed in the Score
Editor. If this option is deactivated, lyrics are only shown in the List Editor.
MIDI - MIDI Filter

This page allows you to prevent certain MIDI messages from being recorded and/or echoed by
the MIDI thru function (thruput).
The page is divided into 4 sections:
Record
Prevents the corresponding type of MIDI message from being recorded. It will,
however, be thruput, and if already recorded, play back normally.
Thru
Prevents the corresponding type of MIDI message from being thruput. It will,
however, be recorded and played back normally.
Channels
Prevents MIDI messages on that MIDI channel from being recorded or thruput.
Already recorded messages are, however, played back normally.
Controller
Prevents certain MIDI controller types from being recorded or thruput.
To filter out a controller type, select it from the list at the top of the section and click
Add. It is shown in the list below.
To remove a controller type from the list (allow it to be recorded and thruput), select
it in the lower list and click Remove.
MediaBay
Maximum Items in Results List
Sets the maximum number of files that are displayed in the Results list.
Show File Extensions in Results List

Displays file name extensions in the Results list.
Scan Folders Only When MediaBay Is Open

Scans for media files when the MediaBay window is open.
769
Preferences
Metering
NOTE
During playback or recording no folder scans are performed.
Scan Unknown File Types

Scans all file types.
Metering
Map Input Bus Metering to Audio Track (in Direct Monitoring)
Maps the input bus metering to monitor-enabled audio tracks, giving you the
opportunity to watch the input levels of your audio tracks when working in the
Project window. For this to work, activate Direct Monitoring in the Studio Setup
dialog.
Note that the tracks are mirroring the input bus signal, that is, you will see the same
signal in both places. When using mapped metering, any functions, such as
trimming, that you apply to the audio track are not reflected in its meters.
Meters’ Peak Hold Time

Allows you to specify for how long the peak levels are held in the meters. For this to
work, deactivate Meters - Hold Forever in the MixConsole.
Meters’ Fallback
Allows you to specify how quickly the meters in the MixConsole return to lower
values after signal peaks.
Metering - Appearance
This page allows you to assign colors to level meter values to quickly identify what levels are
reached.
Add
Adds a color handle to the top of the meter.
Remove
Removes the selected color handle.
RELATED LINKS
Setting up Meter Colors on page 276
Record
This page contains settings related to audio and MIDI recording.
Deactivate Punch In on Stop

Deactivates Punch In on the Transport panel whenever you enter stop mode.
Stop after Automatic Punch Out

Stops playback after automatic Punch Out. If the post-roll value on the Transport
panel is set to a value other than zero, playback will continue for the set time before
stopping.
770
Preferences
Record
Record - Audio
Audio Pre-Record Seconds
Sets for how many seconds any incoming audio you play is captured in buffer
memory during playback or in stop mode.
When Recording Wave Files Larger than 4 GB

Determines what happens if you record wave files that are larger than 4 GB.
● To split the wave file, select Split Files.
Use this if you work on a FAT32 file system that supports only file sizes up to
4 GB.
● To save the wave file as an RF64 file, select Use RF64 Format.
RF64 files use the .wav extension. However, they can only be opened with an
application that supports the RF64 standard.
Create Audio Images during Record

Creates and displays a waveform image during the recording process.
NOTE
This real-time calculation uses some extra processing power.
Record - Audio - Broadcast Wave

This page allows you to specify the Description, Author, and Reference Value text strings that
are embedded in recorded Broadcast Wave files. The settings you make here also appear as
default strings in the Broadcast Wave Chunk dialog when you export files to certain formats.
Not only Broadcast Wave files can contain embedded information, but also Wave, and AIFF files.
Record - MIDI
Record-Enable allows MIDI Thru
Prevents record-enabled MIDI or instrument tracks from echoing incoming MIDI
data. This way record-enabled tracks to which a VST instrument is assigned do not
play doubled notes.
Snap MIDI Parts to Bars

Lengthens recorded MIDI parts so that they start and end at whole bar positions. If
you are working in a context that is based on bars and beats, this can make editing,
such as moving, duplicating, and repeating, easier.
MIDI Record Catch Range in ms

Ensures that the very start of a recording that starts at the left locator is included.
Retrospective Record Buffer Size

You can capture MIDI data that you played in Stop mode or during playback and
turn them into a MIDI part. Retrospective Record Buffer Size determines how much
MIDI data can be captured in the buffer.
ASIO Latency Compensation Active by Default

Determines the initial state of the ASIO Latency Compensation button in the track
list for MIDI or instrument tracks.
If you record live on a VST instrument, you usually compensate the latency of your
audio card by playing too early. In consequence, the timestamps are recorded too
early. By activating this option, all recorded events are moved by the current latency,
and playback sounds like during the recording situation.
771
Preferences
Transport
Add Latency to MIDI-Thru Processing

If you set the audio buffer size to a high value, and you play an arpeggiator in real
time, for example, the MIDI notes are output with an increased latency.
If you consequently adapt your playing to the output latency, the notes are recorded
even later. To minimize this effect, you can activate Add Latency to MIDI-Thru
Processing. This adds a regular latency to each note that is played in real time.
Replace Recording in Editors

Affects the result of recording in a MIDI editor when Replace mode is selected as a
record mode:
● None
Nothing is replaced.
● Controller
Only controller data is replaced, not notes.
● All
Replace mode works as usual. Notes and controllers are replaced when
recording.
Transport
This page contains options related to playback, recording, and positioning.
Playback Toggle Triggers Local Preview

Allows you to use Space on your keyboard to start/stop local playback of the selected
file in the Sample Editor or the Pool.
When the Sample Editor is not open or when there is no audio file selected in the
Pool, Space still toggles the global project playback.
Show Timecode Subframes

Shows subframes for all frame-based display formats.
Return to Start Position on Stop

Automatically sets the project cursor to the position where recording or playback last
started when you stop playback.
Stop Playback while Winding

Stops playback when you click Rewind or Fast Forward on the Transport panel.
Wind Speed Options

These options affect the fast forward/rewind speed.
● Adjust to Zoom adapts the wind speed to the horizontal zoom factor.
If you zoom in very close for detailed editing, you probably do not want to
have a high fast forward/rewind speed. Because of this, the Speed Factor
does not have any effect in this mode. The Fast Wind Factor still applies.
● Fixed keeps a fixed wind speed regardless of the horizontal zoom factor.
● Speed Factor allows you to set the wind speed. You can set a value between 2
and 50. The higher the value, the faster the wind speed will be.
If Adjust to Zoom is activated, this has no effect.
● Fast Wind Factor allows you to set the winding speed to a multiple for fast
winding.
If you press Shift while fast forwarding or rewinding, the wind speed will
increase. The increase in speed is a multiple of the Speed Factor. Meaning
that if you set the Fast Wind Factor to 2, the wind speed will be twice as fast.
772
Preferences
User Interface
If you set it to 4, the wind speed will be 4 times as fast, etc. You can set a value
between 2 and 50.
Cursor Width
Adjusts the width of the project cursor line.
Zoom while Locating in Time Scale

Allows you to zoom in or out by clicking in the ruler and dragging down or up.
Clicking Locator Range in Upper Part of the Ruler Activates Cycle

Allows you to activate/deactivate cycle mode when you click the locator range in the
upper part of the ruler.
Locate when Clicked in Empty Space

Allows you to move the project cursor by clicking in an empty area of the Project
window.
Transport - Scrub
Scrub Volume
Sets the playback volume for the Scrub tool in the Project window and audio editors.
NOTE
This does not affect the scrub volume controlled by any connected hardware.
Use High Quality Scrub Mode

Enables effects for scrubbing and uses a higher resampling quality. However,
scrubbing will be more demanding on the processor.
Use Inserts While Scrubbing

Allows you to activate insert effects for scrubbing with the shuttle speed control. By
default, insert effects are bypassed.
User Interface
This page contains options that allow you to adjust the default user interface colors.
Color Schemes
Allows you to adjust the color scheme for the application and the desktop cover.
● Click one of the colors in the Choose Color Scheme section to apply a pre-
defined color.
● Click the field in the Choose Custom Color section to open the Color Picker
and select a custom color.
Track & MixConsole Channel Colors

Allows you to set the Auto Track/Channel Color Mode, to colorize track controls and
MixConsole channel controls, and to determine the brightness of selected channels.
Track Type Default Colors

Allows you to set the colors for the different track types.
Customizing the User Interface Colors

You can change the color of the Cubase desktop, the track types, the Project window, and the
editor elements.
773
Preferences
User Interface
PROCEDURE
1. In the Preferences dialog, select User Interface > Color Schemes.
● Activate a default color scheme by clicking on it.
● Click Choose Custom Color and in the Color Picker, select a new color.
RESULT
The color scheme is instantly applied.
User Interface - Track & MixConsole Channel Colors

Allows you to set the Auto Track/Channel Color Mode to colorize track controls and channel
faders, and to determine the brightness of selected channels.
Auto Track/Channel Color Mode

Allows you to set an automatic color assignment mode for new tracks or new channels.
Use Track’s Default Color

New tracks get the default event color.
Use Previous Track Color

New tracks get the same color as the track above them in the track list.
Use Previous Track Color +1

This is similar to Use Previous Track Color, except that new tracks get the next color
in the color palette.
Use Last Applied Color

New tracks get the color that you last applied to an event/part.
Use Random Track Color

New tracks get random track colors.
Colorize Tracks and MixConsole Channels

Applies the track/channel color to track/channel controls.
Tracks
Enables the application of the track color to the track controls.
Folder Tracks
Enables the application of the folder track color to the track controls.
MixConsole Channels
Enables the application of the MixConsole channel color to the channel controls.
Color Strength
Allows you to adjust the intensity of the color.
Selected Channel Brightness

Allows you to adjust the brightness of the selected MixConsole channel.
Show Color for Selected Channel

Colorizes the selected channel and gives it more color strength instead of displaying
it in gray.
774
Preferences
VST
VST
This page contains settings for the VST audio engine.
Warn if realtime mixdown is required in order to include external plug-in

Shows a warning if a realtime mixdown is required.
Connect Sends Automatically for Each Newly Created Channel

Automatically connects the send routing for existing FX channels when you create a
new audio or group channel.
Instruments use Automation Read All and Write All

If you activate this, the Read and Write automation status in control panels for VST
instruments is affected by Activate/Deactivate Read for All Tracks and Activate/
Deactivate Write for All Tracks.
Mute Pre-Send when Mute

Mutes pre-fader sends when you mute their channels.
Default Send Level

Allows you to specify a default level for your send effects.
Group Channels: Mute Sources as well

Mutes channels that are directly routed to a group channel when you mute the
group channel. Channels that were muted prior to the group channel being muted
will not remember their mute status and will be unmuted when the group channel is
unmuted.
NOTE
This does not affect how mute automation is written.
Delay Compensation Threshold (for Recording)

Minimizes the latency effects of the delay compensation while maintaining the sound
of the mix as far as possible. Only plug-ins with a delay higher than this threshold
setting are affected by the Constrain Delay Compensation function. By default, this
is set to 0.0 ms, which means that all plug-ins will be affected. If you feel that a little
latency is acceptable, you can raise this threshold value.
NOTE
Cubase features full delay compensation–any delay inherent in the VST plug-ins you
use will automatically be compensated for during playback. However, when you play
a VST instrument in real time or record live audio (with monitoring through Cubase
activated), this delay compensation may result in added latency.
Do Not Connect Input/Output Busses When Loading External Projects

Prevents connecting input and output busses to the ASIO ports of your system when
loading external projects.
Auto Monitoring
Determines how Cubase handles monitoring. The following options are available:
● Manual
Turns input monitoring on or off when you click Monitor.
● While Record-Enabled
Connects the audio source to the channel input when you click Record Enable.
● While Record Running
775
Preferences
Video
Switches to input monitoring only during recording.

● Tapemachine Style
Activates input monitoring in stop mode and during recording, but not during
playback.
NOTE
The automatic monitoring options apply when you monitor through Cubase, or
when you use ASIO Direct Monitoring. If you monitor externally (listen to the input
signal from an external mixer, for example), select Manual mode and keep all audio
Monitor buttons turned off in Cubase.
Warn on Processing Overloads

Shows a warning if the CPU overload indicator on the Transport panel lights up
during recording.
VST - Plug-ins
Warn before Removing Modified Effects
Shows a warning if you remove an effect plug-in for which you have made parameter
changes.
Open Effect Editor after Loading It

Opens the effect control panel when you load VST effects or VST instruments.
Create MIDI Track when Loading VSTi

Allows you to determine if a MIDI track is created when you add a rack instrument.
● Always
A MIDI track is always created.
● Do not
No MIDI track is created.
● Always ask to
You are asked whether a corresponding MIDI track should be created.
Synchronize Plug-in Program Selection to Track Selection

Synchronizes track and plug-in program selection if you route multiple MIDI tracks to
multitimbral instruments.
Suspend VST 3 plug-in processing when no audio signals are received

Suspends VST plug-in processing in passages where no audio is passing through the
plug-in. This can improve system performance noticeably.
NOTE
We recommend to leave this option deactivated.
Plug-in Editors “Always on Top”

Always shows the control panels for effect plug-ins and VST instruments on top of
other windows.
Video
Extract Audio on Import Video File
Extracts and saves the audio data of imported video files as a separate audio clip.
776
Preferences
Video
Thumbnail Memory Cache Size

Allows you to set the size of the thumbnail cache.
777
Index
A Attribute Filter
Applying in the MediaBay 458
ACID® loops 383 Context menu search 458
Activate Project 83 MediaBay 458
Activate tempo track 672 Attributes
Adapt to Zoom 58 MediaBay 457
Grid type 63 Audio
ADAT Lightpipe Handling 142
Synchronization 695 Zooming 59
Add Cycle Marker Audio clock
Track Control 92 Synchronization 695
Add Latency to MIDI-Thru Processing 771 Audio Connections 24
Add Marker Editing 28
Track Control 92 Presets 27
Add Track dialog 95 Audio events 141
Audio tracks 96 Auditioning 146
Folder tracks 117 Audio Events
FX channel tracks 112 Inverting phase 157
Group channel tracks 109 Audio files
Instrument tracks 99 Previewing in MediaBay 454
MIDI tracks 105 Audio Files
Ruler tracks 115 Inverting phase 157
Sampler tracks 103 Audio Functions 350
Adding chords 634 Detect Silence 350
AES/SPDIF Digital Audio Spectrum Analyzer 353
Synchronization 695 Statistics 355
AIFF files 689 Audio hardware
Algorithms Connections 13
Limitations 349 Externally clocked 18
Time-stretching 348 Audio Part Editor
All MIDI Inputs 21 Lower zone 50
Appearance Audio parts
Colors 773 Auditioning 146
Metering 770 Creating 145
Archive Audio performance
Prepare 86 Optimizing 751
Arranger track Audio Pre-Record Seconds 771
Flattening 246, 248 Audio processing
Inspector 119 Pool 430
Track controls 121 Audio Processing
ASIO Direct Monitoring 20, 198 Direct Offline Processing 337
ASIO Latency Compensation Audio Recording 201
Track Control 92 Pre-Record Time 202
ASIO Latency Compensation Active by Default 771 Preparations 200
ASIO-Guard 753 RAM Requirements 200
Aspect ratio Record File Format 199
Video Player window 718 Record Folder 199
Assigning chords to Chord Pads 655 Record Modes 201
Assigning chords with the Chord Editor 655 Recovering 203
Recovering recordings 202
778
Index
Audio Recording (continued) Automation Reduction Level 757

Undo 202 Automation tracks 474
With Effects 201 Assigning parameters 474
Audio regions 143 Hiding 474
Audio System 14 Muting 475
Audio tracks 96 Removing 474
Add Track dialog 96 Showing 474
Inspector 98
Audition chords 637
Auditioning
B
Audio events 146 Back up Project 86
Audio parts 146 Background Color Modulation 762
Using key commands 426 Bank assignments 528
Auto fades Beat Calculator 676, 677
Global settings 242 Bézier curves
Track settings 242 Automation 470
Auto Monitoring Continuous controllers 566
Manual 775 Bounce Selection 142
Tapemachine Style 775 Broadcast Wave files 688
Auto Save 85, 765 Broadcast Wave Files
Auto Save Internal 765 Embedded information 771
Auto Select Controllers 570 Buffer
Auto Select Events under Cursor 757 Settings 752
Auto Track/Channel Color Mode 774 Busses
Auto-Scroll 182, 183 Adding 26
Crossfades 238 Removing 28
Suspend 183 Bypass EQs
Automatable parameters Track Control 92
Controlling with Quick Controls 503 Bypass Inserts
Automatic Hitpoint Detection Track Control 92
Enabling 758 Bypass Sends
Automatic scales 638 Track Control 92
Automatic voicings 640
Automatically generating new audio clips
Pool 432 C
Automation 466
Channel
Bézier curves 470
Track Control 92
Data 567
Channel Configuration
Quick scaling 473
Track Control 92
Ramp curves 466
Channel latencies
Read 467
MixConsole 295
Recording actions 466
Channel racks 270, 279
Smooth transitions 470
EQ 284
Static value line 467
Filters 282
Step curves 466
Gain 282
Write 466, 467
Inserts 283
Automation data
Phase 282
Editing 470
Pre 281
Removing 474
Routing 280
Selecting 471
Sends 293
Automation Event Editor
Strips 287
Compress Left 471
Channel settings 295
Compress Right 471
Channel Faders 307
Move Vertically 471
Channel Inserts 299
Scale Around Absolute Center 471
Channel Sends 306
Scale Around Relative Center 471
Channel Strip 299–303
Scale Vertically 471
Copying 279
Stretch 471
Equalizer 305
Tilt Left 471
Channel Settings
Tilt Right 471
Toolbar 297
Automation Follows Events 757
Channel strip rack 287
Automation parameter
Compressor 287
Track Control 92
EQ position 287
779
Index
Channel strip rack (continued) Chord track (continued)

Gate 287 Inspector 121
Limiter 287 Live input 645
Presets 293 Track controls 122
Saturation 287 Chord voicing
Transformer 287 Changing 594
Channel types Chords
MixConsole 269 Changing pitch 593
Channels Changing voicing 594
Color 130 Editing 595
Linking 271 Inserting 596
Chase Events 190, 766 Click Sounds
Chord Assistant 635, 653 Custom Sounds 189
Assigning chords 655 Clip editing
Circle of Fifths 653, 654 Pool 426
Chord Editor 633 Clips
Assigning chords 655 Renaming 420
MIDI Input 635 Color
Chord events 633 Auto Track/Channel Color Mode 130
Adding 634 Color Picker 72
Adding chords 634 Color Set 70
Auditioning 637 Colorize Track Controls 774
Chord type 633 Colorizing
Converting to MIDI 643 Events 67
Editing 634 Note events 544
Extracting from MIDI 648 Select Color for Selected Tracks or Events 66, 67
Resolving Display Conflicts 637 Single Tracks 67
Tension 633 Tracks 66
Voicings 640 Colors
Chord Font 763 MixConsole Channels 294
Chord Pad Controls 652 Preferences 773
Chord Pads 650, 652, 653 Tracks 67, 69
Adaptive voicing 662 User Interface 773
Assigning chords 655–657 Colors Setup Dialog
Context menu 652 Events 545
Controls 653 Project 69
Copying Assignments 657 Compress Left
Creating chord events 670 Automation Event Editor 471
Creating MIDI parts 670 Compress Right
Functions menu 653 Automation Event Editor 471
Multiple tracks 664 Compressor
Pad Remote Control 666 Strip module 287
Pads remote range 668 Connect Sends automatically for each newly created
Pattern player 663 Channel 775
Player Modes 661–663 Connecting
Player Setup 661 Audio 13
Players 662 MIDI 20
Playing back 658 Constrain Delay Compensation 487
Presets 669 Continuous controllers
Recording chords 660 Adding in controller display 565
Saving presets 669 Controller display 556
Setting up 653 Controller lane 565
Swapping Assignments 657 Ramp/Step 566
Voicings 662 Smooth transitions 566
Zone 653 Control link 271
Chord Pads Setup Controller Brightness 764
Pad layout 668 Controller curves
Remote Control 665 Smart controls for scaling 569
Chord Pads Zone 650 Controller Data
Chord symbols 763 Thinning Out 541
Chord track 121, 632 Controller display 550
Assign Pads 657 Adding events 559, 565
Controlling MIDI or audio playback 645 Continuous controllers 556
780
Index
Controller display (continued) Delete Notes

Editing events with Line tool 567 Dialog 548
Moving events 570 Delete Overlaps 757
Controller Event Editor 569 Deleting
Controller lane Continuous Controllers 541
Adding 555 Controllers 540
Continuous controllers 565 Doubles 540
Presets 558 MIDI controllers 540
Removing 555 Deleting Overlaps
Selecting event types 556 Poly (MIDI) 539
Setting up as preset 558 Poly (Mono) 539
Controller lanes 553 Designating a new pool record folder
Setup 552 Pool 429
Controller Selection and Functions 553 Detect Silence
Controllers Audio Functions 350
Selecting 570 Device ports
Showing 764 Selecting for busses 26
Convert to Real Copy 156 Direct Offline Processing 337
Converting chord events to MIDI 643 Applying 340
Create Audio Images during Record 771 Applying to multiple events 340
Create Chord Symbols 648 Deleting 341
Create MIDI track when loading VSTi 776 Envelope 342
Cross-hair cursor 64, 761 Extend Process Range 341
Crossfades Fade In 342
Auto Zoom 238 Fade Out 342
Auto-Scroll 238 Gain 343
Creating 237 Invert Phase 343
Editing in dialog 238 Key Commands 347
Equal Gain 238 Modifying 341
Equal Power 238 Normalize 344
Presets 238 Pool 430
Simple Crossfade Editor 238 Remove DC Offset 344
Symmetric Fades 238 Resample 344
Cursor Width 772 Resetting 341
Custom Chord Symbols 763 Reverse 345
Customizing Silence 345
Colors 72 Stereo Flip 345
Info line 745 Time Stretch 345
Inspector 745 Toolbar 339
Meter Colors 276 Window 338
Toolbars 745 Workflow 338
Transport panel 745 Disable Acoustic Feedback during Playback 758
User Interface Colors 773 Display format
Cycle Ruler 40
Track Control 92 Dithering
Cycle Follows Range Selection 757 Applying 326
Cycle markers 252 Effects 326
Editing with tools 253 Divider
Using 253 Project window toolbar 38
Zooming 61, 253 Drag Delay 757
Cycle recording 195 Draw tool
Drawing note events 590
Drum Editor 612
D Info line 621
Data on Folder Tracks Lower zone 50
Showing 764 Note display 622
DC Offset Status line 620
Removing 344 Toolbar 615
Default MIDI Editor 761 Drum Map
Delay compensation Track Control 92
Constraining 487
Threshold for Recording 775
781
Index
Drum maps 627, 630 EQ

Key Editor 597 Channel racks 284
Selecting 624 Presets 286
Setting up 628, 629 EQ position
Drum notes Strip module 287
Deleting 626 Equal Gain
Drum sounds 623 Crossfades 238
Changing the Note Length 626 Equal Power
Setup 623 Crossfades 238
Visibility 624 Equalizer settings 305
Drum Sounds Event Details
Settings 629 Showing 764
Drum Visibility Agents 615 Event display 39
Duplicating Folder tracks 135
Events 155 Modifying on folder tracks 135
Event Handling Opacity 762
Event lengths
E Changing with Trim tool 593
Edit Channel Settings Event name
Track Control 92 Showing 762
Edit History dialog 65 Event Opacity 762
Edit Instrument Event Volume Curves
Track Control 92 Showing 762
Editing Events 141
Project window info line 42 Copying and Pasting 154
Editor Content Follows Event Selection 761 Creating new files from events 142
Effect parameters Displaying on folder tracks 135
Track Quick Controls 501 Duplicating 155
Effect Plug-in Presets Editing 146
Loading in MediaBay 461 Gluing 154
Effects 309 Move to 150
Comparing settings 329 Moving 149
Context menu 328 Moving via info line 150
Control panel 326 Moving with Nudge 149
Direct Offline Processing 337 Moving with Object Selection 149
Dithering 326 Muting 158
Functions menu 328 Normal resizing 151
Insert effects 309, 311 Pasting 154
Plug-in delay compensation 311 Removing 148
Pre/Post fader sends 320 Renaming 150
Presets 330 Repeating 155
Presets browser 330 Resizing 151
Routing 319 Resizing with Object Selection 151, 152
Saving presets 332 Resizing with Scrub 153
Selecting presets 331 Resizing with Trim 152
Send effects 309, 317 Sizing Applies Time Stretch 152
Side-chain inputs 321 Sizing Moves Contents 151
Side-chain routing 324 Sliding the contents 157
System component information 335, 336 Splitting 153
Tempo sync 311 Splitting repeatedly 154
Track presets 334 Export Audio Mixdown 680, 687
VST 3 310 AIFF files 689
Enable Record on Selected Audio Track 760 Broadcast Wave files 688
Enable Record on Selected MIDI Track 760 File Formats 687
Enable Solo on Selected Track 760 Flac files 691
Enharmonic shift 610 MP3 files 690
Enlarge Selected Track 132, 760 Ogg Vorbis files 691
Envelope Wave files 688
Direct Offline Processing 342 Export Video 720
Envelope editor Export Video dialog 720
Sampler Control 405 Exporting
MIDI files 127
Video files 722
782
Index
External monitoring 197 Freeze

Extract Audio on Import Video File 776 VST instruments 486
Extracting Freeze Channel
Audio from video 218, 723 Track Control 92
MIDI Automation 541 Freeze MIDI Modifiers 526
Extracting chord events from MIDI 648 FX chain presets 283
FX Chain Presets
Loading in MediaBay 461
F FX channel tracks 112
Fade Handle Brightness 762 Add Track dialog 112
Fade In Adding 318
Direct Offline Processing 342 Inspector 113
Fade In dialog 235 FX Plug-in Presets
Fade Out Loading in MediaBay 461
Direct Offline Processing 342
Fade Out dialog 235 G
Fader section (MixConsole) 273
Fades Gain
Auto fades 240 Direct Offline Processing 343
Editing in dialog 235 Gate
Presets 235 Strip module 287
With Range Selection tool 234 Generic Remote 511
Favorites Global track controls 39
Adding 442, 448 Gluing
Media rack 441 Events 154
File Browser Grid Overlay Intensity 762
Media rack 441 Grid type
File Extensions Project window 63
Showing in Results list 769 Groove quantizing 227
Fill Loop 157 Group channel tracks 109
Fixed lengths 538 Add Track dialog 109
Fixed tempo Inspector 110
Mode 671 Group channels
Fixed Tempo Adding insert effects 313
Mode 675 Adding to selected channels 313
Setting up 675 Routing 281
Fixed velocity 538 Group Channels - Mute Sources as well 775
Flac files 691
FLAC files
Importing 216
H
Flattening Hardware controls
Arranger track 246, 248 Activating pick-up mode 504
Folder parts 145 Hardware setup
Folder tracks 116 Control panel 14
Add Track dialog 117 Hermode tuning 524
Displaying events 135 Hide muted Notes in Editors 758
Inspector 118 Hide Truncated Event Names 762
Modifying event display 135 High Quality Scrub Mode 773
Track controls 118 History
Follow Chord Track 646 Edit History 65
Auto 646 Project window 32
Chords 646 Hitpoints 373
Directly 647 Showing 762
Scale events 647 HMT Type
Single Voice 646 Hermode tuning 525
Synchronizing Track Data 647 Horizontal zoom
Using 645 Sample Editor 366
Frame count 694 Hub 74
Frame rates Deactivating 76
Mismatch 716 Using 765
Synchronization 694
Video 716
783
Index
I Instrument tracks 99
Add Track dialog 99
I-notes (Input notes) 630 Inspector 101
Importing Instruments use Automation Read All and Write All
Audio files 215 775
Audio from video files 218 Interpolate Audio Waveforms 762
Compressed audio files 215 Invert Phase
FLAC files 216 Direct Offline Processing 343
MIDI files 127, 220 Info line 157
MP3 files 216 MixConsole 282
MPEG files 216
Ogg Vorbis files 216
REX files 219 K
Video files 715 Key commands 729
WMA files 216 Default 733
Independent track loop Dialog 729
Audio Part Editor 391 Loading 732
Independent Track Loop Modifying 731
MIDI 550 Removing 732
Info line Resetting 732
Project window 42 Saving 732
Score Editor 604 Searching for 731
Input busses Key Editor 570
Adding 26 Fold keyboard 583
Removing 28 Info line 578
Renaming 25 Inspector 579
Routing 280 Lower zone 50
Input gain Note display 581
MixConsole 282 Piano keyboard display 582
Input levels 13 Pitch Visibility 584
Input ports 19 Scales 580
Inputs Status line 578
Meter position options 276 Toolbar 572
Insert effects 309, 311 Visible Pitches 583
Adding to busses 312 Keyboard focus
Adding to group channels 313 Activating for a zone 57
Routing 312 Zones 57
Insert MIDI Retrospective Recording in Editor 210 Keyboard navigation
Insert presets MixConsole 307
Copying 333 Knob Mode 759
Pasting 333
Saving 333
Insert Reset Events after Record 766 L
Inserts
Lanes
FX chain presets 283
Audio Part Editor 390
MixConsole 283
Language (Preferences) 765
Using while scrubbing 773
Latency
Inspector 43
MixConsole 295
Editor 45
Optimizing 751
Sections 89
VST System Link 705
Track Inspector 44
Left locator
Inspector Sections
Setting 181
Showing/Hiding 46
Left Locator 180
Instrument
Left zone 43
Track Control 92
Inspector 43
Instrument Freeze 486
MixConsole 264
Instrument parameters
Legato 537
Track Quick Controls 501
Legato Mode - Between Selected Notes Only 759
Instrument presets
Legato Overlap 759
Applying 137
Length Adjustment 766
Instrument Presets
Level meters (MixConsole) 277
Loading in MediaBay 460
Limiter
Results 484
Strip module 287
784
Index
Line tool 591 Media rack

Drawing note events 591 Adding Favorites 442
Editing controller display events 567 Adding VST plug-in pictures 443
Link groups 271 Favorites 435, 441
Q-Link 272 File Browser 436, 441
Live input Home 433
Chord track 645 Results 435
Loading Multi-Track Presets 139 Right zone 54, 56
Locate Right Zone 433, 435
Track Control 92 Track Presets 442
Locate When Clicked in Empty Space 772 VST Effects 439, 441
Locator Range Duration 181 VST Instruments 438, 441
Locators 180 MediaBay 433
Setting ranges 181 Adding Favorites 448
Lock Record 211 Attribute Filter 458
Looping Attributes 457
Audio Part Editor 391 File Browser 447
Loops and Samples Filters 457, 458
Loading in MediaBay 459 Finding file locations 450
Loudness Hiding sections 447
Statistics 355 Instrument Presets 484
Lower zone 47 Media Type Filter 450
Chord Pads 48 Media Types 451
Editor 50 Previewer 453
MixConsole 49 Rating filter 452
Sampler Control 49 Refresh Views 448
Selecting a MIDI editor 51 Reset Filter 459
Setting up 47 Results 449, 450, 453
Scanning 447
Select Media Type 450
M Settings 464
macOS Show in Explorer/Reveal in Finder 450
Port activation 26 Showing sections 447
Port selection 26 Shuffle Results 450
Main mix Text search 452, 453
Setting up 26 Toolbar 445
Managing media files Using Media Files 459
Pool 415 Volume databases 462, 464
Map Input Bus Metering to Audio Track 770 Window 444
Marker lines 252 MediaBay results
Marker track 123, 257 Managing media files 450
Inspector 123 Resetting 453
Track controls 124 Setting up 449
Marker window 253 Shuffling 450
Functions 254 Merge MIDI in Loop 534, 535
Marker list 254 Metadata
Markers 252 Author Name 766
Attributes 255 Company Name 766
Cycle markers 252 Meter Colors 276
Exporting 258 Meter peak options 276
Exporting via MIDI 259 Hold forever 276
IDs 256 Hold peaks 276
Importing 258 Meter position options 276
Importing via MIDI 258 Input 276
Position markers 252 Post-Fader 276
Settings 255 Post-Panner 276
Max. Record Time Display 211 Meters
Maximizer Settings 276
Details view 303 Meters’ Fallback 770
Edit Module 303 Meters’ Peak Hold Time 770
Maximum Backup Files 765 Metronome 185, 187, 188
Maximum Items in Results List 769 Setup window 185
Maximum Undo Steps 765
785
Index
Metronome Setup 185 MIDI Recording (continued)

Click Sounds 188 MIDI Input setting 204
General 187 Naming MIDI ports 204
MIDI Notes 206
Delete notes 548 Preparations 203
MIDI channels Program Change Messages 207
Separating for drum map sounds 630 Record mode 207
MIDI clock Recovering 209, 210
Synchronization 695 Recovering in Editor 210
MIDI Controllers Recovering recordings 208
Pitchbend 560 Reset 207
MIDI devices Sound selection 205
Defining new for patch selection 532 System Exclusive Messages 207
Device Manager 528 MIDI recordings
Editing patches 532 Exporting to MIDI file 631
Installing 531 MIDI Retrospective Recording 208
Selecting patches 531 MIDI Thru Active 766
MIDI Display Resolution 766 Monitoring 198
MIDI editors MIDI track delay
Cutting and pasting 544 MIDI track parameters 521
MIDI events 144 MIDI track parameters 521
MIDI Export Options 767 MIDI tracks 105
MIDI files 127, 220 Add Track dialog 105
Previewing in MediaBay 454 Freezing MIDI Modifiers 526
MIDI Filter 769 Inspector 107
MIDI Import Options 767, 768 MIDI Velocity
MIDI Input Editing 539
Chord Editor 635 MIDI volume
MIDI Inputs MIDI track parameters 521
Setting up 204 Mirror
MIDI interface MIDI 542
Connecting 20 Missing ports
MIDI Latency Mode 766 Re-routing 84
MIDI Loops MixConsole 260
Previewing in MediaBay 455 Channel linking 271
MIDI Max. Feedback in ms 766 Channel racks 270
MIDI Merge Options 535 Channel types 269
MIDI modifiers 521 EQ presets 286
Hermode tuning 524, 525 Fader section 273
Random variations 523 FX chain presets 283
Range 524 Left zone 264
MIDI note numbers 629 Left Zone 264
MIDI notes Level meters 277
Transpose (function) 533 Lower zone 49
MIDI pan Mute 275
MIDI track parameters 521 Notepads 294
MIDI part data Opening 260
Automation 567 Panning 274
MIDI parts Pre rack 281
Creating 145 Racks 279
Handling several 550 Setting volume 275
Independent Track Loop 550 Solo 275
Processing 543 Solo Defeat 275
MIDI Port Setup 204 Strip presets 293
MIDI ports Toolbar 265
Setting up 20 Visibility 264
MIDI Record Catch Range in ms 771 MixConsole in Project Window 49
MIDI Record Mode 207 Mixing down to audio files 687
MIDI Recording Modifier keys 743
Channel and Output 204 Monitor
Continuous messages 206 Track Control 92
Different types of messages 206
Instruments and channels 203
786
Index
Monitoring 20, 197 Note events (continued)

ASIO Direct Monitoring 198 Repeating 549
External 197 Resizing 592
MIDI 198 Selecting 546
Via Cubase 197 Setting values 608
Mouse Wheel for Event Volume and Fades 758 Setting velocity values 549
Move Vertically Setting with Snap 549
Automation Event Editor 471 Splitting 593, 610
Moving Transposing 592
Events 149 Trimming 548
Moving tracks 129 Note lengths
MP3 files 690 Changing 610
Importing 216 Note stems
MPEG files Flipping the direction 610
Importing 216 Note values
Multi processing 752 Setting 608
Musical Mode 383 Notepads
Musical Scales MixConsole 294
Finding 586, 587
Key Editor 580
Live Input 588
O
Quantize Pitches 588 O-notes (Output notes) 630
Setup 638 Object Selection tool
Snap Pitch Editing 589 Inserting note events 589
Mute Ogg Vorbis files 691
MixConsole 275 Importing 216
Track Control 92 On Import Audio Files 758
Mute Automation On Processing Shared Clips 758
Track Control 92 On-Screen Keyboard 191
Mute Pre-Send when Mute 775 Computer keyboard 192
Muting events 158 Modulation 192
Note velocity level 192
N Octave offset 192
Options 192
Name Piano keyboard 192
Track Control 92 Pitchbend 192
Naming schemes Recording MIDI 191
Export Audio Mixdown 684, 686 Open Effect Editor after Loading it 776
Navigating Open/Close Sampler
MixConsole 307 Track Control 92
Never Reset Chased Controllers 766 Organizing files in subfolders
Normalize Pool 430
Direct Offline Processing 344 Output
Maximum peak level 344 Track Control 92
Note Brightness 764 Output busses
Note display Adding 26
Drum Editor 622 Default 26
Enharmonic Shift 610 Removing 28
Key Editor 581 Renaming 25
Note events Routing 281
Colorizing 544 Output ports 19
Creating in Score Editor 608 Overlapping Audio 135
Deleting 547, 590 Overlaps
Drawing with Draw tool 590 Showing 762
Drawing with Line tool 591 Overview line
Duplicating 549, 610 Project window 42
Editing 548
Editing via MIDI 597
Excluding from playback 547
P
Gluing 593, 610 Panning
Inserting 589 Bypass 275
Moving 592 MixConsole 274
Muting 547 Part Data Mode 764
787
Index
Parts 141, 145 Pool (continued)

Editing 146 Resolve missing files dialog 425
Folder 145 Sampler tracks 415
Sliding the contents 157 Toolbar 418
Parts Get Track Names 757 Position markers 252
Paste at Origin 154 Post fader sends 320
Paste Relative to Cursor 154 Post-roll
Patch Banks 528 Transport panel 184
Pattern Pre fader sends 320
Chord Pads 661 Pre-Record time
Pedals Audio recording 202
To note length 539 Pre-roll
Performance Transport panel 184
Aspects 751 Preferences
Audio performance 752 Colors 773
Optimizing 751 Dialog 755
Phase Disabling 749, 750
MixConsole 282 Saving presets 756
Piano keyboard display Store marked preferences only 756
Key Editor 582 Presets
Piano voicings 640 Previewing in MediaBay 456, 457
Pick-up Mode 504 Previewing using a MIDI file 456
Pitch Previewing using the Memo Recorder 457
Changing for chords 593 Previewing via MIDI Input 456
Pitch Notation 763 Previewing via the Computer Keyboard 457
Pitch Visibility Presets browser
Key Editor 583 Effects 330
Options 584 Primary Time Format
Pitchbend Selecting 183
Controller lanes 560 Programs
Plain Chords Track Control 92
Chord Pads 661 Project Assistant 76
Playback Project Colors Setup
Disable Acoustic Feedback 758 Color Set 70
Excluding note events 547 Options 71
Playback Toggle triggers Local Preview 347, 772 Presets 71
Player Modes Project Colors Setup Dialog 69–71
Pattern 663 Project Setup Dialog 80
Plain Chords 662 Project Synchronization Setup 696
Plug-in delay compensation 311 Destinations 700
Plug-in Editors Always on Top 776 Sources 698
Plug-in latency Project window
MixConsole 295 Event display 39
Plug-in processing Global track controls 39
Suspending 310 History 32
Poly Pressure events Info line 42
Adding 564 Inspector 43
Editing 564 Keyboard focus 57
Polyphony Left zone 43
Restricting 541 Lower zone 47–50
Pool Overview 30
Applying different processing methods 420 Overview line 42
Audio processing 430 Project zone 31
Automatically generating new audio clips 432 Right zone 52
Clip editing 426 Ruler 40
Designating a new pool record folder 429 Showing/Hiding Zones 31
Key commands 426 Snap 61
Managing large sound databases 424 Snap to zero crossing 62
Managing media files 415 Status line 41
Organizing files in subfolders 430 Toolbar 32
Reducing the project size 430 Toolbox 38
Reference file 415 Track list 38
Renaming clips and regions 420 Transport Bar 42, 173
788
Index
Project window (continued) Ramp/Step

Transport pop-up window 178 Continuous controllers 566
Zoom presets 60 Range Editing 159
Zoom submenu 59 Range Selection tool 159
Zooming 58 Creating fades 234
Project zone 31 Re-Record
Event display 39 Activating 196
Global track controls 39 Common Record Modes 196
Ruler 40 Read automation 467
Toolbar 32 Read Automation
Track list 38 Track Control 92
Projects Recent projects 84
Activating 83 Record Enable
Back up 86 Track Control 92
Creating new 74, 76 Record File Format
Hub 74 Audio 199
Location 85 Record Folder
Missing ports 84 Audio 199
Opening 83 Record-Enable allows MIDI Thru 771
Opening recent 84 Recording 193
Prepare archive 86 Common Record Modes 196
Project Assistant 76 Cycle 195
Project files 77 Levels 13
Revert 85 Lock Record 211
Saving 84 Remaining Record Time 211
Saving templates 79 Stopping 195
Setting up 80 Stopping automatically 195
Template files 77 With Effects 201
Templates 77 Recovering recordings
Punch In 185 Audio 202
On Stop 770 MIDI 208
Punch In/Out ReCycle files 219
Common Record Modes 196 Reducing the project size
Punch Out 185, 195 Pool 430
Stop after automatic 770 Reference file
Punch Points 185 Pool 415
Refresh Views
MediaBay 448
Q Regions
Q-Link 272 Creating with Detect Silence 353
QC Learn Mode Event or Range as Region 143
Track Quick Controls 501 Events from Regions 144
Quantize Panel 225 Renaming 420
Quantizing to a grid 227 Remote control 506
Quantizing to a groove 229 Assigning commands 510
Quantize value 608 Automation 509
Quantizing 222 Connections 506
Catch Range 227 Control Assignment 513
Original position 229 Generic Remote 511
Pre-Quantize 229 Global Options 509
Swing 227 MIDI Port Setup 506
Tuplets 227 MIDI remote control configuration 511
Using groove presets 227 Remote Control Editor 515
Quick Zoom 757 Resetting 508
Setting up 507
Remote Control Editor 515
R Control settings 517
Layout 519
Rack settings 271
Parameter assignment 519
Copying 279
Toolbar 517
Racks
Remote Controllers
MixConsole 279
Connecting Track Quick Controls 504
RAM
Connecting VST Quick Controls 490
Recording 200
789
Index
Remove DC Offset S
Remove Regions/Hitpoints on all Offline Processes 758 Safe Mode
Removing Dialog 748
Events 148 Sample editing
Silence 353 Sampler Control 409
Renaming Sample Editor 357, 365, 366
Clips 420 Info line 363
Events 150 Inspector 364
Regions 420 Lower zone 50
Tracks 129 Overview Line 363
Repeat Events 155 Regions 369
Repeat Loop 537 Ruler 365
Replace Recording in Editors 771 Showing multiple waveforms 365
Resample Snap 371
Direct Offline Processing 344 Toolbar 359
Reset on Stop 766 Undo zoom operations 366
Resizing events 151 Sample rate
Resolve Display Conflicts Externally clocked 18
Track Control 92 Sampler Control 395
Retrospective MIDI Recording 210 Adjusting the sample gain 412
Empty Buffer 211 Amp section 404
Insert from All MIDI Inputs 209 AudioWarp mode 400
Retrospective Record 771 Envelope editor 405
Retrospective Record Buffer 208 Filter section 403
Retrospective Recording Keyboard section 408
Buffer 208 Lower zone 49
MIDI 208 Normalizing samples 412
Return to Start Position on Stop 772 Pitch section 403
Reverse Playback and sound parameters 400
Audio 345 Playback quality 400
Direct Offline Processing 345 Playback section 400
MIDI 542 Playing back samples 411
ReWire 724 Root Key 410
Activating channels 726 Sample editing 409
Channels 727 Slice mode 400
Enabling applications 724 Slicing 413
Routing MIDI 727 Toolbar 395
Setup 724 Transferring samples to VST instruments 413
REX files 219 Waveform display 399
Right locator Sampler tracks 102
Setting 181 Add Track dialog 103
Right Locator 180 Creating 394
Right zone 52 Inspector 104
Media rack 54, 56, 433, 436, 438, 439 Loading Audio Samples 393
VSTi rack 53 Loading MIDI Parts 394
Root Key Pool 415
Sampler Control 410 Sampler Control 393
Routing Transferring Samples to Instruments 413
Group channels 281 Saturation
Input busses 280 Strip module 287
Insert effects 312 Save as Template 79
MixConsole 280 Save partial preferences settings 756
Output busses 281 Save Track Preset 137, 139
Ruler Scale Around Absolute Center
Display format 40 Automation Event Editor 471
Project window 40 Scale Around Relative Center
Timeline 543 Automation Event Editor 471
Ruler track 115 Scale Assistant
Track controls 116 Key Editor 580
Ruler tracks Scale Suggestions 586, 587
Add Track dialog 115
Run Setup on Create New Project 765
790
Index
Scale events 638 Side-chain 321, 324

Adding 638 Ducking delay 322
Auditioning 638 Effect inputs 310
Automatic scales 638 Inserts rack 283
Changing 638 Trigger signals 323
Follow Chord Track 647 Side-chain inputs 310
Showing 638 Silence
Scale Vertically Detecting 350
Automation Event Editor 471 Direct Offline Processing 345
Scan Folders only when MediaBay is open 769 Inserting 163
Scan unknown File Types 769 Removing 353
Scanning Simple Crossfade Editor 238
MediaBay 447 Single Voice
Score display 605 Follow Chord Track 646
Score Editor 599 Slices 373
Display 605 Close gaps 378
Info line 604 Delete overlaps 378
Lower zone 50 Slider Mode 759
Staff settings 606 Smallest Track Height To Show Data 762
Status line 604 Smallest Track Height To Show Name 762
Toolbar 600 Snap 61
Score font Sample Editor 371
Setting 611 Snap MIDI Parts to Bars 771
Score text Snap point
Adding 611 Setting 62
Editing 611 Snap Point To Cursor 62
Scores Snap to zero crossing 62
Printing 612 Snap type
Scroll to selected Track 760 Project window 62
Scrub Tool 147 Solo
Scrub Volume 773 MixConsole 275
Scrubbing Track Control 92
Scrub tool 147 Solo Defeat
Secondary Time Format MixConsole 275
Selecting 184 Solo Record in MIDI Editors 771
Select Channel/Track on Edit Settings 760 Spectrum Analyzer 354
Select Channel/Track on Solo 760 Audio Functions 353
Select Controllers in Note Range 570 Comparing level values 355
Select Controllers in Note Range - Use Extended Note Split MIDI Controllers 759
Context 759 Split MIDI Events 759
Select Media Type Splitting
MediaBay 450 Events 153
Select Tool - Show Extra Info 761 Into equal events 154
Select Track for Auditioning 637 Ranges 163
Track Control 92 Standard algorithm 348
Select Track on Background Click 757 Standard Compressor
Selection Ranges Details view 300
Creating 159 Edit Module 300
Editing 160 Start Recording at Cursor
Send effects 309, 317 Common Record Modes 196
Adding FX channel tracks 318 Start Recording at Left Locator
Adding to selected channels 318 Common Record Modes 196
Setting level 321 Static value line
Send Level 775 Automation 467
Sends Stationary Cursors 772
MixConsole 293 Statistics
Setting Event Colors to Track Colors 69 Audio Functions 355
Shared Copies Status line
Convert to Real Copy 156 Project window 41
Creating 156 Score Editor 604
Show Scales 638 Step recording 598
Track Control 92 Stereo Flip
791
Index
Stop playback while winding 772 Time Stretch

Stretch Algorithms 348
Automation Event Editor 471 Direct Offline Processing 345
Strip presets 293 Limitations 349
Strip Presets Timecode
Loading in MediaBay 462 Standards 694
Studio Setup Synchronization 694
Dialog 12 Timecode Subframes
Suspend Auto-Scroll when Editing 183 Showing 772
Suspend VST 3 plug-in processing when no audio Timeline
signals are received 776 Ruler 543
Swing Tips
Quantizing 227 Showing 765
Synchronization 693 Tool modifier keys 743, 761
Audio clock 695 Toolbar
External Sync 701 Pool 418
MIDI clock 695 Project window 32
Setup dialog 696 Score Editor 600
Speed references 695 Toolbar Divider
Timecode 694 Project window 38
Synchronize Plug-in Program Selection to Track Toolbox
Selection 776 Project window 38
Synchronizing Track Data Toolbox on Right-Click 761
Follow Chord Track 647 Track automation data
System component information 335 Automation 567
Exporting 336 Track Color
Resetting 67
Track Controls 92
T Track Controls Settings 90
Tap Tempo 676 Track Height 132
Tapemachine Style Track Inspector
Monitoring 775 Opening 44
Template projects 77 Track list 38
Templates 77 Dividing 38
Renaming 79 Track parameters
Tempo Track Quick Controls 500
Set Definition from Tempo 678 Track Pictures 130
Tempo Editor Browser 131
Toolbar 672 Showing 130
Tempo Events Track presets
Editing 675 Quick Control assignment 502
Tempo modes Track Presets 136
Fixed Tempo 671 Applying 136, 137
Tempo track 671 Audio 136
Tempo track 671 Creating 137
Activate 672 Extracting sounds 138
Editor 671 Instrument 138
Mode 671 Loading 140
Tempo changes 674 Loading in MediaBay 460
Thumbnail Memory Cache Size 776 MIDI 136
Thumbnails 716 Multi-Track 139
Thumbnail cache files 716 Previewing in MediaBay 456
Tilt Left Sampler tracks 139
Automation Event Editor 471 VST Presets 138
Tilt Right Track Quick Controls 499, 520
Automation Event Editor 471 Assigning effect parameters 501
Time display 183 Assigning instrument parameters 501
Time Display Window 179 Assigning parameters 500
Time Format 183 Automatable Parameters 503
Time Signature Events Connecting with Remote Controllers 504
Adding 679 Inspector 500
Setting up 679 Loading presets 502
Parameter assignment 500
792
Index
Track Quick Controls (continued) Type of New Tempo Points 672

QC Learn Mode 501
Removing assignments 502
Saving assignments as presets 502
U
Showing automated assignments 503 Undoing
Track Selection follows Event Selection 757 Edit History 65
Track Versions Maximum undo steps 65
Inspector Section 89 Maximum Undo Steps 765
Tracks 88 Offline processing 341
Add Track dialog 126 Project window 32
Adding 126, 127 Recording audio 202
Audio 96 Zoom operations 366
Chord 121 Use Drum Editor when Drum Map is assigned 761
Color 130 Use Up/Down Navigation Commands for Selecting
Colorizing 67 Tracks only 757
Customizing track controls 90
Deselecting 134
Disabling 134 V
Duplicating 134
Value Box/Time Control Mode 759
Enabling 134
Velocity
Folder 116
MIDI function 540
FX channel 112
Velocity events
Group Channel 109
Adding in controller display 559
Inspector 89
Editing 558
Instrument 99
Vertical zoom
Marker 123
Sample Editor 366
MIDI 105
Video
Moving 129
Codecs 714
Removing 129
Editing 719
Renaming 129
Exporting 722
Ruler 115
Extracting audio from 723
Sampler 102
Formats 713
Selecting 133
Importing 715
Using Track Presets 126
Output devices 714
Video 124
Playback 717
Zooming 132
Scrubbing 719
Transformer
Studio Setup 717
Strip module 287
Thumbnails 716
Transport
Video Player window 718
Overview 173
Aspect ratio 718
Sections 173
Setting window size 718
Transport Bar 173
Video track 124
Transport menu
Inspector 124
Functions 168
Track controls 125
Transport panel 164
Vintage Compressor
Display format 183
Details view 302
Overview 164
Edit Module 302
Post-roll 184
Visibility
Pre-roll 184
MixConsole 264
Sections 164
Voicings 640
Transport pop-up window 178
Automatic voicings 640
Transport Zone
Configuring parameters 640
Project window 42
Library 640
Transpose
Library subset 640
MIDI function 533
Octave offset 640
Treat Muted Audio Events like Deleted 758
Piano 640
Trim tool
Range 640
Changing event lengths 593
Volume
Tube Compressor
MixConsole 275
Details view 301
Volume databases
Edit Module 301
Creating in the MediaBay 462
Tuplets
Mounting in the MediaBay 464
Quantizing 227
793
Index
Volume databases (continued) Waveforms

Removing from the MediaBay 464 Showing 762
Unmounting in the MediaBay 464 When Recording Wave Files larger than 4 GB 771
VST Wind Speed Options 772
Input ports 19 Windows
Output ports 19 Dialog 747
VST 2 310 Windows Media Audio files
VST 3 310 Importing 216
VST 3 Word clock
Suspend plug-in processing 486 Synchronization 695
VST effect selector 316 Working with MIDI data
VST instrument selector 479 Tools and functions for 621
VST instruments Write Automation
Context menu 482 Track Control 92
Control panel 477 Writing automation 467
Freezing 486 Automatically 467, 468
Functions menu 482 Manually 467, 468
Presets 483 Tools 469
Saving presets 484
Setting up 476
VST Plug-in collection
Z
Adding 496 Zones
VST Plug-in control panels Keyboard focus 57
Closing 330, 478 Lower zone 47
Hiding 329, 478 Project zone 31
Showing 329, 478 Right zone 52
VST Plug-in Manager 493 Zoom
Collections 494 Adapt Grid to Zoom 58
Window 494 Audio Contents 59
VST plug-in pictures Cycle Markers 61
Adding 443 Project window 58
VST Plug-ins Track Control 92
Adding collections 496 Zoom history
Blocklist 498 Project window 61
Hiding 497 Zoom presets
Installing 493 Project window 60
Managing 493 Zoom Tool Standard Mode - Horizontal Zooming Only
Reactivating 498 761
Showing 497 Zoom while Locating in Time Scale 772
VST Presets Zooming
Loading 140 To cycle markers 253
Previewing in MediaBay 456 Zooming horizontally 366
VST Quick Controls Zooming tracks 132
Connecting with Remote Controllers 490 Zooming vertically 366
VST System Link 702
Activating 707
Connections 704
Latency 705
Putting computers online 708
Setting up sync 704
VSTi rack
Right zone 53
W
Warn before removing modified effects 776
Warn on Processing Overloads 775
Warping Algorithm 758
Wave files 688
Waveform Brightness 762
Waveform display 365
Sample Editor 365
Waveform Outline Intensity 762
794

Cubase Elements 11 Operation Manual en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cubase Elements 11 Operation Manual en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cubase Elements 11 Operation Manual en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operation Manual

7 New Features 102 Sampler Tracks

185 Metronome Click 348 Time Stretch Algorithms

476 VST Instruments 541 Extracting MIDI Automation

New Features in Version 11.0.0

Sampler Track Improvements

Pitchbend and Controller Editing Improvements

Scale Assistant in the Key Editor

Variable DPI on Windows 10

More New Features

Last but Not Least

Details View for Maximizer Channel Strip Module

Support of Multiple Side-Chain Inputs

Poly Pressure Lane Handling Improvements

Define the Visible Pitches in the Key Editor

Some points to consider:

● The screenshots are taken from Windows.

PDF Documents and Online Documentation

Remote Control Devices

Steinberg Library Manager

After Completing This Task

Studio Setup Dialog

The following options are available:

Simple Stereo Input and Output Setup

Recording Levels and Inputs

Word Clock Connections

Selecting an Audio Driver

Setting up Audio Hardware

4. Set up your audio hardware as recommended by the manufacturer.

Audio System Page

The following options are available:

Release Driver when Application is in Background

In the Advanced Options section, the following options are available:

Activate Multi Processing

Audio Priority (Windows only)

Activate Steinberg Audio Power Scheme

Adjust for Record Latency

In the general section, the following options are available:

ASIO Driver Setup Page

The following options are available:

In the Ports section, the following options are available:

Port System Name

In the general section, the following options are available:

Using External Clock Sources

Using Several Audio Applications Simultaneously

3. Activate Release Driver when Application is in Background.

Audio Hardware Configuration

● Selecting which inputs/outputs are active.

Setting up Input and Output Ports

Audio Bus Setup

The following ways of monitoring are available:

● Externally by listening to the signal before it reaches Cubase.

Turn off all equipment before making any connections.

Showing or Hiding MIDI Ports

Setting up All MIDI Inputs

MIDI Port Setup Page

The following columns are displayed:

Port System Name

In 'All MIDI Inputs'